ΘΟΥΚΥΔΙΔΟΥ HOLDEN ΕΒΔΟΜΗ Eontiott: C. J. CLAY AND SONS, CAMBRIDGE UNIVERSITY PRESS AVE MARIA LANE. WAREHOUSE, ©lasfltfxr: 263, ARGYLE STREET-, %ζϊ&ίζ: F. A. BROCKHAUS. $efo lorfe: MACMILLAN AND CO. aSomfcagt GEORGE BELL AND SONS. ΘΟΥΚΥΔΙΔΟΥ THE SEVENTH ΕΒΔΟΜΗ BOOK OF T H E HISTORY OF THUCYDIDES THE TEXT NEWLY REVISED AND EXPLAINED WITH INTRODUCTION SUMMARIES MAPS AND INDEXES BY T H E R E V . IUBERT ASHTON HOLDEN M.A. LL.D. CAMBRIDGE: LATE FELLOW HON. D.LITT. OF T R I N I T Y COLLEGE DUBLIN CAMBRIDGE SECOND EDITION CAMBRIDGE AT THE UNIVERSITY 1896 PRESS ΤώΝ φύΝ ίοτορικώΝ ττ<\θεοι ΘογκγλίλΗΟ έΝΛρρείΛΝ, KPATICTOC ό τΐ\Ν ΚΛΪ προοώποιο <\εί θΤθΝ τφ Κό^φ θεΛΤ^Ν Airif-HCiN ώ ο π ε ρ ΓΡ*- είλωλοποιι4ο<λα. πρόο ΓΓΟΙΗΟΛΙ ΤΛΥΤΗΝ ΓΌ?Ν Ό <λΜΐλλ£τ<Μ ΤΟΝ ΑΚΡΟΑΤΩΝ Τ£ΙΝ ΚΛΪ τ £ ΓίΓΝΟΛΛεΝΛ π ε ρ ί T O ^ C όρώΝΤλο έ κ π λ Η Κ τ ι κ λ κ&ΐ τ & ρ & κ τ ι κ ά ττ<£θΗ TOTC Λ Ν Λ ρ Γ Ν ώ ο κ ο γ ο ί Ν εΝερρλΟλοθλΐ λιχΝεγοΜεΝοο P L U T A R C H de gloria Atheniensium c. 3. But what are they all (the Latin writers) to the great Athenian ! I do assure you that there is no prose composition in the world, not even the de Corona, which I place so high as the seventh Book of Thucydides. It is the ne phis ultra of human art. LORD MACAULAY, Letter to T. F. Ellis, Calcutta: August 25, 1835. Wenige Ereignisse in der Geschichte sind auf eine so schmerzlich fesselnde Weise erzahlt, wie diese Begebenheiten bei Thukydides. B. G. N I E B U H R Printed and stereotyped at the Cambridge University Press by C. J. Clay and Sons 1891 Second Impression {revised) 1896 PREFACE AN Edition of the Seventh Book of the History of Thucydides was advertised as in preparation some two years ago, to form a volume of the Pitt Press Series, Little or no progress, however, having been made by the Editor, I was honoured with an invitation from the Syndics of the University Press at the close of last Summer to undertake the work thus practically aban­ doned and complete it within a reasonable time. This I engaged to do—not without regret that the task was relinquished by a scholar possessed of such high quali­ fications for it—and whatever leisure has been spared to me from the completion of other Editorial work and revision which I had then in hand, has been spent upon the present publication. There is, unfortunately, no text of Thucydides which can be accepted as the standard one. Critics are still divided in opinion on the comparative value and trust­ worthiness of the existing MSS, none of which are of the first class or to be ranked with the Paris Σ of Demos­ thenes, the Paris A of Plato's Republic, or the Urbinas of Isocrates. They abound in the same kind of inac­ curacies—mis-spellings and wrong grammatical forms, omissions, dislocations and substitutions, and the other usual tricks and blunders of copyists, due to mental confusion of the words they were about to write or to PREFACE IV undue haste in finishing them—to say nothing of their incorporation of marginal glosses, the most fertile, perhaps, of all sources of corruption. The Text of the present Edition is based upon the three oldest MSS—the Laurentian, the Vatican and the Florentine now in the British Museum. The two first of these have been recently collated afresh and, apparently, with great accuracy by Dr C. Hude for his critical edition of Books vi, vn and v m (Copenhagen, 1890). The latter I have had to re-collate myself for the present Edition, for I found after a cursory inspection of the MS that the collation of it upon which Stahl—who is followed by Hude—depended is by no means to be relied on, and that several improved readings which Stahl has blindly introduced into his Text on the sole authority of this MS have no real existence in it The MS which is written in minuscules is almost as legible—at any rate in the seventh Book—as the Florentine edition of Homer; and has no more than the ordinary contractions and abbreviations, so that there can be no difference of opinion as to what its readings are. Stahl in his recension of Poppo's edition has indulged in the use of brackets to mark passages or words suspected of interpolation with somewhat greater freedom than I have ventured upon, notwithstanding the seductive criticisms of my friend Dr Rutherford in the Introduction to his Edition of the ivth Book and elsewhere. Further discoveries of papyri MSS may possibly throw some light on the question, whether the Text of Thucydides has suffered from the interpolation of adscripts to the extent that critics of the Dutch School imagine 1 ; but 1 The Fayoum fragment of Book v m c. 91, 3—c. 92, 6 is too scanty and not sufficiently early to lead to any conclusion. Hude PREFACE ν their contention is that corruptions of this kind affected the texts of the great Attic writers at a very early period. In writing the Commentary on this master-piece of the greatest historian, I have not found much room left for original work; my task has been more or less limited to selection and arrangement. I have had before me the principal Editions, old and new, of which a list is given on pages 291—294. The notes of Arnold and Professor Jowett have been for the most part quoted in extenso. But in most cases where I have laid previous commentators from Duker downwards under contribu­ tion, I have done so without special mention, thinking it has some sensible remarks on this subject in the Preface to, his Edition p . ν : — Q u a m expungendi rationem Batavi invenerunt, inventam alii secuti sunt, ea a sana iudicandi arte prorsus abhorret. Phraque quae nullo aut fere nullo sententiae damno abesse posse videntur, hi glossematum nomine expungunt, quasi vero talia non aliquanto facilius a scriptore ipso quam ab librariis legentibusve addi potuerint, ut quae ad sententiam recte intellegendam nihil admodum pertineant. Exemplum unum, ne in hac re multa verba perdam, instar omnium ponam. Verba 7} irpbrepov apud Thuc. haud raro adverbio μάλλον ita addita inveniuntur, ut de duobus temporibus, jquibus res aliqua, velut metus, spes, sibi discrepet, agatur, neque qui haec locutio nimis copiosa sit video; contra quo modo alicui in sententia planissima talia addere in mentem venerit, vix intellegitur. PIoc saltern, huiusmodi res hodie neminem . . . pro certo diiudicare posse, per suasum habeo. Adde quod sermo Thucydideus per totum opus tmus et idem non est; aliter in aliis rebus loquitur. In orationibus maximey sed quadam ex parte etiam in disputationibus generis paulo elatioris sententiis ita concisis utitur, vix tit aliquid sententia integra rese~ carl possit; rursus in simplici rerum gestarum narratione ut ab Herodotea dicendi prolixitate vehementer abhorret, ita orationis qua' dam copia rebus perspicuitatem addere non gravatur. Ego quidem in talibus rebus indicio scriptoris suum ipsius oppo7iere niiineri recension%s inconveniens esse duco, VI PREFACE an unprofitable and irksome task to trace each note to its original source; I desire, therefore, once for all to make a general acknowledgement of the debt which I owe to my predecessors in this field. My principal object throughout has been to awaken and stimulate the interest of the reader, whatever he may be—Sixth-form Boy, Collegian or private Student—, in the matter and language of the Book, not merely to give him just enough information to be reproduced without any exercise of his own judgment and intelligence, in order to pass a satisfactory examination2. In the critical Appendix the variants of six principal MSS are given together with the readings of Kruger, Stahl, Classen and Hude, where they differ from my own. As to conjectural emendations, I have made mention of those worth recording in the notes; those few only are incorporated in the text, whose intrinsic probability is such as to constitute almost certainty. 2 Unfortunately the study of Greek in this country is too often con­ nected with such unworthy ends, and the recent outspoken language of the veteran statesman and scholar, Mr Gladstone, to the boys of Eton College deserves to be put on record as a timely protest against the fashionable depreciation of its usefulness as a mental gymnastic:— * I say with confidence, that my conviction and experience of life * leads me to the belief that if the purpose of education be to fit the 'human mind for the efficient performance of the greatest functions, 'the ancient culture and, above all, Greek culture, is by far the best, 'the highest, the most lasting and the most elastic instrument that * can possibly be applied to it.' Η. Α. Η . ATHENAEUM CLUB, LONDON S.W. May 12, 1891 PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION I HAVE taken the opportunity of a second impression of the present work being required to revise and correct it throughout. It was prepared at a short notice and carried through the press at a time when I had the disadvantage of being temporarily separated from my own library and had no other to fall back upon. Moreover, more than half of it was in type before the publication of Hude's critical Edition, containing a fresh collation of the chief MSS. Two volumes indeed of Freeman's monumental History of Sicily had been published but too late for me to make other than scanty use of them in the Introduction. The third would have spared me much labour, but I am gratified to find myself in agreement with him on many points where there was room for doubt. I have also availed myself of the editions of H. van Herwerden, and J. Sitzler, with that of Mr E. C. Marchant. The two former I had not seen, although they were in * existence before my edition came out; the latter was published two years afterwards. A few changes only have been made in the reprint of the Greek Text; in the explanatory and critical Notes almost every page contains some minor correction of the plates, the bulk being reserved for the Addenda. The Greek Index has been added to and made more complete. Vlll PREFACE References to Goodwin's Greek Grammar in the additional and corrected notes have been made to the new edition (1894), which I have distinguished as G. Gr.2, the new edition of his Moods and Tenses (1889) is indicated by G. MT.2: elsewhere by G. MT ed. ma. The Table of parallel references given in pp. xxvi and xxxv of this edition makes those of the old edition (1879) available for the new sections. ATHENiEUM CLUB, LONDON, S.W., February 25, 1896. TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE INTRODUCTION xi—lxiv ADDENDA E T CORRIGENDA lxv—lxxx T H E GREEK T E X T COMMENTARY . I—84 . . . . . . 87—284 CRITICAL APPENDIX 287—329 INDEX I 332—348 INDEX II INDEX III MATTERS GRAMMAR 349—354 GREEK 355—408 MAP OF SICILY to face P L A N O F SYRACUSE MAP OF T H E ATHENIAN Introduction to face p . 1 RETREAT . . . . toface p. 74 INTRODUCTION 1 SUMMARY OF ATHENIAN THE HISTORY INVASION OF SICILY AND BEFORE THE OF ARRIVAL THE OF GYLIPPUS. § i. Sicily not the seat of any one nation T H E island of Sicily—κρατίστη των νήσων, as the historian of Agyrium with just pride calls the land of his birth—was never the chief seat of one particular nation. Its mid-Mediterranean position marked it out to be the meeting place of hostile powers—the "Apeos ορχήστρα of rival races and creeds, Aryan and Semitic— and through them to play an illustrious part in the history of the world. For the history of the world was at one time the history of the peoples and states bordering on the great inland sea. It was, in fact, the possession of Sicily which determined whether Europe or Africa should be the predominant power of the world. The people themselves from whom it derived the name which it still bears were only immigrants, who dislodged still earlier settlers of wholly distinct race—to be themselves supplanted in turn by the two most advanced nations in the world some centuries afterwards, when the great colonising impulse set in from the East and arrested the development of their national life. The foundation of 1 This portion of my Book was written after Curtius, A. Holm, Grote and Thirlwall, before the appearance of the two first volumes of Prof. Freeman's work containing The History of Sicily until the Athenian intervention. I was enabled, however, to revise it just be­ fore going to press by the light of the most weighty living authority on the subject, much, I hope, to the advantage of the reader, INTRODUCTION xii the Greek colonies, their internal affairs, their dissensions with one another and their wars with the Phoenicians, the rise and fall of the separate commonwealths and tyrannies—these constitute the main element of interest in the history of the island, until it fell under the sway of Rome. § 2. Its earliest inhabitants—Sicans and Steels The earliest of the recorded nations of Sicily after the mythical period and before the Sicel immigrafopuiation t [ on w e r e the S i c a n s, who,—whether they were, according to Thucydides 2 and Philistus 3 , originally Ibe­ rian settlers from Spain, whence they were driven out by Ligurians or, according to their own tradition accepted by Timaeus 4 , autochthones—were a branch of the nonAryan stock, which was spread over a great part of South­ western Europe. The Sicans played the very smallest part in Sicilian history. They appear to have been a people of rude pastoral habits and no enterprise, who never advanced further than the rude stage of living on hill forts under separate chiefs 6 . At one time they held the eastern coast, but retired subsequently to the west— alarmed at the eruptions of Aetna, as some 6 said, more Its primitive 2 3 Thuc. vi c 2, 2. Fragm. a p . Diod. Sic. ν c. 6, r. Cf. Strabo Geogr. v i c. i, 4 Τ/317 pes, οϋσπβρ πρώτους φησίν των βαρβάρων "Έίφορος Xeyeadai. της Xucekias οίκιστάς, Dion. H a l . I c. 22, 2 κατεΐχον δ' αυτήν [την 'έγγιστα της Ίτμλίας νήσον) Σικανοί, yivos Ίβηρικόν, ού πόλλφ πρότ€ρον ένοίΐασάμβνοι, Aiyvas cfreuyovTes. T h e latter historian adds:—ήσαν δβ ού πολλοί έν fieya\r\ αύτη οίκήτορβς, άλλ' η ττ\άων τψ χώρας 'έτι ην έρημος. 4 ap. Diod. v 6, ι. 5 Diodor. V 6, ι ol δ' οΰν Σικανοϊ τό παλαών κωμηδόν φκουν, έπϊ των όχυρωτάτων λόφων rets 7ro\eis κατασκενάζΌντες δια τους XrjaTds' ού yap ήσαν ύπό μίαν ^βμονίαν βασιλβ'ω? τeτayμέvQ^., κατά πόλιν δέ έκάστψ els ψ ό δυναστεύω?. T h e region about the site occupied at a later period by Acragas seems to have been their special land. H e r e was probably their town Camicus. Entella was another of their towns; also Hyccara, a fishing settlement on the north coast between Eryx and Panormus, whose people were enslaved by Nicias (Thuc." v i c. 62, 3, V I I c. 13, 2). 6 Piod. ν 6, 3. INTRODUCTION xiii probably fleeing before the inroad of the Sicels 7 —and were, in course of time, squeezed out of existence. The next recorded inhabitants of the island—the Sicels—were also barbarians, an oiFshoot of the general Italian stock, a Latin people, speaking the Latin language, who fell back before the pressure of a non-Latin branch of the same stock from Latium into the modern Calabria or, as it was then called, 'Ιταλία8, whence they crossed the straits of Messana into Sicily about Β C. 10309. At the time of the Greek plantation of Sicily, they were far ahead of the Sicani in power and importance, and the larger half of the island, chiefly to the East of the Heraean mountains, was in their possession. Unlike those whom they dispossessed, they continued to be an active and important people and made considerable commercial progress for several centuries afterwards. But they did not grow into any form of national unity. They had neither a common king nor a common con­ federation. The Sicel towns, some of which, no doubt, had been in the occupation of their immediate predecessors, were likewise fortified places, perched on hill-tops. A few lay on the north-coast, but most were inland; an important group occupied the lands watered by the upper course of the river Symoethus 10 and its affluents. Here they lived 7 Thuc. v i 2, 5. See T h u c . VII c. 33, 4 where t h e author opposes Μεταπόντιον της Ιταλίας to Iapygia, and VI c. 44, 2 where the Athenian fleet passes Τάρας before it reaches 'Ιταλία. 9 Thuc. VI c. 2, 4 : Σικελοί δ' εξ 'Ιταλίας (ενταύθα yap φκονν) διέβησαν εις Σικελίαν, ψεύ'γοντες "Οπικας, ως μέν βίκος καί λύεται, επί σχεδίων, τηρήσαντες τον πορθμον κατιόντος του ανέμου, τάχα άν δέ καϊ άλλως πως εσπλεύσαντες. είσϊ δέ καϊ νυν iv τη 'Ιταλία Σικελοί... έλθόντες δέ ες την Σικελίαν στρατός πολύς τους τε Σικανούς κρατούντες μάχη ανέστειλαν προς τα, μεσημβρινά καϊ εσπερία αύτης.,.καϊ τα, κρατιστα της ^ης φκησαν 'έχοντες, έπει διέβησαν, έτη εγγύς τριακόσια πρίν "Ι&λληνας ες Σικελίαν έλθεΐν έτι δέ καϊ νυν τα μέσα καϊ τα προς βορραν. της νήσου 'έχουσιν. 10 Holm Gesch. Sic. I p . 66, Freeman Hist. Sic. 1 p . 146 ff. Among them were Capitium, Herbita, Adranum (?), Hybla Geleatis (whose patron goddess H y b l a became identified with t h e Latin Venus), Inissa (Thuc. i l l c. 103, 1), Menaemim (founded by 8 xiv INTRODUCTION on in undisturbed possession, separated by Mount Aetna from the coast and sea-traffic, keeping their independence and living a national life of their own apart from that of their Greek neighbours, until in course of time the influ­ ence which they exercised upon one another led to the gradual fusion of the two races and the final obliteration of all distinction between them. § 3. The Elymi The North-Western corner of Sicily was held by another primitive people otherwise unknown, of uncer­ tain origin and without any written records, neither Au­ tochthones nor Sican nor Sicel nor Hellenic nor Phoe­ nician, but βάρβαροι11, who settled there at an early date as colonists. Their two sites were Egesta and Eryx. § 4. The old Phoenician settlers in Sicily The commercial instinct of a people of Semitic stock—the traders from Canaan or Phoenicia—had led them at an early period to occupy various headlands and small islands of this rich and favoured island as tempting sites for their peaceful trade with the Sicels; but, on the arrival of Greek colonists, they abandoned (at some unknown period, probably the second half of the seventh century B.C.) their other outlying factories, to concentrate themselves in their three more important cities of refuge Ducetius), Henna (seat of the Demeter-cult), Assdrus, Agyrium (birthplace of Diodorus), Centoripa (Thuc. VII c. 32, 1). 11 T h u c . VI c. 2, 3 'Ιλίου δε άλισκομένου των Τρώων TIV£S διαφνyovTes Άχαίοι>5 πλοίου άφικνοΰνται irpbs την Σικέλίαν καΐ όμοροι rots Σικανοΐϊ οίκήσαντες ξύμπαντες μεν "Ελνμοι εκλήθησαν, πόλεις δ* αυτών "Έρυξ τ€ καί "Εγεστα* προσζυνφκησαν δ' αύτοΐϊ καϊ Φωκέων Tivks των από Τροία? τ6τ€ χειμώνι is Αψύην πρώτον, 'έπειτα is "Σικελίαν απ' αύτψ κατενεχθέντε5. T h e most recent theory, founded on the older coins of their two towns, is that they were half Greeks and half barbarians from West Asia. See K . F . Kinch in Zeitschrift fur Numismatik (Berlin, 1889) Vol. XVI p . 167 quoted by Prof. Freeman. INTR OD UCΤΙ Ο Ν χν in the north-western part of Sicily12, where they lived on friendly terms with their neighbours the Elymians. These cities were Panormus 18 , Soloeis, and the isle of Motye in its sheltered inlet, which lay easiest for communication with the settlements of their kinsfolk in Africa. This end of Sicily now became the barbarian corner, where all races, save the Greek and the Sicel, might take refuge. And in this corner they might have continued their peace­ ful pursuits unmolested, had it not been for the ambitious projects of Carthage, when these independent common­ wealths of the old Phoenicia fell under the supremacy of their younger sister—a change which brought upon them and herself the great disaster of Himera. § 5. Greek settlers in Sicily · The beginning of Greek colonisation in Sicily is placed by Thucydides, probably upon the authority of Antiochus14, in the third quarter of the eighth century B.C. Before 735 B.C., outside of the Gulf of Corinth, with the solitary exception of the remote and ancient Cume 12 Thuc. c. VI 2, 6 φκουν δε καϊ Φοίνικες περί ττασαν μϊν την Σικελίαν άκρας τε επί τη θαλασσή άπολαβόντες καΐ τα επικείμενα νησίδια εμπορίας ένεκεν της προς τους Σικελούς' επειδή δ£ ol "Έίλληνες πολλοί κατά θάλασσαν έπεσέπλεον, εκλιπόντες τά πλείω Μοτύην καί Σολόεντα καϊ ΤΙάνορμον εγγύς τ&ν Ήλύμων ξυνοικήσαντες ενέμοντο, £υμμαχ£ρ τέ πίσυνοι τη των 'Έιλύμων καί δτι εντεύθεν ελάχιστον πλουν Καρχηδών Σικελίας απέχει. Cf. Diod. Sic. V 35» 5 διόττερ επί πολλούς χρόνους οί Φοίνικες διά της τοιαύτης εμπορίας {sc. to Iberia) έπϊ πολύ λαβόντες αϋξησιν αποικίας πολλάς απέστειλαν, τάς μέν εις Σικελίαν καϊ τάς σύνεγγυς ταύτης νήσους, τάς δ' εις την Αιβύην καί Σαρδόνα καϊ την Ίβηρίαν. 13 A n independent Greek n a m e = ' A l l - h a v e n ' for which there is no Phoenician equivalent known. T h e origin of the name is given by Diodorus XXII 1 4 : ηκεν (δ Τίύρρος) επί την ΪΙανορμιτων πόλιν Ζχουσαν λιμένα κάλλιστον των κατά την Σικελίαν, αφ' οδ καϊ την πόλιν συμβέβηκε τετευχέναι ταύτης της προσηγορίας. T h e altered con­ figuration of the modern bay of Palermo scarcely entitles it to the name. See Freeman Hist. Sic. 1 p . 250. 14 Antiochus, son of Xenophanes, of Syracuse was an elder con­ temporary of Thucydides. H e was the author of two works, one on the settlement of Italy (Dion. H a l . Ant. Rom. 1 12, Strabo Geogr. VI c. 1, 3), the other the history of Sicily from the earliest times to B.C. 424 in nine Books (Dion. Hal.· XII 71.) xvi INTROD UCTION in the Opican land far north of old Italy, there were no Grecian settlements. In that year, one Theocl§s had been driven by adverse winds to the shores of Sicily, and by this accident became acquainted with the rich resources of the island and the character of the petty communities who occupied it15. H e went back ^rsTSzce- to Greece, and returned with a body of colonists Hot settle- frorn Chalcis in Euboea and a contingent from men B.C. 735 ^ e islanci of Naxos to found the eldest Hellenic city in Sicily, till then occupied by Sicels, at the base of Mt Taurus, on the long sandy beach which forms the southern horn of the bay of Tauromenium. The Greek spirit of enterprise soon threw itself upon a country whose scenery, shores and climate so nearly resembled those of Hellas, while the soil was more productive, so that in a short time, to use the apposite expression of Cicero16, there arose a fringe of Hellenic colonies round about the lands of the barbarians. The east side of the Island, which lay nearest to them, in the nature of things, attracted the earliest settlers, who chose spots which afforded a good harbour and anchorage. Not more than a year after the foundation of Naxos 17 , Syracuse the example of the Ionian town Chalcis was B.C. 734 followed by the other great Hellenic emporium —the Dorian Corinth—a single expedition from which 15 Strabo Geogr. VI c. 2, 2 (φησϊ δέ "Έφορος) θεοκλέα Αθήναιον (?) παρενεχθέντά άνέμοις eh την Σικελίαν κατανοησαι τήν τε ούδένειαν των ανθρώπων καΐ την άρετην της yijs, Thuc. VI c. 3, ι 'Ελλήνων δε τρωτοί Χ,αλκιδης εξ Ei)/3otas πλεύσαντες μετά θουκλέους οίκιστοϋ Νά£ο// φκισαν, Pausanias VI c. 13, 8. T h e part of the work of Diodorus which refers to the Greek plantations in Sicily is un­ fortunately lost, but in Book x i v , c. 88, in speaking of the Sicels who had occupied Tauromenium, he says: ol δε Σικελοί παρά των πατέρων έκ παλαιού παρειληφότες, δτι τά μέρη ταύτα της νήσου Σικελών κατεχόντων, "Έλληνες πρώτως καταπλεύσαντες 'έκτισαν μεν Νάξον, έζέβαλον δ' έκτος του τόπου τους τότε κατοικούνται Σικελούς. 16 De rep. 11 4> 9 coloniarum vero quae est deducta a Gratis in Siciliam, quam unda non adluat? ita barbarorum agris quasi adtexta quaedam videtur ora esse Graeciae. 17 T h u c . VI c. 3, 2 Συρακούσας δέ του έχομένου έτους Ά,ρχίας των Ηρακλείδων έκ Κορίνθου ψκισε, Σικελούς έξελάσας πρώτον έκ της νήσου, 4ν rj νυν ούκέτι περικλυξομένΎ} ή πόλις ή εντός έστιν. INTR OD UCTION xvii founded the twin colonies, Corcyra 18 and Syracuse on the Isle, both destined to play a leading part in history, and one to swell into the foremost and grandest of European contemporary cities. T h e οικιστής of the former was Chersicrates, of the latter Archias—both members of the ruling house of the Bacchiadae 19 . § 6. Extension of Ionian settlements in Sicily Within a few years after the Dorians had successfully established themselves on the most attractive sites of the eastern coast, the Chalcidians—who were the original Ionian element in the island—included the fertile neigh­ bourhood of Mount Aetna in the circle of their settle­ ments, and founded the twin cities of Leon- Fu d-r tini20, a Sicel stronghold, and Catana, between of Leontbti Syracuse and Naxos, about twenty miles north- αη^α*1%α' west of Syracuse, the former inland—south of the plain from which it derived its chief wealth—, the latter close on the sea at the foot of Mt Aetna, whose name it afterwards bore for fifteen years. The former colony was joined by a body of Megarians, who under their leader Lamis had left the old Megara near _ , y, _ . . , Ί . , ,_ Λ .. , ° r Foundation Corinth and settled at Trotilon, but soon after of Megara had to remove thence and find a new settle- B,c ' 728 ment. They chose Thapsus but, after a short stay there, moved for the third time to a site north of 18 Strabo Geogr. VI c. 2, 4 πλέοντα δε τον Άρχίαν (φασϊν) εις την Σικελίαν καταλπτεΐν μετά μέρους της στρατιάς τον των Ηρακλείδων y&ovs "Κερσικρατη συνοίκωϋντα την νυν Ίίέρκυραν καλουμένην, πρότερον δέ Σχερίαν' εκείνον μεν οΰν έκβαλόντα Αιβνρνούς < r o i ) s > κατέ­ χοντας οίκίσαι την νησον. See Freeman Hist. Sic, I p . 340. 19 Ovid Metam. V 407 et qua Bacchiadae, bimari gens orta Corintho, inter inaequales posuerunt moenia portus. 20 T h u c . VI c. 3, 3 θονκλης δε καϊ ol Χαλκιδης έκ Νά£ου δρμηθέντες £Vet ττέμπτω μετά Σνρακούσας οίκισθείσας Αεοντίνους τε1 πολέμω τους Σικελούς έξελάσαντες, οίκίξουσι καϊ μετ} αυτούς Κατάνην οίκιστην δε αύτοι Ίίαταναΐοι έποιήσαντο Έϋαρχον. According t o t h e account of Polyaenus Strateg. ν 5, 1, the place was held jointly b y Greeks and Sicels: θεοκλης Χαλκιδέας τους απ"1 Ευβοίας ay ay ων την Αεοντίνων κατέσχε μετά Σικελών, οί ιτροενοικουντες kriyxavov. Τ. VTI b xviii INTRODUCTION ; Thapsus, obtained through the treachery of a Sicel prince, land called it Megara Hyblaea 21 . The chain of Chalcidian settlements on the East Coast was completed at a somewhat later period ζΓζα^ιΓ b y t h e foundation, just inside the strait, of (Messana) Zancle22, so named from the sickle-shaped23 B c 715 '' bar of sand enclosing the port, which is its peculiar feature. The first Greek settlers in it were private adventurers from Cume, but it was afterwards organised as a regular colony with founders from both iCume and Chalcis. Its name was in course of time changed to Messana 24 by Anaxilas, tyrant of Rhegium, according to some authorities, when he dispossessed the Ionian and Samian colonists, who had themselves turned out the original settlers. § 7, The settlements on the Southern and Northern Coasts B.C. 6 8 9 — 5 8 1 With the six colonies before mentioned the Hellenic colonisation of Sicily comes to a stand-still for some years. Greek enterprise was directed rather to old Italy, where Sybaris, Croton 25 , Locri26, Rhegium 27 (whose name commemorated the volcanic convulsion which had riven 21 T h u c . VI c. 4, 1: κατά, δε rbv αύτον χρόνον /cat Αάμις εκ Meyapojv άποικίαν ατ/ων ες Σικελίαν άψίκετο, καϊ υπέρ ΤΙαντακύου τε ποταμού Τρώτιλόν τι 6ι>ομ,α χωρίον οΐκίσας και ϋστερον αύτόθεν τοΐς Χαλκιδεϋσιν is Αεοντίνους oXiyov χρόνον ξυμπολιτεύσας καϊ υπό αυτών εκπεσών καϊ θάψον οΐκί'σας cttfros μ& αποθνήσκει, ol δ' άλλοι εκ της θάψου avaaTUVTes ,'Ύβλωvos βao~ϊλiωs irpodovTos την χώραν καϊ καθηyησaμέvoυi M.eyapias φκισαν roi)s 'Τβλαίους κληθέντας. 22 T h u c . VI c. 4» 5 : Ζάγκλη δε την μεν αρχήν από Κύμης TT}S εν Όπικία Χαλκιδικής πόλεως ληστών άφικομένων φκίσθη, ϋστερον δε καϊ από Χαλκίδος καϊ της άλλης Εύβοιας πλήθος ελθόν ζχτγκατενείμαντο την yrjv καϊ οίκισταί ΐίεριήρης καϊ Κραταιμένης iyivovTO αυτής, δ μεν άπδ Κύμης, δ δε από Χαλκίδος. 23 T h u c . /. c. όνομα δε τό μ£ν πρώτον Τιάτγκλη ην ύπδ των Σικελών κληθεισα, οτι δρεπανοειδές την ίδέαν τό χωρίον εστί* T h e Sicilian name for a reaping-hook was fay^ov or day&ov. 24 See § 13 note 82. Cf. Thuc. v n c. 1, 2. 25 T h u c . v n c. 35, 1, 2. 26 ib. c. 1, 1; c. 4, 7 ; c. 25, 3 ; c. 35, 2. 27 ib. c. τ, 2 ; c. 4, 7; c. 35, 2. xix INTRODUCTION Sicily from the mainland), and beyond the old Italy Dorian Taras28, and Metapontium 29 —the Achaean outpost against it—were planted at various times after their occu­ pation of the east coast of Sicily. Nearly half a century had passed since the foundation of Syracuse, when a body of Greeks from the south-eastern Aegean, consisting of Rhodians under Antiphemus, and some Cretans under Entimus, joined in founding the city of Gela30 on the south-western side of the island, near the mouth FouhdatioTi of the river Gelas31. Like the previous colonies, of Gela it was in the territory of the Sicels. Its district B,c- 688 included the rich and fertile plain, known as the Geloan fields32. The three next colonies were established in the terri­ tory of the Sicanians. On the north coast the solitary Greek colony of Himera 33 was founded by 0/Himer* Zancle and the Myletidae, an exiled gens from BC· 648 Syracuse, so that its population spoke a mixed dialect, partly Doric partly Ionic, though its formal laws and institutions were Chalcidic 34 . The inhabitants, however* 28 29 Thuc. VII c. ι, ι. ib. c. 33, 4 , 5 ; c. 57, n . T h u c . VII c. 5, 9 ; VI c. 4, 3 : Τέλαν δέ Άντίφημος έκ 'Ρόδου καΙ'Έντιμος έκ Κρήτης έποικους ayaybvres κοινή 'έκτισαν 'έτει πέμπτψ καΐ τετταρακοστφ μετά Συρακουσών οϊκισιν. καΐ τη μέν πολει από του Τέ\α ποταμού τοϋνομα έγένετο, τό δέ χωρίον ου νυν ή πόλίς έστι καΐ θ πρώτον έτειχίσθη Αίνδιοι καλούνται' ι/ό/Λΐ/χα δέ Δωρικά ετέθη αύτοΐς. Lindii was one of the four cities of Rhodes, Herod, v n 153. 31 So named probably by the Sicels, whose language was Latin, from the c o l d n e s s of its waters. See Freeman Hist. Sic. 1 p . 125, p . 400. 32 Verg. Aen. i n 702. 33 T h u c . VI c. 62, 2 μόνη έν τούτω τφ μέρει της Σικελίας Έλλας πόλις. T h e epithet ύψίκρημνος given it by Aeschylus (Glaucos Pontios fr. 34 ed. 1 Nauck) well suits its position on the steep hill which rises some 300 or 400 feet. 34 T h u c . VI c. 5, 1: καΐ 'Ιμέρα από Ζάγκλης φκίσθη ύπο Έύκλείδρυ καϊ ΣΙμου καΐ Σάκωνος, και Χαλκιδής μέν οι πλείστοι ηλθον ές την άποικίαν, ξυνφκισαν δε αύτοϊς καϊ εκ Συρακουσών φυγάδες στάσει νικηθέντες, oi Μιλητίδαι καλούμενοι' και φωνή μέν μεταξύ της r e Χαλκιδέων καϊ Αωρίδος έκράθη, νόμιμα δέ τα ~Καλκιδικα έκράτησεν. T h e date of its foundation is ascertained from that of its dissolution by the Carthaginians in B.C. 408 : Diod. XIII 62 τήν πάλιν εις 'έδαφος κατέσκαψεν (Hannibal), οίκισθεΐσαν 'έτη διακόσια τέσσαρα80 b 2 XX INTROD UCTION sided with Syracuse in the great Athenian invasion38. Himera was founded as a bulwark of Grecian Sicily against the Phoenicians on the coast of the Tyrrhene sea. o/Seiinus A similar outpost on the south-western coast c. B.C. 628 0 f t he island was founded twenty years later by the Sicilian Megara, exactly a century after its own settlement. This was Selinus86, near the mouth of the river of the same name and a few miles west of the Hypsas (mod. Belice). It owed its name to the abundance of the wild celery {opium graveolens) on the banks of its river37, the leaf of which was adopted by the inhabitants as a badge of their city and placed on their coins. The city rose to considerable prosperity and was famous for its wealth during the period following the expulsion of the tyrants, owing to her trade with Carthage. The gigantic ruins of the magnificent buildings and sculptured temples 38 which crowned its east and west hills bear silent witness to its ancient grandeur. The sympathies of the Selinuntians were of course with Syracuse during the Athenian invasion39. The gap in the line of coast between Gela and ofAcragas Selinus was filled up by the foundation of B.C. 581 Acragas—the last and greatest and fairest40 of the old series of colonies in Sicily. The whole south coast had now become ' a fortified line of defence of Europe against Africa, Acragas forming the central κοντά. T h e survivors of the slaughter were permitted to settle at the hot springs (Thermae mod. Termini) not far from the old city. 35 T h u c . V I I c. 1, 2 if; c. 58, 2. 36 T h u c . VI c. 4, 2 irplv δε αναστηναι (sc. Μεγαρέα* τους *Τ/3λα£ovs) 'έτεσιν ύστερον εκατόν η αυτούς οΐκίσαι, ΙΙάμϊλλον ττέμψαντες 'Σελινούντα κτίζουσι καϊ εκ Μεγάρων τψ μητροπόλεως οϋσης αύτοΐς επελθών ξνγκατφκισε. Cf. VII c. 57> 8. 37 See Plutarch Timoleon c. ιβ for a remarkable story, connected with this plant. Vergil's epithet palmosa {Aen. i l l 705) refers to the dwarf-palm which is also abundant there. 38 Diodorus x n i c. 57, in his narrative of the capture and sack of the city by the Carthaginians, speaks of την εν ταΐ$ οίκίαις εύδαι.μονίαν and την εν τοΐς ναοΐς καθιερωμένην πολυτέλείαν. Cf. T h u c . VI c. 20, 3> 4· 39 Thuc. ν ι c. 6, 2; c. 4 8 ; c. 65, 1; c. 67, 2; v n c. 1, 3, 5; c. 57, 8; c. 58, i; 40 Pindar Pyth. XII ι κάλλιστα βροτεαν πολίων. INTRO D UCTION XXI citadel' 41 . Like the two preceding, it was a Siceliot settlement—a colony from Gela, its οικισταί being, of course, Rhodians 42 . It took its name from the smaller of the two rivers, Acragas and Hypsas (mod. Drago), between the ravines of which it occupies a strong po­ sition on a height at some distance from the sea43· In the history of Hellenic Sicily Acragas filled a very important place, being only second to Syracuse, whose formidable rival she was during the brief period of her existence, though she was satisfied with remaining neutral in the time of the great Athenian expedition 44 . Her aggrandisement and splendour 45 was synchronous with the great victory over the Carthaginians at Himera in B.C. 480. The wealth, bounteousness and luxury of her citizens were proverbial. The ruins of the temples, still to be seen at Girgenti, especially those of the huge pile of the Olympieion, the vastest Greek temple in Europe 46 , are sufficient evidence of the high pitch of 41 Prof. Freeman Hist. Sic. I p . 440. Thuc. VI c. 4, 4 'έτεσι δέ eyyurara οκτώ καϊ εκατόν μετά την σφετέραν οϊκισιν Τελψοι Άκρά^γαντα φκισαν την μέν πάλιν από του 'AicpayavTos ποταμού δνομάσαντες, οίκιστάς δέ ποιήσαντες ' Αριστον ουν καϊ ΊΙύστίλον, νόμιμα δέ τα Τέλφων δόντες. Polyb. IX c. 27, 8. 43 Its position is well described by Polybius IX c. 27, 1—5 η δέ των 'Κκ ρ ay αν τίνων πόλις...διαφέρει των πλείστων πόλεων...κατά την όχυρότητα και μάλιστα κατά τό κάλλος καϊ την κατασκευήν, 'έκτισται μεν yap από θαλάττης εν όκτωκαίδεκα σταδίου, ώστε μηδενός άμοίρους είναι των εκ ταύτης χρησίμων' ο δε περίβολος αύτης καϊ φύσει καϊ κατασκευή διαφερόντων ήσφάλισται. κείται yap τό τείχος έπϊ πέτρας άκροτόμου καϊ περιρρ^ος, η μέν αυτοφυούς, η δέ χειρο­ ποίητου, περιέχεται δέ ποταμοίς* ρεϊ yap αύτης παρά. μέν την νότων πλευράν ό συνώνυμος τη πόλει, παρά δέ την επί τάς δύσεις και τον λίβα τετραμμένην ό πpoσayopευόμεvoς"rί!ψaς. 44 Thuc. ν ι ι c. 3 3 ' 15 c. 46. 45 Diodor. Χ Ι Ι Ι 81 if. Diogenes Laertius ( v i n 2, 7) records a saying of Empedocles: 'AKpayavrivoi τρυφωσι μέν ώς αϋριον άποθανούμενοι, οΙκίας δέ κατασκευάζονται ώς πάντα τόν χρόνον βιωσόμενοι. Diodorus (c. 90)* m describing the capture of the city by the Carthaginians B.C. 406, speaks of it as being πλουσιωτάτην σχεδόν των τότε 'Ελληνίδων πόλεων yεyεvημέvηv, καϊ ταύτα των έν αύτη φιλοκαλησάντων εις παντοίαν κατασκευασμάτων πόλυτέλειαν, καϊ yap ypaφal παμπληθεΐς ηύρέθησαν εις άκρον έκπεπονημέναι καϊ παντοίων ανδριάντων φιλοτέχνως δεδημιoυpyημέvωv ύπεράγων αριθμός. 46 Diodor. /. c. gives its dimensions; see also Polyb. i x 27, 9. Freeman Hist. Sic. 11 p . 404. 42 INTROD xxU UCTION material prosperity which she had attained, when her career was cut short by the great Carthaginian invasion in B.C. 406, which spread such ruin and desolation throughout the island. § 8. The territorial expansion of Syracuse Syracuse shewed an ambition at an early period to extend her territorial possessions. Shut in, as she was, to the north by the foundation of Megara and other Foundation settlements, she gradually took possession of ofHeidrum the whole east coast from Plemmyrium to Pachynus, founding Helorum on the shore and Neeton in the hill country. She then pushed forward towards the south coast, having first, however, secured herself by the plantation of two outlying posts against the attacks of the Sicels in the interior. These -were Acrae on ofAcrae ^tr n o r t h - w e s t e r n border about 24 miles B.C 664, due west, and Casmenae on her south-western ^ ~ border. A more important settlement was that Camarlna of Camarina on the south coast47, which reB.c.599 belled against her parent-city, as Gorcyra did against Corinth, and set herself up as a rival, for which she was destroyed in B.C. 552. Half a century afterwards the site was ceded to Hippocrates, lord of Gela, by whom the town was rebuilt in B.C. 495 and re-colonised, only to be again swept away by Gelon after the lapse of ten years48. In B.C. 461 it was founded for the third 47 T h u c . VI c. 5, 2/Άκραι δε καϊ Ίϋασμέναι ύπό Σνρακοσίων φκίσθησαν, "Ακραι μεν έβδομήκοντα 'έτεσι μετά Σνρακούσας, Κασμέναι δε εγγύς είκοσι, μετά "Ακρας, καϊ Καμάρι,να τό πρώτον ύπό "Σνρακοσίων φκίσθη, 'έτεσιν εγγύτατα πέντε καϊ τριάκοντα καϊ εκατόν μετά, Συρα­ κουσών κτίσιν' οίκισταΐ δε έ*γένοντο αύτης Αάσκων καϊ Μ,ενέ κώλος, ανάστατων δε Καμαριναίων "γενομένων πολέμω ύπό Σνρακοσίων δι' άπόστασιν, χρόνω 'Ιπποκράτης ϋστερον Τέλας τύραννος^ λύτρα ανδρών Σνρακοσίων αιχμαλώτων λαβών (cf. Herod. VII 154) TVV 7Ψ rW Καμαριναίων, αυτός οικιστής "γενόμενος κατφκισε Καμάριναν. καϊ αύθις ύπό Τέλωνος ανάστατος "γενομένη τό τρίτον κατωκίσθη ύπό Τελψων. 48 T h u c . I.e.; H e r o d . VII 156 Καμαριναίονς απαντάς ες τας Σνρακούσας σ,ΎαΎών πολίήτας έποίησε, Καμαρίνης δε τό άστυ κατέσκαψε. Scholiast on Pindar 01. ν 1 9 : Φίλιστος δέ έν τη τρίτη φησϊν δτι INTR ODUCTION xxiii time under the auspices of Gela, and flourished as an independent colony49 until the removal of its citizens to Syracuse in B.C. 405. In the quarrel between Syracuse and Leontini the Camarinaeans were the only people of Dorian origin who took part against Syracuse; and some time later they were ready to assist the Athenians in supporting Leontini by arms'50, and when the great expedition appeared in Sicily, they were favourably dis­ posed to the Athenians51, until they became alarmed at their ulterior projects, and decided to maintain a strict neutrality. After fortune, however, had declared in favour of Syracuse, they sent a small force to the support of the Syracusans52. § 9. The political development of the Siceliot cities Unlike nearly all the other Greek colonies in Europe and Asia, those in Sicily were not troubled by constant warfare with their barbarian neighbours. The native races of the island, among whom they were planted, became easily assimilated to Hellenic life and culture and did less than might have been expected to thwart the material progress of the intruders, whose dominion included a considerable part of the territory adjacent to their cities. We have, unfortunately, no continuous history of the growth and development of any of these settlements, but some casual and fragmentary notices of what took place at Syracuse will enable us to form a conception of the probable course of events elsewhere53. Τέλων Καμάριναν κατέστρεψαν, Ιπποκράτης δ£ πόλεμων "Συρακοσίοις καϊ πολλούς αΙχμαΧωτούς λαβών υπέρ του άποδοϋναι τούτους 'άλαββ την Καμάριναν και συνφκισεν αυτήν. 49 Diod. XI 76, 5 μετά δε ταύτα Καμάρωναν μεν Υελφοι κατοικίσαντες έζ άρχη* κατεκληρούχησαν. 50 T h u c . V c. 4, 6. 51 T h u c . VI c. 88. 52 T h u c . ν π c. 33, 1 ; c. 58, 1. 53 Diodorus fails us, t h e books of his history which cover this period having been lost as well as the original authorities. Hero­ dotus VII 153 speaks of internal struggles at G e l a : es Μακτώριον πόλιν την υπέρ Υέλης οικημένην 'έφυ*χον άνδρες Τε\φων έσσωθεντες στάσι. XXIV INTRODUCTION Various causes contributed to keep them independent of each other, and to prevent any tendency to federalism; their progress, however, and the development of their internal resources must have varied considerably. The two most powerful in the sixth century appear to have been A crag as and Gel a, but all remained in undisturbed repose and obscurity, each side of the island and each individual town having its own particular history, until about 500 B.C., at which period a movement began which may be said to have given rise to a common history of the several communities. The elements of strife and disorder were transplanted to the soil of the new Greece, important political changes took place, and the first seeds were sown of the party conflicts which afterwards divided Greek Sicily into two opposite camps. The beginnings of a colony are, in the nature of things, democratic. The first settlers, among whom meal °' the land was parcelled out (hence called a £teiioiTthe 1°Ί*>οροι), had admitted t o ' partnership in the settlements soil new-comers, as long as there was more -Gamoroi l a n d t Q b e h a d f o r a p O o r ti 0 nment. But their descendants in the next generation would be likely to view with different feelings such new-comers who had no claim upon them, and to grudge them the possession of land, which would, of course, carry with it admission to citizenship. Hence they came to be regarded by those outside their own body as an exclusive and privileged class, by whom and out of whom civil and military officers were chosen. Dependent on the γά/λοροι was a large serf population of the native Sicels (known by the name Κυλ. . λνριοι)—standing to them in the relation of the y ynoi L a c o n j a n Helots or Thessalian Penestae—who tilled for their use lands taken from their own people. By the side of these two original elements, there grew Growth of a up a population who were not landholders nor middle class serfS) DU t formed a free but unenfranchised middle class or Dimos. The members of this class rapidly increased in number, and, as the colony grew in prosperity, found means of enriching themselves by trade and in­ dustrial pursuits. But their position of dependence and INTRODUCTION XXV exclusion from state offices gave rise to discontent, which became greater and greater, until the moment came when they thought themselves strong enough to demand equal privileges with the landowners, descendants of the original colonists. When this happened, the oligarchy had to decide whether they should obtain peace by compliance with their demands and by a re-distribution of land, or face a struggle in maintenance of their own ancient rights and privileges. In most cases they decided in favour of the latter course, and hence arose civil feuds, resembling those between the patricians and plebs at Rome. A speedy victory of the non-privileged class, and an estab­ lishment of democracy—at that time hardly known anywhere in Greece—appears rarely to have been the outcome of the struggle. Sometimes it was settled by a removal of a part of the turbulent and discontented class to a newly founded colony—as was done by the Syracusans to Acrae, to Casmenae, and later to Camarina—in which there would be of course equality among the citizens. But in most of the Siceliot cities towards the close of the sixth century ambitious leaders had placed themselves at the head of the popular move- ~ Λ . τ . i t 'it Tyrants in ment, overthrown the oligarchy, and availed the various themselves of their position to raise themselves ctUes to supreme power. We find such leaders established as tyrants at Acragas, at Gela, at Him era, at Leontini, at Selinus, and at Zancle64. At Syracuse the first incitement to revolution was given in B.C. 485 by a feud which broke out among the Gamori themselves. Their authority fk/camorf had already been shaken by the losses inflicted f^m Syra> on them, by Hippocrates, the brother and cuse successor of Oleander, in the tyranny of Gela, and these circumstances were turned to account by the two lower classes, who combined for the purpose of a common 84 H e r o d . VI 23, VII 154; Aristot. Pol. V 10, 4, p . 1316a 3 4 : καϊ els τυραννίδα μεταβάλλει {τυραννία) έξ oXiyapxias, ώσπβρ έν Σ ι κ ε λ ί α σχεδόν αϊ πλέίσται των αρχαίων έν ACOVTIVOLS eh τήρ Καν αιτίου τυραννίδα καϊ ένΤέΧα ds την ΚΧ^άνδ ρου...καΐ^έν aXXacs ττολλα« πόΧεσιν ωσαύτως. See my Introd. to Xenophon's Hierdn ed. 3 p. xxxix if. XXVI INTRODUCTION rising and dispossessed them of the government by superior force. The expelled party retired to Casmenae, Geidrisaid where they invoked the aid of Gelon, son of invoked Deinomenes, who some years before had succeeded Hippocrates in the lordship of Gela. This ambitious schemer—whose object was to found a Greek empire in. Sicily—readily embraced the opportunity offered to him and returned with the exiles to Syracuse before there was time to establish a new constitution. The popular party at Syracuse placed their destinies in his hands without offering resistance65, and were glad to employ him as a supreme moderator for the settlement of their internal discords and conflicting interests. Gelon, instead of establishing the ascendency of either party, concentrated the supreme power in himself. He deputed his brother Hieron to govern Gela, while he himself made Syracuse the home of his power—an epoch-making event both for that city and for the whole of the island. One of his earliest measures was to enlarge its popula­ tion by transplanting to it the whole population of Camarina and more than half that of Gela56. Megara Hyblaea also and the Leontine colony of Euboea were both destroyed and their people transplanted to Syracuse; the oligarchs among them, who had resented Gelon's usurpation, being made citizens of Syracuse, while the commonalty, although they were guiltless of opposi­ tion, were cruelly betrayed and sold into slavery abroad, the tyrant thus giving effect to his creed that the Dimos was 'a most thankless thing to live with' 57 . On the other hand, Gelon rewarded a large multitude of mercenaries, Greek and barbarian, who formed his standing army, and many strangers from various parts, with citizenship and grants of land 58 . By such means Gelon became un55 H e r o d . VII 155 δ yhp δήμος δ των Συρηκοσίων έπιδντι Τέλωνι. παραδώοΐ την π6\ιν καΐ έωϋτόν. 56 Herod. /. c. Υελφων ύπερημίσβας των αστών τωύτό τοϋτο τοΐς Καμαριναίοις έποίησε. H i s object was among other things to lessen the importance of the two places. 57 Herod. VII 156 νομίσα* δημον €Ϊναι συνοίκημα άχαριτώτατον.' 58 Diod. χ ι c. J 2, 3 τ ο " Υέλωνος irXeiovas των μυρίων πολιτο· Ύραφήσαντος ξένους μισθοφόρους. INTRODUCTION xxvii disputed master of the greater part of Sicily—a mighty 'tyrant 759 , more powerful, indeed, than any one else in the Hellenic world60. H e is spoken of as tyrant of all Sicily, but this is probably an exaggeration, and his dominion did not extend beyond the strait in the keeping of Anaxilas61. H e had a powerful ally in Theron of Acragas. The only tyrants in Sicily not in subjection to nor in alliance with him were Anaxilas of Messana and Rhegium, and Terillus of Himera; the only town, Selinus—a dependency of Carthage. Syracuse flourished under him and rose rapidly to the position of the foremost city in Sicily63—mightier than any city of old Hellas. The borders of the city were greatly en­ larged and its defences strengthened 63 . The original Island city of Ortygia was connected by a mole with the mainland, and the southern end of the wall of Achradina brought down to the shore of the Harbour, so that the height of Achradina, the lower ground be­ tween its base and the Island and the Island itself were all taken within one fortified enclosure. The elaborate system of underground waterworks for conveyance of water from Mount Thymbris, and the making of the docks on the northern side of the Harbour, on the shore of the low ground between the new wall and the Island, may also be set down as his work64. Gelon's fame had already spread beyond Sicily, and an appeal was made to him as one of the higher Embassy powers of Hellas for federal aid against the f?om °l(i threatened invasion of Xerxes 65 by a joint Geidn. embassy of Spartans and Athenians. But Gelon B-c- 48° declined to give any aid, unless he were entrusted with the chief command of the united Greek army either by 59 H e r o d . VII ι^βτοιούτφ τρόπω τύραννο? eysybvee μ^γαί ό ΤέΧων, H e r o d . VII 145 r & && F4\ 3 ™s αρχάς άπάσας τοις άρχαίοις πολίταις άπένεμον, τους δέ ξένον* τους επί του Τέλωνος πολιτενθέντας ούκ ήξίουν μετέχειν ταύτης της τιμής, εϊτε ούκ άζίους κρίνοντες, εϊτε καΐ άπιστόνντες μήποτβ σνντεθ ραμμένοι τυραννίδι καΐ μονάρχψ συνεστρατευμένοι νεωτερίξειν επιχειρήσωσι' όπερ καϊ συνέβη γενέσθαι. 81 Diod. XI 76, 5 τ ο " & ξένοις τοις διά ras δυναστείας αλλότριας τάς πόλεις 'έχουσι συνεχώρησαν τα εαυτών άποκομίζειν και κατοικεΐν απαντάς έν τη ΤΟίεσσηνία i.e. in the territory of Messana. 82 T h u c . V I I c. 42, 3; c. 57, 11. INTR O D U C ΤΙ Ο Ν xxxm having been restored by the help of the Syracusans and the Sicel tribes of the interior. The latter, who had assisted the Syracusans in throwing off the yoke of Thrasybulus and in return learnt from them lessons in the art of war, took this opportunity of recovering their share of the territory of Aetna which had been wrested from them and annexed by Hieron. They acknow­ ledged at this time the authority of an enterprising leader named Ducetius 83 , and he made an agreement with the Syracusans and the old inhabitants of Catana at Leontini for a partition of this territory. The Hieronians, defeated by the confederates, abandoned the town which was immediately re-occupied by its ancient inhabitants, and its original name restored, while the expelled colonists established themselves instead at the inland Sicel town of Inessa and transferred to it the name of Aetna. The Naxians too must have gone back about the same time from Leontini to their old home. § 13. The Commonwealths after the fall of the Tyrants 'The violent changes that had been made under the tyrants, the breaking down of old landmarks, the shattering of old associations, the moving of men by thousands to and fro between city and city, the no less violent changes which were needed on the other side to get rid of these innovations and to bring back the older state of things—all these things alike, the revolutions wrought by the tyrants and the counter­ revolutions wrought by the people, joined to bring about in Sicily a general feeling of novelty, of uncertainty, of constant possibility of change' 84 . 83 Diod. XI 76, 3 Αουκέτιος δ των Σικελών 'η'γεμών, χαλεπώς 'έχων τοις τ-ην Κατάνην οίκονσι δια ττ)ν άφαίρεσιν της των Σικελών χώρα?, έστράτενσεν eV αυτούς' ομοίως δ£ καΐ των Συρακοσίων στρατενσάντων επί την "Κατάνην, ούτοι μ£ν κοινή κατεκληρούχησαν την χώραν καΐ τους κατοικισθέντας ύ 0 ' 'Ιέρωνος του δυναστοϋ έπολέμουν. 84 Freeman Hist. Sic. 11 p . 326, who quotes T h u c . V i c . 17, sf, where Alcibiades in his speech at Athens advocating the expedi­ tion against the Syracusans lays stress on this feeling,, as one of their weak points: βχλοις re yap ξυμμίκτοις πολνανδροϋσιν al πόλεις καΐ ραδίας £χουσι των πολιτειών τας μεταβολας καΐ έπιδοχάς' καί ουδείς δι αυτό ως περί οικείας πατρίδος οϋτε τα περί τό σώμα δπλοις έξήρτυται οϋτε τα έν τη χώρα μονίμοις κατασκεναΐς.. .ετοιμάζεται. Τ. VII C XXX1V INTRODUCTION What happened in other Siceliot states is absolutelyunknown to us, and we have only meagre and imperfect accounts of the course of events in the two principal cities—Acragas and Syracuse. The division and reappropriation of lands under the commonwealth gave rise to discontent and a good deal of litigation arose at Syracuse, in which the forensic eloquence of Corax contributed largely to the adjust­ ment of claims85. Unsuccessful litigants looked to the restoration of tyranny as a remedy. Advantage was in fact taken of the many grave disputes and yn anon g e n e r a j c o n f u s i o n by one Tyndarion to make an attempt, for which he was put to death. To prevent similar attempts in the future, a contrivance was resorted to in B.C. 454 resembling the eazsm ^tric ostracism86. But so much evil resulted from this novel institution of petalism owing to its pressure falling on the wrong parties, that it was soon abolished. For nearly half a century from this time Syracuse and the other Greek cities enjoyed a period of freedom, power and prosperity, undisturbed by wars in the island and ennobled by great works and famous men. Syracuse herself exercised her championship in a manner beneficial to the whole of Sicily. The Tyrrhenes had recovered from the blow inWarwith dieted upon them by Hieron and resumed Tyrrhenes their old practice of piracy on the. high seas. B.C. 453 Phayllus was sent out to repress them, but did nothing more than lay waste the island of Aethalia (mod. Elba), and on, his return to Syracuse was charged with having been bribed by the enemy87, and condemned to exile. His place was rilled by Apelles, who in the next year went to sea with 60 ships, ravaged the whole 85 Cic. Brut. 1 2 : Itaque, ait Aristoteles, cum sublatis in Sicilia tyrannis res privatae longo intervallo iudiciis repeterentur^ turn primum—artem et praecepta Coracem et Tisiam conscripsisse. 86 Diod. XI 86—7. I t was called p e t a l i s m from the use of olive-leaves (πέταλα) instead of pot-sherds (όστρακα) for inscribing the name of the citizen whom the voter thought dangerous. 87 Diod. XI 88, 4 παρά των Τυρρηνων λάθρα χρήματα λαβών. INTROD UCTION XXXV coast of Etruria, and part of Cyrnos (mod. Corsica), and returned with a large- quantity of booty and a number of prisoners of war. In Acragas only an incomplete democracy had been established, for the government Was i n t h e Acragas— hands of a Senate consisting of an elective ^fouucai one thousand. The philosopher Empedocles 88 reformer put an end to the existence of this body, and established a reformed government. § 14. Ducetius—his scheme of united Sicily Ducetius has already been before us, as a leader of the Sicels when they helped the Syracusans to shake off the yoke of the tyrants 89 . H e now put himself at the head of a movement for the confederation of the isolated Sicel communities, with himself as president 90 . Among the northern outposts of the Heraean hills Foundation he founded or revived the town of Menaenum °{u^nae" (mod. Mineo),—looking down from its lofty site B-C 459 on the sanctuary of the Palici, the awful and kindly chthonian deities of his people, and the famous sacred volcanic pools 91 —as a rallying point for the other Sicel states. Morgantina, which at first refused to join the league, yielded to his arms, and in the course of a few years he induced all, except Hybla, to unite under his government, and, in order to give them a common 88 Diog. Laert. VIII 9, 66 ύστερον δ' ό 'Εμπεδοκλής καϊ το των χιλίων άθροισμα κατέλυσε συνεστώς επί 'έτη τρία, ώστε ού μόνον ην των πλουσίων άλλα καϊ των τα δημοτικά φρονούντων. 89 See § 12 note 83 p . xxxiii. 90 Diod. XI 78, 5 Αουκέτιος δ των "Σικελών βασιλεύς, ώνομασμένος τό yavos, ισχύων δε κατ' εκείνους τους χρόνους Μ,έναινον μεν πόλιν 'έκτισε καϊ την σι5ί'€771'5 χώραν τοις κατοικισθεισι διεμέρισε, στρατευόμενος δ' επί πόλιν άζιόλο'γον ΜορΎαντΐναν καϊ χειρωσάμενο$ αυτήν, δόξαν άπηνέΎκατο παρά τοις ομοεθνέσι. 91 Ovid Pont. 11 10, 2 5 : — Hennaeosque lacus et olentis stagna Palici. Metam. ν 405 :— per que lacus altos et olentia sulfure fertur stagna Palicorum rupta ferventia terra. CZ XXXVI INTRODUCTION centre of national life, forsook Menaenum and founded a new city in the plain, to which he gave the name of Palice93. The recovery of Inessa 93 and its restoration to the ejected Sicels was his first duty. An attack upon Motyon—a place somewhere in the He lays territory of Acragas—involved him in hostiliS Motyon ^ e s w ^ ^ ^ t w o g r e a t e s t Siceliot cities. H e B.C. 451 was at first successful in some offensive move­ ments against them, but was in the next year defeated His de/eat after a hard-fought battle and his army disB.C. 450 persed. Forsaken or plotted against by his followers, he rode straight to Syracuse. There falling as a suppliant before the altars in the agora he put himself at the mercy of his conquerors, by whom he was sent as an exile to dwell at Corinth with a proper allowance; while ne Return £ a v e n ^ s w o r d °f honour not to return. A o/Ducetius few years afterwards, however, seemingly with B.C. 44 j . ^ c o n n i v a n c e 0 f Corinth, he returned to Sicily and founded a third city—Kale Acte or Calacta— on the northern coast, which was to all intents and purposes an Hellenic settlement rather than the seat of a Sicel confederacy94, and therefore did not pro­ voke interference. With his death in B.C. 440, the Sicel 92 Diod. XI 88, 6 μετά δε ταύτα Αουκέτιος 6 των Σικελών άφηΎούμενος τάς πόλεις άπάσας τάς ομοεθνείς πλην της "T/3Xas είς μίαν καϊ κοινην rjyaye συντέλειαν, δραστικός δ' ών νεωτέρων ώρέ^ετο πραγ­ μάτων, καΐ πάρα του κοινού των Σικελών άθροίσας *$ύναμιν άξιόλο*γον... έκτισε πόλιν άξιόλο'γον πλησίον του τεμένους των ονομαζόμενων ΙΙαλικων ην από των προειρημένων θεών ώνόμαζε ΙΙαλικήν...: ib. c. 90* I συνέβη δε την πόλιν ταύτην δια την της χώρας άρετην καϊ δια το πλήθος των οίκητόρων ταχείαν λαβείν αϋξησιν. On the Palici and their lake, see Freeman Hist. Sic. Vol. 1. A p p . note x. p . 516 if. 93 Diod. XI 9 1 , ι Αΐτνην κατελάβετο τον η^ούμενον αύτης δόλοφονήσας. See p . xxxiii § 12. 94 Diod. XII 8, ι Συρακόσιοι καταπολεμησαντες Αουκέτιον δυνάστην των Σικελών, καϊ yεvόμεvov Ικετην άπολύσαντες τωνJyκλημάτων, απέδειξαν αύτφ την των Κορινθίων πόλιν οίκητήριον. οΰτος δέ oWiyov χρόνον μείνάς εν τη Κορίνθω τάς όμoλoyίas 'έλυσε, καϊ προσποιησάμενος χρησμον ύπό θέων αύτφ δεδόσθαι κτίσαι την Καλήν'Ακτην £ν τη Σικ€λία, κατέπλευσεν εις την νησον μετά τινών οίκητόρων συνεπελάβοντο δε καϊ των Σικελών τίνες, έν οίς ην καϊ Άρχωνίδης δ τώνΈρβιταίων δυναστεύων. T h e death of this Archonides is mentioned by Thuc. VII 1, 4 as being a loss to the Athenian cause. INTRO D UCTION xxxvii league was broken up. The return of Ducetius gives offence had given offence at Acragas, where it was at Acragas. thought to be due to Syracusan collusion, and so became the cause or pretext of a war between Syracuse and Acragas—the first war between any two of the liberated states—in which most of the other Siceliot towns sided with one or the other 95 . A battle fought near the banks of the southern Himeras gave the triumph to Syracuse, whose supremacy was thenceforth Acragas firmly established among the Siceliot cities, declares war and her dominion greatly extended at the feated expense of the Sicels, whose town Trinacia ΒΧ·Ή5 was the last to offer a valiant resistance in B.C. 439. During the next quarter of a century the Siceliot cities enjoyed a period of peace and material pros­ perity96. The towns on the South coast especially were enriched by their commerce with Africa, particularly in the export trade of wine and oil, which was the special source of the extraordinary wealth of Acragas97. In some of them this was also the time of their extraordinary architectural and artistic development. Meanwhile the Sicels, though keeping their political independence, were rapidly losing their national characteristics and becoming more and more assimilated to their Greek neighbours in their ways and thoughts, just as the Saxons blended with the Norman invaders in our own country; and the fusion took place 95 Diod. XII 8, 2 'AKpayavTivoi δε άμα μεν φθονοΰντες τοΐς "Συρακοσίοις, άμα δ' iyKaXovvres αύτοΐς βτι Αουκέτιον όντα κοινόν πολέμων διέσωσαν άνευ της 'Κκρα-γαντΙνων γνώμης πόλεμον igrfveyKav τοις Συρακοσίοις. 96 Diod. XII 26, 3 ομοίων δε καΐ τα, κατά την Σικελίαν είρηνικην είχε κατάστασιν1 Καρχηδονίων μεν πεποιημένων συνθήκας πρδς Τέλωνα, αυτών δε των κατά την Σικελίαν πόλεων ελληνίδων την η*γζμονίαν Συρακοσίοις συγκεχωρηκυιών καϊ των 'Κ,κρα^αντίνων μετά την ητταν χ την *γβνομένην περί τον \μέραν ποταμδν σύλλελυμένων προς τους Συρακοσίους. 97 Diod. XIII 81 αμπελώνες τοις με^έθεσι καϊ τφ κάλλει διαφέ­ ροντες καϊ τό πλείστον της χώρας eXaicus κατάφυτον, έξ ης παμπληθη κομισμένοι καρπδν έπώλουν εις Καρχηδόνα' οϋπω yap κατ1 εκείνους τους χρόνους της Αιβύης πεφυτευμένης1 ol την 'Aκpayavτivωv νεμόμενοι τόν εκ της Αιβύης άντιφορτιζόμενοι πλοϋτον ουσίας απίστους τοις μ^έθεσιν έκέκτηντο. See above § 7 Ρ· xxi· xxxviii INTRODUCTION so readily that at the end of one or two centuries there was no longer any distinction between the two peoples. 4 The career of Ducetius and the events which immedi­ ately followed it ruled for ever that, among the European elements that were already in the island, the Greek was to be dominant without rival98.' § 15. Beginning of Athenian interference in Sicily Syracuse, not satisfied with being the foremost among Military other cities, had begun to dream of a gradual r s{°ra^use conquest of the island since her recent victories B.C. 439 and with that object introduced certain military reforms. A hundred triremes were built and the number of the cavalry—the most efficient part of her army, as will be seen hereafter—was doubled". These military preparations may possibly have furnished a pretext for the alliance which six years afterwards the two cities Rhegium and Leontini each concluded with Athens 100 in B.C. 433—the first beginning of that closer inter­ course between the Siceliot towns and old Greece, which ultimately involved them in the great struggle for hege­ mony between its two belligerent powers. It does not appear that the Athenians entertained starta e ambitious views towards Sicily at the outbreak pects aid of the war, such as those they conceived some seven ^7kfpeioyears later. It was rather the Spartans ponnesian whose policy was aggressive at this time. Their War requisition upon the Dorian towns in Sicily, for a large contribution both of ships of war and money to 98 Freeman Hist. Sic. Vol. II p. 424. 99 Diod. XII 30, ι εκατόν μεν τριήρεις ένανπηγήσαντο, τόν δέ των Ιππέων αριθμόν εποίησαν διπλάσιον' επεμελήθησαν δέ καϊ της πεζής δυνάμεως, καϊ χρημάτων παρασκευάς εποιουντο} φόρους άδροτέρονς τοις ύποτεταΎμένοις Σικελοΐς επιτιθέντες. ταύτα δ' 'έπραττον διανοούμενοι πσ,σαν "Σικελίαν έκ του κατ* o\tyov κατακτήσασθαι. 100 T h e former treaty is preserved in the British M u s e u m ; t h e latter was discovered only recently near t h e Dionysiac Theatre. See Hicks' Greek Hist. Inscriptions no. 39 and 40. T h u c . alludes to this alliance i n 86, 4 where he is speaking of the first interference of Athens in Sicilian affairs B.C. 427. INTRODUCTION xxxix their projected fleet of 500 sail in B.C. 431*, must have weighed materially in determining the Athenians to assist the cities of Chalcidian origin, when they invoked her aid. This requisition, it is true, was never acted on 101 . The Dorian cities showed their sympathy with Dorian the general cause only by attacking the Ionian "-f^^"" cities, Naxos, Catana and Leontini. These Ionian were not strong enough to defend themselves Clttes without Athenian aid, though they were supported by the Dorian city of Camarina from jealousy of Syracuse, and by Rhegium in Italy. In the fifth summer of the war B.C. 428 a quarrel arose between the people of Leontini and the Syracusans, who blockaded them by land and by sea. The Leontines appealed to the Athenians, as Ionians and allies, for armed support. The embassy was memorable, because it was headed by the famous professor . .f of rhetoric, Gorgias of Leontini102. The Athe- Gorgias nians, because they had an interest in stopping B,c· 428 the transport of Sicilian corn to the Peloponnesus 103 , sent a small force under Laches and Choro- Athenian eades, with instructions to protect the Athe- expedition nian allies and to ascertain what encourage- LacMs ment the island held out to their schemes of BC· 4*7 conquests. Laches took up his quarters at Rhegium, which, as a city of Chalcidic origin and because of its enmity to Locri was attached to Athens and there waited for opportunities of action. His first operations were unimportant but in the following summer he landed a body of the allied troops on the coast of Sicily and marched against the Messanian outpost Mylae, and com­ pelled it to surrender. Messana yielded without resis­ tance and gave hostages for its obedience. An ineffective * Thuc. 11 7, 2. Thuc. i n 86, 3. Diod. x i i 53, 2; Pausan. v i 17, 5. 103 Thuc. ill 86, 2 και 'έπεμψαν ol 'Αθηναίοι (ναΰ$) -της μϊν οίκεώτητος προφάσει, βονλόμενοι δέ μήτε σΐτον is την ΙΙελοπόννησορ ατγεσθαι αύτόθεν, πρόπειράν re ποιούμενοι el σψίσι δυνατά εϊη τά έν ττ} Σικελία πράγματα υποχείρια γενέσθαι. 101 102 xl INTRODUCTION attack on the inland Sicel town of Inessa I04 , the acropolis of which was garrisoned by Syracusans, the conclusion of an alliance with Egesta, an incursion on the terri­ tory of Himera and the capture of a Locrian fort and defeat of a Locrian detachment, were the other events of his campaign. The main end of the war seemed as distant as ever. The Leontines finding themselves still pressed both by land and sea had in the meantime applied to Athens for more active succours. The Athen ans m second i response to their application resolved Athenian to send forty additional galleys106: one of the e £{*dj£°* commanders Pythodorus was sent with a few in advance to Rhegium, where, in the spring of B.C. 425, he relieved Laches of his command. But the Athenian cause under him lost rather than gained ground. The combined Syracusan and Locrian squad­ ron succeeded in recovering Messana, the most valu­ able fruit of his predecessor's campaign, by the help of partisans within the walls, and while the Locrian landforce created a diversion by an attack on the territory of Rhegium. A subsequent attempt, however, to crush the Athenian fleet in the harbour of Rhegium ended in the complete defeat of the Messanians. During the absence of the Athenian squadron at Camarina 106 where the philoSyracusan party were plotting a revolt, the Messanians made an attempt by land and sea upon Naxos, but the Naxians aided by the Sicels fell upon them when unpre­ pared, and inflicted a severe loss. The Athenians on their return make with their allies the Leontines an unsuccessful attempt to recover Messana, and then with­ draw to Rhegium, leaving the Siciliots for the present to settle their differences among themselves. Meanwhile Eurymedon and Sophocles, the two colleagues of Pytho­ dorus, had left Athens early in the same year, with instructions to call at Corcyra and assist the popular 104 See p . xxxiii, p . xxxvi. Their motives are stated by T h u c . Hi 115, 3 όίμα μ& ττγούμένοι θασσορ rbv έκεΐ πόλβμον καταλνθήσβσθαι, όίμα 8k βουλδμενοι μελέτην του ραυτικοϋ ποιεϊσθαι. 106 Introduction § 8 ρ. χχϋ. 105 INTRODUCTION xli party there against the oligarchs and having with them Demosthenes, who was authorised to use the services of the fleet for any operations he pleased on the coast of Peloponnesus. The fleet was delayed so long by the blockade of Sphacteria off the Laconian coast—where the Lacedaemonian hoplites were captured, one of the great events of the war—and by their after operations at Corcyra, that it did not reach Sicily until the autumn. In the course of the next year the operations of the Athenians were unexpectedly brought to a close, much to their chagrin, by the conclusion of a general peace, which was chiefly due to the exertions of the Syracusan Hermocrates 107 , who made a forcible appeal to Siceliot patriotism and persuaded the con- %ΙΫα°^ gress assembled at Gela that the aggressive schemes of Athens were directed against all Sicily, Ionians as much as Dorians, and that they should therefore abstain from inviting the intervention of stran­ gers, either as allies or as mediators108. The Athenian commanders had no choice but to accede to „ , ι r ι . _ . . ι · ι * ι General the terms of the pacification in which Athens reconductherself was included as well as her allies, and liferents. sailed with the fleet home. On their return Athenian they were received by their disappointed C O U n - drawn trymen with great indignation and impeached BC·*24 for collusion with the Sicilians. § 16. Renewed disturbances in Sicily B.C. 422 It was not long before another opportunity of regain­ ing their footing in the affairs of Sicily presented itself to the Athenians after the reconciliation of the Events at belligerents. The Leontines, apprehensive of Leontini renewed attacks from Syracuse, had resolved to place their city in a more defensible position by enrolling a large body of new citizens, and contemplated, as a subsidiary measure, a re-partition of their lands in 107 108 Thuc. iv 58. Thuc. iv 64, 3. xlii INTR OD UCTION order to provide allotments for these new settlers—a measure offensive of course to the rich aristocrats, who in consequence appealed to the Syracusan democracy to protect them against dispossession and by their aid ejected the commonalty109. They afterwards dismantled the town and transferred their abode to Syracuse, where they were enrolled as citizens. After a time, however, a party among them quitted Syracuse and returning settled at Bricinniae, a stronghold in the Leontine territory, and at Phocaeae a portion of the abandoned city itself, where, being joined by the greater part of the expelled popular party, they carried on war together against Syracuse. The Athenians, hearing of this state of things, despatched Phaeax and v , of Phaeax two other ambassadors in two galleys with inB.C. 422 structions to try to organise an anti-Syracusan party among the Siceliots, in order to save the Leontine commonalty. He was well received by the Camarinaeans who were afraid, and the Acragantines who were jealous, of Syracuse, but at Gela he met with such resolute opposition that he at once abandoned his mission. On Fate of ^ s w a y back through the interior he stopt at Leontine Bricinniae to animate the resistance of the exi es Leontines by assurances of aid. The exiles, however, received no benefit from his assurances, but were soon afterwards exterminated and their territory cleared and appropriated by the Syracusan s. After the peace of Nicias the Athenians seemed to have had no leisure or disposition to divide the Siceliots again until B.C. 416, when an incident happened which furnished them with a pretext for interference. A quarrel between the neighbouring towns Selinus and Egesta about a slice of borderland had ended in an appeal to arms. Selinus, with the assistance of Syracuse, was 109 Thuc. V 4, 1 AeovT?voc} απελθόντων 'Αθηναίων έκ Σικ€\ίας μετά την ξύμβασιν, πολίτας re eireypaxpavTo πολλούς KOLI 6 δήμος την yrjv eirevoei άναδάσασθαί· ol δέ δυνατοί αίσθόμενοι Συρακοσίους re έτι-ayovrai καϊ έκβάλλουσι τον δήμον. So the tyrant Gelon had combined with the aristocracy of Megara and Euboea sixty years before and sold the dimos of those towns into slavery. See p . xxvi. INTR OD UCTION xliii pressing hard upon her weaker neighbour by sea and land. The Egestaeans, on the strength of an alliance made with Lach6s ten years before110, fr™nassy made an urgent appeal to Athens to intervene ^ff^J0 in their defence. Their envoys, who came to Athens in the winter of B.C. 416-415, represented to the Athenians that the Syracusans, who had already annihilated Leontini, would subdue the whole island and then assist their kinsmen in Peloponnesus against Athens. They themselves engaged to defray the cost of the expedition, which should be sent to their relief. Supported by the Leontine exiles and by the powerful advocacy of Alcibiades, they prevailed so far as to get special Commissioners sent to ascertain the means of the town to fulfil these promises of subsidies and to report upon the state of the war with Selinus. § 17. The preliminary proceedings to the Sicilian Expedition The Commissioners returned from Egesta in the spring of 415 B.C. with favourable tidings—un­ aware of the deep-laid fraud which had been f ^ f practised upon them by the Egestaean citizens ™isf°£ers in the false display of wealth111. They brought Impression with them sixty talents of uncoined silver— ^ei^fpon one month's pay for a.fleet of sixty triremes,— as an earnest of the promised subsidies. With these representations the Athenian assembly no longer hesi­ tated, in spite of the opposition of Nicias112, SiciHan chiefly at the instigation of Alcibiades113. It expedition was determined to send forthwith sixty tri- ecree 110 Thuc. γ ι 6, 3. See § 15 p . xxxix. There is an interesting inscription, found among the ruins of the T e m p l e of Apollo at Selinus in 1871, containing the dedication of gold statues of certain deities by the people of Selinus as a thank-offering for a victory upon the conclusion of peace about 452 B.C. with the Egestaeans. Hicks Gr. Inscr. N o . 25. 111 Thuc. v i 8, 1 ; Diod. x n 83, 4. 112 H i s speech, T h u c . v i 9—14. 113 H i s speech, Thuc. v i 16—18. xliv INTRODUCTION remes to Sicily under three generals—Alcibiades, Nicias and Lamachus—for the relief of Egesta, for the reestablishment of the city of Leontini and for all other objects that might further the interests of Athens. Nicias had no desire for the command, for which the state of his health disqualified him. Even after tfMciaf ^ e decree w a s passed, he delivered a second speech in the assembly114 held to consider the details of the armament, urging them in defiance of law and precedent to reconsider their decision, and giving prominence to the difficulties of the undertaking and to the criminal folly of wasting their strength on a distant, enterprise, instead of reserving it for objects more strictly national. The impression, however, which his statement made on the assembly was the reverse of what he in­ tended. It only served to inflame the zeal of the Athe­ nians, and his final effort to deter them by insisting on preparations on a much larger scale than he thought they would grant, ended in their resolving to furnish all that the generals should consider necessary for the expe­ dition115. Thus the Athenians embarked upon the under­ taking with only a vague notion of its magnitude116, imagining in their overweening confidence that, as lords of the sea, this fancied El Dorado of the West ought to be under their dominion117, and misled by the glow114 H i s speech, T h u c . v i 20—23. Thuc. VI 26, ι άκούσαντες δ' ol f Αθηναίοι έψηφίσαντο ευθύς αυτοκράτορας είναι καΐ περί στρατιάς πλήθους καϊ,περί του παντόϊ πλου τους στρατη*γού$ πράσσειν η αν αύτοΐς δοκη. 116 T h u c . VI ι, ι άπειροι οι πολλοί βντες του με*γέθους της ρήσου καϊ των ένοικούντων του πλήθους καϊ 'Ελλήνων καΐ βαρβάρων, καϊ Οτι ού πολλφ τινι ύποδεέστερον πόλεμον άνηροϋντο ή τόν προς Σίελοποννησίους. Just when the expedition was starting, as T h u c . VI 30, 2 says, μάλλον αυτούς έσ^ει τα δεινά ή δτε έψηφίζοντο πλεΐν. 117 T h u c . VI 6, ι εφιέμενοι μεν τη αληθέστατη προφάσει της πάσης αρζαι, βοηθεΐν δ£ άμα εύπρεπώς βουλόμενοι τοις εαυτών ξυγΎενέσι και τοις προ^^ε'γενημένοις ξυμμάχοις. C p . the representations of the Athenian plans by Alcibiades to the Lacedaemonians v i 90, 2:—έπλεύσαμεν ες Σικελίαν πρώτον μεν, ει δυναίμεθα, Σικελιώτας καταστρεψόμενοι, μετά δ' εκείνους αϋθις καϊ Ίταλιώτας, έπειτα καϊ της Καρχηδονίων αρχής καϊ αύτων άποπειράσοντες. εΐ δε προχωρήσειε ταύτα ή πάντα ή και τα πλείω, ηδη TTJ ΙΙελοποννήσψ έμέλλομεν έπι115 INTRODUCTION xlv ing statements of Alcibiades118 and the demagogues and by the whole tribe of oracle-mongers and soothsayers119, who held out prospects of public aggrandisement and private enrichment 120 . § 18. The Sicilian expedition before the arrival of Gylippus in Sicily The stir and bustle of preparation began immediately both at Athens and in the ports and arsenals Prepara. of the allies, and continued for two or three tions/orthe months. There was a general enthusiasm, for- extedttton wardness and zeal to serve among all classes—trierarchs, seamen and hoplites. A large surplus had ac­ cumulated in the treasury during the five years suc­ ceeding the peace of Nicias121, and was available for the purposes of the expedition. The preparations for the sailing of the armament were nearly completed, when a mysterious event happened which turned the buoyant χ€ΐρήσ€ΐν, κομισάντβς ^ύμττασαν μ&ν ττ]ν eiceWev προσ^/ενομένην δύναμιν των 'Ελλήνων, πολλούς δέ βαρβάρους μισθωσάμενοι και "ϊβηρας κτλ. 118 H i s motives are laid bare by T h u c . v i 15, 1 : ivrjye <5e τροθυμότατα την στρατάαν . 'Αλκιβιάδης δ Κλανίου, βουλόμενος τφ re Νικία έναντιοϋσθαι, ών καΐ ές τάλλα διάφορος τά πολιτικά καΐ δτι αύτοϋ δια/3όλω$ έμνήσθη, καΐ μάλιστα στρατηγησαί re έπιθυμών, καΐ έλπίζων Σικελίαν re δι' αύτοϋ (sc. του στρατη^ησαι) καΐ Καρχηδόνα λήι/'εσΑαι καί τά 'ίδια άμα βύτνχήσας χμήμασί Τ6 καΐ δόξη ώφελήσειν. 119 T h u c . Vlil ι, ι says that the Athenians were very angry after the catastrophe at Syracuse with those who had promised them success: χαλεποί ήσαν τοΐς ξυμπροθυμηθεΐσι των ρητόρων τόν £κπλουν...ώ{νγίζθντο δβ καί τοις χρησμολόΎοις καί μάντεσι καί δπόσοι τι τότ6 αυτούς θειάσαντες έπήλπισαν ως λήψονται Σικελίαν. He alleges elsewhere ( π 65, 12) that the corrupting influence of the demagogues on the character of the Athenian people was to blame for the expedition, which, however, he admits, was not so much an error of judgment in the first instance, as a failure because it was mismanaged by the general in command and insufficiently supplied by the government at home. 120 Many joined the expedition οίόμενοι χρηματιεΐσθαι μάλλον ij μαχ€?(Γ0αι. See Thuc. v i l 13, 2. 121 A n inscription (Bockh CIG. P t II inscr. Att. no. 76) be­ longing to 421—415 B.C. proves that 3000 talents at least must have been laid by. For the rest, see Thuc. v i 30—31. xlvi INTRODUCTION cheerfulness of the Athenian public into gloom. It was Mutilation discovered o n e morning that nearly all the of the Her· Hermae, or stone busts of the god Hermes,— mae one of the peculiar features of Athens—had been defaced during the night122 by unknown hands.—Such a wholesale mutilation and unparalleled outrage caused an intense shock to the religious mind of Athens. The gross indignity offered to their guardian god—which exposed the whole state to the penalties of sacrilege until the divine displeasure could be appeased—filled the city with dismay and indignation. At another time the outrage might have been regarded as a thoughtless or drunken frolic, but its very completeness suggested the suspicion that it must have been the deliberate act of an organised gang of conspirators—a prelude to the subversion of the government 123 and its betrayal to some foreign foe by the oligarchical clubs. The affair might even have been a plot to ruin Alcibiades and to frustrate or delay the expedition, of which he was the prime mover. Commissioners were appointed to inquire into the affair and large rewards offered for the discovery of the perpe­ trators of the sacrilege, and revelation invited, with promise of impunity, of any other acts of impiety that had come within the informant's cognisance124. The armament was on the point of sailing and the flagship of 122 T h u c . VI 27, ι όσοι Έρμαΐ ήσαν λίθινοι έν ΤΎ} πόλει ΤΎ} 'Αθη­ ναίων—€ΐσΙ δέ κατά τό έπιχώριον, ή τετράγωνος εργασία, πολλοί καΙ έν Ιδίοις προθύροις και iv Ιεροΐς—μιφ νυκτΐ ol πλείστοι περιεκόπησαν τα πρόσωπα; Diodor. Χΐιι 2 ήδη του στόλου παρεσκευασμένου, τους Έρμα$ τους κατά την πόλιν παμπληθεΐς 'όντας συνέβη έν μι$ νυκτϊ περικοπήναι. 123 T h u c . ν ΐ 27, 3 και το πράγμα μειζόνως έλάμβα,νον* του re yap ε'κπλου οιωνός έδόκει είναι και επί ζυνωμοσία ά/χα νεωτέρων πραγ­ μάτων καΙ δήμου καταλύσεως γεγενήσθαι. Cf. c. 60, ι πάντα αύτοΐς (sc. τφ δήμω τφ των Αθηναίων) έδόκει έπϊ ζννωμοσία ολιγαρχική καϊ τυραννική πεπράχθαι; Diod. XIII 2 ό μέν οΰν δήμος ούχ ύπό των τυχόντων νομίσας γεγενήσθαι την πράξιν, άλλ' < 7Ο των προεχόντων ΧΓ ταΐς δό£αι$ έπϊ τη καταλύσει της δημοκρατίας, έμισοπονήρει καϊ τού$ πράξαντας έζήτει, μεγαλάς δωρεάς προθεϊς τφ μηνύσαντι. 124 T h u c . VI 27, 2 έψηφίσαντο, καϊ ε'ί τις άλλο τι οΐδεν άσέβημα γεγενημένον, μηνύειν άδεώς τόν βουλόμενον καϊ αστών καϊ ξένων και δούλων. INTROD xlvii UCTION Lamachus was already moored in the outer harbour 125 , and the last assembly prior to the departure of the generals was sitting, when effect was given Char gs to the suspicion which had been gather- against ing round Alcibiades by one Pythonicus who Alcibiades rose to denounce him as a criminal, guilty of a mock cele­ bration of the Eleusinian mysteries in a private house— an act which some were unreasoning enough to connect with the mutilation of the Hermae as part of a scheme for subverting the constitution. Alcibiades begged to be allowed to clear himself of these charges in- > . . , . , Λ , Λ . . τ . ° .. Alcibiades stantly, but his accusers urged that the expedi- demands tion should not be delayed on his account, but *^idmte that he should be recalled to be tried at a more convenient time, when the evidence was ready; they hoped meanwhile to poison the public mind against him by still more serious charges126. It was now the middle of the summer and the hun­ dred Attic galleys lay in port ready to sail. The DeMrture day of departure was fixed and at early morn- o/thearmaing the troops were marched down to the Dipy- ment lum to embark, almost the entire population of Athens— citizens, resident aliens and foreigners127—accompanying them and lining the shores of the harbour. It was an impressive sight, for such a mighty armada had rarely, if ever, sailed from any Greek port—unsurpassed, as it was, in the care and magnificence of its equipment128. The voice of the crowd was hushed, while the herald Solemnity uttered the solemn prayers for success, and liba- °fPartins tions were made both by the officers and men of every ship from vessels of gold and silver. The spectators on shore joined in the invocation and, the paean having been sung129, the armament moved slowly out of the harbour in 125 Andoc. de myst. § n ^c μ£ν yap εκκλησία TOLS στρατη~γοΐς rots els *Σικ€λΙαν...καΙ τριήρης η στρατηγίς ήδη έξώρμει η Ααμάχου. 126 T h u c . VI 29, 3 βουλόμενοί έκ μβίζονος διαβολής, ην £μ€λλον ρφον αύτοΰ απόντος πορί€Ϊν, μετάπβμπτον αυτόν ατγωνίσασθαι. 127 Thuc. VI 30, 2. 128 129 Thuc. vi 3ij 1; VII 12, 3· Thuc. vi 32, ι ; VII 75> 7*>Diod. χ ι π 3 αί μ& οΰν rpt-qprn xlviii INTR OD UCTION column, and then there was a race across the gulf to Aegina, whence they made straight for Corcyra. At Corcyra they found the contingents of their mari­ time allies, and the generals passed the whole $ter ¥j?t °f armament, now for the first time seen colmentatcor- lected, in review. It consisted of 134 galleys c £™\x^uly — s i x ty &φύηΕι f° r ty transports furnished by Athens, the rest by the Chians and other allies—with two BJhodians of lower rate, and one trans­ port with a troop of only thirty horse; besides the rowers there were on board 5100 hoplites—2200 from Athens, 500 Argives etc.—480 bowmen, 700 Rhodian 130 slingers, 120 Megarian exiles serving as light troops. In attendance on the fleet were 30 vessels with a cargo of provisions and a store of tools for fortification, bakers, masons and carpenters, and 100 boats, besides which a considerable number of private merchantmen and small craft not in the government service followed in the hope of making money by traffic with the seamen and soldiers131. If we reckon the crew of each trireme at 200 men, that of each penteconter at 120, and make a proper allowance of servants to the hoplites, the whole number of those who took actual part in the service of this expedition, exclusive of the merchantmen and their crews, was about 36,000. It was an imposing force, that was bound on its mission to the West, but its organisation was defective in two particulars; the num­ ber of light-armed troops was disproportionately small and the want of cavalry was a most fatal mistake. The Athenians expected to provide themselves with cavalry on the spot, forgetting that to do this would interfere with the quickness of their military operations—the most important factor of victory. παρ' Ολον τ6ν λιμένα τταρώρμονν κεκοσμημέναι rois επί reus πρφραις έπιστήμασι καΐ rrj Χαμπρότητι των 6ιτ\ων* 6 δε /ctf/cXos airas του λιμένος 'έ^εμε θνμιατηρίων και κρατήρων apyvp&v, έξ ων έκπώμασι χρυσοΐς ε'σπενδον οι τιμωντεε το θείον καϊ προσευχόμενοι κατατυχεΐν τη* στρατείας. 130 Cf. Thuc. ν π 57, 6. 131 Thuc. ν ι 43> 44* INTRODUCTION χΐίχ No plan of action had as yet been determined by the generals at Corcyra. They first sent three t0 ships forward to ascertain which of the towns ^f^ in Italy and Sicily were willing to receive Cold recepthem, but particularly to find out the actual ^taiiofcittfs amount of the promised subsidy from Egesta. Having then divided the whole fleet into three squadrons, one under each of the generals, they crossed the Ionic gulf to the Iapygian foreland and proceeded southward along the coast, without being received by any of the Italiot towns, to Rhegium, an Ionic colony on the Sicilian strait Here they expected at least a friendly recep­ tion as the city had been an ally of Athens in the last war, but the Rhegians—distrusting the Athenians and intimidated by the magnitude of their force—refused to receive the army into the town, though they furnished them with a market of provisions outside, and, when urged to join in redressing the wrongs of their kinsmen the Leontines, declined to commit themselves to any active policy without the concurrence of the other Italiots132. Here then the Athenians hauled their ships ashore and waited for the return of the three scout-ships from Egesta. The intelligence they brought of the trick which had been played upon the Athenian commis­ sioners, and that the pretended wealth of Egesta was a mere fiction, was most disheartening. In the council of war which followed, each of the generals proposed a different line of action. Nicias Hon of the was for sailing forthwith against Selinus, and, ^erah1 when they had got what supplies they could from the people of Egesta, staying until they had ad­ justed its quarrel with Selinus and then, after coasting the island and parading the power of Athens and her zealous interest in her allies, returning home 133 —unless some opportunity should present itself for serving the 132 Diod. X I I I 3 ol δέ (sc. 'ΡηΎΐνοή άπεκρίναρτο μετά των άλλων Ίτάλίωτών. 133 Thuc. ν ι 47 \ P l u t · Nic- c · i4> 3· Τ. VIT βονλςύσεσθαι d ι INTRODUCTION Leontines or establishing new alliances. Lamachus de­ clared that advantage should be taken of the first im­ pression created by the appearance of the fleet to strike an instant blow at the principal enemy while they were still unprepared. A considerable amount of booty would probably be found left in the country, on which their army could subsist, while the uninhabited town of Megara could be occupied as a naval station. A victory over the Syracusans would determine the immediate adhesion of the other Siceliots134. The plan suggested by Alcibiades was a middle course between the two extremes proposed by his colleagues. He insisted that they should first establish themselves in Sicily and, after exciting the Sicels to revolt and endeavouring to detach the Siceliot towns, especially Messana, from the Syracusan alliance, then proceed against Selinus and Syracuse, unless the former should come to terms with Egesta, and the latter restore the Leontines135. The plan of Lamachus, as far as we can judge, was the safest and best, but neither of his colleagues thought so, and, having to choose between their two plans, Lamachus went over to that of Alcibiades. Alcibiades then crossed the straits in his own galley to Messana, in the hope of winning its inhabitants to their cause, but, as he could obtain nothing more than the offer of a market for the troops outside the walls, he re-crossed to Rhegium, and then sailed with sixty galleys, leaving the rest of the fleet under the charge of Nicias, to Naxos, where they were cordially received as liberators, and thence to Catana, the second Ionic town, where they were refused admittance and obliged to moor their squadron for the night at the mouth of the Terias. On the next day they sailed with their ships in single column to make a demonstration in front of Syra­ cuse, while ten were despatched in advance into the Great Harbour to reconnoitre the city and observe the state 134 Thuc. VI 49, 4 τους dWovs Si/ceXicoras οϋτως τ}δη..ι<τφίσι. προσιέναι καΐ ού δίαμελλήσειν περισκοποΰρτας όπότεροι κρατήσουσι; Plut. Nic. c. 14, 8. 135 Thuc. VI 48 rjv μη 61 μεν 'l&yeaTaiois i-υμβαίρωσίν, ol δέ AeovHvovs έώσι κατοικίζειν. 1ί INTRODUCTION of the enemy's naval preparations. A proclamation, declaring that the Athenians were come to re-establish their kinsfolk and allies the Leontines and offering shelter to any who were residing at Syracuse, may or may not have been intended as a declaration of war136. They captured a Syracusan galley as it was crossing over to the town with the lists of the serviceable citizens from the Olympieion137, and the whole squadron then returned to Catana. There the Athenian soldiers effected an entrance into the town by accident, and so the anti-Syracusan party were dominant and Catana hence­ forth became the ally of Athens138. The whole armament was soon after brought over from Rhegium „ ,^ Λ ι ι· ι ι ι«ιο · ι ι ι Removal of and established its head-quarters there, the entire Shortly after it coasted to Camarina, news ·ζ%}α%α having reached the Athenian commanders that the presence of the fleet might induce the Camarinaeans, who in the former war had befriended the Leontines, to declare against Syracuse. But the Camarinaeans refused them admission, pleading their obligation by treaty to receive only one ship of the Athenians unless they required more140. The Athenians therefore had to return to Catana. Gn their way back they made a descent on the Syracusan territory, and here for the first time encountered the Syracusan cavalry and light troops, who cut off some of the marauders. When they reached Catana, they found the state-galley Recall of Salaminia waiting to convey Alcibiades and AiciUades others to Athens to be put on their trial for a profana­ tion of the mysteries. 136 137 138 Thuc. vi 50, 4. Plut. Nic. c. 14, 5. Thuc. v i 5 1 ; Diod. XIII 4 των δβ Καταναίων els μϊν ττολιν ού δεχόμενων roi)s στρατιώτας, τους δέ στρατη'γούς έασάντων είσέΚθέίν καΐ τταρασχομένων έκκλησίαν, ol στρατη*γοΙ των Αθηναίων περί συμ­ μαχίας BieXayovTo. δημη-γοροϋντος δε του Άλκιβιάδου, των στρα­ τιωτών Tives διελόντες πυΧίδα τταρβισέπεσον els τήν πο\ιν, δι* t\v αΐτίαν ήνα~γκάσθησαν ol Καταναΐοι κοινωνεΐν του κατά των Συρακοσίων πολέμου. 139 T h u c . v i c. 51) 3· Cf. ν ι ι c. 42, 3ι40 Thuc. v i c. 52, ι . Cf. ν ι ι c. 33, 1; c. 5 8 , 1 ; Diod. x m 4· d 2 IN7R0DUCTI0N Hi After their departure the plan of negotiation proposed by Alcibiades was unfortunately abanΛ. of Nicias doned. Nicias, bent on a personal inspection "machus °^ the s t a t e °^ things at Egesta, proceeded along the north coast of Sicily with his arma­ ment in two divisions—one under each general. At Himera, the only Greek town on that coast, they were refused admittance, but further westward they captured Hyccara 141 , a small town of the Sicanians who were at war with the Egestaeans. The place was handed over to the Egestaeans, whose cavalry had taken part in the attack on the place; the population were carried away by the Athenians to be sold as slaves142; the fleet sailed back with the captives, while Nicias—after his return from Egesta, where he could only get 30 talents—led the land-force back to Catana through the country of the Sicels, with whom he established friendly relations. Soon afterwards they sent round to the Sicels on the coast for reinforcements, but they suffered a repulse in an assault on the Sicel post of Hybla Geleatis143. Thus three months had passed away without anything important being even attempted. Instead of making a vigorous attack on Syracuse, the fleet moved hither and thither looking out for allies and making attacks on some small states, in one case unsuccessfully. The Syracusans meanwhile had begun to look with contempt on a fleet which, though so splendidly equipped, could not even capture the insignificant post of Hybla, and their fear was changed into excessive confidence. They demanded to be led against the enemy. Nicias took advantage of this confidence to lay a snare of Nicias for them. H e sent a Catanian with a pre^tanL Ca' tended message from the philo-Syracusan party in the town urging the Syracusans to take the Athenian camp by surprise on a certain day, when they would aid them by closing the gates, cutting off all the Λ, 141 142 143 Thuc. vi 62, 3; Plut. Nic. c. 15, 4. Cf. Thuc. VII 13, 2. Thuc. vi 62, 5. INTR OD UCTTON liii Athenians within the town and setting fire to their ships144. The stratagem succeeded. The entire Syracusan force set out for Catana, only to find on their Landin arrival that the Athenian generals had taken of the advantage of their absence to sail during the ^™ι™ night into the Great Harbour. The troops the Great were disembarked unopposed at a point south of the river Anapus—the bridge over which they cut, to prevent any advance upon their flank from its right bank—in front of the steep eminence of the Olympieion about a mile from the city. The position was also pro­ tected by various obstacles besides the steep—houses, walls and trees and the Lysimeleian marsh; while a hasty fence of wood and stone was thrown up touching the shore at the point called Dascon145, to protect their rear, and the ships were screened with a palisade work. In the evening of the day on which the Athenians had landed, the Syracusan cavalry, returning from their fruitless expedition to Catana, advanced towards the Olympieion and were followed soon afterwards by the infantry, but finding the Athenians not disposed to attack them, retired to take up their night-quarters on the other side of the causeway which led across the marshes to Helorus on the East coast. On the next morning the Athenians gave battle and, after an obstinate Victory conflict, gained a complete victory, though of the they were prevented from availing themselves Athemans thoroughly of their advantage by the enemy's cavalry, which checked all. those who pressed forward and en­ abled the infantry to rally on the Helorine causeway and to retreat in safety, after telling off a detachment to guard the treasures in the temple of Zeus Olympius. The Athenians did not follow up their success, but their victory was barren of result. The autumn was not the proper time of the year for beginning a difficult and expensive siege, which was the only way in which 144 145 Thuc. vi 64, 2; Plut. Ntc. c, 16, 2. See Plan of Syracuse facing p. 1. INTRODUCTION Ην Syracuse could be taken; the position which they then occupied was not near enough to the city, and they were on the wrong side of the Anapus; they could not hope to carry on the war successfully with Syracuse without cavalry and without money146. The generals therefore re-embarked their whole force and sailed away on the following day to Catana, whence, after depositing the spoil, they shortly proceeded to Messana, hoping to get possession of that town. But here they experienced for the first time the ill effects of the vindictive treachery of Alcibiades, who had put the philo-Syracusan party on their guard and enabled them to overpower their oppo­ nents. After waiting thirteen days before the city to no purpose they returned to Naxos for the winter, The A the- and sent a galley to Athens for a supply of er m o n e ™*Naxos y a n d of cavalry in readiness for the spring campaign. During the winter months little or nothing was done. They induced the autono­ mous Sicels in the interior, especially the powerful prince Archonides147, to send provisions and even money to the camp, and compelled some of the refractory tribes to do the same. They also actually sued for the alliance of Carthage and obtained offers of assistance from some of the Tyrrhenian maritime cities148. The attempt to draw Camarina into their alliance was renewed149. The Camarinaeans had already betrayed their lukewarmness in the Syracusan cause by the scanty succours they had sent in the recent engagement, and they might be tempted to side openly with the Athenians after their recent suc­ cess. But Hermocrates was sent as envoy to counteract their efforts, and the Camarinaeans being suspicious of both parties resolved to observe a strict neutrality. To the Sicels and Egestaeans they sent orders for a supply of as many horses as possible, and for bricks and all the requisite materials for the wall of circum146 147 148 Thuc. vi 71, 2. Cf. Thuc. VII 1, 4. Thuc. vi 88, 6. Cf. VII 53, 2; 103, 2. See Introd. § 13 p. xxxiv. 149 See Introd. § 18 p. li. INTR OD UCTION lv vallation to be commenced in the spring 149 . As the spring approached, the Athenian generals transferred their position from Naxos to Catana, repairing the tents and camp there, which had been destroyed by the Syracusans150. Meanwhile the Syracusans utilised the delay of the Athenians. By the advice of Hermocrates they ^ reduced the number of their generals from Uons/or fifteen to three, so as to secure greater unity ^yracut/ in the conduct of the war. They fortified the deserted site of Megara, which commanded the approach to Syracuse from the North, placed a garrison in the Olympieion, and palisaded all the places adapted to debarkation161. They also enlarged the line of their fortifications on the land-side fronting Epipolae, with the view of preventing the Athenians, should they obtain possession of that height, from making a circumvallation in the narrowest and easiest part. A new wall was built, therefore, covering both their inner and outer city and stretching far enough to enclose within it the southwestern suburb Temenites and the adjoining cliff— afterwards known and fortified as Neapolis—and joining the old wall of Achradina some distance north of the Harbour, so that Syracuse was assailable only from the side of Epipolae 152 . They also sent ambassadors to Corinth and Sparta to beg for assistance. At Sparta they found a zealous advocate in Alcibiades, who had made his way thither from Thuni by way of the Elean port of Cyllene. He endeavoured to rouse the activity of Sparta by disclosing the real designs of Athens, which, as he professed, were to make,the reduction of Syracuse a stepping-stone to the subjugation of Greece and gradually to an universal empire. H e advised them to lose no time in sending a Spartan commander with a body of troops to Sicily, and to strike a fatal blow at Athens by occupying Deceleia 150 151 152 Thuc. vi 88, 6. Thuc. vi 88, 5. Thuc. vi 75, 1. INTR 0Ό lvi UCTION as a p e r m a n e n t fortified post in Attica 1 5 3 . T h e Spartans were predisposed to take the advice of Alcibiades a b o u t Deceleia, having already contemplated an invasion of Attica 164 . But, u n d e r a sense of i m m i n e n t danger, they a p p o i n t e d Gylippus a Spartiate—whose inmufGyi- i* a t n e r Cleandridas h a d lived in exile as a citizen i&us to the of Thurii 1 5 5 —to take the c o m m a n d of the Syracommctn c U S a n a n c i confederate forces. H e was to sail to Sicily as speedily as possible with such succours as h e could raise in concert with the Corinthians, leaving t h e rest to follow while h e a n i m a t e d the Syracusans by his presence 1 5 6 . 4 Gylippus accordingly directed the Corinthians to send two of their galleys to meet him at Asine on the Messenian coast, that he might begin his voyage without delay, while they completed their preparations for the relief of Syracuse. About the same time the galley which had been sent to Athens for supplies and reinforcements arrived there; and the Athenians voted 300 talents, a squadron of 250 cavalry and thirty horse-bowmen for the prosecution of the war. T h e men however were sent without horses, which were to be procured in Sicily 157 . These succours were found at Catana Petty opera- in the spring by the Athenian armament on its twns of the r e t u r n from an expedition in which it had made in Sicily an unsuccessful attempt on the Syracusan fortress B.C. 414 at Megara (recently garrisoned), had reduced the Sicel town, Centoripa 158 , and had ravaged a part of the enemy's territory 15V H e r m o c r a t e s a n d his two colleagues, Sicanus 1 6 0 a n d Heracleides, hearing of t h e arrival of t h e reinforcement from Athens a n d concluding that besieging operations would soon begin, concerted measures for guarding t h e approaches to E p i p o l a e — t h e elevated plain, which im­ mediately adjoined t h e city to the westward, rising in the 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 Thuc. vi 88, 9; Diod. x i n 5. Thuc. vi 91, 6. Cf. VII 18, 1 ; 27, 3. Thuc. vi 104, 2. Thuc. vi 93, 2f. Cf. VII 2, 1. Thuc. vi 74, 4. Thuc. vi 94, 3. Cf. VII 32, 1. Thirlwall Hist. Gr. Vol. ill p. 407. Thuc. VII. 46; 70, 1. INTRODUCTION Mi form of a triangle—of which Euryelus was the apex to the west, and its base the western wall of Achradina—and broken off abruptly by lines of limestone cliff about fifteen or twenty feet high and quite precipitous, except in a few openings made for convenience of ascent. An enemy in possession of this high ground was in a position to construct a wall of circumvallation parallel with the Syracusan new west wall161, running north and south— which was the only way in which, according to the war­ fare of the time, Syracuse could be taken so as to cut off its supplies by land, and at the same time to blockade it by sea. As it was most important for the Syracusans to prevent the enemy from occupying Epipolae, since their city was assailable only from this side, it was resolved to occupy the heights, so as to obstruct their various approaches, with a body of 600 picked men under the command of Diomilus, an Andrian exile. One morning this corps, with the remainder of the Syracusan forces, were being reviewed on the low ground on the left bank of the Anapus before marching to the summit, when they were apprised that the Athenians were already in possession of it. Nicias and Lamachus— the main road being blocked by Megara—had sailed from Catana during the preceding night to Leon, a land­ ing-place less than a mile from Epipolae, where their hoplites were landed unopposed, while their fleet was placed in safety, under the protection of a palisade across the narrow and low isthmus of Thapsus. The hoplites, as soon as it was light, hastened to ascend to the Hog's back, called Euryelus162 or * Broad Nail,' the furthest point of Epipolae from the city, and, having TkeAtkeni_ less than a third of the distance which the Syra- ans surprise cusans had to perform starting from their place E^olae of muster, gained the high ground first. The Syracusans hurried up the slope to retake the position, but with ranks disordered by their rapid pace, so that the Athe­ nians, attacking them from their vantage ground, easily 161 See Thuc. vi 75, 1; 100, 2. The wall is marked προτβίχισμα in the Plan of Syracuse facing p. 1. 162 Thuc. vi 97, 2. Cf. vii 2, 3. lviii INTROD UCTION defeated them, Diomilus with half his corps being slain. The next day Nicias and Lamachus marched down the slope of Epipolae and offered battle, but, as the enemy did not accept the challenge, returned; after which they proceeded to construct a fort for the security of their stores and treasure at a point called Labdalum 163 on the edge of the cliff looking northward towards Megara. The arrival of the reinforcements from Egesta and their other allies had raised the number of their cavalry to 650, and they were now ready to begin the work of circumvallation. The isthmus by which Syracuse (Achradina) is joined to Sicily was about 13,000 feet broad : it required there­ fore a great wall to span it. Besides, where the Athe­ nian wall would touch the Great Harbour, there was a marshy low ground, which rendered the operation of building very difficult; and south-west of this marsh, on the right of the mouth of the Anapus, the Syracusans had had the foresight to raise and garrison a fort at Olympieion. This was likely to be a thorn in the side of the Athenians, when working at the continuation of their wall on the lower ground, and they must either storm it or build a double wall between Epipolae and the Harbour, so as to be protected on both sides. In these circum­ stances, as they were operating against a city which counted more armed men than the besiegers—threatened in their flank by an advanced post, and in presence of an enemy, who were not always detained by fear within their lines—in order to build a wall nearly four miles long, their first care must be to erect a fort at some point as nearly as possible in the centre of the proposed lines. They fixed upon a place called Syke from the number operations °f fig-trees which grew there, and built a fortibeforeSyra- fied enclosure (κύκλος)164, covering a considerTa7ied W°the able space, as the point of junction and key of circle' the two lines, which were to run on the one side to the sea by Trogilus and on the other to the Har163 Nicias allowed Gylippus to capture this fort soon after his arrival, Thuc. vil 3, 4. 164 Thuc. vi 98, 2; VII 2, 4· INTROD UCTION lix bour. The Athenians—who surpassed all other Greeks in the skill and care with which they executed fortifica­ tions 365 —astonished the besieged by the rapidity of their work and filled them with consternation. In vain did they march their forces out in order to interrupt it, ex­ pecting to take the enemy by surprise, for, when the Athenians relinquishing their work drew up in battle order, the Syracusan generals struck with their superior array as compared with the disorder fanSSy/e/eatand unevenness of their own ranks, beat a hasty ed *» a caretreat into the city, leaving only a squadron of hunter horse to harass the workmen. But the Athenian cavalry, supported by a battalion of foot, charged the Syra­ cusan horse and drove them off with some loss166 and erected a trophy. The next day the Athenians set to work at the wall of circumvallation, beginning with the portion north of the 'Circle,' because they would be thus nearer their fleet and their whole position would be more secured by this fortification. The Syracusans, after their recent experience, took the advice of Hermocrates and gave up all thoughts of facing the enemy in the open field, and resolved to baffle the besiegers by carrying a line of counter-wall across the line of their projected circumvallation, so as to impede its further progress167. They took their ^er-waiiunof start from* the postern-gate in their new wall near the symcuthe grove of Apollo Temenites—the sacred olive trees in which were used as materials—lower down on Epipolae than the Athenian ' Circle/ and carried their cross work—topped with wooden towers for the discharge 165 Grote refers to T h u c . ν 75—82 and Xen. Hell, i v 18 for examples. 166 Diod. XIII 7 κατασκενάσαντες δε περί τό Αάβδαλον όχύρωμα την πάλιν των Ένρακοσίων άπετείχιξον καΐ πολύν φόβον τοις Σνρακοσίοις επέστησαν, δώπερ έπεξελθόντες έκ της πόλεως επεχείρησαν δίακωλύειν τους οίκοδομονντας τό τείχος' *γενομένης δ' Ιππομαχίας συχνούς άποβαλόντες έτράπησαν. Grote {Hist. Gr. VII p . 341) observes that this is the only occasion on which we read of the Athenian cavalry being brought into action. 167 Thuc. v i 99, 2. This cross wall is marked ύποτείχίσμα a in Plan of Syracuse facing p . 1. INTR OD UCTION lx of missiles and protected by a palisade in front—to the edge of the southern cliff, so that it could not be turned. The Athenian generals allowed the cross-work to go on without interruption, for fear of delaying their own work or dividing their forces. But, when it was completed and the enemy left only a single phyle* to guard it, they saw their opportunity and prepared an assault at midday, when the guard relaxed in vigilance. The 300 picked hoplites, told off for the attack, captured both stockade and counter-wall, and the whole army prot d^oyednd ceeded to pull down and to carry away the palisade as material for their own wall. To prevent any further attempt of this kind, the Athe­ nian generals saw the necessity of leaving their Furtherpro- north wall unfinished, considering themselves e siege sufficiently secured by their advantage of ground—and working that which was to be carried in a southern direction from 'The Circle.' They first fortified a point on the southern cliff, in the line of their blockading wall, as a defensive position, that the enemy might not employ the cliff as a flank defence for another counter-wall, and that a safe communication might be open between the southern cliff and the low ground or marsh which lay between it and the harbour. The Syracusans thereupon resolved to carry a ditch and a palisade across this low ground in a southcounterwork westerly direction, beginning from the lower of the Syra- portion of their own city walls, so that the becusans x . . . . . J , 7 .. . siegers might be shut out from reaching the Harbour 168 . The Athenians did not interrupt them at first; but, when they had finished their own work on the south cliff, they descended at dawn under the command of Lamachus to the marsh, having provided themselves with broad planks for laying down on the mud to prevent 168 Thuc. VI 101, 2. It is marked ύποτβίχισμα β' in Plan of Syracuse facing p. 1. It was obviously more easy for the Syra­ cusans to make their cross-work here, where they were free on the side of the Harbour—the Athenian fleet being still at Thapsus— than to carry a counter-wall through the Athenian lines on Epipolae, where they would have the disadvantage of working up hill. INTROD UCTION lxi loss of time, and fell upon the new palisade and ditch, and dislodged its defenders before the arrival of the fleet which had been ordered to sail from Thapsus into the Harbour. A general action ensued in which the superior discipline of the Athenians again prevailed: the Syracusans on the right wing fled towards the city, those on the left, including most of their horsemen, made for the bridge over the Anapus, hoping to reach the Olympieion169, where they would be safe. The 300 picked troops of the Athenians, in their haste to get to the bridge before them, fell into disorder and were driven back by the Syracusan horse upon the Athenian right wing, to which they communicated their own panic. Lamachus, who was in the left wing, hastened to the rescue with a small body of archers and Argive hoplites, but, having in his eagerness crossed a ditch with only a ^achu{La' few followers before the remaining troops could follow him, he was slain and his dead body carried off by the Syracusans170. The fugitives of the Syracusan right wing, observing this, came forth from the town to renew the contest, and their generals attempted a diversion by sending a detachment to attack the Athenian 4 Circle,' which they hoped to surprise. They succeeded in taking and destroying the redoubt or covering outwork in front, 1000 feet broad, and TheSyracu· would probably have overpowered the gar- to take the rison of the ' Circle' itself, but for the presence if0hrekfanoti of Nicias, who had been prevented by illness Epipoiae, from accompanying his colleague. H e order- effecT* °U* ed the camp-followers to set fire to the battering engines and the timber which lay in front of the Circle-wall. The flames stopped all further advance of the assailants, and, when the Athenians returned victorious from the field of battle below, they retreated before them into the town. A t the same time the sight of the Athenian fleet—which had been ordered The A theround from Thapsus with a view to co-opera- %%£.s -#ej£ tion—entering the Harbour, so that they were Harbour 169 170 Cf. Thuc. VII 37, 2; 42,6. Time, vi 101, 5: Plut. Nic. c. 18, 2. lxii INTRO D UCTION threatened on a new side, added to their discouragement and extinguished all hope of obstructing the Athenian circumvallation with their present means. This battle brings to an end the period—about three months—of the siege, in which the Athenian generals really did what was incumbent upon them to do. They were now in the full tide of success171. From the occupation of Epipolae to the recent battle the operations had been conducted with sufficient vigour and unremitting perseverance: henceforward the right course is not always adopted and they are always behindhand with events. It is clear that the death of Lamachus made all Vt^aTions^ ^he difference. Nicias had no perception of the after the value of time. H e had, it is true, a knowledge fa^machus a n d experience of siege operations. But he did not turn to adequate account his present position; he seemed to consider success as assured, and that it did not much matter whether the building of the walls was finished a month sooner or later. Too much time was spent over that portion of them extending across the low ground, which was built at first as a double wall172, whereas they might have completed the entire line of blockade with a single wall before the arrival of Gylippus, leaving the whole or any part of it to be doubled afterwards. For the moment indeed their prospects were as triumphant as those of the Syracusans were gloomy. Their negotiations in the beginning of the winter began to bear fruit. Many Sicel tribes, who had before wavered, now tendered their allegiance; the Tyrrhenes sent three armed penteconters. Provisions came to them in abundance from the Italian Greeks. The Syracusans, on the other hand, were in trje depth of despair; they had at'syracme lost all confidence in themselves. They were afraid to encounter their enemies again in the open field; their Siceliot allies were too disunited to be of much use; their only hope lay in help from the Peloponnesus; but the blockade wall would soon be completed, and then how would any succours, if they came, find 171 172 Thuc. v n i i , i. Thuc. v n 2, 4 . INTRODUCTION lxiii their way in? They ascribed their reverses to the treachery and ill-luck of their generals and deposed them from their office. The question of surrender even began to be openly discussed, and overtures secretly made to Nicias173, the more readily because there was a suspicion of treasonable practices in the city. The enemy's capi­ tulation appeared to Nicias inevitable, and this feeling of immunity from danger fostered that remissness and dilatoriness to which his natural temperament, aggravated by a serious internal malady, made him prone174. Unfortu­ nately for himself and his army he committed the fatal error of neglecting to occupy and fortify the high and narrow pass of Euryelus, so allowing the Spartiate Gylippus to enter with the long-expected relief. We left that officer at Asine175 on the coast of Messenia. Here he had equipped two Laconian Progress of galleys, and two others came with the Corin- Gyifyfr** thian captain Pythen. With these four ships they sailed at midsummer to Leucas, where the intelligence received led them to believe that Syracuse was now completely invested and that circumstances there were hopeless. But, remembering the revelations made by Alcibiades of the projects of the Athenians, Gylippus considered it his duty to do what he could to save the cities of Italy at least176. H e pushed therefore at once across the Ionian gulf with his little squadron to Taras, leaving the main squadron—which consisted of ten Corinthian galleys, two from Leucas and three from Ambracia177—to follow, when ready. From Taras he passed on to Thurii, but, as the people of that town, despising his small force, gave him a cold reception, he continued his voyage further southward. But be173 T h u c . VI 103, 3 ; VII 2, 1; 49, 1 ; Plut. Nic. c. 18, 4 πόλεις μεθίσταντο καΐ πλοία μεστά σίτου πόλλαχόθεν ηλθεν els τό στρατό­ πεδο?, TOIS πρά-γμασιν ευ φερομένου πάντων προστιθεμένων καϊ \oyoi τινε$ ήδη παρά των Συρακούσιων έγίνοντο περί συμβάσεως προς αυτόν άπε^νωκοτων την πάλιν. 174 Plut. Nic. c. 18, 6. 175 See p . lvi. 176 T h u c < v i 104, ι την Ίταλίαν βουλόμενος περιποιησαι. 177 Thuc. vi T04, ι ; νιι 4, 7; 7, ι. lxi v INTR 0Ό UCTION fore he reached Locri, he was driven out to sea by a violent gust of wind from the North, and with some diffi­ culty made Taras again, where he was forced to stay awhile to refit. News of his approach had preceded him to the Athenian camp, but Nicias treated with contempt the idea of four galleys coming to attack the Athenian fleet, and neglected to take the simple precau­ tion of sending a small squadron to watch or intercept him. What momentous issues followed from this error of judgment, of which he was unconscious to the last178, the reader will learn from t h e διηγήσεις ας Θουκυδίδης αυτός αυτού irepi ταύτα τταθητικωτατος εναργέστατος ποικιλωτατος γενόμενος άμιμητως εζήνεγκε. 178 See his own letter Thuc. ν π 15, i. ADDENDA ET CORRIGENDA P. 9 3 . c. π § 4 1. 26 add:—It is agreed that the words τω άλλω τοΰ κύκλου irpos τον Τρώγιλον must refer to the remainder of the wall north of the round fort on the Trogilus side. Without από, there are two ways of taking the text, neither of them satis­ factory;—(i) that of Grote who takes τφ &. του κ. to be equivalent to έτέρωθι του κύκλου, * on the other side of the κ. \ but this seems too great a strain on the words; or (2) that of W. W. Goodwin who makes του κύκλου depend on Τρώ-γίλον ' on the Trogilus side of the κ.', but this would require τφ προς TOP T. The objection to Mr Merchant's reading ανω is that it leaves του κύκλου without any government. P. 9 5 . c. i n § 3 1. 14 add:—Freeman, Hist. Sic. in. p. 244, understands Thuc. to mean ' withdrew further westward to the wider ground'. He thinks that Gylippus, who had till now been east of the Athenian lines, had to march out round the north of them, to avoid collision with the Athenians in the narrow space between their forts and the city walls. P. 105. c. VI § 2 1. 16 add:—Plutarch Mor. p. 870 c τα λέοντα, της Σαλάμια*. P. 1 0 6 . c. vii § ι 1. 6 add:—Freeman sees no difficulty in μέχρι. i The έ*γκάρσιον τείχος ' he says * had been carried westward beyond the Athenian wall. The wider παρατάχισμα, of which it was to be a part, τό δια των Έπιπολών τείχος in its fullest growth, had been begun at the west end by the fort on Euryalos. There was still a gap (τό λοιπόν), which the new-comers helped to fill up, building eastward till they met the wall which had been begun at the east. Nothing can better express this than the words μέχρι του εγκαρσίου τείχους '. P. 107. c. vii § 3 1. 15 add:—Mr Marchant's conjecture φ αν ivr) (quoquo modo fieri fiossii) όλκάσιν κ.τ.λ. commends itself by its simplicity; but that of C. F. Μtillerin Neue Jahrbuchf. cl. Phil. u. Paedagogik Bd. 141 1890 p. 366:—όπως σ. £". πβραιωθη τρ. φαν έν όλκάσιν...ή άλλως πως αν προχωρά, where the second αν is epanaleptic, is to be preferred. P. 111. c. X 1. δ add:—His proper title was ό Ύραμματεύς της βουλής καί του δήμου. See Transactions of Cambridge Phil. Soc. 1891 p. 18; also G. Busolt Der Staat der Athener (Miiller's Handb.) p. 255 and Sandys' note to Aristot. Ά0. πόλ. c. 54, 5. T. VII e lxvi ADDENDA ET CORRIGENDA P . 1 1 7 . c. x i v § 2 1. 5 add:—πάντων άττορώτατον: cf. Ill 37, 3 πάντων δεινότατον, IV 11 4 πάντων φανερώτατος, c 62, 4 πάντων σφαΚερώτατον, VI 4°> Σ w πάντων άξυνετώτατοι, VIII 96, 5 πάντων ξυμφορώτατοι πολεμησαι. Ρ . 1 1 8 . c XIV § 3 1· 17 β<2^;—But in favour of retaining 0 πδ\εμοςί cp. Plutarch Sertorius c. 5, 4 διαπολεμηθέντος του ποΧέμου, Lucull. c. 6, 4 έκείνω φέροντες ενεχείρισαν τον Μ,ιθριδατικόν πδΧεμον ως ύ0' έτερου μηδενός άμεινον διαποΧεμηθηναι δυνάμενον, Nic. c. 9» 6 ws rpls εννέα, %τη διαποΧεμηθηναι πέπρωται τόν πδλεμον. Ρ . 1 1 9 . c χ ν § ι 1. 3 add:—When a participle is preceded by ws, it always takes ού as its negative; μή is here used, as in c. 77, 7, because of the imperative in the principal clause. P . 1 2 1 . c. x v § 2 1. 17 add:—For similar instances of a participle being understood from the context, see III 16 4 άνεχώρησαν.,.έπεί καϊ εκείνους εΐδον sc. άνακεχωρηκδτας, II 11, 8 την των πέΧας δηοΰν μάΧ· Χον τ} την εαυτών όράν sc. δηουμένην, c 86, 4 ώρμίσαντο καϊ αυτοί... επειδή καϊ τους Αθηναίους εΐδον sc. δρμισαμένους. Ρ . 1 2 3 . c XVII § 3 1· 14 after ποιησδμενοι add:—11 91» * παρεσκευάζοντο άμυνούμενοι, V 8, 2 τέχνη παρεσκευάζετο επιθησόμενος, VIII 59> * παρεσκευάζετο τάς Φοινίσσας ναϋς άξων, Xen. HelL IV ι 41 παρεσκευάζετο πορευσόμενος ως δύναιτο άνωτάτω. P . I S O . c χ ι χ § 5 1. 38 add:—A, Philippi of Giessen (Neue yahrbiicher fur Philol. und Paed. 1881 pp. 95—102) would excise the sentence όπως μη—τόν νουν 'έχωσιν, as unnecessary. P . 1 3 3 . c. x x i § 3 1. 11 add:—Goetz Quaest. de gen. usu Thuc. p . 61 would read μη άθυμεΐν του ταΐς ναυσΐ επιχειρήσει προς τους 'Αθηναίους (us persuasit) ne animos mitterent, quod navibus cum Atheniensibus pugnaturi essent, assigning the same construction to άθυμεΐν as to ά^εΐν, χαΧεπως φέρειν etc. P . 1 3 6 . c. XXII § 1 1. 10 after chores add:—II 9 1 , 1 ai δε εϊκοσι νηες...ϊσχουσαι άντίπρωροι.,.παρεσκευάξΌντο άμυνούμενοι, § 4 ατάκτως διώκοντες δια τό κρατεΐν αΧ μέν τίνες των νέων καθεΐσαι τάς κώπας επέστησαν του πλου, άξύμφορον δρώντες.. ,βουΧόμενοι. irpos TCIS IVTOS sc. του μεγάλου Χιμένος ναϋς των Έυρακοσίων. 1. 11 add:—Freeman i n p . 283 takes it in a different sense. ' T h e plan was that the one division should sail across the Great Harbour, while the other sailed round the Island, so as to attack the Athenian fleet o n b o t h s i d e s at once.' c. x x i i i § 1 1. 1 add:—'He could have reached Plemmyrion from the hill only by going round the Athenian fort to the west, and then skirting the shore of the Great H a r b o u r . There he doubtless took the horsemen stationed at the Olympieion into his c o m p a n y ' {Freeman). P . 1 3 8 . c. x x i i i § 3 1. 20 add:—ύφ' ships in the Great Harbour, c. 22, 2. <ον...€νικώντο i.e. the.35 ADDEAWA ET CORRIGENDA lxvii 1. 26. τρόιταιον rots Ά . γίγνεσθαι. P . 2 0 1 . c. L § 3 1. 33 add:—Diodorus ( X I I I 12, 5) is here very emphatic and vivid: όμογνωμόνων δε Οντων των στρατηγών, ol στρατιώται τα σκεύη ένετίθεντο καϊ τάς τριήρεις πληρώσαντες ηρον τάς^κεραίας' καϊ παρήγγειλαν οι στρατηγοί τοις πλήθεσιν, όταν σημήνη, μηδένα των κατά το στρατόπεδον ύστερεΐν, ως άπολειφθησόμενον τον βραδύνοντα. This is surely a piece from Philistos. T h e higher criticism might say that Thucydides and Philistos copied from a common source, as the words δταν σημήνη are found in both (Freeman). P . 2 0 3 . c. Li § 1 1. 7 add:—4ΐΓΐβουλ€ΰσ-ο.ι, ' p r o j e c t e d ' , ' m a d e (secret) plans for '. Cf. V I I I 60, ι έπιβονλεύοντες άπόστασιν της Έίύβοίας, i l l 1095 3 ΤΨ αποχώρησιν.. Απεβούλενον. Ρ . 2 0 4 . c. Li § 2 1. 19 add:—Parties of both horsemen and heavy-armed sallied from posterns in the (Athenian) wall, only to be put to flight and chased by the horse of Syracuse. In that swampy ground the solid path was narrow and so was the entrance to the ADDENDA E Τ CORRIGENDA lxxi Athenian camp. Most of the foot escaped; but of the knights of Athens, the high-born comrades of Alcibiades, seventy, if they did not perish themselves, at least left their horses to become, by an odd irony of fate, the spoil of the Syracusans {Freeman). P . 2 0 4 . c. L I I § ι 1. 4 add:—The Syracusans had for a while, ever since the coming of Demosthenes and Eurymedon, shrunk from any naval encounters. They dreaded the superior numbers of the invaders, strengthened as they were by the new-comers, c. 55, 1 {Freeman). P . 2 0 5 . c. L i n § 1 1. 4 add:—When the news of the Syracusan success, and the news of the death of one of the Athenian Commanders, spread through the Syracusan fleet, its whole force pressed on the Athenians left under Euthydemos. They gave way and were driven to the shore. They failed to reach that part of it which was pro­ tected by their walls and palisade; they were chased to the muddy shore and the shallow waters between it and the promontory of Daskon {Freeman). 1. 5 add:—Of the two participles joined to one finite verb both are causal, the one primarily, the other subordinately: the first {ορών) assigns the cause of the second {βουλόμβνος), which itself gives that of the action of the finite verb. Cf. c. 55, 2 ; c. 71, 3. P . 2 0 6 . c. L I I I § 1 1. 5 add:—The ground south-west of the outer Athenian wall is meant. All that was ££ω των σταυρωμάτων και του Αθηναίων στρατοπέδου was yrj φιλία to the Syracusans {Freeman). § 1 1. 10 add:—Observe the two participles, one of which (ορωνTes) denotes the cause, the other {έπεκβοηθ ήσαντες) the means of the action of the finite verb. P . 2 0 7 . c. L i n § 3 1. 15 add:—Hache de partic. Thuc. extr. p . p. 9 compares, for the use of, the participles, Vill c. 7, 1 iireiyoμένων των Χίων άποστεΐλαι TCLS ναϋς κ αϊ οεδιότων μη οί Αθηναίοι, τα ττρασσόμενα αϊσθωνται, άποπέμπουσιν οί Αακεδαυμόνιοι άνδρας Σπαρτίάτας es Κόρινθον τρεις. § 4 1· 27 add:—I was not aware when I passed the first edition through the press that Sitzler, and before him van Herwerden, had already suggested the insertion of καί, not having seen their editions. T h e latter, however, rejected it, because Pollux 1 168 has σβεστηρίοις κωλύμασιν έχρωντο seemingly taken from this passage, though two MSS there have καλύμμασιν. P . 2 0 8 . c. LV § 1 1. 7 add:—The two participles, as in c. 53, 2, denote the cause, επελθόντες the primary, ού δυνάμενοι the secondary, the first assigning the cause of the second, which itself expresses that of the action of the finite verb ήπόρουν. Cf. c. 71, 3 άπιδόντες—ζυναπονεύοντες—διηγον. P. make these up to 2 0 9 . c. LV § 1 1. 11 add:—If with Classen and others we το διάφορον the object of eTreveyKew, we may translate 'for since were the only cities of those which they had gone to war with that time, with similar institutions to {i.e. with a democratical lxxii ADDENDA ET CORRIGENDA form of government like) their own, and possessed of ships and horses and of ample size and means, and as they were unable con­ sequently either by an alteration of some kind in their constitution or by an overpowering force to introduce among them the change of attitude (or ' m a k e them feel the difference between the two sides', as Marchant) whereby they might have attached them to their rule—and as they met with failure oftener than success, they were perplexed enough before, but now that they had been defeated by sea as well—a result they could never have anticipated—they were a great deal more perplexed than ever'. P . 2 1 6 . c. L V I I § 4 1. 21 add:—See Busolt Gr. Gesch. n p . 410 n. 2 and cp. 11 c. 70, 3. § 5 1. 29 add:—Aenus is mentioned in H o m e r 77. i v 519. Herodotus also ( v n 58) speaks of it as an Aeolic colony, Strabo {Geogr. VII fr. 52) as κτίσμα Μυτιληναίων. P . 2 1 8 . § 9 1. 59 add:—'or those who were at any time pointed out to them as enemies'. P . 2 1 9 . c. LVII § 11 add:—1. 72. κατ€ΐλημμ£νοι sc. υπό των Αθηναίων> deprehensi. See cr. n. P . 2 2 3 . c. LX § 2 1. 4 add:—The ten elected ταξίαρχοι. ('colonels') commanded the hoplites of their respective tribes, and under them were ten \o%ayoL T h e cavalry was commanded by two 'ίππαρχοι, one for each of the five tribes, and under them ten φύλαρχοι. P . 2 2 7 . c. LXI § 3 1. 17 add:—TovSe του ιτληθουβ clearly refers to what follows οσον.,.έφορατε, not to the preceding 'όσοι re Αθηναίων πάρβστε.,.καϊ 8σοι των ξυμμάχων, as Herbst understands. P . 2 2 8 . c. LXll § 3 1. 14 add:—άντιναυττηγδίοτθαι is passive and means in the adaptation of our vessels for opposing theirs. P . 2 3 0 . c. LXIH § 3 1. 16 add at end of note:—Freeman, agree­ ing with Grote, a d d s : — ' O n e would fancy a special reference to the Ionian allies who—τή$ re φωνής τη επιστήμη και των τρόπων τη μιμήσβι—would be taken for Athenians in a way that Korkyraians and Methymnaians could not. A n d the last words would refer to them as protected by Athens from the Persians. I n these ways they were, though subjects of Athens, sharers in the dominion of Athens. Only in an address to υπήκοοι, what is the special force of is τό φοβερόν TOIS ύπηκόοις ?' P . 2 3 1 . 1. 20 add:—Junghahn Studien p . 50 if. vindicates the retention of πολύ πλειον against Kriiger, Stahl 2 and van Herwerden. § 4 1. 25 add:—This is the only instance in Thucydides of καταφρονεΐν with genitive: elsewhere he uses the accusative. P . 2 3 2 . c. LXIV § 2 1. 18 add:—ή inroXoi7ros ir<5\is means 'all that is left of the state'. καΐ VTJ€S is enclosed in brackets by MiillerStrubing also and by Stahl 2 because of the seeming incongruity oi iv reus ^αυσ«^ νηέ$ €ίσι. P . 2 3 3 . c. LXV § 2 1. 8 add:—της veebs is collective = των νεών. 1. 9 add:—It is used also in Homer, Herodotus, and once by ADDENDA ET CORRIGENDA lxxiii Aeschylus {Agam. 364). For examples of its use in Plutarch, see Bernardakis Mor. IV. Praef. p . X L I I I . c. L X V I § 1 1. 1 add:— ότι p i v : the opposition lies in yap 1. 8, as in v i 68, 1 πολλή μεν παραινέσει τί δει χρήσθαι.,.αύτη yap η παρασκευή, III g, ι. Ρ . 2 3 4 . c. LXVI § 2 3. 12 add:—Cp. I 137» 4 κακ& πλείστα 'Ελλήνων, IV 18 ι άξίω,μα μέyιστov των ελλήνων, c 60, ι δύναμιν μεyίστηv των Ελλήνων. 1. 15. κατ€σχον, 'got and kept possession of. P . 2 3 5 . § 3 1. 20 add:—Goetz thinks that the parallelism of the sentences—του αύχή/xaTos σφαλλόμενοι and φ άξωϋσί προέχειν κόλονθώσιν—favours the view of Arnold and others who join του αύχήματο$ with σφαλλόμενοι, in qua re gloriabantur falhintur. 1. 21 add:—τταρά ίσ-χυν κ.τ.λ., ' t h e y give way even more than their actual strength necessitates'. c. L X V I I § 1 1. Ζ for 'inexperience', read ' w a n t of t r a i n i n g ' . 1. 5 add:—Herbst retains the τό of the MSS. which he explains as being in itself absolute, without any influence on the construction of the sentence, but serving to introduce the epexegesis which follows. P . 2 3 7 . c. LXVIII § 1 1. 1 add:—Sitzler takes πολεμιωτάτων with opyrj, 'with the ire of bitterest enemies '. P . 2 3 9 . § 3 1. 21 add:—καλός 6 άγων would be better trans­ lated ' s u c h prize is a glorious o n e ' , to shew its apposition to τό... κολασθηναι καΐ.,.παραδουναι. T h e force of και before πριν will appear, as Sitzler observes, by translating ' already'. 1. 22. There is a reminiscence, perhaps, here of the older meaning of βλάπτειν ' t o c h e c k ' , ' i m p e d e ' , as is pointed out by Sandys in his note to Demosth. Lefl. § 49. c. L X I X § 1 1. 13 add:—Priore participio (έπονομάζων) indicatur, qua ratione actio verbi finiti facta sit, altero (άξιων), qua de causa: vocavit enim, ut exigeiet (Hache). Cf. c. 75, 4 προς yap όλοφυρμόν τραπόμενοι is άπορίαν καθίστασαν, ατγειν τε σφα* άξιοϋντες κτέ. P . 2 4 0 . 1. 14 add:—Diodorus ( X I I I 15) makes Nicias give his last exhortation to the captains from a vessel in which he sails round to each ship, επί τίνα ναΰν άνέβη καΐ παρέπλει τας τριήρεις των 'Αθηναίων. This is surely a contemporary touch (a bit of Philistos); and it is just what a man would do in that extreme state of anxiety in which Thuc. describes Nicias. H e makes the general exhorta­ tion on s h o r e ; then, when all are on board, he sails round to each ship for one more last word to each. This is far more emphatic than speaking to each severally on land. ...The words of T h u c . in c. 69, 3 αποχωρήσαν Tjye τον πεζον προς την ^άλασσαΐ' rather fall in with the account in Diodoros, whose own words are πάλιν επί την ιδίαν τάξιν έπανήλθεν. There is no special force in αποχωρήσαν if he stayed on land all the time (Freeman). 1. 18 add:—The whole sentence = o'rt εν αύτη πασιν , 'έξεστιν άνεπιτάκτως διαιτασθαι. ' I t is noteworthy indeed' says Freeman, ' noteworthy now as well as then, that this special feature of the lxxiv ADDENDA ET CORRIGENDA great democracy should be the one picked out at such an hour as this as the thing which had gone further than anything to endear Athens to her children'. Add:—1. 22. This use of is ' a s r e g a r d s ' , ' a b o u t ' , ' o n ' is common in Plutarch, as Them. c. 21, 4 ταϋτ' έποίησεν els αυτόν, where I have quoted other instances in my note ad I. P . 2 4 1 . c. LXix § 4 1. 36 add:—M.x Marchant's reading παρακλησθέντα assumes a meaning for the word which it does not bear in the only passages where it occurs in good authors. T h e same objec­ tion would not apply to κατακλησθέντα. ' D i o d o r u s ' says Freeman 'brings out more clearly the nature of the diOKirkovs. A passage was left between two masses of vessels at anchor, a passage guarded by bridges and chains. His words ( x i l l 14) are:—άπέφραττον το στόμα του λιμέvos ζευγμα κατασκευάζοντες. ακάτους τε yap καΐ τριήρεις %τι δε στpoyyύλas ναΰ$ επ' αγκύρων όρμίσαντες καί σιδηραις άλύσεσι διαλαμβάνοντες έπι τά σκάφη γέφυρας εκ σανίδων κατασκεύασαν. But he does not bring out the attack on the barrier (c. 70, 2) so clearly as Thuc. T h a t is, as ever, he is casual; h e makes good use of his Philistos in one case and not in the n e x t . . . T h e words of Diodorus (XIII 15) are:—ol δ) έν Tats νανσϊ παιανίσαντες 'έπλεαν καί φθάσαντες τους πολεμίους διέλυον το ζευγμα. Philistos had heard the P a e a n ; the word φθάσαντες doubtless refers to the warning preserved by Plu­ tarch about letting the invaders strike the first blow \ P . 2 4 2 . c. LXX § 2 1. 18 add:—The fight, the fiercest fight of the whole war, became general, not in the shape of two great fleets meeting each other in ordered array, but in that of a crowd of separate battles going on everywhere at once, over the whole surface of the Great Harbour (Freeman). P . 2 4 6 . c. L X X I § 1 add:—1. 3. τον αγώνα, 'its inward struggle \ ' a n x i e t y ' . There is no other instance in Thucydides of this sub­ jective use of the word. I n late Greek we find several instances, as Plutarch Them. c. 32, 2 ά γ ώ ^ α βούλεται κινεΐν καϊ πάθος, Sol. c. 7> 4 τ°ν μέλλοντος ώδΐνας αεί καϊ τρόμους και ayCovas^ ει στερήσονται, παρέχοντος αύτοΐς, Tzmol. α 2 / , 5 *τ«/0ά τον ay ων α καϊ τόν ένθουσιασμόν την φωνην διατεινάμενος3 Polyb. IV 56, 4 νσαι/ & ay ων ι μη πολιορκείν σφας εγχείρηση, where Hultsch is wrong in adopting Ernesti's conjecture αγωνία. § 2 l. 8. άνακ€ψ.€νων: C p . Virg. Aen. x i i 59 in teomnis domus inclinata recumbit. P . 2 4 9 . c. L X X I § 6 1. 38 add:—φ'ΐΜσον is the technical ex­ pression for 'being washed or driven a s h o r e ' ; see c. 74, 2, π 92, 3 Ζσφαξεν αυτόν καϊ έί-έπεσεν εις τόν Ναυπακτίων λιμένα, X e n . Anab. VI 4> 2, VII 5, 12, Plut. Them. c. 10, 5 τριήρει παρανηχόμενος (Ιστο­ ρείται κύων) έκπεσεΐν εις την Σαλαμίνα, c 18, r, Eur. Hel. 409 καϊ νυν τάλα? ναυαγό? άπολέσας φίλους έξέπεσον ες γην τήνδε. But here it is used as in Plut. Cim. c. 13, ευθύς εις την γην άποστρέφοντες έζέπιπτον οι πρώτοι και κaτέφευyov els τό πεζόν ευθύς παρατεταγ­ μένοι/. ADDENDA E Τ CORRIGENDA lxxv P . 2 5 1 . c. L X X I I I § 2 add:—1. 15 acrpivovs is to be taken closely with άναπεπαυμένους. F r . Miiller compares Sallust Jug. c. 53, 5 firoelio fessi laeti quierant, ace. to Postgate's correction of the vulgate laetique erant. P . 2 5 2 . 1. 18 add:—In c. 25, 1 Plutarch tells us t h a t , t h e i r μάντας had reported that they must act only on the defensive. 1. 21 9 after σέθβν add:—Herondas Mim. I 66 πύσθητί μβυ. § 3 1. 25 add:—Diodorus ( x i l l 18, 4) adds as a reason, δια rb πο\\ούς μ£ν τραυματίας etvai των στρατιωτών, πάντας δ' υπό της μάχης κατάκοπους ύπάρχβιν τοΐς σώμασι. 1. 34 add:—This was the same trick that Nicias had himself played off on the Syracusans nearly two years before, see VI c. 64. P . 2 5 4 . c. LXXIV § 2 1. 19 add:—Literally, 'fastening by ropes to their own vessels.' W i t h έκπβπτωκυΐαν supply άνεδήσαντο. 1. 20 add:—The bodies of their dead, which were left unburied by the Athenians, were thrust into the tombs on Plemmyrion, where recent research has discovered their graves. See Freeman Hist. Sic. i n p . 365. P . 2 5 5 . c. LXXV § 3 1. 13 add:—-It is better with Sitzler to take τραυματίαι re καΐ άσθβνβΐς as predicative to κατάλβιπδμβνοι. P . 2 5 6 . § 4 1. 23, 2 at end of note add:—Wratislaw {Trans, of Cambr. Phil. Soc. I. p . 55) t r a n s l a t e s : — ' a n d if any one's bodily strength failed him, not suffering abandonment without a few in­ vocations and lamentations'. F . V. Fritzsche in a note to Lucian's Alexander etc. (Lips. 1826) p . 226—7 adduces several remarkable instances of confusion in the MSS of words of opposite meaning, especially όλί'γος and πολύς. H e is followed by Bellermann Zeitschr. f. Gw. 1872 p . 608 and 922, who adduces, among other instances, Lessing's 'nicht ohne Missfallen' for 'nicht ohne Wohlgefallen \ P . 2 5 7 . § 6 1. 41 add:—The difficulty felt by Herwerden as to the co-ordination of Ισομοιρία with η άλλη αίκία is satisfactorily disposed of by Junghahn Studien zu Thuk. p . 60. T h e degradation lay in the knights and hoplites having to undergo the same drudgery and hardship as the lowest slaves. Sitzler brackets και η Ισομοιρία των κακών as a gloss. P . 2 5 8 . c. LXXVI 1. 3 Ιτπ/τταριών is rather 'going up to and then passing along'. P . 2 5 9 . c. LXXVII § 2 1. 9 add:—Sitzler takes δρατ€ as im­ perative : the meaning then of δή will be different. P . 2 6 1 . § 4 add:—1. 27. F o r the δέ after negative in previous clause, cf. v i c. 32, 1; c. 77, 1 ; c. 78, 4 ; c. 83, 4; c. 86, 2 ; c. 92, 4, P . 2 6 3 . c. L X X V I I I § 2 add:—I. 8 rovs 8e σκευοφόρουδ κτλ. ' T h e s e ' says Freeman ' whatever their race or condition, are distinct from the personal slaves of the horsemen and heavy-armed'. P. 2 6 5 . i n 6 1 , 1. § 6 add:—1. 33 F o r the position of αυτούς, cf. I 68, 1; lxxvi ADDENDA ΕΤ CORRIGENDA P . 2 6 6 . c. LXXix § ι 1. 5 add:—Also by Aristoph. quoted by Schol. Lysistr. -282: ασπίδα? τάς τάξεις fkeyov καΐ αυτός πάλιν 5 Αριστοφάνης έν Έαβνλωνίοις* ϊστασθ' εφεξής πάντες έπι τρεις ασπίδας. § 4 1· 18 add:—'While they were halting, Gylippos sent on a party by some side-path to throw up another wall between their halting-place and their camp of the night before* (Freeman). P . 2 7 0 . c. L X X X I § 2 1. 14 add:—The Syracusans caught Demosthenes up seemingly before he had reached the Helorine R o a d ; but the exact site cannot be fixed (Freeman). P . 2 7 1 . § 4 1. 27 add:—Cp. I 106, ι ένέπεσεν & τον χωρίον ίδιώτου, φ ετυχεν όρυγμα μέγα περιεΐργον καϊ ούκ ην έξοδος. § 5 1· 29 add:—Cf. Arrian Ind. 16, 9 έπεάν συστάδην καταστη η μάχη, Herodian VI 7» 19 ^9°^ τ^ν ο~υσταδον μάχην, Diod. XI 7, 2 συστάδην οϋσης της μάχης. Ρ . 2 7 2 . c. L X X X I I § ι 1. 7 add:—¥xQem2iR remarks that their acting by cities almost suggests a vote in each division. P . 2 7 4 . c. LXXXlll § 4 1. 20 add:—Observe how in this and the following section the present and aorist alternate with each other. P . 2 7 5 . c. L X X X I v § 2 add:—1. 9. του άλλου δ χ λ ο υ : * Hitherto it was only horsemen and darters. N o w the rest of the army did not shrink from coming to close quarters with wearied m e n ' (Freeman). T h e same writer thinks that pq.6v τί σφισιν &re coni. E> C. Marchant ut sensus sit ' t h e remainder of the wall n o r t h of the fort', i.e. on the side of the κύκλος away from the low ground near the harbour. P . 3 0 0 . c. v i i § 3 1. 15 after W i d m a n n add:—coll. Schol. ad VIII 50, 5 το5 > coni. M a r c h a n t : < £v\\€yivTos > addidit Badham [ H w ] . c. LVII § 1 1. 8 add:—avayK-t\ CAEG: dvay^s B. § 4 1. 20 add:—Ketoi "Ανδριοι Μ om. και. § 5 1. 30 μετά Συρακοσίων seclusit Ε . C. Marchant. P . 3 1 9 . § 10 add:—1. 69 'Ιωνίων Μ. § n 1. 71 στρατιω­ τικών LM. P . 3 2 0 . c. LXIII § 3 1. 13 add:—βελτίω LM. § 4 1. 24 add:—τι πταίονσαν coni. W i d m a n n pro δικαίως &ν» P . 3 2 1 . c. LXIV § 2 1. 18 add:—δτι iv TOIS iv TOIS ναυσίν ύμων νυν έσομένοις καΐ πεζοί είσι i.e. qui ab iis pendebunt coni. H w , coll. E u r . Iph. A* 1379 καν έμοί πορθμός τε ναών και ^pvyiov κατασκαφαί* Ρ . 3 2 3 . c. LXXII add:—§ 4 1· 21 άναχωρήσαντες CM. Ρ . 3 2 4 . c. LXXHI § ι 1. 9 αάά:—αύτοϊ% coni. Bauer. § 2 1.15 ασμένους suo iure legit E . C. Marchant. lxxx ADDENDA ET CORRIGENDA c. LXXIV § 2 1. 12 add:—See Meisterhans Gramm. d. Ait. Inschr.* § 65, 2. c. LXXV § 4 1. 23 add:—Cobet Var. L? p . 590 would read έπιθβασμων : see cr. n. to c. L § 4 1. 38 p . 316. § 6 add:—1. 44 &\\ω$ re και < ενθυμούμε?ois> (not, as Marchant quotes, ένθυμουμένονς) coni. H w . P . 3 2 7 . c. LXXXI § 4 1. 23 add:—η is μάχψ ή ζυνβτάσσετο Μ. F . 3 2 8 . c. L X X X I 11 § 1 add:—1. 2 μετά του Αημ. Μ hic et c. LXXXV § 3 1. 20. ΘΟΥΚ ΥΔΙΔΟΥ ΞΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΟ ΒΙΒΛΙΟΝ B . C . 414· ΕΒΔΟΜΟΝ Summer 18th y e a r of t h e P e l o p o n n e s i a n W a r (Bk V I c. 94— B k V I I c. 18) Ι Ό Se ΥύΧιππος καϊ δ ΐΐυθήν ραντος, επεί επεσκεύασαν τάς νανς, παρέττΧβυσαν ' ίς ξεφνριους' , και ~ ΑοΚΟΟνς ' ΤΟυ? Έ 7 Γ £ - πυνθανομενοι , σαφ„ εκ τον SICILY Ύά-1 Voyage of Gylippus the Spartan and the Corinthian py- tnen from Tarentum. εστερον ήδη οτι ου παντελώς πω άποτετειχισμέναι αϊ Ίϊ,νράκονσαί είσιν, α λ λ ' ετι οΐόν Τ6 κατά τάς Ί&πιποΧάς στρατιά άφικομένους εσελθεΐν, έβονΧεύοντο εϊτ ίν δεξιά Χαβόντες την ^ικελίαν διακινδυνεύσωσιν εσπλεΰσαι, εϊτ ίν άριto στερα ες Ίμέραν πρώτον πλεύσαντες καϊ αυτούς Τ6 εκείνους και στρατιάν αλλην προσΧαβόντεςί ους αν πείθωσι, κατά yrjv ελθωσι, καϊ εδοξεν αύτοΐς 2 έπι της Ιμέρας πλεϊν, άΧΧως τ€ καϊ των Αττικών τεσσάρων νέων οΰπω παρουσών εν τω 'Ρηγίω, ας δ is Νικίας όμως, πυνθανδμενος αυτούς εν Αοκροΐς εΐναι, απέστειλε. φθάσαντες Be την φνΧακήν ταύτην s Τ. V I I Ι 1 ΘΟΥΚΥΔίΔΟΥ c.i2 περαιουνται δια τον πορθμού, καϊ σχυντες 'Ρτ/γ/ω 3 καϊ Μ,εσσήντ) άφικνοννται ες Ίμεραν. εκεί δε δντες They land with τους τε Ίμεραίονς έπεισαν ξνμποHimer^whincf Gy- ^Ψ™ λ τοις i* των νεών τώρ σφετέρων £%^:^'^ head of 2800 men. ***> αυτούς <·/ \ Φ Τ€ βΤΤβσθαΐ ΚθΧ * ναύ- c/ ·\ r* ταις οσοί μη ειχον οπΧα παρασγειν —τάς jap νανς άνείλκνσαν iv *Ιμέρα,—και τους 2 e Χινονντίονς πέμψαντες εκελευον απανταν στρατιά 69 4 τι χωρίον, πέμψειν δε τιν αύτοΐς ύπεσγοντο στρα- 25 τιάν ου ποΧΧην καϊ οι ΤεΧώοι καϊ των Σικελών τίνες, οΐ ποΧν προθνμότερον προσγωρείν ετοϊμοι ήσαν τον τβ Άρχωνίδον νεωστϊ τεθνηκότος, ος των ταύττ) Σικελών βασιλεύων τινών και ών ουκ αδύ­ νατος τοις 'Αθηναίοις φίλος ήν, καϊ τον ΥνΧίππον εκ 30 5 Αακεδαίμονος προθνμως δοκονντος ηκειν. καϊ 6 μεν ΤνΧιππος, άναΧαβών των τε σφετέρων ναντών καϊ επιβατών τους ώπλισμενονς έπτακοσίονς μάλιστα, ( ίμεραίονς δε όπΧίτας καϊ ψιλούς ξυναμφοτέρονς χιλίονς καϊ ιππέας εκατόν καϊ Χελινονντίων τε τινας 35 ψιλούς καϊ ιππέας καϊ ΤεΧωων όΧίγονς, Σικελών τε ες χιλίονς τους πάντας, εχώρει προς τάς %νρακούσας. 1 II 0 / δ1 εκ της Αενκάδος Κορίνθιοι ταΐς τε SYRACUSE αΧλαις νανσϊν ως ειχον τάχονς εβοήNews of his aP- θονν καϊ ΤόγννΧος, εις τών Κοοιν* proach is brought to 6 S r a sanS by ? f ' ' ' ΐ r ^ v ffi ®ιων αρχόντων, μια νηϊ τεΧενταΐος Gongyius just«athne ορμηθείς πρώτος μεν άφικνεΐται ες 5 E l E H P i u i a l 5 ™* Ένρακούσας, ολίγον δέ πρί> I V to the Athenians. λ/τττΓου* καϊ καταΧαβών αυτούς περϊ άπαΧλαγής τον πολέμον μέΧΧοντας εκκΧησιάσειν διεκωλνσέ τε καϊ παρεθάρσννε, Χεγων οτι νήές τε άΧΧαι ετί προσπΧεονσι καϊ ΥύΧιππος 6 Κ^εανδρί- ίο c. iii 3 ΞΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΟ Η Βου Αακεδαομονίων άτΓοστβίΧάντων άρχων, καϊ οι 2 μεν %υρακόσιοι έττβρρώσθησάν r e καϊ Freshfromlhecap. τω Γνλίττπφ evOfc ητανστρατια ώ? g ^ ^ S ^ S άτταντηαόμβνοι έξηΧθον $Βη Ίάρ καϊ & & ^ * ^ αυτόν. 6 Be g£ £%£&%£* 15eVyi>? 'όντα Ι,σθάνοντο ' W ? rore τ» τβίχο, iv τ§ τταρόΒφ ^ ^ Ά Χ ί £ ^ • ^ -\ Λ τωζ; ζ,ικελων *-^ ' ν$* ί» ' united bodies march ελών, και ξυνταξαμενος ( > / »t Λ ft)? € 9 μαχην αφίΚνβίΤαΰ • ν / . \ ' yO\ together in battle > \ »i7 order against t h e € ? Τ α ? ^ 7 Γ ^ - Athenian lines, which ν ν Τ7» * ' were now nearly com- πολας' και αν αράς κατά τον &υρυη~ pieted on the south so \o*>, §περ καϊ οι J Αθηναίοι το πρώτον, εχώρει μετά των %υρακοσίων επϊ το τείχισμα των 'Αθηναίων, έτυχε Βε κατά τούτο [τού] καιρού ελθών 4 iv ω επτά μεν ή οκτώ σταΒίων ήδη άπετετέλεστο τοις Άθηναίοις ες τον μέγαν λιμένα Βιπλούν τείχος, 25 πλην κατά βραχύ τι το προς την θάλασσαν—τούτο δ' ετι ωκοΒόμουν'—τω Be άλλω < από > τού κύκλου προς τον Ύρώ^ιλον επϊ την ετέραν θάλασσαν λίθοι τε παραβεβλημένοι τω πλέονι ήΒη ήσαν, καϊ εστίν ά καϊ ημίερηα, τά Βε~ και εζειρηασμένα κατελέλειπτο. 3ο παρά τοσούτον μεν Συράκουσαι ηλθον κινΒύνον. I l l Ot Βε 'Αθηναίοι, άφνιΒίως τού τε Τνλίππου 1 κάί των Σνρακοσίων σφίσιν επιοντων, T h e two arm ; es ίθορυβήθησαν μα-τό πρώτον irape"&££&$£ τάξαντο Be. 6 Be θέμενος τά 'όττλα t^L· th?yAthS > \ / / > Λ · χ / 5 €77^9 κήρυκα προσπεμπει ι r\ r-v nians αυτοις λε- ' f» / ' * to evacuate Sidiy. They disdain to reply to his herald. ν ηοντα, ει ρουλονται εξιεναι εκ της * Σικελίας πέντε ημερών λαβόντες τά σφέτερα αυτών, έτοιμος είναι σπένΒεσθαι. οι Βε εν ολιγωρία τε 2 εποιούντο καϊ ούΒεν άποκρινάμενοι απέπεμψαν, καϊ ΪΟ μετά Τούτο f ως άνΤίπαρεσκευάζονΤΟ f ληλοίς f ες μαχην. άλt Καϊ f Ο Τυλίπ- Preparations for battle on either side. Gylippus retires into 3 I 2 4 more open ground further away from ΘΟΥΚΥΔΙΔΟΥ 7ΓΟ? Ορών Τθύς f v c. πι 3 %υραΚθσίθυς , ( Ταρασ- f f the wails, but, as σομενους και ου ραοιως Nicias remains in position close to his own fortification and declines to fight, he draws oil his troops νους. είτανη^ε n ' eVOVyOOOLCLV ι /\> ι ξυντασσομε- \ TO r rs σΤβαΤΟΤΤεΟΟν ' μάΧλον. ΚθΧ 6 » and encamps for the o^^ ^ττη^ε τους Αθηναίους, night on the Temenitecliff ' ' ' 5 €9 TWV , Ν ί / α α 9 15 αλλ ??σι/' ' · %αζ€ προς τω εαυτών τείχει. ως δ* έ'γζ/ω ο Γυλ^π7Γ09 οι? ττροσιοντας αυτούς, άττηηαηε την στρατιαν επτί την άκραν την Ύεμενΐτιν καΧουμένην 4 Next day, while καΧ αύτοϋ ηνλίσάντο. τβ δ' νστεραία 2ο the attention of the v \ \ ^ / ' « « Athenians is engaged αηων την μεν πΧειστην της στρατιάς by a threatened attack on their lines, Gylippus sends a detachment to surprise their fort L a b d a l u m , which is taken, and the garrison put , , « s A /1 N v ΤΓαρεταξβ ΠΤρος Τ α Τείχη TWV Αϋη, , ν Λ vaiWV, 07Γω9 ^ εΤΓίροησΟίεν αλλοσβ, / p> / / \ \ / μεΟΟς 0 € TL 7Γβμψας ΊΓΟΟζ TO φρουρών ' Λ \ <•/ >t y to the sword. αίρει, και όσους εΧαβεν 25 T o AapoaXov έν αύτω ττάντας άττέκτεινεν' ην Se ουκ εττιφανες τοις Άθηναίοις το χωρίον. 5 Κ,αϊ τριήρης Ty αύτγ} ημέρα άΧίσκεται των ΆθηCaptureofanAthe- ναίων υττο των Χυρακοσίων εφορμοϋnian war ship on the same day. 1 30 IV K a t μετά ταϋτα ετείχιζον οι Χυρακόσιοι κα\ (Third) Syracusan οί ξνμμαχοι δια των ΈττιττοΧών από ^ Λ Γ & £ £ " 5 της ττόλ€ω9 άρξάμενοι άνω ττρ6ς τό Sack6 on theylAtPhUeS- * Αθηναίοι, ει μη Βύναιντο κωΧϋσαι, $ nian lines. 2 * / / \ μηκετι οίοι τβ ωσιν αποτειχισαι. και οι τβ 'Αθηναίοι άνεβεβηκεσαν ήΒη άνω το εττϊ θαΧάσστ) τείχος επιτεΧεσαντβς, και ό ΤΰΧιπ'πος—ην Meanwhile Gylip. 'ΕϊΓΜΓΟλώ* S S n t ^ d T His'at! / * " * > ? a the heni "W Τεΐχ09, <«' ΤΟ« λί6>0« ' A ^ W W M χρβίπροπαρββά- b et^n fhe two ^ ™ σψ/σ», ^ & τταρετασσε* ;ac^cea"i?yehSa?; Φ « γ ω ν αεί τηοό τον τνχίσμαπο* του, 5 insufficient space for their ^ / \ movements, Αυρακοσιους ν ends in failure. Λ > * > Α / 3 \ και ί» τους r ξυμμαχους' ' ι και οι Ανηναιοι αντιπαρετασσοντο. 2 επειδή δε εδοξε τω ΤυΧίππω καιρός είναι, ηρχε της εφόδου' και εν χ^ροΊ γενόμενοι εμαχοντο μεταξύ των τειχισμάτων, § της ϊππου τών %υρακοσίων ουδεμία ίο 3 χρηοτις ην. καϊ νικηθέντων τών Χυρακοσίων καϊ τών ξυμμάχων καϊ νεκρούς ύποσπόνδους άνεΧομένων καϊ τών 'Αθηναίων τροτταΐον στησάντων, ο ΥΰΧιππος He takes the blame ξ^καΧέσας το στράτευμα ουκ εφη τό hLseff,r inTrdeV °to αμάρτημα εκείνων, αλλ' εαυτού ηενέ- ι5 sustain the confidence „_/}„,. of the Syracusans for σναι a second attempt. F « « ~.Λ~ 7 . ~ν 1 n, —Λ.. t <- τ??9 ΊαΡ *>ππου και των ν Μ λ / ' ακοντ> \ ιστών την ωφεΧιαν TTJ τάξει, εντός Χίαν τών τειχών ποιήσας, άφεΧέσθαι' νυν ούν αύθις 4 επάξειν. καϊ διανοεΐσθαι ούτως εκέΧευεν αυτούς ως ττ) μεν παρασκευή ουκ εΧασσον εξοντας, ττ} δε ^νώμτι 20 ουκ άνεκτον έσόμενον, ει μη άξιώσουσι ΐίεΧοποννήσιοί τε οντες καϊ Αωριής 'Ιώνων καϊ νησιωτών καϊ ξυ^κΧύδων ανθρώπων κρατήσαντες εξεΧάσασθαι εκ της χώρας. 1 VI Κ,αϊ μετά ταύτα, επειδή καιρός ην, αύθις He renews the con- επή<γεν αυτούς. 6 δε Νικίας καϊ οι flict in more open ι \ n r% /<* \ > > « ground where the Ασηναιοι, νομιζοντες, και ει εκείνοι cavalry could act and Λ ,Λ/ , „ succeeds in driving μη ευεΧοιεν μάχης αρχειν, behind their fortifica- είναι σφίσι μή περιοραν , Λ avayxaiov πάροικο-$ ΞΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΟ Η ΰομούμβνον ΤΟ τείχος ηΒη jap KOI r y ι tn \ Λ ·> Α /ι OGOV OV ΤΤαρβΧηΧνθβΙ Την TWV Αθηr, f \ ( j / ; ναΐων TOV ΤείΎΟυς Τβλβυτην η €/€6ίνων /ν Τείχίσίς, Και 6L irapeXuOL·, io €7T0L€L αύτοΐς TaX)TOV ηΒη VlKCiV Τ€ μαχόμενοι? Βΐά tions. He then car­ " e s t^le cross-wall past the proposed line of the Athenian circumulation on the north, thereby rendering the investment impossible. παντός καϊ μηΒε μάχεσθαι,—άντεπησαν οΰν τοις Χυρακοσίοις. και 6 ΤύΧιππος τους μεν όπΧίτας 'έξω 2 των τειχών μαΧΧον ή πρότερον προαηαηών ξυνέμισηεν αύτοΐς, τους Β' ιππέας καϊ τους άκοντιστάς is εκ πΧαγίου τάξας των 'Αθηναίων κατά την εύρυχωρίαν, y των τειχών αμφοτέρων αϊ έρηασίαι εΧηγον. καϊ προσβαΧόντες οι ίππής iv ΤΎ} μάχη τω ευωνύμω ζ κέρα των 'Αθηναίων, όπερ κατ αυτούς ην, έτρεψαν' και Βι' αυτό καϊ το αΧΧο στράτευμα νικηθεν υπό so των %υρακοσίων κατηράχθη ες τά τειχίσματα. καϊ 4 τη επιούση νυκτΧ έφθασαν παροικοΒομησαντες καϊ παρεΧθόντες την των 'Αθηναίων οίκοΒομίαν, ώστε μηκέτι μήτε αυτοί κωΧύεσθαι υπ' αυτών, εκείνους τε καϊ παντάπασιν άπεστερηκέναι, ει καϊ κρατοΐεν, 25 μη αν ετί σφας άποτειχίσαι. VII Μετά Βε τούτο αϊ τε τών Κορινθίων νηες 1 καϊ Άμπρακιωτών και Αευκαοίων Arrival of the ex, ί / ο /<Ν pected reinforcef εσεπΧευσαν αι υποΧοιποι οωοεκα, ments from Peioponnesus. They help the 5 f Χαθοΰσαι την τών Αθηναίων φυ- Syracusans to finish ' ' the rest of the cross- 5 Χακην—ηρχε Βε αυτών 'ΊΖρασινίΒης wal1· Κορίνθιος,—καϊ ξυνετείχισαν το Χοιπόν τοις Χυρακοσίοις [μέχρι] του εγκαρσίου τεί- Gylippus goes a . χους. και 6 ΥύΧιππος ες ττ\ν ΆΧΧην ^ " g ^ £nsehr 2 ΧικεΧίαν έπϊ στρατιάν τε φχετο καϊ ^jLg^f* ιοναϋτικην καϊ πεζικήν ξυΧΧέξων, καϊ Spaita and C o r i l U h < , τών ποΧεων αμα προσαξόμενος ει τις ή μη πρόθυ- δ ΘΟΥΚΥΔΙΔΟΥ C. V11 2 μος ην ή παντάπασιν ετι άφειστηκει του ποΧέμου. 3 πρέσβεις τ€ αΧΧοι των Χυρακοσίων καϊ Κορινθίων ες ΑακεΒαίμονα καϊ Κ,όρινθον άπεστάΧησαν, όπως στρατιά ετι περαιωθτ) τρόπω ω αν iv όΧκάσιν η is πΧοίοις ή αΧΧως όπωσουν προχωρ?), ώς καϊ των 4 Activity of the Sy- Αθηναίων επιμεταπεμπομένων. οι i S S ^ t h S S re Χυρακόσιοι ναυτιών έπΧήρουν ral hopefulness ν \ ·> « r \ / > και ανεπειρωντο ως και τούτω επιγειρησοντες} και ες τάΧΧα ποΧυ €7T€pftQ)VT0. 2ο 1 VIII Ό δε Νικίας αίσθόμβνο<; τοντο καϊ όρων rouse Nicias to a Κ α θ ' V&pUV SS^uTtoh eSe^l^'gaini^ dlTOpCw, ίττώώοΰσαν ™\6μίων τήν Ισχύν καϊ τήν &Γβ/ΜΓβ Καϊ αυτί? Τ€ T&V σφετέραν έ9 τά? S \ e " ? o r £ ' A f t ^ s ά / γ & λ ω ν ποΧλάκπ μεν καϊ 5 ajfpeaitogfo^he^ «λλοτβ κα0' & α σ τ α τώ» γενομένων, eke'for'consld'e'r'aUe reinforcements. μάλιστα Λ Ββ *? Καϊ ΤΟΤ€, ΡΟμίξων / > \ e €V / δβί- ζ>0£9 Τ6 et^a^ καιj ei μη ως τάχιστα η σφας μεταπέμψουσιν ή αΧΧους μη οΧίγους άποΤο prevent any στεΧουσιν, οΰδεμίαν είναι σωτηρίαν ίο possible misunder, n , plV ΤΙ / Χεγοντες , Ου y τα οντά άπαγγεΧΧωσιν, ε<γραψεν επιστοΧήν, νομίζων is ούτως αν μάΧιστα την αυτού ηνώμην μηδέν iv τω αγγβλω άφανισθεΐσαν μαθόντας τους * Αθηναίους 3 βουΧεύσασθαι περί της άΧηθείας. καϊ οι μβν ωγρντο φέροντες, ους άπεστειΧε, τα γράμματα καϊ οσα έδει αυτούς είπεΐν' ό δε τα κατά το στρατόπεδον διά so φυΧακης μαΧΧον ηδη έχων ή δι εκουσίων κινδύνων επεμεΧετο, cxi3 ΞΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΟ Η IX Έζ^ δε τω αύτώ θέρει τεΧευτώντι καϊ E J e τίων στρατηγός Αθηναίων μετά ΤΙερAMPHIPOLIS Βίκκου στράτευσα* eV ΆμφίποΧιν 0 ^ 4 f Athenian?^ ®ραξϊ ΤΓοΧΧοΐς TTJV μ€ν 7ΓθΧΐν ούχ recover Amphipolis. s εΙλε*>, €9 δε τον Στρυμόνα ττερικομίσας τριήρεις του ποταμού έποΧιόρκει ορμώμενος εξ Ίμεραιου. Κα2 το 0ερο9 ετεΧεύτα [τούτο]. B . C . 4 Χ 4—4 Χ 3· c, ί ο — c εκ Winter ι8 Χ Ύοΰ δ1 επιγενομένου χειμώνος ηκοντες ες τάς Αθήνας οι παρά του Νικίου οσα τε ATHENS , ν / ν ι /? / T h e bearers of NiΛ απο ηΧωσσης ειρητό αντοις ειπον και, das's written speech „ ζ εΐ Τΐς v ΤΙ , , f επηρωτα, , N , / απεκρίνονΤΟ ,«, e ~v ν Kai arrive at Athens, where it is read aloud in the popular assem- 5 την επιστοΧην απεοοσαν. ο οε <γραμ- biy. ματεύς [της πόλεως] παρελθών άνεγνω τοις Άθηναίοις δηΧοΰσαν τοιάδε' XI ' Ύά μεν πρότερον πραχθέντα, ω 'Αθηναίοι, ι εν άΧΧαις ποΧΧαις επιστοΧαΐς ίστε ' LETTER OF NICIAS c# νυν δε καιρός ούχ ησσον μαθόντας "Τ0,I5 υμάς εν ω εσμεν ΒουΧεύσασθαι. HPPUS has completely ' / * changed our pro- s κρατησαντων <γάρ ημών μάχαις ταΐς spects. 2 πΧείοσι Συρακοσίους, εφ? ους έπέμφθημεν, καϊ τά τείχη οικοΒομησαμενων εν οΐσπερ νυν εσμεν, ηΧθε ΤύΧιππος Λακεδαιμόνιος στρατιάν έχων εκ τε Πβλοποννήσου καϊ άπο τών εν ΣικεΧία πόΧεων εστίν ών. ίο και μάχΎ)' τ$ μεν πρώττ) νικάται ύφ? ημών, ττ) δ' ύστεραία ίππευσί τε ποΧΧοΐς και άκοντισταΐς βιασθέντες άνεχωρήσαμεν ες τά τείχη, νυν οΰν ημείς 3 ΘΟΥΚΥΔΙΔΟΥ ΙΟ c. χι 3 μεν παυσάμενοι του περιτειχισμοΰ Sea το πλήθος των εναντίων ήσυχαζομεν—ονδε yap ξυμπάστ) τή στρατιά δυναίμεθ* αν χρήσασθαι άπανηλωκυίας της χ$ φυλακής των τειχών μέρος TL του οπλιτικου,—οι δε παρωκοδομήκασιν ήμΐν τείχος απλούν, ώστε μη είναι ετι περιτειχίσαι αυτούς, ήν μη τις το παρατείχισμα We are now rather Τθϋτθ the besieged, than the ^ Q πολλή , στραΤία , Λ έπελθών * « ελτ). * « ' 4 besiegers. ξυμρερηκε τ€ πολιορκειν οοκουντας 2o ημάς άλλους αυτούς μάλλον. Όσα ye κατά yήv, τούτο πάσχειν' ούδε yap τής χωράς επϊ πολύ δια τους ι ιππέας έξερχόμεθα. XII ΤΙεπόμφασι δε και ες The enemy are Π β λ ο τ τ ό ζ / Ι ^ σ ο ί / πρέσβεις eV άλλην S ^ n f e v ^ o i ντρατιάν, καϊ ές τάς iv Σικελία S S e A S ™λβις Τύλιππος οϊχεται, τάς μεν anTTy1andkbiheTr «αϊ πείσων ξυμπολεμεΐν ίσαι νΰν s shies and crews are < ' c* > in good order, where- ησυχαζουσιν, as ours, as they know, have had no time for rest and repairs and \ TtttV ν , ο, ν €Tl ΤΤεζην r »\ \ ω στρα- * ναυΤΙΚΟυ »/ίο άξων, παρα~ οιανοουν- /» / τίΜ 7αΡ> > € 7 ττυννανομαι, τω τε πεζω άμα των τειχών ημών πειράν καϊ ταΐς ναυσϊ ίο 3 κατά θάλασσαν, καϊ δεινόν μηδενι υμών δόξτ) είναι οτι καϊ κατά θάλασσαν, το yap ναυτικον ήμων, §περ κάκεΐνοι πυνθάνονται, το μεν πρώτον ήκμαζε και των νεών τή ξηρότητι και των πληρωμάτων τή σωτηρία' νΰν δε αϊ τε νήες διάβροχοι, τοσούτον is χρόνον ήδη θαλασσεύουσαι, καϊ τά πληρώματα 4 εφθαρται, τάς μεν yap ναΰς ουκ εστίν άνελκύσαντας διαψΰξαι δίά το αντιπάλους τω πλήθει καϊ 6Tt πλείους τάς τών πολεμίων ούσας αίεϊ προσδοκίαν' 5 παρεχειν ώς έπιπλεύσονται. φανεραϊ δε είσιν άνα- 2ο πειρώμεναι, καϊ αί επιχειρήσεις επ* εκείνοις καϊ c.xiv2 ΞΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΟ Η II άποξηράναι τάς σφετέρας μάλλον εξουσία' ου yap εφορμοΰσιν άλλοις. XIII ήμΐν δ' E y e n if we were 1 εκ πολλής αν περιουσίας νέων μόλις ΙΤ^ά%5^[ τοΰτο υπήρχε και μη άναγκαζομενοις, fngdistf thTdffficuity ώσπερ νυν, πάσαις φυλάσσειν' εΐ γάρ supph^7 which °we "> j ι f ν π s αφαιρησομεν \ \ τι και βραχύ j / 5. t « ' της τηρη- f/«- shall lose altogether, if we relax <>u? vigil! \ ance ever so little. σεως, τα επιτήδεια ουχ εξομεν, πάρα την εκείνων πόλιν χαλεπώς κ αϊ νυν εσκομιξόμενοι. 2 τα δέ πληρώματα διά τόδε έφθάρη 0 ur ships'companτε ήμΐν καϊ Ιτι νυν φθείρεται, των ^ S h e " cSf ο ^ χο ναυτών [τών] μίν διά φρυγανισμϊν ^ β ρ 1 £ καϊ άρπαγήν και υδρείαν μακράν υπό «sadly impaired. τών ιππέων άπολλυμένων οί δε θεράποντες, επειδή ες αντίπαλα καθεστήκαμεν, αύτομολοϋσι, καϊ οί ξένοι ο ι μεν άναγκαστοϊ έσβάντες ευθύς κατά τάς πόλεις is άποχωροϋσιν, ο ι δε ύπο μεγάλου μισθού το πρώτον έπαρθέντες καϊ οίόμενοι χρηματιεΐσθαι μάλλον ή μαχεΐσθαι, επειδή παρά γνώμην ναυτικόν τε δη καϊ τάλλα απο τών πολέμιων άνθεστώτα ορώσιν, οί μεν επ αύτομολίας προφάσει απέρχονται, οίδε ως έκαστοι so δύνανται—πολλή δ' ή Σικελία,—είσϊ δ' οι και, αυτοί εμπορευόμενοι, άνδράποδα 'Ύκκαρικά άντεμβιβάσαι υπέρ σφών πείσαντες τους τριηράρχους τήν άκρίβειαν του ναυτικοί) άφήρηνται. XIV επισταμένοις δ' ι υμίν γράφω οτι βραχεία ακμή πληYou know t h a t / \ ρωματος j j* Λ rs των ναυτών / rs \ τε ναυν και ξυνεχοντες ^\ r y / ι c. t there are only a few οι -m a ship that can be εξορμωντες %. r, j-./ και ολίγοι r depended on. ' 5 την ειρεσιαν. τούτων οε πάντων απο, , ν φf .? n ρωτατον το τε μη οίον τε είναι ταύτα , ^ v N Λ n n εμοι κωλυσαι τω στρατηγώ—χαλεπαι l C . , » <. e t t N γαρ αι υμετεραι φύσεις αρξαι—και The worst of it is I can- not control these dis- orders, such is the 2 we are wholly dependent on the supplies we brought with us to repair our daily waste in men and Athenian temper. Yet ΘΟΥΚΥΔΙΔΟΥ 12 C. XIV 2 stores. If the towns ΟΤΙ Οΐ)δ' Οπόθεν επίπΧηρωσόμεθα τάς in Italy fail us, we ' v Λ should certainly be j/#£>9 εχομεν, Ο Τθΐς ποΧεμίΟίς ποΧΧα- ίο χόθεν υπάρχει, α λ λ ' ανάγκη άφ* ώζ> έχοντες ηΧθομεν τά τε οντά καϊ άπαναΧισκόμενα γίγνεσθαι' αϊ γαρ νυν οΰσαι πόλεις ξνμμαχοι άδύ3 νατοι, Νάξος καϊ Κατάνη. ει δε προσγενησεται εν ετι τοις ποΧεμίοις, ώστε τά τρέφοντα ημάς χωρία is της ΊταΧίας, ορώντα εν ω τε εσμεν και υμών μη επιβοηθούντων, προς εκείνους χωρησαι, διαπεποΧεμήσεται αύτοΐς άμαχεϊ εκποΧιορκηθεντων ημών [ό πόλεμος]. 4 ' Ύούτων εγώ ηδίω μεν αν είχον ύμΐν έτερα έπι- 2ο it is safer to tell στεΧΧειν, ου μεντοι Υρησιμώτερά you the truth how- Γ >* > s * A i* ever disagreeable. γε, ει οει σαφώς ειοοτας τα ενναοε βουΧεύσασθαι. καϊ αμα τάς φύσεις επισταμένος υμών, βουΧομένων μεν τά ηδιστα άκούειν, αιτιωμενων δε ύστερον, ην τι ύμΐν άπ αυτών μη ομοΐον 25 εκβτ}, άσφαΧεστερον ηγησάμην το αΧηθες δηΧώσαι. 1 XV καϊ νυν ώς ε φ ' α μεν ήΧθομεν το πρώτον You must not re- καϊ τών στρατιωτών καϊ των ηγεproach u s , for we / e η \ <•* / have done our duty; μονών υμιν μη μεμπτων γεγενημένων, but t h e enemy are f/ / „ , ^v ^v N too strong for us. You ούτω την γνωμην έχετε' επειοη οε must then either recal ^ , *- / \> f/ the army or else ζ,ικεΧια τε απασα ξυνισταται και εκ $ speedily a n d effec, ,, χ tuaiiy remforce it. ίιεΧοποννησου αΧΧη στρατιά προσAnyhow Ι beg to be , , , ' f χ relieved of the com- οοκιμος, αυτοί ρουΧευσασσε ηοη ως mand,for which Ι am > > / ι / ο ο\ Λ Λ Λ disabled by disease. των γ ενθαοε μηοε τοις παροΰσιν Whatever your d e - s » » Α / f cision, let there be ανταρκουντων, α λ λ ή τούτους μετάηο delay in carrying / * / * * * • * Γ ν it out. πεμπειν όεον η αΧΧην στρατιαν μη ίο ελάσσω επιπεμπειν καϊ πεζην καϊ ναυτικην, καϊ χρή­ ματα μη όΧίγα, εμοϊ δε διάδοχόν τίνα, ώς αδύνατος 2 είμι δια νόσον νεφρΐτιν παραμένειν. άξιώ δ' υμών c. χ ν ϋ ι ΞΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΟ Η 13 ξυγγνώμης τυ^γανειν% και yap, οτ ερρώμην, ττοΧΧά ΐ5 εν ήηεμονίαις υμάς ευ εττοίησα. ο τι δε μεΧΧετε, αμα τω ήρι ευθύς και μη ες άναβοΧάς πράσσετε, ώς των ττοΧεμίων τά μεν εν ΧικεΧία δ^ οΧί^ου ποριουμένων, τά δ' εκ ΤΙ εΧοττον νήσου σχοΧαίτερον μεν, όμως δ', ην μη προσέχατε την ηνώμην, τά μεν 2ο Χήσουσιν υμάς, ωσττερ καϊ ττρότερόν, τά δε φθήσονται! XVI Ή μεν του Ύ^ικίου εττιστοΧή τοσαυτα 1 εδήΧου. οι δε 'Αθηναίοι άκούσαντες ., . τ, αυτής τον μεν Νικίαν ου τταρεΧυσαν [use t0 r ? c a l N i c i a s > ι r r but appoint two pro- τη, αρχής, ά\Χ' αύτφ, &, 9 &ν Zrepoi S V ^ n d s ξννάρχοντες aipe0evre<; άφίκωνται, ^ήνΆ thTlm. των αύτον iKec δύο ττροαβίλοντο, *& ° 0 ? f ^ £ Μένανδρον καϊ Εύθύδημον, δττω? $*"*%£$£ \ f » » / } / -ν μη μονός εν ασθένεια \ S Ν »Ν ·\ > ' ι / . ταΧαιπτωροιη' J / ' one of the two, is sent off at once with ten ships and money. στ par lav oe αΧΧην εγηψισαντο ττεμιο Ίτειν και ναυτι,κήν και πεζικήν Αθηναίων τε εκ καταλόγου καϊ των ξυμμάγων. καϊ ζυνάργρντας αΰτω εϊΧοντο Δημοσθένη τε τον ΆΧκισθενους καϊ Έιύρυμέδοντα τον ®ουκΧεους. καϊ τον μεν Εύρυμέδοντα 2 ευθύς περί ήΧίου τροττάς τάς χειμερινάς άττοττέμΐ5 ττουσιν ες την %ικεΧίαν μετά δέκα νέων, αηοντα είκοσι < καϊ εκατόν > τάΧαντα αργυρίου καϊ αμα αγγεΧούντα τοις εκεί οτι ήξει βοήθεια καϊ επιμέΧεια αύτων εσται.^ XVII Ό δε Δημοσθένης υπομένων τταρεσκευά- ι ξεΤΟ TOV / €Κ7ΓΧθυν ώς ι αμα Τω 5 ήρΐ Λν ητοιησομένος, στρατιαν τε ε ξ α γ γ έ λ ­ λω ζ; €9 τους ξυμμάγους καϊ χρήματα ετοιμάζων. 5 ναϋς και οπΧίτας Demosthenes is to follow in the Spring. αυτό θ εν και ΘΟΥΚΥΔΙΔΟΥ Η 2 ϋέμπουσι T h e Athenians and S^^onet Sf^S5££ of troops from the P e 3 loponnesus to Syracuse. δε καϊ περί ^^VOlOl εϊκοσΐ c. xvii 2 Την ΙΙεΧοπόννησον ναϋς, 'όπως οι φϋλάσ- ™ei> μηϊενα από Κορίνθου καϊ τη, Πελοποννήσου ε'9 ττ)ν ϊικεΧίαν ττερ* ό ' tica. ρακοσιων και Ά,ορινσιων ενάγοντων, επειδή επυνθάνοντο την άπ6 των 'Αθηναίων βοήθειαν s e'9 την ΧικεΧίαν, όπως 8ή εσβοΧής γενομένης διακωΧυθη. καϊ 6 'Αλκιβιάδης προσκείμενος εδίδασκε την Δεκελειαν τειγίζειν καϊ μη άνιεναι τον πόΧεμον. 2 μάΧιστα δε τοις Αακεδαιμονίοις εγεηενητό τις They consider that, ρώμη, διότι τους 'Αθηναίους ενόμιξον ίο whatever their own ~ , ,, , Λ ν guilt in being the first οιπΧουν τον ποΧεμον έχοντας, προς to violate the treaty, \ N? -v ' » n the Athenians had τε σώας και ζ,ικελιωτας, ενκαυαιρεthis time put them„ " _ w / λ selves m the wrong τωτερους εσεσναι, και οτι τας σπονοας by their invasion of 'f / * r Λ 5 Laconia. προτέρους ΧεΧυκεναι ηγουντο αυτούς' cxviii4 ΞΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΟ Η IS is βν ^ma%^^Sn εσέβαΧον' ήγεΐτο of Deceleia. / 'Α ες την δε *Αγις ο./ Λ Λ Λ ^ Αττικην 6 Άρχι-\ ' ' ν οαμου, Αακεοαιμονιων ρασιΧευς. και s πρώτον μ\ν της χώρας τα περί το πεδίον εδήωσαν, έπειτα ΔεκέΧειαν ετείχιζον, κατά πόλεις διεΧόμενοϊ το ερηον. 2 'Απέχει 8ε η ΑεκέΧεια σταδίους μάΧιστα της site of Deceleia. των ' Αθηναίων πόΧεως είκοσι καΐ εκ- *> < ατόν, παραπΧήσιον δε καϊ ου ποΧΧω πΧέον και από της Έοιωτίας. επί δε τω πεδίω και της χώρας τοις κρατίστοις ες το κακουργεΐν ωκοδομεΐτο το τείχος, επιφανές μέχρι της των 'Αθηναίων πόΧεως. 3 Κ,αϊ οι μεν εν τη 'Αττική ΐΙεΧοποννήσιοι καϊ οι is At the same time ^μμαχοι Ιτείχιζον' οι δ' iv Trj ΙίεΧοP^onnTsSuIr°Teavee ™νιήσφ απέστεΧΧον περί rivcaSrbv for Sicily, χρόρον ταΐς οΧκάσι τους όπΧίτας ες την ΣικεΧιαν, Αακεδαιμόνιοι μεν των τε ΈιΧώτων επιΧεξάμενοι τους βεΧτίστους καϊ των νεοδαμώδων, »ο ξυναμφοτέρων ες εξακόσιους όπΧίτας, και "1&κκριτον Ι,παρτιάτην άρχοντα, Βοιωτοί δε τριακόσιους οπΧίτας, ων ηρχον 3ένων τε καϊ Νίκων Θηβαίοι κα\ 4 *ϊίγήσανδρος ®εσπιεύς. οΰτοι μεν οΰν εν τοις πρώ­ τοι ορμησαντες άπο του Ταινάρου της Αακωνικης ες as c.xx2 ΞΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΟ Η ι? το πέλαγος άφεΐσαν* μετά δε τούτους Κορίνθιοι ου πολλω ύστερον πεντακόσιους όπλίτας, τους μενάπ* αυτής Κορίνθου, τους δε προσμισθωσάμενοι Άρκάδων, καϊ αργοντα Άλέξαρχον Κορίνθιον προστάξ3° αντες απέπεμψαν, απέστειλαν δε καϊ Χικυώνιοι διακόσιους όπλίτας όμοΰ τοις Κορινθίοις, ων ηρχε Ιί,αργβύς ^ΙΚυώνίΟς. αί δε πένΤ€ . f.r Λ Α f είΚΟσΐ νηες TO)V iLoplVC/ΐων αϊ , Λ, Λ Λ Λ γειμωνος > Λ πΧηρωυεισαι Λ τντ / Καϊ the Athenian squad- 5 Naupactus Λ ron at ΤΟυ being prevented b y the twenty-five Corin- ανυωρμουν ν > A thian ships from molesting them on their 35 ταις εν τί) Ναυπακτω είκοσι Αττι- departure. καις, εωσπερ αύτοΐς ούτοι οι όπλΐται ταϊς ολκάσιν από της ΐίελοποννησου άπήραν' ουπερ ένεκα καϊ το πρώτον έπληρώθησαν, όπως μη οι Αθηναίοι προς τάς όλκάδας μάλλον ή προς τάς τριήρεις τον νουν 4ο βχωσιρ* XX Έζ/ δε τούτω και οι 'Αθηναίοι αμα της 1 Δεκέλειας τω τειγισμω καϊ του ηρος A (second) squadj/i\, > / / τ τ -ν / ron of 30 ships is sent ευνυς αργομενου περί τε ιιελοπονunder Charicies to , Λ „ . t h e coast of Pelopon- νησον ναυς Τριάκοντα έστειλαν και nesus, together with , _ , „ another of 6s,destined v s Χαρικλεα τον Απολλοδώρου αργοντα, for Sicily, under D eΛ ν ν , „A , > , mosthenes. They ω ειρητο και ες Αργός αφικομενω muster at Aegina. κατά το ζυμμαγικον παρακαλεΐν Άργείων [τε] οπ­ λίτας έπϊ τάς ναυς, και τον Δημοσθένη ες την 2 Σικελίαν, &σπερ εμεΧλον, άπέστεΧλον εζήκοντα μεν ίο ναυσϊν Αθηναίων καϊ πέντε Χ tat?, όπλίταις δε εκ καταλόγου 'Αθηναίων διακοσίοις καϊ χιλίοις, καϊ νησιωτών οσοις εκασταγόθεν οίον τ ην πλείστοις χρήσασθαι, καϊ εκ των άλλων ξυμμάγων των υπη­ κόων, ει ποθέν τι εϊγρν επιτήδειον ες τον πόλεμον, is ξυμπορίσαντες. εϊρητο δ' αύτω πρώτον μετά τον Χαρικλέους αμα περιπλέοντα ξυστρατεύεσθαι περί Τ. VII 2 ιδ ΘΟΥΚΥΔΙΔΟΥ C. XX 2 3 την Αακωνικήν. και 6 μεν Δημοσθένης ες την Aiyivav προσπΧεύσας του στρατεύματος τε ει τι υπεΧείπετο περιέμενε καϊ τον Ύ^αρικΧέα τους Ά ρ 20 γείους παραΧαβεΐν. ι XXI Έ Ϊ / δε τχι ΣικεΧία υπό τους αυτούς χρό­ νους τούτου του ήρος καϊ 6 ΥύΧιπSICILY , ψ ν ^ , „ Gylippus returns πο? ηκεν ες τας Αυρακουσας to Syracuse with r e · info/cements » \ Λ /Λ τ \ from απο των ποΧεων ων έπεισε some of the Sicilian f/ ι r\ t άγων >/ -\ στρατιαν / > £> / states. HeandHer- οσην εκασταχουεν πΧειστην εουνατο. s m o c r a t e s urge the ·* / \ v* / >/ » v > 2 Syracusans to try και ξυγκαΧεσας τους Αυρακοσιους εφη naval warfare in imi^ , Λ Λ Λ ( tation of the daring χρηναι πΧηρουν ναυς ως δύνανται spirit of their foes. , v , , , πΧειστας και ναυμαχίας αποπειραν Χαμβάνειν' έΧττίζειν γαρ ά/π αύτοϋ τι έργον άξιον 3 του κινδύνου ες τον πόΧεμον κατεργάσεσθαι. ζυναν- ίο έπειθε 8ε και 6 'Έρμοκράτης ούχ ηκιστ αυτούς ταϊς ναυσϊ μη άθυμεΐν επιχειρησαι προς τους 'Αθηναίους, Χέγων ου δε εκείνους πάτριον την έμπειρίαν ουδέ άίδιον της θαΧάσσης εχειν, άΧΧ' ηπειρώτας μάΧΧον των Ζυρακοσίων οντάς και άναγκασθέντας ύπο 15 Μ,ηδων,ναυτικούς γενέσθαι, και προς άνδρας τοΧμηρούς} οΐους και 'Αθηναίους, τους άντιτοΧμώντας χαΧεπωτάτους αύτοΐς φαίνεσθαι' φ γαρ εκείνοι τους πεΧας, ου δυνάμει εστίν οτε προύχοντες, τω δε θράσέι έπιχειρούντες, καταφοβοΰσι, και σφάς αν το αυτό 2ο 4 ομοίως τοις εναντίοις ύποσχεΐν. και %υρακοσίους ευ είδέναι εφη τω τοΧμησαι άπροσδοκήτως προς το 'Αθηναίων ναυτικό ν άντιστήναι πΧέον τι, δια το τοιούτον εκπΧαγέντων αυτών, περιγενησο μένους ή 'Αθηναίους ΤΎ) έπιστημτ) την %υρακοσίων άπειρίαν 25 βΧάψοντας' ίέναι ούν εκεΧευεν ες την πειραν του 5 ναυτικού καϊ μη άποκνεΐν. και οι μεν Χυρακόσιοι, c. xxiii2 ΞΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΟ Η 19 τον Τ6 ΥυΧίππου καϊ *Έρμοκράτους καϊ ει του άΧΧου πειθόντων, ωρμηντό τε, ες την ναυμαχίαν καϊ τάς επΧηρουν. 3ο ναυς XXII Ό δε ΤύΧιππος, επειδή παρεσκεύαστο το χ ναυτικόν, άηαηών υπό νύκτα πάσαν Αη attempt t0 sur . τήν στρατών τήνπεζήν αυτό, μεν ^ ^ « Τ % τοις iv τω ΠΧημμυρίω τείχεσι κατά S J S S ^ a l ? s£ ΐμεΧΧε προσβαΧεΐν, αϊ Si τρι- racusanfleet · 5Ίήν ηρεις των Συρακοσίων άμα καϊ άπο ξυνθηματος πέντε μεν καϊ τριάκοντα εκ του μεηαΧου Χιμένος επέπΧεον, αϊ δε πέντε καϊ τβσσαράκοντα εκ του εΧάσσονος, οΰ ην καϊ το νεώριον αύτοΐς} [καϊ] περίιο έπΧεον, βουΧόμενοι προς τάς εντός προσμεΐξαι καϊ αμα επίπΧεΐν τω ΤΙΧημμυρίφ, όπως οι 'Αθηναίοι άμφοτέρωθεν θορυβώντας οι δ* 'Αθηναίοι διά τάχους 2 άντιπΧηρώσαντες εξήκοντά νανς ταϊς μεν πέντε καϊ είκοσι προς τάς πέντε καϊ τριάκοντα των ΊΖυρακοσίων is τάς εν τω μεγαΧω Χιμένι εναυμάχονν, ταις δ' επιΧοίποις άπηντων επϊ τάς εκ του νεωρίου περιπΧεούσας. καϊ ευθύς προ του στόματος του με<γάΧου Χιμένος εναυμάχουν, καϊ άντεΐχον αΧΧηΧοις επϊ ποΧύ, οι μεν βιάσασθαι βουΧομενοι τον εσπΧουν, οι δε κωΧύειν. XXIII Έζ/ τούτω δε 6 ΥύΧιππος) των εν τω ΤίΧημ*· 1 μυρίω * Αθηναίων προς την θάΧασσαν c , ~ , \ επικαταραντων t ηνωμην s " t ,, « / \ T h e forts are taken, και ΤΎ) ναυμαχία l την but in this (their first) πρθσεχοντων} Λ ,, * ,, » / ) ώνανεΐ ^/ / sea-fight the Syracu- προσrs sans are defeated with , the loss of ten ships. 5 πεσων αμα TTQ εω αιφνιοιως τοις τεί­ χεσι, καϊ αίρει το μεηιστον πρώτον, έπειτα δε καϊ τά εΧάσσω δύο, ου χ ύπομεινάντων των φυΧάκων, ως βΐδον το μεηιστον ραδίως Χηφθέν. . καϊ εκ μεν του 2 πρώτου άΧόντος χάΧεπώς οι άνθρωποι, όσοι καϊ ες 2—2 20 Θ0ΥΚΥΔΙΔ0Υ c xxiii 2 τα πΧοϊα καϊ όΧκάδα τινά κατέφνγον, ές το στρατό- ίο πεδον έζεκομίζοντο· τών yap %υρακοσίων ταΐς έν τω μβγάλω Χιμενι νανσΐ κρατούντων τη ναυμαχία υπό τριήρους μιας καϊ el· πΧεούσης έπεδιώκοντό' επειδή δε τα δύο τειγίσματα ήΧίσκετο, iv τούτω καϊ οί Χυρακόσιοι Ιτύηγανον ήδη νικώμενοι, καϊ οί έξ αυτών is 3 φβύγοντβς ραον παρέπΧευσαν. αϊ yap τών Συρακοσίων αϊ προ του στόματος νήες ναυμαγρϋσαι βιασάμεναι τάς τών 'Αθηναίων ναΰς ούδενϊ κόσμω έσέπΧεον καϊ ταραχθεΐσαι περί αΧΧήΧας παρέδοσαν την νίκην τοις * Αθηναίο ις' ταύτας τ€ yap έτρεψαν καϊ υ φ? ων *° 4 το πρώτον ένικώντο έν τω Χιμενι. και ένδεκα μεν ναΰς τών Συρακοσίων κατεδυσαν καϊ τους ποΧΧούς τών ανθρώπων άπεκτεινάν, πΧην όσον έκ τριών νεών) ους έζ^ρησαν τών δε σφετέρων τρεις νήες διεφθάρησαν. τα δε vavayia άρεΧκύσαντες τών %υρακοσίων καϊ 25 τροπαΐον έν τω νησιδίω στήσαντες τω προ του ΤίΧημμυρίου άνεγωρησαν ές το εαυτών στρατόπεδον. 1 XXIV Ο ί δε Συρακόσιοι κατά μεν την ναυμαThe capture of χίαν ούτως έπεπράηεσαν, τα δ' έν τω Plemmyrium is a -J-J-/ / Λ TOIV / had been drawn a- Χηφυεντοιν shore, fall into the κατεραλον, , , 2 hands of the enemy, σκευασαντες but they are in danger ? n Λ of having their sup- ev των τειχών, 'v plies cut off now that '· ' „ f ' 5 τ α οε όνο επιανσρωποι . τη αΧωσει \ ποΧΧοι. και ο rn απεθανον * the entrance to the Kai εζωypηθησav harbour is command- , εφρουρουν. « r/ TOIV ύστερον \ ^ \ cw 5 f /v 'νοήματα ' " ed by them. ποΧΧα τα ξύμπαντα έάΧω* ωσπερ ίο yap ταμιείω ερωμένων τών 'Αθηναίων τοις τείγεσι ποΧΧά μεν έμπορων χρήματα καϊ σίτος ένήν, ποΧΧά c. xxv 5 ΞΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΟ Η 21 δε καΐ των τριηράρχων, επει καϊ ιστία τεσσαράκοντα τριηρών καϊ ταΧΧα σκεύη εγκατεΧήφθη καϊ τριήρεις Τ άνειΧκυσμέναι τρεις, μέγιστόν τβ καϊ iv τοις πρώτον 3 5 εκάκωσε το στράτευμα το των Αθηναίων η τον ΤίΧημμυρίου Χήψις' ου yap ετι ούδ* οι εσπΧοι άσφαΧεΐς ήσαν της επαγωγής των επιτηδείων—οι yap Συρακόσιοι ναυσϊν αυτόθι εφορ μουντές εκώΧυον και δια μάχης so ή8η εγίγνοντο αϊ εσκομιδαί>—ες τε τα άΧΧα κατάπΧηξιν παρέσχε καϊ άθυμίαν τω στρατενματι. XXV Μετά δε τούτο ναΰς τε εκπέμπουσι δ(ο- 1 δέκα οι Χυρακόσιοι και Άγάθαρχον The Syracusans eV αυτών Χυρακόσιον άρχοντα, καϊ «£sdsya t f ^ ^ I αυτών μία μϊν ές ΠεΧοπόννησον φχετο Ε Κ Τ ^ Ϊ s πρέσβεις άγουσα, οΐπερ τά re, σφέ- ^ 0 7 f h V w ^ n d §f r/ 5 5-ν / » ν intercept some Athe- τερα φρασουσιν οτι εν εΧπισιν €^σ(, n i an iuppiies from καϊ τον εκεί ποΧεμον ετι μάΧΧον ay* εποτρυνοΰσι γίγνεσθαι' αϊ δε ένδεκα νήες προς την ΊταΧίαν επΧευσαν, πυνθανόμεναι πΧοΐα τοις Άθηιο ναίοις γέμοντα χρημάτων προσπΧεΐν. καϊ των τε 2 πΧοίων επιτυχούσαι τά ποΧΧά διέφθειραν και ξύΧα ναυπηγήσιμα εν ττ) ΚαυΧωνιάτιδι κατέκαυσαν, α τοις Ά,θηναίοις έτοιμα ην. ες τε Αοκρονς μετά ταύτα 3 ηΧθον, καϊ ορμονσών αυτών κατέπΧευσε μία των is οΧκάδων τών άπο ΤΙεΧοποννήσου άγουσα ®εσπιέων όπΧίτας. καϊ άναΧαβόντες αυτούς οι %υρακοσιοι 4 επι τάς ναύς παρέπΧεον επ* οικον. φυΧάξαντες δ' αυτούς οι Αθηναίοι, είκοσι ναυσϊ προς τοις Μ.εγάροις μίαν μεν ναύν Χαμβάνουσιν αντοΐς άνδράσι, τάς 2ο δ' άΧΧας ουκ εδυνήθησαν, α λ λ ' άποφεύγουσιν ες τάς Χνρακούσας. Ήγένετο δε καϊ περί τών σταυρών άκροβοΧισμος 5 22 ΘΟΥΚΥΔΙΔΟΥ c. χχν 5 iv τω Χιμένι, ους οι Συρακόσιοι προ των Skirmishing in the νεωσοίκων κατέπηΡαν εν τη Harbour about the Syracusans' palisade. , 0 7 Γ ω ? αυΤΟίς p/ f at « νηες j λ 6VTO? παΧαιών θαΧάσση. c Λ Ορμοΐεν \ /Cat 25 ol Άθηναΐοί επιπΧέοντες μη βΧάπτοιεν έμβάΧΧον6 τες. προσαγαγόντες yap ναϋν μυριοφόρον αύτοΐς οι Αθηναίοι, πύργους τε ξυΧίνους εγουσαν καϊ παραφράγματα, εκ τε των ακάτων ώνευον άναΒούμενοι τους σταυρούς καϊ άνεΐΧκον καϊ κατακοΧυμβώντες 30 εξέπριον. οι δέ Χυρακόσιοι άπο των νεωσοίκων εβαΧΧον, οι ο1 εκ της οΧκάδος άντέβαΧΧον' καϊ τέλος τοις ποΧΧούς των σταυρών άνεΐΧον οι Αθηναίοι. 7 χαΧεπωτατη δ' ην της σταυρωσεως ή κρύφιος' ήσαν yap των σταυρών ους ουχ υπερέχοντας της θαΧάσ- 35 σης κατέπηξαν, ώστε δεινον ην προσπΧεΰσαι, μη ου προϊδών τις ωσπερ περί έρμα περιβάΧη την ναυν. αΧΧά καϊ τούτους κοΧυμβηταϊ δυόμενοι εξέπριον Various other ac- ^ίσθοΰ. όμως δ' αύθις οι Συρακόσιοι s ilttTh?ZllZ: Σταύρωσαν. ποΧΧά δε καϊ ΆΧΧα 4ο ties ^ , ^ • ^ / • \ *? Λ ' \ προς αΧΧήΧους, οίον εικός των στρα­ τοπέδων εγγύς όντων και άντιτετ ay μένων, εμηγανώντο καϊ άκροβοΧισμοΐς καϊ πείραις παντοίαις εγβώντο. 9 "Επεμψαν δε καϊ ες τάς πόΧεις πρέσβεις οι 45 A (second) embassy %υρακόσιοι "Κορινθίων καϊ Άμπραfrom Syracuse to the \ Λ c* / ' /\ Λ other states of Sicily, κιωτων, και Λακεδαιμονίων, αγγεΧreporting their sue,' . , _ Λ . rt π cess and urging them Χοντας την τε του ίϊΧημμυριου ΧηΛίτιν to fresh exertions, in . / / c j * * Λ the hope of destroy- και της ναυμαγιας περί ως ου τη των ing the armament of > Λ , \ ^ * / Nicias before the ar- ττοΧεαιων ισγύι μαΧΧον ή τη σφετερα so rival of the second " Λ, r / ο τ r ^ expedition. ταραχή ήσσηθεΐεν, τά τε άΧΧα αΰ δηΧωσοντας οτι εν εΧπίσιν είσϊ καϊ άξιώσοντας ζνμβοηθεΐν επ αυτούς καϊ ναυσϊ και πεζω, ως καϊ των c. xxvii ι ΞΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΟΗ 23 Αθηναίων προσδόκιμων όντων άΧΧη στρατιά και, ήν 55 φθάσωσιν αυτοί πρότερον διαφθείραντες το παρόν στράτευμα αυτών, διαπεποΧεμησόμενον καϊ οί μβν iv TTJ Σικελία ταύτα επρασσον. XXVI Ό δε Δημοσθένης, επει ξυνεΧέγη αύτώ 1 το στράτευμα ο έδει έχοντα ες την C0AST 0F PEL0P0N. ΧικεΧίαν βοηθεΐν, αράς εκ της Alyiνης καϊ πΧεύσας 5 προς την ΏεΧοπόν- ννο^5\{ the οη°°junction o^De-" νησον τώ re ΧαροκΧβο καϊ -rah rpta%^%^£ κοντά ναυσϊ των αθηναίων ζυμμίσ- f ° ^ f Γ Κ γεί, καϊ παραΧαβόντβϊ των Άργβίων ^nd^tpposite « -ν / J οπΧιτας A \ \ « ν -ν s \ επί τας ναυς επΧεον ες την t . \ « \ Λ Cythera, to serve as a post, for marauding expeditions and an n Αακωνικην και πρώτον μεν της aSyiUm for fugitive2 ίο 'Επιδαύρου τι της Αιμηράς εδήωσαν, έπειτα σχόντες ες τά καταντικρύ Κυθήρων της Αακωνικής, ένθα το ιερόν του ΆπόΧΧωνός εστί, της τε <γής εστίν α εδήωσαν καϊ ετείχισαν Ισθμώδες τι χωρίον, ΐνα δή οι τε Έιΐλωτες των Αακεδαιμονίων αύτόσε is αύτομοΧώσι καϊ άμα Χησταϊ εξ αύτοΰ, ωσπερ εκ της Πύλου, άρπαγήν ποιώνται. καϊ 6 μεν Δημοσθένης 3 ευθύς, επειδή ξυηκατεΧαβε το χωρίον, παρέπΧει επι της Κερκύρας, όπως καϊ των εκείθεν Demosthenes proί- r συμμάχων ^ ·\ / -ν r\ \ ν -χ « r/ > τον παρα^αρων ες ν ceeds to Sicily, while την charides / Λ returns with the Argives» 2ο ΖιΐκεΧιαν πλουν οτι τάχιστα ποιηται' 6 δε ^ΚαρικΧής περιμείνας εως το χωρίον εξετείχισε καϊ καταΧιπών φυΧακήν αύτοΰ άπεκομίζετο καϊ αύτος ύστερον ταΐς τριάκοντα ναυσίν επ* οϊκου καϊ οι Άρηεϊοι άμα, XXVII Άφίκοντο δε καϊ των ©ρακών τών μα- 1 ναιροφόρων του Αιακού γένους ες τάς ATTICA ί\/' Ανήνας Λ πεΧτασταΐ ν * » « / ) / ΤΟυ αυΤΟυ ϋερους TheDianThracian mercenaries, arriving 24 ΘΟΥΚΥΔΙΔΟΥ too late to join the expedition of Demosthenes, are sent back by the Athenians, TOVTOV ΤρίακόσίΟΙ Λ / Tft) 6 5 Δημοσθβνεΐ Λ f ο who could not afford πΧεΐν. 6? ^ , Οι ο " to keep them in their a Λ c. xxvii ι ΚθΧ ΎΐΧίΟΙ, OVS €§€1 ^ 'V f Τ7?Ζ> Ζ,ΙΚεΧίαν ζυμ5 / f Αθηναίοι, 5 ως \ ύστερον / / P y· ^/eoz/, οιενοοϋντο αυτούς παΧιν όθεν ηΧθον ες %ρακην άποπέμπειν. το yap έ'%^^ ττρ09 τον εκ της ΑεκεΧείας πόΧεμον αυτούς ποΧντεΧες εφαίνετο' Βραχμην yap της ημέρας 'έκαστος εΧάμ- ίο βανεν. 3 'Ι&πειδή yap ή ΑεκεΧεια το μεν πρώτον υπό Digression on πάσης της στρατιάς έν τώ θέρει τούτω the loss and distress home by the fortification and permanent occupation of ' Λ to the Athenians at τειγισθεισα, , ποΧεων Λ <γων ' ύστερον Κατά 6 Χ , οε φρουοαΐς αττο ~J x ΟίαόΟγην /ν * s , ΎΟΟνου /νι 15 Deceieia. επιουσαις Tjj χωρά επωκεϊτο, ποΧΧα εβΧαπτε τους Αθηναίους και iv τοις ττρώτον χρημάτων τ' οΧέθρω καΐ ανθρώπων φθορά εκάκωσε 4 τα πρά^/ματα. πρότερον μεν yap βραχεΐαι yiyνόμεναι-αι εσβοΧαϊ τον άΧΧον χρόνον της γ^9 αττο- ζο Χανειν ούκ εκώΧυον* τότε Βε ξυνεχώς επικαθημένων, καϊ ότε'μεν καϊ πΧεόνων επ ιόντων, ότε δ' εξ ανάγκης της ϊσης φρουράς καταθεούσης τε την χωράν καϊ Χηστείας ποιούμενης, βασιΧέως τε παρόντος τον των i, Αακεδαιμονίων AylSoς, ος ούκ εκ πapέpyoυ τον 25 πόΧεμον εποιεϊτο, μεyάXa οι 'Αθηναίοι εβΧάπτοντο. 5 Desertion of more της τε yap χωράς άπάσης εστέρηντο than 20,000 slaves, and great destiuction of cattle and \ και ' £* _ / £> ' Λ r * e» f \ injury to the horses ηντομοΧηκεσ&ν, of their cavalry. ·\ f ανοραποοων πΧεον η όνο / / t \ και τούτων /Q ' ?> μυριάδες f _ \ το ποΧν * -. t μέρος χειροτεχναι, πρόβατα τε αποΧω- zo Χει πάντα καϊ ύπoζύyιa% ίπποι τε, όσημέραι εξεΧαυνόντων των ιππέων ττρός τε την Δεκέλειαν καταδρομάς ποιούμενων καϊ κατά την χωράν φυΧασσόντων, οι μεν άπεχωΧονντο εν yrj άποκρότω τε καϊ ξυνεχώς ταΧαι- c. xxviii4 πωροϋντες, ΞΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΟ Η ο ι δ' ετιτρώσκοντό. 25 XXVIII €7ΓίΤηδ€ίων παραΚΟμίδή εΚ Της E l 5 Ο ' > > - >η rs χ pOLaS, TTpOTepOV €Κ TOO ίίρωΤΓΟυ Κατά Λ * e \ » Λ / /ι« « JTJV Οία Της Αεκελεΐας θάσσον ούσα, . , 5 7T€pL Έ,Ουνων Κατά θάλασσαν ΤΓολυ- ij τ€ των ι The expense, moreover, of importing provisions a long way round added to their difficulties. Theyhave all the inconveniences of a siege at home. τελης iytyveTO' των τε ττάντων ομοίως επακτών εδεΐτο η πόλις, καϊ αντί του πόλις είναι φρουρών κατέστη, προς yap τη έπαλξει την μεν ημέραν κατά 2 διαδοχήν οι 'Αθηναίοι, φυΧάσσοντες, την δε νύκτα ίο καϊ ξύμπαντες πλην των ιππέων, οί μεν εφ* οπΧοις που, οί δ' επί του τείχους, καϊ θέρους καϊ χειμώνος εταλαιπωροϋντο. μάλιστα δ' αυτούς επίεζεν ότι δύο 3 πολέμους αμα είχον, Καϊ ες φίΧο- Marvellous energy νικίαν καθέστασαν τοιαύτην fjv πρϊν Tn^linttl ήπίστησεν άν τις άκουσας, ^ V i ^ X ^ Ι5 γενέσθαι το γ6 αυτούς πολιορκουμένους επι- ^ Γ Ϊ η ^ ^ Γ π ϊ ή τειχισμω υπό ΐίελοποννησίων ( μη?? fc em ' ωςλ άποστήναι εκ Σικελίας, α λ λ ' εκεί Ίί,υρακούσας τω αύτω τρόπω άντιπολιορκείν, πόλιν ουδέν ελάσσω so αυτήν γε καθ^ αύτην της των 'Αθηναίων, καϊ τον παράλογον τοσούτον ποιησαι τοις "Έλλησι της δυνάμεως καϊ τόλμης—οσοζ^ κατ* αρχάς του πολέμου οί μεν ενιαυτόν, οί δε δύο, οί δε τριών γε ετών ουδείς πλείω χρόνον ενόμιζον περιοίσειν αυτούς, 25 ει οί ΐίελοποννήσιοι εσβάλοιεν ες την χωράν—ώστε ετει έπτακαιδεκάτω μετά την πρωτην εσβολήν ηλθο,ν ες %ικεΧιαν, ήδη τω πολέμω κατά πάντα τετρυχωμένοι, καϊ πόλεμον ουδέν ελάσσω προσανείλοντο του πρότερον υπάρχοντος εκ ΤΙελοποννήσου. δι ά καϊ 4 3ο τότε ύπό τε της Αεκελείας πολλά βλαπτούσης καϊ των άλλων άναΧωμάτων μεγάλων προσπιπτόντων 26 αδύνατοι T h e y seek h d ΘΟΥΚΥΔΙΔΟΥ iyevovTO τοις χρήμασι, relief V™ TOVTOV TOV c. xxviii 4 καϊ την εικοστή ν XpOVOV TWV Κατά t;V nt SiS θάλασσαν αντί του φόρου τοις ύπηmeasure. κόοις επέθεσαν, πΧείω νομίζοντας αν 35 σφίσι χρήματα ούτω προσιεναι. αϊ μεν yap δαπάναι °νχ ομοίως καϊ πριν, άΧΧά ποΧΧω μείζους καθέστασαν, οσω καϊ μείζων 6 πόΧεμος ην, αϊ δε πρόσοδοι άπώΧΧυντο. ι XXIX Τους ούν ®ρακας τους τω Αημοσθένει The Thracian mer- υστερήσαντας, δια την παρουσαν άποcenaries, on their re„ , _ , t f turn march, having ριαν των χρημάτων ου βουΧομενοι been told to do what ~ Λ »/i \ » / t $mischief they could οαπαναν, ευυνς απεπεμπον, προσταξby the way, surprise J \ A / \ f and sack the town of αντες κομισαι αυτούς Αιειτρεφει και s M y k a l e s s u s with atrocious cruelty. , f €17Γ0νΤ€ς p/ ? αμα €V Τψ παραπΧψ f ^ f 67TOp6V- οντο yap hi Ευρίπου—και τους ποΧεμίους, ην τι 2 δύνηται, άττ αυτών βΧάψαι. 6 δε e? τε την Tavayραίαν άπεβίβασεν αυτούς καϊ apTrayrjv τίνα έποιήσατο δια τάχους, και εκ Χαλ/αδθ9 της Ευβοίας το αφ' εσπέρας διέπΧευσε τον Ένριπον καϊ άττοβιβάσας 3 69 την Ήοιωτίαν rjyev αυτούς επί Μ,υκαΧησσόν. και την μεν νύκτα Χαθών προς τω 'Έρμαίω ηύΧίσατο — α π έ χ ε ι δε της ΜυκαΧησσοΰ εκκαίδεκα μάΧιστα σταδίους,—αμα δε TJJ ήμερα ττ} πόΧει προσέκειτο ι$ οΰση ου μεyάXη, καϊ αίρει άφυΧάκτοις τε επιπεσών καϊ άπροσδοκήτοις μη αν ποτέ τίνα σφίσιν άπο θαΧάσσης τοσούτον επαναβάντα επιθέσθαι, του τείχους ασθενούς οντος και εστίν η και πεπτωκότος> του δε βραχέος ωκοδομημένου, καϊ πυΧών αμα δια 2ο 4 την άδειαν άνε^μένων, εσπεσόντες δε οι Θ ρακές ες την Μ,υκαΧησσον τάς τε οικίας καϊ τα ιερά επόρθουν καϊ τους ανθρώπους εφόνευον φειδόμενοι ούτε c.xxx3 ΞΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΟ Η $7 πρεσβυτέρας ούτε νεωτέρας ήΧικίας, αΧΧά πάντας 25 εξής, οτω εντύχριεν, καΧ παΐδας καϊ <γυναΐκας κτείνοντες, καϊ προσέτι και νποζύηια καϊ οσα άΧΧα έμψυχα ϊδοιεν. το yap yέvoς το των Θρακών όμοια τοις μαΧιστα του βαρβαρικού, iv ω αν θαρσήστ), φονίκωτατον εστί. καϊ τότε αΧΧη τε ταραχή ουκ 5 3ο ο\ιγη καϊ ιδέα πάσα καθειστήκει οΧεθρου, και επιπεσόντες διδασκαΧείω παίδων, όπερ μέηιστον ην αυτόθι καϊ άρτι ετυγρν οι παίδες εσεΧηΧυθότες, κατέκοψαν παντας' καϊ ξυμφορά τή πόΧει πάση ουδεμίας ήσσων, μάλλον ετέρας αδόκητος τε επέπεσεν αυτή καϊ δεινή. XXX Οί δε Θηβαίοι αίσθόμενοι εβοήθουν, καϊ 1 καταΧαβοντες προκενωρη κότας ήδη s u eThe mThebans purtne to , \ / / their vesν Λ τους Θράκας ου ποΧυ την τε Χειαν seis and put nearly a , , v , , fifth of them to the αφειΧοντο και αυτούς φοβησαντες sword. 5 καταδιωκουσιν επι τον Έίϋριπον καϊ την θάΧασσαν, ου αύτοΐς τα πΧοΐα α ηηαηεν ωρμει. και αποκτείνου- 2 σιν αυτών εν τή εσβάσει τους πΧείστους, ούτε επισταμένους νεΐν, των τε εν τοις πΧοίοις, ως εώρων τα εν τή yrj, όραισάντων εξω τοξεύματος τα πΧοΐα, ίο επεϊ εν yε Trj αΧΧη αναχωρήσει ουκ άτόπως οί Θράκες προς το των Θηβαίων ίππικόν, όπερ πρώτον προσέκειτο, προεκθέοντές τε καϊ ξυστρεφόμενοι εν επιγωρίω τάξει τήν φυΧακήν εποιοΰντο καϊ oXiyoi αυτών εν τούτω διεφθάρησαν* μέρος δε τι και εν τή is πόΧει αυτή δι άpπayήv εyκaτaXηφθέv άπώΧετο. οί δε ξύμπαντες των Θρακών πεντήκοντα καϊ διακόσιοι άπο τριακοσίων καϊ χιλίων άπέθανον. διέφθειραν 3 δε και των Θηβαίων και των άλλων οί ξυνεβοήθησαν ες είκοσι μάΧιστα ιππέας τε καϊ όπΧίτας ομού και 2ο Θηβαίων των βοιωταργβν Σκιρφώνδαν* τών δε 2δ ΘΟΥΚΥΔΙΔΟΥ c.xxx3 4 ΜυκαΧησσίων μέρος τι άπανηΧώθη. τά μεν κατά No more lamenta- την ΉίυκαΧησσόν πάθει γρησαμένην ble calamity occurred during the war. , ν ( ως €7Γί> μβ^€Ό€ί χ 0V06V0S ™ T(UV Κατά TOV ποΧεμον ησσον όΧοφύρασθαι άξίω τοιαύτα ξυνέβη. 1 XXXI Ό δέ Δημοσθένης τότ€ άποπΧέων επί της WESTERN GREECE Κερκύρας μετά την εκ της Αακωνικης D e m o s t h e n e s in / 5 Λ / r> c , Λ Λ Λ the Ionian gulf, where Τεΐ%ΐσΐΡ, οΧΚαόα Ορμούσαν €V Φείά he is joined b y his , < , i * t ττ / Λ ' Λ , T T colleague E u r y m e - TJTj ΪΧΧείωΡ €VpO)V, €V Ύ] 01 riopiVUlOl d o n , who brings t h e / c Λ Λ , ν ^ -χ / * ν -* « ν latest news from Sjtei^ ΟπΧίΤαΐ £ 9 T?7Z> Z^LKeXiaV εμεΧΧον 7Γ6- 5 ly, and assumes his „ , ν Ν share of the command. ραΐΟνσϋαΐ, αντην μ€ν Οΐαφϋείρεί, Οι Ο άνδρες άποφυηόντες ύστερον Χαβόντες αΧΧην επΧεον. 2 καϊ μετά τοντο άφικόμενος 6 Δημοσθένης ες την Ζάκυνθον καϊ Κ,εφαΧΧηνίαν όπΧίτας τε παρέΧαβε καϊ εκ της Ναυπάκτου των Μεσση νιων μετεπέμψατο, ίο καϊ ές την άντιπέρας ήπειρον της * Ακαρνανίας διέβη, 3 €9 ΆΧύζειάν τε καϊ 'Ανακτόρων, ο αυτοί είγρν. οντι δ' αύτω περί ταύτα 6 Έύρυμέδων άπαντα εκ της ΣικεΧίας άποπΧέων, ος τότε τού γειμωνος τά χρήματα ay ων τ$ στρατιά άπεπέμφθη, καϊ άγγέΧΧει τά τε is αΧΧα καϊ οτι πύθοιτο κατά πΧούν ηδη ων το ΊΪΧημ4 μύρων νπο των %υρακοσίων έαΧωκός. άφικρεΐται δέ They leave ten 0 f κα%ί Κόρωρ παρ αυτούς, 09 ήρχε ΝαυΖη^ο^ΐΙ^Ζ πάκτου, άΊΊέΧΧων 'ότι αϊ πέντε καϊ those a t Naupactus, ν at t h e instance of its ClKOaL· « νηες Λ ΤΤΛ/ Των ΚορίΡΌΐωΡ ? ./ αϊ σφίσΐν 2θ governor onon. άνθορμούσαι οΰτε καταΧύουσι τον πόΧεμον ναυμαγειν τε μέΧΧουσι' πέμπειν οΰρ εκέΧευερ αυτούς ραύς, ως ούχ ίκανάς ούσας δυοΐν δέουσας εϊκοσι τάς εαυτών προς τάς εκείνων πέρτε καϊ είκοσι 5 ναυμαγειν. τω μεν οΰρ Κόνων ν δέκα ναύς δ Αημο- 2$ σθένης καϊ ο Έχύρυμέδων τάς άριστα σφίσι πΧεούσας άή> ων αυτοί είγον ξυμπέμπουσι προς τάς εν TTJ c. xxxiiii ΞΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΟ Η Ναύπακτο)· Χο^ΟΡ αυτοί Βε τά περί της στρατιάς ήτΟίμάζονΤΟ. ' ν 2Q ΈίνρνμέδωΡ , ' χ U€V ' €9 , TOP ξυΧ- T h e y complete the muster of the expe- 30 τηρ Κερκυραν πΧευσας και περτεκαι- dition. Βεκά T6 ραΰς πΧηροΰν κεΧεύσας αυτούς και όπΧιτας καταΧεηόμερος—ζννήργε (γαρ ηΒη Δημοσθέρει άποτραπόμερος, ωσπερ καϊ ηρέθη,—Δημοσθένης δ' εκ τώρ περί τηρ Άκαρνανίαν χωρίων σφενΒονήτας τε 35 καί άκοντιστάς ζυναηείρων. ; XXXII Οι δ' εκ τώρ Συρακουσών τότε μετά τηρ 1 τον ΤΐΧημμυρίου ΙίΧωσιν πρέσβεις SICILY οίχόμενοι i* τάς πϊΧεις, επειΒή e W fo££ σάρ νi* SymcuseS-e attacked at the request of Τ€ Καϊ ξυΡαγβίραντας / e \ 5αξ€ίΡ /ι r TOP στρατορ, / βμβΚΧορ TT V ' ο Νικίας Ϊ Λ ^ * ψ% προ- Nicias by his Sicei Λ allies and destroyed. Λ πυσομενος πέμπει ες τωρ ζ,ικεΧωρ τους τηρ ΒίοΒορ έχοντας και σφίσι ξυμμάχους, Κ.ερτόριπάς τε καϊ 'ΑΧικυαίους και άλλους, όπως μη διαφρήσουσι τους πολεμίους, αΧΧά ξυστραφέρτες ίο κωΧύσουσι ΒιεΧθεΐρ' aXXrj yap αυτούς ούοε πειρά-? σειρ' *Κκραηαντϊροι yap ουκ εΒίΒοσαν Βιά της έαυτώρ όΒόρ. πορευομέρωρ δ' ηΒη τωρ ΣικεΧιωτώρ οι 2 Σικελοί, καθάπερ εΒέορτο οι Αθηναίοι, ivAhpap [τιρά T L P XV\ ποιησάμεροι, άφυΧάκτοις τε καϊ εξαίφνης is επιγενόμενοι Βιέφθειραν ες οκτακόσιους μάλιστα και τους πρέσβεις πΧηρ ερός τον Κορινθίου πάρτας' ούτος Βε τους Βιαφυγόντας, ες πεντακόσιους και γιΧίους, εκόμισεν ες τάς Συρακούσας. XXXIII Καϊ περί τάς αΰτάς ημέρας και οι Κα- 1 μαριναΐοι άφικνοΰνται αύτοΐς βοηBut, as a setoff to Λ Λ / v πενταΚΟσίΟΙ μεΡ e»\ » \ 0 6 αΚΟΡΤίσταΐ , „ . ΤρίαΚΟσίΟΙ. επεμψαΡ, ΌΟυΡΤες, , ΤρίαΚΟσίΟΙ 5 Tai „ f ΟπΧίΤαΐ, \ $w Καϊ ΤΟξΟο\ \ f Οε Καϊ ΟΙ this loss, reinforcemerits come in from Camarina and Gela. Infact,alltheSiceliot cities, which had hitherto only watched 3θ ΘΟΥΚΥΔΙΔΟΥ the course of events, now take an active part against Athens, exceptAkragas which 2 remains neutral. Τελωοι ναυτικόν c. xxxiii ι τε, ές πέντε y > / v KCLI ακοντίστας Τετρακόσιους / / ω ωρμουν, 6 μεν πεζός εκατέ­ ρωθεν προσβεβοηθηκώς των τε Κορινθίων καϊ των αύτόθεν ξυμμάχων επι ταΐς άνεχούσαις άκραις παρετέτακτο, αϊ δε νήες το μεταξύ €ΐχον εμφράξασαι' ηρχε he τού ναυτικού ΙΙοΧυάνθης Κορίνθιος, οι δ' 3 ι5 Αθηναίοι εκ της Ναυπάκτου τριάκοντα ναυσϊ καϊ τρισίν—ηρχζ δε αυτών ΔίφιΧος—επέπΧευσαν αύτοΐς, καϊ οι Κορίνθιοι το μεν πρώτον ήσύχαζον, έπειτα άρ- 4 θέντος αύτοΐς τού σημείου, επει καιρός έδάκει είναι, ωρμησαν επι τους Αθηναίους καϊ εναυμάχουν. και ποΧύν άΧΧήΧοις. και τών μεν Κορ- 5 20 χρόνον άντεΐχον ινθίων τρεις νηες διαφθείρονται, τών δε 'Αθηναίων κατέδυ μεν ουδεμία άπΧώς, επτά δε τίνες απΧοι έηενοντο, άντίπρωροι έμβαΧΧόμεναι καϊ άναρραηεΐσαι τάς παρεξειρβσίας ύπο τών Κορινθίων νεών επ* αυτό 25 τούτο παχυτέρας τάς επωτίδας εχουσών. ναυμαχή- β σαντες δε άντίπαΧα μεν καϊ ως αυτούς Each claims the f / 5 C. r > r. t/ Λ\ η Victory. εκατερους αξιουν νικαν, όμως οε των ναυαγίων κρατησάντων τών 'Αθηναίων διά τε την τού ανέμου άπωσιν αυτών ες το πέΧαηος καϊ διά την 32 ΘΟΥΚΥΔΙΔΟΥ α xxxiv 6 των Κορινθίων ούκετι 6ττανα<γω<γην, εκρίθησαν άπ 3> < αλλήλων, και δίωξις ουδεμία iy ενετό, οι) δ' avSpes ουδετέρων εάλωσαν' οι μεν yap Κορίνθιοι καϊ ΤΙελοποννησιοι προς τ$ yrj ναυμαχοϋντες ρα,δίως διβσω7 ξοντο, των δέ 'Αθηναίων ουδεμία κατέδυ ναϋς. άποπλευσάντων he των Αθηναίων ες την Ναύπακτον οι 35 Κορίνθιοι ευθύς τροπαΐον έστησαν ως νικώντες, οτι πλείους των εναντίαιν ναΰς απλούς εποίησαν και νομίσαντες αύτοϊ ούχ ήσσασθαι hi όπερ ούδ' οι έτεροι νικαν' οι τε yap Κορίνθιοι rjyfeavTO κρατεϊν, εΐ μη καϊ πολύ εκρατοΰντο, οι τ 'Αθηναίοι ενόμιζον 40 8 ησσασθαι} οτι ου πολύ ενικών, άποπλευσάντων δε των ΤΙελοποννησίων καϊ τον πεζοΰ διαλυθέντος οι 'Αθηναίοι έστησαν τροτταϊον καϊ αυτοί εν τη ''Αχαία ως νικήσαντες, άπέχον του 'Έρινεοΰ, εν ω οι Κορίνθιοι ωρμουν, ως εϊκοσι σταδίους. καϊ η μεν ναυμαχία 45 ούτως ετελεύτα. 1 XXXV Ό δε Δημοσθένης καϊ Έύρυμέδων, επειδή ITALY ξυστρατεύειν αύτοΐς οι ®ούριοι παρDemosthenes ' /} ? and Eurymedon, εσκευασσησαν relinquishing their / project of marching ταις τριακοσιοις their land troops „ N t \ επτακοσιοις ον\ * μεν > « be ακοντισταις, -s « «ν / οπλι- » /^ ν τας » \ « through the territory μεν ναυς παραπλειν εκελευον επι της s of Crotona, embark at T ; r / ?> ·> \ ^ \ \ <,\ the mouth of the river &ροτωνιατιοος, αυτοί oe τον πεζον Hylias and go to , , -. , „ , χ Petra near Rhegium. πάντα εξετασαντες πρώτον εττι τω 2 Χυβάρει ποταμω tfyov δια της ©ουρικός γ^9. και ως iyivovTO εττι τω 'Ύλία ττοταμω και αύτοΐς οι Κροτωνιαται προσπεμψαντες εΐπον ούκ αν σφίσι ίο βούλομένοις είναι δια της yfy σφών τον στρατον ίεναι, έττικαταβάντες ηύλίσαντο προς την θάλασσαν καϊ την εκβαλην του 'Ύλίου' καί αϊ νήες αύτοΐς ες το αύτο άπήντων. τη δ' ύστεραία άναβιβασάμενοι c. xxxvi4 ΞΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΟ Η 33 ι5 παρέπΧεον, ϊσχοντες προς ταΐς πόΧεσι πΧην Αοκρών, εως άφίκοντο επϊ ΐΐέτραν της Ύηγίνης. XXXVI Οι δε %υρακόσιοι εν τούτω πυνθανόμε- 1 νοι αυτών τον επίπΧουν αύθις ταΐς SYRACUSE ναυσϊν άποπειράσαι εβούΧοντο καΐ he^® o^SeS^a5' τχι αΧΧη παρασκευή του πεζού, ηνπερ Ρ™^> ££$^ £ s eV αυτό τοϋτο, πρϊν εΧθεΐν αυτούς ^ονΙ^Γ' hid φθάσαι βουΧόμενοι, ξυνέΧεΊον, πάρε- ^ 0 a n d e ^ 2 σκευάσαντο δέ τό τε όίΧΧο ναυτικόν, feSgfM; ώς έκ της προτέρας ναυμαχίας (τι ^ J S S S S d " ^ -ν' » πΧεον / «ο* ενεώον « / Λ . σχησοντες,) « «- και / \ \ τας J where there was no room for the enemy to manoeuvre. 10 πρώρας των νέων ξυντεμοντες €ς εΧασσον στεριφωτέρας εποίησαν, και τας επωτίδας επέθεσαν ταΐς πρωραις παχείας, καϊ άντήριδας απ* αυτών ύπέτειναν προς τους τοίχους ώς επϊ εξ πήχεις εντός τβ καϊ έξωθεν' ωπερ τρόπω καϊ οι Κορίνθιοι is προς τάς εν τη Ναυπάκτω ναΰς επισκευασάμενοι πρωραθεν εναυμάχουν. ενόμισαν yap οι Χυρακόσιοι 3 προς τας τών 'Αθηναίων ναϋς ούχ ομοίως αντινεναυπηηημενας, αΧΧά Χεπτά τά πρωραθεν έχουσας διά τό μη άντιπρωροις μαΧΧον αυτούς ή εκ περίπΧου χρήσθαι, ουκ εΧασσον σχήσειν, καϊ 20 ταΐς εμβοΧαΐς την εν τω με<γάΧω Χιμενι ναυμαχίαν, ουκ εν ποΧΧω ποΧΧαΐς ναυσϊν ούσαν, προς εαυτών εσεσθαι* άντίπρωροις yap ταΐς εμβοΧαΐς χρώμενοι άναρρήξειν τά πρωραθεν αύτοΐς στερίφοις και παχέσι, προς κοΐΧα as καϊ ασθενή παρέχοντες} τοις εμβόΧοις. τοις 8ε *Αθη- 4 ναίοις ουκ εσεσθαι σφών εν στενοχώρια οϋτε περίπΧουν οϋτε διέκπΧουν, ωπερ της τέχνης μάΧιστα επίστευον' αύτοϊ yap κατά τό δυνατόν τό μεν ου δώσειν, διεκπΧεΐν, τό δε την στενοχωρίαν κωΧυσειν Τ. VII 3 34 ΘΟΥΚΥΔΙΔΟΥ c. χχχνί 4 6 ώστε μη περυπΧεΐν» TTJ τε πρότερον άμαθία των κν- 3° βερνητων Βοκούση είναι τω άντίπρωρον ξυηκροϋσαι μάΧιστ* αν αυτοί γβησασθαϊ πΧεϊστον yap iv αΰτω σχησειν την yap άνάκρουσιν ουκ, εσεσθαι τοις 5 Αθηναίοις εζωθουμένοις αΧΧοσε ή ες την yrjv, καϊ ταυτην δι oXiyov καϊ ες oXiyov, κατ" αυτό το στρατό- 35 πεΰον το ίαυτών'—του δ' άΧΧου Χίμένος αυτοί κρατή6 σειν—καϊ ξνμφερομένους αυτούς, ην πτ} βιάζωνται, €9 oXiyov Τ€ καϊ πάντας ές το αυτό, προσπίπτοντας άΧΧηΧοις ταράξεσθαο—Οπερ καϊ εβΧαπτε μάΧιστα τους 'Αθηναίους iv άπάσαις ταΐς ναυμα-χίαις, ουκ 40 ούσης αυτοϊς ες πάντα τον Χιμενα της άνακροίσεως, ωσπερ τοις Ζνρακοσίοίς—' περιπΧενσαί 8ε ες την ευρνγωρίαν, σφών εχόντων την επίπΧενσιν από τον πεΧάτ^ους τε καϊ άνάκρονσιν, ου 8ννησεσθαι αυτούς, αΧλως τε καϊ του ΤΙΧημμυρίου ποΧεμίου τε αύτοΐς 45 εσομενον καϊ του στόματος ου μεyάXoυ οντος του Χι μένος. 1 XXXVII Ύοιαΰτα οί Χνρακόσίοι προς την εανGyiippus with the των επιστήμην τε καϊ 8ύναμιν επινοηthe Athenian lines, σαντες καϊ άμα τεθαρσηκότες μάΧΧον while 80 Syracusan „ ~ , ν , Λ f ships sail out sudden- ηοη απ ο της προτερας ναυ μανίας i X against the A the- [ '„ ^ J~ t, ν * manfleetm the Har- επεγειρουν τω τε πεζω αμα και ταις s A bour. T h e Athenians , r \ s \ \ , , , χ 2 make hasty prepara- νανσι. και τον μεν πεζον oXL·yω προtions for defence by \ > « J / land and sea. τερον τον εκ της ποΧεως ΥνΧιππος πpoeξayayώv προσ^ε τω τείνει των Αθηναίων, καθ* όσον προς την πόΧιν αύτον εωρα'\καϊ οί άπο τον 'ΟΧνμπιείον, οϊ τε οπΧΙται όσοι εκεί ήσαν καϊ ίο οί ίππης καϊ ή yvμvητείa των %νρακοσίων εκ τον επϊ θάτερα προσηει τω τείχει? αί 8ε νηες μετά τούτο ευθύς επεξεπΧεον των Σνρακοσίων καϊ ξυμμάγων* c. xxxviii 3 ΞΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΟ Η 35 καϊ οι Αθηναίοι, το πρώτον αυτούς οΐόμενοι τω πεζω z is μόνφ πειράσειν, όρώντες δε καϊ τάς ναΰς επιφερομίνας άφνω, εθορυβοΰντο, καϊ ol μεν επϊ τα τείχη καϊ προ των τειχών τοις προσιοΰσιν άντιπαρετάσσοντο} οι δε προς τους άπο του ^Ολυμπιείου καϊ των εξω κατά τάχος χωροΰντας, ιππέας τε πολλούς 2ο καϊ άκοντιστάς, άντεπεξησαν, άλλοι δε τάς ναΰς επλήρουν καϊ άμα επϊ τον αίγιαλόν παρεβοήθουν, καϊ επειδή πλήρεις ήσαν, άντανήγον πέντε καϊ έβδομηκοντά ναΰς' καϊ των ^υρακοσίων ήσαν όγδοήκοντα μάλιστα. XXXVIII Της δέ ημέρας επϊ πολύ προσ- ι πλέοντες και ανακρουσμένοι [καϊ] Thefirstday's ac, , , \ ΪΛ/ ι * ο η produces no im- πειρασαντες αλλήλων και ουδέτεροι portant result. δυνάμενοι άξιον τι λόγου παραλαβεΐν, ει μη ναΰν μίαν 5 ή δύο των Αθηναίων οι Συρακόσιοι καταδύσαντες, διεκρίθησαν' καϊ 6 πεζός άμα άπο των τειχών απήλθε. ΎΎ) δ' νστεραία οι μεν %υρακόσιοι ήσύχαζον, ούδεν 2 δηλοΰντες όποιον τι τό μέλλον ποι0 η the morroW} as ήσουσιν' ό δέ Νικίας, ίδών αντίπαλα ^JfiSS^ χο τά τής ναυμαχίας γενόμενα καϊ e W - S S ^ d ^ M ζων αυτούς αΰθπ επιχείρησες τους ^ ~ ^ τε τριηράρχους ήνάγκαζεν επισκευά- f^thf sJkePofΐί ο» \ < - . } / / - i t tection. ζειν τας ναυς, ει τις Τ6 επεπονήκει, καϊ όλκάδας προώβμισε προ τοΰ σφετέρου σταυρώis ματος, ο αύτοΐς προ τών νεών άντϊ λιμένος κληστοΰ εν τη θαλασσή επεπήγει. διαλείπουσας δε τάς όλκά- 3 δα? όσον δύο πλέθρα απ αλλήλων κατέστησεν, όπως, ει τις βιάζοιτο ναΰς, εϊη κατάφευξις ασφαλής καϊ πάλιν καθ* ήσυχίαν εκπλους. παρασκευαζόμενοι δε so ταΰτα ολην την ήμέραν διετέλεσαν οι Αθηναίοι μέχρι νυκτός. 3—2 36 1 Λ 2 ΘΟΥΚΥΔΙΔΟΥ XXXIX Ύτ) δ' ύστεραία On the third day the action is renewed, butnoseriousengagement takes place. <*>ρα? πρφτερον, 5 η r« a>VTp TOV T6 / c. xxxix ι οι Συρακόσιοι της μεν Τη Sk 67Γΐχ€ΐρησ€1 Τη c, r. \ r\ ^ πεζού Kai TOV VaVTIKOV Λ ' Λ Ζ) > • ν ' προσεμισηον τοις Αυηναιοις, καιαντικαταστάντες ταΐς ναυσϊ τον αντον τρόπον αύθις $ έπϊ πολύ διήγον της ημέρας πειρώμενοι αλλήλων. Device of A r i s t o n for taking the Athemans by surprise. TTOIV δη Αρίστων Γ Λ * plVt/ΐθς, αρίστος 6 * ων UvOQiyOV, Q > Κυβερνήτης Κ.Ο» TOUV μετά %υρακοσίων, πείθει τους σφετέρους του ναυ­ τικού άρχοντας πέμψαντας ώς τους εν τη πόλει ίο επ ιμελό μένους κελεύειν οτι τάχιστα την άηοράν των πωλουμένων μεταστήσαντας επί την θάλασσαν κομίσαι κα\ οσα rt? έχει εδώδιμα πάντας έκεΐσε φέροντας άναηκάσαι πωλεΐν, όπως αυτού εκβιβάσαντες τους ναύτας ευθύς παρά τας ναϋς άριστο- is ποιησωνται και δι ολίγου αύθις καϊ αυθημερόν ά1 προσδοκήτοις τοις 'Άθηναίοις επιχειρώσι. XL Και The Syracusans οι μβν πεισθέντες έπεμψαν αγγέλον, suddenly move to the \ f 5 \ t Ά \ t shore and landing και η ayopa παρεσκευασθη. και οι take their mid-day r ·«. / meal on the beach. Ζνρακοσιοι εξαίφνης ψρυμναν κρονσάμενοι )πάλιν προς την πόλιν έπλευσαν καϊ ευθύς s 2 έκβάντες αυτού άριστον εποιοϋντο' οι δ' 'Αθηναίοι, The Athenian fan νομίσαντβα αυτούς, ofc ^τσημένου? into the ^a£>M* for σφών, προς την πόλιν άνακρονσαconfSSmof ^ZC °~θαι'> κα® ήσνχίαν έκβάντες τά τε relsure^nd1^? aS ^ k a δ^πράσσοντο καϊ τά άμφϊ το ίο thfeXy^udde^iy ΆΡ^τον, ώς τής 7 e ημέρας ταύτης 3 g d € th\T the yTe οοΓ ™* '™ οΐόμενοι &ρ ναυμαχήσαι. i£. S withTnU1: αίΦ»νϊ δέ οίΧυρακόσιοιπληρώσαντες cientpreparation. πολλού Tfo yafa gVeVXeoI/ θορύβου καϊ άσιτοι αΰθίς' οι πλείους ΟΙ δε δΐά ούδενι κόσμω 15 c.xli4 ΞΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΟ Η 37 εσβάντες μόλις ποτέ άντανήηοντο, καϊ χρόνον μέν 4 τίνα άπέσγ^ρντο αλλήλων φυλασσόμενοι' έπειτα ουκ έΒόκει τοις Αθηναίοι? υπό σφών αυτών ΒιαμέλΧοντας κοπψ <άν>αλίσκεσθαι, αλλ! επιχειρεΐν Ύότι τάχιστα, so καϊ επιφερόμενοι εκ παρακελεύσεως έναυμάχουν. οι 5 $έ %υρακόσιοι Βεξάμενοι καϊ ταΐς νανThe battle is begun σιν άντιπρωροις χρώμενοι, ωσπερ Βιε- thosishiptareTeat' νοήθησαν, των εμβόλων τη παρασκευή eL^ys?rengihened V' x ν ' ανερρηηνυσαν » \ -ν \ 25 67TL ΤΓΟλυ i \ Λ '« Της Λ ' Λ Ζ3 Λ ' prows, and their own τ ας των Ασηναιων ναυς working deranged by 5ΤΤαρβξέΐρβσίας, Λ / \ Καϊ r% * * f small boats running ΟΙ close in upon their oars. απο των καταστρωμάτων αυτοις ακοντίξοντες μεγάλα εβλαπτον τους ' Αθηναίους, πολύ δ' ετι μείξω ol iv τοις λεπτοΐς πλοίοις περιπλέοντες των Χνρακοσίων καϊ ες τ€ τους τοίβσούς νποπίπ3ο τοντες των πολεμίων νεών καϊ ες τα πλάγια παρα­ πλέοντες καϊ εξ αυτών ες τους ναντας άκοντίζοντες. XLI Τέλος Βέ τούτω τω τρόπω κατά κράτος νανμα- 1 χούντες οι Ί,νρακόσιοι ένίκησαν, καϊ After a long and oi 'Αθηναίοι τραπόμενοι Βιά τών όλ%?££nia^g% κάΒων τήν κατάφευξιν έποιοΰντο ές dJ%^n^p! ^ 2 s τον εαυτών Ζρμον. αϊ Be τών Χυρακο- l^lehin¥lTZe > Λ / ν « c-χ /^ y of transport vessels. σιων νηες μέχρι μεν των ολκαοων επεΒίωκον' έπειτα αυτούς αϊ κεραΐαι υπέρ τών εσπλων αϊ από τών ολκάΒων Βελφινοφόροι ήρμέναι έκώλνον. Βύο Be νηες τών \νρακοσίων έπαιρόμεναι ττ) νίκη z ίο προσέμειξαν αυτών €γγι)ς καϊ Βιεφθάρησαν, και ή ετέρα αύτοΐς άνΒρασιν έάλω. καταΒύσαντες δ* οι 4 Χυρακόσιοι τών 'Αθηναίων επτά ναϋς και κατατραυματίσαντες πολλάς, άνΒρας τε τους μεν πολλούς ζωηρήσαντες, τους Βέ άποκτείναντες απεχώρησαν, και n τρόπαια τε αμφοτέρων τών ναυμαχιών έστησαν και 3$ 1 ΘΟΥΚΥΔΙΔΟΥ c. xli 4 την εΧπίδα ήδη εχυράν είχον ταΐς μεν ναυσϊ καϊ πολύ κρείσσους είναι, εδόκουν δε καϊ τον πεζόν χειρώσεσθαι. Καϊ οι μεν ώς επιθησόμενοι κατ αμφότερα τταin the midst of Ρ^κευάζοντο αύθις. XLII iv τούτω ^ Γ α « - δ έ Δημοσθένης καϊ Εύρυμέδων έχοντες SSryme^on'reach ^ν από τών 'Αθηναίων βοήθειαν παΖ the Harbour with a / hoplites and nume- 'Λ \ r t f /0^ ν « ξενικαις 5 - / > περί \ Λ f* ξυν ταις ·* / * Λ f-^ μάλιστα both armies by their KCU οπΧιτας arrival. \ ναυς τε τρεις και εβόο- / rous light troops, im- μηκοντα pression produced on Λ >•> fleet of 73 sail, Sooo pajijvovTai, πεντακισχιλιους <- / » εαυτών τε και των ξυμμαχων, ακοντιστάς τε βαρβάρους καϊ "ΈιΧΧηνας ουκ ολίγους καϊ σφενδονήτας καϊ τοξότας, καϊ την άΧΧην παρασκευήν 2 ίκανην. καϊ τοις μεν Ί^υρακοσίοις καϊ ξυμμάχοις ίο κατάπΧηξις εν τω αΰτίκα ουκ ολίγη εγένετο, εί πέρας μηδέν εσται σφίσι του άπτάΧΚαηηναι του κίνδυνου, ορώντες ούτε δια την ΑεκεΧειαν τειχιζομένην ούδεν ησσον στρατον ϊσον καϊ παραπΧησιον τω προτέρω επεΧηΧυθότα την τε των 'Αθηναίων δύναμιν τταντα- 15 χόσε ποΧΧήν φαινομένην* τω δε προτέρω στρατεύDemosthenes, tak- 3 Sfoffhfdna^ £>w£ t S S and at once. ^ a T b ™V αθηναίων ώς WW τις ίΊεΊένητο. \b δε l^v «9 είχε. τά πράματα » *ι * . ^ έκ Κακών Δημοσθένης καϊ νομί'/D 'S ν > σας ουχ οίον τε είναι οιατριρειν ουοε 2ο παθεΐν όπερ 6 Νικίας επαθεν—αφ ι κό μένος jap το πρώτον 6 Νικίας φοβερός, ώς ουκ ευθύς προσέκειτο ταΐς %υρακούσαις, α λ λ ' εν Έ^ατάνη διεχείμαζεν, ύπερωφθη τε καϊ εφθασεν αυτόν εκ της ΤΙεΧοποννήσου στρατιά 6 ΥύΧιππος άφικόμενος, ην ούδ* αν μετέ- *5 πεμψαν οι %υρακόσιοι, εί εκείνος ευθύς επέκειτο' ικανοί jap αυτοί οίόμενοι είναι αμα τ ' αν εμαθον ησσους όντες καϊ άποτετειχισμένοι αν ήσαν, ώστε c. xliii ι ΞΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΟ Η 39 μη$* el μετέπεμψαν ετι ομοίως αν αυτούς ωφεΧεΐν—, 3° ταϋτα ουν άνασκοπών 6 Δημοσθένης καϊ ηιηνώσκων οτι καϊ αύτος εν τω παρόντι τη πρώτη ημέρα μάΧιστα δεινότατος εστί τοις εναντίους, εβούΧετο ο τι τάγρς άποχρήσασθαι τη παρούση του στρατεύματος εΚΊΤληξεί. 35 Ύΐσμα teal . 6ρών ΤΟ των ζ,υρακοσιων, /v παρατεί- Λ His plans of an im- 4 mediate attack upon f ώ εκωΧυσαν L ' / " the Syracusan crosswall by way of Euryalus περιτειχίσαι σφας τους Αθηναίους, · άπΧούν bv και, ει κρατήσειέ τις των τε ΈπιποΧων της αναβάσεως καϊ αύθις του εν αύταΐς στρατοπέδου, ραδίως αν αύτο Χηφθέν—ούδε y-alp ύποβεϊναι αν σφας 4ο ονδένα,—ήπείγετο επιθέσθαι τη πείρα, και οι ξυντομωτάτην <ταύτην> ήγεΐτο διαποΧέμησιν' η yap κατορ- 5 θώσας εξειν %υρακούσας η άπάξειν την στρατιάν καϊ ού τρίψεσθαι αΧΧως Αθηναίους τε τόύς Συστρα­ τευόμενους καϊ την ζύμπασαν πόΧιΡ. ΐϊρώτον μεν 6 45 ουν την τε yrjv εζεΧθόντες των %υρα- (He begins by ra, ν Λ \ \ vaging t h e country f ) A / 1 κοσιων ετεμνον οι Ασηναιοι περί τον about the Anapus , , , with impunity, t h e ν Λ Αναπον και τω στρατευματι επεκρα- aSyracusans0 offering tt e or n tz χ « c, Λ n ^ resist- τουν, ωσπερ το πρώτον, τω τε πεζω ance.) καϊ ταΐς ναυσίν—ούδε yap καθ* έτερα οι Χυρακόσιοι δ άντεπεξησαν © %τι μη' τοις ίππεΰσι καϊ άκοντισταΐς άπο του ΌΧυμπιείου'—XLIII έπειτα After a fruitless at- 1 Λ μηγαναις J/Λ c. s τερον η A _Z}' . „ . εόοξε τω Δημοσνενει Λ Λ αποπειρασαι < ματος. Λ\ / / του παρατειχισ·) Λ ως οε αυτω //) ' r f * J his colleagues to carry out his plan of making a grand πpoσayayovτι \ tempt to take the wall προ- in front, he persuades / attack on Epipoiae from the North. s κατεκαυσησαν τε υπο των ενάντιων άπο του τείχους αμυνομένων αϊ μηχαναϊ καϊ τη αΧΧη στρατιά ποΧΧαγβ προσβάΧΧοντες απεκρούοντο, ούκέτι εδόκει διατρίβειν, αΧΧά πείσας τον τε Νικίαν καϊ τους αΧΧους ζυνάργρντας, ως επενόει, κα\ την 40 Θ0ΥΚΥΔΙΔ0Υ c. xliii ι 2 επιγείρησιν των 'ΈπιποΧών εποιεϊτο. καϊ ημέρας μεν ίο . „. . , αδύνατα εδόκει είναι Χαθεΐν προσεΧν Leaving Nicias behind the three commanders proceed just before midnight with their army until they reach the Euryalus. I he enemy s extreme ' ? f f T6 ΚθΧ avaSaVTa?, TTapaW6L' ^--*- ' \ a < ; g£ πέντε ήμερων σίτία ΚθΧ Τθύς " ' ΧιθοΧό^Ους KUt ΤεΚΤΟνας πάντας Xa' θόντας Indsome^^thTgarri? β^ΚΟί ^e^great'^part 6 nd g iv V &XXVV ΊΓαροσΚ^ν T€ ™ K a l € °<™ ® h Τοξβυμά- x5 V V Κρατώσΐ, a S to th e three τειχίζοντας εχειν, αυτός μεν από πρώS ^ K ihee τον 'ύπνου καϊ Έύρυμέδων καϊ Mivav- Lh?ofm:ddhanPlad? W V * vanced guard, ^ άράΚαβώρ ^ ^ ^ τήν ' πεζήν E w w o X στρατίάν ^ ^ΐκίαςαο 3 Se iv τοις τεί'χεσιν υπεΧείπετο. καϊ επειδή εηενοντο προς αύταΐς κατά τον Ι&ύρύηΧον, §περ καϊ ή πρότερα στρατιά το πρώτον άνέβη, Χανθάνουσί τε τους φυΧακας των Συρακοσίων καϊ προσβάντες το τείγ^ισμα ο ην αυτόθι των Χυρακοσίων αιροϋσι καϊ άνδρας των 25 4 φυΧάκων άποκτείνουσιν' οι δε πΧείους διαφυγόντες ενθυς προς τά στρατόπεδα α ην επι των ΈπιποΧών τρία εν προτειγίσμασιν, εν μεν των %υρακοσίων, εν δε των άΧΧων ΣικεΧιωτών, εν δε των ξυμμάχων, άγγεΧΧουσι τήν εφοδον, και τοις εξακοσίοις των 3° Χυρακοσίων, οΐ και πρώτοι κατά τούτο το μέρος των who hasten to the ΈιπιπόΧών φυΧακες ήσαν, εφραζον, rescue but are driven f ~, , - , » „ e 5 back in disorder upon οι ο εροησουν τε ευσνς, και αυτοις ο the fortified position -f f $ Λ S in their rear. Αημοσσενης και οι Αθηναίοι εντυγόντες ^αμυνόμενους προθνμως s έτρεψαν, και αΰτοι 35 μεν ευθύς εγωρουν ες το πρόσθεν, υπως τ$ παρούση oppufj του περαίνεσθαι ων ένεκα ηΧθον μή βραδεΐς Others set about γενωνται' άΧΧοι δε \άπό της πρώτης demolishing the part N f of the counter-wail το παρατεΐ'χισμα ort. Gyiippus and ονχ υπομενόντων ' των ζ^υρακοσίων, τών φυΧάκων, %ρουν ΑΟ c. xliv 3 T6 KOI ΞΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΟ Η τάς Se Z,VpaKQGlOl _-_ έπάΧξείς Kai 41 aireaVpOV. Ol his troops also are 6 —"' driven back, dismayt f ( ΟΙ ξυμμαγΟΙ Kai O ed by the boldness of * « # tilG clttilCJC· ΤύΧιππος και οι μετ αυτού έβοηθουν εκ των προτειγ^ισμάτων, καϊ αδόκητου του τοΧμη45 ματος σφίσιν iv νυκτί γενομένου προσέβαλαν τε τοις Άθηναίοις εκπεπΧηγμένοι καϊ βιασθέντες υπ* αυτών ΤΟ ΤΓρώτΟν υΤΓεγωρησαν. >* Λ / ' » e \ Λ f" ΤΓροϊόντων ^ ^ Their ardour of 7 pursuit, in the confi- oe των Ασηναιων ev αταξίαL μάλλον dence of victory, disturbs the regularity / C s f r N „ f ηοη ως κεκρατη κοτών και ρουΧο μένων of the Athenian ^ ν ν rs f / so δια 'παντός του μηπω , , < f TQ)V εναντίων ως μεμανημενου * a« Τανίστα Οίελθείν, ranks, so that they could not resist the shock of the onset of the Boeotians who ίνα {αη ανεντων σφών της εφόδου a stand. αύθις ξυστραφώσιν, οι Έοιωτοϊ πρώτοι αντοΐς άντέσχον καϊ προσβαΧόντες έτρεψαν τε καϊ ες φυγην 55 κατέστησαν. XLIV Καϊ ενταύθα ηδη εν ποΧΧτ) ταραχή καϊ ι απορία iyiyvovTo οι 'Αθηναίοι, ην Α11 now becomes a ουδέ πυθέσθαι ράδιον, $ν ούδ' άφ9 ^ a n l " 5 5 2 2 έτερων Ιτω τρόπω Ζκαστα ξυνηνέχθη. ^ f ^ ^ Y ^ l μέν yap ήμερα σαφέστερα μέν7 Thf ρΓη S a S , 5iv 'όμως δέ ουδέ ταύτα οι παραΊενόμενοι ^^ΖίΓ^Μ > -ν ν ν & f \ t/ flight. s πάντα πΧην το κασ εαυτόν έκαστος μόΧις οΐδεν' εν δε νυκτομαχία, η μόνη δη στρα­ τοπέδων μεγάΧων εν γε τωδε τω πόΧέμω εγένετο, ίο ττώ / while Gylippus visits v ^ 5 τεκαιοεκα ναυσι ζ,ικανον απεστειΧαν, in person the various f/ , , λ / , f cities in the interior οπως επαηαηοιτο την ποΧιν, ει δυ- of Sicily. ναιτο' ΥύΧιππος δε κατά <γήν ες τήν άΧΧην ΧικεΧίαν ωχετο αύθις άξων στρατιάν ετι, ώς εν εΧπίδι ών και τά τείχη τών 'Αθηναίων αίρήσειν βία, επειδή τα εν jo ταΐς 'ΈπτιποΧαϊς ούτω ξυνέβη. ΘΟΥΚΥΔΙΔΟΥ 44 1 c. xlvii I XLVII Ol δε των 'Αθηναίων στρατηγοί iv τοντφ CounciiofAthe- εβονΧεύοντο προς τ€ την γεηενημενην nian commanders. T h e failure of their attack on Epipolae, and the sickness in the camp, makes their case seem hopeless. Demosthenes is for departing without delay; they could be of $. , ξνμψΟΟαν \ \ \ \ 7ΓΟΟ? Την Καί ,~ Λ N Tft) σΤ0αΤ07Γ€0ω Κατά ' f ' Λ v GTiaV. ΤΟίς T€ yap , Λ εωρων OV Kai000'0VV7"6? ' ' ? > Λ TTaOOVCTaV €V , , TTClVTa αρρω, , επίγείρημασίν 5 . v Kai ΤΟνς στ pa- 2 more use at home. τιωτας αχθομενονς τή μονή' νοσώ T6 yap επιέζοντο κατ αμφότερα, της τε ώρας τον ενιαντον ταύτης ούσης iv § άσθενονσιν άνθρωποι μάΧιστα, καί το χωρίον αμα iv ω εστρατοπεδεύοντο εΧώδες ίο καί χαΧεπον ην' τά τε αΧΧα οτι ανεΧπισ<τοτα>τα 3 αύτοΐς εφαίνετο. τω οΰν Δημοσθένει ονκ εδόκει €Τί χρήναι μενειν, αλλ,' απερ καί διανοηθείς ες τάς 'ΈπιποΧάς διεκινδύνενσεν, επειδή εσφαΧτο, άπιεναι εψηφίζετο και μη διατρίβειν, εως ετι το πεΧαγος is οΐόν τε περαιονσθαι και τον στρατεύματος ταΐς yovv 4 επεΧθούσαις νανσϊ κρατεΐν, και τή πόΧει ώφεΧιμωτερον εφη είναι προς τους εν τή χωρά σφών επιτειχίζοντας τον πόΧεμον ποιεΐσθαι ή Ίίνρακοσίονς, ονς ονκέτι ράδιον είναι χειρώσασθαι' ουδ' αν άΧΧως «ο χρήματα ποΧΧά δαπανώντας εικός είναι προσκαθήσθαι. Καί ό μεν Δημοσθένης τοιαύτα εγί<γνωσκεν. 1 Objection of Nici- XLVIII o δέ Νικίας ενόμιξε μεν κα\ as. He admits the ·> \ gravity of the situa- αντος tion, and, though undecided in his own mind really, he pro- sείναί, * / / · r\ \ σψων πονηρά τα t πράγματα Λ ξΜ -\ ' ' Ό /-ν TOO 0 6 Λ Ο γ ω OVK ερονΧεΤΟ ) * ' £ / '<>> ϊ ι » \ OVTa « tests against such an ασσενη αποοεικννναι, ουο εμφανώς open confession of , Λ , , j, / \ ·* \ ^ ν their weakness, when σφας ψηφιζομενονς μετά ποΧΧων την 5 they might retire se- , / , . Λ cretiy. He would αναχωρησιν τοις ποΧεμιοις καταγγεΧrather face the enemy , Λ % / i ~ \ y c / than his own country- τονς γιηνεσυαι' Χαυειν γαρ αν, οπότε men who would be sure to resent their z withdrawal without _ , pOVXoiVTO, ^ authority from home, ησσον. Λ TOVTO \ ^ / Λ πΟΙΟνντες \ \ r > το οε τ ι και τα των ποΧΧω ' ποΧε- c. xlviii 5 ΞΥΓΤΡΑΦΗΟ Η 45 ίο μίων, αφ' ων επι πΧέον ή οι αΧΧοι ησθάνετο αυτών, εΧπίΒος TL ετι παρείχε πονηρότερα τών σφετέρων εσεσθαι, ην καρτερώσι προσκαθήμενοι' χρημάτων yap απορία αυτούς εκτρυχώσειν, αΧΧως τε καϊ έπϊ πΧέον ήΒη ταΐς ύπαρχου σαις ναυσΐ θαΧασσοΐ5 κρατούντων. και—ην yap τι και εν ταΐς Χνρακούσαις βουΧόμενον τοις Άθηναίοις τα πράματα ενΒουναι—επεκηρυκεύετο ως αυτόν καϊ ουκ εϊα άπανίστασθαι. α επισταμένος τω μβν 6ργω ετι επ* άμ- 3 φότερα έχων καϊ Βιασκοπών άνεΐχε, τω δ' εμφανεΐ so τότε Xoyoy ουκ εφη άπάξειν την στρατιάν. ευ yap είΒέναι οτι 'Αθηναίοι σφών ταύτα ουκ άποΒέξονται ώστε μη αυτών ψηφισαμένων άπεΧθεΐν. καϊ yap ου τους αυτούς ψηφιεΐσθαί τε περί σφών αυτών και τα πράγματα ωσπερ καϊ αυτοί ορώντας καϊ ουκ 25 αΧΧων επιτιμήσει άκούοντας yvώσεσθaι, αλλ' εξ ών αν τις ευ Xέyωv ΒιαβάΧΧοι, εκ τούτων αυτούς πεισεσθαι. τών τε παρόντων στρατιωτών ποΧΧούς καϊ 4 τους πΧείους εφη, οι νυν βοώσιν ως εν Βεινοΐς οντες, εκεΐσε άφικομένους τάναντία βοή σεσθαι ως υπό χρηοι στpaτηyo\ άπήΧθον, οΰκουν 3ο μάτων καταπροΒόντες βούΧεσθαι αυτός yε επισταμένος τας 'Αθηναίων φύσεις επ* αισχρά τε αιτία καϊ άΒίκως υπ 'Αθηναίων άποΧέσθαι μαΧΧον ή υπό τών ποΧεμίων, ει Bei, κινΒυνεύσας τούτο παθεΐν ΙΒία. τα τε Χυρακοσίων εφη 5 35 Ομως εΤΙ ησσω τών ν , y , σφετέρων χ% είναί' , ~ και χρήμασι yap αυτούς ξενοτροφούντας καϊ εν περιποΧίοις αμα άναΧίσκονΤας Καϊ ' __ ναυΤΙΚΟν ' πθΧυ εΤΙ ενίαυΤΟν Bad as their affairs > t h o s e o f Syra- were cuse were as bad and unds were exhausted f and they were dependent on mercenaries. ήΒη βόσκοντας τά μεν άπορεΐν, τά δ' ετι άμηχανήσειν' 4ο ΒισχίΧιά τε yap τάλαντα ήΒη άνηΧωκέναι καϊ ετι Φ ΘΟΥΚΥΔΙΔΟΥ c xlviii 5 ποΧΧά προσοφείΧειν, ην τβ καϊ οτιουν εκΧίπωσι της νυν παρασκευής τω μη Βιδόναι τροφήν, φθερβϊσθαι αυτών τα πράγματα, επικουρικά μαΧΧον η δι άνάγ6 κης ωσπερ τα σφέτερα οντά. τρίβειν οΰν εφη χρήναι προσκαθήμενους και μη χρήμασιν, ων ποΧύ κρείσ- 45 σους είσί, νικηθεντας άπιέναι. 1 XLIX Ό μεν Νικίας τοσαυτα Χέγων Ισχυρίζετο, He insists on a fur- αίσθόμενος τά εν τοις %υρακονσαις ther trial of their for- , _. \ Λ \ Λ > ·> tune, partly because ακριβώς, και την των χρημάτων of private advices from the philo-Athenian party in Syra- , piaV , Kai , * . » / / ) ΟΤΙ ην αυΤΟΌΐ , Λ , Λ cuse, partly from con- ομενον τοις Ασηναιοις fidence in the superi- 2 απο- Λ ν ν /Ο Λ πΟΜ) TO p-QVK, t <υπογειρια> f 5 5 ority of their fleet. γίγνεσθαι τ α πράγματα και έπικηρυκβυόμενον προς αυτόν ώστε μή άπανίστασθαι, και άμα ταΐς γουν ναυσιν, rj πρότερον, εθάρσει <καϊ> κρατDemosthenes in- ηθείς. 6 δε Δημοσθένης περί μεν του sists at least on re- /I« /) ' ^» t r» » ο / moving forthwith out προσκαυησσαι ουο οπωσουν ενεοε- to of the Harbour to * e \ < < > > > \ > / \ Thapsus or Catana, χετο* el οε del μη απαγειν την στρατif they cannot aban, . « , # #/ λ }/ don the siege without ιαν άνευ Ασηναιων 'ψηφίσματος, formal authority from , Λ } Λ home. aXXa τριβειν αυτού, βφη χρηναι η ες την ®άψον άναστάντας τοΰτο ποιεΐν ή ες την Υ^ατανην, όθεν τω re πεζω ίπι ποΧΧα της χώρας 15 έπιόντες θρέψονται πορθοΰντες τά των ποΧεμίων καϊ εκείνους βΧάψουσι, ταΐς τε ναυσιν εν πεΧάγει καΐ ουκ εν στενοχώρια, η προς των ποΧεμίων μάΧΧόν εστί, τους αγώνας ποιησονται, αΧΧ' εν ευρυχωρία, εν η τά τε τής εμπειρίας χρήσιμα σφών εσται και 2ο αναχωρήσεις καϊ επίπΧους ουκ εκ βραχέος καϊ περι3 γραπτού ορμώμενοι τε καϊ καταίροντες εξουσι. τό τε ξύμπαν ειπείν, ούδενϊ τρόπω οι εφη άρέσκειν εν τω αύτω ετι μένειν, αλλ' σ η τάχιστα ήδη εξανίστασθαι καϊ μή μέΧΧειν. καϊ 6 Έιύρυμέδων αύτω 25 c. 13 ΞΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΟ Η 47 ταύτα ξυντγγόρβυίν. άντιλέγοντος Be του Νί/α'ου δκνο ·> t r unsuccessful from f V ο μεν Ζ^ικανος αμαρτων του Ακρα- Agrigentum,butGy5 yaVTOS ^ f ev -ρ/Λ 1 eXa χ , / αυΤΟυ f άΧλην στασις * 6TI ,j. Τ6 Λ l j p p u s brings a considerable accession of forces from Sicily to- φίλια εξε- gether with some hop' ΤύΧίππος lites sent from Peloponnesus. the στρατιάν ποΧΧην 'έχων ηΧθεν απο της Σικελίας και τους εκ της ΐΙεΧοποννήσου του ηρος έν ταΐς όΧκάσιν όπΧίτας άποσταΧεντας, άφικομίνους από της Αιβύης ίο €9 ΧβΧίνοΰντα. Αιβύην, άπενεχθέντες ηάρ καϊ δόντων Κυρηναίων 5»-/ ν Λ - ν ^ ί 69 τριή- r Adventures of the 2 TTtZ'Zt^ \ way to Sicily. ρβις ουο και του πΧου ηηεμονας^ και ev τω παράπΧω Έίΰεσπερίταις ποΧιορκουμενοις υπό Αιβύων ξυμμαχησαντες και νικήσαντες τους Αίβυς} is καϊ αύτόθεν παραπΧεύσαντες ες Neap πάλιν, Καρχηδονιακόν εμπόριον, οθενπερ Σικελία ελάχιστον δύο ημερών και νυκτός πλουν απέχει, καϊ άπτ αυτού περαιωθέντες άφίκοντο ες Σελινούντα, καϊ οι μεν 3 Χυρακόσιοι ευθύς αυτών ελθ όντων r c, f 20 παρεσκευαζοντο , . , v/j j n Emboldened with > this accession to their ι ως επισησομενοι « s * U ' κατ forces the Syracusans \ αμφότερα αυσις τοις Ασηναιοις, και ν \ *,* <<\\ « » Α / 1 / ναυσι και πεζω· οι οε των Αυηναιων , N f n v στρατηηοι ορωντες στρατιάν τε αλΧην , \ \ f f Λ προσηεηενημενην αυτοις και τα εαυV» <•/ > •> \ \ r% ι « 25 των αμα ουκ επι το βεΧτιον χωρουντα, get ready for a new attack. T n e Athenian generais now regret their former decision, the reluctance of Nicias is overcome, and orders for retreat are privately circulated, when the moon is 48 ΘΟΥΚΥΔΙΔΟΥ c. Ι 3 eclipsed. The feel- αλλά καθ* ήμύραν τοις πάσι γαλβπώ- ings of the supersti- « f tious prevail and they T6QOV ΐσγΟΡΤα. r refuse to stir. f Λ μάλίστα » Λ / e» \ Οε TV » /1 ασθβ- / z/eia τώι/ ανθρώπων πιεζόμενα, μετεμίλοντό τε πρότερον ον/c άναστάντες, καϊ ώς αύτοΐς ούδε 6 Νικίας ετι ομοίως ηναντίουτο αλλ' ή μη φάνε- 3> < ρώς yε ο,ζιων ψηφίζεσθαι, προεϊπον ώς εδύναντο άδηλότατα εκπΧουν εκ τον στρατοπέδου πάσι καϊ 4 παρεσκευάσθαι, όταν τις ση μήνη, καϊ μελλόντων αυτών, επειδή έτοιμα ην, άποπλεΐν ή σελήνη εκλείπει' ετύγχανε yap, πανσέληνος ούσα. καϊ οι Αθηναίοι 35 οι τε πλείους επισχείν εκέλευον τους στpaτηyoύς ενθύμιον ποιούμενοι, καϊ 6 Νικίας—ην yap τι καϊ ayav θειασμω τε καϊ τω τοιούτω προσκείμενος—ούδ' αν διαβουλεύσασθαι ετι εφη, πριν, ως οι μάντεις ifyyovvTO, τρις εννέα ημέρας μεΐναι} όπως αν προ- 4° τερον κινηθείη. και τοις μεν Άθηναίοις μελλήσασι Βιά τούτο ή μονή έyεyέvητo. 1 LI ΟΙ δε ^υρακόσιοι και αυτοί τούτο πυθόμενοι TheSyracusans.as πόΜφ μάλλον επηρμένοι ήσαν μή threanVmylhresoiu-f wikvai τα των αθηναίων, ως καϊ ανdiLscap^aredeier: των κατεγρωκότωρ ήδη μηκέτι κρεισΑ preliSiSr^S^ σ ^νων ^ ν α 1 σ Φ^ν Μ™ ™W VaVOh 5 L ' f o t Sf « M l " μντε τω πεζω-ού £& ofthemTe επιβουλεύσαι,—και yap &v τον Ικπλουρ Άμα ού βουλόμε- driven / within their > \ >\ % « χ? -ν ' lines with the loss VOL αυτούς αλλοσε ποι της Αΐκελιας καθ εζομένους χαλεπωτέρους είναι προσπολεμεΐρ, αλλ' αυτού ως' τάχιστα και ερ ω ίο 2 σφίσι ξυμφέρει άpayκάσaι αυτούς ναυμαγεϊν. τάς ούν ναύς επληρουν καϊ άνεπειρωντο ημέρας ο σαι αύτοΐς έδόκουν ικανοί είναι, επειδή δε καιρός ην, Tjj μεν πρότερα προς τα τείχη των 'Αθηναίων aliii 2 ΞΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΟ Η 49 is προσέβαΧΧον, teal επεξεΧθόντος μέρους τίνος ου ποΧΧοΰ καϊ των όπΧιτών καϊ των Ιππέων κατά τινας πύΧας, άποΧαμβάνουσί τε των όπΧιτών τινας καΧ τρεμάμενοι καταδιώκουσιν* ούσης δε στενής της εσό­ δου οι Αθηναίοι ίππους τε εβδομήκοντα άποΧΧύουσι so και των όπΧιτών ου ποΧΧούς. LII Καί ταύτη μεν ι Tfj ήμερα άπεχώρησεν ή στρατιά των General attack of ^νρακοσίων τ$ δ' ύστεραια ταΐς τε g£d asnydras^sans by ναυσϊν έκπΧέουσιν οϋσαις ίξ καλ έβc* / \ Λ Ο Λ Γ / \ \ a ^ f ^ S * nian fleet in the H a r - όομηκοντα, και τω πεζω αμα προς τα bour- DeathofEuryτείχη εχώρουν. οι δ' 'Αθηναίοι άντα- rae on* νήηον ναυσϊν εξ και ό<γδοήκοντά και προσμείξαντες εναυμάχουν. και τον Έιύρυμέδοντα έχοντα το δεξιον 2 κέρας των 'Αθηναίων και βουΧόμενον περικΧήσαιο σθαι τάς ναυς των εναντίων και επεξά<γοντα τω πΧω προς την ηήν μάΧΧον, νικήσαντες οι Χυρακόσιοι και οι ξύμμαχοι τό μέσον πρώτον των 'Αθηναίων, άποΧαμβάνουσι κάκεΐνον εν τω κοίΧω [μυχω\ τον Χιμένος, καϊ αυτόν τε διαφθείρουσι και 15 τάς μετ' αυτού ναΰς επισπομένας' έπειτα δε και τάς πάσας ήδη ναΰς των 'Αθηναίων κατεδίωκόν τε καϊ εξεώθουν ες τήν <γήν. LIII Ό δέ Υύ^ιππος ορών ι τα9 ναϋς τών ποΧεμίων νικωμένας Partial success a . καϊ 'έξω τών σταυρωμάτων καϊ του ^ ξξΓΙΙΙ%1: εαυτών στρατοπέδου καταφερομένας, taking eighte^ldnps 5 r> 5 -v ' Ο ι Ζ) ' ^ * Ο ' and kill the crews. βουΧομενος οιαφθεψειν τους εκβαινοντας καϊ τάς ναυς ραον τους Έ,υρακοσίους άφέΧκειν της <γής φιλίας ούσης, παρεβοήθει επϊ τήν χηΧήν μέρος τι έχων της στρατιάς. καϊ αυτούς οι Ύνρ- 2 σηνοί—ούτοι yap εφυΧασσόν τοις Άθηναίοις ταύτη— ίο όρώντες ατάκτως Τ. VII προσφερόμενους, επεκβοηβήσαντες 4 So ΘΟΥΚΥΔΙΔΟΥ c. liii 2 καϊ προσπεσόντες τοις πρώτοις τρέπουσι καϊ εσβάΧΧουσιν ες την Χίμνην την ΑυσιμέΧειαν καΧουμένην. 3 ύστερον δε πΧείονος ήδη τον στρατεύματος παρόντος των Συρακοσίων καϊ ξνμμάχων, καϊ οι 'Αθηναίοι επιβοηθήσαντες καϊ δβίσαντες περί ταΐς ναυσϊν ες τ$ μάγτ)ν Τ€ κατέστησαν προς αυτούς καϊ νικήσαντες επεδίωξαν καϊ όπΧίτας τε ου ποΧλούς άπέκτειναν καϊ τας νανς τάς μεν ποΧΧας διέσωσαν τε καϊ ζυνήγαγον κατά το στρατοπεδον, δυοϊν 8ε δέουσας einoσιν οι Έ,υρακόσιοι καϊ οι ξύμμαγοι εΧαβον αυτών 2ο An attempt to de- καϊ τους άνδρας πάντας άπέκτειναν. stroy the remainder \ > \ \ ^ . \ J <•» r% ^ t 4 of thefleetby a fire- και επι τας Χοιπας εμπρησαι ship baffled b y t h e ( λ ^ ν Λ βουΧο- _ ,~ Athenians. μενοι οΧκαοα παΧαιαν κΧηματιοων καϊ δαδος γεμίσαντες-—ην yap έπϊ τους 'Αθηναίους 6 άνεμος ούριος—άφεΐσαν την ναϋν πυρ εμβαΧόντες. *5 καϊ οι 'Αθηναίοι δείσαντες περϊ ταΐς ναυσϊν άντεμηγανήσαντο σβεστήριά τε<καϊ> κωΧύματα,καϊ παύσαντες την τε φΧόγα καϊ Το μη προσεΧθεϊν εγγύς την όΧκάδα του κινδύνου άπηΧΧάγησαν. LIV Μετά δε On both sides τοΰτοΧυρακόσιοι μεν της τε ναυμαχίας trophies are raised; ' \ -» >/ Λ ν Λ two by the Syracu- τροπαιον έστησαν και της αν ω της sans, one b y t h e „ , , Λ f Athenians. προς τω τειχει αποΧήψεως των οπΧιτών, όθεν καϊ τους ΐππους εΧαβον, 'Αθηναίοι δε ης 5 τε οι Ύυρσηνοϊ τροπής εποιήσαντο των πεζών ες την Χίμνην καϊ ης αύτοϊ τω αΧΧω στρατόπεδα). ι LV Υεγενημενης δε της νίκης τοις Χυρακοσίοις The decisive vie- Χαμπρας ήδη καϊ του ναυτικού—προtory of the enemy re- duced the Athenians to utter despondency and their fortunes to the lowest ebb. This was thefirsttime they had contended with democratic cities, v \ >j /-> ~ \ \ τερον μεν γαρ ζψομουντο τας μετά „ A ^ > -ν / ι / Λ , του Δημοσσενους ναυς επεΧυονσας,— < \ *\ n ~ J \ Μ >Λ ' / οι μεν Αυηναιοι εν παντι οη ασυμιας s ^ , , , λ e Λ. ήσαν και ο παραΧογος αντοις μέγας c.lvi3 ΞΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΟ ην, πολύ f δέ μείζων f f o μεταμεΧος. / »/(N Η 51 6ΤΙ Τ ής στρατβίας ' f s into which there was no hope of introduca πόλεσι c yap ταυταις t , ™s n element of2 A discord. μοναις ηΒη ομοιότροπος επεΧθοντες, ίο Βημοκρατουμέναις τε, ωσπερ και αυτοί, καϊ ναΰς και ίππους καϊ μεγέθη ε/χούσαις) ου Βυνάμενοι επενεγκεΐν οϋτβ εκ πολιτείας τι μεταβολής, το Βιάφορον αύτοΐς φ προσήγοντο αν, οϋτ' εκ παρασκευής πολλω κρείσσονος, σφαλλόμενοι Βε τα πλείω, τά τε προ αυτών is ήπόρουν καϊ επειδή ye καϊ ταΐς ναυσίν εκρατήθησαν, ο ουκ αν ωοντο, πολλω Βή μάλλον €τι. LVI Οι Βε Έ^υρακόσιοι τον τε λιμένα ευθύς ι παρέπλεαν άΒεώς καϊ το στόμα αύτου T h e confidence of Βιενοοΰντο κλτ/σειν, Οπως μηκέτι, μηΒ' j£e proponionS I S el βούλοιντο, λάθοιεν αυτούς οι Άθη- g ^ Toeing %t s ναΐοι ίκπλεύσαντες. ου yap περί του ^ ^ £ f £ 2 5 /)Λ \ αυτοί σωθηναι •Ν » Λ ' ν \ J • / μόνον ετι την επιμεΆ -ν ν \ t/ > / Hellas. T h e v Dre- pare to intercept the enemy's retreat bv Χειαν εποιουντο, αΧΧα και όπως εκεί- closing up the mouth νους κωλύσουσι, νομίζοντες, όπερ ην, of the H a r b o u r · από τε των παρόντων πολύ σφών καθυπερτερα τά ίο πράγματα είναι και, ει Βύναιντο κρατησαι Αθηναίων τε και των ξυμμάγων καϊ κατά yrjv και κατά θάλασ­ σαν, καλόν σφίσιν ες τους f Εϊλληνας το αγώνισμα φανείσθαι' τους τε yap άΧΧους "Ι&λληνας ευθύς τους μεν <αν> ελευθεροΰσθαι, τους Βε φόβου άποΧύεσθαι ι 5 —ου yap ετι Βυνατήν εσεσθαι την ύπόΧοιπον Αθη­ ναίων Βύναμιν τον ύστερον επενεχθησόμενον πόΧεμον ενεγκεΐν,—καϊ αύτοϊ Βόξαντες αυτών αίτιοι είναι υπό τε των άΧΧων ανθρώπων καϊ υπό τών έπειτα ποΧύ θαυμασθησεσθαι. και ην Βέ άξιος ό Pan-heiienic im- 3 , ν , Λ \ ™ ξυγκτησόμενοι Ρ™ Mow*, TO* ΖΐΚε- τήν χώ- S^VvSuurarOVre* yracuse. ^\ ^υρακούσας, επολέμησαν, ου 5 κατά δίκην τι μάλλον ούδε κατά ξυγγένειαν μετ αλλήλων στάντες, α λ λ ' ως έκαστοι της ξυντυχίας 2 η κατά το ξυμφέρον η άνάγκτ) εσχον. Αθηναίοι I. Catalogue of the μ€Ρ A t h e n i a n allies (A) in Hellas proper. dVToi / "Ιωνες f f iirl 9-V /l Δωρίέας - \ 2f/Ja» Λ A κοσιους εκοντες ηλσον, και αυτοί? TJJ IO , Λ , « χ , ,/ , (i)Theirowncolon- aVTV Φ<*ντ) και νομιμοις ετιχρωμενοι ists · Αημνιοι κα\ "Υμβριοι και Αίγινηται οΐ τότε Αϊγιναν είχον καϊ ετι *Έιστιαιής οι εν Εύβοια 'Έιστίαιαν οίκοΰντες, άποικοι οντες, ξυνεστράτευσαν. 3 « $\ Subjects and των δε Άλλων οι μεν υπήκοοι, οι δ' is . ° tributaries who were · ' ' (α) ionians, από ξυμμαχίας αυτόνομοι, είσι δ* ot 4 και μισθοφόροι ξυνεστράτευον. καϊ των μεν υπη­ κόων καϊ φόρου υποτελών Έρετριής καϊ Χαλκιδής καϊ %τυρής καϊ Καρύστιοι απ* Ευβοίας ήσαν, από δε νήσων Κεΐοι καϊ "Ανδριοι και Ύηνιοι, εκ δ' 'Ιωνίας 2ο Μιλησιοι καϊ %άμιοι καϊ Χΐοι. τούτων Χ,ΐοι ούχ ύποτε\εΐς οντες φόρου, νανς δε παρέχοντες αυτό­ νομοι ξυνείποντο. καϊ το πλείστον "Ιωνες οντες c. lvii 9 ΞΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΟ Η 53 οΰτοι πάντ€ς καϊ άττ * Αθηναίων πΧήν Κ,αρυστίων— 25 οΰτοι δ' eial Δρύοπβς,—υπήκοοι δ' οντ€ς καΐ avdyKy όμως "ϊωνές ye €πι Αωριέας ήκοΧούθουν. προς δ' 5 αύτοΐς ΑίοΧής, Μηθυμναΐοι μβννανσϊ ^ Aeoiians, καΐ ου φόρω υπήκοοι, TeviSioi δέ καϊ P « ^ * * * * * Αϊνιοι ύποτ€Χ€ΐς. ούτοι Be ΑίοΧής AloXedai τοις κτί3ο σασί Βοιωτοΐς <τοΐς> μ€τά Συρακοσίων κατ* ανάγκην ίμάχοντο, ΤΙΧαταιής δε και άντικρυς Βοιωτοί Βοιω­ τό ις μόνοι €ΐκότως κατά το 'έ'χθος. ^ Dorians, ΎόΒιοι Be και Κυθήριοι Δωριής άμ- ^ against kin! fi φότ€ροι, οι μ^ν Αακ€Βαιμονίων άποικοι, Κυθήριοι, 35 έπϊ Αακ€Βαιμονίους τους άμα ΥυΧίππφ μ€τά 'Αθη­ ναίων οπΧα €πέφ€ρον, 'ΡόΒιοι Be, 'Apyeloi γένος, Συρακοσίοις μέζ> Αωρ^ϋσι, Τ€Χωοις Be καϊ άποίκοις ίαυτών ουσι, μ€τά ^υρακοσίων στρατ€υομένοις, ήνα^κάζονΤΟ πθ\€μ€Ϊν. Των Τ€ π€ρϊ , __ n 4 Ίΐ€Χθποννησον 0 νησιωτών Κ.€φαΧ, , " x v f n Χήν€ς μβν Καϊ ΔακυνθίΟΙ αυτόνομοι Independent allies, 7 b u t serving under compulsion, either islanders or having special enmities. μέν, κατά Be το νησιωτικον μαΧΧον κατ€ΐργόμ€νοι, οτι θαΧάσσης έκράτουν οι 'Αθηναίοι, ξυν€ΐποντο· Κ.€ρκυραΐοι Be ου μόνον Αωριής άΧΧά καϊ Κορίνθιοι 45 σαφώς έπι Κορινθίους τε καϊ Συρακοσίους, των μίν άποικοι 6ντ€ς, των Be £υγγεζ>ε£?, avayKrj μ^ν CK του €υπρ€ποϋς, βουΧήσ€ΐ Be κατά βγθος το Κορινθίων °ν% νσσορ ^ίποντο. ];καϊ οι Μ.€σσήνιοι νυν καΧού- 8 μ€νοι e/c Ναυπάκτου καϊ έκ Πύλου τότε υπ* Άθηέχομένης ές τον πόΧ€μον παρ€Χηφθησαν. 5ο ναίων καϊ ετί- Μεγαρέων φνγάδε? ου πόΧΧοϊ Μεγαρευσί. %€Χίνουντίοις οΰσι κατά ξυμφοράν e , Voluntary allies. €μαχοντο. των be άλλων €Κουσιος μαΧΧον ή στρατ€ΐα eyiyveTO ήΒη. 'Apyeioi 9 μ\ν yap c. lvii 9 ΘΟΥΚΥΔΙΔΟΥ 54 ου της ξυμμαχίας ένεκα μάλλον η της Αακεδαιμον- 55 ίων τ€ έχθρας καϊ της παραυτίκα 'έκαστοι ίδιας ώφελίας Δωριής έπϊ Αωριέας μετά 'Αθηναίων Ί ώ νων ηκολούθουν, Μ,αντινής δε καϊ άλλοι 'Αρκάδων μισθοφόροι, έπϊ τους άεϊ πολεμίους σφίσιν άποδεικνυμένους είωθότες ίέναι, ίκαϊ τότε τους μετά 6ο Κορινθίων ελθ όντας 'Αρκάδας ούδεν ησσον δια κέρδος ηγούμενοι πολεμίους) Κρήτες δε καϊ Αιτωλοί μισθω καϊ ούτοι πεισθέντες9 ξυνέβη δε τοις Κρησι την Τέλαν ΊΡοδίοις ζυηκτίσαντας μη ξύν τοις άποίκοις, αλλ* έπϊ τους άποικους έκόντας μετά μισθού 6$ ίο έλθεϊν. καϊ 'Ακαρνανων τίνες άμα μεν κέρδει, το δε πλέον Δημοσθένους φιλία καϊ 'Αθηναίων εύνοια 11 ζύμμαχοι οντες έπεκούρησαν. και οϊδε μεν τω Ίονίω κόλπω οριζόμενοι* Ίταλιω(Β) Italiots. Λ ' ; Χ τι/τ των οε ν^ουριοι και Μεταποντιοι, 7ο εν τοιαύταις άνάηκαις τότε στασιωτικων καιρών (Ο Siceiiots and κατειλημμένοι, ξυνεστράτευον, καϊ non-Heiienic. Σικελιωτών Ν άξιοι καϊ Καταναΐοι, βαρβάρων δε 'Έ^ηεσταΐοι, οΐπερ εττηγάγοντο, καϊ Σικελών το πλέον, και των εξω Σικελίας Ύυρσηνών is τέ τίνες κατά διαφοράν Συρακοσίων καϊ Ίάπυγες μισθοφόροι, τοσάδε μεν μετά 'Αθηναίων έθνη εστράτευον. ι LVIII Συρακοσίοις δε άντεβοήθησαν Καμάριιι. Allies of the ναΐοι μεν Ομοροι οντες καϊ Τελώοι Syracusans > Λ * » / ν » * (a) in Sicily, οικουντες μετ αυτούς, έπειτα Ακραηαντίνων ησυχαζόντων (εν τω επ* εκείνα ιδρυμένοι) 2 Σελινούντιοι. και οϊδε μεν της Σικελίας το προς s Αιβύην μέρος τετραμμένον νεμόμενοι· *Ιμεραΐοι δε άπο του προς τον Ύυρσηνικόν πόντον μορίου, εν ω c.lix3 ΞΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΟ Η 55 f και μόνοι Έ^λληνες οϊκοϋσιν* ούτοι δε καϊ έζ αύτοΰ μόνοι έβοηθησαν. και (Ελληνικά μεν έθνη των ev 3 ίο Σικελία τοσάδε, Δωριής τβ και αυτόνομοι οι πάντες, ζυνεμάγουν, βαρβάρων δε Σικελοί μόνοι όσοι μη άφεστασαν προς τους 'Αθηναίους* - V >'ϊ V Λ' Φ Λ Λ ' Λ <*) out of Sicily. των ο εξω Σικελίας Οιλλήνων Λα/eeδαιμόνιοι μεν ηγεμόνα Χπαρτιάτην παρεχόμενοι, νεοΐ5 δαμώδεις δε τους άλλους καϊ Έιΐλωτας—δύναται δε το νεοδαμωδες ελεύθερον ήδη είναι,—Κορίνθιοι δε καϊ ναυσϊ καϊ πεζω μόνοι παραγενόμενοι καϊ Αευκάδιοι καϊ Άμπρακιώται κατά το ξυγγενές, εκ δε 'Αρκαδίας μισθοφόροι υπό Κορινθίων άποσταλέντες καϊ Ζ,ικυ2ο ώνιοι άναηκαστοϊ στρατεύοντες καϊ των εξω Πελο­ ποννήσου Έοιωτοί. προς δε τους επελθόντας τούτους 4 οι Σ,ικελιώται αντοϊ πλήθος πλέον κατά πάντα παρέσχοντο, άτε μεγάλας πόλεις οίκουντες* καϊ <γάρ όπλΐται πολλοϊ καϊ ν η ες καϊ ίπποι καϊ ο άλλος 25 όμιλος άφθονος ξυνέλέγη. καϊ προς απαντάς αύθις ως ειπείν τους άλλους Συρακόσιοι αύτοϊ πλείω επορίσαντο διά μέγεθος τε πόλεως καϊ οτι εν μεγίστφ κινδύνω ήσαν. LIX καϊ These were all that 1 αϊ μεν εκατερων επικουρίαι τοσαίδε were P resent · ξυνελέγησαν, καϊ τότε ήδη,πάσαι άμφοτεροις παρήσαν καϊ ουκετι ουδέν ούδετέροις επήλθεν. ΟΙ δ' ουν %υρακόσιοι καϊ οι ξύμμαχοι εΐκότως 2 5 ένίμισαν καλόν αγώνισμα σφίσιν εί- T h e Syracusans> ναι έπϊ τη ΊεΊενημένη νίκη τής ναυ- \^ ^ SfflS μαχίας ελεΐν τε τό στρατόπεδον άπαν l ^ t c e V t t των [Αθηναίων τοσούτον ον, καϊ μηδέ H a r our ' ίο καθ' έτερα αυτούς, μήτε Βιά θαλάσσης μήτε τω πεζω, διαφυγεΐν. εκληον ουν τον τε λιμένα ευθύς τον 3 56 ΘΟΥΚΥΔΙΔΟΥ c. lix 3 μεηαν, έχοντα το στόμα οκτώ σταδίων μάλιστα, τριήρεσι πλα^ίαις και πλοίοις και άκάτοις eV αγκύ­ ρων όρμίζοντες, καϊ τάλλα, ην ετι νανμαχεΐν ol Αθηναίοι τολμήσωσι, παρεσκενάζοντο, καϊ ολίγον 15 ονδεν ες ονδεν επενόονν. 1 LX Ύοΐς δε 'Αθηναίοι? την τβ άπόκλησιν όρώσι The 2 h Athenians a ^on s re^^gri Κα ^ T VP άλλην hiaVOiaV aVT&V αϊσθο- A*&<»5 βονΧβντέα 86κβΙ. f u « h , r C p i S ? ^ θόντπ οι re στρατηγοί Drovidiner for the re- ν ν Κθί %Wek- καϊ οι ^ ' ?eption If the bag- χοι ττρο9 την παρονσαν gage a n d t h e sick, resolve to make one g r e a t effort t o force their way out by sea with all their avail- >N -ν T€ άλλων > / τ / · \ aVTLKd €Tl €ΐχον προπεμψαντες ? s r r ' > - \ ' \ > * > αποριαν των 5 \ t/ \ » r £> ν Καϊ ΟΤΙ Τα €ΊΓΙΤήθ6ΐα OVT6 »/ able troops, or if de- €9 Ά,ατανην feated, by land. ταξίαρ/ / ως εκπλενσομενοι >/ \ Λ » jap « απει\ >/ ~ πον μη επαηειν—οντε το λοιπόν εμελλον εξειν, ει μη νανκρατήσονσιν, εβονλεύσαντο τα ίο μεν τείχη τά άνω εκλιπεΐν, προ? δε αύται? ταΐς νανσϊν άπολαβόντες διατειχίσμάτι όσον οΐόν Τ€ ελά­ χιστον τοις τε σκενεσι καϊ τοις άσθενονσιν ίκανον γενέσθαι, τούτο μεν φρονρειν, άπο he του άλλον πεζού τάς ναϋς άπάσας, οσαι ήσαν καϊ δύναται και απ- is λοώτεραι, πάντα τινά εσβιβάζοντες πΧηρώσαι, καϊ διαναυμαχήσαντες, ή ν μεν νικώσιν, ες Κ.ατάνην κομίζεσθαι, ην δε μη, εμπρήσαντες τάς ναϋς πεζή ξννταξάμενοι άποχωρεΐν § αν τάχιστα μέλλωσί τίνος χωρίου η βαρβαρικού ή (Έΐλληνικοΰ φίλιου άντιλή- 20 3 ψεσθαι. και οι μεν, ως εδοξεν αντοΐς ταύτα, καϊ εποίησαν εκ τε yap των άνω τειχών νποκατεβησαν και τάς ναϋς επλήρωσαν πάσας, άναγκάσαντες εσβαίνειν 'όστις καϊ όπωσοϋν εδόκει < ηλικίας μετέχων 4 επιτήδειος^ είναι. και ξυνεπληρώθησαν νήες αϊ 25 πάσαι δέκα μάλιστα καϊ εκατόν τοξότας τε e V clxiii ΞΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΟ Η 57 αύτας ποΧΧΡυς και άκοντιστάς των τβ Άκαρνάνων καϊ των άχΧων ξένων βσββίβαζον καί τάΧΧα ω? οίον τ ην έξ ανα^αίον τβ καϊ τοιαύτης διανοίας 6 δβ 'Nt/cia^ βπβιδή τα ττολλά έτοιμα 5 3ο βπορίσαντο. ην, ορών καϊ τους στρατιώτας τω τβ w h e n their prepa . \ \ j / i \ -.ν Λ ν , - ^ rations were 'πάρα το βιωθος ποΧυ ταις ναυσι fCpa- completed, /j* > τηυηναι s / ) « \ < \ > ασυμουντας C / k Λ \ και οια την των r e t ο nearly Nicias did hi§ best to revive their drooping coura e S , b y haranguing βπιτηοβιων σπανιν ως τάχιστα μου- them before going 35 Χομβνους διακινδυνβύβιν, ξυηκαΧβσας απαντάς παρβκβΧβύσατό τβ ττρώτον teal βΧβξβ τοιάδβ' LXI ζ"Ανδρβς στρατιώται 'Αθηναίων τε καί των ι άΧΧων ξνμμάχων, 6 μεν άγων 6 μέΧ- A d d r e s s o f Χων ομοίως κοινός αΊτασιν βσται περί (c.^ei—Τβ^) ι \ re σωτηρίας ' χ τ s ονχ ησσον / \ την e »\ Λ Λ / r. »\ / r r \ > / •> r /Λ που οικβιαν ποΧιν ιΛ « ασνμβίν f j for all. I f we win, we m a y y e t see ou ; homes a g a i n ; but we / b e cast down b y a few reverses. Re- ?> \ * \ *^ \ / member the surprises o Οβ OV χρη 01/06 ΤΤα- of war, and, hoping * « Ϊ Λ / for the fair turn of t σχβιν οπβρ οι άπβιροτατοι Λ T h e decisive and desperate struggle is νυν ταις ναυσιν, βστι τω must not let ourselves υπαρχουσαν 5 o > « €7T10€IV. (f * t βκαστοις η τοις ποΧβμιοις* ην ηαρ is κρατησωμβν /& και πατρώος > r, των ανσρωι Λ/ f0rtune,fightworthily o fthis S r e a t force. ίο πων} οι τοις πρώτοις αηωσι σφαΧβντβς βπβιτα δια παντός την βΧπίδα του φόβου ομοίαν ταΐς ξυμφοραΐς βχουσιν. αλλ' όσοι τβ 'Αθηναίων πάρβστβ, 3 ποΧΧών ήδη ποΧβμων βμπβιροι οντβς, καϊ όσοι των ξυμμάχων} ξυστρατβυόμβνοι άβί, μνησθητβ των βν is τοις ποΧβμοις παραΧόγων, καϊ το της τύχης καν μβθ* ημών βΧπισαντβς στηναι καϊ ώς άναμαχούμβνοι άξίως τοΰδβ του πΧήθους, όσον αύτοι υμών αυτών βφορατβ, παρασκβυάζβσθβ. LXII α δβ αρωγά βνβί- 1 δομβν επί Τ§ ΤΟυ Χίμβνος σΤβνότηΤΙ W e are going to , „ „ fight under condiN v Λ προς u TOVΚαί προς βσβσυαΐ >/ μβΧΧοντα Την βΚβίνωννβων us b y imposed board \ \ OVXOV Των \ » / βπΐ tions t h e enemy—a , land-battle on upon 58 ΘΟΥΚΥΔΙΔΟΥ c. Ixii ι ship, in which our τών καταστρωμάτων usual skill and tactics παρασκευήν, 7T^ f ' /» οΐς $ \ will not avail us. προτερον ερΧαπτομευα, πάντα και ήμΐν νυν εκ τών παρόντων μετά των κυβερνητών 2 εσκεμμένα ήτοίμασται. καΧ jap τοξόται ποΧΧοι και άκοντισταϊ έπίβήσονται και οχΧος ω ναυμαχίαν μεν ποιούμενοι εν πεΧάηει ουκ αν εχρώμεθα Βιά ίο το βΧαρτειν αν το της επιστήμης τη βαρύτητι τών νεβν) εν Βέ τ§ ενθάΒε ήναηκασμενη άπο τών νεών ^πεζομαχία πρόσφορα εσται. ηυρηται δ' ήμΐν οσα χρή άντιναυπη^εϊσθαι, καϊ προς τάς τών επωτίΒων αντοΐς παχυτητας, ωπερ Βή μαΧιστα εβΧαπτόμεθα, is χειρών σιΒηρών επιβοΧαί, άί σχήσουσι την πάΧιν άνάκρουσιν της προσπεσούσης νεώς, ην τα επί τον4 τοις οι επιβαται υπουρηώσιν. ες τούτο yap Βή ήναηκάσμεθα ώστε πεζομαχεΐν άπο τών νεών, καϊ το μήτε αυτούς άνακρούεσθαι μήτ εκείνους εάν ώφέΧιμον ζο φαίνεται, άΧΧως τε και της γης πΧην όσον αν 6 1 πεζός ημών επέχη ποΧεμίας ούσης. LXIII ών χρή To the hopiites ι μυημένους Βιαμάχεσθαι όσον αν ΒύSaShenre?anxe T t ^^θε, "™ Μ έξωθεΐσθαι ές αυτήν, ί™1 ^cfearet1 Γ άΧΧά ξυμπεσούσης νηϊ νεώς μή πρόenemy s deck. τερον άξιοϋν άποΧυεσθαι ή τους άπο s του ποΧεμίου καταστρώματος οπΧίτας άπαράξητε. 2 καϊ ταύτα τοις όπΧίταις ούχ ήσσον των ναυτών παρακεΧεύομαι, οσω τών άνωθεν μάΧΧον το epyov To the seamen, τοΰτο'Ι υπάρχει δ* ήμΐν ετι νυν ye τα Keep up your cour- - ^ 9 3 age, you have more πΧειω τώ πεζώ and better defended ' '· Λ επικρατειν., „ ν Λ τοις Βε ίο > ships than the enemy, ναύταις παραινώ και εν τω αυτω τώΒε καϊ Βέομαι μή εκπεπΧήχθαί τι ταΐς ξυμφοραΐς ayav, τήν τε παρασκευήν άπο τών καταστρωμάτων βεΧτίω νυν έχοντας καϊ τάς ναΰς πΧείους, εκείνην τε τήν c. Ixiv2 ΞΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΟ Η 59 is ήδονήν βνθυμβίσθαι ώ, άζία βστϊ διασώσασθαι) οϊ τέως "Αθηναίοι νομιξόμβνοι, καϊ μη . Athe . Τ ο the non 6ντες, ημών τη, τβ φωνή, τ$ hn^ J ^ l ^ στημν καϊ των τροπών τή μιμήσβι ™y llT?U™gZ βθαυμάζβσθβ κατά τήν Ε λ λ ά δ α , καϊ t ^ L T l ^ t * ' * Λ 20 της αρχή, \ «αΤίϊ x e / Λ \ > J -ν /} TO ωφέΚβίσϋαί, « e / ,Λ ' τη, ημβτβρα, \ out ουκ έλασσον >/ Α ι /θ 6, Τ6 TO ψορβ\ \ » ^ « / 5 Greece. Show that your skill, in spite °f weakness and reverses, is greater than another's strength. pov TOL, υπήκοοι, και TO αοικβισσαι ποΧυ πΧβΐον, μβτβίχβτβ. ώστβ κοινωνοί μονοί βΧβυ- 4 θέρω, ήμΐν τη, αρχή, οντβ, δικαίω, αυτήν νυν μή 25 καταπροδίδοτβ, καταφρονήσαντβ, δβ Κορινθίων τε, ου, ποΧΧάκι, ν€νικήκατ€} και Ζ/ικβΧιωτών) ων οΰ& άντιστήναι οΰδβί, βω, ήκμαζβ το ναυτικον ήμΐν ήξίωσβν, άμύνασθβ αυτού, και δβίξατβ οτι καϊ μβτ* άσθβνβία, καϊ ξνμφορών ή υμετέρα επιστήμη κρβίσ3ο σων εστίν έτερα, βύτυγρύση, ρώμη,. LXIV Του, 1 τβ Αθηναίου, υμών παΧιν αΰ και _, , ' ' Those τάδβ ύπομιμν^σκω, οτι ουτβ νάϋ, iv τοΐ, νβωσοίκοι, αΧΧα, όμοια, ταΐσδβ s οϋτβ όπΧιτών ήΧικίαν ύπβΧίπβτβ, βϊ τβ ξυμβήσβταί τι άΧΧο ή τό κρατάν ύμίν, τού, τβ ένθάδβ ποΧβμίου, βύθύ, eV βκβϊνα πΧβυσουμένου, καϊ τού, βκβΐ ύποΧοίπου, ημών αδυνάτου, βσομέ/ to νου, Ϊ του, /if Όοντα, > Λ τβ αυτού ' / 3 αμυνασυαι. c \ Ό / υπο Ζ,νραΚΟσίΟΙ, , \ ν r/ \ \ και του, \ και f ' ' «ν βπβλ\ Λ who are ^ΐΓαί? LteT^ot ^Ι^π^Λ^ίο^η' SfHEdtI£el Ιψ%^\^£ ^ H ^ U P A E S Jg| ^Tources^^er ^T^'sKS.5 no more hoplites to replace t h o J e now tare. Such an oc- οι μβν αν >a ^ ' βυσυ, ηΐηνοΐσϋβ, / ·> f-\ Λ Ζ3 cas i on for putting ? forth your utmost ΟΙ, skill and bravery will t £> never recur. αυτοί ιστβ οία <γνωμτ) βπηΧσβτβ, οι ο βκβΐ υπο Αακβδαιμονίοι,. ώστβ βν ένΐ τώδβ ύπβρ 2 is αμφοτέρων άηώνι καθβστώτβ, καρτβρήσατβ, βϊπβρ ποτέ, καϊ βνθυμβΐσθβ καθ* έκαστου, τβ καϊ ξύμπαντβ, 6ο ΘΟΥΚΥΔΙΔΟΥ α lxiv 2 οτι οι εν ταΐς ναυσϊν υμών νυν έσόμενοι καϊ πεζοί τοις 'Αθηναίοι? εισϊ καϊ νηες καϊ <ή> υπόλοιπος πόλις καϊ το μέγα όνομα των Αθηνών, περί ών,ψϊ τις τι έτερος ετέρου προφέρει ή επιστήμη η ευ^υγίαλ ουκ 2ο αν έν άλλω μάλλον καιρώ άποδειξάμενος αυτός τε αύτω ωφέλιμος γένοιτο και τοΐς ξύμπασι σωτήριος, 1 LXV Ό μεν Νικίας τοσαΰτα παρακελευσάμενος The Syracusans ευθύς ε κέλευε πληρούν τάς ναΰς. τω guard against the , χ new Athenian mven- οε 1 υΧιππω tions by counter-in- ^ \ ' , Λ και » τοις Λ / Ζ,υρακοσιοις /ι c « ventions. παρήν μεν αισθανεσθαι ορώσι και αυτήν την παρασκευήν, οτι ναυμαχήσουσιν οι Άθη- $ ναΐοι, προηγγέλθη δ' αύτοϊς καϊ ή επιβολή των 2 σιδηρών 'χειρών, καϊ προς τε τάλλα έζηρτύσαντο ως έκαστα και προς τούτο· τάς yap πρώρας και της νεώς ανω επί πολύ κατεβύρσωσαν, όπως αν άπολισθανοι καϊ μη εχοι άντιλαβήν ή χειρ επιβαλλομένη, ic και επειδή πάντα έτοιμα ην, παρεκελεύσαντο εκείνοις οϊ τε στρατηγοί και Υύλιππος και ελεξαν τοιάδε' 1 LXVI '"Οτι μεν καλά τά προειρηασμενα καϊ Address of Gyiip- virep καλών τών μελλόντων 6 άγων DU3 and t h e S v r a - »/ •? κ? ' f-' ν iusan command- etrrai, ω Ί,νρακοσίοι και ξυμμαχοι, οϊ τ€ "Τββ^ΓϊΧ ™ λ λ ο ' δο "6«·« ημίν eltevcu— The glorious vie- ου δε yap άν ούτως αυτών προθύμως 5 tories already won , , ,, ν over the mightiest αντελαρεσσε,—και state in Hellas are a ν , Λ 2 sure earnest of our όει ησσηται, future success. T h e y came here to enslave us with their navy, , ν ει τις μη επι όσον , * ' , ' / ryap 6 9 TVV ' ' Λ ση μανού μεν. r ' " νωραν > \ Λ , . ΤηνΟε «/ Ασηναιους ' , ελϋΟντας / but you have beaten ητρώτον μεν επι της Σικελίας them and will beat them again; because the greater their pride, ' δουλωσεί, shocfoftheirfeU^nd anT e thrS k tSir power of resistance. και τ ' επείΤ 9 ' s , εΐ ΚαΤΟρθωσείαν, ' ^ ΐίελοποννήσου καϊ της ^ 9 Έ λ λ ά δ θ 9 , ΛΛΙ α/>%^ τ^ι/ μ^ί £ πρίν 'Ελλήνων λ κατα- y ίο άλήδη καϊ c.lxvii3 ΞΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΟ Η 6ΐ των νυν κεκτημένους, πρώτοι ανθρώπων υποστάντες is τω ναυτικω, ωπερ πάντα κατέσχον, τάς μεν νενικήκατε ήδη ναυμαχίας, την δ' εκ τον εικότος νυν νικήσετε, άνδρες yap έπειδάν φ άξιοΰσι προύχειν 3 κολουθώσι, το y ύπόλοιπον αυτών της δόξης άσθενέστερον αυτό εαυτού εστίν ή εί μη$ ωήθησαν το so πρώτον, και τω παρ ελπίδα του αύχήματος σφαλλόμενοι και παρά Ισχύν της δυνάμεως ένδιδόασιν ο νυν 'Αθηναίους είκος πεπονθεναι. LXVII ημών δε ι τό τε υπάρχον πρότερον, ωπερ καϊ Success> on t h e » ' yf n ' -\ / contrary, emboldened ανεπιστημονές ετι οντες απετόλμηu s and doubled our σαμεν, βεβαιότερον νυν, και της δο- opes' s κήσεως πpoσyεyεvημέvης αύτω το κρατίσι ους είναι εί τους κρατιστούς ενικήσαμεν, διπλασία εκάστου ή ελπίς' τά δε πολλά προς τάς επιχειρήσεις ή μεyίστη έλπϊς μεyίστηv κα\ την προθυμίαν παρέχεται, τά 2 τε της άντιμιμήσεως αυτών της πα- As for their neWΛ ί « r, \ e / t fangled inventions, ρασκευης ημών τω μεν ημετερω τρόπω feeble imitations o f ζυνήθη IO butuseless,andsuchas τέ εστί Καϊ ούκ 5 η άνάρμοσΤΟΙ / * C» ' ^ Υ & Γ β ' S /Ι W e n a V e Pr°" προς εκαστον αυτών εσομεθα* οι δ , videdagainst them. έπειδάν παλλοι μεν δπλΐται επί τών κατάστρωματων παρά το καθεστηκος ώσι, πολλοϊ T h e number of ς , \ ν , IS Οε Καϊ αΚΟνΤίσταΐ, , , Λ ζ « χερσαίΟΙ, 7 „ C J « fighting-men on board ως € 6 7 Γ € « / , their ships will be a , ν source of confusion Λ Ακαρνανες τε και άλλοι επι ναυς and rum to them. άναβάντες, ot ούδ* όπως καθεζομένους χρή το βέλος άφεΐναι εύρήσουσι, πώς ου σφαλοΰσί τε τάς ναΰς καϊ εν σφίσιν αύτοΐς πάντες, ουκ εν τω αυτών τρόπω 2ο ΚίνούμενΟΙ, Ταράξονταΐ: ; , Λ πλησει ν eVel Καϊ Τω The very number 3 , , ' o f their ships also i n των νέων ουκ ωφελησονται, ν /* c « ων ήμΐν πάρε- 25 4 σκεύασται. το δ' άΧηθέστατον ηνώτε εξ ων ημείς οίόμεθα σαφώς πεπύσθαι* ύπερβαΧΧόντων yap αύ. Their present effort ™fc is not one of con- « ™V ^ακων > ΚθΙ » βίαζόμενοί t ' V7TO » / ' fidence, but of sheer τ??9 παρούσης απορίας 69 απονοιαν espair * * καθεστήκασιν ου παρασκευής πίστει ζο μαΧΧον η τύχης άποκινδυνεΰσαι ούτως όπως δύναν­ ται, ϊν η βιασάμενοι εκπΧεύσωσιν ή κατά ηην μετά τούτο την άποχωρησιν ποιώνται, ως των καΧος 6 ay ων. καϊ κινδύνων ούτοι σπανιώτατοι οι c. 1χίχ3 ΞΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΟ Η $3 αν ελάχιστα εκ του σφαλήναι βλάπτοντας πλείστα δια το εύτυχήσαι ώφελωσιν? LXIX Κ α ί οι μεν των %υρακοσίων στρατηγοί ι Καϊ Γύλίππος , Α ΤΟίάΰτα , Καϊ ανΤΟΙ ΤΟίς f The leaders Syracusan proceed to σφετεροις στρατιωταις παρακελευσαembark their troops. μενοι άντεπλήρουν τάς ναϋς ευθύς επειδή καϊ τους ήσθάνοντο. 6 δε Νικίας 5'Αθηναίους NiciaSj overwhelnv 2 ύπ6 των παρόντων έκπεπληγμένος $ *£ ^ β καϊ όρων οΐος 6 κίνδυνος καϊ A S S f e o ^ f f SS ί \ ν £> y £ ν .„ ν f/ .' 3ί Λ εγγύς ηόη, επειόη και όσον ουκ εμελ•ν 5 λον / /j \ αναγεσααι, 1 / <·/ και νομισας, » Λ /Λ armament, renews his appea i to the trierarchs one by one, ad- όπερ j u r m g them by the » A most solemn motives. 10 πασγουσιν εν τοις μεγαλοις αγωσι, πάντα τε εργψ ετι σφίσιν ενδεα είναι καϊ λόγω αντοϊς οϋπω ικανά είρήσθαι, αύθις των τριηράρχων ενα εκαστον άνεκάλει, πατρόθεν τε επονομαζων καϊ αυτούς όνομαστϊ καϊ φυλήν, άξιων το τε καθ* ΐ5 εαυτόν, ω υπήρχε λαμπρότητας τι, μή προδιδόναι τινά και τάς πατρικάς άρετάς, ων επιφανείς ήσαν οι πρόγονοι, μη άφανίζειν, πατρίδος τε της ελευθερωτάτης ύπομιμνήσκων και της εν αύτ§ άνεπιτάκτου . πάσιν ες την δίαιταν εξουσίας, άλλα τε λέγων οσα 2ο εν τω τοιούτω ήδη του καιρού οντες άνθρωποι ού προς το δοκεϊν τινι άρχαιολϊόγεΐν φυλαξάμενοι εϊποιεν αν, καϊ ύπερ απάντων παραπλήσια ες τε γυναίκας καϊ παϊδας καϊ θεούς πατρώους προφερόμενα, αλλ' έπι Tjj παρούστ) εκπλήξει ωφέλιμα νομίζοντες επι25 βοώνται. Καϊ 6 μεν, ουκ ικανά μάλλον ή καϊ αναγκαία 3 νομίσας παρηνήσθαι, άπονωρήσας He then marshals r> χ o\ \ \ /1 / ν t n e l a n d-force in as ήγε τον πεζον προς την θάλασσαν και long a line as possible - , παρεταξεν ' e , v rt ως επι πλείστον ,«x / along the shore and εουνατο, remains with it, 64 ΘΟΥΚΥΔΙΔΟΥ c. lxix 3 όπως οτι, μεγίστη τοις εν ταΐς ναυσϊν ωφεΧία ες το & 4 while his three col- θαρσεΐν yiyvovro. 6 δέ Δημοσθένης leagues make straight \ -π * /ι / c* for the narrow open- και Μενανορος και Έίυθυοημος—ούτοι ing left in the barrier ' ? ' of the Harbour, in yap επι τας νανς των Αθηναυων order to effect their retreat by sea. ' ' τηηοϊ επέβησαν άραντες στοά' TOV άπο εαυτών στρατοπέδου ευθύς επΧεον προς το ξεΰγμα 35 του Χιμένος καϊ τον παραΧειφθέντα διέκπΧουν, /3οι/Χόμενοι βιάσασθαι ες το εξω. ι LXX ΤΙροεξαγαγόμενοι δέ οι Χυρακόσιοι καϊ οι Beginning of the Ρύμμανοι ναυσϊ παραπΧησίαις τον last great battle in t h e H a r b o u r . Disposition of the , !Γ Ν Α apiUUOV ,/ Γ r , , ν /Cat ITOOTeOOV. Κατά , , „ , , ν Τ€ TOV Syracusan fleet. εκπΧουν μέρει αυτών εφυΧασσον και κατά τον αΧΧον κύκΧω Χίμένα) όπως πανταχόθεν 5 αμα προσπίπτουν τοϊς Ά,θηναίοις, καϊ 6 πεζός αμα αύτοΐς παρεβοηθει rjirep καϊ αϊ νήες κατίσχοιεν. ηρχον δε του ναυτικού τοις ΊΖυρακοσίοις Σικανος μεν καϊ Ά<γάθαρχος) κέρας έκάτερος του παντός T h e Athenians are forced by the enemy €%(UV, , 2 crowding m upon μέσον, them to desist in their Τίυθήν , δ έ Καϊ 01 ΥίορίνθίΟΙ 5, v ~ v , n f „ επειοη be οι αΧΧοι f Λ attempt to break προσεμισηον of the Harbour. The πρώτη ρύμη battle presently be- „ - , , ^ τω ζευγματι, έπιπΧεοντες „ TO ro Κυηναιοι v ΤΎ] μεν εκράτουν \ , comes general. των T6Tayμένων νέων προς αυτω, καϊ επειρώντο Χίειν τάς κΧτ)σεις· μετά δέ τούτο is πανταχόθεν σφίσι των Χυρακοσίων καϊ ξυμμάχων επιφερομένων ου προς τω ζεύηματι ετι μόνον η ναυμαχία, α λ λ ά καϊ κατά τον Χιμένα εγίγνετο, καϊ Obstinacy of the ην καρτερά καϊ οϊα ουκ ετέρα των conflict and intense , -\ -ν \ \ \ < / 3 zeal of the officers προτέρων, ποΧΧη μεν yap εκατεροις ™ and men on both , , ν , n Λ v , sides. Manoeuvres of προσυμια απο των ναυτών ες το επιpilots, courage of the „ , , ( t A , marines, crash of ves- πΧειν, οπότε κεΧευσνειη, εγιγνετο, sels fouling, cries of , , v f , , . Q boatswains. πολΧη οε η αντιτεχνησις των κυρερ- c. 1χχ7 ΞΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΟ Η 6$ νητών καϊ ά<γωνισμδ<ζ προς άΧλήΧους* οϊ τβ επι^ 25 βάται έθεράπευον, οπότε προσπεσοι νανς νηί, μη Χείπ&τθαι τα άπο τον καταστρώματος της άΧΧης τ&χνης* πάς τε τις έν ω προσετετακτο αυτός έκαστος ήπε'^ετο πρώτος φαίνεσθαι. ξυμπεσουσών Βε έν 4 oXiyoy ποΧΧών νεών—πΧεϊσται yap Βή αύται εν 3ο εΧαχίστω εναυμάχησαν' βραχύ yap άπεΧιπον ξυναμφότεραι Βιακόσιαι γενέσθαι—, αϊ μεν εμβοΧαί Βιά το μη είναι, τάς ανακρούσεις καϊ ΒιεκπΧους oXiyai eyiyvovTo, al Be προσβοΧαι, ώς τύχοι ναυς νηί προσπεσουσα ή Βιά το φεύyειv ή aXXrj επιπΧέουσα, 35 πυκνότεραι ήσαν. καί όσον μεν χρόνον προσφέροιτο 5 ναυς, oi άπο των καταστρωμάτων τοις άκοντίοις καϊ τοξεύμασι teal Χίθοις άφθονως επ* αυτήν εχρώντο' επειΒή Βε προσμείξειαν, οι επιβάται ες χείρας ίόντες επειρώντο ταίς άΧΧηΧων ναυσϊν επιβαίνειν. ξύνε- 6 4° τύγχανε τ ε ποΧΧαχοϋ Βιά την στενοχωρίαν τά μεν αΧΧοις εμβεβΧηκέναι, τά Βε αυτούς εμβεβΧήσθαι, Βύο τε περί μίαν και εστίν $ καί πΧείους ναυς κατ ανάγκην ζννηρτήσθαι, και τοις κυβερνηταις των μεν φυΧακήν των δ' επιβουΧην, μη καθ' εν εκαστον, κατά 45 ττολλά Βε πανταχόθεν, περιεστάναι, καϊ τον κτύπον μέγαν άπο ποΧΧών νεών ξνμπιπτουσών εκπΧηξίν τε αμα καϊ άποστέρησιν της ακοής ων οι κεΧευσταΧ φθεηγοιντο παρέχειν. ποΧΧή yap Βή ή παρακέΧευσις 7 και βοή άφ* εκατέρων τοις κεΧενσταΐς κατά τε την δοτίχνην Καϊ προς τήν αύτίκα φίλονί- The Athenians fight- κίαν έγίΊνετο, τοις μϊν 'Αθηναίοι* Sf^Sin^S βιάζεσθαί τε τον εκπΧουν επιβοώντες s ory* και περί της ες τήν πατρίΒα σωτηρίας νυν, ει ποψ$ καϊ αύθις, προθύμως άντιΧαβέσθαι, τοις Βε Έ,νρα* τ. νιι 5 66 ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ c. Ιχχ η κοσίοις καϊ ζυμμάχοις καΧόν είναι κωΧυσαί τε αυτούς 55 διαφυγεΐν καί την οίκείαν έκαστους πατρίδα νική8 σαντας επαυξήσαι, καϊ οι στρατηγοί προσέτι εκατερων, ει τινά που όρωεν μή κατ ανάγκην πρύμναν κρουόμενον, άνακαΧοΰντες όνομαστί τον τριήραρχον ήρωτων, οι μεν 'Αθηναίοι, ει την ποΧεμιωτάτην γήν 6ο οίκειοτέραν ήδη της ου δι οΧίγου πόνου κεκτημένης θαΧασσης ηγούμενοι ύποχωροϋσιν, οι δε Έ,υρακόσιοι, ει ους σαφώς ϊσασι προθύμου μένους ['Αθηναίους] παντί τρόπψ διαφυγεΐν, τούτους αυτοί φεύγοντας ι φεύγουσιν. LXXI f / 0 τε εκ της γης πεζός άμφοThe land forces a- τέρων ισόρροπου της ναυμαχίας καg^oflheirllgk θεστηκυίας ποΧυν τόν αγώνα καϊ with the most painful t- / « interest, and variety ξυστασιν of emotion. \ * / ^ .ι Λ * » της γνώμης ' είχε, φιΧονικα,ν //) ~ ' \ ·\ »/^ μεν ο αυτουεν περί του πΧειονος ηοη 5 καΧου, δεδιότες δε οι επεΧθόντες μη των παρόντων 2 Their excitement, ετι χείρω πράξω σι. πάντων γαρ δη while the combat i s , , - yet undecided, especi- ανακειμενων ally on the Athenian Λ side is even greater νανς than that of the com- « » Α /ΐ τοις , Ο Τ€ φόβος »Λ \ j f/ V / Ασηναιοις * < \ ην νπερ \ < \ > > \ ες τας «/-,>, ΤΟυ μεΧΧον\ » / -ν batants themselves; τος ουοενι εοικως και οια το ανωμαΧον ίο they manifest their / * / ν Λ feeling in shrieks and τής ναυμανιας <ανωμαΧον> και την cries of joy, and in }f the very movements €πθΛΪτΐν of their bodies, as J 3 j « « / Ικ Της <Ίης ηνα^ΚαζονΤΟ ' i * / εχείν* * success fluctuates; g^ οΧιγου γαρ ούσης της θέας και ου πάντων αμα ες το αυτό σκοπονντων, ει μεν τίνες ϊδοιεν πτ) τους σφετέρους έπικρατοΰντας, άνεθάρση- is σάν τε αν καί προς άνάκΧησιν θεών μή στερησαι σφας της σωτηρίας έτρεποντο' οι δ' επί το ήσσώμενον βΧέψαντες όΧοφυρμω τε αμα μετά βοής εχρώντο καί από (των δρωμένων^ της όψεως και τήν γνώμην μαΧΧον των εν τω εργφ εδουΧοΰντο' αΧΧοι ζο δε καί προς άντί^ταλόν τι της ναυμαχίας άπιδόντες, c. lxxiii ΞΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΟ Η 6γ Βιά το άκριτων ξυνεγες της άμίΧΧης και τοις σώμασιν αύτοΐς ϊσα τ$ Βόξτ) περιΒεώς ξυναπονεύοντες εν τοις 'χαΧεπώτατα Bifjyov* αεί yap ιταρ oXiyov ή 25 Βιεφευ^ον ή άπωΧΧυντο. ην τβ iv τω αντω στρα- 4 τεύματι των 'Αθηναίων, εως άηχωμαΧα εναυμάχουν, πάντα ομού άκουσαν, όΧοφυρμός βοή, νικώντες κρα­ τούμενοι, άΧΧα *όσ αν iv μεηάΧφ κινΒύνω μεηα στρατόπεΒον ποΧυειΒή άναηκάζοιτο φθεγγεσθαι. Βε καϊ οι επι των νέων αύτοΐς επασχρν, 5 3ο παραπΧήσια irpLV J€ Βή οί ΣνρακόσίΟΙ, » v - v \ » / eiri ΤΓΟΧν ανΤίσχουσης ν . / \ f ξυμμαΎΟί / ναυμαχίας , ναίΟυς έτρεμαν Κραυηχΐ ΚαΤ€θίωΚθν €ς Οίακέλβυσμω Την ' Αση- n ΧαμΤΤρως, Λ καϊ ol Λ της >A/I T€ τους , , v fCaL επίΚεΐμενΟΙ Λ 35 \rj Καϊ <νήν. 'J ΤΟΤ€ v πθΧ- , χρωμβνΟί, Be 6 μβν f/ but when their triremes, abandoning further resistance, are driven ashore, they burst into one loud shriek of agony and despair, knowing that the destruction of their ships must bring retrievable ruin, as it 6 did upon the Spartans ναυτικός στρατός, άΧΧος aXXrj, όσοι atPyios. μη μετέωροι εάΧωσαν, κατενεχθεντες εξέπεσον ες το στρατόπεΒον' 6 Βε πεζός ούκέτι Βιαφόρως, αΧΧ* από ορμής οίμω<γγ) τε καϊ στόνω πάντες, Βυσανα4ο μιας σχετοΰντες τα ηιηνόμενα, οί μεν επι τάς ναϋς πάρεβοήθουν, οί Βε προς το Χοιπόν του τείχους ες φυΧακήν, αΧΧοι Βε, καϊ οί πΧεΐστοι, ήΒη περί σφας αυτούς καϊ οπτ) σωθησονται Βιεσκόπουν. ην τε εν 7 45 τω παραυτίκα ούΒεμιάς Βή των ξυμπασών εΧάσσων εκπΧηζις. παραπΧησιά τ ' επεπόνθεσαν καϊ εΒρασαν αυτοί εν ΈΙύΧψ' Βιαφθαρεισών yap των νέων τοις ΑακεΒαιμονίοις προσαπώΧΧυντο αύτοΐς και ο ι εν τ $ νήσω άνΒρες Βιαβεβηκότες, και τότε τοις * Αθηναίο ις ην το κατά <γήν σωθήσεσθαι, ην μη τι 5ο άνεΧπιστον παρά Xoyov ηίηνηται. LXXII Τενομένης δ' ίσχυρας της ναυμαχίας καϊ 1 5—2 68 ΘΟΥΚΥΔΙΔΟΥ c. lxxii ι ποΧΧών νεών άμφοτεροις καϊ ανθρώπων άποΧομένων οι Σ,υρακόσιοί καϊ οι ξύμμαχοΰ έπικρατήσαντες τά τε ναυάγια καϊ τους νεκρούς άνείΧοντο καϊ άπο2 πΧεύσαντες προς την πόΧιν τροπαΐον έστησαν, οι δ' 5 9 Αθηναίοι ύπο μεγέθους των παρόντων κακών νεκρών μεν περί η ναυαγίων ούδε έπενόουν αίτησα ι άναίρεσιν, 3 της δε νυκτός εβουΧεύοντο ευθύς άναχωρεΐν. ΑημοDemosthenes pro- σθένης δε ΝίΛ:/α προσεΧθών ηνώμην poses that they should , ,*" Λ }/ χ ν still attempt to retreat εποιειτο πΧηρωσαντας ετι τας Χοιπας ίο by sea with their 60 „ ~ n f n * c» / remaining ships that τ ων νέων ριασασυαι, ην ουνωνται, very night, but the f/ „" ' f, N f, seamen are too much αμα εω τον εκπΧουν, Χεγων οτι disheartened to risk / * y r / > « / another battle. So πΧειους ετι αι Χοιπαι εισι νηες νρηthey determine to de- Λ ' Λ /w * part by land. σιμαι σφισιν η τοις ποΧεμιοις' ήσαν ηάρ τοΐς μεν Άθηναίοίς περίΧοιποι ώς εξήκοντα, ι5 4 τοΐς δ' εναντίοις εΧάσσους η πεντήκοντα, καϊ ξυγχωροΰντος Νικίου τη γνώμτ) καϊ βουΧομένων πΧηρουν αυτών οι ναΰται ουκ ήθεΧον εσβαίνειν δια, το καταπεπΧήχθαί τε τη ήσση καϊ μη αν ετι οϊεσθαι κρατήσαι. 20 Καϊ οι μεν ώς κατά ηην άναχωρήσοντες ήδη 1 ξύμπαντες την ηνώμην είχον. LXXIII *Έ*ρμοκράτης Hermocrates, sus- δ έ 6 Ζυρακόσως ύπονοήσας αυτών &<££**&£ rfa διάνοιαν καϊ νομίσας δεινόν είναι cusan authorities to > ' ν \ Λ 9 prevent their retreat, €L· τοσαυτη στρατιά κατά γην αποcSeT\hey%ightmdo χωρήσασα καϊ καθεξομένη ποι της 5 esew ere in ici y: 2 j ^ \ £ a 9 βουΧήσεται αύθις σφίσι τον πόΧεμον ποιεΐσθαι, εσηγεΐται εΧθών τοΐς εν τέΧει ουσιν ώς ου χρεών αποχωρήσαν της νυκτός αυτούς περιιδεΐν, Χεγων ταύτα α καϊ αύτφ εδόκει, άΧΧά εξεΧθόντας ήδη πάντας Συρακοσίους καϊ τους ξυμ- ί0 μάχους τάς τε οδούς άποικοδομήσαι καϊ τά στενόπορα c. lxxivi ΞΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΟ Η 6$ των 'χωρίων προφθάσαντας φυΧάσσειν. οί δε !~υνε~ 2 ηίηνωσκον μεν καϊ αυτοί ούχ ησσον but> as t h e y thought ταύτα εκείνου καϊ έδόκει ποιητέα ^ ^ * £ Τ Λ * rs είναι, τους δέ άνθρωπου* άρτι άσ- ^ ^ & ^ £ f μένους ' > \ / /-ν απο ναυμαχίας , r \ the Deoule would be τε μεγάλης tf t r. ν indisp0sed efforts. for new αναπεπαυμένους και αμα εορτής ού­ σης—έτυχε yap αύτοΐς *Ή.ρακΧεΐ ταύτην την ημεραν θυσία οΰσα—ού δοκεΐν αν ραδίως εθεΧήσαι ύπακού2ο σαι,' ύπο yap του περίχαρους της νίκης προς πόσιν τετράφθαι τους ποΧΧούς εν τ?) εορτϊ}, καϊ πάντα μάΧΧον εΧπίζειν αν σφών πείθεσθαι αυτούς ή οπΧα Χαβόντας εν τω παρόντι εξεΧθεΐν. ώς 8ε τοΐς αρ- 3 χουσι ταύτα Χοηιζομενοις εφαίνετο he induced the Athe»/ 25 άπορα era \ ' / j / / i Καϊ, ΟυΚ,εΤΙ επείσεν t » \ J \ » \ αυΤΟυς t c nians themselves to Ο delay their retreat by r<> false communications, ϊίιρμοκρατης, αυτός επί τούτοις ταοε μηχαναται, δεδιώς μη οί 'Αθηναίοι καθ' ησυχίαν προφθάσωσιν εν ττ} νυκτί διεΧθόντες τα χαΧεπωτατα των χωρίων* πέμπει των εταίρων τινάς των εαυτού ιππέων προς το των 'Αθηναίων στρατόπεδον 3ο μετά ηνίκα ξυνεσκόταζεν' οι προσεΧάσαντες εξ όσου τις εμεΧΧεν άκούσεσθαι και άνακαΧεσάμενοί τ ίνας ώς οντες των 'Αθηναίων επιτήδειοι—^ήσαν yap τίνες τω Νικία διάγγεΧοι των ενδοθεν—εκεΧευον φράζειν Νικία 35 Μ άπάηειν της νυκτός το στράτευμα, ώς Χυρακοσίων τάς οδούς φυΧασσόντων, άΧΧά καθ* ήσύχίαν της ημέρας παρασκευασάμενον άποχωρεΐν. καϊ οί μεν 4 είπόντες άπήΧθον, καϊ οί άκούσαντες διήηηειΧαν τοις στρατηγοΐς των 'Αθηναίων' ^LXXIV οί δε προς ι το άγγεΧμα επέσχον την νύκτα, νομίσαντες ουκ άπάτην είναι' καϊ επειδή καϊ ως ουκ ευθύς ωρμησαν} εδοξεν αύτοϊς καϊ τήν επιοΰσαν ήμέραν 7° Θ0ΥΚΥΔΙΔ0Υ c lxxiv ι περιμεΐναι, όπως ξυσκευάσαιντο ως εκ των δυνατών s οι ,στρατιώται οτι γβησιμώτατα, καϊ τα μεν αΧΧα πάντα καταΧιπεΐν, άναΧαβόντες δε αυτά οσα περί το σώμα ες δίαιταν ύπηρχεν επιτήδεια άφορμάσθαι. 2 and so gave the Syra- Συρακόσιοι δε καΧ ΤύΧιππος τώ μεν [ cusans time to block ' n , tA/I They also tow to Sy- /caTa 777ϊ> γωραν 77 66/C09 ϊ?Ζ> T 0 f 9 Αθηracuse the abandoned >/ » ν « Athenian ships. ναίους ίεναι άπεφάρηνυσαν και τών ρείθρων teal ποταμών τάς διαβάσεις εφύΧασσον και €9 ύποδοχήν του στρατεύματος ώς κωΧύσοντες rj έδόκει ετάσσοντο* ταΐς δε ναυσι προσπΧεύσαντες τάς ναΰς is τών Αθηναίων άητο του αϊγιαΧου άφεΐλκον—ενεπρησαν δε τ ίνας ολίγας, ωσπερ διενοήθησαν, αύτοϊ οι Αθηναίοι—, τάς δ' άΧΧας καθ* ήσυχίαν ονδενος κωΧύοντος ως εκάστην ποι εκπεπτωκυΐαν άναδησάμενοι εκόμιξον ες την πόΧιν. 20 ι LXXV Μετά δε τούτο, επειδή εδόκει τω Νικία The beaten host κα\ τώ Δημοσθένει ίκανώς παρεcommence their re- , * f , ' treat on the third day σκευασσαι, και η αναστασις after the battle in , ' ( f wretched plight amid στρατεύματος τρίτη ήμερα r heart-rending sights f , / * \ Λ τηοη του »-λ Λ απο της < * i 2 and scenes of woe. ναυμαχίας εγιγνετο. οεινον ουν ην s οι? καθ* εν μόνον τών πραγμάτων, οτι τάς τε ναΰς άποΧωΧεκότες πάσας άπεγωρουν καϊ αντί μεγάΧης εΧπίδος καϊ αύτοϊ καϊ ή πόΧις κινδυνεύοντες, άΧΧά καϊ εν TTJ άποΧείψει του στρατοπέδου ξυνέβαινε TTJ τε όψει εκάστω άΧγεινά καϊ TTJ γνώμτ) αίσθεσθαι. ίο 3 τών τε γαρ νεκρών άταφων όντων, οπότε τις ϊδοι τινά τών επιτηδείων κείμενον, ες Χύπην μετά φόβου Thesickandwound- καθίστατο, καϊ οι ζώντες καταΧειπόcursfng ^hek'com. Ζ ^ 0 * τραυματίαι τε καϊ ασθενείς ποΧύ τών τεθνεώτων τοις ζώσι Χυπ- ι5 c.lxxv7 ΞΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΟ Η 71 ηρότεροι 'ήσαν και των άποΧωΧότων άθΧιώτεροι* προς yap άντιβρΧιαν καϊ οΧοφυρμον τραπόμενοι ες 4 άπορίαν καθίστασαν, αηειν τε σφάς άξιοΰντες καϊ ενα εκαστον επιβοώμενοι, ει τινά πού τις ϊδοι ή 2ο εταίρων ή οικείων, των Τ€ ξυσκήνων ήδη απ ιόντων εκκρεμαννύμενοι καϊ επακοΧουθουντες ες όσον δν* ναιντο, ει τω δε προΧιποι ή ρώμη καϊ το σώμα, ουκ άνευ οΧίγων επιθειασμών καϊ οιμωγής ύποΧειπόμενοι' ώστε δάκρυσι παν το στράThe whole army is ^τευμα πΧησθεν καϊ απορία τοιαύτν | £ ^ η * ™ # μή ραδίως άφορμασθαι, καίπβρ he ^ S S ^ f t S S ποΧεμίας τβ καϊ μείζω ή κατά 8άιέ%ΤΖ£^™ί ν ν Λ t ρυα τα μεν πεπονθοτας \ Α > »# " c» ^ 5 ηδη, τα »» ^ ο. / • ν , ^ before them is over- be wheimingenough,but as nothing compared f περί των ev αφανει οεοιοτας μη πα- n f t ι ' ί & \ c με^άΧη μεταβοΧη OV, J Λ t r επιπαριων ως εκ των υπαρχόντων εθάρσυνέ τε καϊ παρεμυθεΐτο, βο{) τε χρωμενος βτι μαΧΧον εκάστοις καθ* ους ηίηνοιτο ύπο προθυμίας s καϊ βουΧόμένος ως επί πΧεΐστον ηεγωνίσκων ωφεΧεΐν' 1 - LXXVII ' Έ τ £ καϊ εκ των παρόντων, ω 'Αθηναίοι Hisfinaladdress Κα <> ξύ^αΧ0^ ^Χπίδα χρή εχείν—ηδη and aiiUdVroo™ ™ k καϊ L· δεινότερων fj τοιωνδε έσώfVomrs^^hacrueSte1:eat θησαν—μηδε καταμέμφεσθαι ύμας s S αυτούς μήτε ταΐς ξυμφοραϊς 5 0u?asiHS >not yet « 7 ^ desperate. Others / have survived e e ΜΤ€ vn greater reverses. Bear <•» \ \ ^ πάρα Την 5 / τ α ί /\t 2 Sp then against your κοπαυιαις. "misfortunes, even a s > / ι do who deserve ούτε them as little as any < \ > καηω c t ί / < \ »% -. » προψερων·—aXX 0 / » < \ oneofyou,forihave οη ως οιακειμαι led a blameless life. τοι ουοενος . / ρώμη e '«- / Λ αξίαν VVV Κα•> o > \ f ^ η Λ οράτε < υπο χης n υμών c « ν » νόσου—ουτ t < ? ευτυχία οοκων που ύστερος του είναι ίο κατά τε τον ϊδιον βίον καϊ ες τα αΧΧα, νυν εν τω 3 αυτω κινδύνω τοις φαυΧοτάτοις αιωρούμαι' καίτοι ποΧΧά μεν ες θεούς νόμιμα δεδιήτημαι, ποΧΧά δε ες ανθρώπους δίκαια και άνεπίφθονα. άνθ* ων η μεν εΧπϊς όμως θρασεΐα του μεΧΧοντος, αϊ δε ξυμφοραϊ is c. lxxvii; ΞΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΟ Η 73 ου κατ άξίαν Βή φοβοϋσι· τάχα Βε αν καϊ λωφήσειαν' Ικανά yap τοις τε πολέμιοι? If our invasion proηύτύχηται, καϊ εϊ τω θεών έπίφθονοι ^o^we^ay ' ' ' εστρατευσαμεν, : " ~ι •· Λ ΐ-ν n 2o τιμωρημένα. >/Λ -ν ' »/£> αποχρωντως t ηλθον \ νο » hone ηόη τβ\ yap J ι> που f και / \ for a better fu £ re , for now we deserve their com- . 4 ρα55ί0η rather than their jealousy. aXkoi τίνες ηοη εφ έτερους, και ' ανθρωπεία Βράσαντες ανεκτά επαθον' κα\ ημάς είκος νυν τα τε άπο του θείου ελπίζειν ήπιώτερα εξειν— οίκτου yap απ' αΰτων άξιωτεροι ήΒη εσμεν η φθόνου—, 25 καΙ όρώντες υμάς αυτούς, οίοι όπλΐται Look again at our , rs «umbers: we fight wav. are αμα και όσοι Ευντεταγμενοι γωρειτε, strong enough to \ / /is/ ft n cv\ estabIish a new c i t y μη καταπεπληχθε ay αν, Χοηιζεσθε οε for ourselves. οτι αυτοί τε πολις ευθύς εστε οποί αν καθεζησθε, καϊ άλλη ούΒεμία υμάς των εν Σικελία οντ αν επιόντας 3ο Βεξαιτο ραΒίως οϋτ αν ίΒρυθέντας που εξαναστήσειε. την Βε πορείαν ωστ ασφαλή καϊ ευ- W e must be firm 5 τακτον είναι αυτοί φυλάξατε, μή άλλο ^ d ^SSL°^ « / «/ τι η^ησαμενος > n* / αναηκασθη \ χωριω /o> »\ έκαστος \ / /ι μαχεσθαι, Λ ) τ A our if η εν ω αν „tceSsary, to the _ « τούτο / friendly Sicels at once, for we have food left. but little 35 fcai πατρώα και τείχος κρατήσας εξειν. σπουΒη Βε ομοίως καϊ νύκτα καϊ ήμέραν εσται 6 της όΒοϋ' τά yap επιτήΒεια βραχέα εχομεν, και ην άντιλαβώμεθά του φίλιου χωρίου των Σικελών— ούτοι yap ήμΐν Βιά το Συρακοσίων Βεος ετι βέβαιοι ο είσιν—, ηΒη νομίζετε εν τω εχυρω είναι, προπέπεμ4 πται δ' ώ? αυτούς, καϊ άπανταν ειρημενον καϊ σιτία αμα κομίζειν. το τε ξύμπαν yvώτε, To act like brave 7 Φ ,/ Λ ? Λf men is now a necesΛ ω ανορες στρατιωται, αναηκαιον τε sity for all. if you * e ~ » Λ / * /» » f Λ falter, there is no ov υμιν ανορασιν ayauow yιyvεσσaι, refuge for you anyc \ >r / » \ ν Λ w h e r e ; if you get 45 μαλακισυεντες ως μη ΟνΤΟς χωρίου ;9 αν clear of renovate the • ^ σωσειτε,6 γ γ ΐκαι Οποί νυν you Athenians will ην ^ live to your enemies, 74 great power of your city, the rest to enjoy the sight of home. ΘΟΥΚΥΔΙΔΟΥ δΐαφύγητε Τθύς πολεμίους, ; \ £ 0 c. Ιχχνϋ η ΟΙ Λ ΤευξομενΟΙ Τ6 αλ- r d)V επιθυμείτε TTOV επιδεΐν, και οι 'Αθηναίοι την μεγάλην δύναμιν της πόλεως καίπερ πεπτωκυΐαν επανορθώσοντες' αν- so δρες yap πόλις, καϊ ου τείχη ούδε νήες ανδρών κεναί.' 1 LXXVIII Ό μεν Νικίας τοιάδε παρακελευό μένος αμα επήει το στράτευμα και, ει πτ) όρωη διεσπασμένον καϊ μη iv τάξει χωρούν, ξυνάηων καϊ καθιστάς, καϊ 6 Δημοσθένης οΰδεν ήσσον τοις καθ* εαυτόν Thereupon the army τοιαύτα Τ6 καϊ παραπλήσια λέγων. 5 began its march, a , , , , / ν ^Ν 2 double hollow square, TO 06 εχωρει εν πλαισιψ τεταημενον, the van under Nicias, the rear under Demosthenes, with the A πρώτον \ μεν , O c / ηηονμενον \ \ A \ TO / I /• τντ / ΝίΚΙΟυ, \ baggage in the centre, εφεπομενον 06 το Δημοσσενους· τους δε σκευοφόρους καϊ τον πλείστον οχλον εντός είχον 3 They cross the 0L όπλΐται. καϊ επειδή [τε\ εγένοντο ίο ttf PsUyracdusInsgwho eVi τχι διαβάσει του Άνάπου ποτάwere posted there. ρ Λ Τ > J » « / μου, ηυρον επ αυτω παρατεταγμένους των %υρακοσίων καϊ ξυμμάχων, καϊ τρεμάμενοι αυτούς καϊ κρατήσαντες του πόρου εχώρουν ες το πρόσθεν οι δε Χυρακόσιοι παριππεύοντές τέ προσ- ΐ5 4 έκειντο καϊ εσακοντίξοντες ol ψιλοί, και ταύτη On the first day μεν τη ήμερα προελθόντες σταδίους t they march about 5 r J / ν t miles, and *\ on the ως τεσσαρακοντα ηυλισαντο προς s e c o n d , when they encamp on a level plam for the sake of ' f Χοφω · * , 01 TlVl N ΑθηναίΟΙ* J f collecting provisions ραια ποω επορευοντο and laying in a sup- ' t f ~t~t ' Λ « Μ c ΤΎ) Ο υστε* Α Λ χ και προηλθον so ' ' ply of water. και κατεβησαν ες ως είκοσι σταδιους, χωρίον άπεδόν r t και αυτού εστρατοπεδεύσαντο, βουΧόμενοι εκ τε των οικιών λαβείν τι εδώδιμον— ωκεϊτο yap 6 χώρος—καϊ ύδωρ μετά σφών αυτών φέρεσθαι αύτόθεν εν yap τω πρόσθεν επί πολλά *$ To face p. 74 RETREAT OP TEE ATHENIANS Tkucyaides,BookW Ι - Υ Π Γ DAYS MARCH Scale of Stadia c. lxxix 4 ΞΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΟ Η 75 στάΒια § 'έμεΧΧον Ikvai ουκ αφθονον ρακόσιον iv τούτψ Trpoe\00vTei την δίοδον τήν b> τφ πρόσθεν άπβτβίχιζόϊΓ- ί,ν δέ Χόφος καρτβροι καϊ ίκα30 τέρωθβν αύτοϋ χαράδρα κρημνώδη?, Άκραϊον XeVa?. τ$ δ" νστεραία, οι Άθηναϊοι προ$σαν, καϊ οι τών >^ / ν Χυρακοσιων f Λ ιππης f \ *· και ' \ και ακοντισται t /) ι 5 ,» ξυμμαχων /N ν -\·\ν οντες ν \ αυτούς ποΧΧοι J ' c. r ην, οι Be Συ- 5 , ^ ϊ ί ΐ S£ Ι ^ Χ ο " £ £ £ ,heir lme of βκαλεΐτο Be onthe third day,6 ^ce^tfafte^a sharD fieht. were forcld to return to their previous posit\ont and to go out supplies. with- 35 εκατερωυεν εκωΧυον και εσηκοντιζον τε και παρίππευον. και χρόνον μβν ποΧύν εμάχοντο 7 οι * Αθηναίοι, έπειτα άνεχώρησαν πάΧιν ες το αύτο στρατόπεΒον. /cat τα επιτηΒεια ούκέτι ομοίως εϊχον, ου γαρ ετι άποχωρεΐν οΐόν τ ' ην υπο των ιππέων. LXXIX ΐίρφ Be αραντες εττορεύοντο αύθις καϊ ι έβιάσαντο προς τον Χόφον τον άπο0 η the f o u r t h τετειχισμένον, καϊ ηΰρον προ εαυτών ^ « S T b u ^ u i ύπερ του άποτειχίσματος την πεζήν stolS^hf r!dgPe and πapaτeτayμέvηv ουκ επ dislodge the enemy. 5στρατιάν όΧιγων άσπίΒων* στενον yap ην το χωρίον, καϊ 2 προσβαΧόντες οι 'Αθηναίοι ετειχομάχουν, καϊ βαΧΧόμενοι υπο ποΧΧών άπο του Χόφου έπάντους οντος —Βιικνοΰντο yap ραον οι άνωθ€ν—και ου Βυνάμ€νοι to βιάσασθαι άνεχωρουν πάΧιν και άν€παύοντο. ετυχον 3 Be καϊ βρονταί τίνες άμα γενόμβναι A violent thunder' Λ ν , Ν storm still further dis- και υΒωρ} οια του €τους προς μετοπω- heartens them. ρον ηΒη οντος φιΧεΐ γίγνεσθαι' αφ* ων οι Αθηναίοι μάΧΧον ετι ήθύμουν, καϊ ενόμιξον επί τω σφετέρω is οΧέθρω και ταύτα πάντα γίγνεσθαι, άναπαυομένων 4 δ' αυτών ο ΥυΧιππος και οι Ζ,υραGylippus sends a Λ κόσιοι πεμπουσι μέρος τι της στρα- detachment to block «ρ the narrow road 76 ΘΟΥΚΥΔΙΔΟΥ c. lxxix 4 in their rear, but this Τΐάς άπΟΤείγίΟυντας OV €K TOV they prevented, and, , ' ,Λ , Ν Λ retreating into the aVTOVS ή 7Γ00€\ήλυθ€<Ταν' ppen plain, passed * '5 ^ ? another night there. ψαντες 06 ΚαΚεΐνΟΙ σφϋΟν aVTCdV 5 διεκώλυσαν. χωρήσαντες Οπισθεν , ανΤίπεμTlVaS 2o καϊ μετά ταύτα πάση τη στρατιά άναπρος το πεδίον μαΧλον οι 'Αθηναίοι, ηυΧισαντο. τη δ' ύστεραία προυγώ- Οη the f i f t h day, \ « ν ' ' Μ , , / they attempted once pOVV, Καϊ 01 ΖυραΚΟσίΟΙ πρθσε/jaWoV more the march over , Λ Λ f v the Acraean cliff, but, T 6 πανταχη αυΤΟίς KV/cXcu KCLI 7 Γ θ λ - 25 /v in spite of heroic per* /' c. ' \ > \ χ severance, they were \θυς ΚατετραυμαΤίζον, (Cai €t μεν so assailed by t h e , , « Γ Α /, * * / enemy in flank and eTTlOLGV Ob AttnvaiOl, VTTeytOpOVV. €L rear, that they could , ,' \ / Λ not accomplish half a δ αναχωροΐεν, €TT6fC€lVTO, Καϊ μαΧίστα τοις ύστάτοις προσπίπτοντες, ει πως κατά βραχύ Τρεμάμενου παν το στράτευμα φοβή- 3ο 6 σειαν. καϊ επϊ ποΧύ μεν τοιούτω τρόπω άντεΐχον οι Αθηναίοι, έπειτα προέλθόντες πέντε η εξ σταδίους άνεπαύοντο εν τω πεδίω* άνεχώρησαν δε και οι Έυρακόσιοι άπτ αυτών ες το εαυτών στρατόπεδον. 35 1 LXXX Ύής δε νυκτός τω Νικία καϊ Δημόσθενει Finding their way εδόκει, επειδή κακώς σφίσι το στράthus blocked and that ^ , ~ , , 0 their position was be- τευμα είχε των τε επιτηοειων πάντων coming worse and s / νο \ / worse, they alter the απορία ηοη και κατατετραυματισμενοι r direction of their retreat and move to the south-east toward the coast, and then due south toward Cama- . Λ ήσαν * ' ' πθΧΧθΙ , εν Λ * η προσβοΧαΐς ποΧΧαΐς Λ « 5 f ποΧεμιων των f ' f ηεγενημεναις, Λ 5 / πυρά \ rina arid Geia. καυσαντας ως πΧεΐστα απαηειν την στρατιάν, μηκετι την αυτήν όδον fj διενοήθησαν, αλλά τουναντίον ή οι Χυρακόσιοι ετήρουν, προς την 2 θάΧασσαν. ην δε ή ξύμπασα οδός αύτη ουκ επϊ ίο Κ,ατάνης τω στρατεύματα α λ λ ά κατά το έτερον μέρος της %ικεΧίας> το προς Καμάριναν καϊ ΤέΧαν καϊ τάς ταύτΎ) πόΧεις καϊ 'ΈίΧΧηνίδας καϊ βαρβάρους. c. lxxxi ι ΞΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΟ Η 77 καύσαντες ουν πυρά πολλά εγωρουν έν rfj νυκτί. 3 is και αύτοΐς, οίον φΐλεϊ και πάσι στραT h e y t r y to gain a τοπέΒοις, μάλιστα δε τοις μαψστοις, ^ r f by" ηϊιΐϊ, Pbut* φόβοι καϊ αίματα €<γγί<γν€σθαι, άλλως aneyacddentaimpani^ \ J / ν 5 Λ > τ€ και €v ννκτι \ r i \ n · > ' which causes them to T6 και οια πολέμιας -ν / ι ·* \ y fan into some con- ι fusion. και\απο\πολεμιων ου πολύ απεγον2ο των ίοϋσιν, εμπίπτει ταραχή* καϊ το μεν Νικίου 4 στράτευμα, ωσπερ ήγεΐτο} ξυνέμενε in spite of which, Τε Καϊ προύλαβε πολλώ, ΤΟ δέ Αη- under Nicias keeps ' ν Ρ/ * , ν together, b u t that μοσθενους, ΤΟ ημίσυ μαλίστα Καϊ under Demosthenes ' ' ' ν 5 gets separated and f 5 f f πλέον, απεσπασθη τε και ατακτοτεfollows in disorder. 25 ρον εχωρει. αμα δε ττ) εω άφικνοϋνται όμως προς 5 την θάλασσαν, και εσβάντες ές την Ι η Λ β manAn^ 686ν την Έλωρίνην καλουμένην επο- day^he^n/dlvii ρεύοντο, 'όπως, επειδή ykvoiVTo επί τω ^^^ΓΗΪποταμω τω Κακυπάρει, παρά τον l ™ ^ t % £ so ποταμέ ϊοιεν άνω Ζιά μεσογείας- S2SS2SSrS ν-ν ο ηλπιζον Ν ν ^ Λ ' ι 777 ους μετεπεμψαν > ο \ ^ -\ \ yap και τους Ζ,ικελους cs» > / » _ ' ' i n face of a Svracusan ταυ/) απαντησεσθαι. » \ · . Λ η guard and then, without waiting for Demosthenes, hurries on in a south-eastward „ επειοη ο εηενοντο επι τω ποταμω, direction to the river δ ηΰρον και ενταύθα φυλακή ν τίνα των 35 Έ,υρακοσίων άποτειχίξουσάν τε και άποσταυροΰσαν τον πόρον. καϊ βιασάμενοι αυτήν οιέβησάν τε τον ποτάμον καϊ εγωρουν αύθις προς άλλον ποταμον, τον 'Έρινεόν* ταύτΎ) yap οι ^εμόνες εκελευον. LXXXI Έζ/ τούτω δ' οι Συρακόσιοι καϊ οι ξύμ- ι μαγρι, ως η τε ήμερα iyενετό και The division of Dev \ εyvωσav Λ f θοτας, ,-,,_ τους , εν 5 L υλιππον »Ανηναιους, » / ! · / »A Λ / Άνηναιους * / aiTia Τε ? t t > Ν χ απεληλυ- mosthenes is pursued and overtaken by the t - v - \ \ ' \ Syracusans, before it ΟΙ πολλοί TOV had.crossed theCacy> » « \ paris.'.He takes shely ειχον εκοντα αφειναι τους ter i« a wailed enκαι κατά \ τάχος οιωκοντζς, where he olive trees, \ / < r N closure of resists the 7% ΘΟΥΚΥΔΙΔΟΥ enemy's continual at- Ύ} θύ tacks, until his troops * χαΧεπώς c. lxxxii TjadavOVTO n , ΚεχωρηΚΟs , f are worn out. τας, καταΚαμρανουσι περί άριστου 2 ωραν. και ως προσέμειξαν τοις μβτά τον Δημο­ σθένους, ύστέροις τε οΰσι καϊ σχοΧαίτερον καϊ το άτακτότερον χωροϋσιν, ως της νυκτός τότε ξυνεταράχθησαν, ευθύς προσπεσόντες εμάχοντο, καϊ οι ίππής των %υρακοσίων εκυκΧοΰντό Τ€ ραον αυτούς 3 δίχα δή οντάς καϊ ξυνήηον ές ταύτό. το δε Νικίου στράτευμα άπεΐχεν εν τω πρόσθεν καϊ πεντήκοντα is σταδίους' θάσσόν Τ6 yap 6 Νικίας ήγε, νομίζων ου το υπομένειν iv τω τοιούτω εκόντας είναι καϊ μάχεσθαι σωτηρίαν, αΧΧά το ως τάχιστα ύποχωρεΐν, 4 τοσαΰτα μαχόμενους οσ αν άναηκάζωνται. 6 δε Δη­ μοσθένης ετύηχανέ τ€ τα πΧείω iv πόνω ξυνεχεστέρω 2ο ών δια το ύστέρω άναχωροΰντι αύτω πρώτω επικεΐσθαι τους ποΧεμίους, καϊ τότε γνούς τους %υρακοσίους διώκοντας ου προυχώρει μάΧλον ή ες μάχην ξυνετάσσετο, εως ενδιατρίβων κυκΧοΰταί Τ6 υπ αυτών καϊ iv ποΧΧω θορυβώ αυτός τ€ καϊ οι ζ$ μετ* αυτοί) Αθηναίοι ήσαν' άνειληθέντες yap ες TL χωρίον ω κύκλω μεν τειχίον περιήν, οδός δε ένθεν καϊ ένθεν, εΧάας δε ουκ όΧίγας εϊχεν, εβάΧΧοντο 5 περισταδόν. τοιαύταις δε προσβοΧαΐς καϊ ού ξυσταδον μάχαις οι Χυρακόσιοι είκότως εχρώντο' το 3ο yap άποκινδυνεύειν προς ανθρώπους απονενοημένους ού προς εκείνων μάΧΧον ην ετι ή προς των Αθηναίων καϊ άμα φειδώ τέ τις ε<γίηνετο επ* εύπραηία ήδη σαφεϊ μη προαναΧωθήναί τω και ενόμιξον και ως ταύττ) TTJ ιδέα κατ αδαμασά μεν ο ι Χήψεσθαι αυτούς. 35 1 LXXXII Επειδή δ' οΰν δι ημέρας βάΧΧοντες πανταχόθεν τους 'Αθηναίους καϊ ξυμμάχους εώρων e.lxxxiii2 ΞΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΟ Η 79 ήδη τεταΧαιπ ωρη μένους τοις τε τρανμασι και Trj dXXy κακώσει, κήρυγμα ποιούνται ΥύΧιππος και s ^υρακόσιοι καϊ οι ξύμμαχοι, πρώτον Ι η answer t 0 t h e μίν των νησιωτών ει τι, βούΧεται ^ Γ ^ ο ί ^ ΑΓ· έΧευθερία ως σφας άπιέναι' καϊ ^ ^ ° Χ ο ° ^ ι ! » f t /-ν ' -ν -\ ' come over to them. αναχώρησαν τίνες ποΧεις ov ποΧΧαι. those from a few cities 'έπειτα S' ύστερον καϊ πρ'ος τους SX- accept the offer' 2 10 Χους άπαντα, τον, μετά Δημοσθένους όμοΧογία γένεται ώστε οπΧα τε παραδονναι At last no choice is καϊ μη αποθανεΐν μηδενα μήτε βιαίως but to capitulate. μήτβ δεσμοΐς μήτε της αναγκαιότατης ένδεια διαίτης* και παρέδοσαν οι πάντες σφας αυτούς εξακισχιΧιοι, 3 is και το άρηύριον ο ειγον άπαν κατέθεσαν εσβαΧόντες ες ασπίδας ύπτιας, και ενέπΧησαν ασπίδας τεσσά­ ρας. κα\ τούτους μεν ευθύς άπεκό- h aNicias by this time d ρ μίζον , , ν ες Την , Λ ,_ ποΧίν , τντ ' ΝίΚίας ^\ Ν * crossed the Eri6ε Καϊ ΟΙ neos, and encamped , neighbouring Λ on a „ μετ αυτόν αφικνουνται ταντχ) ττ) height. 20 ήμερα έπι τον ποταμον τον *Έ*ρινεόν, και διαβάς προς μετεωρόν τι κάθισε τήν στρατιάν. LXXXIII Οι δε Χνρακόσιοι τχι ύστεραία κατά- 1 Χαβόντες αύτον εΧεηον οτι οι μετά 0 η the next d a y Αημοσθίνους παραδεδώκοιεν σφας ^ ^ b ? $ J £ αυτούς, κεΧεύοντες κάκεΐνον το αυτό J£» £ £ g £ w Λ Λ «ο,»» Λ s οραν* ο ο άπιστων ' t §f / Λ t σπενοεται c c ^ / ιππέα j r them the fate of his coiieague, he offers to cauitulate on terms _ πεμψαι σκεψομενον. ως ο οιχομε- whic £ they refuse to 2 grant νος άπήγγειΧε πάΧιν παραδεδωκότας, ' επική ρυκεύεται ΤνΧίππω καϊ Συρακοσίοις είναι έτοιμος ύπερ Αθηναίων ξνμβήναι, οσα άνήΧωσαν ίο χρήματα Ίίυρακόσιοι ες τον πόΧεμον, ταύτα άποδούναι, ώστε τήν μετ αυτού στρατιάν άφεΐναι αυ­ τούς' μέχρι δ'Ιρυ] αν τά χρήματα άποδοθρ, άνδρας 8ο ΘΟΥΚΥΔΙΔΟΥ c. lxxxiii 2 3 Βώσβιν 'Αθηναίων όμηρους, eva κατά τάλαντον. οι Be Χυρακόσιοι καϊ ΤυΧιππος ου 7τροσ€Βέχοντο τους Χόγους, α λ λ ά irpoaireaovTes καϊ ττ€ριστάντ€ς πάντα- 15 4 χό0€ν ββαΧΚον καϊ τούτους μέχρι όψέ. eXypv Be καϊ ούτοι ττονηρως σίτου τε κα\ των έττιτηΒ€ίων άττορία. After being harass- 'όμως Be της νυκτός φυ\άξαντ€ς το ed all day long b y f ,^ the enemy, Nicias at- ήσυχαζον tempts to steal away , ' ' , „ €μ€\\θν , ' Λ 7Γ0ρ€υσ€σϋαΐ. N \ Καϊ f/ r by night but fails. ανακαμβανουσι Te τα οπΧα, και οι 2ο Three hundred, how, , \ j / f f ever, succeed in Ζυρακοσιοι αισθάνονται και eiraia5 breaking through the guard o the enemy. f f νίσαν. γνθνΤ€ς e> \ « » /i Be ΟΙ Αθηναΐοΐ ΟΤΙ ου \avΘάνουσι, κατέ0€ντο πάλιν ττλην τριακοσίων μάλιστα άνΒρων. ούτοι Be Βιά των φυλάκων βκασάμ€νοι έχωρουν της νυκτός fj έΒύναντο. * 5 1 LXXXIV Νικίας Β\ έπ€ΐΒη ημέρα eyeveTO, tfye On the morning of τΨ στρατιάν οι Be ζυρακοσιοι καϊ S^fa^&uS! οί ξύμμ,αχοι προσ&κειντο τον αυτόν S S ^ f f l E ! τρόπον ττανταχόθ€ν βάλλοντες Te καϊ 2fowZ'dtoThe^vei κατακοντίζοντ€ς. καϊ οί 'Αθηναίοι 5 Assinarus. » Λ ' _ _ \ \ »Α ' ηττ€ΐ<γοντο προς τον Ασσιναρον πο­ τ αμον, αμα μέν, βιαξόμ€νοι υπό της πανταχό0€ν As soon as they προσβολής ιππέων Te πολλών καϊ reach it, they rush in pell-mell to slake their thirst, and hoping to suffer less from the enemy, when they Λ του >; v 5f ( Λ f άλλου ογλου, ΟΙθμ€νθΙ / \ Λ Λ €σ€σθαΐ. 7]V Βίαβώσΐ cs\ t \ (f }/ σφίσΐν , paOV Tl \ TOP 7 Γ 0 - ί ο had crossed. ταμον, αμα Be υπο της ταλαιπωρίας, 3 καϊ του 7Γΐ6Ϊν επιθυμία, ώς Be ηνγνονται Ιπ αΰτω, But the passage was έσπίπτουσιν oiBevX κόσμω βτι, ά λ λ α hopeless; they become Λ , huddled together in πας τ€ τις οιαβηναι , \ αυτός Λ πρώτος the stream which now _ \ V / f f f ran blood, and num- βουλθμ€νθς Καϊ 01 πθλ€μΐΟΙ €ΊΓΙΚ€1- 1 5 bers perished either ν νο cs t by t h e weapons: of U6V01 ydkeiTYlV Ύ)Βη TTJV Βίαβασίν the enemy or b y ^ , * ./ / / ,1 - ^ drowning. €ποιουν\ ασροοι yap αναγκαζομ€νοι X αναΧαροντ€ς, TToXlV. v N Ta y αν€νωρησαν €9 N Καϊ v KCLl ΤΟΌζ t v μ€ν αΧΧους 5 n Sparta. Ασηναιων καν των ξυμμαχων 07Γ0σους €Χαβον κατεβίβασαν €9 τάς Χιθοτομίας, άσφα\€στάτην <ταύτην> elvai νομίσαντ€ς τήρησιν, ΤΧικίαν Be καϊ Δημοσθένη άκοντος ΤυΧίτπτου aireσφαξαν. 6 yap ΤύΧιπττος καΧον το αγώνισμα ίο ένόμίξέν οι elvai eVi τοις άΧΧοις και τους άντι3 στρατηγούς κόμίσαι ΑαΜΒαιμονίοις. ξυνέβαιν€ Be τον μ^ν 7ΓθΧ€μιωτατον αύτοΐς elvai, Δημοσθένη, Βιά τά έν Tjj νήσω καϊ ΤΙύΧω, τον Be Βιά τά αυτά έττιτηΒειότατον' τους yap e/e της νήσου ανΒρας των *5 Αακ€Βαιμον'ιων 6 Νικίας ττρουθυμηθη, σττονΒάς ireiσας τους 'Αθηναίους ττοιησασθαι, ωστ€ άφεθήναι. 4 MotivesoftheSyra- w& ™ν °* Te Αακ6Βαιμόνιοι ήσαν iTnTL^fgin^thSr αι)τώ προσφιΧζϊς κάκ€Ϊνος ούχ ήκιστα immediate execution, g ^ TQUTQ ^^ύσας έαυτύν Τψ I V *ο Χίππω ΙταρέΒωκζν. α λ λ ά των Συρακοσίων τινές, ώς έΧέγ€το, οι μίν Β€ΐσαντ€ς, οτι προς αύτον eKe/cowoΧόγηντο, μη βασανιζομζνος Βιά τ6 τοιούτο ταραχήν σφίσιν ev evirpayia ποιήστ}, αΧΧοι Βέ, καϊ ον% ηκιστα c. lxxxvii 5 ΞΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΟ Η 83 25 οι Κορίνθιοι, μη χρήμασι δη πείσας τινάς, οτι πλού­ σιος ην, άποδρα καϊ αύθις σφίσι νεώτερόν τι απ* αύτοϋ ιγβνηται, πείσαντες τους ξυμμάχους άπέκτειναν αυτόν, και 6 μεν τοιαύτη ή OTi^lyyvTara τούτων 5 αιτία ετεθνήκει, ήκιστα δη άξιος ων « ' , , ,, Λ , e , Praise of Nicias. Λ 30 των ye επ εμού &ιΧΧηνων ες τούτο δυστυχίας άφικέσθαι δια την πάσαν ες άρετην νενομισμένην επιτήδευσιν. LXXXVII Ύούς δ' iv ταΐς Χιθοτομίαις οι 2υρα- 1 κόσιοι χαΧεπώς τους πρώτους χρόνους Cruel treatment of , Ϊ \ / / μβΤβχβίρίσαν. eV yap ΚΟίΧω γωρίω Οντας Καϊ 6λίyω ποΧΧούς ΟΙ Τ6 ηΧίΟΙ ' ' Λ ν it Λ I r ^ Prisoners in the quarries. Those nonvived were confined 7 ° ^ays anc * n s o 5 το πρώτον και το πν^ος ετι εΧυπει as slaves. δια το άστεηαστον, καϊ at νύκτες hriyiyv^evai τουναντίον μετοπωριναϊ καϊ ψυχραϊ Tjj μεταβοΧτ) ες ασθενειαν ενεωτεριζον, πάντα τε ποιούντων αυτών 2 δια στενοχωρίαν εν τω αύτω και προσέτι των νεκρών ίο ομού επ' άΧΧηΧοις ξυννενημένων, οΐ εκ τε τών τραυ­ μάτων καϊ δια την μεταβοΧην καϊ το τοιούτον απέθν^σκον, καϊ όσμαϊ ήσαν ουκ ανεκτοί, καϊ Χιμώ αμα καϊ δίψτ] επιέζοντο—εδίδοσαν yap αυτών εκάστω επϊ οκτώ μήνας κοτύΧην ύδατος καϊ δύο κοτύΧας σίτου,—» is άλΧα τε οσα είκος εν τω τοιούτω χωρίω εμπεπτωκότας κακοπαθήσαι, ούδεν ο τι ουκ iπεyεvετo αύτοΐς. καϊ ημέρας μεν εβδομηκοντά τινας ούτω διτ)τηθησαν 3 αθρόοι' έπειτα, πΧήν 'Αθηναίων καϊ ει τ ^ ε ? ΣικεΧιωτών η ΊταΧιωτών ξυνεστράτευσαν, τους αΧΧους ζο άπεδχιρτο. ^ΈιΧηφθησαν δε οι ξύμπαντες, ακρίβεια μεν χαΧε- 4 πόν εξειπεΐν, όμως δε ουκ εΧάσσους The number of prif f επτακισχιΧιων. f ξυνερη ir τε soners was not less epyov than 7000. 6—2 5 84 Θ Ο Υ Κ Υ Δ Ι Δ Ο Υ Ξ Υ Γ Γ Ρ Α Φ Η Σ Η α Ιχχχνϋ 5 τοΰτο [^ΕΧλ,ηνίκόν] των κατά τον πολβμον Such was the issue μ^ιστον yeveaOat,, Ιοκάν δ' of the greatest event in this war, if not of και all Hellenic events. \ τ ' ^ C T T W - Ν < * ων ακοχι &κΚηνικων « / Ί Λ ν ισμβν, / τόνδβ βμοιψ**, ν και ν τοις T6 κρατήσασι καμπροτατον και 6 τοις διαφθαρβΐσί Βυστυχέστατον * κατά πάντα yap πάντως νικηθέντβς καϊ ovSev okiyov is ovSev κακόπαθησαντες πανωΧβθρία δή το \eyόμ6vov καϊ πεζός 3° καϊ νηβς καϊ ovhev ο τι ουκ άπώΧβτο, καϊ okiyot άπο πόΚΚων επ' οϊκου άπβνόστησαν. ταΰτα μϊν τα πβρί Σικέλίαν yevopeva. NOTES ON THE HISTORY OF THUCYDIDES BOOK VII BOOK VII CHAPTER I TEXT § 1. 1. i. IK του Totpavros: Gylippus had in the first instance I landed at T a r e n t u m , and had gone thence to Thuria—of which place his father was a naturalised citizen—but, failing to win the inhabitants over to his side (προσα'γα,γέσθαι)} he was continuing his voyage along the Italian coast, when he was driven out to sea by a violent offshore wind and compelled to find shelter again at T a ­ r e n t u m , in order to repair the damage done to his ships: VI 104, 2 πάλιν χ€ΐμασθ€Ϊ$ is τα μάλιστα τφ Ύάραντι προσμίσ^ει* καϊ τα? paus δσαι μάλιστα έπόνησαν υπό του χβιμωνος άνέλκύσας επςσκεύαζβν. See Introduction p. lxiii f. 1. 2. iirel lirco-Kevacrav, 'when they had refitted'. For the tense, see G. MT. § 59 ed. ma., and for the meaning of the verb, cf. c. 24, 1, c. 38, 2. 1. 4. ΐΓυνθανόμ€νοι <ταφ&ττ€ρον ήδη in opp. to VI c. 104, ι ώ$ avrois ai άη-γελίαι έφοίτων deivai καϊ πασαι eiri τό αυτό εψβυσ μ ^ α ι , ώ? 'ήδη παντελώς άποτετβιχισμέναι αϊ Συράκουσαί είσιν. The imperfect p a r t i c i p l e conveys the idea of f r e q u e n c y . 1. 7. κατά Tas 'EmiroXcis, 'by way of Epipolae'; cf. 1. 12 κατά yijv, VI c. 97, τ. άφικομι4νου9 sc, σφας. 4<Γ€λθ€ίν sc. is Tas Σνρακονσας. Syracuse consisted at that time of η'έξωπόλι* (com­ monly called Achradine) and ή euros πόλις (vi c. 3, 2) i.e. Nacros or O r t y g i a . 'Both these parts were strongly fortified: the suburbs Polichn£—Olympieion (c. 4, 6, cf. vi c. 64, 1, c, 75, 1), T y c h e , N e a p o l i s and E p i p o l a e were included at a later period. Of these O l y m p i e i o n only and Epipolae are mentioned by Thucydides. I.9. διακινδυνίύοτωο-ιν—2λθωσι: i n t e r r o g a t i v e (deliberative) conjunctives after an historical (secondary) tense {έβονλεύοντο). 88 NOTES ON THE VII 1 ι T h e optative is used in this sense less frequently, perhaps to avoid ambiguity; thus in I c. 25, 1 επήροντο el παραδοΐεν την πάλιν might mean either ' t h e y asked whether they should give up the city' (the question being παραδωμεν την πόλιν;) or, ' w h e t h e r they did give up', Xen. Hell. I vii 7 την βονλην είσενε^κεΐν 6τφ τρόπω oi άνδρες κρίνοιντο, where the question was τίνι τρόπω ol άνδρες κρίνων τ αι. See G. MT. § 677 ed. ma. lo-irXevo-at sc. is rhv μέ^αν λιμένα, where Gylippus might have effected a junction with the Syracusans, since the Athenian line of circumvallation did not as yet reach so far (c. 2, 3). H e decided in favour of the overland route because it enabled him to increase his small force. 4v άρισ·τ€ρ$ sc. έχοντες την Σίκελίαν, ' keeping Sicily to their left'; VI 62, 2, 1. 10. avroiis IKCCVOVS sc. τους Ίμεραίους; cf. c. 2, 1 rets Συρακονσάς—αυτούς, c. 3 1 , 5 την Κέρκνραν—αυτούς. 1. ι ι . στρατιάν—otfs: cf. Hi 67, 3 ηλικίαν,.,ων. § 2 . 1. 13. M, ' f o r ' , ' i n the direction o f . <£s δμωδ air4<ττ€ΐλ€, 'which Nicias had despatched after a l l ' , notwithstanding the contemptuous indifference which he had shown before for the small force of Gylippus, whom h e considered as a mere p r i v a t e e r : VI 104, 3 ό "Νικίας, πυθόμένος αυτόν προσπλέοντα, ύπερεϊδε τδ . . πλήθος των νέων . . καϊ λ^στικώτερον Ζδοξε παρεσκευασμένους πλεΐν καϊ ούδεμίαν φνλακήν πω έποιεΐτο. For the inf. είναι v. G. MT.2 § 9 1 4 , 1 . 1. 16. τ η ν φ υ λ α κ η ν τ α ύ τ η ν : c. 17, 4 r V & rV Νανπάκτψ φυλακήν i.e. ' t h e guard-squadron stationed at N a u p a c t u s \ 2 1. 17. σχόντ€δ ' Ρ η γ ί φ , ' t o u c h i n g at R h e g i u m ' , the dative after σχεΐν as in ill c. 29, 1, c. 33, 1. Thucydides more often uses ές (c. 26, 2, II c. 25, 3, c. 33, 3, v i c. 52, 1, c. 62, 2), and occasionally κατά (ι n o , 4 ; 11 9 1 , 1, TV 129, 3„,yi 97, 1), with this nautical term. § 3 . 1. 19. rovs τ€ 'Ip,€paCovs—καϊ TOVS SCXIVODVTCCWS (1. 23) are coordinated under the influence of 4κ€ΐ OVTCS, which has refer­ ence to both. I t was while they were at H i m e r a that they sent to invite the aid of the people of S e l i n u s . Diod. x i n 7, 8. 1. 23. r d s *ydp vavs κτλ.: they had drawn up their ships ashore and so the crews could be employed as land-soldiers. 1. 24. <7Γέμψαντ€δ €Κ&€υον, ' they sent and bade t h e m ' . αιτούνταν σ τ ρ α τ ι φ : the dativus militaris, ' w i t h ' . T h e Vat. with some inferior MSS. has πανστρατιξ, which Classen adopts; but as Poppo remarks, it is not likely that the Selinuntians could VII i s HISTORY OF T H U C Y D I D E S 89 have sent their w h o l e army, when they were at war with Segesta. C p . also 1. 35. O n the other h a n d , it may be said that the fact of the execution not corresponding to the demand proves nothing as to the demand itself. § 4 . 1. 25. τινά—ού ττολλην: cf. c. 74, 2 ; c. 82, 1, II 79, 4 έΐχον δέ τ ι ν a s ού πολλούς πελταστάς, VI c. 94» 2 ν^ρίτυχοντες τίσΐν ου πολλοίς, c 51» 2 ού πολλοί τίνες. Stahl 2 , objecting to the hiatus τίνα αύτοΐς, adopts his own conjectural reading Ζτι, praeterea. 1. 27. πολύ ττροθυμότ€ρον...4τοΐμοι ήσαν, longe alacrius...fiarati erant (Poppo). T h e reason is given in the two participial clauses which follow. 1. 28. του Ά ρ χ ω ν ί δ ο υ : this was, probably, the ruler of Herbita, who was, according to Diodorus Siculus ( x n 8), an ally of the powerful Sicel leader Ducetius. L i k e him, he was a violent oppo­ nent of Syracuse. H e died at an advanced age B.C. 415. H o l m Gesch. Sic. 1 p . 260, 11 39. See Introduction, note 94. 1. 3 1 . ιτροθύμωδ 8OKO\5VTOS ηκ€ΐν, 'because h e was thought to show courage in having c o m e ' . H i s example inspired them with like courage (πολύ προθυμότερον προσχωρεΐν έτοιμοι ήσαν). §5. 1. 32· άναλαβών, like λαβών and ^ x w y , m a y be ren­ dered simply ' w i t h ' ; c. 4, 2 ; c. 4 3 , 2, ν 7, 2, v i 65, 2. <τφ€τ£· ρων 'their o w n ' not 'his o w n ' , referring to the double subject Τύλιππος καΐ ΙΙνθήν, as in 1. 2 1 . I t might however include his soldiers also, as in c. 8, ι όρων ττ]ν σφετέ ραν άπορίαν. Cf. c. 4, 3, ν 71, 3, i n 113, 2. 1. 33. TOVS toTrXwrjj.evo'us, those whose arming had been com­ pleted with the help of the Himeraeans, 1. 22. kirraKocriovs μάλιστα, ' 7 0 0 or thereabouts'. I t is not likely that this consti­ tuted the entire force that accompanied Gylippus. F r o m H i m e r a he obtained 1000 men, heavy and light-armed included (ξυναμφοτ4povs) ,with 100 horsemen, from Selinus, some light-armed troops and cavalry, a few also from Gela and about 1000 Sicels (τού$ πάντας 'all told') who were probably collected from more than one tribe. This statement virtually agrees with that of Diodorus ( x i l l 7, 8), who gives the force of Gylippus as τους απαντάς τρισχίλιους μ£ν πεζούς, διακόσιους δ' Ιππείς. 1. 37· Ιχώρδί, ' b e g a n his march*. See n . to c. 8, 1 1. 6, c. 65, 2 . 4s \ i \ i o v s with άναλαβών. NOTES 9o ON THE VII ii ι CHAPTER II § 1. I. i . ot €K TTJS AcuKctSos Κορίνθιοι: according to v i 104, 1 the Corinthians remained behind at L e u c a s with fifteen ships (ten of their own, two Leucadian and three Ambracian), while Gylippus and Pythen started with the remaining four, two Laconian and two Corinthian, for Italy. For the proleptic position of έκ with the article under the influence of the verb έ βοηθούν, cf. I 8, 3 oi έκ των νήσων κακούργοι άνέστησαν ύττ' αυτού for ol έν ταΐς νήσοι* άνέστησαν έκ των νήσων, VI φ, ι αϊ δ, έκ TTJS 'EyeVr^s τρβϊς vrjes αί πρόπλοί vapayiyvovrat τοΐς Άθηναίοις is το "Ρήγιον. 1. 2. cos €Ϊχον rd\ovSi ' a s quickly as they could', lit. 'according to the condition of speed in which they w e r e ' . F o r this use of %XGLV and a m o d a l adverb with the genitive of respect, cf. c, 57, 1 ως έκαστοι της ξνντυχίας Ζσχον, II 90, 4> VIII Ι Ο 2 , ι, I c 22, 3 &s έκατέρων τις εύνοιας ή μνήμης έχοί, III c 92, Ι 'Έρακλεία έδόκβι της έπϊ θρφκης παρόδου χρησίμως 'έζειν. G. § ι68 η. 3, Η Α. § 757 a · So in Latin, Tac. A n n . χ ν 53 ut quisque audentiae habuisset. 1. 3. Kal Τόγγνλος: as though των Κορινθίων αϊ re αλλαι vrjes had preceded {Poppo). Plutarch Nic. c. 19, 5 tells us that Gongylus fell in the first engagement with the Athenians. 1. 5. ορμηθίίδ, concessive, 'although he started'. Probably he struck a straighter line across the sea than the ships which set out before him and was favoured by fine weather. I. 7. καταλαβών, ' t a k i n g them by surprise', 'coming upon them unexpectedly*. See n. to c. 33, 5. αύτού$ sc. τους "Συρακοσίους implied in τας Συρακούσας, c. ι, ι. irepl ά τ τ α λ λ α γ ^ του ττολ€μου=7Γ6/)1 του άπαΧΚάττεσθαι του π., de liberatione sua a bello. ' H i s arrival at that moment was an accident of unspeakable importance—in fact nothing less than the salvation of the c i t y ' (Grote). 9. 10. v»]€S—όίλλαι sc. των Κορινθίων: see c. 7, 1. &ri, praeterea, c. 1, 4 ; c. 34, 1. I I . Λακ€δαιμον£ων άιτοσ-τίΐλάντων, 'sent by the Lacedaemoni­ a n s ' ; cf. I c. 89, 2 Σηστού έπόλώρκουν Μη δω ν 'εχόντων, V c. 4» ι Φαία£...'Αθηναίων πβμπόντων...έί·έπλευσ€ν1 c. 39> * Μηκύβερναν Όλύνθιοι 'Αθηναίων φρουρούντων εΐλον. άρχων: VI c 93» 2. VII 11 3 HISTORY OF THUCVDIDES 9i § 2. 1. i2. €·ΐΓ€ρρώσθησ-αν, 'were re-assured': c. 7, 3, c. 17, 2j Hi 6, 1 j iv 36, 2; vi 73, 1; VIII c. 89, 17, c. 106, 4. 1. 15· ]jcr0avovTO=ηκουον, 'had ascertained'. So Plut. Λ7<Γ. c. 19, 2 οϋττω τφ ToyyvXip τηστενόντων βεβα,ίωί rJKev ayyeXos πάρα του ΓυΧΙππου κεΧεύοντος άπανταν. § 3 . 1. ι6. 'ICTCCS: see cr. n. τ6τ€, i.e. cum Syracusani ei obviam exierunt, castellum ceperat (Poppo). kv τη τταρόδω, obiter, 'on his way': cf. I 126, 7, ν 4, 5· τι τ€ΐχο$...τών Σιι«λ«ν, ' a fort belonging to the Sicels', who were friendly to the Athenians (c. 32, 1; vi 88, 4). 1. 17. £wTa|afJi€Vos,. acie instructa, 'marshalling his men in readiness to fight'. 1. 19. άναβά$...των 'Αθηναίων: It must be supposed that the main force of the Athenians was engaged in completing their lines in the low ground near the city, and that only a few men were left on Epipolae, not more than enough to guard the works and too few to act offensively in the field. Accordingly, the Syracusans marched out of their city up Epipolae, and passed through the openings still left in the Athenian lines (which we know from § 4 and vi 99, 1 were between «Syke or the κύκΧος and Trogilus) without any opposition. It does not appear how far they marched before they met him, but he, as coming from the interior, reached Epipolae by the gap divid­ ing it from the hills further inland and so passed by Euryalus and descended upon the rear of the Athenians. He had no intention of attacking their works, but passed apparently through the opening in their lines and then offered them battle in the space between their lines and the city {Arnold). The great error Nicias committed was that he neglected to fortify Euryalus, for which there would have been time, had he been satisfied with building a single instead of a double wall south­ wards. ' Had the Athenians secured the narrow approaches by which alone an enemy advancing from the interior could reach the summit of Epipolae, the conquest of Syracuse was certain. But no pains had been taken to complete their line across Epipolae from cliff to cliff, because they calculated that the advantage of the ground would enable them easily to repel any sallies of the Syracusans in this quarter, and they never contemplated the possibility of having their whole position turned by an enemy arriving on the summit of Epipolae in their rear, and so turning the advantage of the ground against them'. (Arnold). τον Εύρΰηλον: 'the Broad Nail', now called M o n g i b e l l i s i , where are still extant the ruins of a castle, which terminated the 2 9 NOTES ON THE VII 11 3 wall built at a later period by Dionysius: a narrow path (c. 44, 8) led to the high ground from the North, somewhat N.E. of the later castle. Demosthenes (c. 43, 3) followed the same route. 'Gylippus thus turned at once the Athenian position, by getting to the high ground which commanded their rear' {Arnold), 1. 20. flTT-ep, 'by the way by which', 'where' sc. ανέβησαν, · 43» 3» V I c · 99i x> c* IOI > *· Coming in an opposite direction from their landing-place Leon, they still entered upon the ridge of Epipolae by the knoll of Euryelus (vi 97, 2), when they commenced the siege. 1. αι. 4χώρ€ΐ...&ιτΙ το Τ6£χισ·μα των 'Αθηναίων, 'he made a for­ ward movement against the Athenian lines', the result of which is given in c. 3, 3. By τείχισμα is meant the διπλούν τείχος (νΐ 10, 3), south of the κύκλος. See Introduction p. lx if. c § 4 . 1. 22. κατά τοΰτο καιρού—Iv φ, 'just at that critical moment when', a more expressive and closely limiting phrase than κατά τούτον tbv καιρόν. The presence of the article is unusual in such phrases in Attic Greek, cf. c. 33, 6 iv τούτφ τύχης, c. 55, ι έν παντϊ άθνμίας ήσαν, Dem. Olynth. II 8 καιρού προς τούτο πάρβστι Φιλίππφ τά πράγματα. But here it is found in Β and again in c. 69, 2 iv τφ τοιούτφ του καιρού. In later writers the article is added or omitted indiscriminately. See crit. note. ' Thucydides describes the state of the Athenian lines at this point of the narrative, to explain how the Syracusans were able to get out of them, or Gylippus to make his way in. The de­ scription also prepares the way for the final counter-move of the Syracusans (c. 6)....The exact point of the narrative at which Gylippus entered the city is not clearly stated. We cannot therefore be certain on which side of the Athenian wall the movements mentioned c. 2 fin., c. 3 init. took place. It is pro­ bable however that he entered before the first attack on the Athenian wall, § 3 (Jowett). 1. 23. επτά* μ.£ν ή οκτώ σταδίων, genitive of m e a s u r e , G. * § 167, HA. § 729 d. The μέν contrasts the one part of the wall of circumvallation which was in the low ground by the sea—seven or eight stadia in length—with the rest of the wall (τφ δέ άλλφ). (ΜΓ€Τ€τ&.€σ:το TOIS'Αθηναίοι: dative of the a g e n t , G. § 188, 3, HA. § 769. All the MSS., except Β have έπετβτέλβστο—the form which is found in c. 4, 2, v i n 55, 2. VII iii i HISTORY OF THUCYDIDES 1. 25. το -irpos την θάλαο-<ταν may be taken either as an epexegeme of the indefinite κατά βραχύ τι, ' o v e r a short stretch', namely that towards the sea' (cf. i v 78, 5 πρίν τι πλέον ξυστήναι τό κωλϋσον, Vlil 98, ι το£ότα$ τινάς τους βαρβαρωτάτους); or adverbially 'seawards'. τοΰτο 8' #τι φκοδόμουν, 'for upon this (short bit) they were still at w o r k ' , when Gylippus came. See Introd, p . lviii if. 1. 28. τ ω irXeovi is in partitive apposition with τφ άλλω {τείχει), 'for the greater part of the other wall stones had been already laid along: a part was half-finished, a part also had been left in a finished state', viz. when the Athenians were called away to the completion of the South wall before Gylippus's arrival. See VI c 99, 1 oi μεν έτείχιζον των Αθηναίων τό πρδς βορέαν του κύκλου τείχος, oi δε λίθους καΐ ξύλα ξυμφοροϋντες παρέβαλλον έπί τον TpdoyiXov καλού μενον άεί, ηπερ βραχύτατον iyiveTO αύτοΐς έκ του μεγάλοι/ λιμενος έπϊ την έτεραν 0άλασ<ταΐ' το άποτείχισμα. 2στιν & κ α ί , . , τ ά 8£ καί. For instances of such a double κ aim. bimembral clauses for the sake of antithesis, cp. c. 8, 1; c. 12, 1; c. 85, 4 and see my n. to Xen. Cyr. I v 3. 1. 3o. τταρά τοσούτον...ήλθον κίνδυνου (not, as Valla, eo pericult venerunt ' t o such ah extreme of danger had it arrived', but) tanto (i.e. tarn fiarvd) discrimine periculum effugerunt ' i t came so near to (so narrow an escape had it of) destruction'. So i l l 49, 4 πάρα τοσούτον μεν η "Μυτιλήνη ήλθε κινδύνου where also κινδύνου marks the p o i n t f r o m w h i c h , and means the 'destruc­ tion which was threatened', not ' t h e threatening of destruction', just as σωτηρία means not only 'saving of life' but 'life saved'. T h a t to which ' i t had almost come', when expressed by a clause, stands in the infinitive. Cf. ι ν ιο6, 4 την Ήιόνα πάρα νύκτα iyevero λαβείν, VIII c. 33» 3 ifttpb, τοσούτον eyeveTO αύτφ μη περιπεσείν rots Άθηναίοις, α 7 6, 4 irop* ελάχιστον δη ήλθε τό Αθηναίων κράτος της θαλάσσης άφελεσθαι} H e r o d . IX 33 πάρα iv πάλαισμα 'έδραμε νικαν. CHAPTER III § 1. 1. 2. σ-φ£σαν here in its proper use, as an i n d i r e c t r e ­ f l e x i v e i.e. in a dependent clause referring to the subject of the principal clause. Cf. I c. 20, 1 ; c. 30, 3 ; c. 58, 1; c. 115, 5 ; 11 c. 81, 8 ; v c . 44, 1; VI c. 32, 2. 1. 3. ιταρ€τάξαντο: nothing is said by T h u c . of the exact spot where the Athenians drew up their forces; since the bulk of the 94 NOTES ON THE VII iii ι army was at work upon the wall near the Harbour (vi 103, i) it must have been somewhere in the maritime plain extending between the edge of Epipolae and the Anapus, near their own lines (§ 3 irpbs τφ έαυτων re/χα), where Gylippus with the Syracusans advanced against them. 1. 4. eqwvos τα δΊτλα, 'taking up a position in arms'. The technical expression τίθεσθαι τα ό'πλα is always applied to the movement of a body of men-at-arms t a k i n g up a p o s i t i o n with a view to some m i l i t a r y o p e r a t i o n , whether the verb bears here the general signification of 'arranging arms', as in the Homeric verse ev ασπίδα θέσθω (II. Π 382), or of 'grounding arms' i.e. rest­ ing the spear and shield on the ground, as in the case of a halt or when awaiting orders. Rehdantz in his Introd. to Xen. Anab. note 30 understands τίθεσθαι in the sense of κατατίθεσθαι^ 'to lay down', 'to divest oneself o f shield and spear; from this meaning are easily derived those of ' to halt', ' to encamp', ' to take one's stand'. See Anab. ι ν n—16 and cf. II c. 2, 4 (where Grote (vi p. 153) attempts to prove that Arnold is wrong in his explanation of 'piling their arms'), iv c. 44, 1, c. 68, 3, c. 90, 4; vii c. 3, 1; viii c. 25, 4, c. 93, 1. 1. 5. κήρυκα ιτρό(ΠΓ€μΐΓ€ΐ avrots λέγοντα, 'sends a herald to them, to say'; cf. c. 35, 1. This meaning of irpbs in compound verbs, as προσαν ay κάξειν c. 18, 4, is not noticed by commentators. Van Herwerden (Mnemos. Nov· Ser. VIII p. 292) would correct either \kyuv or \k%ovra. But the present partic. is not abnormal, cf. c. 25, 9, III c. .52, 2 προσττεμπει αύτοΐς κήρυκα \eyovra, Eur. Suppl. 120 τούτους θανόντας ήλθον έί-αιτών (not έζαιτήσων) ττολιν. So in a recently discovered inscription, quoted by Stahl from Sauppe Ind. lect. Goett. 1880—1:—κήρυκας δέ έλομένη ή βυυλή πεμψάτω els τας π6\εις άγγέλλο^ταε τάδε τά εψηφισμενα. The nom. έτοιμος with etvai which follows, as if \eywv had preceded, refers to the principal subject contained in προσπεμπει: cf. V 41, 2 ουκ έώντων Κακεδαιμονίων μεμνήσθαι περί αυτής, άλλ', εΐ βούλονται σπενδεσθαι ωσπερ irp&repov, έτοιμοι εΐραι, as if the sentence had been tos ούκ εϊων άλλ' ZXeyov. 1, 7. IT£VT€ ή[Χ€ρών, 'within (any time in the course of) five days': G. § 179, 1, HA. § 759. § 2. 1. 8. ev ολιγωρία έιτοιοΰντο, 'regarded him with indiffer- VII iii 4 HISTORY OF THUCYDIDES 95 e n c e ' , the object (κήρυκα) being understood from the preceding sentence or ' i t ' (αι)τά), * the message of Gylippus', as Iv 5, 2. 1. 9. ουδέν <ΜΓθκρινάμ€νοι: Plut. Nic. c. 19, 3 gives further details:—των στρατιωτών τίνες KaTayekQvTes ερώτων εΐ δια παρονσίαν έν6ς τρίβωνος καΐ βακτηρία* λακωνικής οϋτως Ισχυρά τα Συρακού­ σιων εξαίφνης yeyovev, ώστ1 'Αθηναίων καταφρονεΐν. 1. ί ο . αλλήλοι$, the dative because of the g e n e r a l i d e a of op­ position contained in the compound άντιπαρεσκευάξοντο as a whole. § 3 . 1. 12. confusion'. Tapatro-o^vovs, 'falling (gradually) into a state of 4 1. 14. €ττανήγ€ το* σ-τρατό-πΈδον €S rijv €νρυχωρίαν μάλλον, 'withdrew the (allied) army more (toward the East) to the open ground (nearest the shore) \ F r o m this the ascent to the Temenites was short and easy, when there was no enemy to oppose. This is not the same as the ευρυχωρία of c. 6, 2. T h e verb iiravayeiv occurs only once again in T h u c , in the middle voice, with the meaning ' t o put out to sea against'. 1. 17. irpos τ φ Ιαυτών τ€ίχ€ΐ i.e. the almost completed διπλούν τείχος of c. 2, 4. ccumSv 'himself and those under h i m ' : see n. to c. τ, 5. 1. 19. τήν ακραν την Τ€μ€νϊτιν, ' the high ground of the quarter of Apollo TemeniteV, which was just above the district afterwards called Neapolis, at the extremity of the South-east side of Epipolae, within the Syracusan line of defence. I t is spoken of as τόν Τεμενίτην VI c. 75, 1 and as τον τεμένους C. 99, 3. 1. 20. αύτου, ibi, § 4 . 1. 2 1 . τήν μέν ιτλδίστην rrjs o*Tpttnas : for the assimila­ tion of the gender of the articular adjective to that of its dependent partitive genitive, cf. c. 25, 3 ; I c. 2, 3 της yfy η αρίστη, ν ι c. 7, 1 της yfy ετεμον ου πολλήν, and see G. § 168 n. 1, H A . § 730 e. I. 22. τ ά τδίχτ) sc. το διπλούν 1» 23. άίλλοο-e refers especially to the defence of Labdalum. τεΐχος. 1. 24. τό ψροΰριον το Δ ά β δ α λ ο ν : see VI 97, 5 φρούριον έπϊ τφ Λα/3δάλ^ φκοδόμησαν έπ άκροις τοΐς κρήμνοις των Ί&πιπολων, ορών προς τα "Kiyapa, δπως εϊη αύτοΐς (sc. τοΐς Άθηναίοις), οπότε προ'Ιοιεν $ μαχούμενοι η τειχιοΰντες, τοΐς τε σκεύεσι καΐ τοΐς χρήμασιν αποθήκη; 96 NOTES ON THE vn iii 4 also c. 98, 2. Since the construction of the κύκλος and removal of the Athenian fleet from Thapsus to the Harbour, the fort was comparatively useless to the Athenians; and the wiser course for them would have been to dismantle it, rather than let it fall into the hands of the enemy. See Introd. p. lviii. 1. 26. ην δ£ ουκ Ιττιφαν^ Tots Ά . το χωρίον: it was not visible from the Athenian lines, because the central portion of Epipolae, being more elevated than its northern edge, obstructed the view. Holm Geschichte Siciliens π 387, Freeman Hist. Sic. i n 146—7. § 5. 1. 29. €φορ|Αθυσ·α, 'blockading*. τω λιμάνι sc> τφ μeyάλφ (Schol.); cf. c. 25, 5; c. 52, 2; c. 56, 1; c. 62, 1; c. 69, 4; c. 70, 1. On the other hand, in VI c. 99, 1 we find εκ τον μεyάλoυ λι,μενος. The Athenian fleet had removed from Thapsus (vi c. ior, 2; c. 102, 4) and was now stationed in a fortified position in the Great Harbour at the extremity of the double blockading wall in close neighbourhood of the land force. Another interpretation is given by Prof. Jowett, namely the Syracusan harbour inside the Great Harbour. CHAPTER IV § 1. 1. ι. 4τ€£χι£ον...άνω: Gylippus began the construction of a fresh wall of intersection (τΰχος άπλοϋν c. 11, 3; c. 42, 4) from the city, aslant (i.e. at an angle with the Athenian wall), along the slope of Epipolae. άνω may mean either * upwards' or On the higher ground' (Jowett). It means ' north' of the κύκλος, as 1. 7. This was the t h i r d counterwork of the Syracusans. 4 A single wall without a palisade seems to have been considered' says Leake I.e. p. 64 'sufficient, because it was covered on the left by the outwork of Temenites and had a powerful force to protect the workmen engaged in raising it'. The first (ύποτείχισμα a! in Plan) was a wall with a palisade before it, having wooden towers at intervals (vi c. 99, 3 έτείχιζον εξελθόντες από της σφετέρας πόλεως άρξάμενοι, κάτωθεν του κύκλου των 'Αθηναίων iyKapaiov τείχος ay οντες). It commenced from the Temenite postern-gate and seems to have been carried to the brink of the precipitous Southern Cliff, which prevented the Athenians from taking it and assailing it in flank; but it was ultimately stormed, taken and destroyed by them (vi C. 100, 2), and the Southern Cliff was so fortified as to pre­ vent the Syracusans from again employing it as a flank defence for a second counterwall. . VII iv 3 HISTORY OF THUCYDIDES 97 T h e s e c o n d counterwork (ύποτείχισμα β' in Plan) consisted of a trench and palisade, which they carried across the lower ground or marsh between the Southern Cliff and the Harbour— the Athenian fleet being still at Thapsus—towards the river Anapus, so as to intersect the line which the Athenians must follow to complete their southern fortifications. This work also was attacked and taken by the Athenians—a success which cost their general Lamachus his life (vi c. ι ο ί , 2, 3). T h e t h i r d Syracusan counterwork (παρατείχισμα in Plan) —intended to prevent the Athenians from continuing their circumvallation in a northerly direction and so to render block­ ade impossible—started, like the other two, από της πόλεως i.e. from the new wall which covered both the outer and inner city and ran along the northern height of Epipolae (not, like the others, κάτωθεν του κύκλου), where the Athenians had collected building materials, stone and timber, for their own projected wall. T h e counterwork here begun is continued c. 5, 1, and finished c. 7, ι ξυνετείχισαν τό λοιπόν του εγκαρσίου τείχους. 1. 3· irpos το έγκάρσ-ιον, in obliquum, ' a t an angle,' ' t r a n s ­ versely'. Dobree compares X e n . H e l l . IV iii 23 προς τό σιμόν, ' u p hill', 11 iv 15 7rp6s δρθιον Ιέναι, but Kriiger does not admit the parallelism. Such prepositional phrases are mostly without the art. 1. 5. ct μ,ή δύναιντο modo obliquo pro ην μη δύνωνται. enim Syracusani expectabant (StahP). C p . iv 120, 2. Hoc 1. 6. αΐΓ0Τ€ΐχ£σ-αι, ' t o complete the circumvallation'. T h e Athenians had completed the remaining βραχύ τι of their διπλούν τείχος, or wall ending at the Harbour, and had collected (c. 2, 4) their forces on the heights in order to continue the construction of their northern wall (το επί τον Τρώγιλον τείχος), when Gylippus threatened to attack it i.e. the wall on the lower ground which they had just left (τό επί θαλασσή τείχος, c. 2, 4). § 2 . 1. 9. άσ-Qevis, ' w e a k , ' i . e . too low, as is explained by 1. 13 έποικοδομήσαντες αύτο ϋψηλότερον, cf. c. 29, 3, IV 9, 3 σφίσι του τείχους ταύτγι ασθενέστατου 6ντος. § 3 . 1. 11. 4'ξω sc. του τείχους; in the interval between their own lines and the new Syracusan city wall. 1. 12. τούδ σ-φετίρουβ (not, as Dobree, 'his m e n ' but) ' t h e men of his own s i d e ' ; for σφέτερος cannot refer to a single person: see n. to c. 1 , 5 ; c. 38, 2. 1. 13. Ι-ίΓοικοδομησαντίδ αύτο ύψηλότ€ρον, 'raising it (i.e. at ζ the weak point) higher'» For the use of the p r o l e p t i c predicate T. VII 7 98 NOTES ON THE vn iv 3 accusative to denote effect, see G. § 166 N. 3 and cp. Plat. Rep. iv p. 494 D ύψηλόν έξαρεΐν αυτόν. Such predicate adjectives are most frequently used with the verbs a'ipeiv, atf£e«/, διδάσκει, παιδεύειν and τρέφειν. 1. 14. αυτοί μ£ν )( rovs δέ άλλουδ ξυμμάχουδ: αλλο$ (seldom frepos) is very often used a t t r i b u t i v e l y with a substantive, which logically must be regarded as an appositive to it; see G. § 142, 2, N. 3, HA. § 705 and cp. c. 36, 1, "c. 61, 1, c. 70, 2, I 128, 5 τούτους, ods'έλαβεν,αποπέμπει βασιλεΐ κρύφα των &λλων συμμάχων i.e. 'the others, viz. the allies' (not 'the rest of the allies'), II 14, τ, ill 19, 2, IV 100, 2. The Athenians had learnt from experience that the wall was most exposed to a breach here, and therefore kept that station to themselves; they had already stationed their allies at different points of the walls (both north and south of the κύκλος), where it was intended that they should severally keep guard. 1. 16. ήδη διάταξαν, iam antea disposuerant, 'had already posted them at different points'. § 4 . I. 17. τό Πλημμύριον, the modern p e n i s o l a Maddalena, east of Milocca, immediately opposite the southern point of Ortygia {της πόλεως), together with which it narrows the en­ trance to the Harbour. In size, position and climate it bore a strong resemblance to Achradina, but its fertile fields and rich vine­ yards were in marked contrast with the barren and rocky plateau of the latter. Niebuhr (Anc. Hist. 11 p. 155), quoted by Classen, remarks upon the resemblance of the occupation by Buonaparte of Fort L'Eguillette, in the siege of Toulon. 1. 20. του μεγάλου XLJJ.€VOS depends upon ο~τόμα. Ace. to Thuc. (c. 59, 3) the entrance to the Harbour was about a mile in width (οκτώ σταδίων μάλιστα). 1. 2i. p£ov: the use of the adv. with &reds, * for (he considered that) they would be at a less distance than before (i.e. from the Syracusan ships) in keeping watch afloat at the H a r b o u r ' : cf. v i 75, 1. I agree with Kriiger Stahl H u d e in regarding the words τ φ των Σνρακοσίων which the MSS. have after τφ Χιμένι as an adscript. Classen, however, and Boehm retain them, the former supposing them to refer to the part of the Great Harbour near the city where the Syracusan fleet lay, the latter to the smaller port {portus Lakkius). Leake also (/. c. p . 85) understands by ' t h e Syracusan p o r t ' the smaller or northern harbour. 1. 24. IK μ,υχοΰ του λιμένο$, 'from a corner of the (great) H a r ­ bour \ T h e Athenian fleet since its first ingress (vi 102, 3) had been stationed in close neighbourhood of the land force, in a forti­ fied position at the end of their double blockading wall between the southern cliff of Epipolae and the H a r b o u r . F r o m such a station in the interior of the Harbour, it was difficult for the Athenian triremes to perform the duties incum­ bent on them, of watching the two ports of Syracuse—we have already seen (c. 2, 1) how Gongylus escaped their vigilance—, so as to prevent any exit of ships from within, or ingress of ships from without, and of ensuring the unobserved admission by sea of supplies for their own army (Grote). 1. 25. Tas Ιτταναγωγάβ, 'their getting under weigh to meet the enemy' (Arnotd). η ν τι...κινώνται, 'in case of any movement on the part of the enemy'. T h e sudden change of subject is quite in Thucydides' style. Cf, c. 18, 4. Arnold aptly compares v i n 100, 2 σκοπούς κατ€στήσατο...€ΐ άρα ποι κινοϊντο al vrjes, δπως μή \a0oiev, and IV 76, 4 €Ϊ πως ξυμβοηθήσωσιν επί τα σφέτερα αύτων κινούμβρα, observing that the word is more naturally applicable to the movements of a party undergoing blockade than to the mere locomotion of the ships of the blockaders from one point to another. 1. 26. ΊτροσΈΐχέ τ€...τω κατά θάλα<Γ<ταν ττολέμψ, ' a n d (in general) he devoted himself thenceforward rather to naval warfare'. F o r προσέΐχε, cf. c. 75, 7. 1. 28. άν€λττι<ΠΌΤ€ρα: c. 47, 2 ; ν ι θ 2 . § 5 . 1. 29. οττρατιάν, partem exercitus, ' a detachment', c. 7, 2. Their main camp was still along the walls, c. 23, 2. έί·€Τ€£χκΓ€: c. 26, 3 ; IV c. 4, 1, c. 45, 3. T h e aorist expresses the rapidity with which the forts were completed. 7—2 IOO NOTES ON THE VII IV 5 1. 30. τρία φρούρια, ' t h r e e forts', one large, two subsidiary ones (c. 23, 1), intended as magazines for provisions and the chief part of their naval stores, which before had been kept at fort Labdalum (c. 3, 4), and for the protection of their transport vessels and war-ships, already anchored under them. T h e μ ε γ ά λ α πλοία (Ι. 32) are distinguished from the όλκάδες or 'ships of b u r d e n ' in c. 23, 2, VI 44, 1. τ α σκβύη, armamenta navium or ' s t o r e s ' generally. See c. 24, 2 ; c. 60, 2 ; v i 97, 5 ; V I I I 28, 1, c. 43, 1, and my n. to Xen. Oecon. p . 171 ed. 5. § 6 . 1. 33. ώ(ττ€, quocircci) as a result of their new position, των πληρωμάτων ' the ships' companies' including ναυτακ and έπιβάταί (c. 12, 3 ; c. 13, 2 ; VIII 25, 2). 1. 34. κάκωσ-is, from κακοΰν (c. 24, 3, III 87, 2, VI 18, 4), means ' deterioration'. I n other respects and especially in a sanitary point of view, the Athenians were much better off in their new position: but they could not prevent Gylippus from bringing a body of Syracusan cavalry to strengthen the garrison at Olympieium, so as to bring it up to one third of their whole strength in that arm. τ ω υ δ α τ ι . , . ο ι ν α ΰ τ α ι : So Nicias complains in his letter (c. 13, 2) of των ναυτών δια φρνγανισμόν κάί apTrayrjv καϊ ύδρείαν μακράν ύπο των Ιππέων απο\\υμένων. Prof. Jowett considers τφ ϋδατι χρώμβνοι as a temporal clause subordinate to οπότε έξέλθοιβν,ι whenever the sailors went out', which they had to do frequently, (a) because their supply of water was scanty and far to fetch, (b) for firewood. Classen and others take it as a causal clause, coordinate with the temporal clause όπότβ έξέλθοιεν, both referring to the common verb διεφθείροντο. Some consider the latter verb as substituted for έκακονντο δίαφθειρόμβνοι; the first inconvenience they felt was the want of water, the second their exposure to the enemy's attack when they were ranging the country in search of firewood. F o r the connexion of adjective and adverb by a copulative conjunction (σπανίω καϊ ούκ iyyoBev), see n. to c. 32, 2. 1. 35. nationem. φρυγανι<τμόν=:0/>υ7ά>ωϊ' i;vWoyf]v ( i n 111, 1) lig- 1. 37. κρατούντων τήδ γή$, ' a s being masters of the (surround­ ing) country'. Gf. I i n , 1 tijs yrjs έκράτονν, VI 23, 2. διέφθέί· ροντο, 'were cut off from time to t i m e ' . VII V ι HISTORY OF THUCYDIDES ΙΟΙ 1. 38. Tots Συρακοσίοιδ, the dative combines the two mean­ ings ' b y ' and 'for the good o f , as in ν 29, i . I. 39. « r l rfj kv τ ώ Όλυμ·π·ΐ€£φ ττολίχνη, ' a t the hamlet in the precincts of the Olympieion': kv—apud. This O l y m p i e i o n (not to be confounded with the magnificent temple of Zeus Olympius built by Hieron I I in the agora of Achradina) lay west of the road leading from Syracuse to Elorus in South Sicily (Έλωρίνη όδό$, c. 80, 5, VI c. 66, 3, c. 70. 4) and on the right bank of the Anapus. T h e name included all the lands belonging to the temple and the houses that surrounded them— which at a later period, as a suburb, came to be designated by the distinctive name ΙΙολΙχνη, Diod. Sic. x i l l 7, 6 TTJV κάλουμένην ΙΙολίχνην τειχίσαντζς, XIV 72» 3 (Himilko) αυτός μ& φρούριον rty καλουμένην ΙΙολίχνην eX\e κατά, κράτος, just as Τεμενίτης became the name of a quarter (c. 3, 3, VI 75, 1). W e learn from the latter passage that the Syracusans had built a fort on the spot. I t remained always occupied by the Syracusans throughout the whole war, though Diodorus ( x i l l 7) asserts the contrary. Plutarch Nic. c. 14, 5 says that part of it was used as a muniment room for the register of Syracusan families. T w o monoliths are still extant to mark the site of the temple. 1. 40. Ιτ€τάχατο an Ionic form for τeτayμέvoL ήσαν, in Attic, but found also in i n 13, 3, i v 31, ι, ν 6, 5. § 7. 1. 43. 1. 4 i . unusual τά$ Xoiircls...vavs: cf. c. 2, 1, c. 7, 1. Is φυλακήν αυτών, ' t o keep a look-out for t h e m ' , c. 7, 1. 1. 44. Αοκροΰ$: c. ι, ι. τ η ν ιτροσ-βολήν TTJS StKeXCas, 6 ' t h e approaches to Sicily'. Cf. VI 48, 1 iv πόρφ yap μάλιστα καϊ προσβολή dvai αυτούς (τους Μ-βσσψίονς) τή$ Σικελίας. 1. 45· ναυλοχ€Ϊν αύτάβ, ' t o waylay t h e m ' i.e. the Corinthian ships. Photius, referring to this passage, explains the verb by vavs λοχαν καϊ ivedpeueiv. Arnold quotes Appian bell. civ. 4, 82 MoO/wcos bh iv ΙΙέλοποννήσφ νανλοχών Κλώπατραν, in illustration. CHAPTER V § 1. 1. 1. To...T€t\os: c. 4, 1 ; cf. c. 7, 1. 1. 3. προπαρ€βάλοντο C€ 1. 5· μ,ή «ircptopctv παροικοδομ.οΰμ€νον τδ τβΐχοδ, 'not to look on with unconcern at the wall (i.e. the Tet%os άττλουν of the Syracusans, c. 4, 3) being built past theirs'. 1. 7. όσον ου, tantum non, 'all but*. τταρβληλύθα την— Τ€λ€υτήν, 'had gone beyond the (north) end of the (unfinished) wall of blockade', the building of which had been temporarily stopped, in order that they might have more time to complete the southern portion towards the Harbour (vi ΙΟΙ, I, cf. C 2, 4). I.9. τ€ίχι<Γΐδ, 'the process of building', τείχισμα 'that which is built'. el ιταρέλθοι, 'if it once passed beyond'. This is Clas­ sen's emendation of the MSS reading ττροέλθοί 'progressed', 'was pushed forward', approved by Stahl; but it seems hardly necessary, since, whatever p r o g r e s s was made with the work, it must be in the direction of the extremity of the Athenian wall. τούτον ήδη €7τοί€ΐ...μάχ€ο-θαι, 'after that it came to the same thing, was a matter of indifference to them (the Athenians), whether they gained a series of victories in the field or abstained from fighting altogether'. Nothing but the completion of the wall of blockade could bring about the fall of the city. For irotctv, valere> cf. 11 89, 2: the imperf. represents the result of the condition as lasting. Observe that αύτοΐς, not σφίσι, is used because the writer is speaking in his own person. 1. 10. Sta ιταντόδ, 'all through', temporal, as in c. 61, 2, II c. 16, 2 ; c. 49, 5. 1. 11. οΰν, resumptive after an interruption of the narrative by the parenthetic clause ήδη—μάχεσθαι. Cf. c. 29, 1; c. 42, 3; c. 80, 3; in 95, I. VII vi 4 HISTORY OF THUCYDIDES § 2 . 1. 12. 2£ω των τδιχών i. q. των τειχισμάτων c. 5, 2. Gylippus now drew out his hoplites further beyond the walls than be­ fore, and higher up the slope of Epipolae, placing his horsemen and darters to the right of his line (not, as before, on his own left wing), opposite the Athenian left, in the highest and most open ground where they could freely move about and manoeuvre. 1. 13. ξννψισ-ψν CWTOIS, ' closed with them', ' engaged in con­ flict ', imperf. as in 1 62, 5. 1. 15. «κ πλαγίου τών 'Αθηναίων, so that they might fall on their flank at a favourable opportunity. Cf. Xen. Cyr. iv i 18. It is in )(to κατά, πρόσωπον and Οπισθεν. 1. 16. ^ληγον, 'terminated'. Cf. 1. 8 rty του τείχους τελευτήν. § 3 . 1. 17. Iv τή μάχη, 'during the battle*. For the con­ struction of the sentence, see n. to c. 5 1. 21. 1. 18. κατ' αύτοΰδ, 'facing them'. 1. 19. δι' αυτό sc* δια τό τρέψαι αυτούς τό εΰώνυμον κέρας των 9 Αθηναίων. 1. 2θ. κατηράχθη, 'was driven pell-mell', from καταράσσεσθαι. Cf. c. 63, ι άπαράξητε, Dem. 54, 8 ράξαντες els τον βόρβορον. § 4 . 1. 21,. τταροικοδομ/ησ-αντές καΐ *ϊταρβλθόντ€δ τήν τών Ά θ . οικοδομίαν, 'traversing and thereby getting .beyond the building of the Athenians'. The latter clause is bracketed by Stahl and Hude, as an explanatory adscript, though Classen thinks that it is purposely added by Thuc. to emphasize the importance of the result. 1. 22. ώστ€ μηκ&τι μήτ€ αυτοί κωλυ£σθαι...€Κ€ίνου$ τ€...άιτ€στ€ρηκέναι...μή civ 2τι σφάς άιτοτ€ΐχίο-αι, 'so as no more to be hampered in their own movements (cf. c. 4,1) by them, and to have absolutely and effectually deprived the enemy of the hope of ever in future cutting off their (the Syracusans*) communication by a complete wall of blockade, even supposing they (the Athenians) should be superior in the field \ Cf. c. 11, 3. Classen understands ' the power' instead of 'the hope'; there is no truth in the Objection that the infin. with &v is not used in indirect discourse except with verbs of saying or t h i n k i n g . Cf.'G. MT. § 211 ed. ma., who concurs with Classen in thinking that μη oiv £τι άΐΓοτ€ΐχίσ·αι is virtually the oblique of ούκέτι, αν άποτειχίσειαν. ιοό NOTES ON THE VII VI 4 1. 24. καΐ Ίταντάιτασ-ιν : c 34, 7 note. ct καΐ κρατοΐ€ν: cf. Plut. Nic. c. 19, 6 άττέκοψε (Τύλι,ππος) τόν εκείνων (των 'Αθηναίων) περιτειχισμύν, ώστ' αύτοΐς μηδέν είναι πλέον κρατοϋσιν. CHAPTER VII § 1. 1. ι. α ϊ Τ€ των Κορινθίων νη€8...δώδεκα: cf. c. -2, ι ; c. 4» 7> V I c · 93> 1. 3. 2 f.; c · ΪΟ4? ι · T h e r e belongs to /cai 1. 8. €<Γ€ΐτλ€υσαν, 'sailed into harbour'. I. 6. ξυν€Τ€£χι<ταν τό λοιπό ν . . . [μέχρι] του εγκαρσίου τ€£χουδ, 'they (i.e. the crews of the Corinthian ships) helped the Syracusans to finish the remainder of their cross-wall'. Cf. c. 7 1 , 6 , i v 116, 3. Such is the explanation, proposed by H o l m (Gesch. Sic. 11 p . 394 f.) and accepted by Classen, of a passage on which so much has been written by commentators. T h e wall in question (the τείχος άπλουν of c. 4, 1 ; c. 11, 3 built irpbs το έ^κάρσιον, = the τταρατείχισμα of c. n , 3 ; c. 42, 4; c. 43, 1) which was intended to turn the northern extremity of the Athenian line of circumvallation had been carried past it (as we learn from c. 6, 4), and 'it may have been necessary' as Jowett writes 'either to strengthen an unfinished previous portion, or to c a n y it on to some further point, such as the edge of the cliffs, at which it could not be turned'. Stahl arrives at the same sense by strik­ ing out του έ*γκαρσίου τείχους as well as μέχρι. T h e latter word was probably interpolated by some one who misinterpreted c 4, 1. Grote is of opinion that the wall which the Corinthian allies assisted in raising was really a n o t h e r continuous wall coming down from an advanced post erected on the high ground of Epipolae to join the original counterwall {μέχρι του ^καρσίου τεί­ χους). T h e objections to this interpretation have been well put by Prof. Jowett II p . 410—2, although it has been revived by Freeman and F . Schroter, the latter of whom translates com* muniverunt reliquam partem mtiri ab Euryelo ducti usque ad murum ab urbe inchoatum. Col. Leake (Notes etc. p . 6*j) takes a still different view. ' T h e Syracusan cross·wall', he writes, ' w a s now united with the enclosure of Temenitis and thus largely extended the dimensions of that outwork of Achradina*. § 2 . 1. 9. eirl στρατιάν <οχ€το..., ' w e n t off hastily for a force, naval as well as m i l i t a r y ' ; t h e preposition is further defined by t h e participle of purpose ξυλλέξων, ' t o get together', which however Cobet nov. led. p . 67 rejects as an explanatory adscript. Cf. c. 12, 1, c. 16, I, VI 33, 2 iroXhrj στρατι$ καϊ ναυτική καϊ πεζή. vnviiii HISTORY OF THUCYDIDES 107 1. 11. των ττόλίων partitive gen. after & TIS. irpoo-af^evos, conciliaturus, 'to win to their side', 1 99, 2, 11 30, 2, iv 86 r, VI 75» 3· Η·ή ιτρόθυμοε, 'lukewarm'. 1. 12. άφασ-τηκ€ΐ, «had stood aloof from', IV 118, 9, VI 88, 4. 8 § 3 . 1. 13. άλλοι 'besides', not in ref. to the embassy of vi 73, 2. Cf. c. 4, 3 ; c. 36, 1. 1. 15. . στρατιά &ri, 'further re-inforcements', c. 2, 1, c. 12, 1, c. 34, 1, c. 46, 1. τρόιτω ω av...irpo)(a>pTJ, 'in whatever manner...it may answer', i.e. in any kind of vessels if no triremes could be spared to convey them., The words ev δλκάσιν ή π\οίοι$ η αλλω$ 6πω$ αν are bracketed as an adscript by Stahl after Schaefer (ad Demosth. 1 p. 215) and Bekker, I have retained them, with the substitution of όπωσοϋν for oVcos dv. By πλοΐα are meant 'large boats', 'barges'. 1. 16. «s...!mp.€Tair€[Jiir<^ev άγγ&ίρ,'' as far as depended on the messenger' i.e. by his intentional Η HISTORY OF THUCYDIDES distortion or misconception of the message entrusted to him. Cf. II c· 35) ι έν ένί ανδρΐ κινδυνεύεσθαι, c. 64, 2 ταύτα μη έν ύμΐν κωλυθη i.e. 'so far as depends on y o u ' ; Aesch. Choeph. 773 έν άγγέλφ yap κρυπτός όρθουται λόγος. § 3 . 1. ig. ot)s ά*7Γ€<ττ€ΐλ€, * those whom he s e n t ' , inserted epexegetically. Stahl reads ώς έπέστειλε, · as he had charged them*, i.e. partly in his letters, partly in the oral instructions which he gave them. F o r φέρειν in the sense of ' b e a r i n g a message*, cf. v i 4 1 , 2. 1. -20. τ ά κατά το στρατόιτεδον ίπΈμελετο, for των κατά τό στ. έττεμέλετο δια φυλακή έχων αυτά κτέ.: the construction being here as usual ruled by the participle, see n. to c. 5, 4 1. 23, though έττιμέλεσθαι is elsewhere used with the neuter accusative pronoun (vi 41, 4). Translate:—'Nicias meanwhile devoted himself to the care of his army, keeping it in an attitude of defence, instead of venturing on self-incurred risks', έκονσίων = αυθαιρέτων Ι 144» ί» V I I I 27» 3· Stahl is right in taking δι' εκουσίων κινδύνων directly with έττε­ μέλετο, independently of 'έχων, as equivalent to a coordinate participial clause, εκουσίους κινδύνους άναλαμβάνων. Linwood takes τα κατά τό σ. independently ' a s regards matters in the camp* and διά φυλακής 'έχων as 'exercising caution', comparing II 81, 4 τεταγμένοι re πρόσδεσαν καΐ δια φυλακής 'έχοντες. T h e reading μάλλον...ή δι1 instead of ηδη depends on Vat. and Laur. T h e majority of MSS omit μάλλον and have either ήδη or a blank in place of ή, δι'. T h e only possible meaning of this reading would b e : 'watched over his army, taking care to guard it against self-incurred dangers', but φυλακής εκουσίων κινδύνων does not read like Thucydidean Greek. T h e omission of μάλλον, on the other hand, may be paralleled. CHAPTER IX 1. 1. «ν τά> αύτφ Θ4ρ€ΐ τελευτώντι, ' towards the close of the same 9 summer'. So I 30, 3 ττεριιόντι τφ θέρει. T h e historian himself tells us (il 1):—γέγραπται έξης ώς 'έκαστα kyiyνετο κατά θέρος και χει­ μώνα, V 2θ, 3 κ α τ ά θέρη καΐ χειμώνας αριθμών ώσπερ γέγραπταΐ. T h e only passage where he departs from this reckoning is c. 19, 1, where Unger proposes to substitute θέρους for $}ρος. κα£ belongs to the entire clause: this incident a l s o happened, besides the Sicilian expedition. 1. 2. μετά Περδίκκον: Perdiccas I I , son of Alexander I, king of Macedonia. H e entertained at one time friendly relations with no NOTES ON THE VII IX the Athenians, but these were broken off in B.C. 432, when the latter gave their countenance to the pretensions of his brother Philip against him, and Perdiccas in consequence espoused the cause of Potidaea. I t was chiefly at his instigation that Brasidas undertook his expedition to Macedonia and Thrace in B.C. 4 2 4 : but he abandoned his alliance with the Spartans before the end of the year and concluded peace with Athens. After a second renewal of hostilities, we find him again on friendly terms with Athens, as indicated in the present passage, but Thucydides is silent as to the circumstances which led to this change of feeling. 1. 3. Άμφιιτολιν: A m p h i p o l i s , originally named 'Ew^a οδοί or ' N i n e W a y s ' , an Edonian settlement situated on the left bank of the Strymon, just below its egress from lake Kerkinitis, about three miles from the sea, and a little above the bridge which here served as an important communication between Macedonia and Thrace. T h e Athenians first attempted to found a city there in B.C. 465, but their attempt ended in failure and the destruction of their 10,000 colonists by Thracian tribes at Drabeskos. A second colony was sent out under H a g n o n , son of Nikias, in B.C. 437 and the appropriate name of A m p h i p o l i s was given to the city of which he was the οίκιστής, After the year B.C. 424, when it was won for Sparta by Brasidas, it was never recovered for Athens, and it became permanently annexed to the dominions of Philip, king of Macedon, in B.C. 358. I t was the loss of A m p h i p o l i s which led to the banishment of Thucydides (v 26, 5), who was in command of the Athenian fleet off the coast. H e secured its port Eion, but arrived too late from the island of Thasos to save the town itself (Thuc. IV c. 103—c. 107). 1. 4. Θραί-l ιτολλοϊδ: c. 27, 1, IV 129, 2 θροιξί μισθωτοί? χιλίοις, V 6, 2 άίξοντα μισθού θρφκας ώ$ πλαστούς* For the dativus militarist a form of the dative of accompaniment, cf. c. n , 3. 1. 5. ΐΓ€ρικομί<τα5, 'conveying them round', by one of the bends of the river or round one of the points where it enters the sea. CK του ττοταμοΰ belongs to έπολιδρκβι. 1. 6. όρμώμίνοβ €fj Ίμβραέου, ' making Himeraeum his head­ quarters or base of operations', lit. 'starting from', the proper mili­ tary term, cf. 1 64, 2, i n 3 1 , 1, i v c. 1, 2, c. 52, 3. T h e place was probably situated on the right bank of the river above the bridge. CHAPTER X 1. 3. άττό γλώσοτηδ, Orally \ Herod. 1127, 2. So airb στόματος, ' b y word of mouth', X e n . Symp. c. 3, 5, Plut. Demosth. c. 7, 2. 1. 4. €Ϊ rl$ τι έιτηρώτα, άιτ€κρ£νοντο, 'if any one asked further questions (asked for additional information), they replied to all such'. vii xi 2 HISTORY OF THUCYDIDES in One of the cases only is referred to, as if it were the only one, i.e. the general supposition, which should be expressed by εϊτίς TL επερωτφη, is stated as if it were particular. Cf. n 37, 2 where we find el δρφ for ψ δρ$, and see G. MT. § 472 p . 174 ed. ma. 1. 5. ά·πΈ'δοσ-αν, reddiderunt, ' d e l i v e r e d ' . See Graves on i v c. 39 1. 13. 6 γραμματβύε [rrjs iroXecus], ' the state secretary', whose business it was to read aloud documents in the Council (βουλή) and popular Assembly (εκκλησία). D e m . Lept. § 95 τφ γραμματεϊ παραδουναι, τούτον δ' εν reus εκκλησίαις άναγιγνώσκειν. 1. 7· δηλοΰσαν: so of the contents of Pausanias' letter to the King of Persia (1 129, ι τοσαϋτα ή *γραφη εδήλου), and of that of Themistocles to King Artaxerxes (1 137, 4 k δ ήλο υ δ' ή γραφή οτι κτέ.). I t is the proper word also with ψήφισμα, νόμος. CHAPTER XI § 1. 1. 2. 4v ciXXcus TToXXats Ιτπσ-τολαίβ ϊ<ττ€: short for ev a. επιστολαΐς ή~γ"/ελμένα εκ των επιστολών ϊστε. Cf. c. 8, ι άγγέλλων πολλάκις καΐ άλλοτε. There is an ambiguity, as Grote points out, involved in the word, which, though usually implying, does not necessarily imply, w r i t t e n communication. Nicias may have sent written despatches previously, though much shorter than the present— leaving details and particulars to be supplied orally by the officer who carried them, but, probably, verbal messages are meant. 1. 3. ever'. νΰν...οΰχ ήσσ*ον sc. ή πρδτερον, a litotes, ' n o w more than I . 4 . €V φ 4<τμ€ν, in qtio statu sumus, ' in our present position', rather than, as Stahl, in quo statu simus, in which case 8 s must be put for όστις, as in X e n . Cyr. v i 1 46 ειπών δς ψ, Arist. Ach. 442 ειδέναι μ1 os eitf iyo, Soph. Ai. 1259 μαθών 6s εΐ. Cp. c. 11, 1 ορώντα εν φ έσμέν. § 2 . 1. 5· κρατησάντων.,.Συρακοσ-ίουδ : T h u c . uses κρατεΐν ' t o conquer', 'gain a victory over', with the ace. only when con­ nected with μάχη (ι c. 108, 5 ; c. 109, 3 ; c. i n , 3, π 25, 3, π ι 9 1 , 5, VI 2, 5) or μαχόμενος (il 39, 2, IV 67, 5 ) ; sometimes also when μάχ-Q is not expressed but only implied from the context, as 11 39, 3, i n 99, 1; otherwise it is always found With the genitive. μ ά χ α ι ς TCXIS irXeioou, ' in the greater number of our b a t t l e s ' : the third, and in T h u c . a favourite position of the substantive with 112 NOTES ON THE VII xi 2 the article, for ταΐς πλείοσι μάχαις or ταΐς μό,χαις rah πλείοσι: cf. 1. ί ο , ι c. ι, ι παρασκευή τη πάση, c. 11, ι μέρει τφ del παρόντι etc. 1. 6. τ α τ € ί χ η : if we follow the indications of time given by the historian (οίκοδομησαμένων.,.ηλθε Γύλιππος), this should refer only to their wall of circumvallation, as far as finished, and to the round fort on Epipolae, but the addition of έν οΐσπερ νυν έσμέν and 1. 12 άνεχωρησαμεν ές τά τείχη leaves no doubt that the forts on Cape Plemmyrium are included. 1. 8. 4K ΠβλοτΓοννησου καΐ άπο τών...7τόλ€α>ν: F o r a similar interchange of έκ and άπό, cf. I 35, 3 άπό...των ένσπόνδων 'έσται πληρούν τάς ναυς καϊ.,.έκ της άλλης "Ελλάδος καϊ ονχ ηκιστα άπο των υμετέρων υπηκόων, IV 6 ι , 7 οϋκ άπό της αυτών όρμωνται αλλ' έκ της των επικαλεσαμένων, VII 33> 3 έτοιμης της στρατιάς ούσης' 'έκ τε της Κερκύρας καϊ άπο της ηπείρου. 1. 9· ϊ σ τ ι ν coy, ' s o m e ' . T h e singular verb is used by Thuc. with the relative in oblique cases only, I 65, 3 'έστιν ά καϊ πο\ίσματα εΐλεν, III 92, 5 'έστιν ων άλλων εθνών, VI 88, 6 'έστιν ων πό­ λεων απαγγελλομένων, but VI 88, 4 ^Ισϊν οΐ. 1. ί ο . ττ| ύ<ττ€ρα£α sc. μάχη, 'in the battle on the following d a y ' (or simply O n the following d a y ' , as in c. 52, ι ) , εις την έπιουσαν ημέραν, as Plut. Nic. c. 19, 5 says, not 'in the subsequent battle', as i f = υστέρα. 1. i i . picur0€VT€s sc. ύπ1 αύτοϋ, as c 43, 6. 1. 12. ανεχωρήσ-αμ€ν: c. 6, 2, 3. IO § 36. 1. 13. του ττ€ριτ€ΐχισμ.ου, ' o u r blockade-work', as VI 88, το πλήθος ' t h e superior number', as in i v 10, 4. 1· *5· χρήσεσθαι, the reading of the majority of MSS, is rejected by most editors in favour of χρήσασθαι, which Laur. alone gives. As to the exceptional use of the f u t u r e i n f i n i t i v e after verbs denoting a b i l i t y or w i s h , where it is desired to make the reference to the future especially prominent, I cannot agree with the teaching of Prof. Goodwin in his Moods and Tenses § 113 ed. ma. T h e examples which he quotes are mostly copyists' errors, and the aorist has been substituted for the future in the best modern editions. Cobet reads χρησθαι. άττανηλωκυίας ' h a v i n g absorbed'. completeness. The preposition denotes 1. 16. μέρος τ ι : ' a considerable portion'. 1. 17. τταρφκοδομήκασιν : c. 4, 1, c. 6, 1, 4. μή «ΐναι, ' i t VII xii 2 HISTORY OF THUCYDIDES 113 is not possible', as in c. 12, 4, c. 44, 4, 11 97, 4, 111 46, 1, i v 8, 3 , ν 40, 2, 90. 1.18. το* ΐΓαρατ€ίχιοτμα is the word used also in c. 4 3 , 1 , 5 of the ipyracusan crgss-wall (το iyicapaiop τείχος c. 7, 5) since its intersec­ tion of the Athenian περιτείχισμα (νΐ 101, 1). § 4 . 1. 20. ξυ|χβ€βηκ4 τ€, ' a n d so things have come to such a pass t h a t ' , summing u p and concluding the statement. Cf. c. 70, 6. 1. 2 1 . oora *y€, quatenus, ' s o far at least as 7 , limitative, as in IV 48, 5 η στάσις ετελεύτησεν έ$ τούτο, 6σα ηε κατά, τον πδλεμον τον δε. Observe that α λ λ ου s is the Object of πολιορκεΐν, αυτούς the Subject to πάσχειν τούτο (c. 48, 4) sc. το πολιορκεΐσθαι υπ άλλων. 1. 22. ουδέ γ α ρ , neque enim, simply the negative of teal yap, as in c. n , 3 (not, as Jowett, ' f o r not—even'). TTJS χώρας kni ττολΰ, 'far into t h e country'; not here a substantival expression, as in IV 3, 2 άπέφαινε (το χωρίον) φύσει καρτερον ον και 'έρημον αυτό τε καϊ έπϊ πολύ της χώρας. See η . to c. 64., 2 and cf. καθ7 έκαστα c. 8, ι . Sid TOVS tiT'ir&xs sc. κρατούντα? της yw, c. 4, 6. CHAPTER XII § 1 . I. 1. ΊΓ€ΤΓθ|χφαα-ι δέ καϊ... kn ά λ λ η ν στρατίάν καϊ... οΐ'χξται: c 7, '*, 3· 1. 4· T"ds μέν κα1...άΐΓΟ δΙ τ ω ν : και—και balance each other, as is so often the case in bimembral clauses in Xenophon, cf. H e l l . 1 iv 3 θηραι ai μέν καϊ εν πεpιειρyμέvoις παραδείσου, αί δέ καϊ εν αναπεπταμένοις τόποι*, T h u c . ν 6$, 3 €'^τ€ καϊ ό"ια το έπιβόημα είτε καϊ άλλο τι δόξαν, a n d see on c. 2, 4 ; c. 8, 1. 1. 6. ήσυχά£ου<πν, a bello se abstinent, c. 58, ι . καϊ στρα­ τίάν &ri: Stahl from V a t . T h e vulgate is 'έτι καϊ στρατίάν, where %τι is equivalent to και (not as in c. 7, 3 and προσπληρώσαντες έτι ναϋς c. 34, 2), and the καϊ before στρατίάν corresponds to that before ναυτικού παρασκευών. 1. 7· ναυτικού τταρασ-κευην : Π 6ι, 2 η ύπαρχούση του ναυτικού, ill 39? 2 τριηρών παρασκευή. παρασκευή § 2 . 1. ί ο . των τειχών impciv: cf. ο 38, ι , Ι 6 ι , 3 πειράσανr e j του χωρίου και ούχ έλόντες; IV 70, 2 της Ήισαίας πειρασαι. In the following clause it is used absolutely, as in I v 25, ί ο προσ* Τ. ν ι ΐ 8 NOTES ιΐ4 ON THE βάλλοντες κατά τον λιμένα Tats νανσϊν επείρων, definition. § 3. 1. x i . Savov, vn xii a with merely a local 'strange', 'incredible'. 1. 12. καΐ κατά θάλασσαν sc. διανοούνται πειραν, ' t h a t they are intending to attack us by sea as well' as by land. 1. 13. 'Sircp refers more particularly to the second clause νυν δε ,,.ε'φθαρται,, to which the clause το πρώτον ήκμαζε, introduced by μέν ' w h i l e ' , ' w h e r e a s ' , is logically subordinate, though co­ ordinated in form. 1. 14. των ν€ων TT] ξηρότητι, 'in the good condition of our ships', before they became thoroughly soaked (διάβροχοι) from lying too long in the water. T h e mode of ensuring this condition is, as described 1. 17 άνελκύσαντας διαψϋξαι or 1. 22 άποξηράναι. This they had not been able to do for more than a year, from July 415 B.C. (c. 6, 30) to Sept. 414 B.C. Julius Pollux 1, 121 brings together some epithets descriptive of the proper condition of ships:—άθαλάσσευτοι καϊ ακραιφνείς καΐ ξηραΐ καϊ διεψνγμέναι; on the other hand those in bad condi­ tion are εντεθαλαττευκνιαι, δίνγροι, άραιαί, διάβροχοι, and again VII 191 καϊ η μέν ονκέτι πλέουσα vads νενεωλκημένη, διαψνχομένη, άνειλκυσμένη. I t seems that in Greek ship-building, moist and unseasoned wood was preferred, from the facility of bending it into the pro­ per shape. Theophrastus Hist. Plant. V 7, 4 (Grote). 1. 14. rfj σωτηρία, incolumitate, dition' )( ΤΎ) κακώσει (c. 4, 6) and 'soundness', 'unimpaired con­ 'έφθαρται (1, 17). 1. 16. θαλασσ€υουσαι, εν θαλάττχ) οΰσαι (Schol.). is found elsewhere only in later Greek. §4. 13 1.8. 1. 17. T h e word Tas μ^ν va€s answered by τ α δε πληρώματα c. 1. 18. άντιττάλουβ τ φ ιτληθ€ΐ καϊ '4τι irXefovs, 'being as they are a match for and indeed (or rather) even superior to our own in n u m b e r ' : see III 17, ι παραπλήσιαι καϊ §τι πλείον$ and n. to c. 19, 2 ; c. 48, 4. Cf. IV 56, ι πλήθει έλάσσους. T h e above is the reading of Vat., that of Laur. is αντιπάλους καϊ τφ πληθει κτέ., viribus pares, et numero quidem plures etiam (Hude). § 5 . 1. 20. φανβραΐ δ ! €ΐσιν άνα7Γ€ΐρώμ6ναι, 'they are to be seen in constant practice' for ' i t is plain,that they are practising ν π xiii 2 manoeuvres' c. 5 1 , 2, G. common to 'trying their HISTORY OF T H U C Y D I D E S 115 (the personal for the impersonal construction), c. 7, 4, MT. § 907. T h e reading άποπειρωμεναι which is all MSS except two, Vat. and Aug., would signify fortune or s t r e n g t h ' . 1. 2 1 . a t έπ-ιχαρήσΈΐβ Ιττ' Ixefrois, hostis invadendi facultas illos est (Valla). Cf. VI 22 μη έπϊ ετέροις 'γί'γνβσθαι. penes 1. 22. μάλλον, ' i n a higher degree than ourselves'. Ιξου- I I σ ί α (εστίν αντοΐς) = 'έζεστι. Stahl omits the word because it is not found in one MS, Μ. ού γ α ρ έφορμοΰο-iv έίλλοις sc. ώσπερ ημείς εφορμονμεν αύτοΐς. Cf. c. 3» 5» c · 4» 4· CHAPTER XIII § 1. 1. 2. 4κ ττολλήβ irepiovtrias ( = ei πολλην περιονσίαν εϊχομεν) serves as protasis to αν ΰττήρχ€. See G. MT. § 472 ed. ma. T r a n s l a t e : — ' W e should hardly have had this advantage (sc. το διαψυξαι τάς ναϋς), if we had possessed a great superiority in the number of our ships, to start with, and had not been compelled (μη avayKa^avoLS = el μη ήνα'γκαζόμεθα), as we are now, to use all we have in keeping guard'. 1. 4. cScrircp νυν sc. άνα*γκαζ6μζθα, explained by ei yap άφαιρησομ€ν...έσκομιζόμενοί. iracrais: see n. to c. 9 L 4. 1. 5. ct άψαιρή(τομ€ν κτΙ., 'if we withdraw ever so small a force from the duty of keeping w a t c h ' sc. by hauling some of our ships ashore. F o r TL βραχύ in collective sense, see n. to c. 43, 7. 1. 7. γα,\?πω$ teal νυν €crKop,t£o*p,€Vot, 'since we have much ado, even as it is, in conveying t h e m (our supplies) i n ' . Cf. I 117, 1, VI 22 Ίνα τά επιτήδεια pq.ov εσκομιζώμεθα; also VII c. 4, 4 ; c. 24, 3. § 2 . 1. 8. τ α π λ η ρ ώ μ α τ α : c. 4, 6. Ιφθάρη ' h a v e dwindled', ' a r e thinned', ' φ θ ε ί ρ ε σ θ α ι (φθίνειν) )( αύ£άρ6σ0αι, Arist. N . E t h . II 2, cp. I 24, 4 εφθάρησαν followed by της δυνάμεως της πολλής έστερήθησαν, III 39» 8 πάλιν εφθαρμένην1. Shilleto on I 2, 4· 1. 10. των ναυτών [τών] μ£ν: the second των, in partitive appo­ sition, probably arose from dittography and is rightly enclosed in brackets by S t a h l ; otherwise we must assume that the θεράποντες are loosely reckoned, as νανται. 1. i i . άριταγήν μακράν, δια το επί apwayr]v εζιέναι (SchoL). πολλού διαστήματος 8—2 εφ* n6 NOTES ON THE vn xiii • 1. 12. οι θβράποντίδ, famuli, used elsewhere (iv 16, i) only of the attendants on the Spartan hoplites. ' H i e non videntur militum famuli fuisse, sed eorum opera in iis potissimum ministeriis navalibus versata esse, quae neque ad navigationem neque ad pugnam navalem pertinebant' (Stahl). Observe the transition from the par­ ticipial construction to that of the finite verb, as in c. 15, 2. επειδή cs άντίιταλα καθ€<ττήκαμ€ν, 'now that we have been brought down to a level with', ' t o contend on equal terms with them (the Syracusans)'. Cf. IV 117, 3 επί μείζον χωρήσαντο? αύτοϋ και αντίπαλα καταστήσαντος, 'if he made things equally balanced'. 1. 14. oi \L\V KT|. in expanded partitive apposition with ol ξένοι. By άναγκαστοί, which is predicate with εσβάντες, as with στρατεύοντες c. 58, 3, are meant those from the subject allies who were p r e s s e d into the service of the Athenian fleet, see c. 57. κατά ταδ iroXcis sc. rets των Σικελών, as c. 25, 9. 1. 16. otojwvoi χρημ,ατΐ€ΐ<τθαι, ' u n d e r the idea of making money by traffic, rather than of fighting'. W i t h €7rap0€VT€S supply έσβάντες from 1. 14, 'those who went aboard because they were attracted by high p a y ' . 1. 17. παρά γνώμην, 'contrary to expectation', as in i v c. 40, 1, c. 127, 2, v 14, 3, v i 11, 5 etc.: but it is also used with the mean­ ing 'contrary to reason', 'against better j u d g m e n t ' , as 1 70, 3, i v 19, 4 προς τά νπεραυχοΰντα και παρά 'γνώμην διακινδννεύειν. δη, scilicet, as if that were the last thing to be expected. H u d e con­ jectures τ ηδη; but cp. i v c. 40, ,1; c. 63, 2. 1. 18. αϊτό των ιτολίμίων, ' o n the part of the enemy'. ot μέν.,.οι 84, a further subdivision, in partitive apposition to oi δέ 1.15. 1. 19. eir* αύτομολίας ιτρρφάσ€ΐ, ' o n any opportunity of desert­ ing to the enemy' (Classen and Boehme). Others take the meaning to be 'finding some excuse for desertion', or ' u n d e r profession of being deserters to the enemy', ' a s professed deserters'. O n t h e reading αυτονομίας adopted by Stahl, H u d e and others, see crit. note. οι δέ, as ^κασ-τοι δύνανται, sc. άπιέναι, 'others (not de­ serters) in any manner they can, as they severally find opportunity'. 1. 20. πολλή δ* ή Σικ€λ£α, 'for Sicily is a roomy (ευρύχωρος) place', in which there are so many points of refuge open to them in every direction that their escape can be easily effected—a paren- viixiva HIS TOR Υ OF THUCYDIDES it? thetical explanatory clause, cf. V n o , ι πολύ δέ {autem) το Κρητικόν πέλα*γο$. Even before the Peloponnesian war was begun, the Co­ rinthian envoy at Sparta affirms that the Athenians cannot depend upon their seamen standing true to them, since their navy was manned with hired foreign seamen rather than with natives—ώνητη yap η Αθηναίων δύναμι,ς μάλλον ή οικεία (ΐ c 121). The statement of Nicias proves that this remark was to a certain extent well-founded (Grote). αυτοί εμπορευόμενοι, 'while trafficking on their own account'. Compare vi 31, 5. Hude prefers the vulgate αύτοΰ ibi, thinking αυτοί (Vat.) superfluous because of ύπϊρ σφων. 1. 2i. άνδράποδα Ύκκαρικά, 'slaves from Hyccara', which was a Sicanian town on the north coast of the island, at feud with Egesta—the inhabitants of which had been sold as slaves by Nicias (vi 62, 3, 4) in his expedition in the autumn of B.C. 415. 1. 22. w£p σφων, 'as substitutes for themselves'. Nicias evi­ dently lays the blame on the trierarchs for allowing such license to those under their command. See c. 14, 2,1. 8. την άκρφειαν του ναυτικού άφηρηνται, 'have robbed our marine of its strict discipline, precision', by the admixture of such strange elements. Cf. Plut. Them. c. 4, 4 την άκρίβειαν καϊ το καθαρον του πολιτεύ­ ματος 'έβλαψεν, Arrian An. I 2, 7 την ά. της διώξεως άφείλοντο. For the gen. of the person after άφαιρεΐσθαι^ c 58, 5· cf, c. 5, 3, i n c. 43, 1; CHAPTER XIV § 1. 1. τ. «τισ-ταμενοΐδ...γράφω δτι, 'you know as well as I who am writing to you, that' etc. 1. 2. βραχεία ακμή ττληρ. not 'the really efficient part of a ship's crew is but small', but rather, as Jowett and Herbst, 'the prime of a crew is short-lived'. The Scholiast gives the latter inter­ pretation—ού πολλφ χρόνω ακμάζει η ναυτική διίραμυ. 1. 3· ολίγοι των ναυτών...την είρεσίαν, 'it is only a few, a small fraction, of the sailors that set the ship in motion and keep the row­ ing steady, maintain the uniformity of the oar-stroke'. § 2. I.5. τούτων... άττορώτατον το* τ€ μή οίο*ν τ€ είναι ταύτα ΙμοΙ κωλυσ-αι.,.καΐ δτι ούδ*...2χομεν, 'the most hopeless part of all this business is the impossibility on the one hand for me—the commander- n8 NOTES ON THE vn xiv a in-chief—to prevent it, and on the other hand, the fact that we have not any means of getting supplementary recruits for our ships'. ταύτα refers to the subject of c. 13, 2, 3 ; see note to c. 8, 2. έπι— as in έπίπέμπεσθαι c. 7, 3, c. 15, ι, έπηρώτα c. 10, έπισκευάζειν c. r, 1. 1. 7. χαλεπαΐ.,.αρξαι, 'tempers like yours are not easy (for any one) to govern', the personal construction, as in c. 13, 5. F o r the sentiment, cp. Arist. P a c . 607 H€pLK\tys...Tas φύσει* ύμων δεδοικώς καΐ TOP αύτοδάξ τρόπον. 12 1. ί ο . ο sc. το έπιπληρώσασθαι, ras paus. 1. 11. αλλ* ανάγκη α φ ' <ον 2χοντ€δ ήλθομ€ν...*γίγν€<Γθαι, ' b u t , what we have in hand and our daily consumption must come from what we brought with u s ' , that is, we have no other store to draw upon for doing present duty (supplying our existing resources) and for repairing our losses, but the original stock which we brought here with us. So Prof. Jowett who thinks that the words τά 6ντα καϊ air. can hardly refer to men only, but must include men and stores. But see note to c. 43, 7 1. 50. I agree with Classen in thinking that the reference is only to the crews (πληρώματα), not to war supplies; the sense is, ' a s we must supply the losses from the troops brought with us, so must what remains suffice for the service without compensation for the losses'. T h e article is not repeated with άπαναλισκόμενα, participle does not form one notion with τά οντά. although this 1. 13. ξυμ,μαχοι: predicate, not attribute. αδύνατοι, ' a r e of insignificant strength', therefore not in a position to replace our lost hands. § 3 . 1. 14. ί-ν 2τι, 'only one thing m o r e ' , viz. the secession of the Italian cities, from which at present we draw our supplies. 1. 16. 4v ω «τμέν, c. 11, 1. O n the combination ορωντα.,.καί ύμων μτ) έπιβοηθούντων, cf. c. 30, 2 and see G. MT. § 876 ed. ma. 1. 17. irpos €K€ivovs χωρήσαι, ' t o go over to their side', c. 44, 3, I 18, 3, V c. 22, 2, c. 43, 2. διατΓ€7Γθλ€μ.ήσ€ται, debellation erit, impersonally, as in c. 25, 9. T r a n s l a t e : — ' t h e r e will be at once an end of the war, as far as they are concerned, without striking a blow by our being starved o u t ' (c. 11, 4). aurots may be taken either as dative of the agent, or of the person interested, or it may combine both ideas. νπ χν ι HISTORY OF THUCYDIDES ti9 § 4 . 1. 20. civ €Ϊχον...4,7Γΐ<Γτ^λλ€ΐν, potuissem scribere, si iucundis postponere utilia et vera voluissem (Poppo). I t is rather the p o t e n t i a l indicative, expressing a possibility without reference to any definite condition; see note to c. 55, 2. 1. 2 1 . μ4ντοι here takes the place of δε after / i ^ , a s a stronger particle of contrast. T h e ye emphasizes the single word χρησι­ μότερα. 1. 22. el 8€ί...βουλ€ύ<τασ-θαι, ' i f you are to have clear know­ ledge of our present circumstances, before you deliberate and settle what is to be done*. τά4νθάδ€=6ΐ> φ έσμέν 1. ι 6 . 1. 23. τάε cjnJcms, ingenia vestra, as 1. 8. 1. 25. άττ αυτών sc. των ηδίστων ων βούλεσθε άκούειν. όμοΐον, 'corresponding t o ' , 'of a piece with', i.e. of an equally pleasant kind. Cf. 11 54, 5 irepi του χρηστηρίου τα yiyv^eva γκαζόν όμοια είναι, CHAPTER XV § 1. 1. 1. « s Ιφ* < μ£ν ηλθομ€ν...,γ€γ€νημ€νων...2χ€τ€, ' b e of £ this mind that in respect of the object for which we originally came (i.e. to war with Syracuse alone) both your soldiers and their leaders have not proved themselves deserving of your censure*. For this use of the participle in the gen. absol. after verbs and expressions which do not take the circumstantial participle (without 3· § 2. 1. 13. dfjuo υμών ξυγγνώμηδ τυγχάνβΐν, ' I claim, think that I deserve to obtain, your indulgence'. 13 Cf. VI 87, 1. 1. 14. πολλά...€υ Ιποίησ-α: see Plut. Nic. c. 6, c. 9. 1. 15. μ.4λλ€Τ€ sc. πράσσειν, to be understood from πράσσετε. 1. ι 6 . ά μ α τ φ ήρι €v9vs = ro0 rjpos ευθύς αρχομένου, II c. 19, ι. Cf. c. 2, 1, c. 103, 1, i v 117, 1, v i 8, ι. μή h άναβολάδ, 'without procrastination'. T h e phrase occurs in H e r o d , v m 21 ούκ is άναβολας έποιοΰντο την άναχώρησιν, E u r . Heraclid. 270, H e l . 1297, Plutarch Demetr. c. 50. 1. 17. «S των ΐΓθλ€μίων...φθή<τονται: T h e change of construc­ tion after 6μως δέ from the participle to the finite verb, as in c. 13, 2, is probably due to the subdivision of the last clause into two. This will perhaps be more evident if we write down the sentence as it would appear without such change:—s αν άφίκωνται for '4ω$ άφίκοιντο after secondary tense; see G. MT. § 614 ed. ma. I. 5. i-w: I have, with nearly all edi­ tors except Classen, supplied καΐ εκατόν, which is omitted in the MSS. Twenty talents would have been only a month's pay for twenty ships (vi 8, 1). Diodorus Sic. (XIII 8) names 140 talents as the sum which he took. 1. 17. €7τιμ€λ€ΐα αυτών £σται, 'they will not be neglected' (Jowetl). CHAPTER XVII § 1. 1. 3. στρατιάν Ιιταγγ^λλων €S TOIJS ί-υμμάχουδ, milites indicens, irnperans, sociis, * sending notice to the allies that troops were required'. Cf. c. 18, 4, VIII 108, 4, i n 16, 3. So σίδηρον 7T€pLriyyeX\ov κατά roi)s ζυμμάχονς c. 18, 4. 1. 4. αύτόθεν, i.e. from Attica; cf. vi c. 21, 2, c. 22, c. 25, 2, c. 26, 2, c. 37, 1. 14 § 2. h 6. ττίρΐ τήν Πβλοπόννησ-ον, on the usual cruise (ireρίπ\ον$, I 107, 3, II 23, 2), in retaliation for the Peloponnesian invasion of Attica, which was first set on foot by Pericles. 1. 7. δττωδ φυλάσσουν μη8Ινα...ΐΓ€ραιοί5<Γθαι, 'that they might guard against any one's crossing over'. The infinitive with μή9 after verbs of c a u t i o n , has the same meaning as a clause with μη and the subj. or opt. G. MT. § 374 ed. ma. Cf. i n 23, ι έφύ\ασσον μηδέν α δι αύτων έπίβοηθέΐν, II 6g, 3 φνλακην €Ϊχ€ μήτ έκπλέίν.,.μηδένα. μήτ έσπΧέιν. "3. 1. ίο. ώδ, postquam. νπ χνϋ 4 HISTORY OF THUCYDIDES 123 1. 11. τα iv rfj Σικελία β€λτίω, ' t h e improved state of things in Sicily': understand 'όντα or yev4a0(u. Kriiger compares Eur. Hec. 423 dyyeWe πασών άθλιωτάτην έμέ. 1. 12. ονκ ακαιρον...τήν...ΐΓ€μψιν ττοιήσ-ασ-θαι for ούκ άκαιρων πέμψαι.; according to a very common periphrasis of ττοιέισθαι with a substantive in place of a corresponding simple verb in the active voice. T h e subst. πέμψι* is of very rare occurrence: it is found once in Herodotus, v u i 54, and several times in Dion Cassius. F o r the aor. inf. after νομί&ιν referring to the past, cf. 40, 2, VI 6 1 , 5. T h e mission referred to is that of Gylippus, VI 93, 2. 1. 13. ιτολλφ, dative of measure with comparative adverb, for which the ace. πολύ is sometimes used. Rutherford GS. § 170. 1. 14. ίπΈρρωντο, c. 7, 4, c. 2, 2. kv 6\κάσ·ι: the promi­ nence given to the word indicates that the use of m e r c h a n t v e s s e l s as transport-ships was peculiar. See c. 19, 3 with note. 1. 15. For the omission of cos before άποστελονντβς, cf. Π 18, ι προσβολας παρβσκενάζοντο ποιησόμβνοι. Observe that όπλίτας does duty as object to both participles. H u d e brackets πέμψοντες. 1. ι β . τω αΰτφ τρόπφ sc. kv όλκάσι. § 4 . 1. ι 8 . οτΓω5...ατΓθΤΓ€ΐράσ-ω<τι...κα1...κωλΰοΐ6ν: a similar combination of the subjunctive and optative after a past tense in a pure final clause is found in VI 96, 3 έξέκριναν 6irws...elev...Kal... Trapayiyvtovrai; cf. Ill 22, 8. T h e subjunctive, as Goodwin writes (MT· § 321 ed. ma.),'makes the language more v i v i d , by introducing more nearly the original form of thought. 1. 19. την ev TTJ Ναύπακτο» φυλακήν, the Athenian squadron stationed on guard at Naupactus, consisting usually of 20 ships (c. 19, 5, II c. 69, 1, c. 80, 4). N a u p a c t u s in Locri Ozolae on the N o r t h of the Corinthian gulf was the head quarters of the Athe­ nians in all their operations in Western Greece during the Peloponnesian war. They had established here a colony of Messenian exiles at the conclusion of the Third Messenian war when the final struggle of that people for freedom h a d ' b e e n suppressed, B.C. 455. τάδ όλκάδαδ αυτών, * their merchant vessels' which were to be used as transports. 1. 2 1 . diraCpeiv, ' t o put off', c. 19, 5, IV c. 26, 6, c. 46, 1. T h e converse is καταίρειν, ' t o put i n ' , c. 49, 2. «n-pos την σφ€Τ6ραν άντίταξιν.,.τήν φυλακην TTOIOVJUVOU i. q. φύλάττοντες TCLS vavs as 124 NOTES ON THE VII XV11 4 άντιτάξονται ' by having to keep watch against their opposing war­ ships', the triremes which they (i.e. the Corinthians, who are the subject of the main sentence) would oppose to them. <τφ€Τ€ραν sc. των Κορινθίων, used here, as in c. 18 1. 15, properly as indirect reflexive; we should have expected σφών for αυτών 1. 20. CHAPTER XVIII § 1. 1. 15 if. 1. ι. ·ϊΓαρ6<ΓΚ€υάξοντο 8e κα£: in continuation of c. 17 την €<τβολήν, * their (projected) invasion'. 1. 2. tfcrirgp τ€ ττρουδέδοκτο αΰτοΐδ καΐ...«/αγόντων: ' b o t h in pursuance of their own previous decision (vi 93, 1) and because the Syracusans and Corinthians kept urging them on (iv 24, 2, VI 6 1 , 1) ever since they heard of etc.' 1. 5. την άττο τών 'Αθηναίων βοηθίίαν (c. 42> *> π 86, 6). 4s τ η ν Σικ€λ£αν: we might have expected την « but cf. 1 18, ι μετά την των τυράννων κατάΚυσιν Ικ της Έλλάδοί, c 110, 5 τ&, κατά την μ^άλην στρατείαν.,.ές Αϊ-γυπτον. 1. 6. OTTOS δη, 'namely to the intent that e t c ' τών Αακεδαιμονίων is την 'Άττικην (Schol.)· Ισ-βολήδ, 1. 7· irpo * διδαξάντων Μεγαρέων (at the suggestion of the Μ.), IV 83, 3 έδίδασκον αΜν μη ύπβξελέΐν τφ ΤΙβρδΙκκα τα δβινά, Arist. Α ν . 55° διδάσκω μίαν ορνίθων πόλιν eTi'at. 1. 8. μη a W v a i , ' n o t to relax', ' t o carry on with vigour'. § 2 . 1. 10. ρώμη, animi robur, fiducia, ' c o n f i d e n c e ' : c. 42, 2, c. 6 3 , 4 ; IV 29, 3, VI 3 1 , 1. T h e converse is άρρωστία c. 47, 1. 1. 11. διπλούν, predicative. H e n c e we should have expected τον Τ6 προς σφας καϊ τόν προς ΈικέΚιώτας. 1. 12. €ύκαθαιρ€τωτφουδ, ' m o r e easily overthrown', (a rare word, not found elsewhere in T h u c ) , from καθαιρεΐν, ' t o pull down', 'destroy', III 13, 7, ν 14, 3, VI 83, 2 τόν βάρβαρον καθ€λόντ€ς άρχομεν. yn xviii 3 HISTORY OF THUCYDIDES 1. 15. τταρανόμημα, peccatum, in T h u c . delictum, 1. 16. μάλλον sc. η των Αθηναίων, see ιι 2, ι. 125 another άττα£ λβ-γόμενον 15 Is Π λ ά τ α ι α ν ιξλθον: 1. ΐ 7 · «ν σ-πονδαϊδ, 'during a truce', ' i n time of peace', n 2, 1. €ίρημ€νον, 'although it h a d been stipulated'. Cf. c. 77, 6, I 140, 2, ν c. 30, 1, c. 39, 3. Other instances of perfect passive participles, used impersonally, in the ace. absol. a r e : — b e S o y ^ a v o v I 125, 1, Ί*Ίραμμένον ν 56, 2. kv ταϊδ irporcpov ξυνθήκαΐδ: sc. Tats τριακοντούτεσι, I c. 115, 1, c. 140, 2 ; c. 145. 1. 18. δίκαδ διδόναι, ' t o submit their claims to a judicial de­ cision ', ' to offer satisfaction by n e g o t i a t i o n ' ; not to be confounded with δίκην δούναι which is always used of the defendant. Cf. 1 c. 28, 2 ; c. 140, D e m . Mid. § 14—15. αυτοί sc. ol Αακεδαιμόνιοι. 1. ig. €S δίκαδ προκαλουμένων: cf. I 34, 2 προκ\ηθέντ6$ κρίσιν; also 1 c. 78, 4, c. 145, IV c. 19, 1. is 1. 20. €IKOT(US, iure, mei'ito, c. 59, 2, I 37, ι ούκ εΐκότως ττοΧεμοΰνται, II 6ο, 7 ουΚ cut» βΐκότως νυν του ye άδικεΐν αίτίαν φεροίμην. 1. 2 ΐ . €ν€0υμοΰντο (not ' t o o k deeply to h e a r t ' , but), ' b e g a n seriously to consider i t ' as the result of their guilt. Cf. c. 50, 4. τ ή ν ir€pl ΓΕΰλον ξυμφοράν: cf. VI 89, 2 την έκ ΤΙύλου ξυμφοράν. F o r the allusion, see ι ν cc. 3—7, cc. 8—16, c. 23, c. 26 ff., c. 39 ff. 1. 22. €Ϊ Tts άλλη aiJTots Ιγένβτο, 'whatever other disaster had befallen t h e m ' . See crit. note. § 3 . 1. 23. Tats τριάκοντα ναυσ-ίν: see VI 105, 1 * Αθηναίοι 'Apyeiois τριάκοντα ναυσϊν έβοήθησαν (in the summer of B.C. 414), a'lirep τcis σπονδας φανερότατα r a s irpos Αακεδαιμονίους αύτοΐς £λυσαν. T h e Argives and their confederates were defeated by the Spartans in B.C. 418 at the battle of Mantinea. Ε π ι δ α ύ ρ ο υ , i.e. E p i d a u r u s L i m £ r a (not the mother town in Argolis, celebrated for its temple ©f Asklepios and its theatre, the recent excavations of which have thrown such new light upon various questions connected with the Greek stage). T h e colony was situated on the east coast of Laconia, north of Cape Malea. See c. 26, 2, ι ν 56, 2, v i 105, 2. 1. 24. Π ρ α σ ι ώ ν : P r a s i a e , TTJS Αακωνικ^ πδΧισμα επιθα·? Χάσσιον (ιι 56, 6), (mod. Tyro), was situated near the foot of Mt Thornax and was the farthest place of the Eleuthero-Lakones on this part of the coast. I t was taken and destroyed by the Athe- 126 NOTES ON THE vn xviii 3 nians in B.C. 430, the second year of the war, and again in the 17th year by the Athenians and Argives (vi 105, 2). H e n c e the joke in the Peace of Aristophanes (242 if.) Ιω ΙίρασιαΙ τρίς άθλιαι καΐ πεντάκις καϊ ποΧλοδεκάκις, Cos άπόλεΐσθε τήμερορ, where ' L e e k ' is to form part of W a r ' s olio or salmagundi. There is another ΙίρασιαΙ mentioned in VIII 95, 1, an Attic deme, which in the time of Pausanias (1 31, 2) had become a place of importance. 1. 24. IK Π ύ λ ο υ : c. 26, 3, c. 57, 8, c. 71, 7, c. 86, 3. 1. 25. Ιλησ-τβύοντο, 'they (the Lacedaemonians) were continu­ ally being plundered'. Cf. i v c . 2, 3 ελτιστεύορτο ύπό των h τ £ 6pei φνγάδων, c. 76, 5 \τ)στευομένης της 7 ^ , V c. 14* 3 ληστευομένη$ τψ χώρα* €κ της Τ1ύ\ου καϊ Κυθήρων. See crit. note. 1. 26. "yevoivro, iterative optative. των κατά τά$ σιτονδάδ αμφισβητουμένων, ' o f disputed points in the treaty', i.e. of B.C. 421. 1. 28. ΙιτιτρέπΈΐν {rem controversam (iv c. 54, 2 ; c. 83, 3), V 3 1 , 3 {Poppd). ' t h e n and not until t h e n ' . iudicio) permittere, I 28, 2, TOT6 δ η , turn demum, 1. 29. oircp καϊ σ-φισ-ι ττρότφον ήμάρτητο, 'which had been committed by themselves formerly': ήμάρτητο = παρ€Ρ€νόμητο. 1. 30. το αυτό, an emphatic repetition of τδ παρανόμημα, or it may be taken predicatively. ιτ€ρΐ€στάναι, ' h a d shifted round*, ' c h a n g e d ' . T h e usual meaning of the verb πβριίστασθαι is ' t o pass over into another shape or m a n n e r ' (1 c. 32, 4, c. 78, 1, c. 120, 5, i v 12, 3, v i 24, 2). § 4 . 1. 32. σίδηρον ιτ€ριήγγ€λλον κ α τ ά τούβ ξυμμάχουβ, ' t h e y sent round to their various allies to make a requisition of iron tools'. Cf. II 85, 3 vads TrepL'iiyyeWo.p κατά 7roXeis, V 17, 2 παρασκευή ΤΓΒρια^^^\\ομένη κατά πό\eιs Cos έπί τβιχισμδν : so έπα^έλλων VII c. 17, 1. For this meaning of σίδηρος { = σιδήρια \ίθουρ*γά II 4, 2), cf. IV 69, 2 irapeyapeTO δέ σίδηρος r e εκ τώρ 'Αθηνών ταχύ καϊ \ιθoυpyol καϊ ταλλα επιτήδεια, VI 88, 6 ταλλα is TOP περιτειχισμβν, πλινθία καϊ σίδηρον, ητοίμαζορ, Plut. Timol. c. 22, 2 έκήρυξε των Συρακοσίωρ TOP βουλδμερορ παράναι μετά σιδήρου καϊ συρεφάπτεσθαι κατασκαπτομένων των τυραννικών έρυμάτων. I n the passage before us, it is true, σίδηρον might also mean ' i r o n ' for building purposes, as for clamps; in that case ά λ λ α must mean 'besides'. VII xix i HISTORY OF T H U C Y D I D E S 127 1. 34. τον €ΐτιτ€ΐχισμόν sc. rrjs Αεκελείαϊ, VI 93, 2 rrj έπιτειχίσει της Αεκελείας προσεΐχον ήδη τον νουν. By έπιτειχισμδς (or έπιτείχισις) is meant the construction of a fortified position either in or close to an enemy's territory, to be used as a point cPappui, or basis for predatory and other operations against them. 1, 35· «v Tais όλκάσ-ιν, c. 17, 3 . about providing succour'. €ΐΓΐκουρίαν...€πόριζον, 'set 1. 37. ιτροσ·ηνάνκα|ον, 'compelled them thereto', i.e. to do the l i k e ; the infinitive [πορίζειν) being implied from the context, as is the case in all the remaining passages of T h u c . where it occurs, IV 87, 1, VI c. 88, 5, c, 9 1 , 4, V I I I 76, 6, except v i 72, 4 where it is followed by the dative, 777 αλλχι μελέτη προσανayκάζοντες 'forcing them to a strict drill also'. See Shilleto on I 53, 1. 1· 39· ξυν€γραψ«ν, conscripsit, implies the compilation and arrangement of the materials. Cf. I 1, ι, Π c. 70, 5, c. 103, 2, i l l 25, 2, IV 51, 2 etc. CHAPTER XIX § 1 . 1. ι . Ιττιγιγνομένου, 'succeeding', the usual word to ex- 1 6 press temporal succession of a long or short period. 1. 2. ιτρωτατα 8ή, ' a t the very earliest', 'earlier than ever be­ fore '. T h r e e of the best MSS have the form πρωΐτατα, as in c. 39, 1 all the best have πρωΐτερον or πρότερον, and in V I I I 101, 3 most read πρωΐτερον. But these are Ionic forms derived from the Ionic πρωΐ, the Attic form of which is πρφ (c. 78, 4, c. 79, 1, IV 6, 1). Stahl, Quaest. Gramm. p . 37 ed. 2. 1. 4. έατέβαλον: on this invasion see Diod. Sic. X I I I 9, 2. 1. 6. TTJS X^pftS, partitive gen. after τα περί τό πεδίον. irepl τ ό «ircSCov, ' i n and about the plain', i.e. the level country north of Athens, called πεδι,άς οχ μεσόγαια, which stretches westward and from Mt Parnes in a southerly direction to Mt Aegaleos, and is divided into the Eleusinian-Thriasian plain and the plain of Athens (τό Άθηναΐον πεδίον or το πεδίον proper). Cf. II c. 12, 2, c. 55, 1. 1. 7. &ιτ€ΐτα without δέ after πρώτον μέν, as often. κατά iroAeis SieXojwvoi το 2ργον* 'apportioning the work (of building) among the (confederate) cities'. Cf. II 78, ι περιετείχιζον την πάλιν κύκλω, διελόμενοί κατά πόλεις το χωρίον i.e. spatio inter singulas 128 NOTES ON THE vn xix ι civUates divisor ν c. 75, 5 διελόμ^ροί rty ITO\LV περιβτβίχιζον, c. 114, 1, IV 69, 2. I n i v n , 3 it is used without a case. F o r κ α τ ά distributive, cf. c. 8, 1, c. 64, 2. § 2 . 1. 9. D e c e l e i a stood near the entrance of the defile which leads on the eastern side of Mt Parnes, between it and Bril6ssus (11 23, 1), from the upper part of the plain of Athens to Oropus and Tanagra, about 15 miles north-east of Athens. T h e Lacedaemonians retained possession of it until the end of the war. T h e fortress was situated at such an elevation, that Agis in the 21st year of the war observed from thence the Athenian corn-ships entering the Peiraeus (Xen. Hell. I i 35). By means of this fortress they were enabled, instead of retreating out of Attica at the end of each summer, as they had done at the be­ ginning of the war, to maintain themselves all the winter in a position which gave them the facility of plundering a great part of Attica; at the same time that they prevented the Athenians from cultivating the surrounding lands and forced them to convey their supplies from Euboea by navigating round Cape Sunium instead of employing the direct road by land through the Oropia. L E A K E , the Demi of Attica, p. 18. 1. i r . τταραιτλήσ-ιον καΐ ου ττολλω irXeov, ' a like distance or rather not much further'. Cf. c. 12, 4, c. 48, 4, but see crit. note. I n reality it is much nearer, but perhaps Thucydides is reckoning from Oropus in the far off corner of Boeotia, from which ran the road through Deceleia to Athens, "most frequented by the Athenians (c. 28, 1, 11 23, 3). This is the more probable because Oropus itself was in the possession of Athens at this time. 1.12. eirl τω ireSCco, 'so as to command the plain', as a point from which to operate against it. So III 93, ι της 7roXews ταύτη? %WOLKLξομένη$...έν6μισαν έπϊ ΤΎ} Εύβοια μάλιστα καθίστασθαι—which the Schol. explains by κατά Έ1νβοία$} V 33» Γ» ν ι 1 27» 3 έπ€ίδη ή Α^κέ\eia...Trj χώρα έπφκεΐτο. r r s Xtopcts TOIS κρατίστοΐδ, ' t h e richest, most fertile, parts of the country', i.e. of the μεσόγαια between Thria, Acharnae, Cephissia and Oenoe. 1. 13. cs το κακουρ-yeiv, 'for the purpose of devastating t h e m ' . I see no good reason for striking out these words as a gloss on έπϊ τφ πεδίφ, as is done by Stahl after Kriigen 1. 14. 4ΐΓΐφανέ$: said of Epipolae (v-i 96, 2). ' T h e g a p in the hills, where D e c e l e i a stood, is plainly visible from Athens, though to see the fortress itself must have been very difficult, if not impos­ sible' (MS Letter from Greece ap. Arnold). VII xix 4 HISTORY OF^ THUCYDIDES § 3 . 1. 17. air&TTeXXov, ' w e r e busy despatching'. 1. 18. r a t s ό λ κ ά σ ι : cf. 1. 36. T h e dative in both cases is in­ strumental, attention being directed particularly to the unusual mode of transport. I n c. 7, 3 a n d c. 17, 3 we find h όλκάσι. τούδ oirXiras, those mentioned in c. 17, 1. 1. 19. των Ε ι λ ώ τ ω ν , t h e Helots or country serfs, t h e main body of whom were Messenian D o r i a n s : c. 26, 2, c. 58, 3 . 1. 20. ν€θδαμώδων: Brasidas ( i v 80, 5) introduced the custom of employing Helots on foreign military service, and νεοδαμώδεις was t h e name given to the new class of citizens, consisting of emancipated Helots, who came into existence after t h e com­ mencement of the Peloponnesian war. W e hear of them first in ν 34, 2 ; cf. V I I I 5, 1, Xen. H e l l . VI ν 28 Ζδοξε TOIS τέλεσι καΐ ττροειπύν TOIS Έΐΐλωσιν, εϊ TIS βούλοιτο δπλα λαμβάνειν καΐ els τάξιν τίθεσθαι, τά πιστά λαμβάνειν ώ$ ελευθέρους έσομένους όσοι συμπολεμήσαιεν. 4πιλ€ξάμ€νοι, placing among the hoplites. 1. 2 1 . 4s, 'amounting t o ' , ' n o t exceeding', as c. 30, 3, c. 32, 2. § 4 . 1. 24. cv Tots άτρωτοι, not omniu?n primi ' t h e very first of all', but inter primos ' i n t h e first p a r t y \ T h e phrase iv r o t s — where TO?S is for t h e demonstrative pronoun—is used indifferently before all genders and numbers. Cf. c. 27, 3, 1 6, 3 ev TOIS πρώτοι δέ 'Αθηναίοι τόν σίδηρον κατέθεντο, III 17, I iv rots πλεΐσται δη vr}es...eyivovTo. A c e . to c. 17, 4, twenty-five ships h a d already been despatched, though not to Sicily: see below § 5 1. 32. 1. 25. τ ή δ Λακωνικήβ, a partitive genitive, denoting a country or place with t h e name of a single point (του Ταινάρου) in it, as 1 i l l , 2 TT}S'Ακαρνανίας els ΟΙνιάδας έστράτευσαν. 4s το ττέλαγοβ άφεΐαταν sc. Tcts paOs, ' p u t off into t h e open s e a ' , not following the line of coast nor touching at Corcyra or the Italian coast, as it was usual for ships going out of the Corinthian gulf t o d o . Cf. Herod. VII 193, 13 εντεύθεν yap §με\\ον...ές το πέλayos άφ-ήσειν έπι τούτον δε τψ χώρψ Ονομα yiyove Άφέται. As to the form άφεΐσαν, see cr. n. 1. 28. προο-μισ-θωσάμ€νοι, ' whom they took into their pay be- 17 sides (7r/oos) their own force*. Cf. 11 3 3 , ι . Ά ρ κ ά δ ω ν , 'from the number of the Arcadians'. 1. 29. άρχοντα...irpoo-TcifjavTes άιτέιτίμψαν: this is t h e usual Thucydidean form of expression, the participle with finite verb. T. VII 9 NOTES 13° ON THE VII XIX 4 Cf. i l l 26, 1 (where edd. are unanimous in accepting ά ρ χ ο ν τ α , the conjectural emendation of H . Stephanus, for the vulgate έχοντα), v i 93, a, V I I I 23, 4. Observe that the καί before άρχοντα con­ nects it with 6ir\iTas; προστάξαντες stands by itself, ' w h e n they had appointed him to the command'. 1. 30. Σικυώνιοι: T h e S i c y o n i a n s , ever since the Lacedaemo­ nians had forced an oligarchical constitution upon them (v 81, 2 τα h Σικνώνι is OXiyovs μάλλον κατέστησαν) had with reluctance joined the Peloponnesian confederacy, hence they are spoken of as avayκαστοϊ στρατεύοντας in c. 58, 3. 1. 3 1 . όμοΰ TOIS Κορινθ£οι$, una cum Corinthiis. έπίν€το ομού τφ πη\φ. H A . § 772> c · § 5 . 1. 33· 1. 34. α ^ τ0 Cf. c. 84, 5 ^ X^HMWVOS ιτληρωθ€ϊσαι: see c. 17, 4 ; c. 31, 4. άνθώρμουν, 'were stationed opposite t o ' , 11 86, 3. 1. 35. Tats 4v τ η Ναυιτάκτφ, not the triremes, which were sent to watch the whole coast of the Peloponnese (c. 17, 2), but those which were regularly stationed at Naupactus. 1. 36. &o x T & ^€ Mo, c. 25, ι ai δε ένδεκα) out of the whole number of 80. See c. 37, 3. Gylippus marched out of the city by Epipolae, descended into the plain on the rear of the Athenian lines, crossed the Anapus and came upon Plemmyrium along the table land which extends from the sea to the fort and temple of Olympieium (Arnold). 1. 8. «κ του €Xa€is, but the Syracusans on board are implied, as in c. 25, 1: cf. I n o , 4 Tprfpecs—πλέονσαι, els Myvwrov Ζσχον—ούκ € Id arcs. IVTOS SC, του μβ-γάλου λιμένος. irepieirXcov, round the south point of the Nacros. 1. 11. άμφοτφωθ€ν, 'by sea and by land'. Cf. i n 26, 1 δπω$ oi 'Αθηναίοι άμφοτέρωθεν θορνβούμενοί ησσον—έπιβοηθήσωσιν, V ίο, 7 ζ^νέβη τφ άδοκήτω...άμφοτέρωθ€ν τους 'Αθηναίους θορυβηθήναι-, not, as Freeman, On both sides of the fleet'. § 2. 1. 13. άντιττληρώ<Γαντ€8, 'on their part manning', as a c o u n t e r - m o v e m e n t to that of the Syracusans, c. 21, 5. Tats μ€ν, one division of the whole number, hence the article, G. Gr,2 § 948. Cf. 1. 8. 1. 15. Tais...en,iXo£ir 2. 1. 4· φθάν€ΐ, before they had time to arm themselves for re­ sistance. 1. 6. πρώτον, predicate adjective as in 1. 9. Cf. VI 66, 3 τρω­ τοί oi Ιππφ.,.προσββοήθησαν, 'έπβιτα bk ϋστβρον καί τό rre^bv άπαν ξυνελέΎη. Classen observes that the decisive success is announced first briefly, while the details and results are given subsequently 1. 8 και έκ μέν and 1. 13 έπβιδη δέ, τ6 μ€γισ-τον...τά έλάσ-σ-ω δύο: c 4> 5· VII xxiii 3 HISTORY OF THUCYDIDES 1. 7. ύ·π·ομ,€ΐνάντων, c. 43, 5 ; c. 81, 3. those of the two smaller forts. 137 των φυλάκων sc. 1. 8. ληφθέν: G. MT. § 884 ed. ma. § 2. 1. 9. του πρώτου άλόντοε: for the position of the predi­ cate adjective between the article and participle cf. c. 13, 2 ol ά^αγκαστοϊ έσβάντες. χαλ€πώ$...€ξ€κομ.(ζοντο, 'were with difficulty trying to get away to the land camp', i.e. the main station of the Athenian army near the double wall at the other side of the Great Harbour, or, perhaps, the naval station in front of the fortified lines of their land-force. See c. 4, 5; c. 8, 3 ; c. 53, 1. 1. 10. Is τά πλοία... κατέφυγον, 'succeeded in taking refuge on 20 the vessels', viz. those that lay at anchor under shelter of the forts at Plemmyrium, c. 4, 5. 1. 11. των γάρ...4ιτ€διώκοντο is added in explanation of χα· Xe7rcDs. 1. 12. κρατούντων κτ€.: because the Syracusans had the advan­ tage against the Athenian ships, so that they could spare a trireme for the pursuit of the men of the garrison fleeing from the largest fort (Classen), 1. 13. 4τΓ€ΐδη τά 8ύο Τ€ΐχ£ο*μ.ατα ήλ(σ-Κ€το κτ4« 'from the time when the two (remaining) forts were being taken' (1. 7; see also note to c. 22 1. 8), the Syracusans also (or 'in their turn') were, as it happened, just then getting the worst of it; and so the (Athenian) fugitives out of them (sc. των τειχι,σμάτων) escaped with greater ease along the coast' (or, as Jowett, 'got past them'). How this change of the position came about, is told in the two next sections. 1. 15. οι !ξ αυτών φ€ΰγοντ€β: the participle is to be taken attributively rather than circumstantially, as if for ol h αυτοί* φεύyovres e£ αυτών. Cp. c. 25, 26. ·π·αρ4ιτλ€υσ-αν, 'sailed past'. § 3 . 1. 17. at irpo του σ-τοματοδ viJ€s ναυμαχουσπι, ' the ships that (had come round by Ortygia out of the arsenal in the small harbour, c. 22, 1, 13, and) were fighting outside the mouth of the Great Harbour'. For the position of the attributive participle after the noun, by which it possibly gains in emphasis, cf. c. 32, 1, c. 50, I, III 56, ι κατά τόν πασι νόμον καθεστώτα, V ν ι TOCS έκ ~Νί€σσήνη$ έποικοι* έκπεπτωκόσιν. This position is not possible except where there are other attributes as well as the participle. 138 NOTES ON THE vn xxiii 3 1. 18. ovSevl κόσμω, 'without any order'; dative of manner. Cf. c. 40, 3 ; c. 84, 3, π 52, 2, π ι 108, 3. 1. 19. ταραχθ€Ϊ<ται «ircpl άλλήλας, 'falling foul of one another'. Cf. c. 36, 6; c. 67, 2; c. 84, 4. irape'Socrav τήν νίκην «rots 'Αθηναίοι^ 'played away their victory into the hands of the Athe­ nians, for they (the Athenians) put to flight not only these (ships) but (the others also) by which they were in the first instance on the point of being beaten inside the (Great) Harbour'. 1. 20. #τρ€ψαν sc. oi 'Αθηναίοι. Cf. c. 25, 4, 1. 20. § 4. 1. 23. ·πτλήν οσ*ον, i.e. πλην 6σοι> ανθρώπων ην, nisi quan­ tum erat hominum, 'except all the men that there were' in three ships, or it may be taken adverbially, 'except as far as the men from three vessels were concerned', 'except only'. The έκ is used proleptically with reference to έζώγρησαν. 1. 24. των <τφ€Τ€ρων, suarum (navium), as if rpeU vavs απώ­ λεσαν followed; cf. c. 12, 5. 1. 26. τφ νη<τιδ£ω: either the modern Isola del Castelluccio or the rock San Marciano. 1. 27. Is τό «αυτών στρατόικδον: as 1. 9. CHAPTER XXIV § I . 1. ι. μ£ν, 'although'. 1. 2. ουτωδ lircupcfyecrav, ita rem gesserant, 'had fared thus', i.e. unsuccessfully. So c. 67, ι ως των ye παρόντων ουκ civ πράξανTcs χβΐρον, c. 7i } i> II 4> 7 where also the phrase is used euphe­ mistically of an unfavourable issue. See Shilleto on Thuc. 11 4, 8. 1. 3. Τ€ίχη: c. 22, 1. 1. 4. αυτών, 'because of them', sc. των εχομένων ταχέων. Cf. > c. 41, 4 τρόπαια αμφοτέρων των ναυμαχιών έστησαν, c 54» r> VI 98, 4 τρόπαιον της Ιππομαχία* 'έστησαν. 1. 6. κατέβαλον, 'they demolished'. Cf. 1 58, 2, ν c. 11, ι ; c. 83, 2. €irurK€vaVavT€S, c. ι, ι. § 2 . 1. 8. cv των τ€ΐχών T{J αλώσει. For the insertion of the gen. between the preposition and its case, cf. c. 55, 2; c. 71, 3 ; 1 c 9, 4; c. 32, 2; i n 23, 5; ν 53; vi 34, 9. 1. 9. χρήματα applies to all kinds of property, material and stores. See n. to c. 49, 1, and cp. VI 97, 5 where the fort at Lab-. v n x x i v s HISTORY OF T H U C Y D I D E S 13.9 dalum is said to be erected βπως €ίη αύτοΐς.. .τοις τε σκεύεσι καϊ τοις χρ-ήμασιν αποθήκη. Cf. Plut. Nic. c. 20, ι et\e rb Πλημμύρων, h φ σκευών τριηρικων καϊ χρημάτων πολλών υποκειμένων έκράτησε πάντων. 1. ί ο . τ α ξυμτταντα, ' i n a l l ' , ' a l l told'. Cf. c. 30, 2 ; c. 82, 3. cSorop: Bekker, Classen and S t a h l 1 read with Β are (c. 44, 5), quippe, to be taken with χρωμένων, not with ταμιείφ. See G. ' MT. § 863. 1. 11. χρωμένων ταμΐ€ΐω: c. 4, 5. and ένην. τοϊ$ T€C\€O-I depends upon b o t h 1. 12. ιτολλά μ4ν...ιτολλά Si: an instance of anaphora, or repe­ tition of adjective with μέν and δέ. Cf. c. 67, 2. T h e μέν is often omitted, when δε και follows instead of δέ; see my note to Xen. Cyr. v i i i 33. €μττόρων: c. 1 3 , 1 . 16. T h e article is omitted, because they are a loosely associated and irregular private body, not, like the trierarchs, a regular and well defined public class. 1. 13. Iirel καϊ, 'for in fact', c. 67, 3. 1. 14. έγκατδληφθη sc. iv τοις 1. ΐ 5 · 21 άν€ΐλκ·υ<τμ€ναι, ' s t r a n d e d ' : c. ι, 3 ; c. 12, 4. τείχεσιν. § 3 . μ€γιστον, neuter adjective as cognate accusative, (not adverbial); H A . § 716 b , G. § 159 N o t e 2. Cf. c. 44, 6 ; ν 82, 5 μέγιστον αν σφας ώφελήσειν. TC, sums u p and concludes (not correlative to the following και), ' a n d so it came to pass t h a t ' . Cf. c. 11, 4 ; c. 28, 1. cv rots πρώτον: see n. to c. 19, 4. 1. 16. τ 8 <ττράτ€υμα rb τ ω ν ' Α θ η ν α ί ω ν : Stahl and Classen omit the second τό with Β and Μ : but H u d e retains it comparing V I I I 50, 5. 1. 17. οί άτιτλοι: the article because the subject is referred to in c. 13, 1. Stahl and Classen follow Β in omitting it. 1. 18. TTJS Ιτταγωγήβ των 4πιτηδ€ίων==τώι> επιτηδείων των eVa/yoαένων. Cf. V 82, 5 #TO>S, ην της γης εϊργωνται, η κατά θάλασσαν σφας...επαγωγή των επιτηδείων ώφελη. 1. 19. αυτόθι i.q. αύτοϋ, ibi, c. 35» 6 ; c. 4 3 ' 3 5 c. 49, ι. Ικώλυον sc. TOVS εϊσπλονς της επαγωγής των επιτηδείων. δια μάχη$ έγίγνοντο, 'were managed (only) by a struggle' with the Syracusan guardships. C p . II c. 11, 3 έλθεΐν ημΐν διά μάχης. *S TC* ά λ λ α : c 7, 4i 1. 2θ. αί «τκομιδαί: c 4» 4· 1. 2ΐ. ΊΓαρ«τχ€: the subject is η του Ιίλημμυρίου c · 77» 2 · ληψις 1, ι6. NOTES i4o ON THE VII XXV ι CHAPTER XXV § 1. 1. 2. *Αγ(χ0αρχον: c. 70, 1. 1. 4. φχ€το...άγουσα, ' w e n t oft* without delay with the envoys aboard'. (G. MT. § 843 ed. ma.) See note t o e . 7, 2 and c. 12, 1, c. 46, 1. 1. 5. οϊΐΓ€ρ...φράσΌυ(Γΐ: the relative cannot be used to express a purpose except with the future indicative, as in i n c. 16, 3 ναυτικον παρ€σκ€ύαξον ο τι πέμψουσιν, Xen. Cyr. IV i 21 σύμπεμψόν τίνα ds epet. I t is the Greek equivalent to the Latin relative with subjunctive. τ α <τφ€Τ€ρα, 'their position', explained by OTL κτέ. 1. 6. kv kXiric-iv dtri: elvai άναλαβύν ΊΚίσαιαν. 1. 8. 1. 52, c. 46, IV 70, 2 λέγων έν έλπίδι αί ίνδβκα, ' t h e (remaining) eleven': see note to c. 22, 1. 1. 9. Ί τ α λ ί α ν is used by Thuc. of a part only of the peninsula, viz. that south of the river Laos and Metapontum. See note to c. 33, 4. Campania belonged to Opicia, v i 4, 5. 1. 10. χ ρ η μ ά τ ω ν : c. 24, 2. § 2 . 1. ro. τών πλοίων « π - τ υ χ ο ΰ σ α ι : the gen. after ϊπιτνγχάν€ΐν ' t o fall in w i t h ' is found again in ill 3, 5 όλκάδος αναγόμε­ νης επιτυχών: elsewhere T h u c . uses the dat. Cf. X e n . Oecon. II 3, XII 20, Arist. Plut. 245. 1. 12. 4v T{) Καυλωνιάτιδι, ' i n the district of K a u l o n i a ' , a town founded from Crotona, which like Terina raised itself to the position of an independent Άχαιων κτίσμα (Strab. v i i 10 p . 261). I t was situated north of Locri Epizephyrii at the mouth of the river Sagra. Its proximity to the forest of Sila accounts for the ξύλα vavir^y-rj' σ*μα, 'ship-timber', lying there ready for use. Cp. VI 90, 3. § 3 . 1. 14. μία των όλκάδων: see c. 19, 3, 4. 1. 15. Θ6σιτΐ€ων: the hoplites from T h e s p i a e are reckoned with those of Boeotia, c. 19, 3 . § 4 . 1. 16. άναλαβοντ€δ avTOvs...eTrl Tas vavs, 'taking them on b o a r d ' , in order that they might convey them more safely to Syracuse. 1. 17. φνλά|αντ€5 α-uTovs, τηρήσαντ€$ αύτοί$ {Schol.). Gf. c. 4, 7 ; c . 83, 4. καιρόν ets το έπιθϊσθαι ι χχνs HISTORY OF T H U C Y D I D E S 141- 1. 18. avTovs sc. robs "Σινρακοσίους. irpos rots Mcyapois sc· TOLS 'Ύβλαίοι$, M e g a r a H y b l a e a , a Dorian colony north-west of Syracuse (vi c. 4, i ; c. 49, 4 ; c. 75, 1; c, 94, 1; c. 97, 5). 1. 19. avTots άνδράσ-ι, 'crew and all'; dative of a c c o m p a n i ­ m e n t , H A . § 774 a, G. § 188, 5. Cf. c. 4 1 , 3, π 90, 6, i v 14, τ, VIII 1 0 2 , Ι · 1. 20. ουκ Ιδυντ(θησ-αν sc. λαμβάνειν. T h e subject is suddenly changed with anoipeuyovaiv sc, ai dX\ai vrjes. Cf. c. 44, 5 ; c. 5 9 , 2 . § 5 . 1. 22. ircpl των σταυρών, 'about (not in local sense, but 'for the possession o f ) the stockade'. άκροβολισμό^, velitatio, 'skirmishing', found only here in the singular and 1. 43 in the plural. 1. 23. 4v τω λιμάνι: c. 3, 5. Thucydides could not have meant 22 the smaller harbour, into which the Athenians never entered, and of which doubtless the interior part was a closed port (κλειστός Xtμήν) (Leake). ττρο των τταλαιων ν€ω<τοίκων κατ€ττη|αν, ' h a d driven down in front of their old ship-houses'. W e learn from v i c. 7 5 , 1 that in the winter of B.C. 415/4 the Syracusans TTJV θαΚασσαν προεσταύρωσαν ττανταχ^ y αποβάσεις ήσαν. T h e arsenal proper (νεώριον), which contained all that was necessary for the repair and equipment of their war-ships, was in the.lesser port (c. 22, 1. 9), the νεώσοικοι or ' d o c k s under cover', in which ships were built, laid up and repaired, were a consti­ tuent part of the νεώριον. F r o m the mention of these παλαιοί νεώσοικοι it would seem that the arsenal was originally in the Great Harbour, and that the greatest part of the warehouses and workshops were at a later period removed to the small har­ bour, without however destroying the ship-houses, which still continued to be used. There must have been ve· άν€ΐλκον, 'hoisted', 'pulled up"'. See crit. η . T h e simple verb is twice found with άναδούμενος, I 50, ι τα σκάφη ούχ εϊλκον άναδούμενοι των νέων as καταδύσειαν, II 90? 6 των νέων Tivas άναδούμενοι εΐλκον κενάς· 1. 32. οι δ' έκ TTJS όλκάδο$ άντέβαλλον, proleptically for oi έν τη όλκάδι άντέβαλλον έκ της όλκάδος. A common attraction or con­ struct™ praegnans, as it is called, cf. c. 23, 2 ; c. 26, 3 ; c. 63, 1, and H A . § 788 a. T&OS, adv. ' finally'. 1, 33. dvetXov, ' succeeded in destroying'. § 7 . 1. 34. χαλ€ΐτωτάτη, 'most troublesome', without the arti­ cle, as άπορώτατον c. 14, 2, δεινότατον II 51, 2. Cf. i l l 26, 3 η εσβολη αϋτη χαλεπωτάτη έ'^ένετο TOIS Άθηναίοις. TTJS σταυρώ<Γ€ως ή κρύφιοδ, ' t h a t part of the stockade which was out o' sight'. A good instance of the assimilation of the adjective to t t gender of its dependent partitive genitive, cf. c. 3, 4, 1 c. 2, 3 TTJS 7?, νπ χχν 9 HISTORY OF THUCYDIDES η άριστη, c. 5, 1 τόν πλείστον του βίου, c. 30, 3 του χρόνου τόν πλεί­ στον, VI ι ο 5 , ι τής yrjs τήν πολλήν, Plutarch Timol. c. 18, ι τψ δυνάμεως τήν μαχιμωτάτην. ήσαν... οΰβ = ένίους: %στιν οϋς would be correct but for the intervention of των σταυρών. 1. 35- ύ ι κ ρ ί χ ο ν τ α ε TTJS θαλάσσηδ, 'appearing above the sur­ face of the water'. Cf. i l l 23, 5, X e n . Cyr. ν π ν 8 {ποταμός έχων) βάθος ως ούδ* αν δύο άνδρες, δ 'έτερος έπϊ του ετέρου έστηκώς, του ύδα­ τος ύπερέχοιεν, A n a b . Ill 5» 7 ° ποταμός τοσούτος τό βάθος ώς μηδέ τά δόρατα υπερέχει ν...πειρωμένοις του βάθους. 1. 36. μ/ή ού ττροϊδών Tis.-.τήν ναΰν, ne quis, re non praevisa, navem (in vallum) ut in scopulum impingeret (Valla). ?ρμα is ' a sunken rock', ' r e e f . 1. 38. κολυμβητα£: IV 26, 8 (during the blockade of Sphacteria) έσένεον δέ καΐ κατά τόν λιμένα κολυμβηταϊ ϋφυδροι. Ι. 39- μιοτθοΰ, 'for p a y ' ; H A . § 746» G. § 178. ν 6, 2, Xen. Cyr. v i ii 37, Hier. c. 6, 10. I . 4 0 . Ισταύρωσαν, σταυρούς κατέπηξαν (SchoL). § 8. 1. 4 1 . οΐον €iKos = cos εΙκός ην. Cf. IV 124, 4, See Addenda. Cf. οία είκός Π 54» 2 · 1. 43· irefpais, 'stratagems'. Cf. Ill 20, ι έση^ησαμένου πεΐ ρ αν αύτοΐς, IV *j6, 5 el κατορθοϊτο η π ει ρ α. τψ § 9 . 1. 45· T< * s ιπ>λ€ΐ$ sc. των Σικελιωτών, α $2, ι, VI ι η, 2. 1. 46. Κορινθίων: partitive genitive. T h e result of their mis­ sion is given in c. 32. 1. 47. ayyeMovTas: see, n. t o e . 3, 1. T h e future participles δηλώσοντας—άξιώσοντας are not co-ordinate with the present part., but form subordinate explanatory clauses. 1. 51. ονδ, item. 1. 52. 4v eXirCouv dροΰντο, passive, as in c. 82, 1. § 3 . 1. 12. e n - ί φ ν : cf. c. 50, 3, II c. 52, 1, c. 58, 2, IV 6, 1. T h e subject is the sentence οτι.,.εΐχον. 1. 13. δυο, the Deceleian and the Sicilian. 1. 14. ήν for olav. και, ' a n d y e t ' . 1. 15. ήττ£σ·τησ-€ν civ: the protasis is άκούσα$ = €ί ήκουσ€. 1. ι ό . το *y€ κτλ. T h e three infinitives άπο στ ήν a t — α ν τ ι ι τ ο λιορκβΐν—ποι,η σαι—are in explanatory apposition with τοιαύτην ην ήπίστησβν άν TLS άκουσας. αυτούδ, ipsos. ττολιορκουμένους, the circumstantial participle, expressive of l i m i t a t i o n , qualified by the adjunct μηδ' cos, ne sic quidem, ' n o t even thus'. See G. MT. § 856 ed. ma. T h e demonstrative adverb as, corresponding to the interrogative 7rcDs, is not used except in the particular phrases καΐ ώ'$, ούδ' cos and μηδ' ώς in Attic prose. 1. 19. τω αύτφ τρόττφ sc, έπίΤ€(,χισμφ. siege in their t u r n ' . Cf. c. 22, 2. άντιττολιορκείν, ' b e ­ 1. 20. αυτήν γ€ καθ* αυτήν, i. e. as a mere city compared with Athens as a mere city, without Attica or her empire. Plutarch also (Nic. c. 17, 2) speaks of Syracuse as πόλίν' Αθηνών ούκ έλάττονα, in reference to its extent. Others understand the meaning to be that Syracuse, if taken alone, was quite a match for Athens also taken alone. If allies were taken into account on both sides, Athens would then no doubt be stronger. Others 'without reckoning Sparta at all', i.e. even if she were not herself in difficulties. vnxxviii 4 HISTORY OF THUCYDIDES τον ιταράλογον τοσούτον ΐΓθΐήσαι...<5>ο~τ€...'ΐΓροσ·αν€ίλοντο, 'that the impression they created should be so out of proportion to the uni­ versal expectation of the Greeks—inasmuch as (όσον), at the begin­ ning of the war, some thought they would bear up against it one year, others two, others three at the most, if the Peloponnesians invaded their country—that in the seventeenth year after the first invasion they should actually go to Sicily...and undertake in addi­ tion another war e t c ' Linwood compares the construction of the words τόν παρά\ο*γον..,οσον ένόμι,ξΌν with II 65, 11 ού τοσούτον γνώμης αμάρτημα ην προς οΰ$ €πτ)€σαν, όσον κτέ., V 31* 6 στρατιάς προς οϋς βπγβσαν υπερβολή. Classen is of opinion that όσον and ώστε are both to be taken in close connexion with τοσούτον, the measure of the great surprise frapaXoyos), as he supposes, consisting not so much in the universal anticipation as in the contrast of it with the actual result. Herbst agrees with my explanation. 1. 23. €νιαυτόν, One year', 'only a year'. The Greeks often omit the numeral one in designations of time. So 1 c. 109, 4 ένι,αντόν καϊ & μήνας, c. 137, 4 ένι,αντόν έπισχών, IV n 8 , 10 f αί σπονδαϊ ένιαντόν έσονται,. So ημέρα, νύξ for ημέρα μία, νυξ μία, Ι Ι37> 2 ημέραν καϊ νύκτα, IV 6g, 3 ^0' ημέραν, in unum diem: μήν for ets μήν Xen. Cyr. VII 5, 3. τριών Ιτών depends upon πλείω; oi)5e£s is in limiting apposition to ol δέ, 'of others none'. 1. 24. ireptokmv i.q. άνθέζειν, 'would hold out', 'carry on'. In this sense it occurs elsewhere only in late Greek, as Appian B. C. 11 149, 153, Dion Cass, LXI it, 2. αύτοΰβ sc. τους Αθηναίους. 1. Ί6. 4πτακαιδ€Κστω for έβδόμφ καϊ δβκάτω, IV ιοί, ι. την ιτρώτην Ισ-βολήν: in the spring of B.C. 431, II 19, 1. 1. 27. τ€τρυχωμ,€νοι: cf. IV 6o, 2. κατά πάντα = πάντως. 1. 28. irpoo-aveCXovTO, insuper suscipiebant. Cf. VI ι, ι ού πόλλφ TLVL ύποδεέστβρον πόλβμον άνηρουντο. § 4 . 1. 29. δι' a, 'for all these reasons and because of the great damage which was being then wrought by Deceleia and the other expenses also', which fell so heavily on them, they became crippled in their resources'. βλατττοΰση8: see G. MT? § 829b. 1. 30. καϊ τών...*ΐΓροσ-τΓΐΐΓΤ<$ντων, gen. abs., not dependent on w o . Cf. c. 27, 5 for a similar variation of construction, i5o 26 NOTES ON THE vn xxviii 4 1. 32· τ η ν βίκοοττην, the (ad valorem) duty of five per cent, on all imports and exports by sea to or from any port within the Athenian dominions. ' T h i s d u t y ' says Boeckh ' w a s collected not at the Peiraeus but at the harbours of the subject states'. T h e €ίκοστοXoyos κακοδαίμωρ in the Frogs of Aristophanes (1. 363), acted B.C. 405, was not, according to the same authority, a collector of this εΙκοστή, but of some special impost confined to Aegina and perhaps the neighbouring islands. 1. 34. του φόρου: ι 96, 2, 11 13, 3, ν ι 8 , 5. 1. 35. «τέθβσ-αν: see crit. n. 1. 36. T h e protasis to d ν προσιέναι el τοντο yivoLTO. Cf. c. 8, 2. is contained in οϋτω — 1. 37. ojJLoCcos καΐ "irpCv, ' i n like degree as before'. δμοίφ /cat πρίρ VI c. I I , 2; c. 21, 2, h ϊσφ και c. 60, 6. So h τφ 1. 38. a t 8fc ττρόσοδοι άττώλλυντο (c. 27, 3), cum reditus perirenty co-ordinate with at μέν δ<χπάραι....κα,θέστασα,ν, not with 6 πόλεμος ην, as Classen understands, because in that case we should expect a comparative adj. to express the degree. CHAPTER XXIX [Continuation of c. 27, 2] § 1. 1. 1. oSv, resumptive after the long digression from c. 27, 2 to c. 28. Cf. c. 6 1. 1 1 ; c. 42, 3 . TOVS τω Δημ,οσ-θ^ν€ΐ ύσ-τ€ρηtravTas, ' w h o came too late for Demosthenes', i.e. too late to be of any use to him. H a d it been του Αημοσθένονς, the sense would have been different, ' t h a t they missed D e m o s t h e n e s ' i.e. that they came to Athens after he was gone. See Phrynichus Lobeck, p . 237 (Arnold). 1. 4. οίττέπΈμιτον: c. 20, 2. δαιτανάν sc. els τους θρ$κας. 1. 5. κομίο-cu, *to conduct'. Cf. c. 32, 2, π 85, 5, i v 78, 4, v i n 26, 1. D i i t r e p h e s is mentioned again in v i n 64, 2, as having been sent by the Athenians to Thasos to restore the oligarchy (TOP δημορ καταλνσαή. 1. 6. €lirovT€S, 'giving him instructions': elireXp and the active voice of \iyeip take the infinitive chiefly as verbs of c o m m a n c j - νπ xxix 3 HISTORY OF THUCYDIDES 151 i n g : cases of €Ϊπον with the infinitive of indirect discourse are always exceptional. G. MT. % 753, 3 ed. ma. 1. 8. dV αυτών, 'by means of them', making use of them as his instrument for the purpose, c. 67, 3 ; a frequent meaning of the preposition in late Greek, with things, however, more commonly than with persons. § 2. 1. 8. «s τήν Ταναγραίαν, 'into the country about Tanagra\ The city itself was situated on an eminence at a distance from the sea. After a hasty (διά τάχους) raid they embarked again and crossed to Chalcis in Euboea and then recrossing took Mycalessus by surprise. Observe that the re after is answers to the second κ a I. 1. 10. €Κ Χαλκίδος TTJS Ευβοίας: c. 57, 4. For the partitive genitive, see n. to c. 19, 4. 1. 11. αφ* €o-ir£pas, de vespera, 'after evening began'; so άπο πρώτου ΰπνου c. 43, 2. 1. 12. Μυκαλησ-σ-όν: a town on the road leading from Thebes to Aulis, mentioned in Horn. //. 11 498. , § 3 . 1. 13. λαθών, 'secretly', G. ΜΓ. § 837 ed. ma. irpos τω Έρμαίω, 'near the sanctuary of Hermes'. Liv. xxv 50, 9 ad Hermaeum% qua transitus ex Boeotia in Euboeam insulam est> (Menippus) castra habebat, 1. 15. Ίτροσ-4κ€ΐτο: c. 18, 1. 1. 17. άΐΓροσ"δοκητοΐδ = οι5 προσδοκωσι, 'not expecting', as in C. 39, 2, II c. 33, 3 Ζπιθβμένων απροσδόκητοι* των Κρανίων, c. 93» 4 απροσδόκητοι* έπιπεσόντες, IV 72, 2, VI 6$, ι απροσδόκητοι ήσαν...ω* ήδη μαχούμενοι. The infinitive with μή is used after verbs of hoping, p r o m i s i n g etc. Cf. Ill 52, 3 ελπίδα ουδέ τήν έλαχίστην έίχον μή ποτε...ναΰ$ is ΊωνΙαν παραβαλεΐν, and see G. ΜΤ. § 685 ed. ma. αν...€ΤΓΐθ&Γθαι: equivalent to the potential opta­ tive άϊ* έπιθοΐντό of direct discourse. G. MT, § 207 ed. ma. 1. 18. τοσούτον έτταναβάντα, 'coming so far inland to their city'. The distance was about four miles. 1. 19. aV0€voiis: c. 4, 2. &ττιν 13, 'in some parts', c. 70, 6. 1. 20. βραχεος ωκοδομημ,^νου, 'having been built (too) low', βραχέος being predicative. Cf. c. 4, 3, II 75, 6 ypeTO το ϋψοί του τείχους μέγα. 152 NOTES ON THE VII XXIX 4 § 4 . 1. 23. τούδ άνθρώιτουδ, ' t h e inhabitants'. Pausan. 1 23, 3 Μυκαλησσίων ού μόνον τό μάχιμον ol θρςί/ces, άλλα καΐ yvvaiKas έφβ· νβυσαν καϊ παΐδας. 27 1. 24· ττάντα5...δτω Ιντύχοΐ€ν: for collective όστις, referring to plural antecedent, v. G. Gr.2 § 1021 [c). T h e optative, as also ttoiev 1. 27, because in a conditional general relative clause. 1. 27. όμοια TOIS μ ά λ ι σ τ α sc. φονικοί ς οΰσι, perinde atque ii qui maxime caedis avidi sunt. Cf. I 25, 4 χρημάτων δυνάμ€ΐ 6VT€S...όμοΐα τοις 'Ελλήνων πλονσιωτάτοις for πλούσιοι όμοια TOIS μάλιστα των Ελλήνων, Plutarch T h e m . c. 31» 2 τιμώμενος όμοΐα ΐίβρσών τοΐς άρίστοι$. L 28. του βαρβαρικού — των βαρβάρων; see n. to c. 43» 7* cv φ αν, 'whensoever and wheresoever'; VI 92, 4. θαρσησ"η, 'they become emboldened', ' h a v e nothing to fear 1 , conjunctive of the i n g r e s s i v e aorist. § 6. 1. 29. κα£, 'and s o ' , 'accordingly', introducing an instance of a general observation. 1. 30. tSea ιτασα, 'every (possible) form'. Cf. i n c. 8 1 , 5 ; c. 83, 1 ; c 98, 3 ; c. 112, 7. κα£, ' a n d in particular'. 1. 32. €0-€ληλυθότ€5 sc. is αυτό. Cf. c. 8 1 , 4. 1· 33* ξυμφορά τή πόλ€ΐιτάση οΰδ€μιάδ ήσσ-ων...4ΐΓΐΐΓ€σ-€ν αΰτη, ' this (massacre of the children) was as great a blow as ever fell upon a whole city and with a suddenness and barbarity that beat any on record'. Stahl, after Dobree and Heilmann, brackets μάλλον ετέρας, as a mere adscript in explanation of ουδεμίας ησσον, the reading of a few MSS. Some go further, and, while retaining the reading of the majority of MSS. ουδεμίας ήσσων, would omit αδόκητος re καϊ δεινή also. T h e explanation of μοΧΚον ετέρας by connecting it closely with the words αδόκητος re καϊ δεινή, as predicative, is the only possible one, whether with Jowett we consider the latter as added by way of explanation, lest the expression ουδεμίας ησσων should appear too exaggerated, or with Classen, as making the passage more impressive. T h e student must be careful not to translate ζυμφορα αΰτη as if it were αΰτη η ξνμφορά, 'this calamity': αϋτη, the subject, is attracted into the gender of the predicate ζνμφορά, the position of which, as Classen rightly observes, gives it a character of generality, with nearly the effect of a partitive genitive. Cf. c. 42, 4. νιι χχχ 2 HISTORY OF T H U C Y D I D E S CHAPTER 153 XXX § 1. 1. 2. καταλαβόντ€5, assecuti, 'overtaking them before they had gone far on their way back to the coast' (not, as Classen, who compares c. 59, 1, * finding that they had gone forward'). Cf. c. 2, 7, c. 81, 1, V I I I 15, 1; and see note to c. 33, 5. 1. 4. φοβησ-aVTes, ' p u t t i n g them to wild flight'. IV 56, 1 rbv δχλον εσκεδασμένον έφόβησεν επιδρομή* 1. 6. Cf. c. 79, 5, a v r o i s : cf. c. 19, 5. § 2 . 1. 7. 4v rfj Ιστβάσ-α, * as they were in the act of embarking'. τούδ ITXCCO-TOVS i.e. most of the 250 men who were slain. Cf. IV 44, 2 έν ΤΎ) τροπή ταύττ} oi πλείστοι άπέθανον αύτων i.e. ol π. των αποθανόντων. T h e reason why they fell victims is given in the two participial clauses with different construction, οϋτε επισταμένους —των τε.,.όρμισάντων. 1. 9· #|ω, ' o u t of the reach o f . Cf. Xen. Cyr. i n iii 58, ν π ν 6 ££ω βελών. T h e opp. is eVros To£ei5/iaros, I iv 23. T h u c . is silent on the fate of Diitrephes: there was at Athens, on the ascent to the Acropolis, a statue of this Diitrephes, οίστοΐς βεβλημένος, mentioned by Paus» I 23, 3, 47, but nothing is there said of his death, and Thucydides, who mentions the death of one of the Boeotarchs, would surely not have failed to allude to it. Moreover the Diitrephes of V i n 64, 7 is probably the same person. 1.10. €iT6l Iv r g άλλη αναχωρήσει, 'whereas, on the other hand, during the other part of their retreat', 'for elsewhere in their retreat'. ουκ άτόπως, non absurde i.e. non male (Poppo). 1. 12. irpo€K0€OVTls τ€ καΐ ξυ<ττρ€φόμ,€νοι, ' b y dashing forward singly in front of the ranks and then forming into small b o d i e s ' . Cf. Herod. IX 62 προεξα'ί'σσοντες κατ'' 'ένα καϊ δέκα καΐ πλεϋνές τε καΐ ελάσσονες συστρεφόμενοι έσέπιπτον is τους "Σπαρτιάτατ. F o r ξυστρέφεσθαι, cf. c. 32, ι ; c. 43» 7· ίν Ιιτιχωρίφ ταξ€ΐ, 'after the manner of fighting peculiar to their country'. 1. 13. ολίγοι, '(only) a few*. 1. 14. Iv τούτω, neuter, ' i n this mode of fighting' or 'during this retreat', as c. 29, 4. 1. 15. δ ι ' άρτταγην !γκαταληφ0€ν sc. ύπό των Θηβαίων δια τό άpπayψ ποιεΐσθαι. οι ξΰμιταντ€$: ' i n a l l ' : l. 7» c. 24, 2. iS4 NOTES ON THE VII XXX 2 1. 16. τών Θρακών (which is bracketed as spurious by Stahl after Herwerden on insufficient grounds) depends upon πεντή­ κοντα καϊ διακόσιοι. Cf. V i l l 2 i e s διακόσιους τινάς τους πάντα? τών δυνατών άπέκτεινε. 1. 17. αϊτό, O u t o f : cf. 87, 5» Plutarch Timol. c. 25, 3 μόλις τρισχίλίους από τοσούτων μυριάδων. % 3 . 1. 2θ. Θηβαίων τών βοιωταρχών Σκιρφώνδαν, ' o n the Theban side, Scirphondas one of the Boeotarchs*. T w o out of the eleven Boeotarchs were appointed by Thebes. See Iv 9 1 , ι . T h e other nine were contributed by the confederate States in unknown proportion. Their number, however, varied at different periods; in the time of Epaminondas, there were only seven. 28 1. 21. μέρος τι, ' a considerable proportion', I 23, 3, IV 30, 1. άιτανηλώθη: c. 14, 2. § 4 . τα κατά την Μνκαληοτσόν...τοιαύτα ξυνέβη: similar con­ cluding sentences are found in i n c. 50, 3 τα κατά Κέσβον οϋτως έγένετο, c. 68, 5 τα κατά Ώλάταιαν οϋτως έτελεύτησεν. T h e sum­ mary, however, includes only c. 29 § 2 to § 4 : from c. 29 § 5 to c · 30 § 3 the doings of the Thracian mercenaries only are re­ counted. T h e construing order i s : πάθει άξίω όλοφύρασθαι ήσσον ούδενός τών κατάτόν πόλεμον, ' a calamity as lament­ able as any that occurred during the war \ 1. 23. ούδ€νός...ήσ-σ-ον: c. 29, 5. cos eirl peycOei, 'con­ sidering its (limited) e x t e n t ' . Cf. I l l 113, 6 ως προς τό μέγεθος της πόλεως, IV 84, 2 ώς Αακεδαιμόνιος, 'for a Lacedaemonian' i.e. considered as one of a people who did not study oratory. ' W h e t h e r της πόλεως or του πάθους be supplied, the sense is the same, inasmuch as the scale of the calamity was small, only because the city was small; in relation to that particular city it was not small, but most unusually great, no State in Greece having sustained, in proportion to its size, a greater loss of citizens' (Arnold). CHAPTER XXXI {Continued from c. 26, 3] § 1. 1. 2. . μ€τά τήν !κ TTJS Λακωνικής τβίχισ-ιν, idiomatically for έκ της Αακωνικης μετά την έν αύτγ} ηενομένην τείχισιν ; a common attraction, concerning which see n. to c. 26, 3 and cp. c. 2, 1. νπ xxxi 4 HISTORY OF THUCYDIDES 155 1. 3. ορμούσαν... €ύρών: cf. II 6, 3 ηύρε τους άνδρας διεφθαρμ&ου$> V 42, ι το ΊΙάνακτον ύπό των Βοιωτών καθηρημένον εύρων. Ιν $€«,$, i.e. the harbour on the north side of the t o w n ; the south side, which is now called the Bay of Katacolo, was a χωρίον άλίμενον. P h e i a was the port of Olympia. T h e country about it was devastated by the Athenians in B.C. 431 (Thuc. π 25, 3). 1. 4 . οι Κορίνθιοι όιτλίται, i.e. some of the Corinthian hoplites ; see c. 17, 3 ; c. 19, 4. 1. 7. frrXcov, 'continued their voyage'. § 2 . 1. 10. των Μ€σσηνίων sc. όπλίτας, partitive genitive, as c. 26, 3. 1. 11. TTJS Άκαρναν£α$: A c a r n a n i a was the scene of the cam­ paign of Demosthenes in the summer and autumn of B.C. 426 ( i n c. 94 ff.), so that he was familiar with its coast. 1. 12. Άλ.ύ£€ΐαν: cf. Strab. X 2, 2 i η Άλύζεια ττεντεκαίδεκα από θαλάσσης διέχει σταδίου*. Άνακτόριον δ αυτοί €Ϊχον: A n a c t o r i u m was a town επί τφ στόματι του Άμπρακικου κόλπου, ην δέ κοινόν Κερκυραίων καϊ εκείνων sc» των Κορινθίων (I 55» *)· I t * s called a Κορινθίων πόλι$ in ι ν 49, when the Athenians stationed at Naupactus and the Acarnanians got possession of it and turned the Corinthians out, B.C. 425. H e n c e δ αυτοί €Ϊχον sc. ol * Αθηναίοι. § 3 . 1. 13. «irepl τ α ύ τ α : ijyouv περί το συλλέyειv δύναμιν (Schol.), circa haec loca (Valla). E u r y m e d o n , who had been sent to Syracuse in advance (c. 16, 2), and was now on his way back to Athens, meets with Demosthenes and at once assumes the joint command of the expeditionary force. 1. 14. τότ€, ' a s before related', ' a t the time mentioned', takes us back to c. 16, 2. Cf. c. 8 1 , 2, i n 69, 1, i v c. 46, 1, c. 123, 2. του χαμώνος i.q. irepl ηλίου τροπάς τά$ χειμερινά*. 1. ι 6 . δτι «ΐΓύθοιτο.,.Ιαλωκόδ, ' t h a t he had heard of the fact that it had been c a p t u r e d ' : the optative and participle are both in indirect discourse. I n i v 6, 1 ως έπύθοντο της Ώύλου κατειλημμένης, the participle (not in indirect discourse) denotes the, act itself, not the fact of its occurrence. G. MT. § 884 ed. ma. κατά ττλοΰν, without the article, as in i n 32, 1. So iv πλφ VI 34, 8, καθ'' όδ$ν 11 5> Γ ί ν 37» i> hut κατά TTJV δδόν i v 128, 3. τό Πλημμύριον... έαλωκός: c. 23, ι. § 4 . 1. 18. C o n o n , the restorer of the walls of Athens, the subject of the biography by Cornelius Nepos, was a prominent 156 NOTES ON THE vn xxxi 4 character during and after the conclusion of the Peloponnesian War. He was governor of Naupactus in virtue of his holding the com­ mand of the squadron stationed there. He was soon after super­ seded by Diphilus, who came there with a reinforcement of 15 ships. 1. 19. at TT€VT€ καΐ €Ϊκοα-ι vrjcs: c. 17, 4, c. 19, 5. 1. 20. σ-φίσιν i.e. Conon and the Athenians. 1. 21. ου καταλύουσι» τον iroXejxov, 'do not abandon their hostile attitude', said like καταλύειν rbv βίον, φυλακήν (Arist. Vesp. 12). The phrase is generally used of a formal peace, but this is accidental. The meaning of the word in itself is the same, though the association gathered from the context may be different. ναυμα\€ίν τε μέλλουσα, 'but mean to fight' or take the offensive; not a mere repetition of the previous words. {Jowett.) Stahl rejects rbv πόλεμο*', as an adscript, understanding αυτό=το άνθορμβΐν as the suppressed object, and giving καταλύουσι the meaning of desistunt. Madvig thinks it is used absolutely—statione decedunt. 1. 23. £s μη διαφρησ"ου<τι. TOVS ττολβμίο^, ' (telling them) not to let the enemy p a s s ' ; an o b j e c t (not final) clause after πέμπει, which includes the notion of c o m m a n d i n g , a s k i n g , διαφρή· 158 NOTES ON THE v n xxxii χ σον σι is the generally accepted conjectural emendation of Dobree for the vulgate διαφήσονσι, cf. Ar. Av. 193 των μηρίων rty κνΐσαν ού διαφρήσετε. There are no instances adduced of διαφιέναι in the sense here required, transitum dare, Poppo suggests δι-ήσουσι. 1. 9· (·υ<ττραφ£ντ€$, c. 30, 2. 1. 10. aXXfl, 'by any other road' i.e. than the highway, c. 70, 4. ireipdVciv sc, έλθεΐν. The middle is more usual in this sense. 1. 11. 'Ακραγαντϊνοι: the people ofAkragas were neutral, c. 33, 2. δια TTJS Ιαυτών sc. χώρα*. See Intiod. pp. xx if., xxxii, xxxvii. § 2. 1. 13. [τινά τριχή]: neither of these words suits the con­ text, τινά, is wanting in the Vat., τριχή in most of the MSS. Both Stahl and Classen bracket them ; Hude omits them. 1. 14. αφυλάκτου τ€ καΐ έξαίφνηβ έιτιγ€νόμ,€νοι: adjectives and adverbs are not infrequently connected by copulative con­ junctions, e.g. c. 4, 6 σπανίω καϊ ούκ kyyudev, III c. 4, ι άπαράσκβυοι καϊ εξαίφνης ανα'γκασθέντες πολβμεΐν, c. 13, 3 V ο,πόστασκ ημών θαττον "γργένηται καϊ άπαράσκενος, Xen. Cyr. IV ii 15 εϋξωνοί Te καϊ ταχύ, V iii 24 προθυμότερον καί πλείονς συνεστρατεύοντο, Hell. II iii 17 αποθνησκόντων πολλών και αδίκως. 1. 16. «π-λην «vos του Κορινθίου, 4save one, viz. the Corinthian'. 1. 18. €Κομι<Γ€ν: c. 29, 1. CHAPTER XXXIII § 1. 1. ι. οι Καμαριναιοι: after the Syracusan embassy (un­ der Hermocrates) and the Athenian (under Euphemus) in the pre­ ceding year (vi c. 75—c. 88, 1, 2), sent for the purpose of winning it to their side, C a m a r i n a had decided to remain neutral (μηδετέροι? άμύνειν). See Int7'oduction pp. xxii f., xxxix f., Ii, liv. 1. 5. ol Γ€λωοι: a few only of the inhabitants of Gela had joined Gylippus (c. 1, 5); but in c. 57, 6; c. 58, 1 they are said μετά Σνρακοσίων στρατεύεσθαι. In VI 67, 2 just after the return of the Syracusans from Catana, we find them bringing 200 horse into the field. See Introd. pp. xix, xxiv if., xxxi, xlii. 30 1. 6. ναυτικον cs TTCVTC vaCs, ' a squadron of ships, not exceed­ ing five', not, as Poppo and others, 'rowers for five ships', after the analogy of ίππικόν, δπλιτικόν etc. Cf. c. 19, 2. § 2. 1. 8. σχεδόν τι αποκτά, 'pretty nearly all': cf. ill 68, 4 σχεδόν τι τό Ι-ύμπαν, V 66, \ σχεδόν τι παν. Thuc. means all the VII xxxiii 4 HISTORY OF THUCYDIDES 159 Siceliots of non-Ionian descent. Naxos and Catana (c. 14, 2; c. 57, 11) are not taken into account. * Σικελών plurimos etiamtum Atheniensibus favisse vidimus c. 32. Cf. c. 57* {Poppo). 1. 9. ουδέ μ.€θ* ΙτΙρων, ' n e u t r a l ' , for μετ' ουδετέρων. Cf. Π c. 67, 4 τους μηδέ μεθ' έτερων, c. 72, * &rre μ η δ έ μ ε 0 ' ετέρων, VI 44> 3 ° ' °^ ουδέ μ ε 0 ' έτερων Ζφασαν 'έσεσθαι. This collocation is due to an unwillingness to separate the preposition from its case: so c. 42, 6 ουδέ καθ' $τερα άντεπεζησαν, c. 44, 1. Cf. n. to c. 70, 8. 1. 10. ot δ* άλλοι in reference to the parenthetic o S r o t . H u d e {Comm. crit. ad T h u c . p . 22 n.) compares c. 85, 2 and a similar passage in a famous inscription containing the treaty between Athens and Chalcis B.C. 445 ( C I A IV 1, 27 from vv. 52 ff.:—τους δέ ξένους τους iv Χαλκ/δι, βσοι οίκοΰντες μη τελοϋσιν Άθήναξε καΐ εϊ τω δέδοται ύπο του δήμου του 'Αθηναίων ατέλεια, τους δέ άλλους τελεΐν is Χαλκίδα καθάπερ οί άλλοι Χαλκιδεΐς, where rous δέ άλλους refers to Οσοι μη=πλην 8σοι. 1. ι ι . οι 7τρότ€ρον ΐΓ€ριορώμ€νοι, in explanation of ο Ι άλλοι, ' w h o had hitherto been watching the course of events'. Cf. v i c · 93> Γ μέλλοντας δ' 'έτι καΐ περιορώμενοι, c. 103» 2 οί πρότερον περιεωρωντο. 1. 12. |υσ·τάντ€δ: c 15, Ι · § 3 . 1. 14. το...€ΐτς)ς€ΐρ6ΐν, the substantival (articular) infini­ tive as accusative of the direct object after έπέσχον, 'they stayed', 'refrained from'. Cf. X e n . Mem. Ill vi 10 irepl πολέμου συμβούλευαν τήν 7e πρώτην έπισχήσομεν, Soph. Phil. 881 μηδ3 έπίσχωμεν τό πλειν, D e m . c. Mid. 5 c το λαμβάνειν δίκην έπάσχετε. T h e lead­ ing of the Vat. and other MSS. έπέσχοντο cannot be accepted, either here or in II 81, 4 being unsupported b y examples. ' T h e delay of these few d a y s ' says Grote ' p r o v e d nothing less than the salvation of the Athenian a r m y ' . [Continuation from c. 31] 1. 20. τόν Ί ό ν ι ο ν without κολπον, as in VI c. 30, 1 ; c. 34, 4 ; c. 104, ι . Ιττ' οίκραν Ίαττνγίαν, the promontory of the Ν . Ε . side of the Gulf of Taranto, the Latin promunturium Salentinum, mod. Capo di Sta Maria di Leuca. Cf. VI c. 30, ι εϊρητο {την άλλην παρασκευών) ες Κέρκυραν ξυλλέγεσθαι, ως εκείθεν άθρόοις επί άκραν Ίαπνγίαν τόν Ίόνιον διαβάλοϋσιν. § 4 . 1. 22. τά$ Χοιράδαδ vr\ and translates 'some (i.e. about) 150'. Cf. c. 34, 5 ; c. 87, 3. 1. 24. αναβιβάζονται, 'they take on board': used once again by T h u c , c. 35, 2. 1. 25. τ ω " Α ρ τ α , a prince of the Messapian people, at enmity with the people of Tarentum. H e is mentioned by the comic poet Demetrius, quoted by Athenaeus p . 108 f, as ;u£yas καΐ λαμπρό*. 1. 26. historian. 1. 27. τ ι ν ά indicates that the particulars are unknown to the rijs'lTaXCas: see n. to c. 29, 2. T h e Greeks never used the name Ιταλία in the wider extent in which it was applied within the country itself. T h e region so called by them was limited to the peninsula bounded by the isthmus, only twenty miles across, between the Scylletic and Napetine Gulfs...in other words, it was the southernmost part of what afterwards bore the name of B r u t t i u m . Antiochus of Syracuse (referred to by Aristotle Pol. p . 132915), in his time drew a boundary for Italy by a line to M e t a p ο η t u r n in the NorthEast from the L a o s in the West—the river which in after times separated Lucania from Bruttium. Cf. I 12, 4, VI 4, 5. See also note on c. 25, 1 and Introduction p . xiii. § 5. 1. 28. κατά το ξυμμαχικόν: c. 20, 1. For the fact, see c 57. 11· 1. 30. άναλαβόντ€5 (not ' t a k i n g on b o a r d ' as in c. 25, 4 but simply) ' t a k i n g with t h e m ' , as in c. 1, 5; c. 74, 1; c. 86, ι, ν 64, 5. τ α ΐ τ α sc. ακοντιστα* καΐ rpt^peis» Θουρίαν: the town, as in v i 104, 2, and not the country, which in c. 35, 1 is called θού­ ρια s yrj. This form of the name is found also on coins: the form θούριοι is applied to the inhabitants in 1. 3 4 ; c. 35, 1; c. 57, n , v i c. 6 1 , 6 ; c. 104, 3, V I I I 84, 2. 1. 31. καταλαμ,βάνουο-ι ν€ωσ-τί...4κ'ΐΓ€'ϊΓτωκότα8: it is difficult to say whether the supplementary participle is here used in indirect vii xxxiv i HISTORY OF T H U C Y D I D E S 161 discourse, ' t h e y find that they had recently been driven o u t ' ; or to denote the condition or state in which they were found, ' t h e y find such and such a state of things existing, the party lately expelled'. See G. MT, § 883 ed. ma. and cf. c. 2, 1, 1 c. 59, 1; c. 6 1 , 2. § β. 1. 33· €Ϊ T I S WcXeXciirro is to be taken with άθροι­ σαν res, not, as Classen thinks, with έζετάσαι in indirect discourse, in which case the perfect, as Stahl points out, would be expected. 1· 35· *v τοΰτω τ ύ χ η $ : c. 2, 4 κατά, τούτο καιρού. sion of the anti-Athenian party is meant. T h e expul­ 1. 36. TOVS avToi)s...Tots 'Αθηναίοι^: see G. 2 § 1 1 7 5 and cp. c. 57, 2; c. 77, 2. I . 3 8 . 2irpaTC8as: c. 34» 5· 1. 12. ira)(€Cas, predicative. καΐ άντηριδας άιτ* αυτών... έναυμάχουν, 'and they supported these cat-heads underneath by a set of stays of timber (άντήριδα$), extending from them (i.e. των έπωτίδων) to the sides of the ship, a length of six cubits inside (the frame of the hull) and six cubits outside, after the fashion in which the Corinthians also had improved the make of their ships about the prow, when they fought against the squadron at Naupactus'. See c. 34, 5. €ΐτισ-κ€υασάμΐ€νοι πρώραθ€ν, 'having them equipped at the prow' with a view to strength. See Addenda. VII xxxvi 3 HISTORY OF T H U C Y D I D E S 167 1. 16. -π·ρ<ρραθ€ν: the termination -θεν is not common in Attic prose with appellative substantives, as κυκλδθεν, ύψόθεν, πατρόθεν, μητρόθεν. I t is most frequently found with local designations, as Άθήνηθεν, Έλευσινόθεν. § 3 . 1.17. ov\ ομοίως άντΗ^ναυττηγημ^ναδ, 'since they had not been constructed in like manner to resist (αντί) their improvements'. Cf. c. 62, 3. 1. 19. avTwrpiopots, predicate, ' stem to stem', agreeing w i t h e μ βολαΐς. 4κ irepCirXov, ' b y rowing round 1 , so as to strike the enemy obliquely or on the broadside. T h e manoeuvre is described in II 84, 1 περιέπλεον αυτούς κύκλω καΐ συν^ον ές oXiyov, έν χρφ αεί παραπλέοντες καΐ δόκησιν παρέχοντες αύτίκα έμβαλεϊν. 1. 20. ουκ £λα<Γ<Γον σχήσΈΐν, ' they would not be at a disadvan­ t a g e ' : see note to 1. 6; c. 5, 3. 1. 2 1 . τ ή ν ναυμαχίαν, ' t h e (coming) sea-fight'. ουκ Ιν ττολλ φ for έν ού πολλφ, ' i n no large space': cf. c. 79, ι ουκ eV όλί'γων ασπίδων, I 78, ι βουλεύεσθε ως ου περί βραχέων, Xen. Oec. c. 8, 13 ουκ εν πολλφ τινι μείξονι χώρα, Plut. P o m p . c. 28 ουκ εν πλείονι χρόνω τριών μψων, and see note to c. 33, 2 ; c. 79, 1. T h e Athenian galleys required plenty of room for being handled successfully. 1. 22. Ή-pos Ιαυτών, ' in their own favour . Cf. Π 86, 5 νομίξοντες προς εκείνων είναι TTJV εν όλί*γω ναυμαχίανι c. 49» 2 ; c. 8 1 , 5· 1. 23. άναρρήξαν, c. 34* 5· 1. 24. στ6ρίφοι§ καΐ παχ4<Γΐί..τοϊ$ Ιμβόλοις, instrumental da­ tive after άναρρήξειν; irap€\ovT€S, sc. τα 'έμβολα: ' w i t h their beaks or rams stout and solid, which they would bring into action against the hollow and weak ones of the Athenians'. This appears to me a better and simpler explanation than Dobree's 'παρέχοντες sc. τας ναΰς, vel τας έμβόλάς quod eodem redit, offerentes, 'meeting the shock with'. Cf. Arist. Ran. 663 πάρεχε τήν γαστέρα*. Other editors mostly adopt παίοντες from B, but it is difficult, as Arnold remarks, to understand how every copyist but one should have written παρέχοντες, if παίοντες had really been the original reading. Moreover Thucydides does not use the latter verb elsewhere except in the passive voice, and that only once, IV 27, 3. I t is questionable also whether παίειν προς τι is good Greek. Linwood suggests that for παρέχοντες we should read προέχοντες: 'προέχοντες τοΐς έμβόλοις i.e. τα έμβολα προέχοντα έχοντες would not be NOTES ι"68 ON THE v n xxxvi 3 harsher* he says ' t h a n the epithet άντίπρφροι preceding, i.e. τά$ vavs άντιπρψρους 'έχοντε$\ H u d e reads προσέχοντες, intendentes, sc. ras έμβο\ά$. § 4 . 1. ι6. οΰκ £σ€σ-θαι, 'would not be feasible', as in 1. 33 and 1. 4 1 ; see also note to c. 4, 4 ; c. 70, 4. σφών is objective genitive after περίπλου? and διέκπλουν. 1. 27. φττ€ρ TTJS τ€χνη8 κτ|., ' w h i c h was just the very {περ) part of their (naval) manoeuvring on which they most relied'. (Kriiger suspects the genuineness of της τέχνης.) 1. 28. αύτοΐ.,.το μ^ν ου δώ<Γ€ΐν, ' t h e y would themselves do the best in their power not to allow the o n e ' , viz. breaking their line (διεκπλεΐν). Cf. II 83, 5 έτάί-αντο κύκλον των νέων ώς μέ*γιστον οΐοί τ' ήσαν μη δίδοντες διέκπλονν. Cobet (ad Hyper, p. 61), followed by Stahl and van Herwerden, strikes out διεκπλεΐν and ώστε μη περιπλεΐν as adscripts. Ί cannot conceive' says Lin wood on the other hand ' a n y ­ thing more arbitrary than the omission of the words διεκπλεΐν and ώστε μη περιπλεΐν as interpolations. N o doubt they might have been omitted as explanations of the words τό μέν— τό δέ, which refer respectively to διέκπλουν and περίπλουν pre­ ceding; but to assume that Thucydides could not if he pleased have adopted the fuller mode of expression, is a mode of critic­ ism which seems without any just foundation. A s well might we in i 49 [6], y δε αύτοι ήσαν ol Κορίνθιοι επί τψ εύωνύμψ, omit these latter words, because this had been already stated. Simi­ lar instances will be found in I 144, [2], ν 65, [4], II c. 29, [3], ό μέν—6 Τηρεύς; c. 72, [3], IV 114, [4], VII 86, [3] (rbv μεν— Αημοσθένην), v i i l 46, [3]. Those who omit these words in such passages have followed the authority of Valckenaer on Herod, ν 92/ 34 § 5 . 1. 30. τη τ€ irpoVepov άμαθία των κυβερνητών δοκοΰσ-η €Ϊναι, τω άντίιτρωρον ξυγκροΰσ-αι, μάλισ-τ' αν αυτοί χρήατασ-θαι, ' and that which was before considered to be defect of skill in their pilots,—namely the practice of ramming stem-on,—this they would themselves m a k e use o f . Observe that αντίπρωρον is used a d ­ v e r b i a l l y , unless we consider it as an adjective agreeing with the indefinite subject of t-vyκροΰσαι, which is not expressed, H A . § 942. See crit. note and n. to c. 67, 1. 1. 32. irXeicrrov €V αύτφ σ-χη<Γ€ΐν, summam habituros esse (Hude). 1· 33· τ Cf. 1. 20. utilitatem in ea re Kriiger prefers πλέον or πλεΐον. ή ν άνάκρουσ-iv...is τ ή ν γήν, 'for, if the Athenians were VII xxxvi 6 HISTORY OF THUCYDIDES 169 forced from their position, there would be no possibility (1. 26) for them of backing anywhere except upon the land '. The άνάκρονσις (c. 40, 1, 2) was the retreat of a ship with her head towards the enemy, in order to gain space for recover­ ing her momentum in a new attack. Thus ή άράκρουσι? δι* ολίγου (i.e. from the line of battle to the shore) was inconveni­ ent, because if the space was confined the momentum could not be recovered. 'Es 6\iyov means that there was only one small spot (along shore) to which they could thus retreat (between the mouth of the Anapus and the marsh Lysimeleia), because the shore of the harbour being generally in possession of the enemy, an Athenian ship that had approached too near would have been exposed to discharges of missiles from the land (Arnold). 1. 34. too'. καΐ ταύτην (sc, τ\\ν yijv, not τήν ανάκρουσα), 'and that 1. 35. 4s ολίγον, κατ' αυτό τό στρατόι^δον τό ίαυτών, 'to a small part of it, that is to say, (only) within the limits of their own encampment', c. 2, 2. *8ι* ολίγου (c. 71, 3), 'from the line of battle to the shore'; 4s ολίγον, 'along shore': του 8* άλλου λ. αύτοι κράτησαν is parenthetic' (Dobree). § β. 1. 37· ξυμφερομένους.,.Ις ολίγον, 'meeting in a small space, as they would do, if hard pressed at any point'. 1. 39. ταράξ€σθαι, future middle in passive sense. Cf. 67, 1. δπ€ρ καΐ 2βλαιττ€ μάλιστα, ' which in fact (και) proved more de­ trimental than anything else'. 1. 40. Tats ναυμαχίαις, 'their sea-fights (to come)', 1. 21. 1. 42. τΓ€ριιτλ€ΰσαι 4s τήν €υρυχωρίαν...ού 8υνήσ€σθαι αυτούς: 'they (the Athenians) would not be able to sail round the Syracusan ships before striking, because they (the Syracusans) could charge the enemy's vessel from the open sea and retire in order to make the charge*, έπίπλβνσις and άνάκρουσις, which are in­ cluded under the same article, seem, as Prof. Jowett aptly observes, to be two parts of the same movement, but not necessarily. 1. 45. The transposition of re gives prominence to Cf. c. 14, 2 ; c. 80, 1. 1. 46. ού μεγάλου OVTOS : c. 59, 3. πολεμίου. NOTES 170 ON THE vn xxxvii 1 CHAPTER XXXVII § 1 . 1. 1. irpos την εαυτών έιτιστη'μην κτΙ., ' a d a p t i n g their plans to the degree of naval skill and strength which they possessed', for το άντίπρφρον ζυ-γκρουσαι was generally considered a mark of ignorance and bad seamanship (c. 36, 5), but to the Syracusans it was useful, because they were indifferent seamen, and the system therefore which the Athenians despised was well suited to them. Cf. V 9, 4 δστι* πρό$ ('in proportion to') τ)\ν έαυτοϋ δύναμιν την έπιχείρησιν ποιείται (Arnold). 1. 4· dv69 'in consequence o f . 1. 5. 6*ιτ€χ€ίρουν sc. Tots Άθψαίοις, 'proceeded to attack the A . ' τ ω τ€ IT. άμα καΐ Tats v. are instrumental datives. § 2 . 1. 7. τον €Κ Tijs 7ΓΟλ€ωδ )( οί άπο του Όλυμπιείου. the proleptic έκ, see note to c. 2, 1; c. 25, 6. For 1. 9. καθ* bVov irpos τ η ν ττόλιν αύτοΰ Ιώρα, for κατά τοσούτο αύτοϋ (sc. του τείχους) δσοη.χ%έώρα, ' a t the part which faced the city', or καθ'' 6σον may be regarded as one word, serving as subject, like έπϊ πολύ, c. 65, 2. F o r bpav in this sense, cf. VI c. 75, r, c. 97, 5, c. ι ο ί , ι, π 55, 1. T h e inner side of the wall would probably be attacked by Gylippus either on the heights (if the Athenians still retained their lines there) or lower down, or both, and the other side by the troops from the Olympieium (c. 4, 6) on the lower ground near the marsh (Jowett). 1. 11. ή γυμνητ€ία for ot Ύυμνήτες, as levis armatura for levis armaturae milites. 4κ του eirl θάτ€ρα, ab altera parte, i. e. the west wall, c. 84, 4, Vlll 33, 2 έκ του έπί θάτερα λόφου, Ι 87, 2 is τό ίπΐ θάτβρα. C p . the phrase έκ του έπϊ πλείστον II 87, 2. 1. ΐ 2 . ιτροστ[€ΐ: we should have expected προσήσαν t o agree with οί άπ6 του Όλυμπιείου, the leading subject; instead of which the verb is made to agree irregularly with the last of the three nouns in apposition. Cf. c. 87, 6. 1. 13. ΙΐΓ€ξέπ·λ€ον, 'sailed out against them*, the Athenians. T h e corresponding substantive έπέκπλους occurs in Vlll 20, 1. § 3 . 1. 14. καΐ ot 'Αθηναίοι κ τ Ι . : Plut. Nic. c. 20, 4 states that Nicias wished to wait for the arrival of Demosthenes, but was outvoted by Menander and fiuthydemus. r6 ιτρώτον οίδμενοι κ τ Ι , : this sentence is in sense subordinate to the participial d a u s e νπ xxxviii x HISTORY OF THUCYDIDES 171 όρωντες κτλ., though coordinated with it, 'when they saw—whereas they at first fancied that the enemy would make an attempt with their land force only—that'. In such cases we generally find μέν—δέ. 1. 15. €iu€po}j,€vas <Κφνω, 'bearing down upon them quite sud­ denly ' : the adverb άφ ν ω is found seven times in Thucydides. eirl τα rd\t\ )( άπό των τειχών c. 38, 1. 6, On to the walls' against those advancing from the city. On the use of a preposition of mo­ tion with a verb of rest, cf. c. 50, 1 and see HA. § 788, G. § 191 n. 6. 1. 18. των ϊξω, neuter )( itc rrjs πόλεως 1. 7. 1. 19. iroXXovs: Stahl reads πολλούς. 1. 22. άντανήγον vavs: cf. v i n 95, 3, Herod. VII 180, v m 57, 70, 76 etc. In c. 52, 1 we have a different construction, avravrjyov νανσί. So we have αϊρειν ναυς (i 52, 2) by the side of αϊρειν ναυσί (n 23, 3, vi c. 43, 1, c. 51, 3). 1. 23. σγδοήκοντα μάλιστα: c. 22, 1. Eleven of these had been lost in the first sea-fight, and must have been replaced, μάλιστα, 'more or less', is used with statements of quantity to imply that the number given is the nearest practicable approximation, c. 42, 1. CHAPTER XXXVIII § 1. 1. 1. TTJS ήμφας eirl ιτολΰ, 'for a great part of the day': c. 39, 1. So της χώρα* επί πολύ, c. n , 4 ; c. 40, 5 ; c. 65, 2. 1. 2. The omission of και is thought necessary by Classen before the temporal aorist participle πειράσαντες, because the latter is explained by the modal present participles προσπλέοντες and άνακρουόμενοι. Translate:—'after trying each other's strength by advancing and retreating'. 1. 3. ir€ipa ' to win anything worth men­ tion', 'any advantage of importance'. Arnold compares Herod. VII 211 ουδέν εδυνέατο παραλαβών της εσόδου. ci μη... κατάδύσ-avTcs: supply άξιον τι λο7ου παρέλαβον. Translate : ' except in so far as the Syracusans gained an advantage by sinking etc.', and compare a similarly constructed sentence V 47, 5. 172 NOTES ON THE vn xxxviii t 1. 6. 8ΐ€κρ£θησαν: c. 34, 6, 11 c. 14, 4, but in i v . 72, 4 άπ€κ/>£0??(ταΐ' is used. § 2 . 1. 8. το μέλλον may be taken either with Classen adver­ bially 'for the future', ' n e x t ' , or with Kriiger as predicate object of ποίήσονσιν. 1. g. αντίπαλα...*γ€νόμ€να (not, as Classen, ' t h a t (since the last battle which had ended in favour of the Athenians) their naval strength had become equally matched', but), as P o p p o , pugnam navalem ancipitem fuisse, ' t h a t the conflict (of the previous day) had resulted in a victory for neither p a r t y ' . Cf. c. 34, 6. 1. 10. Ιλιτίζων, 'expecting', c. 73, 2, IV 71, 2. 1. 12. «Γΐσ-Κ€υ(££€ΐν: c. ι, 1; c. 24, 1. 1. 13. €ΐΓ€7Γονήκ€ΐ, ' h a d suffered': cf. v i 104, 2 quoted on c. 1 1. 1. 1. 14. προώρμΜΓέ, 'anchored in front o f , not elsewhere in Thuc. σ φ ύ ρ ο υ includes both Nicias and his m e n ; σφύ% arid σφέτβρος being often thus used in reference to the thoughts of a s i n g l e person: cf. c. 1, 5 ; c. 8, 1 ; c. 39, 2 ; ν ί ο , 6. F o r the σταύρωμα which they πάρα ras vavs Ζπηξαν, see VI 66, 2. 1. 15. κληστοΰ, ' that might be closed' with chains. See Addenda. § 3 . 1. 17. διαλ€ΐττοΰσ·α$...δο-ον δύο πλέθρα, ' a t an interval of about 200 feet', c. 23, 4, vi 67, 2. 1. 18. βιάξοιτο, passive as c. 36, 6. κατάφευξι? occurs again in c. 4 1 , 1, but not elsewhere in T h u c . 1. 19. καθ* ή σ υ χ ί α ν = ήσυχων, 'undisturbed', as in c. 40, 1: c. 73, 3, c. 74, 2, I c. 74, 4, c; 85, ι, Π 93, 3, v i 25, 2 etc. τταρα<τκ€υα£ό'μ.€νοι,...δΐ€τέλ€σ·αν, the supplementary participle with verb of c o n t i n u i n g , G. MT. § 879 ed. ma., not elsewhere in T h u c . CHAPTER XXXIX § 1. 1. ι . τήδ ώραβ ιτρωτ€ρον, 'earlier in point of the time of d a y ' than before. F o r the gen. after adverb of time, cf. i v 25, 1, c. 93, 1 6\pk της ημέρας, and for the form πρφτερον, VII 19, 1. 1. 2. τ η 4ΐΓΐχ€ΐρήσ·€ΐ. τ η αυτή, ' w i t h the same mode of a t t a c k ' as that before (c. 37, 1; c, 38, 1). 1. 4. irpoo-€fuo~yov: c. 52, 1. vnxxxix 2 HISTORY OF THUCYD1DES § 2 . 1. 4. άντικαταστάντ€8 rats ναυο~1 τον αυτόν τρόπον, i.e. προσπλέοντζ* καϊ ανακρουσμένοι, c 38, ι· 1.6. €ΐτΙ ιτολν Trjs ήμ.€ρα8: c 38, ι· διήγον...π€ΐρώμ€νοι; cf. c. 38 1. 19· 1. 7· irplv δη, 'until at last', as c. 71, 5 with indie, after an affirmative clause. There is only one other example of this usage in prose, Aeschin. c. Timarch. § 64. See G. MT. § 635 ed. ma. 'Αρίστων is mentioned with praise also by Plutarch {Nic. c. 20, 5) and Polyaenus (Strat. ν 13). According to Plutarch (c. 25, 2) he fell in the later sea-fight described by Thuc. c. 70. Άρίσ-των... άρισ-TOS: probably an accidental paronomasia, like απλω$..Απλοί c · 34> 5 (if the reading there be genuine), but see Addenda» 1. 9. TOVS σ-φίτφουβ sc. των μετά, Σνρακοσίων ex quibus ipse Aristo erat (Stahl). Cf. c. 4, 3 ; c. 8, 1. 1. 10. τον9...€·π·ιμ6λορ,4νου5, substantively, 'those in charge', 'the proper authorities'. Kriiger takes it for τού$ των lv TJJ πάλει i. comparing Iv 2, 3 των εν τ% π'ολει επιμεληθήναι, but this is not neces­ sary. Cf. Dem. Philipp. I § 35. The αγορανόμοι are meant. ιτέμψαντας: on the use of the aor. participle after a verb in the historical present to denote not an earlier but a contemporary (single and momentary) action, see Madv. Gr. Synt, § 183 Rem. 2. 1. 11. την άγοράν των πωλουμένων, 'the market of commodi­ ties for sale' i.e. to the soldiers: την ayοράν without any addition would have been enough (cf. I c. 40, 15 c. 62, 1; c. 67, 4; c. 139, 1; c. 144, i n 6, 2, ν 115, 2, vi c. 44, 2, 3; c. 50, 1, v m 95, 4); accordingly Kriiger brackets των πωλουμένων as an adscript. The a g o r a since Gelon's time was in the level plain between the Isthmus and the Temenites. 1. 14. αύτοΰ, 'on the spot' (c. 40, 1; c. 78, 2), the conjectural em. of Aem. Portus for aureus of the MSS., which Arnold explains as the dative expressing the action in its relation to the Syracusan government. 1. 15. άρισ-τοΊτοιιήσ-ωνται applies more properly to the men than to the generals in such passages, yet it may apply to the latter as representing the whole body, both of men and of offi­ cers. Compare vill 95, 3 6 yap 'Α^ησανορίδα* αριστοποιήσα­ με ν os aviiyaye ras vavs (Arnold). On the subjunctive aorist in -σω^αι after oVcos, cf. c. 56, 1 and see G. MT. § 363 ed. ma. i74 NOTES ON THE vn xxxix 2 1. 16. 81* ολίγου, temporal, 'after a short interval', as c. 15, 2. αύθημ€ρόν, without waiting until the next day. 1. 17. αΐΓροο-δοκήτοΐ9, ηοη expectantibus^ predicative: c. 29, 3. CHAPTER XL § 1. 1. ι. καΐ οι jie'v (sc, oi του ναυτικού άρχοντες c. 39 1. 9), *and s o ' it turned out as they anticipated. Classen remarks upon the vivid description of the execution of the plan by means of a rapid succession of short sentences connected by και. 1. 4· πρύμναν κρουο-άμ€νοι, * rowing stern wards', ' b a c k i n g water', withdrawing without turning the vessels: cf. c. 36, 5 ; c. 70, 8, 1 50, 6. 1. 5. ττάλιν, ' b a c k ' ; αΰθι$ (1. 14), 'for the second time*. § 2 . 1. 7. as ήο-ο-ημίνουβ ο-φών, 'because they (the Syracusans) felt that they were inferior to, not a match for, them (the Athenians)'. For the gen. of a personal noun after ήσσασθαι, cf. i v 64, 2 ουδέν αίσχρόν οίκβίονς οίκβίων ήσσασθάι, III57»3 Θηβαίων ήσσώμβθα, ν i n , 4 πόλεως TTJS με-γίστης ήσσασθαί', and for that of an imper­ sonal noun, i v 37, ι ήσσηθεΐεν του irapbvTos δεινού, ν i n , 3 ήσση· θβΐσι του ρήματος* 1. 9· καθ* ήο-υχίαν 4KP<£VT€S, ' d i s e m b a r k i n g leisurely', c. 38, 3 . 1. 10. α μ φ ί recurs only once in T h u c . v i n 65, 1. ' S e e Xen. Oecon. Gr. Ind. s. v. 1. 11. <»s...oloji,cvoi, 'because they fancied', lit. ' l i k e people who fancied'. Cf. VI 32, 3 u>s σαφώς ο 16μένος εΐδέναι τα περί αυ­ τών ZXeye. 1. 12. αν ναυμαχήσ-αι. T h e infin. with civ in indirect discourse representing a p o t e n t i a l opt. with dv of direct. G. MT. § 211 ed. ma. § 3 . 1. 14. δια Ίτολλου θορύβου, magno cum tumultu% an ad­ verbial phrase coupled to the adj. Άσιτοι. 1. 15. tfcriToi οι ατλ^ουδ, ' m o s t of them without having tasted food', c. 44, 8. 1. 16. μόλις ιτοτέ άντανήγοντο, ' a t last with much ado got under weigh against t h e m ' . See note to c. 37, 3 ; c. 52, 1. § 4. 1, 17. 1. 16. χρόνον τ ι ν ά : see n. to c. 30, 2. φυλασσόμενοι, 'looking at one another', guarding VII xl s HISTORY OF THUCYDIDES 175 against an unforeseen attack. 'iirwro. without δέ, as c. 19, τ; c. 42, 6. ουκ €δόκ€ΐ...κόιτφ άναλί<ΓΚ€<τθαι, 'it did not ap­ pear advisable to the Athenians that they should exhaust them­ selves with fatigue by their own act in carrying on a waiting game', * they thought they had better not delay until they had fairly tired themselves out'. The accusative διαμέλλοντας is in agree­ ment with the omitted subject of the infinitive; cf. c. tf, 9, c. 75, 7, and see HA. § 941. For the reading άναλίσκεσθαι instead of the vulgate αλίσκεσθαι, we are indebted to Madvig. 1. 19. €ΐΓΐ)(€ΐρ€Ϊν sc. έδόκει. Cf. c. 5, 2. § 5. 1. 21. δ€|άμ€νοι sc. αυτούς επιφερομένους, c. 44, 4, c. 77, Tats ναυσ-lv ά,ντΜτρψροιε χρώμκνοι: c. 36, 3. 1. 22. «op€po's sr. τοις Σνρακοσίοις. ττροσ"€Κ€ΐτο: c. 29, 3; c. 30, 2; c. 78, 3 ; o. 84, 1. 1. 23. cv Κατάνη δΐ€\€£μα£€ν: see vi 71, 88, 94. ΰικρώφθη, ijyovv κατ€φρονήθη [Schol.). 1. 25. |λ€Τ€·ΐΓ€μ.ψαν: c. 8, 1. 1. 27. αυτοί, 'of themselves', without extraneous help. 1. 28. ώ(ττ€ μηδ'.,.αν ώφέλίΐν, ' s o that, even if they had sent for it [την στρατιάν), it would not any longer have been of as much service to them'. On the use of the infinitive (not in indirect discourse) to express a consequence in a potential form, corresponding to the potential optative or i n d i c a t i v e , see G. A/T. § 98 Note 4, § 592 ed. ma. 1. 30. ταΰτα ovv άνασ-κοττών, resumptive (c. 6, 1) of Ιδών.,.καΙ 3 9 νόμισα* after the long parenthesis from 1. 21 to 1. 29. 1. 31. *rfj πρώτη ημέρα μάλιστα, primo potisnmum die: but the superlative adverb extends its influence also to δεινότατο*. 1. 32. δ τι τάχοδ, ' a s speedily as possible', ώ? τάχος and όσον τάχο* are common expressions, but ο TL τάχος occurs only once in Herod, (ix 7, 3) and only in this one passage in Thuc. Hervverden would read on τάχιστα h e r e ; so in Soph. Antig. 1321 the correct reading is probably οτι τάχίστα, not οτι τάχος. See J ebb ad Ι. άττοχρήσασ-θαι, quam maxime, libere, utt, 'to reap the full benefit of, ' to avail himself to the utmost o f , as 1 68, 4, vi 17, 1. See my note to Plutarch Themist. c. 4, 2 ed. 3. 1. 33. τ ή παρούση τον οττρατίνματοβ €Κ·π·λήξ€ΐ, 'their present consternation at his army': the objective gen. as in c. 77, 6 rd Σνρακοσίων 5eos. § 4 . 1. 34. τό ·π·αρατ€£χισμα . άττλοΰν ov: see below c. 43, 1 and cf. c. 4, 1 ; c. 5, 1; c. 7, τ and the letter of Nicias c. r i , 3. 12—2 18ο NOTES ON THE vn xlii 4 1. 37. ΰ KpaTiJ$, 'would not be worn out to no purpose'. Cf. VI 18, 6 την voXtv τρίψεσθαι αύτην wepl αυτήν. dXAs (accidentally omitted in Poppo-Stahl) = άπράκτω$ Schol.\ c. 47, 4, I 109, 3 τά χρήματα ά λ λ ω ? άνηλοϋτο, IV 36, i d\\vs {φη πονεΐν σφα%. § β. 1. 45· the Anapus. «|€λθόντ€$ sc. out of their camp on the left bank of 1. 47. επικρατούν ώστΓ€ρ το* πρώτον, (not T7?s γη* as Classen, but) absol. 'regained their original superiority', i.e. that which they vnxliii, HISTORY OF THUCYDIDES 181 had when their fleet had effected a junction with the land forces in the Harbour, VI c. 102, 3—c. 104. 1. 49. ov8i γαρ καθ* &r€pa=κατ' ουδέτερα yap, 'neither by land nor by sea'. See note to c. 33, 2. So /car' αμφότερα c. 41, 4. 1. 50. 6Vi μ,η, nisi, ' except', IV c. 26, 2; c. 94, 1. It is really the neuter rel. pr. serving as cognate ace. after auTeir^cav under­ stood. G. MT. § 550 ed. ma. 1. 51. του'ΟλυμίΓΐίίου: c. 4, 6 ; c. 37, 2. CHAPTER XLIII § 1. 1. 3. airoir€ipa ^e έδοξεν afrrots, και διεκόμισαν, c. 27, 5 ws *s ό' έπεισε, και έδρασε ταΰτα, Herod. I 79» ^ u s ^ οι ταΰτα έδοξε, και εττοίίε, Xen. Oecon. c. 18, 9 όρώ δ' ώσπερ Ύεω{τγουντας, καΐ τά$ άλλα* τέχνας εργαζομένους (where see my note), Matth. Εν. VI ΙΟ -γενηθήτω το θέλημα σου ώϊ έν ούρανφ καί επί yijs. j.0 §2. 1. 10. ημέρας, 'during the day-time')( άττό πρώτου ΰπνου 1. ι 7 . 1. ι ι . αδύνατα: the neuter plur. for neut. sing, impersonal. Cf. c. 50, 4 επειδή έτοιμα ην, Ι 7, ι πλωϊμωτέρων Οντων, fre­ quently in the case of verbal adjectives in -έος, as c. 60, ι βουλεντέα, c. 73, 2 ποιητέα. XaBeiv : the object implied is TOW πολεμίου*. 1. ΐ3· irevrc ημερών σιτ£α, 'provisions for five days', the gen. of measure, c. 2 1. 23. Aristoph. Ach. 197 σιτί' ημερών τριών, Eq. io7g μισθόν ημερών τριών, Vesp. 243 ημερών όργην τριών, Pac. η id ξωμον ήμερων τριών. 1. ΐ4· τέκτονας, λιθολογου? και τ«κτονα$: cf. VI 44» * λί0ολόγοι/$ και" V 82, 6 τέκτονες καί Xidovpyoi. 1. 15. άλλην, 'besides', c. 4* 3ί c · 3^, ι · παρασ-κίνην: c 41, ι. τοξευμάτων: The place of τοξεύματα between carpenters and siege implements affords no reason for doubting the reading. A r c h e r s were more needed in a siege than in a battle {Jotuett) See crit. note. 1. 1O. ήν κρατώσι, 'should they be masters of the field', c. 23, 2 ; c. : 4 , 7· vn xliii 5 HISTORY OF THUCYDIDES I. 17. d-tro* πρώτου ΰπνον, post primiaii somnum. πρώτον ΰπνον II 2, ι. Cf. c. 29, 2 άφ' εσπέρα*. 183 Cf. 7repi I. 19. αναλαβών...€χώρ€ΐ: the singular is used, as^under the in­ fluence of αυτό*: this construction is uncommon where the verb, as here, is preceded by several subjects, though when the verb itself precedes several subjects it is common enough. Cf. iv 112, 3. 1. 21. vntkiltrero, 'stayed behind' to guard the camp. § 3 . 1. α ι . &ΐΓ«8ή €γ£νοντο -rrpos CIVTCUS, 'when they had reached them' i.e. Epipolae. Cf. c. 35, 2 ; c. 78, 2. I.22. κατά, ' b y way of \ cf. c. 8, 1; c. 72, 4, i n 7,( 4 κατά rbv ΆχέΚφον €7τλ€υ<Γ€, IV 25, 8 κατά τον 'Ά.κεσίνην ποταμόν. ηττ€ρ...άνφη : VI 97, i. See Addenda. 1. 24. τό τ€ίχισμα; this was the most western of the Syracusan forts at the extremity of the cross-wall built by Gylippus. See Freeman Hist. Sic. 111 p. 312. 1. 25. avSpas for rtvas^aliquot ' a certain number' as 11 33, 3 άνδρας άποβάλλουσι σφών αυτών, IV 132, 3 τών ήβώντων Ανδρας, V 115, 4> VI II 71» 2 άνδρας κατέβαλον αυτών. §4. 1. 27. & ήν...τρια: for the numeral put predicatively in the relative clause, cf. IV 113, 2 cis ras yaus αί έφρούρουν δύο. The three camps had each defensive outworks (προτ€ΐχίσματα ν ι c. 100, 2; c. 102, 2), at some distance from one another, which lay along the northern side of the παρατάχισμα. See Plan. I. 29. τών ξυμρ,άχων : those from Hellas proper, namely Lace­ daemonians, Corinthians, Boeotians etc. 1. 30. TOWS Ιξακοσ-Cots, the λσγάδεί τών οπλιτών, who were selected δπως τών re Έπιπολών eUv φύ\ακ€ς και, ην is άλλο τι Se'fl, ταχι> ξυν€στώτ€$ παρα^ί^νωνταί. (νι 96, 3)· The corps had suffered heavy loss (vi 97, 4) and their captain Diomilos had fallen; it had since been restored to its original strength and was now under the command of Hermocrates, according to Diodor. Sic. x n i i r , 4. 1. 31. «π-ρώτοι, 'foremost', forming an advanced guard in the camp at the south-western end. 1. 32. 2φραζον, 'had already given the alarm' (Stahl); them fuller intelligence' (Classen). 'gave § 5 . 1. 33. ol 8' €βοήθουν τ€...κα! αΰτοίς κτί. 'they ueie hastening to the rescue, when Demosthenes .met them and put them 184 NOTES OX THE vn xliii 5 to flight, though they made a determined resistance'. The paratactic construction, as Classen remarks, imparts more animation to the narrative. 1. 36. ©ir»s TTJ irapovcrn όρμη του irepaCvecrOai ων Ivcica ήλθον μή βραδείς γ^νωνται, 'that in their present impulse they may not (change and) become slack about the execution of the purpose, for which they had c o m e ' ; ττεραίνεσθαι is not middle but passive, and should be taken with μη βραδεΐ* yivuvrai rather than with δρμη. The Schol. renders the former by μη ύστερήσωσι, 'may not flag'. Cf. IV 34, 1 yvovTes αϊτού* βραδύτερου* ήδη 6ντα* τφ άμύνασθαι. 1. 38. άλλοι (as opposed to αυτοί i.e. Demosthenes and the main body) are some of the other Athenian forces under Eurymedon and Menander. άττό nijs ιτρώτη$, not local as some take it, but t e m p o r a l , statim, ' i n the first instance'. Cf. I 77, 3 airb πρώτη*, Lucian de conscr. hist. I 1 airb της πρώτη* ευθύς; so I 14, 3 δια πάση*, IV 126, 5 &ά κενή*. No definite word need be supplied with any of these phrases, such as εφόδου which Rauchenstein supplies. So τήν νρώτην Xen. Oecon. c. i r , 1, Mem. i n 6, 10. 1. 39. το ιταρατείχισμα, c. 42, 4. 1. 40. ίρουν, 'were storming', 'engaged in taking', descriptive imperfect. This being done, a communication would be opened to the Athenian lines on Epipolae. Cf. Diod. Sic. Xin n , 3 τναρεισπεσόντες ivTb* του τειχίσματο* τη* Έπιπολη* μέρο* TL του τείχου* κατέβα\ον. 41 § β. 1. 42. ol ξύμμαχοι, i.e. 61 άλλοι Σικελιώται of § 4· 1. 43' ol Η,€Τ* &υτου, ί·^. the allies from Hellas proper. 1. 45. σφ(σιν is used here as a direct reflexive. 1. 46. €κπ€ΐτληγμ€νοι, before they had recovered from their dismay on the first surprise. νπ αυτών sc. των *Αθηναίων. § 7 . 1. 49the day'. ώ$ κ€κρατηκότων, 'thinking that they had won 1. 50. 8ux iravTOs του μήπω μεμαχημένου, 'through all those who had not yet fought', the neuter participle being used in a collective sense, as in c. 13, 1; c. 44, 4, 6 ; c. 85, 3, iv 96, 4 το μαχόμενον, VI c. 35, Ι το ττιστευον και φοβούμενον, c. 89» 4 v^v T0 έναντιούμενον. So adjectives are frequently used, e.g. του βαρβαρικού [C. 29, 4) for των βαρβάρων, του οίκείου (c. 44» 0 f° r ™v οίκείων, νπ xliv i HISTORY OF THUCYDIDES 185 παν τό έξ εναντίας (c. 44, 4), τό διάφορο? (c. S5* s)» το 'ΈΧληνικδν (i 3, 1) for oi 'Έλληνες, το άντίπαλον ( π 45, 1) for oi αντίπαλοι, το Χαλκιδικόν (iv 6 1 , 13) for oi Χαλκιδής. 1. 5 i . δΐ€λθ€ϊν, ' t o force their way through them'* not defungi, to get through with them \ ' to have done with t h e m ' , as Classen, who quotes HI 45, 3 διεζελή^ύθασι δια πασών των ζημιών. 4 1. 5 2 · άνίντων σφών τήδ εφόδου, 'if they (the Athenians) relaxed, the vigour of their onset; \ Cf. ν 32, 4 άνεΐσαν της φιλο­ νικίας, and see H A . § 748, G. § 174. 1· 53· ξυστραφώσιν: c. 32, ι. οί Β ο ι ω τ ο ί : c. 19, 3 ; c. 25> 3· Cf. Plut. Nic. c. 2 1 , 5 πρώτοι yap οΰτοι (ol Βοιωτοί) συστρέψαντες εαυτούς και συνδραμδντες είς τους 'Αθηναίους έναντίοις τοϊ$ δόρασι μετά βοής έώσαντο καϊ πολλούς αύτοΰ κατέβαλον. These B o e o t i a n s appear to have been the Thespians who were brought from Locri (c. 25, 3), a part, perhaps the smaller part, of the 300 mentioned c. 19, 3. T h e rest were most probably in the ships, which arrived later, c. 50, 1 (T/tirlwaU). CWTOIS, i.e. the party of Athenians under the command of Demosthenes. 1. 54. Is φ ν γ η ν κ α τ έ σ τ η σ α ν : III 108, 1, i v 14, 1. CHAPTER XLIV § 1 . 1. ι . καί, *and s o ' , c. 29, 5 ; c. 49, 3. 1. 2. ήν,..οτω τρόπω έκαστα ξυνην^χθή, a partial prolepsis for ης έκαστα οτω τρ. £w.t the principal subject of the subordinate clause appearing as an anticipatory accusative ( c 4, 3) of the verb» in the primary object clause, while the word (έκαστα), which stands in a sort of partitive relation to it, remains in the subordinate clause. T r a n s l a t e : — ' a b o u t which, how the several incidents thereof hap­ pened, it was no easy matter even to get any account'. For ξυμφέρεσθαι, decidere, cf. I 23, 1, VIII c. 83, 2 ; c. 84, 1. 1. 3. ττυθέσθαι: doubtless from enquiries made by Thucydides himself, who undertook journeys from Thrace for the purpose of con­ sulting native sources of information about the scenes and events of the war. See ν 26, 5· ούδ' α φ ' €τέρων = ά7τ' ουδετέρων, c 4?» 6. 1. 5· «ν ή ^ Ρ α > < m (a,battle fought in) broad daylight')( kv νυκτομαχία. σαφ€στ€ρα μέν sc. %στι τα yiyvo^eva, 'things, it is true, are 186 NOTES ON THE more distinct'; Kriiger understands οΧδεν and suggests See n. to c 50, 4. vn xliv ι σαφέστερο?. I. 6. ovSk τ α ύ τ α sc. τα iv ήμερα ^ι^νόμενα. οι τταραγίνόpevoi has for its appositive έκαστος which influences the number of the verb (οΐδεν). 1. 7· ττλήν, praeterquam, καθ* ίαυτόν: c. 78, ι. c. 2, ι ; c. 23, 1 ; c. 62, 4. το 1. 8. μόνη Sij, ' t h e only one of the kind ', as πολλφ δη c. 55, 2 ; ολίγοιs δή Ι 33, 2 ; πασαρ δ^ II 77, 2. στρατοπέδων μεγάλων, ' b e t w e e n two great armies', depends on ή. 1. 9· 2v γέ τφ8€ τψ πολέμω, * in the present w a r ' as contrasted with others. 1. 10. ir<»s άν Tis..TJSa, ' h o w could any one have k n o w n ? ' This is the p o t e n t i a l i n d i c a t i v e , serving as the past form of the potential optative πως dv TLS είδείη, without reference to any definite condition. Cf. c 14, 4; c. 55, 2. So Xen. Hell, H i iv 18 έπερρώσθη αν TLS εκείνο Ιδών, Cyr. III iii 70 kyvto TLS dv, VIII i 33 έπέγνως αν έκεΐ. See G. Μ Τ. § 243, § 244. § 2. 1. i i . oirrios ν Π Ι 95> 2· § 3 . 1. 15. των 'Αθηναίων: namely, those who had first ascended the heights and immediately pressed on (c. 43, 3, 4, 5), VII xliV 4 HISTORY OF THUCYDIDES 187 in contrast to του άλλου στρατεύματος (1. i6). TQ πρώτ^ €φόδω—Ιχώρουν, primo impetu {eodem impetu quem initio habebanf) invicti procedebant (Stahl). Cf. c. 43, 5. €viKc5vT0=pluperf. 1. 17. TO* |A€V...TO 8C, in expanded partitive apposition to πολύ 42 του στρατεύματος. αύτοϊς: c. 34, 2. 1. 18. προσαν^ι, ascendendo propinquabat. προς δ τι χρή χωρήσ-αι, (not, as Jowett and others, * which way to go' but) * which body they were to attach themselves t o \ Cf. c. 14, 3 irpos εκείνους χωρησαι, i n n , 3 vpbs 6 τι χρτ) στήναι ' ο.point d'appui, piedh terre\ 1. 19. τά πρόοτθ€ν, anteriora i.e.primae agminis partes (Poppo), ' the troops in front', those that had advanced at first. 1. 20. €Τ€τάρακτο πάντα καΐ χαλ€πά ήν...διαγνώναι, 'had been thrown into utter confusion and were difficult to distinguish '. On the personal for the impersonal construction, see n. to c. 14, 2 and cf. c. 48, 1, I c. 20, ι (τά ιταλαιά) χαλβ-ττά βντα.,.πιστεϋσαι, Xen. Mem* I vi 9 χαλεπώτατα εύρεΐν, 'hardest to find', Plato Rep. p. 302 e άνομος μοναρχία χαλεπή και βαρύτατη ξυνοίκήσαι. G. ΜΤ. § 763 ed. ma. υπό της βοής, ' owing to the noise', c. 48, 4. § 4 . 1. 22. ώς κρατουντ€ς, tamquam victores: c. 34, 7; c. 40, 2; · 43» 7· κραυγή...χρώμ€νοι ad duo membra παρεκελεύοντο τε [sc. άλλήλοις)... κ α Ι άμα τους προσφερόμενους ('their assail­ ants' c. 70, 5) εδέχοντο pariter*pertinet (Stahl). c 1. 23. αδύνατον ov, accus. absol. ' i t being impossible', c. 18, 2; G. MT. § 851 ed. ma. 1. 24. ol'Αθηναίοι sunt ii qui νεωστί άνεβεβήκεσαν etc. (Dobree). 1. 25. σφας αυτούς for άλλ-ήλους, the reflexive instead of the reciprocal pronoun, as 1. 42, VI 77, ι ούκ άμύνοντες σφίσιν αύr o t s , VIII 92> 8 ησύχασαν τε και σφών αυτών άπέσχοντο. πάν το 4ξ εναντίας, 'all who came from an opposite direction', 'with their faces toward them'. For the neuter, see n. to c. 43, 7. 1. 26. καΐ d φίλιον €Ϊη τών ήδη πάλιν φ€υγόντων, 'evert though they were friendly, being of the party who had already turned and were coming back in flight', εϊη is to be taken with both φίλων and its epexegesis των.,.φευγ&των, which is a partitive predicategenitive, HA. § 752 a. 188 NOTES ON THE vn xliv 4 1.2 f. Tots Ιρωτη p,aν...2βλαψ€: see n. to c. 24, 3. 1. 39. 8(Xois sc. 1. 44· 1. 45. c. 70, 5. c. 63, 1. 1. 47. ξνμπεσόντες. κατ&ττησαν: c. 43, 7. See crit. note. 4s χ€ΐραε άλλήλοιβ 4λθόντ€5, cominus congressi, c. 5, 2 ; μόλις άτΓ€λύοντο,' were not separated without difficulty', 01 iroXXoC {sc. των άπο\\υμένων): cf. c. 82, 3. 1. 49. 7τάλιν to be taken with καταβάσεων, as with ί-κπλονς c. 38, 4 3 3 and άνάκρουσιρ c. 62, 3 . 1. 50. €7Γ€ΐδή...οι σωζόμενοι καταβαΐέν, * when such of them as escaped were got down severally to the level ground', the optative of recurrence. See crit. note. 1. 52. όσοι ήσαν των ιτροτφων στρατιωτών, partitive predicategenitive, ' t h o s e who had served in the former army', who had climbed up.Epipolae in the summer of B.C. 414 and therefore had έμπενρίαν μα\\ον της χώρα? than the others. 1. 54. δΐ€φύγγανον: the simple φν^ηάνειν is found in Aesch. Prom. V. 513, Soph. EL 132, αττοφυγ^άνειν in D e m . 23, 74, δ ι α tpvyyaveiP Aeschin. c. Ctesiph. 10, Arrian. An. IV iv 6, έκφνγyaveiv Aesch. Prom. V. 525, καταφυ^^άνειν Aeschin. 3, 208, Herod, v i 6, 14. 1* 55· «io-ίν οϊ in partitive apposition to oi δέ, as in c. 45, 2 oi μέν—oi δέ are to oi yap. 1. 57. ΐΓ€ρΐ€λάσαντ€8, 'scouring the country on horseback'. Gf. Plut. /. c. τού$ δ' άποσκεδασθέντα* καΐ ττΚανωμένούς ημέρα* έτη· γενομένη* oi Ιτπτεϊϊ καταΧαμβάνοντες διέφθειρον. Gf. c. 37> 3· CHAPTER XLV § 1. 1. 3· $ ή πρόσβασι$ sc. εστί, * where the ascent i s ' , i.e. the pass of Euryelus, by which t h e Athenians had ascended. το χωρίον κτΙ..· c . 4 3 , 7^ 1. 5. See crit. note. ύττοσπόνδουδ Ικομίσαντο : see n. to c. 5, 3. ΐ9θ NOTES ON THE vn xlv * § 2. 1. 6. ουκ ολίγοι: Plutarch {Nic. c. 21, 9) says 2000, Diodor. Sic. (xin ir, 5) gives the number of slain at 2500. Both these authors followed probably the authority of Philistus in the Sixth Book of his Sicula. See my Introduction to Plutarch's Life of Nicias% p. xlvii if. 1. 7. όπλα $τι ιτλ^ω ijf κατά τον$ vcKpovs, scuta plura quam pro nuinero caesorum, 'more shields than there were bodies of the slain'. Cf. c. 75, 4. 1. 8. οι γάρ.,.οΐ μ«ν: see η. to c. 44 1. 55. 1. 9. ψιλοί: predicative to βίασθέντες άλλεσθαι. Stahl, Classen and Hude follow Pluygers and Cobet {Hyper, p. 59) in strik­ ing out avev των ασπίδων as an adscript intended to explain ψι­ λοί; others omit avev only, making των ασπίδων depend upon ψιλοί. Cp. Xen. Cyr. VI iii 57. CHAPTER XLVI 1. 2. eir£, 'under the circumstances of, * because of. Cf. c. 59 1. 24; c. 81, 5. ιτάλιν αΰ and ωσ-irep καΐ irpoVepov are both to be taken with αναρρωσθέντες and refer to c. 41, 4, when a spirit of confidence had prevailed, which was subsequently lost (c. 42, 2): 7τάλυ> 'back' indicates restoration to the former mood, α8 'again' a repetition of the change. 1. 3. dvapp&>o-0€VT€s, ' re-assured'. The word is not found elsewhere in Thuc.; έπιρρώννυσθαι occurs c. 2, 2 ; c. 7, 4 ; c. 17, 3. 1. 4. Ακράγαντα: A k r a g a s (the Latin Agrigentum, modern Girgently so named from its river) had declared itself neutral (c. 33, 2), but now in consequence of some political crisis (στασιάξοντα) it was wavering, and so there was more chance for the Syracusans to win it over to their side (βττάγεσΑαι); so they sent Sicanus (one of the generals chosen with Hermocrates, vi 73, 1) with 15 galleys to support the anti-Athenian party. 1. 6. Ιτταγάγόιτο, ad suas partes perduceret, m 63, 2, ν 45, ι ; the vulgate toayayoiro would mean in suam potestatem redigeret. 1. 7. 4s την άλλην Σικ€λ(αν, *the rest of Sicily' as opposed to Agrigentum. Cf. c. 7, 2. viixlvii» HISTORY OF THUCYDIDES 191 1. 8. αΰθις: see n. to c. 7, 2. frt, praeterea; c. 7, 3 ; c. 12, 1 · c. 34, 1. 4v Ιλττίδι &v —ελπίδων, c. 25, 1, 9. [Continued in Chapter 50] CHAPTER XLVII § 1. 1. 3. irpos την...άρρωστίαν, 'in view of the existing utter 4 4 want of spirit in the a r m y ' . F o r προς, cf. c. 60, 2 ; c. 74, 1, v i c. 4 1 , 1 προς τα παρόντα Ζλεξε τοιάδε, and for αρρώστια ( = άθυμία )(ρώ/07 14, 2; 42, 2), III 15, 2 οί δ' άλλοι ξύμμαχοι έν καρπού ζνγκομιδ^ ήσαν καΐ αρρώστια του στρατεύειν. 1. 4· κατά ττάντα: α 28, 35 c. 581 45 c · %h 6, V 72, 2 κατά π·άϊ>τα έλαο-σω^τε?, VI c 37» ι κατά πάντα αμεινον εξήρτυται, c 49> 2 κ α τ ά ίτάι^τα aV αυτού* εκφοβησαι. 1. 6. «ώρων with double participial construction in indirect dis­ course (c. 36, 2), i.e. they saw ού κατορθοΰμεν καΐ ol στρατιώται άχθονται. G. ΜΤ. § 687 ed. ma. § 2 . 1. 7. νόσ-φ τ€ γαρ κτλ.: Cur milites mansione gravati sint (ήχθοντο), eius rei duae causae afferuntur verbis νόσω re yap έπιέζοντο τά τε ά'λλα.,.έφαίνετο. Deinde ut morbo premerentur, pariter duabus causis {κατ1 αμφότερα, c. 4 1 , 4, VIII 65, 2) effectum esse dicitur: της τε ώρας.,.καϊ τό χωρίον χαλεπόν ην (Poppo). 1. 8. Ttjs ώρα$...μάλιστα: Plut. Nic. c. 22, 2 ό Ί&ικίας έκέ· λευσεν άποπλεΐν την ταχίστην.. .κα\ φνγεΐν τό χωρίον, αεί με"ν, ως πυνθάνονται, βαρύ και νοσωδες ον στρατοπέδω, νυν δ% ώς βλέπονσι, καΐ δια την ώραν όλέθριον μετοπώρον yap ην η αρχή. Cf. below c. 79> 3 > c · &7> ι · 1. ί ο . το χωρίον...ην: the participial construction is broken by a change to the finite verb. T o be regular, it should have been του χωρίου OVTOS. Cf. c. 80, 1, V 6 J, 4 βουλόμενοι άλλως τε προσγενέσθαί σφίσι καΐ 6μηροί...ήσαν αυτόθι κείμενοι. 4λώδ€$ καΐ χαλ€πόν, ' s w a m p y and (insufferable) unhealthy'. Cf. Hesiod opp. et dies 557 μείς χαλεπώτατος οΰτος χειμέριος, χαλεποί προβάτοις, χαλεπός δ' άνθρωποι?. T h e exhalations of the marsh Lysimeleia (c. 53, 2), the modern Fantanelle, are meant, teeming with malaria, where the almost stagnant waters of the Anapus discharge themselves. 192 NOTES ON THE vn xlvii 2 1.11. o n dveXirior < τότα > τα, * as desperate as possible', Reiske's correction of the MSS. reading UTI ανέλπιστα. See cr. n. § 3 . 1. 13. ctirep διανοηθ€ΐ$...8ΐ€Κΐν8νν€'υσ-€ν, 'according to the (original) intention which he had when he risked (the attack) on Epipolae' (c. 42, 5): διεκινδύνενσεν — μετά κινδύνων διεβη, cf. Ill 36, 2 is ΊωνΙαν παρακινδύνευσαν for a similar pregnant expression. 1. 14. άσφαλτο sc, ταύτα, the implied antecedent of απερ. 1. 15. ϊως '4τι...οΧόν τ€ ικραιοΰσθαι, 'while it is still possible to cross', namely before November, when the winter would put a stop to all military and naval operations. Thuc. does not use περαιουσθάι as a passive, as Arnold supposes. 1.16. του στρατ€υματο8 is the partitive gen. after ναυσί, which is itself an instrumental dative after κρατεί?, 'to prevail', 'enjoy a superiority*. Tats yovv eircXGovcrais, 'at least with the recently arrived (or 'additional') galleys out of their (whole) armament' (even if no reliance could be placed on the others). §4. 1. 18. 4v TTJ χώρα <τφών viz. at Deceleia, c. 19, 1—3, c. 20. 1, c. 27. 1. 19. Συρακο<Κους for πρδς τους Σνρακοσίονς. o$ an Ionic a n d Thucydidean usage. Cf. c. 35, 2 ; c. 49, 2 ; 1 c. 25, 2 ; c. 30, 3 ; c. 50, 4 ; c. 136, 3, 11 c. 5, 5, i n c. 22, 8, i v c. 35, 4 ; c. 55, 2 ; c. 103, 2, ν c, 14, 2 ; c. 49, 2 ; c. 71, 3 ; c 73, 1. 1. 3 . τ ω λόγω, still stronger in 1. 19 τφ έμφανεΐ λό'γφ. 1. 5. ψηφι£ομ,ένου5 καταγΥ^λτουβ γίγν€οτθαι, t h e personal for t h e impersonal construction: cf. c. 44, 3, v n i 40, ι του μη ij-dyyeXrot yeviadat, III 30, 1 πρ\ν έκπύστους yevoadat, IV 70, 3, V I I I 42, 1. 1. 7. λαθίϊν γάρ άν—τοΰτο TTOIOVVTCS ττολλφ ηοτσον sc. εΐ KarayyeXroi ylyvoivTo, 'for they would have far less chance of doing so (voting for a retreat) in secret at any time they chose, if their intention reached the ear of the enemy'. 1. 8. τοΰτο 7τοιοΰντ€δ, not άναχωρουντες but rather ψηφιζόμενοι την αναχώρησα. W e should look for the accusative ποιούνται since σφα* precedes; the nominative may b e explained on t h e principle that 'Nicias tarn d e se quam de ceteris ducibus loquitur' (Haack), or as attracted into the case of the subject of t h e subordinate clause οπότε βούλοιντο. There is a similar instance of a nominative instead of accusative in VI 25, 2. T h e vicarious use of ποιειν with pronoun for other verbs to spare t h e repetition of them (like \JQX. facere) is common enough in Greek. οττότζ βοΰλοιντο sc. τοΰτο ποιειν. § 2 . 1. 9· τό 8e τ ι και, ' but, on the other hand, in some degree'. Cf. I c. 107, 6; c. 118, 2. 1. 10. αφ* ών...ηο-θάν€το αυτών, ' j u d g i n g from what h e heard 4 5 about t h e m ' (τα των πολεμίων): αυτών is the possessive gen. dependent upon the α contained in άφ1 ών = άπό τούτων α. Cf. 1. 2 1 ; I 84, ι 6 μέμφονται μάλιστα ημών. 1. ι ι . ·ΐΓονηρότ€ρα: 1. 2. τών σφ€τ4ρων = ^ τα των ΆΘ. Ι. 12. ιτροο-καθήμίνοι: α 47» 4· χρημάτων απορία, * exhaustion of supplies', c. 24, 2. By χρήματα the Greeks under­ stood πάντα όσων ή αξία νομίσματι μετρείται, Aristot. Eth. JSf. 4, 2. 1. 13· αύτούβ, sc. t h e Syracusans, is the object accusative: the subject t o έκτρυχώσειν is σφεΐς understood. 1. 14. θαλαο-σοκρατούντων: t h e genitive absolute is used need­ lessly, since there is already a substantive belonging to t h e conT. VTI 13 194 NOTES ON THE vn xlviii » struction to which it might have been joined. See G. MT, § 850 ed. ma., HA. § 992 d, and cp. c. 44, 5; c. 68, 2, ill 13, 7 βοηθησάντων νμων...πό\ι.ν προσλήψβσθς. Stahl would insert σφών before ήδη. 1. 15. ήν γαρ τι...βουλόμ.€νον, 'as there was a party desirous'; see note to c. 43, 7 and cf. c. 49, 1. 1. 16. τα πράγματα Ινδοΰναι, 'to surrender the government*. Cf. II 65, 10 τφ δήμω τα π pay ματ α ένδίδδναι, V 62, 2 τινές αύτοΐς καϊ αυτών των έν rrj iroXei ένεδίδοσαν τα πρά*γματα. 1. i*j. €7Γ€κηρυκ€υ€το ώ$ αυτόν, (this party) 'kept sending secret messages to him'. The messengers are called διάγγελο* c. 73, 3. Cf. c. 49, ι, νϊιι 44, 1. The party consisted, according to Diodorus Sic. (XIII 18), of those Leontines who had been incorporated into the Syracusan citizenship. οΰκ ei'a απανίστασθαι, ' exhorted him not to raise the siege'. Cf. c. 49, 1,1 c. 139, 1; c. 140, 3. § 3 . 1. 18. eir* αμφότερα £χων, 'wavering between two de­ cisions', έπ* αμφότερα taking the place of a modal adverb as δια φυλακής fyeiv, according to some, c. 8, 3. 1. 19. διασκοττών: c. 71, 6. άν€Ϊχ€, intrans. ούδβμιξ. 7Γροσ€τίθ€το "γνώμη (Sc/ιοί.), 'held back (with his decision)', 'could not make up his mind'. Cf. II 18, 5, v i n 94, 2. τω έμ,φανεΐ λόγω, 'in his public speech', the speech which he delivered in being obliged to give his opinion o p e n l y in the council, )( τ φ £/>7y 'reality'. 1. 21. σ-φών ταύτα οΰκ άποδ€|ονται, 'will not be satisfied with this in them', see note on 1. 10. For αποδέχεσθai—probare, cf. 144, 1, i n c . 3, 1; c. 57, 1. 1. 22. ώστ€,..α/π·€λθ€ΐν, explanatory of ταύτα, 'namely, that they should go away without themselves (i.e. the Athenians) voting for it' .(without an authoritative order from home, dvev Αθηναίων ψηφίσματος, c. 49, 2). The infinitive with ώστβ frequently follows verbs of 'wishing, c o m m a n d i n g etc. which regularly take a simple infinitive of the object. G. MT. § 588 ed. ma. Cf. c. 14, 3; c. 49, 1; vi 88, 8. καϊ γαρ ου τους αυτούς ψηφΐ€ΐσ*θα£ Τ€...κα1 γνώο-€(τθαι, lit. 'for not the same persons would vote about them and form their opinions from seeing with their own eyes, as they did them- VII xlviii 4 HISTORY OF THUCYDIDP:S selves, the state of the case and not from t h e t fault-finding of others, merely hearing about them—but persons who would allow themselves to b e convinced by the misstatements of any clever speaker', i.e. their fate would b e decided not by judges who would know the facts, as they did themselves, from having been actual eye-witnesses of them (and therefore would be disposed to take an indulgent view of their retreat) rather than from the fault-finding of others, merely hearing second hand a c c o u n t s — n o ; but their judges would be men ready to listen to the specious calumnies of some eloquent speaker. 1. 24. ωσ-irep καΐ αυτοί sc. δρώσι. Cf. c. 55, 2, V c. 29, 1 ; c. 44, 1 πόλιν δημοκρατουμένην ώσπερ καϊ αυτοί (sc. εδημοκρατουντο), Ι 32, ι τους.. .επικουρίας, ώσπερ καΐ ημείς νυν, δεησομένους, but in VI 68, 2 πρδς άνδρας πανδήμει τε αμυνόμενους καϊ ούκ άπολέκτους, ώσπερ καϊ ή μας. 1. 25. ίϊπτιμήσΈΐ, reprehensione, a word of very rare occur­ rence in Attic p r o s e ; it is used by late writers, as Arrian Anab. v vii 5, Lucian Pseudol. c. 3 p . 164, Diodor. Sic. i v , and frequently by Aristotle. efj ών άν...διαβάλλοι, 'from the misrepresentations which a plausible speaker would b e likely to m a k e ' . T h e dv is connected with t h e verb, not with the relative; cf. i v 36, 3 εξ ων αν άνθρωποι δεινοί...δράσειαν. 1. 20. €υ, πιθανώς (SchoL). Cf. I l l c. 38, 4 τα μέλλοντα Hpya από των ευ είπδντων σκοπουντες, c. \ΐ, 2 βυ* διαβολών, Eur. I p h . A . 37^ βούλομαΐ σ1 εΙπεΊν κακώς εΰ, H e r o d . V 50 δια­ βολών εΰ (Kriiger). τούτων is e p a n a l e p t i c of έξ ών — έκ τούτων α, not correlative with it. So Isocr. 8, 32 τοΐς ά'γαθοΐς οι ς Ζχομεν έν ττ} ψυχή, τούτοις κτώμεθα καϊ τας άλλας ωφελείας, T h u c . Ill 64» ι ά 0 ' ων δι* έτερους έ-γένεσθε ayaOoi, από τούτων ώφελεΐσθαι, D e m . 8, 26 αφ' ων δανείζεται, άπδ τούτων διάγβί. See G. Gr.2 § 1030. αυτούς, sc. τους Αθηναίους. § 4 . 1. 27. κα£, atque adeo, ' a n d indeed', O r rather*. Cf. c. 12, 4 ; c. 68, 2 εχθροί καϊ 'έχθιστοι; c. 80, 4 τό ήμισυ καϊ πλέον. 1. 28. βοώσ-tv, ' c l a m o u r ' , 'raise an o u t c r y ' : VI 28, 2, v i l l 86, 2 άποκτείνειν έβόων τους τόν δημον καταλύοντας. 1. 29. ύττό χρημάτων καταΐΓρο8ο'ντ€δ άιτηλθον, ' h a d turned traitors (ingressive aor. participle intransitive) and been bribed to 13—2 i96 NOTES ON TEE depart*: ύπό %ρημάτων=ρέα*ηζα would read χρημάτων without ύπό. vn xlviii 4 addtictos> c. 44, 3. Pluygers 1. 3i. errurra^evos TAS 'Αθηναίων φΰσ€ΐδ, 'knowing well, as he did, the temper of the Athenians': cf. c. 14, 2, 4. 1. 33. ίττό των Tro\€|i,C(ov...Kiv8vv€V(ras τοΰτο ιταθδΐν sc. άπολέσθαι, 'to take his chance and die at the hands of the enemy': cf. 1. 8; o. 11, 4. cl Set, 'if it must be so' /. e. 'if he must die'. 1. 34. Ιδία, 'on his own account', 'in his private capacity'. )( έπ* αίσχρξ. airly, i.e. as a general condemned by the voice of his country on a public charge of corruption. 'Opponitur ei quod in praecedentibus latet, δημοσία* (Dobree). Plutarch alluding to this passage (Nic. c. 22, 3) quotes the language of Nicias which he contrasts with that of Leon of Byzantium:—δεινδν μεν ουδέν αυτόθι προσδοκαν ε'φασκεν, el δ£ συμβαίη, μάλλον αίρεΐσθαι τον ύπό των πολεμίων θάνατον η τον ύπό των πολιτών, ούχ όμοια ψρονών οΐς ϋστερον δ Βυζάντιος Αέων εΐπε προς Τους έαυτοϋ πολίτας' 'βούλομαι yap' £φη 'μάλλον ύ<β ύμων ή μεθ' υμών άποθανεΐν\ 'But Thucydides' says Thirl wall ' by the manner in which he distinguishes between the real and the pretended motives of Nicias, seems to intimate that his fear of the Athenians was a mere pretext. Compare the be ginnings of c. 48 and c. 49'. § 5. 1. 37. €V ir€piiroX£oi$, 'in the stations of περίπολοι* ('patrols'), 'guard-houses', III 99. 'Hie τα Mayapa φρούριον καϊ iv τφ Όλυμπιείω άλλο νΐ 45» * e t si introduced by Stahl from ill 86, 4 δυνατά, εϊη τά έν τη Σικελία πράματα υποχείρια 'γενέσθαι. passages cited by Classen ( i n 23, 5, ν 55, 3, v i n 57, 1) in of the vulgate yiyveaOai, it means contingere, evmire, not come the property of, ' fall into the hands o f . See cr. n. 1. 6. εΐ σφίσι I n the support ' t o be­ τά πράγματα: c. 48, 2 1. 16. 1. 7. ώ<ττ€: s e e n , to c. 48, 1. 22. άττανίσ-τασθαι, abscedere, c. 48, 2. καϊ #μα rats yovv ναυσ-1ν...€θάρσ·€ΐ < κ α Ι > κρατη0€£$, ' a n d at the same time he retained his confidence in his ships in spite of defeat in the field \ Cf. c. 4, 4 where it said of Nicias:— προσεΐχέ τε ήδη μάλλον τφ κατά θάλασσαν πολέμφ, όρων τά εκ της yrjs σφίσιν, επειδή Υύλιππος ηκεν, άνελπιστότερα οντά. The transition from the participle αίσθόμενος to the finite verb έθάρσει presents no difficulty; cf. c. 47, 2 ; c. 69, 2 ; c. 87, 2. Linwood (Emend, etc, p . 35) proposed to read τοις youv ναυσϊ μάλλον η πρότερον θαρσήσας κρατήσει?. But he is inclined to regard the whole clause as the interpolation of a later writer. See crit. n. § 2 . 1. 10. QV8* όιτωσ-οΰν !v€8!\ero, ne tantillum quidem probabat; the verb is generally followed by the ace. of the object which must here be supplied from the context, as in ν 15, 2. ircpl του ιτροσ-καθήσθαι, ' o n the subject of continuing the siege'. T h u c . is partial to the use of περί with the gen. of the substantival infini­ tive. I t occurs 12 times in his history. 1. 12. άν€υ 'Αθηναίων ψηφ£σμ.ατο$: c. 48, 3 μή αύτων ψηφισαμένων. For άνευ 'without the authority of, cf. I 128, 3, IV 78, 3 άνευ του πάντων κοινού πορευόμενον, Soph. Ο. Τ. 1464· 1. 13. τρφ€ΐν αΰτοΰ, morari ibi sc. in Sicilia (c. 39, 2). 1. 14. άνα<ττάντα$, regressos, c. 50, 3, V i n c. 27, 6, c. 45, 1, c. 46, 2 in which passage also it is used of the removal of a force from a post occupied for some considerable time. τοΰτο iroietv, ' t o do s o ' , sc. τρίβειν: see note to c. 48, 1. ' T h a p s u s , a Dorian colony founded by Lamis from Megara (vi 4, 1) was the peninsula which lay north-west of Syracuse (&rn χερσόνησος μεν έν στενφ ίσθμφ προϋχουσα ές τό πέλayoςi της δ£ Συρακουσών πόλεως οϋτε πλουν οϋτε όδόν πόλλήν απέχει. v i i x l i x 3 HISTORY OF T H U C Y D I D E S 199 vi 27, 1. It was here that the Athenian fleet on its voyage out lay for some time before it entered the Great Harbour, vi c. 99, 4; c. 101, 3; c. 102, 3. C a t a n a (modern Catania)^ was founded by Chalcidians from Naxos about the same time. It lay south-east of Mt. Aetna VI ( 3» 3)· Here too the Athenians had made a long stay, see c. 14, 2; c. 57, 11; c. 60, 2; c. 80, 2; c. 85, 4. 1. 16. θρέψονται, * might maintain themselves', the future in­ dicative in a relative clause expressing purpose. See G. MT. § 565, and cf. c. 62, 3, i n 16, 3, vi 21, 1. 1. 17. 4v 7Γ€λάγ€ΐ, 'in the open sea', c. 59, 2. 1. 18. irpos των ΐΓθλ€μίων, 'in the enemy's favour', c. 36, 3 ; c. 81,5. 1. 20. σφών, predicate genitive after έσται, not after i/*· 7 eipl as; 'where the advantages of skill will be theirs'. Γ 1. 21. αναχωρήσεις corresponds by chiastic arrangement to Karatpovres (sc. is βραχύ καί π€ρι*γραπτ6ν1 'into a narrow and circumscribed space'), and επίπλου* to etc βραχέος καί irepiΎραπτοΰ ορμώμενοι. 1. 22. ^ξουσ-ι: c. 36, 6 1. 43· § 3 . το ξύμ/π-αν «iirciv: infinitive of limitation used absolutely without o5s in parenthetical phrase, G. MT. § 100, § 777 ed. ma., HA. § 956. Cf. 1 138, 3. 1. 23. 4v τφ αύτφ: cf. c. 35, 2; c. 87, 2, IV 35, 1 ev τ φ αύτφ άναστρέφεσθαι. 1. 24· Ιξανίσ-τασ-θαι, loco cedere, abscedere. 1. 25. αΰτφ ταΰτα ξυνηγόρβ^ν, 'supported him therein in his speech'. 1. 28. kl υπόνοια μ,ή ; cf. c. 29, 3. τι καί πλέον €ΐδώ$, 'be- 47 cause he knew a good deal more', than they did or than he pro­ fessed. Cf. V 29, 3, VI 90, 1 ei TL πλέον οΐδα where also there'is a hint of some selfish ulterior purpose. 1. 29. Ισχυρίξηται: 1. ι. 1. 30. κα1...δΐ€μΑλησ·αν, 'and so they came to linger on'; cf. c 29, 5. £oo NOTES ON THE VII 1 ι CHAPTER L {Subject continued from c. 46] § 1. 1. 1. ιταρήσ-αν h r a s Συρακούσ-as, 'appeared again at Syracuse'. This would be about one month after the night-attack on Epipolae. F o r the preposition of motion with verb of rest, cf. VI 88, 9 and see my note to X e n . Cyr, I ii 4. 1. 3. άμαρτών του Α κ ρ ά γ α ν τ ο ς 'after failing in his design upon Akragas', c. 46. 1. 5. F o r the position of φιλία, cf. 1. 9 and note to c. 23, 3, and add to the passages there quoted ill 56, 2, i v 122, 5, Xen. Hell. III ii 9 καταλιπών Tas περί εκείνα πόλεις φιλί as iv είρήντ}, Arist. Ach. 1210 (if the reading be correct) της iv μάχτ) συμβολής βαρείας. See also crit. n. €ξ€·π·€·π·τώκ€ΐ, ' h a d been expelled', c. 33, 5. Cf. v i 4, 5. 1. 6. αλλην ο-τρατιάν sc. παρά τε Σικελιωτών καΐ Σελινονντίων} 'έτι δέ Τέλφων, προς δέ τούτοις Ίμεραίων καΐ ΚαμαριναΙων Diod. Sic. XIII 12, 4· 1. 8. τους 4κ τή$ Π€λθϊτοννήο-ου...ά , ΐΓοσταλ€ντα5: For the position of the participle, see n. to 1. 5. α 19, 3· § 2 . 1. 10. d/n-€V€x6€VT€s'. unintentionally: cf. VI 104, 2 άρπασθεϊς υπ* άνεμου airotyipeTai is τό 7ri\ayos. 1. 12. του ττλοΰ lyyepiovas, ' p i l o t s ' . 1. 13. Eueo-irepfams, ' t h e inhabitants of E u e s p e r i d e s , the later B e r e n i c e , now Bengazi, just outside the eastern extremity of the Great Syrtis, west of Barce and south-west of Cyrene, and probably a colony from the same. See Herod, i v 171. Pausanias IV c. 26 states that the greater part of the Messenians when driven by the Lacedaemonians from Naupactus took refuge there. 1. 15. αΰτ<>0€νΛτ. from the Euesperitae. Nc'av πόλιν: Leptis (not the mod. Lamta or Lebddh between Syrtis Minor and Syrtis Major, but) Nebel or Nabal^ the peninsula south-east of Carthage. Strab. Geogr. x v i i c. 3, 16. 1. ι β . &0€vir€p EiKeXCa 4λάχιστον...«π-λοΰν άιτ4χ€ΐ: cf. v i 2, 6 εντεύθεν (sc. from West Sicily) ελάχιστον πλουν Καρχηδών Σικε­ λίας άπέχει9 c. 49' 4 5 c · 97» * ° ^ r e πλουν οϋτε όδον πολλην νιι 14 απέχει, c. 2. 4. HISTORY OF T H U C Y D I D E S 201 δνο ήμ€ρών καΐ VVKTOS: genitives of m e a s u r e (extent), T h e distance between the two points is about 150 miles. 1. 18. Is Σβλινοΰντα: They went to S e l i n u s , because it was friendly to Syracuse, c. 57, 8, v i 48, r. § 3. 1. 25. 1. 20. κ α τ ' άμφότ€ρα: c. 41, 4. οΰκ €irl το β€λτιον χωροΰντα, 'were not improving'. 1. 26. καθ* ήμέραν, in dies, ' d a y by d a y ' . TOIS ττάσ-ι, ' i n 4 8 all respects': cf. 11 c. r i , 6 ; c. 36, 3 ; c. 64, 3 ; ν 28, i 2 . So κατά πάντα ν π c. 47, τ. \αλ€*ιτώτ€ρον ϊ σ χ ο ν τ α , ' w e r e in a worse condition'. Cf. βέλτιον ϊσχειν Plat. Lack. 181 e—an exception to the general use of the verb, which is transitive. I n c. 35, 2 it bears the meaning of appellere. 1. 27. μ ά λ ι σ τ α . . . *ιπ€£όμ€να: c. 47, 2* 1. 28. μ€Τ€μ&οντο...ούκ avacrravres : G. MT. § 881. Cf. IV 27, 2 μετεμέΧορτο τά$ σ7τοι>ό\χ$ ού δεξάμενοι, V 35> 4 r o ^ s δεσμώτας μετεμέλοντο άποδεδωκότες. 1. 29· «s, postquam, 1. 30. δμοίωδ i.e. in like manner as hitherto. praeterquam, ' e x c e p t ' , i n 71, 1. dW ή, μή φαν€ρώ$ ye άξιων ψηφ££«τθαι: T h a t is to say, he did not wish a council of war to be held, at which the taxiarchs and trierarchs would be present, and the question would be decided by o p e n v o t i n g . Compare c. 48, ι, ούκ έβούλετο...εμφανώς σφας ψηφισμένους μετά πολλών την άναχώρησιν τοις πολεμίοις καταγγέλτους yiyveadai. And as the generals on this expedi­ tion were invested with absolute power (αυτοκράτορες), they might act on their own responsibility (Arnold). 1. 3 1 . irpoeiirov « s €δΰναντο άδηλότατα ^κττλουν, 'gave orders for departure with as much secrecy as they could' (cf. 1 139, 1 ένδηλότατα προϋΧ^ον), lest the soldiers should discover the plan and reveal it to the enemy by some act of imprudence. ττάσα, ' t o all' sc. the trierarchs, (not, as Classen, who reads παρασκενάσασθαι, ' t o provide themselves with all requisites'). See crit. n. 1. 33. irap€ Οπως. 1. 4θ. Ιξηγουντο, ' p r e s c r i b e d ' , declared as their interpretation of the will of the gods, the proper technical term. Cf. X e n . Cyr. IV ν 51, V I I iii ι, ν 57, V I I I iii 11, 24. Tpls ivvia.: i . e . the cube or perfect number, cf. V 26, 4, Soph. O. C 483. Diodor. Sic. (XIII 12) speaks of τάς είθισμένας τρεις ημέρας, but Plut. Nic. c. 23, 6 VII li ι HTSTORY OF THUCYDTDES expressly says that whereas ordinarily των irepl ήλων καί σέΚηνην £πΙ rpets ημέρας έποιουντο φύλακήν, 6 δβ Nt/cias α\\ην Ζπασβ σ€\ήνης άναμένειν περίοδον. 'That the army did not actually wait so long proves nothing; for the subsequent disasters were of a nature too overwhelming to allow of any further compliance with such scruples' (Arnold), 1. 41. Kivrfielt]; c. 4, 4. καί Tots μ^ν *Αθηναίοι* κτΙ., 'and so, when they had once delayed for this reason, they had come to stay on'. 'The aor. μελλήσασι' says Prof. Jowett 'expresses the historical fact of the decision, the pluperfect Zysytvyro its irrevo­ cable nature. This was the reason, why they remained. The fatal step had now been taken'. 1. 42. ή μονή: c. 47, 1; c. 131, 1. CHAPTER LI § 1. 1. ι. καί αυτοί... επηρμένοι ι|σαν, 'had on their part be­ come much more than ever elated (c. 41, 3) (and resolved) not to let the Athenians slip out of their hands (c. 18, 3). τοΰτο ιτυθό*μ€νοι, 'hearing of this', i.e. of their final determination to stay. By their previous resolution to depart the Athenians had virtually acknowledged their own inferiority. Prof. Jowett refers τούτο both to the intended departure of the Athenians—which Nicias had been most desirous to conceal from the Syracusans—and also to the adverse omen which pre­ vented it. I.5. σφών: genitive after compar. κρασσβνων. Translate: 'since they (the Athenians) had even themselves now passed an unfavourable judgment on themselves, that they were no longer superior to them (the Syracusans)'. 1. 6. γαρ αν, 'for else (if it had not been so) they would etc.' The sentence to be supplied mentally is el μη έαυτώρ κατε^νωκ6τες ήσαν μηκέτι κρείσσονς eTvai. Cf. I c. 11, 1; c. 68, 4 ; c. 102, 2, ill 84, 2. 1. 7. ov βουλομ€νοι, 'because they did not choose', gives—coordinately with ού κατ€*γνωκδτων—a second reason, why the Syracu­ sans επηρμένοι ήσαν μη avtevat. Cf. c. 14, 3; c. 30, 2. 1. 8. TTJS SiKeXias: partit. gen dependent on adv. of place (ποή; G. § 168, HA. § 757. Cf. c. 49, 2. 204 NOTES ON THE VII li ι 1. 9. χαλ€ΐΓωτ4ρου5 irpocr7roX€(j,€tv, ' more difficult to contend w i t h ' . Cf. c. 14, 2; c. 44, 3, VIII g6, 5 ξνμφορώτατοι προσπολεμήσαι. 1. ί ο . 4ν φ, ' w h e r e ' , not 'whilst'. §2. 1. 12. αν€παρώντο, c. 7, 4 ; c. 12, 5. except the Vat. Β have άνεπαύοντο. Most other MSS. 1. 14. τ η μ£ν «n-ροτφα )( Τ Γ 8' ύστ€ρα(α c. 52, ι. T h e Vat. B has ry προτεραίας but this can only be used, as Kriiger remarks and as is shewn by Herbst {iiber Cobets Emendationen in Thuk. p. 36), where ' t h e preceding d a y ' , as in 1 c. 54, 2, not ' t h e first of two or^more days' is meant, pridie not prwre die* 49 1. 15. -ϊτροσΈ'βαλλον, inchoative imperfect. μέρους TIVOS ου π ο λ λ ο ύ : cf. c. 1, 4. 1. 18. τρεψάμβνοι, 'putting them to flight' i.e. the whole body of the Athenians who came out to meet them. TTJS έο-όδου, ' the e n t r a n c e ' (κατά τινας πύλας) into the Athenian lines. 1. 19. ΪΉ-ίΓουδ: c. 54 1. 5. άιτολλύουοη: the same form occurs in IV 25, 5 but άποΧΚύασί in Viil 10, 3. CHAPTER LII § 1 . 1. 4. ££ και Ιβδομήκοντα : I n the previous sea-fight (c. 37, 3) there were 80 Syracusan and 75 Athenian ships. T h e Athenians might have fitted out more, after the arrival of the 73 ships (c. 42, 1 ) : the narrowness of the space was probably the cause why they did not. 1. 6. άντανήγον ναυσ-ί: but in c. 37, 4 we have avrav/jyov.., νανς. Cf. άνά^εσθαι ναυσΐ VIII c. ro, 2; c. 12, 3 ; c. ig, 4 ; άντανayetrOai is also used without any case, as in c. 40, 3, I 29, 4, i v 13, 4, V I I I c. 63, 2 ; c. 79, 6 ; c. 80, 1. 1. 7. ιτροσ·|λ€ίξαντ€8, congressi, c. 39, ι . «ναυμαχούν, 'commenced the battle \ T h e immediate occasion of the fight is told by Plutarch Nic. c. 24, 2. § 2 . 1. 8. έχοντα το δ€ξιόν Κ€ρα$: καθ* ο (ace. to Diod. Sic. XIII13) έτάχθη 6 των Σνρακοσίων στρaτηybς 'Δτγάθαρχος (cf.c.25, ι*, c 7θ) ι)> €7ΓΙ δέ θατέρου μέρους (i.e. on the left wing) Εύθύδημος (c. 160 1J c. 69, 4) έτέτακτο, καθ' ov άντετάξατο Σικανός (c. 4 6 ; c. 50, ι ; C. 70» ι) ™V Σνρακοσίων ^ούμενος* της δέ μέσης τάξεως είχε τήν ^εμονίαν παρά μέν rocs ΆθψαΙοις Μένανδρος (c. 16, ι ; VII liii i HISTORY OF THUCYDTDES c. 43, 2; c. 69, 4) παρά δε τοις Σνρακοσίοις Ιίύθης ό Κορίνθιος (ΙΙνθψ c ι, ι ; c 7ο, ι ; ν ι 104, -2). 1. ί ο . έπΈξάγοντα, as he was drawing off from the centre to­ wards the shore, in order to turn or overlap the enemy's left, c. 70, 1. 1. 13. κάκ€ΐνον sc. τόν Έύρυμέδοντα; the pronoun is rendered necessary because the participial clause νικήσαντες κτε. has a different object. 4v τω κοίλω.,.τοΰ λιμένος, ' i n the inner bay of the h a r b o u r ' , c. 4, 4. See crit. note. Diod. Sic. c. Xiii 13, 3 gives a description of the incident, probably after Philistus:—επιχείρησα* περιπλεΐν τό κέρας των εναντίων, ως άπεσπάσθη της τάξεως, έπιστρεψάντων έπ1 αυτόν των Σνρακοσίων, άπελήφθη προς τόν κόλπον τόν Αάσκωνα μεν καλούμενον, υπό δε των Σνρακοσίων κατεχόμενον. κατακλεισθείς δ' εις στενόν τόπον καϊ βιασθείς εις την yijv έκπεσεΐν, αυτός μεν ύπό τίνος τρωθείς καίρια πλη-γτ} τόν βίον μετήΧλαξεν επτά δε ναϋς εν τούτω τφ τόπω διεφθάρησαν. T h e bay was that of D a s c o n , which is formed by the now called Punta CaderinL and a projection of land north of i t ; which was held by the Syracusans, that is, by the garrison of Polichna. 1. 15. τάδ μ.6τ' αύτοΰ ναΰς eirunrojiivas: for the position of the participle, see note to c. 23, 3, and for μετά. with έφέπεσθαι, c. 57, 9, Xen. Cyr. ν ii 36, VI ii 10. W h e r e there is a common purpose or some bond of connexion between two parties, the prepo­ sitions επί or μετά are used with 'έπεσθαι; where, however, mere 'following after' is denoted, the dat. alone is used. See Cobet Far. Led. p . 22. 1. 17. Ιδωθούν, 'proceeded to drive ashore'. v i i i c. 104, 4 ; c. 105, 1. Cf. II 93, 5, CHAPTER LIII § 1. 1. 3. ?ξω των σταυρωμάτων: c. 38, 2, 3. Cf. VI c. 66, 2 ; c. 74, 2. του εαυτών στρατοπέδου: the Athenians did not once succeed in regaining their stockaded refuge. 1. 4. καταφβρομένας, 'being driven ashore' i.e. to the nearest points, not, as Leake, 'along the shore'. Cf. c. 71, 6, IV c. 26, 7 άνέμφ καταφέρεσθαι; c. 120, 1, VI 2, 3. See Addenda. 1. 5. βουλόμ-evos ..τάβ vavs p<£ov τους Σ . άφέλκβίν rrjs γης φιλίας οΰσης, 'intending that the Syracusans should more easily 2o6 NOTES ON THE vn liii t tow away (as prizes) the ships (of the Athenians) (which were run aground), where the shore was in the occupation of friends'. For άφέλκειν, cf. 74, 2, II 93, 4 τάς τριήρεις αφείλκυσαν κενάς. See Addenda. 1. 7. παρ€βοήθ€ΐ eirl την χ η λ ή ν κτ|·, 'hastened with a portion of his army to the causeway' or mole which ran from the city between the sea and the marsh Lysimeleia up to or beyond the Athenian encampment. T h e engagement between the Syracusans and Tyrrhenians took place probably on the south-west side of the Athenian camp, i.e. the side furthest from the city. T h e exact position of the Athenian camp is nowhere pre­ cisely indicated by Thucydides. But a) it was somewhere between the river Anapus, which the Athenians crossed on their final retreat (c. 78, 1), and the wall of Syracuse, b) I t must have ended in the double Athenian wall which ran up to Epipolae (c. 60, 1) and must have come down to the harbour. c) T h e distance from the city wall to the mouth of the Anapus would be about a mile. T h e distance from the southern cliff of Epipolae to the harbour varies from less than half a mile to rather more than a mile. Within the space thus roughly de­ scribed, a great part of which was taken up by the marsh Lysi­ meleia, would have to be placed a camp large enough to afford room for forty or fifty thousand men. T h e position occupied, though described as έλώδες (c. 47, 2), must have been slightly raised above the general level of the marsh (Jowett). χηλη'ν: Schol. on I 6$, 1 χηλΐ} καλείται ol έμπροσθεν του προς θάλασσαν τείχους ιτροβεβλημένοι λίθοι δια την των κυμάτων βίαν, μη τό τείχος βλάπτοιτο. εϊρηται δε πάρα τό έοικέναι χηλή βοός. It is the Latin crepido, Cic. Verr. ν 37 piraticus myoparo usque ad forum Syracusanorum el ad omnes crepidines urbis accessit. Cf. H o l m Gesch. Sic. 11 p . 396. § 2 . 1. 8. avTOtis, sc. τους Συρακοσίους. ol Τυρ<τηνοί: cf. VI c. 88, 6 Ζπεμψαν (sc, ol Αθηναίοι) δε καΐ is Ύυρσηνίαν, foriv ών πόλεων επαγγελλομένων καΐ αύτων ξυμπολεμεΐν, c 103» 2 ηλθον δε...και εκ της ΎυρσηνΙας νηε$ ττεντηκόντοροι τρεις. These E t r u s ­ c a n s were armed and organised like the Greek hoplites. 1. 9. ταύτη, 'in this quarter' i. e. on the Northern side of the Athenian camp. €φύλα<τσον = & φυλακή ήσαν. 1. ί ο . €ΐΓ€κβοηθη<τα.ντ€5, 'sallying out «of their guard-post (φυλακή) to attack them and rescue their friends'. T h e verb occurs again in v n i 55, 3. VII liii 4 HISTORY OF T H U G Y D I D E S 207 Similar compounds are :— >έπεκβαίνειν ι 49, 5 ; Vlli 105, 1 ; έπεκθεΐν IV 34, i ; V 9, 7, {έπεκδρομή IV 25, n ) ; έπεκπλεΐν VII 37, i; έπεξά'γειν VII 52, 2, II 21, 3 ; έπεξι,έναί VI 97, 5 ; άντεπεξιέναι VII 37, 3 ; έπεξελθεΐν VII 5 1 , 2, VI c. 38, 2 ; c. 98, 2 ; (έπέξοδον ποιεΐσθαήν 8, 2. 1. 12. την Λυσιμ€λ€ΐαν καλουμίνην, called simply τ ό £Xos in 5 0 ν ι ι ο ί , 2. 1. 13. irXefovos, predicative. § 3 . 1. 15. «Γΐβοηθήσ-avTcs καΐ SefcravTes, 'advancing to the support of the Tyrrhenians in their fear for their ships' (1. 26), the effect and the cause being expressed coordinately. T h e gen. with περί after verbs of f e a r may signify fear of or fear f o r ; the dat. is limited to fear f o r ; Plat. Prot. 320 a δεδι,ώς περί αύτον μή διαφθαρξ, but more precisely 332 c δείσας περί τφ γένει ημών μτ) άπόλοίτο παν. See Shilleto on T h u c . I 60. es μ-άχην κατέ­ σ τ η σ α ν , 'engaged in a regular and general action'. 1. 18. ξυνήγαγον κατά τό στρατόΐΓ€δον, ' b r o u g h t together (again) within their station' i.e. the stockaded refuge in front of fheir camp, 1. 4. Herwerden brackets κατά τό στρατόπεδον, on the ground that T h u c . would have written is τό στρατόπεδον. 1. 20. ί-λαβον, 'they captured'. These galleys therefore could not, as Grote supposes, have belonged to the division of Eurymedon, which were destroyed by the Syracusans, c. 51 1. 15. § 4 . 1. 23. κληματίδων καΐ δαδός, 'with fagot-wood and pinewood', the collective singular coupled to a plural noun, as u 4, 2 \L6ois τε καΐ κεράμφ βαλλόντων. Cf. X e n . Cyr. VII ν 23 πολλών δ$δα 'έχομεν, ή ταχύ πολύ πυρ τέξεται, Plut. Anton, c. 74» 2 ^πΐ πασι δέ συνεφόρει δξ,δα πολλών και στυππεΐον. 1. 25· otfpios i.q. έπίφορος, 'blowing in the direction', i n 74, 2 εΐ άνεμος ε*γένετο τ$ φλο'γΐ επίφορος es αυτήν, Π 77» 5 πνεύμα εΐ επεγένετο αΰτζ (sc. τ# πδλει) επίφορον. Ι . 2 7 . σβ€στηριάτ€ < κ α Ι > κωλύματα, 'means of extinguishing and preventives': with the former έπαυσαν ττ)ν φλόγα, with the latter (έκώλυσαν) τό μή προσελθεΐν εγγύς τ^ν ολκάδα. See crit. note. ΐΓαύσαντ€δ...τό μή ιτροσ€λθ€Ϊν: the infinitive with τό μή may denote either the prevention itself or the result of the preven­ t i o n : see G. MT. § 811 ed. ma., H A . § 1029· 2o8 NOTES ON THE vn liv ι CHAPTER LIV 1. 2. rrjs ναυμαχίας τροτταΐον : see on c. 24, 1; c. 41, 4. 1· 3· TTJS άνω, 'that on the high ground or (c. 4, 1) Epipolae', see c. 51, 2, not, as Portus, 'the former' nor, as others, the 'above described'. Sitzler explains it as = κατά yrjv. 1. 5. 69€v=e£ ης άπολήψβως, 'that whereby', not, as Classen, 'on which occasion'. 'Αθηναίοι 8έ, sc. τρόπαιον 'έστησαν της τροπής ψ έποίήσαντο oi Τ. τών πεζών... καϊ ταύτης ην αυτοί (έποιήσαντο) τφ άλλφ στρατοπέδω. For the i n c o r p o r a t i o n of the ante­ cedent into the relative clause (where it loses its article), see HA. §995. CHAPTER LV § 1. 1. 2. λαμ/Trpas (not, as Jowett, 'brilliant' but) 'clear', 'decisive', 'incontestable'. Cf. Arrian Anab. 11 n , 3 λαμπρά re καϊ εκ πάντων η φνγη iyiyveTO, I 49, 6 η τροπή eyiveTO λαμπρώς, II 7, ι λελυμένων λαμπρώς των σπονδών, Plut. Suit. c. 29, 5 λαμπρώς ένίκα. καϊ του ναυτικού, 'of the fleet as well' (as the land force); the latter they had beaten1 already (c. 43). Cf. 1. 15 καϊ reus ναυσϊν ίκρατήθησαν. 1. 3· μ4ν, which has no corresponding δέ, gives a slight em­ phasis to πρότ€ρον, as when it follows personal pronouns. The μέν 1. 5 is correlative to the δέ in c. 56 1. 1. 1. 4. €ΐτ€λθούσ·αδ: for the position of the attributive participle, cf. c. 23, 3 with note, c. 52, 2. I. 5. €v ιταντί άθυμία$, 'in utter despondency'. See n. to c. 2, 4, and cf. Plato Rep. p. 279b hv παντϊ κάκου etys, Herod, vn 118 els παν κάκου άπικέατο, Plut. Fab. c. 25, 2 επί παν δέους. 1. 6. ό «ιταράλογοΒ : c. 28, 3· 1. 7. μ€Ϊ£ων 2τι rrjs στρατ€^α5 ό μ€τώμ€λο$, 'still greater was their regret at the expedition (to Sicily)', objective gen. μετάμέλος elsewhere only in later Greek, as Dion Cass. 38, 31. § 2. 1. 8. iroXeari ταυταιβ μόναΐ8...€,π·€λθόντ€8: For the rela­ tive order of the words, cf. I 1, 2 κίνησις yap αϋτη μ^ίστη eyέveτo, where also a pronominal subject follows a predicate substantive, and is itself followed by the attributive adjective. This position of νιι Ιν 2 HISTORY OF T H U C Y D I D E S 209 the subst. gives it, as Classen observes ad I., a character of general­ ity, with pretty much the effect of a partitive genitive. Translate:— 'Since of all the cities that they had gone to war with, these were the only ones at that time (vi 31, 6) similar in character to their c w n \ Cf. v n i 96, 5 where it is said of the Syracusans μάλιστα ομοιότροποι γενόμενοι άριστα καϊ προσεπολέμησαν. 1. ί ο . ώσπερ καϊ αυτοί (sc. εδημοκρατουντο): see n. to c. 48, 3· 1.11. |Χ6·γ4θη, magnitudines. T h e plural of μέγεθος is not found elsewhere in T h u c . (who uses μέγεθος even in speaking of more than one object, c. 72, 2, I 2, 2 μεγέθει πόλεων), but, though found chiefly in geometrical writers, it is used by Aristophanes {Ran. 1057), Xenophon {Cyneg. c. 4, 1) and Plato (Protag. 356, 3, Critias i i 5 d , Legg. 860 b, 861 e). I t expresses here not only the extent of the s e v e r a l cities, but the greatness of their material resources. See crit. n. €7Γ€ν€γκ€Ϊν...τι...φ ιτροο-ηγοντο οίν, ' t o bring to bear upon them any thing whereby they might have gained over (or ' reduced to dependence') the party at variance with them, either by a change of government or as the result of a decided superiority of military force \ This is Stahl's explanation of the passage, and it seems to me much better than that of Valla, Classen and others, who make το διάφορον depend upon έπενεγκεΐν, with the meaning cansam dissidii iitter ipsos, ' e l e m e n t of discord', whether τι be taken with it or, as by Classen, with μεταβολής adverbially, ' i n any respect'. See, however, Addenda. 1. 12. IK governs μεταβολής. F o r the position of noun, cf. 24, 2 ; c. 42, 4. το διάφορον = τους διαφόρους, see η . to c. 43, 7. αύτοΐδ sc. τοΐς πολίταις, implied in πολεσι. W i t h the tenour of the whole passage compare the anti-war speech of Nicias in VI 20, 2:—επί yap πόλεις μέλλομεν Uvai μεγάλας και ο#0' υπηκόους αλλήλων ουδέ δεομένας μεταβολής, y αν εκ βίαιου τις δουλείας άσμένος ες ρ%ω μετάστασιν χωροίη.,.καΐ παρεσκευασμέναι τοις πασιν όμοιοτρόπως μάλιστα ΤΎ} ημετέρα δυνάμει. 1. 13. ιτροσ-ηγοντο ά ν : the p o t e n t i a l i n d i c a t i v e , a past form of the potential optative, merely expressing possibility or pro­ bability, without reference to any definite condition. Cf. c. 14, 45 c. 44, 1, and see G. MT. § 244 ed. ma. T. VII Η NOTES 2IO ON THE VII lv 2 1. 14. σ-φιλλόμ€νοι: this and the two preceding participles, επε\θοντε$—ου δυνάμενοι, indicate the reasons for their feeling of απορία. τά πλςίω, adverbially. Cf. c. 63, 2, I c. 69, 5 τά ττλβίω σφαλέντα c. 13, 5. So τα κράτιστα I c. 19, τά τελευταία c. 24, 4. τα, προ αυτών: adverbial accusative, 'before i t ' sc. the late events, i.e. before they had sustained their late defeat by sea. In Greek αυτά, ταύτα are commonly used for our ' i t \ 'this', in reference to the circumstances or state of things spoken of in the context, as in 1 1, 3 τά προ αύτων in reference to the before-men­ tioned κίνησα. Cf. c. 66, 1. 1. 15. The ye appears to emphasize the sentence introduced by επειδή. 1. ι6. ουκ &ν φόντο: see η. to 1. 13. c. 16, 3. in sc. ήπόρουν. ιτολλφ δή: see n. to CHAPTER LVI § 1. 1. 1. Si answers to μέν of c 55, 1. 5. Ίταρ£π·λ€ον, 'sailed along (the shore of) the Harbour'. τον λιμένα 1. 3. 8i€vooivTo κλησ-ίΐν, 'determined that they would close'. Cf. IV c. 115, 2 πυρ ένήσειν διενοοΰντο, c. 121, ι τόν re πόλεμον διενοοΰντο προθύμων οϊσειν, VIII C 55' 2 °* ^ διενοοΰντο βοή­ θησε ιν, c 74> 3 διανοούνται τούτων τού$ προσήκοντα? \αβόντε$ εϊρζειν. The use of the future infinitive in these passages stands on quite a different footing from that after verbs of wishing, 'being able', (which I hold to be impossible, see my n. to c. 11 1. 15), because διανοεΐσθαι is equivalent to μέλλειν; therefore Cobet is not justified in condemning them. See Stahl Quaest. Thuc. p. 18 f. ed. 2. 1. 5. ir€pl του σω&ηναι: cf. c. 49, 2. § 2. 1. 7. OTTOS κωλυσουσ-ι sc. σωθήναι. Cf. VI 88, 5 TOI)S μεν προσψάτγκαζον (προσχωρεΐν) τους δε και άπεκώλύοντο sc. προσανα^κά,ζειν. The future indicative is normal in an object clause with OVOJS after verbs of caring for; see G. MT. § 45, § 339 ed. ma. 1. 8. oirep ήν, 'as indeed was the case'. 1. 9. άιτο των τταρόντων, 'because of present circumstances'. Cf. II 77, ι εκ των παρόντων δεινών, 'under their existing difficulties', c. 76 ws εκ των υπαρχόντων. καθυτΓ€ρτ€ρα sc. των 'Αθηναίων, VII Ivi 3 HISTORY OF T H U C Y D I D E S 211 1. 12. καλόν es TOV»S "Ελληνα?, 'glorious in the eyes of all the Hellenes'. So I 33, 2 {$ύναμι$) φέρουσα es τους πολλού? άρβτήν, ' a reputation for valour', where Shilleto quotes E u r . Bacch. 778 ^0705 es "Ελληνας μ^γα*. το αγώνισμα, ' the struggle and its outcome', recurs c. 59, 2; c. 86, 2. C 4λ€υθ€ροΰ<τθαι: T h e dv seems necessary, because the clause is under the influence of the protasis et δύναιντο κρατησαι. See Stahl Quaest. Th. p . 9 ed. 2. Classen retains the MS. reading without av, observing that the p r e s e n t expresses much more forcibly the i n s t a n t a n e o u s result. 1. 17. 8oijavT€s αυτών αϊτιοι €Ϊναι, 'having the credit of being the founders of i t ' i.e. της re ελευθερίας των 'Ελλήνων καϊ του άπαλAcry^rai του φόβου, as the Scholiast explains. See n. to c. 55 1. 14. 1. 18. νπο των ihreira θάυμα<τθη<Γ€(Γθαι depends upon νομίζοντες 1. 8. Cf. c. 63, 3, II 4 1 , 4 rots re νυν καϊ r o t s e V e t r a (posteris) θαυμασ Θησό μέθα. § 3 . 1. 19. καΐ.,.δε: I n this combination of particles, και is not the copula, but emphasizes the fact as opposed to conjecture, and δέ—autem is epexegetic. See Classen on I 132, 4, who com­ pares II 36, 1, IV 24, 5. άξιος = άξίόλο'γο$ as I 142, 7. 1. 20. κατά ταΰτα, 'for this reason', c. 57, 5, 7 ; c. 58, 3 . 1. 2 1 . ·7Γ€ρΐ€γιγνοντο, 'were on the eve of conquering \ 1. 22. ουδέ, ' n o t either', 'also n o t ' . 1 I.23. μ€τά, 'in partnership w i t h ' . T h e two participial clauses — 7]Ύ€μ6ν€ί γενόμενοι and έμπαρασχόντες—are circumstantial to irepieylyvovTo. 1. 25. €μΐΓαρασχόντ€8 irpoKiv8w€v 2 ερενδαιμορησαι, c 74» * ττα/)^σχετε αύττ]Ρ (ΤΤ)Ρ yijv) ευμενή έναΎωνίσασθαι, Xen. SymJ>. c. 2, 18 οίκημα εριδρώσαι. So εντίκτειρ, εραττοθν^σκειρ i l l 104, 2, ίραυλίζεσθαι i n 91» 6. 1. 26. irpoKiv8\>V€v *· 1. 28. ό χ λ ο υ : the reading of Kriiger for the vulgate Xoyov, accepted by Stahl, Classen and Herbst, suggested by c. 75, 5 μυριάδες ί-ύμπαρτος του δχλον ούκ έλάσσους τεσσάρωρ άμα έπορεΰορτο. VII lvii 2 HISTORY OF THUCYDIDES 1. 29. τοΰ...ΐΓρόδ τ η ν Α θ η ν α ί ω ν τ€ ττόλιν καΐ Λ . : supply OVTOS or Ύ€νομένου, ' which were (assembled) on the side, round the standard of, the Athenians or Lacedaemonians'. F o r the sense of προς, Arnold aptly compares III 11, 5 εχόντων των πάντων irpbs 6 τι χρτ} στήναι i.e. ' a rallying-point', Kriiger, IV 56, 2 irpbs την εκείνων *γνώμψ del 'έστασαν. See critical note. CHAPTER LVII § 1. 1. 2. eirl Σικ€λ(αν τ€...4ΐΓθλ^μη<Γαν, * entered into t h e war against or for Sicily', ingressive aorist, c. 29, 4 ; c. 49, ι. τ ε Kdi=vel—ν el. 1. 3.. T h e order is έλΰδντςς iirl ( ' t o ' ) Συρακούσα* TOTS μϊν (sc. TOLS Άθηναίοιή ζυ*γκτησ6μ€νοι TTJV χώραν, r o t s δ£ (sc. TOIS ΣνρακοσΙοι$) ξννδιασώσοντβς. 1. 4· ξΰνδιασώσ-ovTis, ' t o help to preserve it (the indepen­ dence of Sicily) throughout the struggle'. This compound is found also in IV 62, 1 and v i 89, 6. 1. 5. ού κατά 8£κην &τχον, 'choosing their side not so much from a sense of right or from obligations of kinship, as from the accident of compulsion or their own interest' (Jowett). 1. 6. τ ι , adverbial ace. c at a l l ' , ' i n any degree'. αλλήλων στάντίβ: cf. c. 57, 5 ; c. 6 1 , 3 μεθ* ημών στηναι. μ.€τ 1. 7· <5s ϊκα<ττοι...&τχον is Boehme's (and Heilmann's) cor­ rection of the MSS. ώ$ έκαστοι*..Ασχςν, which Arnold translates ' a s each were severally circumstanced', comparing Herodot. v i i 188 τοίσι οΰτω έΐχβ δρμον, 'those who were so stationed'. T h e objection to this is that Thucydides does not use §χειν with modal adverb i m p e r s o n a l l y . For the construction, cf. c. 2, 1, II 90, 4 ώ; ςΐχον τάχοι/s, I 22, 3 (os έκατέρων τι$ euvoias rj μνήμης 'έχοι. Classen's whether out came into a or the other' 1. 8. translation 'according as the individual states, of regard to their own interest or from coercion, nearer relationship with (ξυντνχίας) the one side is scarcely tenable. ανάγκη = κατ ανάγκην, 1. 30. § 2 . 1. 8. * Αθηναίοι.. ."Loves επί Δωριέας Συρακοσίους sc. δντας, in chiastic arrangement, to emphasize the opposition of races. Cf. § 8 Meyapevai Σελινουντίοι? οΰσι. 2X4 NOTES ON THE VII lvii 2 1. i o . €KOVT€S, nulla re, velut foedere vel societate, coacti ut expeditionem susciperent (Stahl), avTots τ η αυτί), ' t h e same as t h e m ' , ό atfros, idem, takes the dat. when it refers to a common third object, cf. c. 33, 6 and cf. G. § 186, H A . § 773. So in Latin, H o r . A. P. 467 invitum qui servat, idem facit occidenti. 1. 11. νόμιμοι^ sc. ro?s αύτο?$. $ri, to be taken, not as Stahl, with χρώμςνοι, 'continuing to u s e ' , when other colonists had changed theirs, but, as Kriiger, praeterea, 'besides', with ήλθον. I n the former case we should have expected 'έτι TOTC. 1. 12. Λήμνιοι καΐ "Ιμβριοι are coupled also in IV 28, 4, and in inverse order i n 5, 1. T h e occupation and settlement of L e m n o s was effected by Miltiades (Herod, v i 137—140) a few years before the battle of Marathon, and that of I m b r o s probably 'about the same t i m e : for Herodotus speaks of it in the reign of Cambyses, as 'έτι. τ6τβ υπό Ue\aay(ov οίκεομέρην, but when Miltiades was forced by the Persians to leave his sovereignty of the Thracian Chersonesus and escape to Athens (B.C. 493), it is mentioned, that being chased on his way by the Phoenician fleet, he ran into Imbros for refuge (Herodot. v i 41)·—the last place where he would have sought shelter, had it been still occupied by the Pelasgians, whose kinsmen he had so lately driven out of Lemnos* (Arnold). ΑΙγινήται—'EimaMJs. T h e settlement of Athenian cleruchs at A e g i n a took place as late as the Peloponnesian war B.C. 431 ( n 2 7 ) ; the submission of the island B.C. 456 (i 108, 4). T h e ^original inhabitants were of Doric descent. Aristophanes is said to have been one of these κΚηρουχοι or έποικοι. So he humorously tells us (Ac A. 650 f.) that the wish of the Lacedaemonians to get A e g i n a back was in order to rob the Athenians of the poet, because the King had said that either of the great powers πολύ pucfoeiv τούτον ξύμβουλον 'έχοντα*—not for the actual value of the island itself. 1.13. Έ σ τ ι α ι ή β . H e s t i a e a in Euboea—to be distinguished from Hestiaea in Acarnania—was settled fourteen years earlier than Aegina in B.C. 445. T h e colony probably received its new name O r e u s ( v n i 95, 7) from the adjoining place, when the Athenians took possession of the land ('Eo-rtcuas έξοικίσαντες αυτοί r V yw 'έσχον, I 114, 5). Still the old name was retained in public documents and on coins in the time of the geographers Pausanias ( v n 26, 2 (4)), and Strabo (x 445). See Shilleto ad I. 1. 14. £υν€σ-τράτ€υσαν, una cum its profecti sunt (Stahl), ' took the field with t h e m ' , ingressive aorist; but ξυν€<ττράτ€υον (1. 17) 'served with them in the w a r ' . VII lvii 4 HISTORY OF T H U C Y D I D E S 215 § Q. 1. 15. υπήκοοι: those who acknowledged the Athenian \iegemony and had entered into a perpetual alliance with them— whether autonomous and free from tribute, furnishing ships of their own accord (veQv παροκωχτ} αυτόνομοι, § 4, 5, VI 85, ι) or paying money instead of ships (§ 5, II 9, 4), called υποχείριοι i n 11, ι. οι αϊτό ξυμμαχ£α$ αυτόνομοι—elsewhere stiled simply αυτόνομοι (c. 57, 7, VI 69, 3) or πάνυ ελευθέρως ζυμμαχοϋντε* (vi 85, 2)—are those, who like the Corcyraeans made only a temporary alliance. Besides these, there is also another class of αυτόνομοι allies, who are really υπήκοοι, but are regarded as autonomous because of the laxity they enjoy in the use of their own laws and constitutional customs, i n c. 10, 6 ; c. 11, 1; c. 39, 1 {Stahl). § 4 . 1. 17. των μ^ν υπηκόων καΐ φόρου v-rroTeXcov: enu­ merated according to their geographical subdivisions:— From E u b o e a come the inhabitants of E r e t r i a ( v i n c. 60, 1; c. 95), C h a l c i s (vi c. 3 ff.; c. 76, 2 ; c. 84, 3), S t y r a (Herod, v i n 46), C a r y s t o s (1 98, 3, i v c. 42, 1 ; c. 43, 3, v n i 69, 3). F r o m the C y c l a d e s (1 4, 1, 11 9, 4), those of Ceos, A n d r o s (11 55, 1, i v 42, r, v i n 69, 3), T e n o s ( v n i 69, 3). F r o m A s i a t i c I o n i a , thoseof M i l e t u s (IV c. 42, 1 ; c. 53, 1 ; c. 54, 1), S a m o s ( v n i c. 2 1 ; cc. 4 8 — 5 2 ; c. 63, 3 ; c. 74, 1; c. 75» 3), C h i o s (c. 20, 2, 1 19, i n 10, 5, v i c. 4 3 ; c. 85, 2, v i n c. 20, 4 ; c. 32 f.; c. 38 ; c. 40 f.; c. 55 f.; c. 61). F r o m A e o l i a , those of M e t h y m n a in Lesbos ( i n c. 2, 1; c. 5, 1; c. 18, 1, 2 ; c. 50, 2, v i 85, 2), A e n u s in Thrace (iv 28, 4), T e n e d o s ( i n c. 2, 3 ; c. 28, 2 ; c. 35, 1). Of D o r i a n d e s c e n t , those of R h o d e s (vi 43), C y t h e r a ( c 26, 2, i v c. 53—55 ff.; c. 118, 4, V c. 14, 3 ; c. 18, 7). From the W e s t e r n I s l a n d s , those of Z a c y n t h o s (11 c. 7, 3 ; c. 9, 4, i l l c. 94, 1; c. 95, 2), C e p h a l l e n i a ( n c. 7, 3 ; c. 30, 2), C o r c y r a (c. 44, 6, I 44, ι, π c. 9, 4 f.; c. 25, 1; III c Q4, 1; c. QS, 2). 2i6 NOTES ON THE vnlvii4 1. 2 1 . τούτων Χ ί ο ι κτ€.: a correction of the preceding statement, in which the C h i a n s are classed among oi υποτελείς φόρου. Stahf and Steup would omit καΐ φόρου υποτελών (1. i8) from the text, by way of saving Thucydides from a contradiction of himself. 1. 23. το *r\€io-Tov...iravT€$, 'for the most part all', 'all or nearly a l l ' . I n the Cyclades and Styra (Herodot. V I I I 46) there were some of a different race. 1. 24. οΰτοι iravT€S goes back to the υπήκοοι κτέ., and includes the C h i a n s , who are geographically reckoned with them. άιτ Αθηναίων = άποικοι 'Αθηναίων: cf. VI 76» 3 οσθί αΊΓ0 σφων ήσαν ζύμμαχοι. 1. 25· Apvoires: an aboriginal people of Hellas, whose home was near Mt. Oeta and Mt. Parnasus, probably driven away from their settlements by Dorians. They afterwards settled in Argolis and Euboea. νττηκοοι SVTCS καΐ ανάγκη., .ηκολοΰθουν, * though they were subjects and went on the service under outward com­ pulsion (and therefore unwillingly) still they followed, as (was natural for) Ionians against D o r i a n s ' i.e. it was not irksome to them to serve against their natural enemies although it was not in a quarrel of their own (Arnold). § 5. states. 1. 26. irpos 8* αύτοΐδ, ' a n d besides t h e m ' i.e. the Ionian 1. 27. Μηθυμναίοι: the only inhabitants of Lesbos, who were αυτόνομοι, III 50, 2, VI 85, 2. 1. 29. ούτοι S£: 1. 24. Αιολή$ ΑΙολευσι.,.Ιμάχοντο: they were compelled to fight against their own founders, the Boeotians fighting on the side of the Syracusans who were Aeolians. For the position of the words, cf. 1. 9 , 1 . 51. B o e o t i a was the country from which the Aeolian races emi­ grated, and in later times it was regarded as the mother country of the A e o l i a n colonies, C U R T I U S , Hist. Gr. I p . 127 quoted by Classen. 1. 30. μ€τά Συρακοσ-ίων: c. 56, 3 ; c. 57, 1, 6. 1. 31. α ν τ ι κ ρ ύ Βοιωτοί Βοιωτοϊδ, 'being pure Boeotians them­ selves', not, as Jowett, 'Boeotians actually fighting against Boeo­ t i a n s ' . See crit. n . 1. 32. μόνοι: «they and no other Boeotians'. ' T h e Plataeans here spoken of are either those who escaped from the siege and νπ lvii s HISTORY OF THUCYDIDES 217 had taken refuge at Athens (ill 24, 3), or those who had settled in Scione like Athenian κλ-ηροϋχοι (ν 32, i ) ' {Classen). «ίκότως κατά τό 2χθοδ, 'as was natural because of the hatred they bore them'. Cf. 1. 47. § β. 1. 33· 'Ρόδιοι. The Rhodians contributed slingers, VI 43· 1. 34. Λακ€δαιμονίων άποικοι, Κυθήριοι. Hence we learn incidentally that Cythera, like Pylos, had not been given back to the Lacedaemonians, though the mutual restoration of all places taken in war was one, of the conditions of peace (v c. 17, 2) and although C y t h e r a is named in the treaty, c. 18, 7 (Joweti). 1. 35. έίμα ΓνλίΐΓτπο : We should have expected μετά or ζύν. 1. 36. οττλα έϊΓ€'φ€ρον: so Classen with the Vat. Β for the vulgate 6πλα Ζφερον. Cf. V c. 18, 4 ; c. 47, 2; c. 49, ι. Ά ρ τ ι ο ι γ4νο$: see Miiller's Dorians·, I p. 113 if. Engl. Tr. 1. 37. TeXipois: c. 33, 1; c. 50, 1; c. 80, 2. καΐ diroCKOIS, 'colonists as well' as Dorians, VI 4, 3. § 7. 1. 40. Κ6φαλλήν€δ*. π c. 7, 3; c. 30, 2. The correla­ tive to the first μέν is δέ 1. 44, to the second, δέ 1. 42. 1. 42. κατά τό νηο-ιωτικόν μάλλον κατ€ΐργόμ€νοι, ' who by reason of their position as islanders were more under constraint (than those on the continent), because etc.' 1. 45. σαφώς, 'confessedly' (1 c. 25, 3 and cf. I c. 13, 4, cc. 24—32; cc. 45—56), explained by what immediately follows:— των μβν (sc. των "Κορινθίων) άποικοι OVTCS. 1. 46. των δέ (sc. των Σνρακοσίων) ξυγγςνέις: Syracuse (c. 28, 3), and C o r c y r a were founded by a common μητρόπολις (νι 3, 2). ανάγκη \άν κτΙ., 'under a specious appearance indeed of compulsion, but really quite as much from choice, because of their hatred for the Corinthians'. 1. 47. κατά ^χθος: c. 56, 3. § 8. 1. 48. οι Μ€σ·ο-ήνιοι νυν καλοΰμ€νοι )( οι παλαιοί Μ,εσσήνιοι(ι ιοί, 2), t h e M e s s e n i a n s (c. 31» 2), who since B.C. 462 had been settled by the Athenians at Naupactus, after it had been taken by them from the Ozolian Locrians (1 103, 3, II 9, 4). Some of them were employed on garrison duty at Pylos B.C. 425 (c. 18, 3, IV 41, 2i8 NOTES ON THE vn lvii 8 2 > v c. 35, 6 f.; c. 56, 2). Stahl says that ol vvv καλούμβνοι, sc. called only without being such', is added because the Helots whom the Athenians settled at Naupactus were not in fact all Messenians. 1. 49. Ι κ Ναυπάκτου, c. 17, 4 ; c. 31, 2. See crit. note. etc Πΰλου: c. 18, 3 ; c. 86, 3 ; iv 41, 2, ν c. 35, 6f.; c. 56, 2. c 1* 5°· «χομ6νη8, ' occupied'. τταρβληφθησαν, (not, as Ar­ nold 'were pressed into the service' but simply) assumpti erant, 'were taken with them', as in c. 20, 3; c. 26, 1, 3 ; c. 31, 2. This is the only passage in Thuc, in which the passive occurs. I.51. καΐ &ri, et firaeterea. ου πολλοί: 120 according to VI 43. Μ€7αρ€υσ*ι ουσ-ι is predicate to Σ€λινουντ£οι$. Cf. 1. 9, 1. 29, for the position. M e g a r a is called the μητρόπολις of Selinus vi 4, 2. See Introd. p. xx. 1. 52. κατά ξυμφοράν, their exile. § 9. 1. 54. ή'8η, exinde, 'from this point forward' in the enu­ meration. Those before named served κατά ανάγκην or κατά ξυμφοράν. Άργ€Ϊοι: On the alliance between the Athenians and Argives, see 1 102, ν c. 44 ff., c. 82. According to vi 43, the number of A r g i v e s who took service was 500, including the Mantineans. That they sometimes took service as μισθοφόροι ap­ pears from Aristophanes Pax 477:— ούδ' o'ioe 7' βΐλκον ουδέν *Apyeioi πάλαι αλλ' ή κατε-γέλων των ταλαιπωρουμένων καϊ ταύτα διχόθβν μισθοφορονντβς άλφιτα. 54 1· 5^· ""ί5 ιταραυτίκα έκαστοι iSCas ώφ€λ£α$: a similar antithesis in c. 70, 7, VI 69, 3 μαχούμβνοι irepl της Ιδία* 'έκαστο* το μέν αύτίκα σωτηρίας. So in Latin suae quisque salutis catisa. Stahl in­ clines to substitute έκαστος here; but έκαστοι is better,,as referring to the several states. 1. 59. μισθοφόροι, predicative. errl τούδ a€l...€lco00T€S Uvat, 'accustomed to march against any enemies that were from time to time pointed out to them' sc. υπό των μισθωσαμένων. 1. 6o. Tovs../ApKa8as: cf. c. 19, 4. 1. 61. οΰδ^ν ήσσ-ον...,7Γθλ€μ£ου8 sc. than those who were not of the same race. 1. 63. Tots ΚρησΙ.,.Ιυγκτίσ-avTas...eKoVras: For the con­ struction, see n. to c. 40, 4; c. 75, 7. As to C r e t e and R h o d e s , VII lvii i, HISTORY OF THUCYDIDES they were joint μητροπόλεις of G e l a ; cf. VI 4, 3 Υέλαν δέ 'Αντίφημος έκ ' Ρ ό δ ο υ καϊ'Έντιμος έκ Κρήτηs εποίκους a,yayovTes κοινή έκτισαν. T h e C r e t a n s served among the 480 τοξόται mentioned in v i c. 43, καϊ τούτων Κρητες oi δ^δο-ήκοντα ήσαν. Cf. c. 25, 2. 1. 65. μ€τά μισθού, an unusual expression: Kriiger compares Plato Theaet. p . 161 d διδάσκαλο? άξιοϋσθαι μετά μεγάλων μι­ σθών. § Ι Ο . 1. 66. KepSci i.q. δια κέρδος 1. 6 ι . Cf. ωφελεία Ι 123, 2. τ Ά κ α ρ ν ά ν ω ν Tives: cf. c. 31» 5> c · 60, 4· ° δέ «irXeov, magis, 'much m o r e ' , answers to άμα μέν. 1. 67. Δημοσ·θ£νο·υ$...*Αθηναίων, objective genitives. See c. 16, r, III c. 105, 3 ; c. 107, 2 ; c. 114, 1 for proof of their εύνοια. § 1 1 . 1. 7o. Θούριοι.;.&ν τ ο ι α ύ τ α ς άνάγκαι$...κατ€ΐλημμ€νοι sc. ώστε έπικουρεΐν. See c. 33, 5, from which it appears that the στασιωτικοί καιροί or critical situation resulting from party conflict concerned only the inhabitants of T h u r i a , where the anti-Athenian party were driven out by the opposite faction, so that they were forced into the Athenian alliance. T h e M e t a p o n t i a n s on the other hand joined the Athenians κατά τό ξυμμαχικόν. I. .73. Νάί-ιοι καΧ Κ α τ α ν α ϊ ο ι : c. 14, 2. 1. 74. ofarcp Ιπηγάγοντο sc. τους Αθηναίους, ' w h o invited their aid'. Cf. VI c. 98, 1, and on the origin of the people of E g e s t a, c. 2, 3 ; also Introd. p . xlii if. 1. 75. 1. 12. τό* π\(ον for ol πλείονς: see n. to c. 43, 7 and cf. c. 58, 3 Τυρσ-ηνών: c. 53, 2, v i 103, 2. 1. 76. 'Iennryes: c. 33, 4. 1. 77. τοσ-άδε for τοσαϋτα, as in c. 58, 3 ; c. 59, r, v i 2, 6. %Qvr\ €σ·τράτ€υον: a p l u r a l verb with neuter plural subject de­ noting persons, as in 1 58, 1 τα τέλη (magistrates) των Αακεδαιμονίων ύπέσχοντο, III 82, 8 τα μέσα των πολιτών...δ ιεφθείροντο, VI 62, 4 τάϊ>δρά7Γθδα απεδόθησαν; sometimes also with im­ personal subjects as V 75, 3 Κάρνεια αύτοΐς έτύ^χανον βντα, I 126, 3 έπειδη έπηλθον 'Ολύμπια, Π 8, 2 πολλά λογία έλέyovTO. T h e jumble of kinship among the combatants on both sides, as well as the cross aption of different local antipathies, is put in lively antithesis by Thucydides {Grote). 22o NOTES ON THE vn lviii , CHAPTER LVIII § 1. 1. ι. άντεβοήθησαν, ' t h e Syracusans were assisted on their side by etc.' Καμαριναιοι Γ€λωοι: c. 33, 1; c. 80, 2, VI 67, 2. 1. 3. μ€τ avrovs, ' a t the back of t h e m ' i.e. north of them coastwise, like ev τφ έπ' εκείνα 1. 4 in describing the relative posi­ tion of Akragas and Selinus. 1. 4. ήσ-υχαξόντων: c. 12, 1 ; c. 33, 2. h τ ω eir' eicciva, ' i n the country b e y o n d ' : cf. c. 64, 1, VIII 104, 5, v n c. 37, 2 έκ του επί θάτερα, c. 84, 4 €S τα ^ θάτερα. Ιδρυμένοι, 'seated', 'located', perf. pass, participle of Ιδρύειν. 1. 5. Σβλινοΰντιοι: c. 1, 3 ; c. 57, 8, v i c. 6, 2 f.; c. 4 8 ; c. 65, 1 ; c. 67, 2. § 2 . 1. 6. τό.,.μέροδ τ€τραμμ!νον: For the position of the at­ tributive participle, see note to c. 23, 3. Ίμ€ραΐοΐ: c. 1, 2, 3f., v i c. 5, 1; c. 62, 2. 1. 7. 55 μορίου, not a diminutive. 1.8. 'Έλλην€$, predicative: 'they are also the only Hellenic settlers'. Cf. VI 62, 2 is Ίμέραν, ηπερ μόνη εν τούτφ τφ μέρει, τψ Σικελία? ' E X \ a s 7 r o X t s εστί. έξ αύτοΰ sc. του μορίου κτέ. § 3. 1. ί ο . τοσ-άδ€: see n. to c. 57, 11. 1. 11. ΣιΚ€λοΙ μόνοι: i.e. no Sicani (vi 2, 2) nor Elymi (vi 2, 3) nor Phoenicians (vi 2, 6). δοτοί μή άφ&ττασ-αν: from c. 57, 11 we learn that the majority had sided with the Athenians. 1. 14. ν€θδαμώδ€ΐξ (c. 19, 3) predicative, =oi άλλοι ous παρέ­ σχον νεοδαμώδει* ήσαν. 1. ΐ5· δύναται δέ τό ν€θδαμώδ€ς Ιλ6υθ€ρον ή'δη €Ϊναι, ' t h e term neodamodes means being now free'. Cf. v i 36, 2. L . Dindorf {praef. ad Polyb. 1 p . xxxvii) and H . van Herwerden {Stud. Thuc. p . 100) were the first to doubt the genuineness of these words, because a similar explanation is given by the Scholiast:—νεοδαμώδη$, 6 ελεύθερος παρά, TOIS Αακεδαιμονίου. Prof. Jowett, on the contrary, holds that the scholion is simply a paraphrase of Thucydides' explanation; and that the idiomatic use of ήδη is in favour of the genuineness of the clause; also that the circumstance that T h u c . has not explained the word when it occurs before (c. 19, 3 ; ν 34, ι ) , which has been cited on the other side, is purely accidental. VII lix* HISTORY OF T H U C Y D I D E S 221 1. 16. Κορίνθιοι...μόνοι: T h e Corinthians were the only people who came καΐ νανσϊ καϊ πεζφ (cf. c. 1.7; c. 70, 1, v i 93), while the L e u c a d i a n s (c. 7, 1) and A m b r a c i o t s provided ships only, for the Corinthians to man. Cf. VI 104, 1 ol δέ Κορίνθιοι irpbs rah σφετέραις δέκα Αευκαδίας δύο καί Άμπρακιώτιδας rpeis προσπληρώσαντβς. 1. ι 8 . κατά το* fjvyyeWs sc. ί-ννεμάχονν, 'fought on their side in virtue of their kinmanship with t h e m ' . S y r a c u s e (vi 3, 2), L e u k a s (1 30, 2 f.) and A m b r a c i a (11 80, 3) were sister states, having Corinth for their μητρόπολις. 1. 19. καί Σικυώνιοι ά ν α γ κ α σ τ ο ί : c. 19» 4·. 1. 2 1 . Β ο ι ω τ ο ί : c. 19» 3· § 4 . 1. 2 ΐ . irpos, ' i n proportion t o ' , ' i n comparison with', c · 37» J s VI 86, 2 δυνάμει μείζονι irpbs τψ τωνδβ ίσχύν. 1. 22. κατά ιτάντα, ' i n all kinds of troops'. c. 37, 1; c. 49, 2. Cf. c. 87, 6, VI 1. 24. 6 άλλος όμιλος, i.e. of light-armed troops, 'irregulars*. 1. 25. άφθονος, predicative: c. 78, 4. αΰθις, rursus, item, introducing a second comparison. 1. 26. ώς €ΐ·7Γ€Ϊν (c. 49, 3), (so to speak', 'speaking roughly', limits άπαντα*. See n. to c. 87, 5 and G. MT. § 777, 1 ed. ma. 1. 27. δια μ£γ€θος ΐΓΟλ€ως: the article is omitted with 7τόλεω5, because μέ^Ββο* takes its place. Cf. v i c. 34, 4 ; c. 86, 3 δια μήκο$ πλου. CHAPTER LIX § 1. 1. 2. αι...€·π·ικουρίαι (auxilia) τοσ-aCSe (predicative) ξυν€λέγησαν, short for τοσαίδβ ήσαν at ζυνζλέ-γησαν. Observe that τοσαίδ€ has here a back reference, as τοσάδβ in c. 57, 1 1 ; c. 78, 1. 1. 3 . τότ€, at the close of the summer of B.C. 413. 1. 4. €ΐτήλθ€ν: c. 27, 3 ; c. 42, 2 ; c. 47, 3. [Subject continued from c. 56] § 2 . 1. 5. δ ' οΰν, 'however' to resume, c. 82, 1. CIKOTCOS, meritO) ' o n good g r o u n d s ' (c. 18, 2), to be taken not, as Herbst, with oi ξύμμάχοι, 'naturally also their allies', but with ένόμισαν. 1. 6. άγώνισ-μα, 'object of struggle', 'feat to be proud o f ; 56, 2 ; c. 86, 2. c. NOTES 222 1. 7. ON THE VII lix 2 en-t, O n the strength o f or 'after', 'in consequence o f . 1. 8. 4λ€ίν and avrovs διαφυγ€Ϊν (1. 9) both depend upon καλόν α γ ώ ν ι σ μ α elvai. Observe the sudden change of subject, as in c. 53, ι. το στρατό-π^δον άπαν . . τοσ-οΰτον 6V: we should say ' t h e whole of that vast a r m y ' . T h e Greeks often put the descriptive epithet predicatively. 1. 9. μηδέ καθ'&Γ€ρα=κατά μηδέτβρα: cf. c. 33» 2'·> c · 42> 6. δια θ α λ α σ σ ή , without the a r t , as c. 4, 2, δια weXdyovs I 2, 2, VI 13, 1; H A . § 661. τω ττεξω: the dativus militaris: c. 1, 3. 1. 11. διαφ·υγ€ΐν, ' t o effect their escape'. § 3 . 1. 11. 2κληον, inchoative imperfect; c. 1, 5 ; c. 43, 5. T h e work took them three days to finish according to Diodorus Siculus x i i i 14, 2. 56 1. 12. οκτώ σ τ α δ ί ω ν : gen. of measure, c. 2, 4; c. 50, 2. 1. 13. ιτλαγίαι$, 'with their broadsides to the sea', applies equally to the two other substantives. eir* αγκύρων op|j,i£ovT€S, 'which they anchored t h e r e ' . Diod. Sic. I.e. tells us that they also chained them together. 1. 14. ταλλα, rjv &π,...τολ[ΐ,ήσ·ωσ·ι, τΓαρ€σκ€υά£οντο, 'they made their other preparations (to be ready) in case the Athenians should still dare to risk a sea-fight'. T h e real apodosis is not stated sepa­ rately, but suggested by the context, their thought being ' w e will be ready, in case they shall d a r e ' (ψ τοΧμήσωσι). Cf. VI 100, 1 7rpos τψ TTOXLV, ei έπιβοηθοΐβρ, έχώρονρ, ' t h e y marched towards the city (to be ready) in case the citizens should rush out'. See G. MT. § 696 ed. ma. 1. 15. ολίγον ουδέν 4s ουδέν Ιικνόουν, 'they devised nothing mean, on a small scale, in any respect', or 'for the accomplishment of any project'. Cf. c. 87, 6 oXiyov ούδ£ρ is ούδϊρ κακοπαθψ aavres, VIII 15, 2 oXiyop επράσσβτο ούδέρ is τηρ βοήθβιαρ τήν έπϊ τψ Χίορ, II 8, ι OXiyop iirevoovp ονδέρ άμφοτβροί. CHAPTER LX § 1. 1. ι. τήν άττόκλησαν, ' t h e obstruction'. T h e word is used twice again by T h u c , IV 85, 2, and VI 99, 3, otherwise only in late writers. vii lx 2 HISTORY OF T H U C Y D I D E S 1. 2. την άλλην διάνο Lav αυτών αίσθομ^νοΐδ, 'becoming aware of their further intention', * ulterior purpose'. 1. 3. βουλ€υτ€α: the plural form of the verbal is of frequent occurrence in T h u c . Cf. I c. 79, 2, VI 50, 5 πολεμητέα, I c. 118, 3 έπιχειρητέα, c. 93, 4 άνθεκτέα, c. 72, ι παραιτητέα, c. 86, 2 διακριτέα, παραδοτέα, τιμωρητέα, VI 25, 2 πλενστέα. § 2 . 1. 4· οι shews that it must the other councils c. 43, 1; c. 48, 1 ; τ α ξ ί α ρ χ ο ι : the presence of s u b o r d i n a t e officers have been an e x t r a o r d i n a r y council of war; at only the στρατηγοί appear to have been present, c. 50, 3. 1. 5. irpos τ η ν άΐΓορ£αν...4βουλ€ύσαντο: cf. c. 47, 1 ; c. 74, 1. των τ€ άλλων καΐ δ τ ι κτλ. F o r the change of construction from the case of a noun to a subordinate clause, cf. c. 49, 1, VI 1, 1. 1. 8. cwreiirov μή eird-yeiv, ' t h e y had told them not to go on bringing i n ' namely at the time when they decided to sail away (έκπΧευσόμενοι) before the eclipse, c. 50, 3, 4. T h e meaning of £πά*γειν is simply advehere, and the preposition επί has not the same force as in επισκεύαζαν (see on c. 14, 2). Cf. c. 24, 3 τψ 6παΎω"γη5 των επιτηδείων, c. 28, ι πάντων έπακτών εδεΐτο, Ι 8 ι , 2 έκ θα\άσσψ ων δέονται επάγονται ('they will import'), VI 99' 4 κατά yyjv τα επιτήδεια επή-γοντο. F o r μη' after verb of negation, see G. MT. § 815, 1 ed. ma. 1. 9. οΰτ€...£μ,€λλον 2fjav, ci μή ναυκρατησ-ουσαν, ' a n d they were not likely to have them for the future (as they thought), unless they should hold the sea'. See note on c. 59 1. 14. 1. 10. Ιβουλίύσ-αντο, statuerunt, II 74, 1, IV 57, 4. τ ά τβίχη τ α άνω, i.e. the upper extremity of their lines, under the cliffs of Epipolae and furthest from the harbour, not those on Epipolae which they had quitted some time before, but the upper part of the double wall of 7 or 8 stadia long, c. 2, 4. Plutarch says that this upper part of the lines was joined on to the temple of Hercules, so that the Syracusans having been obliged till now to omit the offering of sacrifices in that temple, now, when the Athenians evacuated their lines, went out and sacrificed with great solemnity {Nicias c. 24, 4). It appears then that the temple stood in what was afterwards the quarter called Neapolis, under Epipolae, but raised on a sort of lower ridge above the valley of the Anapus (Arnold), 22 4 NOTES ON THE ν π Ιχ 3 This was the last position of the Athenians before Syracuse, and it was from this that they started on their final departure landwards (c. 74, 2; c. 75, i ; c. 78, 3). 1. 11. irpos avTais r a t s ναυσίν, ' a s close as possible to their ships'. Cf. Xen. Cyr. V ii Hell. Ι ν 12 παρ' αύτας VII ii 5 ύπεκαθίζοντο 31» 2 άπηλλάττετο παρ' 29 παρ αυτήν την Βαβυλώνα παριέναι, τας πρφρας των Αυσάνδρου νέων παρέπλει> υπ αΰτφ τφ τείχει, Plutarch Timol. c. αυτήν τήν Καλαυρίαν. 1. ΐ 2 . airoXapovres διατ€ΐχ£σμ.ατι, 'cutting off by a wall of separation from end to e n d ' , ill 34, 2. Cf. IV c. 45, 2 άπολαβόντες τόν της Χερσονήσου ίσθμόν, c 102, 2 τείχει μακρφ απολαβών εκ ποταμού ες ποταμ&ν. Ocrov οΐόν τ€ ελάχιστον ικανό ν γ€ν€σθαι, ' t h e least possible space that would be sufficient for the reception of the baggage and the sick'. F o r the superlative put predicatively in the relative clause, cf. c. 20, 2 νησιωτών oVocs oUv τ ' ην πλείστοι χρήσασθαι, c. 21, ι στρατιαν οσην έκασταχδθεν πλείστην έδύνατο, 2 ναΰς ώς δύνανται πλείστας, c 86, ι δσου* έδύναντο πλείστους. T h e inf. -γενέσθαι depends on οΐόν τε sc. ην. 1. Ι4· φρουρ€Ϊν, governed by εβουλεύσαντο. άλλου ιτ€ξοΰ sc. quod non custodiebat (Stahl). άττό του 1. 15. οσαι ή σ α ν καΐ δυναταΙ και ατΓλοώτ€ραι, ' a l l that there were, whether fit for service or unseaworthy (lit. less fit for sea than they should be'). 1. 16. ιτάντα τινά, 'eveiy single m a n ' c. 70, 3 ; c. 84, 2, II 41, 5, i n c. 13, 6; c. 93, 2, v i 68, 2. T h a t this expression, however strong and comprehensive it may appear, did not (eventually) include all the πεζοί is clear from c. 69, 3 ; c. 71, 1 which show that a considerable portion of the army was left on shore besides those who garrisoned the reduced Athenian lines. ' I t is not likely' adds Prof. Jowett ' t h a t hoplites would serve as sailors ; nor could the entire force have found room in n o ships. Cp. also c. 64, 2 where 01 ev r e u s ναυσίν ύμων are expressly opposed to the rest of4 the army. T h e words are also to be modified by όστις καΐ δπωσουν εδόκει ηλικίας μετέχων επιτήδειος e&cu, with which, taken strictly, they are inconsistent'. 1. 17. 8ιαναυμ.αχήσαντ€5, 'after fighting a decisive battle'. 1. 18. ξυνταξάμκνοι: c. 2, 3, ν 66, ι . VII lx 4 HISTORY OF THUCYDIDES 1. 19. η α ν τ ά χ ι σ τ α μ4λλωσ·ι...άντιλήψ€<Γθαι, ' b y whatever road they were likely soonest to gain* lit. ' t o lay hold o f , c. 77, 6, III 22, 5 πριν του ασφαλούς άντιλάβοιντο, IV 128, 2 ως άντελάβετο των μετεώρων. § 3 . 1. 2 ΐ . ώ ς . . . κ α ί : c 43» Ι β 1. 22. νττοκατ€βησ·αν, 'they gradually descended', evacuated their upper lines not in confusion a n d hurry, but gradually (υπό) and in good order. Compare H e r o d . 11 15, 2 πολλούς μεν τους υπολειπόμενους—πολλούς δέ τους ύπ ο καταβαίνοντας (Arnold). Xen. Hell. IV vi 8 ύποκαταβαίνοντες είς τα κράσπεδα των όρων, Anab. VIι iv 11. 1. 24. καΐ ό,π·ωσ·οΰν...€7Γΐτή8€ΐθ8, 'even in any degree fit for service'. Cf. c. 7, 3 ; ούδ' όπωσουν c. 49, 2, I 77, 3 ην τι...και όπωσοΰν έλασσωθώσιν, VI 56, 3 e^ και οποσοιουν (' however few') τολμήσειαν. ηλικίας μ.€Τ€\ων forms an insufficient contrast to τοις άσθενοϋσιν, and is therefore regarded by Stahl after Philippi (Jahrbb. 1881, p . 99) as an adscript. Clasiie 1 understands the words to mean ' a s being not yet too old', taking ηλικίας in a-general, not military sense a n d comparing 11 44, 4 e τφ άχρείω της V ro s €Ρ ηλικίας, VI 24, 3 ' Μ- πρεσβύτεροι s...Tois δ' έν τή ηλικία. I t refers, of course, to non-combatants. § 4 . 1. 25. κα£, ' a n d so it came to pass t h a t ' , c. 44, 1 ; c. 64, 1; I 67, 4, VI 73, ι . £υν€ττληρώθησ·αν : VI 50, 2. a t ττάσ-αι, 'in a l l ' ; c. 1, 5 ; c. 24, 2. 1. 26. 8eKa μ ά λ ι σ τ α καΐ Ι κ α τ ό ν : t h e original number was 134 ( v i 4 3 ) + 73 ( v i i 42, i) = 2o7, s o t n a t t n e v n a -d lost nearly 100 by the conflicts of the year. Plutarch (Nic. c. 24, 4) gives t h e same number of triremes as T h u c , adding ' a t yap αλλαι ταρσών ενδεείς ήσαν'; Diodorus gives 115. Ιπ αύτά$, in eas> a d eas defendendas (SlaAl). Cf. c. 63, 1, 2. 1. 27. Άκαρνάνων: II 8 1 , 8 δοκοϋσι δ' ol Άκαρνανες eZi>cu τούτο ποιεΐν sc. σφενδοναν. κράτιστοι 5 7 1. 28. ξένων: c. 13, 2. 1. 29. €$• αναγκαίου, in re angusta, ' w h e r e there was no help for it, n o other shift' (c. 69, 3 note), (not to b e taken, as b y Arnold, with) τοιαύτηε SiavoCas, ' i n consequence of such (so desperate) a resolution', i.e. as Arnold explains, ' a s well as they could provide for a naval action conducted on such unusual principles, when T. VTI 15 226 NOTES ON THE ν π Ιχ 4 victory was to depend not on skill, but on the efforts of the lands­ men on board \ For το avayicaiov, ci. V 99, i τους ηδη της αρχής τφ avayκαίφ παροζννομένους : similar gen. adjj. with εκ are έκ του εικότος c. 66, 2 ; έκ του ϊσου I c. 120, ι ; έκ του άσφαΧοϋς c 39» τ 5 ^κ τ ο ^ ακίνδυνου III 40? 45 &κ τ°ν προφανούς IV 79? 2» ν ι 73> 2 · Boehme, Betant and Poppo agree with A r n o l d ; Poppo translates pro constlio necessario (i.e. sola necessitate suggesto) et tali. Classen thinks on the other hand that the presence of τε και militates against connecting av ay καίου with διανοίας, because in that Case τοιαύτης must be understood in a materially different sense, and also it loses its full force, unless taken separately. § 6 . 1. 3 1 . καΐ τους σ τ ρ α τ ι ώ τ ο υ : in Vaticano solo καΐ omittitur, quae, cum superiora de praetoribus et taxiarchis qui in consilium convenerant (§ 2) dicta sunt, hie aptissima,est; nee tamen minus apte ad totum enuntiatum earn rettuleris {Hude). τφ.,.κρατηθήναι (G.'§ 799 ed. ma.) άθυμοΰντα^ κα1...βουλομένου8 διακινδυνβύδΐν: Nicias endeavoured to allay the impatience as well as the despair of the army at their discomfiture in the battle de­ scribed in cc. 52, 53. F o r the dative of the articular infin. ex­ pressing c a u s e , cf. c. 48, 5 and see G. MT. § 799. 1. 35. διακινδυν€ύβΐν: c. ι, ι. 1. 36. '{ke& τ ο ι ά δ ε : out of 40 long speeches, the verb of speaking which introduces them is placed 22 times in the im­ perfect, 18 times in the aorist: τοιάδε almost always precedes a direct speech; ώδε which is found twice (1 85, II 74, 2), τοιού­ τους δη λόyoυς etirev IV 58, and τάδε i n 29 are the only varia­ tions (Fr. Muller). CHAPTER LXI § 1. 1. ι. 1. 3. ό μ ο ί ^ oiracriv: c. 28, τ, VI 24, 3, II 49, 7· των άλλων ξυμμάχων: cf. c. 4, 3. 1. 4· ιτατρίδοδ: without the art. as in ν ι c. 68, 4 ; c. 69, 4. Ικάστοις ούχ η<τσ*ον ή' TOIS πολεμίοις: T h e last words are objected to by Classen (and others) as inappropriate. But, though briefly expressed, they are not without meaning ' W e , the invaders, have to fight as hard as the enemy who are being invaded; for Athens is in no less danger,—or in much greater danger than Syracuse' {Jowett). 1. 6. & m τω. .ειτιδεΐν, ' i t is possible for a man (i.e. for each and all, c. 68, 2) to live to see his own home, wherever it may b e ' , VII lxii ι HISTORY OF T H U C V D I D E S 227 Cf. v i 69, 3. O n this meaning of επιδβΐν, cf. c. 77, 7 and see Gr. I n d . to m y ed. of Plutarch's Gracchi p . 218 a . 1. 7. ιτου, alicubi, ' somewhere or other '. § 2. 1. 8. 1. 9. οί άΐΓίΐρότατοι, ' t h e greatest novices', *rawest recruits'. άθυμ.€ΐν 8£: in ref. to 6 μεν ayov. 1. 11. την IXiriStt του φόβου, ' t h e expectation of their fear', i.e. which their fear leads them to entertain. For this neutral sense of i\7rls, cf. v i 87J 4. όμοίαν Tats ξυμ,φοραις, predicate, ' o f a piece with their (past) reverses'. T h e y apprehend the recurrence of misfortunes, because they have endured them in the past. § 3 . 1. 14. |υστρατ€υόμ€νοι dcC, participle of the imperfect, ' since you from time to time took part in campaigns with u s ' . τών...ΐΓαραλο'γων, ' t h e surprises'. T h e word is used by Thuc. only as a substantive: its use as an adjective is peculiar to Plutarch (cf. TimoL c. 16, 1) and other late writers. Cf. c. 28, 3 ; c. 55, 1 ; I 78, 1 του πολέμου rbv irapaXoyov o'cros εστί, πρϊν έν αύτφ •γενέσθαι, irpodiayvtaTe, 1. 15. T h e construing order i s : — π α ρ α σ κ ε υ ά ζ β σ θ ε έλπισανTcs τό της τύχης καν στηναι μεθί ημών καΐ ώς άναμαχούμενοι κτλ., * prepare yourselves in the hope that fortune may yet take sides with us too (as well as with them), and with the determination to retrieve your defeat in a spirit not unworthy of this great a r m y ' . F o r fip with the infinitive after a verb of h o p i n g , see G. MT. § 136, § 2 1 1 ed. m a . CHAPTER § 1. 1. τ. αρωγά, ' h e l p f u l ' . LXII e veCSo^ev : c. 36, 2. 1. 2. €Trl τ η του λιμ,ένος σ-τ€νότητι, ' i n the circumstances of, because of, (not, as Kriiger, 'against', ' t o counteract') the narrow­ ness of the h a r b o u r ' . 1. 3. irpos τον μέλλοντα...ϊσ·€σ-θαι: when the epithet of stantive consists of several words, a part of them may be otherwise than between it and the article: cf. c. 23, 3. ' t h r o n g ' , ' c r o w d ' : cf. I 49, 3 υπό re πλήθους καϊ δχλου των 15—2 a sub­ placed οχλον, νέων* 228 NOTES ON THE vn lxii ι 1. 4· Trpos ττ]ν...·ΐΓαρασκ€υήν, i.e. the javelin men on deck (c. 40, 5), not the improved construction of the prows, which could not have been thus described, and is mentioned § 3 infra (Jowett). 58 1. 5. ots ιτρότ€ρον €βλαΐΓτόμ.€θα, ' b y which (sc. both the όχλος and the παρασκευή κτε.) we were before so much troubled'. Cf. c. 40, 5. F o r this sense of βλάπτει?, cf. c. 21, 1, 11 c. 4 1 , 4 ; c. 69, 1 βλάπτειν rbv πλουν των όλκάδων. 1. 6. καΐ ήμϊν, ' b y ourselves as w e l l ' as by the Syracusans. 1. 7. £κ των παρόντων, ' i n accordance with present circum­ stances', ' a s far as present circumstances admit', c. 77, 1, IV 17, r, V 40, 3, VI 70, 4 ws έκ των παρόντων συνταγμένοι. μ€τά τ » ν κυβφνητών Ισκ€μμ€να, ' after they have been carefully thought out in consultation with the steersmen'. § 2 . 1. 9. €7Γΐβη<τονται, 'will be on board', as επιβαται, who were usually armed as hoplites (vi 43, 1). o \ X o s : ' a crowd of (other) troops', a frequent omission of άλλος, e.g. Arist. Plut. 1 ώ Ίιευ καϊ θεοί, Eccl. 745 τα χντρίδια καϊ τόν βχλον, i.e. ollulas et alia viliora vasa. ναυμαχΐαν ·π·οιούμ6νοι=€£ ραυ/Λαχ/α? εποιούμεθα. 1. ι ι . βλάιττίΐν: 1. 5· c 6 ι , 3 a n d see H A . § 7 3 0 b . weight' of our ships. το TTJS «ττιστημηδ: cf. το τψ τύχης TTJ βαρύτητι, ' b y the (increased) 1. 13. πρόσφορα &τται, commodum erit, ' i t will be convenient' sc. αυτόν (τόν όχλον) έπιβψαι. F o r the neuter plural, see note to c. 43, 2. Kriiger understands ταύτα, 'this p l a n ' , as the subject, a general reference ί ο τ ο £ ό τ α ι etc. § 3 . 1. 14. άντινανΐΓηγ€Ϊσ0αι, in naviurn aedificatione tnachinari (Betant), c. 36, 3 . καί, ' a n d in particular'. «πωτίδων: c. 36, 3. vicissim των 1. 15. avTois: c. 44 1. 17. τάδ τταχυτητα$: the plural of abstract nouns is used in a concrete sense, where i n s t a n c e s of the quality are denoted. Cf. c. 80, 3. Xenophon is particularly fond of such plurals: see the exx. collected in my note to his Oecon. c. 1, 21, ed. 5. <5iT6p, (an arrangement) ' b y w h i c h ' . 1. 16. χ€ΐρών σιδηρών Ιττιβολαί, 'iron grapnels (αντιλαβαί Schol.) to b e thrown upon t h e m ' , not the application of the invention, but the device itself. Cf. c. 5, 1, IV 25, 4 χεφϊ σιδηρά επιβληθείσα νιτ lxiii a HISTOR Υ OF THUCYDIDES μίαν ναϋν απώλεσαν. αϊ σχήσοακτι, ' t o prevent'; cf. c. 25, 1; c. 49, 2 note. τ ή ν πάλιν: c. 44, 8 ; c. 8r, 5 ; c. 86, 5. 1. 17. TTJS προσ-7Γ€<τοΰσηδ V€G>S, O f each ship that comes into coHision with u s ' : c. 27, 2; c. 65, 2 ; i n 20, 4 e/c του πάχονε TTJS πλίνθου, X e n . Cyr. V iii 4 1 , v i ii 34, v n ν 17. τ α 4πΙ τοΰτοι$ ...ύττουργώοπν, 'perform the service which comes next in order' (1 65, 1), i.e. boarding the hostile ships and fighting hand to hand. § 4 . 1. 18. cs τουτο,.,ήναγκάσμεθα ώστ€, ' w e have been driven to the necessity o f . Cf. I 23, 6 ά ? α γ κ ά σ α t is το πολεμεΐν, II 75, 3 r)vayKa£ov is το fpyov. 1. 20. €av sc. άνακρούεσθαι. G. MT. § 911 ed. ma. Cf. I 70» 9· ώφ€λιμον sc. 6v\ 1. 2 i . oo~ov άν...€7Γ€χτ|, 'so much space (only) as it occupies, whatever that may b e ' i.e. with the troops left to guard the camp. Cf. I c. 23, 3 ; c. 4 8 , 3 το άλλο αυτοί επέσχον; c. 50, 2 ; II c. 77, 3 ; c. 101, 5 TTJV Χαλκιδικήν iπ έχων έφθειρε. 1. 22. Tro\€|xCas, ' i n the occupation of the enemy'. Cf. c. 53, 1 CHAPTER LXIII § 1. 1. 1. <3v, ' n o w all this', emphatic connective. 1. 2. διαμάχ€<τθαι κτΙ., ' t o fight it out to the utmost of your power'. 1. 3. Is αύτην, sc. τήν yrjv, c. 6*2, 4. 1. 4. μη 7rpOT€pov...^ ά·π·αρ(ίξητ€, ' t o think it a matter of ho­ nour not to quit your hold (c. 44, 7), until you have swept e t c ' There are only a few instances of πρότβρον ή ( = πρίν η in the sense of πρίν) being followed by the subjunctive without aV, five in Hero­ dotus, one in Antiphon, one in T h u c . F o r the form άπαράξητε, cf. c. 6, 3, Herod. V i n 90 τού$ έπιβάτας άπ6 τψ καταδυσάσψ veb\ βάλλοντα άπήραξαν. 1. 5· ά ™ , used proleptically, c. 25, 6; c. 26, 3 ; c. 3 1 , 1. So των άνωθεν Ι. 8. § 2 . 1. 7· των ναυτών for τ) τοΐ$ vaUTais: cf. ι 85, 2 Ζ&στι δ* ημΐν μάλλον έτερων δώ Ισχύν. II 15, ι, ν ΐ ι 6 , ι, Η Α. § 643 ° · 1.8. οσ-ω, 'all the more because', 'inasmuch as*, τ ω ν avcaOcv sc. των έπϊ των καταστρωμάτων. τό £ργον τοΰτο sc. εστίν, 'this duty belongs t o ' . μάλλον, rather than to professed seamen. 230 NOTES ON THE vn lxiii 2 1. 9. ·υιτάρχ€ΐ ήμιν, 'it is possible for u s \ Cf. I 82, 6 (πόλβμον) δν ούχ υπάρχει βΐδέναι καθ* δ TL χωρήσα, ΐ π 109, 3» v 9» 9· τά ΐΓλ€ίω...€7Γΐκρατ€ίν, 'to be victorious in most points', the cog­ nate accusative, the neuter adj. replacing the kindred noun. Cf. c. 55, 2; IV 19, 2 έπΐ-κρατήσας τά πλβίω τόϋ πολέμου. § 3 . 1. ι ι . έν τψ αντω τφδ*, more than άμα, 'hereby in the same manner'. 1. 12. τι.,.ά'γαν, c. 50, 4. 1. 13. αϊτό: c. 70, 3. 1. 14. 2χοντα$ TCIS vavs irKeCovs, * since the number of the ships you have is greater' than it was in the former seafight. €Κ€ίνην ...€νθυμ,6ΐ<τθαι ώς-,-διασώσ-ασθαι, 'to consider that this source of delight is worth an effort to preserve'. The anticipatory accusative, cf. 11 67, 4, VI 88, ι ; έκβίνην has reference to the relative clause which follows. 59 1· 15· αξία, personal construction, cf. c. 14, 2; c. 48, 1; HA. § 944 a. οϊ,..€θαυμά£€σθ€, as if ύμΐν rots ναύταις had preceded. 1. 16. T&>S 'Αθηναίοι νομι£όμ€νοι, καΐ μή oWs, 'for a long time reputed as Athenians, even though you were not really such'; μή, not ου, is used with the participle, because it has a c o n d i t i o n a l force. G. MT. § 832, § 841 ed. ma. Dr Arnold (together with Goller and Poppo), following the Scholiast, explain these words as having particular reference to the metics in the Athenian naval service. But I cannot think this correct. All persons in that service—who were freemen but yet not citizens of Athens—are here designated; partly metics doubtless, but partly also citizens of the islands and dependent allies—the ξένοι νανβάται alluded to by the Corinthians and by Perikles at the beginning of the Peloponnesian war (Thuc. I 121—143) as the ώρητΊ] δύναμις μάλλον ή οίκεία of Athens. Without doubt there were numerous foreign seamen in the warlike navy of Athens who derived great consi­ deration as well as profit from the service, and often passed themselves off for Athenian citizens when they really were not so [Grote). 1. 17. τή ΙΐΓίσηίμχι, causal dative» 'by reason of your know­ ledge of our language'. 1. 18. των τρόπων, Our private habits'. I. 19. κατά τήν Ελλάδα, * throughout all Hellas'. Ά remarkable testimony' observes Classen^ 'to the recog­ nized superiority of Attic over all other Hellenic culture and to its propagating influence'. vulxivx HISTORY OF THUCYDIDES 1. 20. TTJS άρχη5·..ούκ '4\acr 'even when associated with (in spite of) discouragement'. 1. 29. &ιηστημη : c. 62, 2. 1. 30. €T^pas €υτυχού<τη8 ρώμ/ηδ, 'than another's (mere) confi­ dence in the hour of his success'. For the meaning of ρώμηί see Gr. Index, and for έτέρας = £τέρων, cf. c. 17, 4. CHAPTER LXIV § 1. 1. ι. τού$ 'Αθηναίοι υμών, 'those of you who are (really) Athenians )( μή δντβς, c. 63, 3. Cf. 1. 9. 1. 2. ·π*<£λιν αν: c. 46, 1. 1. 3. ταδ€ ΰιτομιμνησ-κω : the ace. of the neuter pronoun as in VI 68, 3 τουναντίον ύπομιμνήσκω ύμαν. A substantive stands in the gen. as in c. 69, 2, 232 NOTES ON THE VII lxiv 1 1. 5. ήλικίαν, iuventutem, as in III 67, 3. We must supply άλ\ψ ομοίαν Trj5e. ύπ€λ£τΓ€Τ6, * left behind you' at home. 1. 6. τι άλλο ι} τό κρατίΐν, an euphemism for defeat. 1. 8. Ικ€ΐνα and CKCI, 'against yonder (country)' and 'yonder' i.e. at Athens, viewed from the standpoint of Sicily. Observe the change of construction from δτι...ύπ€λίπ€Τ€ to πΧενσονμένους, the participle in indirect discourse. 1. 10. αύτοΰ, in Hellas proper. τού$ έπΈλθόντα^, ' the new invaders' from Syracuse: c. 59, 1. 1. 11. KCIC, ' and so* the consequence will be ; c. 60, 4; c. 69, 3. οι \k£v, i.e. the army before Syracuse, οι δ* €Κ€Ϊ, those left be­ hind at home, in expanded apposition to νμβΐς understood with yiyvoLcde. 1. 13. oftj, γνώμη, 'with what sort of feelings', what ambitious projects, c. 75, 6, vi c. 15, 2; c. 31-, 6. § 2. 1. 14. ώστ€: c. 63, 4. νπίρ αμφοτέρων may be either neuter 'both things', in reference to the idea conveyed in the pre­ ceding clauses, or masculine 'for both those here and those yonder'. I. 15. €Ϊιτ€ρ iroT€ sc, έκαρτερήσατε, 'now, if ever'. 1. 16. καθ' Ικάσ-Tovs, singulis 'severally', 'individually'. The Greeks, as they possessed no d i s t r i b u t i v e numerals, had recourse to expressions with κατά, so that the above formula is here in place of a nominative. 60 I.17. ot ev Tats ναυσ-lv KTI. , ' those of you who are now about to embark are to the Athenians their all, army, navy and everything else, and the great name of Athens'. He adds υμών (cf. 1. 2), because the invalids and the garrison of the διατβίχισμα are not in­ cluded. 1. 19. ir€pl ων, 'in defence of which', i.e. not Athens, but all which he has been speaking of, ships, army etc. See note to c. 55, 2. 1. 20. τι 7τροφφ€ΐ, 'is at all (be it ever so little) superior', c. 77, 2. 1. 21. α,ιτοδ€ΐ|άμ€νθ3 sc. δη προφέρβι, or, as Poppo, τϊ\ν έπιστήμψ η εύψυχίαν: ' he could not have a better opportunity of dis­ playing it (either his superiority or his skill and courage) and so proving himself e t c ' vnlxvii HISTORY OF THUCYDIDES CHAPTER LXV § 1. 1. ι. τοσ-αΐτα (c. 16, i), 'so much (only)', as in the anti­ war speech of Nicias vi 24, 1; but in c. 69, 1 we find the usual τ ο t a u r a in reference to the speech of Gylippus. 1. 4. ιταρήν α1σ"θάν€<τθαι...δτι κτΙ. 'they had an opportunity, as the actual preparation was going on under their eyes, of per­ ceiving that the Athenians mean to fight'. 1. 6. ή Ιιτιβολη sc. η μέλλουσα ε'σεσθαί: c. 62, 3. § 2. 1. 8. irpos τοΰτο sc. the device of the iron grapnels. TTJS V€(is άνω lirl πολύ κατ€βύρσ-ωσαν, ' they covered the stems and a great portion of the (i.e. 'each' c. 62, 3) ship above them*. Observe that έπί πολύ is here regarded as one word and with the genitive forms the second object of κατεβύρσωσαν. See n. to c. 8, 1 and cf. I 50, 2 νέων έπί π^ολύ της θαλάσσης έπεχονσων, IV c. 12, 3 έπί πολύ έποίει. της 5o£ijs, C. 100, 2. 1. 9. κατ€βνρσ·ω<ταν sc. βύρσας προσηλοΰντες Tpbs τα τειχίσματα των νεών, as it is explained by Pollux Onom. 1 120. OTTOS dv diroλισθάνοι, 'that it might be likely to slip off5. 8πως αν with the p o t e n t i a l o p t a t i v e in a final s e n s e is found once only in Thucydides and four times in Xenophon. See G. MT. § 330 ed. ma. 1. 10. επιβαλλομένη, 'when thrown on', the present participle used hypothetically. 1. 12. οϊ τ€ στρατηγοί κοΛ Γΰλιττιτοβ, cum ipsorum duces, turn Gylippus (Stahl). Cf. c. 69, 1. CHAPTER LXVI § 1. 1. ι» καλά sc. εστί. The next clause is equivalent to τά μέλλοντα, ύπερ ων 6 ατγών Ζσται, καλά έστι. 1. 4· ol πολλοί 8οκ€ΐτ€ as in c. 64, ι ol μέν...^ί^νοισθε. 1. 5· ού8^ γαρ άν...άντ€λάβ€<τθ€, 'for otherwise you would not have engaged in them with so much energy'; see note to c. 51, 1. αυτών refers strictly to τά προειρΎασμένα—less correctly to των μελλόντων—in the sense, not of the coming victory, but of the pre­ paration for it (jfowett). See note to c. 55, 2. NOTES 234 ON THE VII lxvi ι 1. 6. eirl όσον Set for έπϊ τοσούτον 4φ' όσον Set, ' to the proper extent'. § 2 . 1. 7. Ά θ η ν α ί ο υ δ does not depend immediately on ύ π ο­ στά vTes for reasons given below 1. 14, but is the object of νζνικήκατβ and νικήσετε, to which verbs a cognate accusative also is added, namely τά$ ναυμαχία? and την δε (ναυμαχία*/). See H A . § 7 2 5 / G . § i59 5 Note 4. 1. 11. ucXoirovνησου depends upon καταδουλώσει. 1. 12. αρχήν τ η ν ήδη μ.6γί<ττην κ τ | . ' t h e greatest empire hi­ therto known of any Hellenic power, past or present'. F o r the relative position of the substantive and its article—the third attri­ butive position, common in Herodotus and Lucian—, see n. to c. 11, 2. T h e και before αρχήν connects ελθόντας with κεκ­ τημένους* 61 1· 14. νπ·ο<ττάντ€$ τ φ ναυτικφ, not 'withstanding them with your navy', as Ρορρό after Portus, but 'withstanding their navy', as Arnold and Shilleto (11 6 1 , 4), because of φπερ πάντα κατέσχον, ' t h a t navy with which they had got and secured possession of every t h i n g ' ; cf. II 62, 3, IV 2, 3 κατασχήσειν τά ττράγματα, VI 9» 3· T h u c . uses the dative after νφίστασθαι in the sense of ' w i t h s t a n d i n g ' in only one other passage, 11 6 1 , 4 χρεών καϊ συμψοpats rats με'γίσταις εθέλειν ύφίστασθαι: otherwise the accusative, as 1 144, 4, π 6 1 , 1, i n 57, 3. 1. 16. Ικ του €IKOTOS, ' i n all probability', c. 68, 3. expressions are adduced in the note to c. 60, 4. § 3. 1. 17. Similar avSpcs, ' m e n in general'. 1. 18. κολουθώσα, έλαττωθώσί (Schol.). Supply τούτφ, ' i n that in which they pride themselves as superior to o t h e r s ' . τή$ δόξης, 'their self-respect'. άσθβνέστ€ρον αυτό Ιαυτοΰ έστιν κτ€., 'is weaker than it ever was and weaker to a greater extent than if from the first they had never believed (at all) that they were superior in this particular t h i n g ' (Jowett). if cl is for η αν ην ει. 1. 19. αν 'ήσαν, €t ωήθησ-αν, sc. τούτφ προύχειν. T h e implied protasis is 1. 20. τ ω τταρ' ελπίδα του αύχήμιατος ο~φαλλόμ,€νοι, 'failing in the unlooked for issue of their boasting', i.e. meeting with a reverse which disappoints their pride. νπ lxvii a HISTORY OF THUCYDIDES 235 So Prof. Jowett with Boehme and Classen. W i t h this meaning the antithesis is more complete with πάρα Ισχύν τψ δυνάμεως, and the order of the words is better preserved. Others join του αύχήματο5 (c. 75, 6) with σφαλλδμβνοί, on the ground that τφ παρ ελπίδα can only mean τφ άνελπίστψ, as in IV 62, 3 r^5 παρ' ελπίδα μη χαλεπώς σφαλλέσθω, and thus the meaning will be, as given by Arnold, ' b y an unlooked for disappointment failing of their vaunts (deceived in their self-confidence), they yield beyond the degree of their p o w e r ' i.e. more than is warranted by what they have yet the power to effect. 1. 2 1 . Ινδιδόασ-ιν, 'give i n ' , 'lose courage'. Cf. 11 12, 1, VIII 1, 3 c&s 4κ των υπαρχόντων e5o/cet χρηναι μη ένδίδόναι. o...irenovQivait ' a n d this is what we may assume to be the con­ dition of the Athenians at the present t i m e ' . CHAPTER LXVII § 1 . Κ 2. το υ π ά ρ χ ο ν ιτρό*τ€ρον, id quod prius nobis fuit i.e. animus nobis insitus (Poppo-Stahl). φττ€ρ...άπ€τολμήσαμ€ν, ' through which even in the days of our inexperience (of seamanship, c. 62, 2 ; c. 64, 2) we dared to risk a l l ' . 1. 4. β€βαιάτ€ρον sc. εστί. 1. 5· ιτροσ-γ€γ€νημ^νηδ, causal participle. αΰτφ, sc. τφ ύπάρχοντι πρότερον. τό* κρατίο-τουβ €Ϊναι: this is one of three passages in T h u c , where the infinitive with τό is used to explain a subst. in the gen. or dat.; the other two are c. 36, 5 where Classen changes the MSS τό into τφ, and VHI 8γ, 3 καταβοψ Ζνεκα τό λέγεσθαι. 1. 6. ct...Ινικήσαμεν, quod vicimus. strongest' i.e. by sea. 1. 7. τ ά πολλά, plertimque. TOVS κρατ£σ·του$, ' t h e § 2 . 1. 9. αυτών is the subjective and rfjs τταρασκ€υή8 t h e objective genitive after TTJS αντιμιμήσεω*, *the imitation on their part (αντί)'. See c. 34, 6"; c. 62, 2, 3. 1. 10. τ φ τ|μ.€τ4ρψ τρόττφ, ' o u r mode of fighting', c. 67, 1. 1. 11. ανάρμοστοι, ' u n p r e p a r e d ' . 1. 13. π ο λ λ ο ί piv...πολλοί Β4, a common anaphora, c. 24, 2. 1. 14. π α ρ α τ ά καθ€στηκό$, 'contrary to established usage'. 1. 15. x€poraiot...avapavT€s, 'landsmen, so to speak (c. 58, 4), put on s h i p - b o a r d ' ; cf. c. 60, 4 . . Eur. Androm. 457 ναύτην Ζθηκεν αντί χςρσαίου κακόν. F o r cos είπεΐν as qualifying an universal statement, see G. MT? § 770, 1. 236 NOTES ON THE vn lxvii fl 1. 17. οΐ ούδ' οΐΓω5...€ύρησ·ου<Γΐ,, 'who will not so much as find out how to discharge their javelins, stationary as they must be in one place', i.e. without the room and free power of movement to which they were accustomed on shore {Arnold), καθβζομένονς may also be taken literally, 'as they must be sitting still'. 1. 18. ir. A relative is seldom assimilated from any other construction than that of the object accusative, as 1. 26; very rarely indeed is the nominative assimilated, G. § 153 Note 2 ed. ma. Cf. Plat. Proi. p. 353 b έμμένειν ots άρτι Ζδοξβν ήμιν, Xen. Oecon. c. 3, 5 άναΚίσκονσιν.,Μ^ α βλάβη ν φέρει. § 4 . I.27. υπερβαλλόντων, intrans. 'being excessive': 11 35, 3» vi 23, 1. 1. 28. βιαζό|Λ€νοι, passive, as c. 11, 2; c. 36, 6. For the coor­ dination of the circumstantial participle in different cases, cf. c. 14» 3; c. 30, 2; c. 51, 1. 1. 29. 4$άπόνοιανκαθ€στηκασαν...ά·πΌκινδυν€ΰσαι, eo dementiae venerunt ui, non tarn adparatu suo quam incerta fortunae alea confisi, periculum> quocumque modo possunt, facere velint (Duker). It is equivalent to saying 'they are reduced to the desperate expedient of risking etc.'. Prof. Jowett retains the MSS reading άποκινδυνεύσει (emended by Duker and not found elsewhere in Thuc), 'from a venturesome trial of fortune', for the sake of the double antithesis. vii Ixviii i HISTORY OF THUCYDIDES 237 1. 3 1 . OVTIOS οπωβ δύνανται, ' i n such manner as they can*. "Οπως has here its primary meaning as the relative adverb. 1. 32. βια<τάμ€νοι, 'forcing a way out', c. 79, 2. 1· 33· Ή " άττοχώρησιν ποιωνται=άποχωρώσι,ν. See c. 4 1 , 1; c. 43, 1. 'all but', c. 6, 1. 1. 9. όπερ ιτάο-χουσιν, 'a sentiment to which men are liable*. 1. 12. αΰτοϊδ, 'by them' sc. TOLS στρατη-yois (or ' t o them' sc* TOLS στρατί circus), refers equally with ο-φίσιν (the dative of interest= TO?S στρατηγό?? καΐ TOLS στρατιώταις) to the subject οίπάσχουσι, 1. 13. ίνα. UKCUTTOV, 'man by man': c. 70, 6; c. 75, 4. ·π·ατρόθ€ν «τονομάξων, 'calling him by his father's name'— which was equivalent to his surname, so as to distinguish his family. Cf. Horn. //. X 68 πατρδθεν εκ yeveijs δνομάζων άνδρα Ιίκαστον, \ πάντα* κνδαίνων. Thus the designation of Thucydides would be Θουκυδίδης Όλό/>ου; of Demosthenes, Αημοσθένης Αημοσθένους, of Nicias, Νικίας Έικηράτου. 1. ΐ4· αυτούς καΐ φυλήν, 'themselves and tribe': the article omitted for the same reason as in 1. 22', αυτούς taking the place of a substantive. Stahl omits καϊ αυτούς όνομαστί) as a marginal adscript in­ tended to explain the force of the verb έπονομάξειν, which he 240 NOTES ON THE vn lxix » contends is never equivalent to the simple verb όνομάζειν, but means either cognominare (as ι 13, 4, 11 29, 3) or nomen ex aliqua re imponere (as VI 2 , 4 ) or, as here, επί τ φ ονόματι όνομάξβιν, praeter ipsorum nomen nominare, quoting as one instance Plat. Lys. p . 204 e, where, however, the added έτι disproves his theory. 1. 14. T h e construing order is άξιων τίνα (c. 68, 2) φ υπήρχε λαμπρότητα? τι (c. 48, 2), μήπροδιδόναι (αυτό) το καθ* έαυτον καϊ (άξιων εκείνου?), ων οι πpόyovoι επιφανείς ήσαν, μη άφανίζειν τα? πατρικά? άρετά?. F o r άρεταί = *valorous feats', cf. I 123, ι, II c. 35, ι ; c. 42, 2, III 53, 4, IV 92, 7 μη αίσχΰναι τά? προσήκουσα? άρετά?. So Latin landes and English * honours'. T h e Scholiast explains το καθ' έαυτον as—την οίκείαν άρετήν, therefore the object of προδίδομαι. 1. ι 8 . τη$...4£συσ(α$: a topic on which Pericles enlarges II 37,2, in a celebrated passage of his funeral oration. See Addenda. 1. 19. άλλα τ€ λίγων: T h e re connects λέ^ων with the pre­ ceding participles άξιων and ύπομιμνήσκων. οσα...ού irpos το δοκ€ΐν τινι άρχαιολογ€ΐν φυλαξάμ€νοι €Ϊ·7τοΐ€ν αν, 'anything that men at such a critical moment would be likely to say, not guarding against saying it on the score of being thought by any to be repeat­ ing hackneyed phrases out of date, brought forward in nearly the same strain, to serve on all occasions, about men's wives, children and ancestral g o d s ; but they urge them as what they really think may be of some service in the existing consternation*. Observe that παραπλήσια is predicate to προφερόμενα. Prof. Jowett agrees with Arnold in taking καϊ before απάντων not in the sense of ' a l t h o u g h ' , but as coupling παραπλήσια with the idea implicitly contained in the words ού πρό? τό δοκεϊν... φυλαξάμενοι: ωφέλιμα νομίζοντε? is formally opposed to ού φυλαξάμενοι κτέ. Strictly speaking, however, ά λ λ α should be followed by έπφοώμενοι, but the finite verb is substituted for the participle, perhaps from the desire of parallelism. See c. 13, 2 ; c. 15, 2. Frost suggests that the contrast lies between προφερόμενα {μέν) and ά λ λ ' (8μω?) νομίζοντε? ωφέλιμα, taking καϊ as the conjunction. T h e whole sentence would run more simply in the following form :-"-&λλα re λέ*γων 8σα...δντε? άνθρωποι εϊποιεν aV, ού φυλαξάμενοι (λέ*γειν) πρ6? τ6 δοκεϊν τινι αρχαιολόγε?*', άλλ* έπιβοώμενοι παραπλήσια h re "γυναίκα?...προφε­ ρόμενα υπέρ απάντων, νομίξοντε? ωφέλιμα έπϊ τ% παρούση εκπλήξει. 1. 2ΐ. άρχαιολο·γ€Ϊν i.e. ut puto, λέyειv αρχαία, αρχαϊκά i.e. vulgaria, simpliciora, 'common-place'. Turn malim υφ* απάντων vel potius καίπερ ύφ' απάντων (Dodree). νιι Ιχχ ι HISTORY OF THUCYDIDES § 3 . 1. 26. καί, ' a n d so', c. 64, ι. αναγκαία, ' a s much as the scanty time allowed'. Cf. c. 60, 4 4ξ dvayKalov, 11 70, 1 βρώσεω? avayKaias, V 8, 3 6π\ισιν avaytcaiav, VI 37, 2 avay~ κ alas παρασκευής. So Liv. XXII 2 necessarium cubile. Our word ' makeshift' best expresses the idea, which the word conveys. 1. 27. άΊτοχωρη'σχ^, ex contione digressus (Portus). 1. 28. τόν ιτ€ζόν, i.e. the part of his army which remained behind προ* το φρουρέΐν το διατείχισμα (c. 60, 2). 1. 29. <»s €ΤΓΙ ΐΓλ€ί<Γτον Ιδύνατο, 'over as great a space as he possibly could', c. 80, 1. 1. 30. i>iro>s...c*€\ia..."yC-yvoiTo, ' i n order that it (6 ire^os) 6 4 .might prove of as much service as possible in inspiring confidence to the combatants on board s h i p ' . § 4 . 1. 32. Μένανδρος καί Εΰθύδημοε: α 16, ι. 1· 33· mand, r 1. 34. στρατηγοί, predicative, ' a s generals', to take the com­ apavT€s, c. 26, 1. 1· 35· τ ° Ι^ΰγμα του λιμένοδ, ' t h e barrier of the harbour', which was formed by the Syracusans τριήρεσι irXaylais καί TTXOIOLS καϊ άκάTOLS (c. 59, 2) moored across its mouth. 1. 36. τόν *π-αραλ€ΐφθ!ντα διέκπλουν, ' the narrow outlet left', the reading of Dionysius Halicarn. de Thucydide iudicmm c. 2 6 ; 6 παρελέλειπτο ώστβ μη έζεΰχθαι [Schol.), Arnold and Classen read καταλαφθέντα with Β—a reading which equally implies that an opening had been l e f t in the frdypa; on the other hand the nature of the Athenian attack, as Leake observes, is adverse to this supposition, which is other­ wise unlikely. H u d e adopts παραλειφθέντα 'left on one side', the reading of MS C: and certainly MS authority is in favour of καταΚειφθέντα or παραΧειφθέντα, Bekker suggests περιλειφθέντα. T h e reading καταληφθέρτα occupatum which Stahl adopts, is of inferior MS authority and gives a poor sense, though he main­ tains that 'cuius rei causa ζεϋγμα factum sit in memoriam revocat'. 1. 37. βιάσ-ασ-θαι 4s τό 'έξω, ' t o force their way outside': cf. c. 79, 1, I 73, ι ώ$ is ελάχιστον χωρίον δρδμψ βιάσασθαι* CHAPTER LXX § 1 . 1. ι . ττρο€ξαγαγόμ€νοι, provecti, priores vela dantes po), ' b e i n g the first to put off from shore'. Cf. 52, 2. τ. νιι 16 (Pop- NOTES 242 ON THE vn lxx ι T h e word is usually applied to leading out a l a n d force, as c. 37, 2. H e n c e Classen reads irpoe^avaya-yo^evoi from Dionysius H a l . I.e., who in quoting this passage gives irpo^avayo^vou He compares other compounds έ^ανά'γβσθαι ( n 55, 5), υπεξανάτγεσθαι (ill 74, 3), αντεπανάηεσθαι (iv 25, 1). Stahl, on the other hand, compares iire^ayovra c. 52, 2, and ^ α γ ω γ ή in Herod. IV 179, as proper terms for a vessel putting out to the open sea. 1. 2. τταραίΓλησίαιβ-.καΙ ττρότ€ρον,' nearly the same in number as before', i.e. 76, according to c. 52, 1. Diodorus ( x n i 14, 4) gives the number as 74. F o r καί after adjectives of l i k e n e s s , cf. c 71» 71. 3. κατά τδν βατλουν, ' a t the mouth of the h a r b o u r ' (i.q. διέκπλονν c. 69, 4), not used elsewhere in l o c a l sense. 1. 4. αυτών sc. των νέων. 1. 5. αμα with και: it belongs to the whole clause. 1. 6. άμα τΓαρ€βοήθ€ΐ, ' w a s there to co-operate in any quarter where the (Athenian) ships were driven ashore'. 1. 8. TOIS Συρακοσ-iois, ' o n the Syracusan s i d e ' . Cf. II 2, 1 ΙΙνθοδώρου Αρχοντος TOIS Άθηναίοις, VI 54, 6 αρχειν την ένιανσίαν Αθηναίοι*. 1. 9· 1. ίο. τ< >υ iravTos sc, στρατεύματος. το μέσον sc. 'έχοντα* or εΧχον. § 2 . 1. ι ι . ot άλλοι 'Αθηναίοι, ' t h e others, namely the A t h e n i a n s ' : see n. to c. 6 1 , 1. 1. 12. ιτροσέμισ-γον, appropinquabant. 1. 14. -irpos αύτφ goes with τετ ay μένων. 1. ΐ 5 · λυ€ΐν τα8 κλησεΐΞ, ' t o break through the barrier* or the chains that bound the moored ships together. I . 1 6 . ΐτανταχό*θ£ν σφίσι...Ιπιφ€ρομ4νων: the use of σφίσι here is a confusion; as if the Athenians continued to be the subject of the whole sentence, and the words had run, έπειδη καϊ πανταχόθεν σφίσι TOVS Σ . έώρων έπ^φερομένους, ού wpos τφ ζεύ^'ματι μόνον έναυμάχονν κτλ. (Arnold). 1. 18. κατά τον λιμένα eytyvcTO, ' w a s becoming general over the whole h a r b o u r ' . 1. 19. οϊα οΰχ Ιτέρα των ττροτέρων, ' n o t like any other of former naval fights'. Cf. I 23, ι παθήματα οΐα ούχ 'έτερα. § 3 . 1. 2ο. ττολλή μ^ν γάρ...4γ£7 ν€ΤΟ > ' e a c h side found great zeal on the part of their seamen \ VII lxx 4 HISTOR Υ OF T H U C Y D I D E S 1. 22. OTTOTC KcXevcrOcfr) sc. ύπό των κβλευστώρ (1. 47), ' w h e n ­ ever the word of command for advancing was given'. T h e subject is τό έπι,πλεΐρ. Cf. I 145, 1. 1. 23. ή άντιτίχνησ-^, ' t h e rival manoeuvring'. 1. 24. άγωνι<τμό$ occurs only here, while ά^ώρισ μα is found 6 5 seven times in all, thrice in this book (c. 56, 2 ; c. 59, 2 ; c. 86, 2 ) ; ά*γώνισις only once (v 50, 4). 1. 25. Ιθβρά-ΠΈυον, επεμέλουντο καΐ ή-γωρίζορτο (SchoL). I t is found with the articular infinitive VI 6 1 , 5 θεραπεύορτες τό irpbs τους.. .πολεμίους μ}} θορυβέίν. 1. 26. X€CiT€: c. 67, 3· 1. 29. 7^Ρ δ η : c 62, 4; c. 71» 2. *ιτλ€ΐίΓται...€ν Ι λ α χ ί σ τ φ Ιναυμάχησ-αν, 'never did so many ships as these fight in such a narrow space'. 1. 30. βραχύ ά«ττ4λΐ'ΐΓον...γ€ν4σ·θαι, 'fell (only) a little short of b e i n g ' . F o r the infinitive, see G. MT. § 749 ed. ma., and cf. Herod. VII 9 dXlyop άπολίπορτι άφικέσθ at. T h e actual number engaged was n o Athenian (c. 60, 4 where μάλιστα is added) + 76 Syracusan (§ I ) = I 8 6 ; according to Diodorus Sic. (xill 14, 4) 115 + 74 = 189. 1. 3 1 . a t \ιλν 4|χβολα(...αί Sfc προσ-βολαέ: the former, as Arnold explains, is the attack made in the regular and scientific manner with the ship's b e a k ; the latter expresses a ship's running on board of another ship, whether by chance fouling (ώς τύχοι ραϋς νηΐ προσπεσουσα), or by design with her beak or broadside to broadside. 16—2 VII lxx 4 1. 32. δια τό μη eivat-, 'because they were impossible'. n. to c. 4, 4 ; c. 36, 4. Tas άνακροΰ<τ€ΐδ: c. 36, 5. SiiiarXous: c. 36, 4. See 244 1 33· NOTES ON THE τ ύ χ ο ι , optative of indefinite recurrence. 1. 34. δια τ δ φ€νγ€ΐν ή άλλη ΙίΓΜτλ^ουσ-α, 'because it was trying to escape or because it was pursuing another s h i p ' (or 'in another direction' c. 32, 1). F o r the co-ordination of participle with preposition and*case, cf. c. 8, 2; c. 84, 2, VI 17, 3 1 e/c του 7 \iyeiv πείθων.,.ή στασιάξων. § 5 . 1. 35· δ<τον χρόνο ν ιτροο-φίροιτο, 'all the time that it was bearing d o w n ' . T h e optative as τύχοι 1. 33. 1. 37. άφθόνως, abunde. T h e adverb is not found elsewhere in T h u c . Perhaps we should read άφθ6νοι$, cf. c. 58, 4. 1. 38. €ΤΓ€ΐδή δέ irpo(r|JLei|€iav, ' b u t as soon as ever (the two) came into actual c o n t a c t ' . oi Ιττιβάται, the (regular) έπιβάταί, i.e. the hoplites on board. Stahl, after Pluygers, brackets the word, on the ground that it should include all on board, except the ναΰται and κνβερνηται. Is \ € i p a s 16VT€S: C. 5, 2. 1. 39. ace. €7πβαίν€ΐν is elsewhere used with gen. or with έπί and § 6 . 1. 39. ξυν€τύγχανέ τ€...€μ,β6βλησθαι, ' a n d so it came about in many places that, while on one side they (indefinite subject) had struck others, they had on the other been struck (c. 34, 5) themselves'., 1. 42. 'έστιν i j : c. 29, 3. ' h a d unavoidably got entangled'. κατ' ανάγκην ξυνηρτή<τθαι, 1. 4 3 . T h e grammatical connexion is των μϊν φνλακην των δ' έττίβουλην περιςστάναι τοις κυβ^ρνήται* κτέ., ' t h e pilots had to make plans both for guarding against attacks and for contriving them, not one at a time only but many at once on every side' ile. not having first to attack and then to repel the attack of an enemy; but at once attacking and being attacked, and that not with one adversary but with several, as it is explained by Arnold. For καθ1 £ν Ιίκαστον,Όί. c. 8, 1; c. 11, 4 ; c. 64, 2 ; c. 6g, 2 ; c. 75, 4. 1. 46. the din'. 1. 47. μίγαν, predicative, as in c. 7 1 , 1, ' t h e greatness of άχοστφησιν...·π , αρ4χ€ΐν = ά7Γοστε/3€?ϊ'. νιι Ιχχ 8 HISTORY OF THUCYDIDES § 7 . 1. 49. άφ* 4κατ€ρων...4γ£γν€το: 1. 2 i , c. 86, 4. «rots Κ€λ€υσταί$ = τταρα των κελευστών. κατά την τ^χνην κτ4., ' a s well in pursuance of their calling as in view of the immediate ardour of the conflict'. 1. 52. βιάζ€(τθαι, viefficere: c. 22, 2 ; c. 72, 3. 4ιπ.βοώντ€$, as if πολλά παρβκελεύοντο oi κελευσταί had preceded. T h e r e is a similar anacolouthon in c. 42, 2. 1· 53· ν€ρί=ύιτ4ρ, ' i n defence o f . TT}S 4S n j v «ιτατρίδα σωτηρίαδ, ' t h e i r safe return h o m e ' . Cf. Ill 112, 8 έσώθησαν is τψ πάλιν, νυν, €Ϊ ΊΓΟΤ€ καΐ av0is, 'now, if ever a g a i n ' (in the future), ' now or never ' ; if they failed now, they would never have another chance. Cf. c 64, 2. 1. 54. άντιλαβέσθαι, absol. as in 11 8, 1, v n i 106, 5. 1. 57. Ι-ιταυξήσαι, ' t o add to the honour o f . § 8 . 1. 58. μ-ή κατ* ανάγκην ιτρνμ,ναν κρουόμ€νον, 'backing water without absolute necessity', 1. 42, c. 57, 5. 1. 59. τον τρι/ηραρχον: c. 62, 3 ; c. 65, 2. 1. 60. el... ηγούμενο ι υποχωρούσαν, 'whether it was because they thought etc....that they are flinching from the contest'. T h e reading of Β υττοχωρουσιν se subducimt, sensim abeunt, is more appropriate than αποχωρούσα abeunt. Cf. I 54, 2, III 78, 3. 1. 6 r . οίκ€ΐοτ€ραν, ' m o r e their o w n ' . ou δι* ολίγου for oV οϋκ δΚΐ-γου, a collocation arising from an unwillingness to separate the preposition from its c a s e : cf. c. 36, 3 ούκ έν πόλλφ, c. 79, ι ούκ έπ' όλί'γων ασπίδων, ι 63, ι ώ$ is ελάχιστον χωρίον, X e n . Oec. c. 18, 8 ws els στενώτατον. See also note to c. 33, 2. Κ€κτη|χ4νη8, passive, as ξκτήθη in ι 123, 1, II 36, 4. 1. 63. *Αθηνα(ους may be retained as forming a stronger con­ trast to αυτοί. Classen, Stahl and H u d e bracket it, also BohmeWidmann, but not Kriiger. 1. 64. ιταντί τρόιτφ, ' b y every (possible) m e a n s ' . φ€υγοντα$ φίύγουα-ιν: the juxtaposition of two words is a favourite mode of emphasizing the contrast. Cf. c. 64, 2. Col. Mure {Crit. Hist, of Gr. lang. and lit. Vol. ν p . 176 ed. 2) thinks that the greater tendency in this passage and in §§ 4, 5 to antithetical jingle of structure and sound than in other parts oi the narrative text is a natural consequence of the author's greater effort at precision of descriptive effect. 66 246 NOTES ON THE VII lxxi ι C H A P T E R LXXI § 1. 1. ι. τ€ introduces a new moment in the description of the battle. €K by prolepsis, see n. to c. 25, 6 ; c. 86, 3. 1. 4. ί-ύοττασ-ιν rrjs γνώμηβ, animi contentionem, 'conflict of feeling*. Cf. Herod, v i 117, V I I 167, Plat. Legg. 833 a. Plutarch Mor. 347 B, where he quotes this passage, reads σύρτασιν, 'tension 5 . 1. 5. 6 αύτόθίν sc, πεζός, ' t h e native (Syracusan) foot', in expanded apposition to ό έκ της yrjs πεζός. ircpl του irXcCovos ήδη καλοΰ, ' for the additional glory awaiting them \ 1. 6. 01 €7T€X85VT€S, ' the invaders'. μη 2τι χείρω ιτράξωσ-ι, 'lest they should fare still worse'. See n. to c. 68 1. 18. § 2 . 1. 7. πάντων avaK€i[xevwv...€S Tas vai)s, 'since everything was dependent on their fleet'. Cf. Herod. I 97, III 31, 2. άνακειμένωρ serves for the passive pluperfect of άνατιθέναι; the passive perfect of τιθέναι and its compounds being m i d d l e in signification. Thus a father τέθειται βρομά παιδί, but παιδί κείται Ονομα, a city τέθειται νόμον, but ό τιθέμενος (pass.) νόμος κείται. 1. 9· νπέρ: In the orators υπέρ and περί are used interchange­ ably with no material difference of sense, but in early prose there is a marked distinction between them in meaning. 1. 10. οΰδίνΐ €θΐκώ$, 'like no other', 'unparalleled', c. 29, 5. δια το. Editors are generally agreed in thinking that one or more words have dropped out of the text h e r e ; some are of opinion that άνώμαλον was written twice, δια τό άνώμαΚορ της ρανμαχίας άρώμαλορ και τηρ 'έποψιν...-ηνayκάζοντο 'έχειν, ' o n account of the unevenness (varying fortunes) of the fight (not because of the inequality of the ground or of their position) the view which they had of it was necessarily u n e v e n ' i.e. gave them various impressions. Bekker's δι9 αυτό, confirmed though it is by the corrected reading of one or two MSS and apparently by Valla, does not yield any satisfactory sense, whether it refers to the greatness of the stake or the intensity of their fear. Classen's διά τό < άρώμαλον της τάξεως >, Arnold's δια τό <.άνώμα\ον των ξνμβαινόρτών περί την μάχηρ> suggested by a passage in Diodorus (xx 51), and approved by Bohme and Stahl, Donaldson's δια τό < άyχώμaλόv της άμίλλης > , and lastly Dobree's καϊ διότ.ι άρώμαλορ καϊ (proposed independently by Hude), are mere conjectures which an editor is not justified in importing into the text of his author. Linwood says 'Probably we should read διότι (with Dobree). T h e meaning appears to b e : the anxiety felt was greater than viilxxi 3 HISTORY OF THUCYDIDES 247 ordinary, both for the result, as everything to the Athenians depended upon their fleet, and because (from the irregularity of the shore) they could only obtain a partial view of the battle itself; and were consequently in a constant state of alarm as fortune varied at each particular point'. § 3 . 1. 13. δι' ολίγου, * at only a short distance off', c. 36, 5. The yap explains why the spectators had such varying impressions. The battle which they were watching being close to them, their prospect was limited, and they had different points of view; while some saw victory others saw defeat. . 1. 14. 4s το αυτό, local. 1. 15. επικρατούντος: c. 42, 6; c 63, 2; c. 72, ι. άν€θάρσηο-αν αν, 'they would recover their courage', the ingressive aorist with dv expressing a r e c u r r i n g action, corresponding to the optative el tdoiev in the protasis, which denotes a general condition * whenever they saw', i.e. their courage revived in all such cases; G. MT. § 162, § 466 ed. ma. 1. 16. άνάκλησιν, 'invocation', not found elsewhere in Thuc. 1. 17. TTJS σ ω τ ή ρ α : c. 70, 7. μένον$\ see note to c. 43, 7. το ήσσώμ€νον=τοι>5 ήσσ"«- 1. 19. αϊτό is to be taken with τψ ctyews, c. 68,1. 17. Tijv γνώμην.,.έδουλοΰντο, 'they became more enslaved in spirit (i.e. utterly unnerved) than the actual combatants'. For i-pyov, praeliunt^ 'action', cf. I 105, 6 ένόμισαν αυτοί έκάτεροι ούχ ησσον ^χβιν kv τ φ ΖρΊΨι II 89» 9 ^ν ΤΦ %ΡΎφ κόσμορ καϊ aiyty wepl πΧβίστου ήγεί<706, ι ν 32> 4> VIII c 42> $ έν τφ Ζργψ έπεκράτουν, c 61, 3 etc. 1. 21. άντίτταλόν τι τήδ ναυμ,αχ/as, ' some part of the sea-fight which hung in the balance' (Jowett). αττιδόντ€5, 'looking at­ tentively at', lit. 'looking away from all else at'. 1.'22. r6 ακρίτωδ |vv€X€s, 'the continuance without decisive 67 result (' the continuous indecisiveness', Jowett) of the conflict'. 1. 23. ϊσ-α...£υναΐΓον€ύοντ€$, 'in the extremity of fear swerving to and fro with their very bodies in sympathy with the feeling of the moment'. Mure /. c. regards this description of the vicissitudes of the feelings and gestures of the spectators as overstated to superfluity and tiiviality, whereas old commentators have commended these and similar passages as specimens of the Historian's power of poetical description. Cf. Plutarch de glor. Ath. c. 3 p. 347 c. x 248 NOTES ON THE vn lxxi 3 1. 24. €V TOIS χαλ€ΐτώτατα, «in the greatest distress of a l l ' : c. 19, 4. διήγον, degebant, not elsewhere in this sense in T h u c . ιταρ* ολίγον ή' δΐ€φ«υγον ή άπώλλυντο, 'they were always within a hair's breadth of escaping, when they were destroyed, or of being destroyed, when they escaped' {Arnold)', i.e. when they escaped they were only *as far as a little' from perishing, and when they perished, they were only ' a s far as a little' from escaping. See note to c. 2, 4. § 4 . 1. 2 5 . η ν . . . π ά ν τ α άκοΰσ-αι, the personal for the more usual impersonal construction, 'every sort of cry was to be heard \ Cf. Aesch. Pers. 419 θάΧασσα 5' ούκέτ1 ήν ίδεΐν vavayLuv πλήθουσα. For re summing up and concluding, see c. 70, 3 ; c. 87, 4. 1. 26. ά*γχώμαλα Ιναυμάχουν, aequo Marte pugnabant; con­ struction as c. 34, 6. T h e word ά γ χ ώ μ α λ ο * is found twice again in Thuc. ( i n 49, 1, IV 134, 1) but otherwise only in late writers, των Α θ η ν α ί ω ν is to be taken with πάντα άκουσαι, rather than wTith στρατεύματι. 1. 27. vuccovTes κρατούμενοι. T h e όλοφνρμός latter, βοή to the former, by chiastic arrangement. refers to the 1. 28. άλλα, as often Latin alia, concludes the asyndeton: the protasis to αν avayKa^oiTo is eV μεyά\ω κινδύνω = ει έν μ. κ. εϊη. For the adjective (πολνειδη) put predicatively in the relative clause, cf. c 60, 2. § 5 . 1. 30. αύτοίδ (sc. τοις εν Trj yrj διaτ€τayμέvoιs) depends on παραπλήσια; Stahl takes it as the dativus ethicus referring to the Athenians generally. 1. 3 1 . irpCv γ€ δη, 'until at l a s t ' : see note to c. 39, 2. 1. 32. €irl πολύ άντισχοΰο-ηβ, ' h a d held out, been protracted for a long time 1 ; c. 22, 2 ; c. 79, 6. 1. 34. λαμττρώδ, 'vigorously', ' h o t l y ' , not to be taken with επικείμενοι but with κατεδίωκον. Cf. I 49, 7 ή τροπή iytveTo λαμπρώς καϊ ένέκειντο oi Κορίνθιοι, where it means φανερως, ' d e ­ cisively', as c. 55, 1, V I I I c. 67, 3, c. 75, 2, Plut. Per. c. 25, 3, Pomp. c. 58, 5 ω% νενικηκως λαμπρώς. 1. 35· διακ€λ€υσ~μω, ' m u t u a l exhortation'. § 6 . 1. 38. μετέωροι, 'while still afloat in the h a r b o u r ' . κατ€ν€χ0€ντ€$, c. 53, r. 4fj€ir€o-ov sc. έκ των νεων. For the sense, vnlxxiii HISTORY OF THUCYDIDES 249 see note in Addenda. Cf. Diod. XIH 17, 4 έκπηδωντες έκ τωι> ve&v άπολομένων els τό ire^bv στρατόπβδον tyevyov. The subject is the collective noun στρατοί. 1. 39- ούκέτι διαφόρως, 'not, as before (§ 3), with various emotions, but with one common impulse'. 1. 40. δ·υσ-ανα<τχ€τουντ€δ, aegre ferentes> not found elsewhere in Thuc, once only in Polybius without case, several times in Plutarch with έπί τινι, irpbs τι, or TLVL στόνφ, dative of manner. 1. 41. οι μέν.,.οι δέ...άλλοι hi are in expanded apposition to 0 δέ irefa. €irl τά$ vavs τταρββοήθουν, * ran to save the ships'. 1. 42. τό λοιπόν του τί£χου$, the διατείχισμα of c. 60, 2. 1. 43. καΐ οι ιτλ€ίσ-τοι, ' and those the greatest number*. ήδη-^δ^σ-κόττονν, 'began at this moment to look about for them­ selves'. The ace. with περί is to be noted. §7. I.45. ουδ€μιά$δή...€λάσ-σ·ων: c. 29, 5. 1. 46. Ή'αρα'ΤΓλήσ-ia...KaC, c. 28, 4 ; c. 70, 1. 1. 47. διαφθαρ€ΐσ-ών : iv 14 if. 1. 48. ΐΓροσαττώλλυντο QVUTOIS, 'were also (xpos-) as good as lost for them'. So διεφθάρησαν IV 36, 3 is applied to those who were (not slain but) compelled to surrender. 01 kv τη νησ-ψ... 8iapep>]KOT€S: the perfect participle is construed with ev because it implies rest in, as well as arrival at, a place. Cf. c. 87, 2 h τφ τοιούτφ χωρίψ έμπβπτωκότας, IV 14» ι ταϊ$ λοιπαΐς (των νεών) ev τ% yy καταπεφευ-γυίαις. For the p o s i t i o n of the attributive participle, cf. c. 23, 3 ; c. 58, 2. 1. 49. κσ,ί, 'and so', c. 60, 4. 1. 51. παρά λσγον: The word napdXoyos is not used as an ad­ jective by Thucydides; hence the reading παράλογοι/ must be wrong. i>ut Plut. TimoL c. 16, 1 has TTJS δυστυχίας παραΧο^ου φανείσψ. CHAPTER LXXII § 1. 1. 2. πολλών ν€ών...ά·!Γθλομ.ενων: The Athenian loss was 68 about 50 (110-60) according to § 3 ; the Syracusan, about 25 (7650): c. 60, 4 and c. 70, 4. Diodorus (xin 17, 5) gives the first as 60, the second as only 8 destroyed, 16 rendered unseaworthy. 250 1. 3. NOTES ON THE vn lxxii , €ΤΓΐκρατήσαντ69, ' in virtue of their victory'. 1. 4. aveCXovTo: c. 5, 3. 1. 6. νπό, prae; c. 44, 3 ; c. 48, 4. 1. 7. ουδέ €ΐτ€νόΌυν, * did not so much as give a thought to the subject o f : α ί τ η σ α ι ava£p€ αύτots, which is equivalent to δί€νοήθησαν (Arnold), Gf. c. 72, ι. καϊ την Ιττιοΰσ-αν ήμέραν, 'the on-coming day'. Cf. Xen. Cyr. VII ii 3, Anab. I vii 2 αμα rrj έπιούσ^ ήμερα, Arist. EccL 105 where Praxagora, who had before said irpbs δρθρον εστί, speaks of τήν έιτίοϋσαν ήμέραν, meaning the day just dawning, Plato Crito p. 44 A where της ετέρας ' to-morrow' is opposed to τψ έ π t ο ύ σ η s ημέρας, ' the day then beginning \ ( 1. 5. όπως ξυσκ€υάσ·αιντο...οτι χρησαμ,ώτατα, 'in order that 70 they might pack up the most useful possible things (c. 75, 5) that the circumstances allowed'. The limitative phrase u»s 4κ των δυνατών occurs II 3, 4 : cf. c. 76 ώς έκ των υπαρχόντων, VI 7o, 4 ώ$ έκ των παρόντων, II 96» ι ώ$ δια ταχέων, 'as well as the short 254 NOTES ON time allowed'. T h e verb σνσκευάζεσθαι Xenophon, only here in T h u c . THE vn Ixxiv a is frequently found in 1. 7. αυτά δοτά, 'only just so much as 5 , 'not more t h a n ' . Cf. I 139, 3 αϋτα τάδε, 'merely this*. irepl τό σώμα Is δίαιταν, ad victum cultumque corporis, 'for the sustenance of the b o d y \ Cf, VI 15, 4 τό piyedos TTJS κατά, rb έαντοϋ σώμα παρα­ νομία* is τήν δίαιταν. § 2 . 1. ΐ 2 . ά·π·€φράγνυ(ταν: the form is found in Soph. Antig. 241 άποφράγνυσαι. 1. 14. υποδοχή ν, rare in the sense of a h o s t i l e reception. I t occurs in 1 139, 2 in its usual meaning, that of ' a friendly reception'. *g Ι8όκ€ΐ, ' a t the point where it was thought advisable'. 1. 15. τάδ va€s, those which had been run ashore, c. 7 1 , 6. 1. 16. άφ6ίλκον, i n c h o a t i v e or c o n a t i v e imperfect, c. 8 1 , 4. Ιν&τρηο-αν, ' h a d (already) b u r n t ' . 1. 17. n v a s oXfryas: c. 1, 4 ; c. 82, 1. cocnrep 8ΐ€νοήθησ*αν: 6o, 2. 1. 18. καθ* ή σ υ χ ί α ν : c. 73, 2. 1. 19. cos €κάο-την ττοι Ικ-πΈίττωκυίαν, 'as they severally had been driven ashore at any point*. Cf. c. 6$, 2. άναδηο-άμ€νοι, ' t a k i n g in t o w ' ; I 50, r, II c. 90, 6, c. 92, 2, i v 14, 1. 1. 20. Ικόμιξον, sc. οι Συρακόσιοι. C H A P T E R LXXV § 1. 1. 2. ·π·αρ€0ΓΚ€υάσ-θαι, ' t h a t their arrangements were com­ plete', impersonal; cf. 1 46, i , i l l 107, 4, iv 67, 1. 1. 3. KaC, ' s o ' , marks the immediate carrying out of the reso­ lution t a k e n : cf. II 93, 4 ws δί Ζδοξβν αύτοΐς, κ αϊ έχώρουν etftftfs, IV 8, 9 ws δ' έδόκβί—κ αϊ διββψαζόν, VIII 27, 5 ώί ^retire, κ αϊ έδρασε ταύτα; where observe that ώ$, not επειδή, postquam, is used. 1. 3. ή άνάσ-ταο-is, ' t h e breaking up of the c a m p ' . Cf. 11 14, 2 χαλεττώϊ η ανάστασης eytyveTo. T h e word generally implies ' a forced, not a voluntary, removal'. 1. 5. δεινό ν οΰν ή ν οΰ καθ* 2ν μόνον των πραγμάτων κτλ., ' not only in respect to one point in their present plight was it a dreadful thing, that they were going away having lost their entire fleet and, instead of (realising) high hopes etc., jeopardising their city as well as their own lives, but also, while they were quitting the camp, painful circumstances presented themselves to the notice of every viilxxv 4 HISTORY OF THUCYDIDES 255 eye and h e a r t ' . I took καθ1 2 ν as one word forming the subject of ην, in unum contracta rerum gestarum summa, in ed* 1, but this does not bring out the intended contrast so well. Prof. Jowett and others m a k e the subject general, ' the situa­ tion was awful, not only when looked at under one aspect of their affairs, but every aspect '. Stahl, not satisfied with any of the possible explanations of the text as it stands, concludes that it is incorrect, and that some substantive such as τούτο τό τέλος or η μεταβολή is lost before των πραγμάτων* § 3 . 1. 12. Κ€(μ€νον, sc. άταφον. Cf. II 52, 2, IV ggt 1, X e n . Anab. VI ν 6 kird δε els την οδόν ηκον—ένθάδε Ζκειντο αθρόοι— συνενεγκόντες αυτούς έθαψαν, H o r n . / / . XIX32. μ€τά φόβου: quod scelestum iudicabatur cognatum insepultum relinquere (jfacobs). 1. 13. οι £s: c. 28, 3 ; c. 74, 1. I.44. αϊτό oi'as = #τι άπό τοιαύτης with reference to έδοξάξετο. 1. 45· αΰχήματοδ (c. 66, 3): του άτρωτου ( ' i n the first instance'), )( τελεντήν, as λαμπρότητος is opp. to ταπεινότητα by chiastic arrangement. T. VII !7 258 NOTES ON THE vn lxxv 6 1. 46. αφίκατο, pervenerant, Badham's conjectural emendation of the MSS reading άφΐκτο, which could only be taken impersonally, 'matters had c o m e ' , and this would not suit αϋχημα* § 7. 1. 46. τό διάφορον τοΰτο, haec rerum diversitas, ' this reverse'. F o r the position of μέγιστον, cf. c. 85, 4 ; the δή is to be taken closely with yap, as in c. 62, 4 ; c. 70, 4 ; c. 71, 2. 72 1. 47. T h e MSS have τφ before 'Ί&λληνικφ—evidently a mis­ take arising from dittography arid condemned as an erroneous read­ ing by the Scholiast. Poppo proposes to read τφ=τινί. ots, ' since to t h e m ' , plural in reference to the collective noun στρατεύματα, see note to 1. 28, and for ots—αυτούς, cf. ill 84, 3 απασιν έλπις υπόκειται σφάλει σι καν αυτούς διασφζεσθαι. The order is ots ζννέβη άντϊ του (c. 28, ι) ηκειν δονλωσομένους (c. 68, 2) Άλλους α,τηέναι αυτούς δεδιότας μαλλο? μη πάθωσι τούτο (τδ δουλοϋσθαι). F o r the ace. atfrotfs before άπιέναι, cf. c. 74, 1. 7, and for the v i c a r i o u s use of πάσχει?, c. 11, 4 ; c. 48, 4. 1. 50. μ.€θ* ων IfjiVXeov: see VI 32, 1. T h e order is (ξννέβη) άφορμασθαι πάλιν (c. 40, ι) έπιφημίσμασιν τοις έναντίοις τούτων, rursus cum ominis malt vocibus, quae his (sc. votis laetisque xarminibus) erant contrariae, discedere (Valla). 1. 52. ναυβατών: ναύτης ή επιβάτης (Sckol.). A poetical word which occurs again 1 121, 3, v i l i 44, 1. Pollux i 95 calls it Tpayiκώτερον. όττλιτικω: c. I T , 3. 1· 53· Ίτροσ€χοντα5 : c. 4, 4. υπό, praei c. 72, 2 ; c. 73, 2 ; c. 76. CHAPTER LXXVI 1. 2. 4v μεγάλη μ€ταβολη ov, ' t h a t enormous reverse of circumstances'. it was undergoing an 1. 3. έπ-ιπαριών, ' approaching in order to speak t o ' , c. 78, 1, IV 94, 2, VI 67, 3. ws €Κ των υπαρχόντων, ' a s well as he could under existing circumstances' (c. 74, j), with Ιθάρσυνε. 1. 4· Ιτι μάλλον, 'still m o r e ' (than in his former speeches, or than before the last battle, c. 69, 2). Prof. Jowett takes the words closely with εκάστοις, 'raising his voice higher and higher as he went from one to another', and VII lxxvii 2 HISTORY OF T H U C Y D I D E S 259 considers that this explanation is confirmed by the indefiniteness of the optative. 1. 5. καθ* oils γίγνοιτο, ' a m o n g whom, from time to time, he c a m e ' , c. 78, r. 1. 6. ώ$ ΙττΙ ΐΓλ€ΐ<Γτον γ€·γων£σ·κων, * by trying to make himself heard as far off as possible*. Cf. I 34, 8 &πω$ άκούοιτο ώ* επί πλεί­ στον του ομίλου, yeyiaviaicciv is a voxpoetica% Aesch. P. V. 627. CHAPTER LXXVII T h e harangue of Nicias before the last seafight at Syracuse, and the corresponding speech of Gylippus on the Syracusan side, are in a high degree powerful and pathetic; so, above all, is the l a s t s p e e c h of N i c i a s b e f o r e t h e r e t r e a t . Nowhere else, perhaps, has Thucydides given so free a scope to his own rhetorical p o w e r ; yet even here it is strictly subordinated to his primary purpose—that of faithfully presenting the cardinal facts of the situation as he conceived them {Jebb). § 1. 1. ι. €Κ των παρόντων: c. 62, 2 ; c. 76 1. 3. 1.2. ή8η...€σώθηοταν, ' h a v e been before now delivered'. T h e aor. with ήδη is similarly used in 11 77, 4, i v 62, 3. T h e paren­ thetic asyndeton is connected by τοιωνδε with the opening of the speech. 1. 3. rj roicovSc for r) τοίάδε εστί by attraction, rather than for ή Ικ τοιωνδε (cf. c. 47, 4). See H A . § 643 a. 1. 4. καταμφ.φ€<τθαι κτΙ., gravius incusare vos ob calamitates. 1. 5. μ.ήτ€ r a t s ξυμφοραϊε κτΙ. Ό η account of either your (late) reverses (in battle) or your present unmerited hardships'. 1. 6. ιταρά τήν άξιαν, praeter meritum (Poppo). § 2 . 1. 7. κάγώ τοι, Ί too, let m e assure y o u ' . . T h e r e are only two other passages in which the particle TOL is used by T h u c . , II 4 1 , 9 ού δή τ ο ί , III 40, 4 ιταρά. τό είκό$ τοι. 1. 8. προφέρων: α 64, 2. 1. 9. 8η, ' o f course'. tus sim: see on c. 75, 3. α λ λ ά , ' on the contrary % * n a y ' . ώ$ 8ιακ€ψ.αι, quern in staium ύττό TTJS νόσ-ου: c. 15, 1. redac- 1. 10. €ύτυχ£α: V 16, ι, νΐ 17, ι, Plut. Nic. c. 2, 4 TV φύσα ων άθαρσής καϊ δύσελπα έν μεν rots πολεμικοί* απέκρυπτε? ευτυχία τήρ δειλίαν κατώρθου yap όμαλώς στρατηγών. 17—2 26θ 1, 11. NOTES ON THE vn lxxvii 2 es τα άλλα i.e. in public life generally. 1. 12. TOIS φαυλότατοι*, in its social, not moral, sense, ' t h e m e a n e s t ' , * humblest'. F o r the dat. after τ φ αύτφ, cf. c. 57, 2. αιωρούμαι, suspensus sum, § 3 . 1. 13. π ο λ λ ά μέν h, 0€oi)s νόμιμα δ€8ιητημαι κτΙ., ' m y life has been passed in the performance of many a religious duty to the gods, and many a just action in my dealings with men, giving no offence to a n y ' . F o r πολλά, ace. of inner object to δεδιήτημαι, cf. 1 6, 6 and see G. j§ 159, H A . § 716 b . F o r the statement, cf. c. 86, 5, Arist. Eq. 30, Plut. Nic. c. 4, ι τφ λοιπφ τρόπφ του ανδρός καϊ η6ei πιστεύσβιεν &ν TIS βύσεββίας έπακολούθημα τήν,τοιαύτην χάριν και δημα^γω-γίαν -γενέσθαι. Arnold observes that διαιτασθαι expresses a man's p r i v a t e life, as πολιτ€ύεσθαι does his public life. 1. 14. άνθ* <ον, ' i n return for which', 'wherefore'. 1. 15. ο μ cos, notwithstanding our present desperate plight. θραο~€ΐα, ' is full of confidence\ at Sfc ξυμφοραΐ ου κατ' αξία ν δή φοβοΰσ-ι, ' w h i l e our reverses do not frighten me in a degree proportioned to their supposed {δή) magnitude'. Grote's version of this passage appears to m e to be the only one which suits the spirit and context of the speech. Others take the negative with κατ' άζίαν, 'according to our desert', un­ derstanding the words to bear the same sense with r a t s παρά την άξίαν κακοπαθίαι* Ι. 7, and making ύμας, not έμέ, the object of φοβοϋσι. Classen explains it 'terrify you more than they ought to d o ' , i.e. are out of proportion to our offences. Stahl adopts the emendation proposed by Schiitz {Zeitschrift f. d. Gymnasialw. 1879 p . 121) at δέ ζυμφοραΐ.,.δτ) φοβουσαι τάχ' αν καϊ λωφήσειαν, calamitates autem^ quoniam praeter meritum {nos) terrent, facile videntur remissurae esse. 73 1. 16. τ ά χ α δέ &v καϊ λωφήσ*€ΐαν, ' a n d perhaps they may even abate'. T h e verb λωφαν recurs in II 49, 3, VI 12, 1. 1. 17. ικανά...ηύτυχηται: an instance of the neuter adjective, = a cognate accusative in the active, becoming the subject of the passive verb. Cf. Isocr. Nicocl. § 63 ήν τά παρ ύμων νπηρετηται. 1. 18. €Ϊ τφ θεών έιΚφθονοι 4στρατ€υσαμ€ν, 'if, when we started on our expedition, we were under the jealous wrath of any g o d ' . VII lxxvii 4 HISTORY OF THUCYDIDES 261 This is a remarkable illustration of the doctrine, so frequently set forth in Herodotus, that the gods were jealous of any man or any nation who was preeminently powerful or prosperous. Nicias, recollecting the immense manifestation and promise with which his armament had started from Peiraeus, now believed that this had provoked the jealousy of some of the gods, and brought about the misfortunes in Sicily. H e comforts his soldiers by saying that the enemy is now at the same dangerous pinnacle of exaltation, whilst they have exhausted the sad effects of the divine jealousy (Grote). See H e r o d . 111 40. 1. 19. τβτιμωρημβθα, passive, as VI 60, 5 έτετιμώρψτο. Thus we have αίρεΐσθαι ('to choose'), μεταπέμπεσθαι, ψηφίζεσθαι, ypaφεσθαι ('to indict'), κυκλοΰσθαι (Xen. Cyr. VI iii 20 ol κυκλούμενοι έκυκλώθησαν) used both as passive and middle. § 4. 1. 22. to do 1 . 1. 20. ήλθον...ή'δη : see n. to 1. 2. άνθρώ·π·€ΐα, 'befitting human nature', 'natural for one 1. 23. T h e position of re is as if ορώντας...μη καταπεπλήχθαι had followed. του 0€ΐου, ' t h e gods', gen. of τό Θείον. This is Kriiger's reading for the vulgate του θεού, which is used by T h u c only of special and individual gods, as of Apollo 11 54» 4> of Pallas Athene, II 13, 5, while θεοί (ιι c. 15, 4 ; c · 53» 4» V I 54» 6) designates local deities. Cf. ν c. 70, 1 ; c. 104, 1; c. 105, 1, 2, 3 ; c. 112, 2. ήττιώτίρα, mitiora: only in the comparative in Thuc. I t is specially used of d i v i n e favour and kindness in the Tragedians, Soph. Phil. 738, Eur. Bacch. 361. 1. 24. a V αυτών sc. των θέων implied in the collective θείου, not, as Kriiger, ' i n consequence of our sufferings'. του άξιώτ€οοι is for μάλλον άξιοι. So in Xen. Cyr. VIII ii 13 άξιολογώτερον for μάλλον άξιόλογον, Oecon. c. 15, ι αϊσχιον for μάλλον αίσχρβν, Hell. VII ν 19 θαυμαστοτερα for μάλλον θαυμαστά. 1. 28. αυτοί iroXis €υθύδ 4στ€, 'you are yourselves at once a city' i.e. because of your formidable number and strength. Gf. 1.5°. 1. 29. ά λ λ η οΰδβμία, *no other city' but Syracuse, or better, ' n o other city' in reference to the city which yourselves will be. αν Ιιτιόνταδ δ φ χ ι τ ο , 'would await your attack', the potential opta­ tive. Cf. c. 40, 5 ; c. 44, 4. 1. 30. €ξανα<ττιί<Γ€ΐ€: ι ν 98, 3. 202 NOTES ON THE vn lxxvii 5 § 6 . 1. 31. ώ σ τ ' . . . είναι αυτοί φυλάξατε, ' b e careful your­ selves that your march b e firm and orderly'. F o r the infinitive with ώστε after ψνλάσσειν, see G. MT. § 374 ed. ma. 1. 32. μή ά λ λ ο τι...ή\..μ,άχεσθαι. Cf. I c. 70, 8 μήτε έορτήν ά λ λ ο τι η'γεΐσθat rj το τά δέοντα πραξαι, III 30, 4 νομίσαντβς ούκ ά λ λ ο τι έΐναι τό KOLivbv του πο\έμου η τό τοιούτον, τ ο ΰ τ ο : G. Gr.2 § 1030. 1. 35· κρατησ-as, si victoria potiatur (Valla). 1. 36. <ΓΠΌυ8ή δέ opoCios καΐ νύκτα καΐ ήμέραν €*σται TTJS όδοΰ, (future in the sense of imperative), 'you will have to hurry forward day and night a l i k e ' {Jotvett). § ^ β . 1. 37. βραχέα, 'scanty*. r\v άντιλαβώμεθά του φίλιου χωρίου των Σικελών, 'should we reach (c. 60, 2) any friendly village of the Sicels' (c. 57, 11). 1. 39. Συρακοσίων, objective gen. I . 4 0 . ήδη, 'then and not till t h e n ' , ' a t once'. ΐΓ€·ΐΓ€μ.τΓται, impersonal, ' notice has been sent in advance \ irpo- 1. 4 1 . είρημ.ε"νον, 'directions having been given to t h e m \ accus. absol., see n. to c. 18, 2 : και before άπανταν is correlative to the κ α ί before σιτία. H u d e takes βίρημένον as equivalent to the finite verb, since otherwise, he thinks, we should have had απανταν τε καΐ κόμιζαν. Bohme retains άλλα in the sense of 'fresh' in reference to 1. 37. Other edd. adopt άμα, Reiske's restoration from Valla's rendering pariter et commeatttm. § 7. 1. 44. men'. 1. 45. 1. 42. τ ε : see note to c. 49, 3. άνδράσιν ci*ya8ois γίγνεσθαι, ' t o prove yourselves brave oiroi: see note to c. 70, 7. 1. 46. μαλακισθεντεβ (c. 68, 2) for el μάλακισθεΐτε. σωθείτε: the contracted form of the optative inflexions was the only one in use with Attic writers. T h u s in Arist. Ran. 1450 we have σωθεΐμεν αν, Vesfi. 484 α π α λ λ α χ θ ε ί τ ε , Pac. 1262, διαπρι.· σθ€Ϊ€ν, where the metre determines the true reading. See Stahl Qu. Thuc. p . 62 ed. 2, Rutherford on Phrynichus p . 451 ff. 74 1. 48. τευξόμ,ενοι—έιτανορθώσοντεβ are both participles in in­ direct discourse after 7*>ώτε, coordinated with dvayKatov 6v, Cf. c. 14, 3 ; c. 67, 4. 1. 49. εττιδεΐν: c. 6 1 , 1. vii Ixxviii 2 HISTORY OF THUCYDIDES 263 1. 50. aVBpes γάρ i r o \ i $ : a sentiment which recurs various forms in Greek writers, Soph. Oed. T. 5 6 : — ώ$ ουδέν εστίν οϋτε πύpyos οϋτε vaus έρημος ανδρών μή ξυνοικούντων &τω, in Euripides Phrixus fr. 825 ed. N a u c k : at yap πόλεις εϊσ άνδρες, ούκ έρημία. Dio Cass. 56, 5, 3 άνθρωποι yap που πόλις εστίν, αλλ' ούκ οίκίαι ουδέ στοαΐ ούδ' ayopal ανδρών κεναί, Alcaeusjfr. 23 : ού λίθοι τείχεων εΰ δεδομαμένοι, αλλ' άνδρες ποΚιος πύρyoς άρήϊοι, imitated by Sir W . Jones in his well-known ode Ode on the constitution of a state, Justin. 11 12, 15 patriam municipes esse, non moenia, civitatemque non in aedificiis sed in civibus posit am. CHAPTER LXXVIII § 1. 1. ι. τοιάδξ has here a retrospective reference, which is Unusual, especially after speeches, where we should expect τοιαύτα] cf. c. 57, 1 1 ; c. 58, ι ; τάδε ι c. 43, 4. On the contrary τοιούτους is used before a speech for τοιούσδε in iv 58. 1. 2. €irg€i, obibat, 'passed along the l i n e ' ; αμα goes with παρακελευόμενος, G. MT. § 858 ed. ma. T h e καί before ει connects ^uvaywv with παρακελευόμενος. 1-3. ξυνάγων, contrahens, c. 8 1 , 2. καθιστάω, 'bringing them into their proper place', ' p u t t i n g them in line*. 1. 4. ουδέν ή<τ<τον so. έπχιει. τοί$ καθ' εαυτόν, 'those who were in his part of the army, near and about h i m ' , c. 76 1. 5, Xen. Cyr. v i iii 36, v n i 22, 36, ν 3. 1. 5· τοιαύτα τ€ καί ιταραιτλησ-ια: c 12, 4· § 2 . 1. 6. το Sg, sc. στράτευμα. T h e army marched in two bodies, each εν π λ α ι σ ί φ i.e. ' i n the form of a hollow oblong', within which were the baggage, the light-armed and the followersCf. VI 67, 1, Xen. Anab. ill ii 36 πλαίσιον...ϊνα τα σκευοφόρα καί δ πολύς βχλος εν άσφαλεστέρφ $. 1. 7· ιτρωτον ήγούμ€νον, a redundant expression, like πρώτον ήρξατο, ι 103, 4» » 23, ι · 1. 9· €VTOS: c. 5> 3 5 c · *5> 5 : τ°ν π·λαισίου is to be understood. 264 NOTES ON THE vn Ixxviii a 1. ίο. €7Γ€ΐδή έγ^νοντο eiri, .' when they had arrived at the crossing of the river Anapus', c. 35, 2; c. 80, 6. The Athenians, when they left their last position in the marsh on the left bank of the Anapus, moved westwards, having now no intention of marching to Catana, as Diodorus Sic. (xni 18, 6) asserts. They crossed the river in face of the Syracusan cavalry and javelineers, and continued their march along the right bank. 1. 13. των Συρακοσ-ίων : partitive gen., c. 26, 3, HA. § 732 b. 1. 15. ΊΓροσ·4κ€ΐντο, instabant) cf. c. 39, 2; c. 40, 2; c. 42, 3. 1. 16. €σ·ακοντίζοντ€5 οι ψιλοί, in partitive apposition to oi Συρακόσιοι,: cf. c. 71, 1; oi ψιλοί is used, as if oi i-wireis had preceded. § 4 . 1. 16. καί, 'and so' i.e. galled and molested by the enemy's cavalry. 1. 18. ηύλίο-αντο irpos λόφω nvl: The hill where they halted for the night was about a mile south of the Cavetta, a precipitous gorge so called, where the Anapus issues from the heights of Mt Hybla and is immediately joined by the branch from Floridia and S. Paulo {Leake). 1. 19. τη δ' ύσ-τ€ρα£α...€ΐ'κοο-ι ο-ταδίουβ: on the s#econd day they could not make more than twenty stadia, being still harassed by the enemy's cavalry and light troops. I.21. κατέβηαταν : this expression is not strictly applicable to the locality; for in the route which they followed the ground rises into a series of undulating hills. Lupus (die Stadt Syrakus etc. p. 150 note) suggests that the traditional reading is possibly incorrect. We should have expected some word, signifying 'turned aside from the direct road'. Freeman thinks the description suits the spot. 1. 22. cfareSov, * level', Schol. όμαλόν, όμόπεδον, ώ$ καί άλοχος ή όμόλοχο*. A rare word, used once by Herodotus IX 102 άπβδος χώρος. This inhabited plain was that of Floridia^ called πεδίον c 79, 5. αύτοΰ: c. 39, 2; c. 40, 1; c. 78, 2. 1. 23. Ιδώδιμον: c. 39, 2. 1. 24. ΰδωρ μετά σφών αυτών φή>€σ-θαι αΰτ<50€ν, 'to carry a sup­ ply of water with them from the place' (c. 34, 2). 1. 25. «ν τφirpoo-06v, 'in the country which lay before them'. vnlxxixx HISTORY OF THUCYDIDES 1. 26. στάδια: elsewhere in Thuc always σταδίου*. £μ€λ\ον Wvat, * on the road which they were going to take'. 265 η 75 § 5. 1. 27. 4v τοΰτφ...άπΈΤ€£χιζον, 'were employing them­ selves meantime in barricading'. 1. 29. «apropos, below (c. 79, 2) called έπάντης. 1. 3i. Άκραΐον λέπ-as, 'the Acraean rock': this was a narrow ridge on the road from Syracuse to A k r a e (mod. Palazzolo) be­ tween two ravines which the Athenians had to cross in order to issue from the valley of the Anapus and continue their march west­ wards far enough into the interior to reach the country of the Sicels. It is identified with the hill at the west outlet of the trough Cava di Culatrello or Spampinato, where the ascent to the high ground com­ menced on the old road from Syracuse to Palazzolo. The modern highway makes a considerable detour to the north. § 6. 1. 3T. τη ΰοτ€ραία κτί.: On the third day the Athe­ nian army resumed its march, but it was so galled by the hostile cavalry and dartmen that it could not even reach the ridge, and had to fall back upon the plain, where it had encamped the night before. But now provisions could no longer be procured here; for no foraging parties could elude the enemy's observa­ tion ; and goaded by necessity, the Athenians set out early the next morning, to make a desperate effort to storm the ridge (Thirlwall). § 7. 1. 37. ιτάλιν, 'back again'. 1. 38. οΰκίτι ομοίως, 'no longer in like manner as before', c. 72, 3· 1. 39. άιτοχωρβΐν sc. από του στρατοπέδου. νπδ τών ίτητίων ι c · 75» 7 J c · 76> VI 37> 2 °νκ επί ττολύ ύπό των ημετέρων Ιππέων έξιόντ€ϊ. CHAPTER LXXIX § 1. 1. ι. apavrcs: c. 26, ι ; c. 69, 4· 1. 2. φιάσαντο irpos τον λόφον, vi pervadunt ad tumufum (Valla), 'forced their way (through the cavalry) to the ridge'· Cf· c. 69, 4 βι,άσασθαι is το gi-ω, c. 83, 5. τον άΐΓθΤ€Τ€ΐχισμ4νον, c. 78 1. 28. 1. 4. \>π4ρ, 'beyond', 'behind*. 266 NOTES ON THE vn lxxix ι 1. 5. ουκ err* ολίγων ασπίδων, ' n o t a few shields d e e p ' , ' i n a deep l i n e ' . Cf. Xen. Hell. II iv 11 έ^ένοντο βάθος ούκ ε*λαττον ή επί πεντήκοντα ασπίδων. T h e accusative is used Thuc. Iv 93, 4 έπ' ασπίδας δε πέντε και είκοσι Θηβαίοι έτάξαντο. §2. 1. 7· 4τ€ΐχομάχουν, 'tried to take the wall by s t o r m ' . 1. 9. διικνοΰντο, ' they reached, hit t h e m ' with their missiles. ' Cf. Dio Chrys. Or. XVI p . 245 c δει δε θώρακος στέρεου καϊ της άλλης πανοπλίας, ώστε, καν έμπέση τι, μη διικνεΐσθαι. 1. ίο. § 3. άν€χώρουν π ά λ ι ν : c 78, 7· 1. ι r . βρονταί, ' c l a p s of t h u n d e r ' , always in plural in T h u c , cf. 11 77, 6, v i 70, 1. 1. 12. οΐα, not for a>s, but in agreement with the two antecedents βρονταί and ϋδωρ. προς μ^τόττωρον, 'towards autumn', v n i io8, 2, Arist. Eccl. 20 προς 'όρθρον έστι. 1. 13. αφ* ων, ' in consequence of which ' ; c. 37, 1. 1. 14. μάλλον &rt ήθύμουν: cf. VI 1, 70. όλέθρω: cf. c. 34, 1. 1. 15. erri το σ-φ€Τ€ρω ταΰτα π ά ν τ α = t h e rain and thunder. § 4 . 1. 17. μέρος as a collective noun, denoting persons, is followed by the participle in the plural, G. Gr.2 § 920. 76 1. 18. α δ : item (c. 25, 9) i.e. in their rear, as they had already done in front of them, see c. 78, 5. 1. 19. άντι/ϊτβμψαντες, 'sending on their part' to meet t h e m ' . § 5 . 1. 22. irpos το ircSiov μάλλον, no longer in the bottom below Floridia but in the more level ground above {Freeman). 1. 23. ττρούχώρουν, it would seem, toward the high ground, but scarcely with even a hope of reaching it {Thirlwall). 1. 25. «ιτανταχή is to be taken with κύκλω 1. 28. καϊ μάλιο-τα sc. έπέκειντο. copula than as intensive of μάλιστα. in 11 79, 6, i n 97, 3, i v 33. as in i n 68, 3. I t is better to take και as the Similar tactics are described 1. 29. €Ϊ πως. φοβήσ*€ΐαν, *in the hope thai mey might possibly, by putting to flight small sections one after another, strike a panic into the whole army' f T h e apodosis is not formulated but implied, the clause expressing a desired contingency, which serves as a motive for the action denoted by the principal verb, so that εϊ νιι Ιχχχ ι HISTORY OF THUCYDIDES 2b? π ω $ has nearly the force of oVwsj cf. 1 58, 1, II 67, 1, i l l 4, 4, IV c. 11, 3 ; c. 37, 1. See H A . § 907, G. MT. § 489 ed. ma. F o r φοβήσειαν, see n. to c. 30, 1, and for the distributive κατά, c. 19, 1; c. 64, 2; κατά βραχύ might also be taken as the immediate object of τρεψάμενοι, like επί πολύ c. 65, 2. § β . 1. 3 i . €irl ιτολύ, dm, c. 22, 2 ; c. 7 1 , 5. A t night they found themselves little more than half a mile from their last encamp­ ment in the plain southward. CHAPTER LXXX § 1 . 1. 1. Trjs VVKTOS, during the night which ushered in the sixth day of their retreat. 1. 2. €*ιτ€ΐδή κακώς...καΐ κατατ€τραυματισμ.^νοι ή σ α ν πολλοί, ' now that they found their army in a miserable state both from want of provisions which had begun to be felt, and (because) so many men had been disabled by w o u n d s ' [Arnold). T h e finite clause takes the place of a subordinate clause in giving the second reason for κακώς et%e, the first reason being expressed in the da­ tive {απορία). Cf. I 110, 2 τούτον δια /^yeflos re του έλους ουκ έδύναντο έλέΐν καϊ άμα μαχιμώτατοί ε ί σ ι , IV 95» Ι το ^σον πρό$ re τού$ ayadobs άνδρας δύναται καϊ ύπόμνησιν μάλλον 2χει η έπικέλευσιν, which Shilleto explains ' i t is equally as telling partly (re) because I am addressing brave men, also (because) it contains etc.', V 6 1 , 4 βονλόμενοι άλλως re προσγενέσθαι σφίσι και Ομηροι ήσαν αυτόθι...κείμενοι. 1. 6* ττυρά, 'watch-fires'. 1. 7· καΰσ-avTas: see on c. 74» *> where C has άναλαβόντες here καύσαντες. 1. 9. τουναντίον ή short for τουναντίον τοϋμπαλιν ή ol άνδρες αύτων ΰπερέβαινον. as η rj. Cf. i n 22, 5 έκ έτηρουν: c. I3 5 ι · orpos τ η ν θ ά λ α σ σ α ν : T h e object of the Athenians was to penetrate far enough into the interior to reach the country of the Sicels (c. 60, 2, c. 77, 6). This they attempted in the first instance to effect by ascending one of the valleys which fall into that of the A n a p u s ; but being unable to force their passage in this direction, they fell back upon the coast, intending to follow the coast-road through the low country near the sea, till they should arrive at another valley [where the passes were unguarded], when they would again turn inland, and make a second attempt to penetrate to the country of their friends the Sicels (Arnold). This statement is in direct contradiction of the statement of Diodorus ( x i l l c. 18) προησαν επί Κατάνης and c. 19 οι δ£ Συρακό- 268 NOTES ON THE vn lxxx * σιοι.,.έπΐ τρεις ημέρας έπακόλονθοϋντες καϊ πανταχόθεν προλαμβά­ νοντας άπεΐρΎον εύθυπορεΐν προς την σύμμαχον Κατάνην. The account given by Thuc. (c. 60, 2) is very plain;—the Athenians intended in case of victory to remove with their fleet northward to Catana, in case of defeat to set fire to their fleet and go southwestward by land to some friendly Sicel town in the interior. See B . Lupus die Stadt Syr, p . 146 if. I t is surprising that Col. Leake (Notes etc, p . 84) should have been misled on this point. § 2 . 1. 10. ην Bl ή ξύμ/ϊταοτα o86s ούκ eiri Κατάνηδ, not their whole march since their departure from Syracuse, but simply that during the night which succeeded the fifth day. 1. 11. κ α τ ά : cf. 43, 3 ; c. 72, 4. § 3 . 1. 14. 42, 3 ; c. 59, 2. 1. 15. o*v, resumptive after the digression in § 2. <ττρατοΐΓ€δοι$ = στραη Cf. c. ύμασιν. 1. 17. φόβοι καΐ δ ξ ψ α τ α are added in explanation of olov. Cf. IV 125, 1 όπερ φιλεΐ μεγάλα στρατόπεδα, ασαφώς 4κπλή"γννσθαι, ' just as great armies are wont to do, to be dismayed without visible cause', where έκπλή'γνυσθαι is explanatory of oirep. On the use of the plural of abstract nouns, see n. to c. 62, 3. 1. 18. iroXc^Cas sc. χώρας, as c. 75, 4. 1. 19. αϊτό, ' a w a y from', would necessitate άπωϋσιν. But it probably arose from dittography of the first syllable of πολεμίων. 1. 2θ. Ιοΰσιν belongs to αύτοΐς § 4 . 1. 2r. together \ 1. 15. ώ<τΐΓ€ρ ήγ€ίτο: c. 78> 2 · ξυν4μ€ν€, * kept Ι. 22. ττρούλαβί sc. της όδον, ' g o t far a h e a d ' . Cf. IV 33, 3 προλαμβάνοντας ραδίως της φνγης, and other exx. quoted in my n. to Plutarch TimoL c. 12, 3. W e should have expected πολύ for πολλφ, which is perhaps used because of the comparison latent in προύλαβ€. Kriiger compares III 49, ι προέχβιν ημέρα καΐ νυκτί. 1. 23. το ήμισ-υ καΐ ιτλ^ον: see on c. 12, 4 ; c. 19, 2. 1. 24. ά*ΐΓ€σ,7Γάσ·0η...4χώρ€ΐ, ' h a d become separated from the other division and was m a r c h i n g ' . § 5 . 1. 25. op.cos, notwithstanding the disturbance created by the disorderly marching of the division under Demosthenes. T h e incidents related from this point to the end of the chapter refer to the division of Nicias only. Of the other he speaks in c. 8 1 . vnlxxx-s HISTORY OF THUCYDIDES 269 1. 26. την όδον την Έλωρίνην καλουμ,^νην, 'the so-called Helorine way '. The highway leading to Helorus, about twenty-five miles long, is again mentioned by Thuc. VI c. 66, 3 ; c. 70, 4; though he never speaks of the town itself to which it led. The river of the same name, on the banks of which it was situated, is the most considerable between Syracuse and Cape Pachynum. Near its mouth it becomes almost a marsh, and deserves the epithet which Vergil Aen. i n 698 gives it:— praepingue solum stagnantis Helori. 1. 28. 4ΐΓ€ΐδή γ€νοιντο eirl, τω ττοταμ-ω τω Κ . 'as soon as they should have reached the river Cacyparis'; c. 35, 2; c. 78, 2. Ob­ serve the unusual order of words, which is repeated in c. 82, 3Λ in c. 84, 2 we have the usual order. The C a c y p a r i s (mod. Cassibile) rises near Acrae and flows for a distance of about fifteen miles through a deep valley on the north side of Monte d'Oro. It is about ten miles from the bridge over the Anapus. 1. 30. οίνω, 'up country', 'inland*. 8ιά μ,€<Γ0·γ€(α$: so without the article I 100, 3 προέλθόνΤες της Θράκης els μεσύ^ααν. 1. 32. ofls μ€τ£ιτ€μ,ψαν: see c. 77, 6. Freeman thinks that the partial change of plan on the fifth day's march may have led to their sending new messages to the Sicel allies. Appendix x x u pp. 705—6. 1. 34. η3ρον...ά·πΌΤ€ΐχί£ουσ·αν κτ4. 'found them in the act of obstructing the passage of the river with a wall and palisade', an effect apparently, says Leake, of the provision made by Gylippus and the Syracusans for occupying the fords and passes round Syra­ cuse, c. 74, 2. Observe that the participle is not here used in indirect discourse: see G. Μ Τ, § 883 ed. ma. 1. 36. pteurctjicvoi αυτήν sc» την φυλακήν, ' forcing their way through it'. Cf. IV 131, 2 βιασάμενοι παρά, θάλασσαν την φυλα­ κή ρ νυκτός άφικνοΰνται. 8ιέβησαν...καΙ έχώρουν irpos τον Έρινβόν, 'they crossed the river and were moving on towards the Erineus'. Their arrival at the E r i n e u s (mod. Cavallata) between six or seven miles farther south is mentioned in c. 82, 3. 1. 38. €Κ€λ€υον sc. αυτούς χωρεΐν. Their guides advised them to march on to another valley, the ascent of which would also lead them into the interior, because their advance up the gorge of the Cacyparis would probably be stopped by the enemy's resistance. 270 NOTES ON THE vn lxxxi 1 CHAPTER LXXXI § 1. 1. I I T7]S 1. 2. ή ήμερα, the sixth day referred to in c. 80, 5. So VVKTOS. 1. 4. 78 iv αΙτ£α...€Ϊχον...άφ€ίναι=])τιώϊ'το acpeivcu, as in ν 65, 5. 1. 7· ου χοώέΐτώς goes with γσθάνοντο. 1. 8. καταλαμβάνουσ-ι: c. 30, 1; c. 83, 1. ώραν, ' a b o u t the time of midday m e a l ' . § 2. 1. 9. ircpl άρ£ο-του ιτρο<Γ€μ.€ΐξαν: c. 4 1 , 3 ; c. 70, 2. 1. 11. τότ€: see n. to c. 31, 3. T h e reference is to c. 80, 4. 1. 14. δ£χα 8ή ovTas, 'because they were separated* from the other division, c. 18, 1 ; c. 86, 4. ξυνήγον (c. 78, 1) €S τούτο" (c. 36, 6), in unum cogebant. § 3 . 1. 15. *not less than'. άττ€ίχ€ν: c. 34, 8. KaC, vel, ' a s much a s ' , 1. 16. T6 must be correlative to δέ (1. 19), since re yap was not used for καΐ yap=etenim before the time of Aristotle. So ill 52, 2, ν 9, 9, V I I I 16, 3. See critical note, to c. I 1. 32. 1. 17. 4v τω τοιουτω, * in such a critical position as they found themselves i n ' . IKOVTOS €Ϊναι, 'willingly', a formula used four times by T h u c . (11 89, 8, i v 98, 4, VI 14, 1) exclusively in negative sentences. G. MT. § 780 ed. ma. 1. 19. τοοταντα οο-α, ' (only) so much as they may be actually compelled', ' n o t more than they can h e l p ' . Cf. c. 65, 1. F o r the ace. neuter after μαχόμενους, cf. c. 34, 6. §4. 1. 20. τ ά ττλίίω: c. 55, 2 ; c. 63, 2. ' m o r e incessant', sc. του "ΝικΙον. Cf. c. 71, 3. 1. 22. ξυν€χ€στίρω, KaC, ' a n d in particular', c. 29, 5. I.23. ιτρουχωρει ... ξυν€τάοτ<Γ€το κτΙ., c o n a t i v e imperfects: ' kept trying to put his troops into fighting order instead of pressing forward*. 1. 24. ΙνΒιατρφων sc. έν τφ ξυντάσσεσθαι is μάχην, 1. 25· Iv θορυβώ ή σ α ν : c. 76 1. 2. 1. 26. 'Αθηναίοι: W e should have expected καΐ Σύμμαχοι to be vnlxxxis HISTORY OF THUCYD1DES 271 added. H e n c e Kriiger, followed by Classen and -others, brackets the word. άν€ΐληθέντ€ς, ' b e i n g driven back in confusion'. Lobeck on Phrynichus p . 29 proposes to read συνειληθέντες (a word not found in T h u c ) , as άνει\ηθέντε$, he says, signifies rather ' t o unfold' or O p e n ' . But we read in Arrian (Exp. Alexand. IV 5 § 13) oi δέ TOI)S διαβαίνοντας αντιμέτωποι, ταχθέντε% άνείλουν is τόν ττοταμόν where άρεΐλεΐν is exactly the French 'refouler'. T h e Scholiast interprets the word by συστραφέρτες (Arnold). 1. 27. o86s 8fc 2v0€V καΐ M e v , sc. rjv, to be supplied from ττερίηρ. We should have expected 'ένθεν δε και 'ένθεν (utrinque) οδός in opp. to κύκ\ω μεν τειχίον. Plutarch (Nic. c. 27, ι) calls the place τηρ ΤΙολυζήλειορ αύλήν, ' t h e farm-stead or close of Polyzelus'. P o l y z e l u s was probably the brother of Gelon, despot of Syracuse. ThirlwalPs notion of the olive-ground is that of a hollow place, enclosed by a wall and commanded on two sides by an upper road. Grote, on the other hand, is dissatisfied with Arnold's explanation of άνειληθέντες, and shares the opinion of Leake that Ζνθεν καϊ Ζνθεν means ' in and out', so that the road passed through the middle of the plantation, which the Athenians, he says, entered not for the purpose of shelter, but because it lay exactly in their way. The' pressure of the troops from the rear into the hither opening, while those in front could not get out by the farther opening, caused a crowd and h u d d l i n g inside, which would be aptly ex­ pressed by άνειληθέντες. Plutarch I.e. states, on the author­ ity of Philistus, that it was in this place that Demosthenes made an attempt on his own life. See also Pausanias Αττικά I 29, 12. 1. 28. k\aas 81 ουκ ολίγας €Ϊχ«ν, sc. 6 or αυτό: cf. c. 29, 5, I 106, ι και τι αύτων μέρος προσβιασθέν... έσέπεσεν h του χωρίον Ιδιώτου, φ 'έτυχεν #/>υγμα μέ^α wepieipyov καϊ ουκ ην Ζξοδος, for έξ οΰ or έξ αύτοϋ ούκ ην έ. I n pursuance of the above theory—Grote imagines that the olive-trees are here named, not as having tempted the Atheni­ ans to take shelter in the place nor as embarrassing the forma­ tion of their line and confusing their movements—the two rea­ sons given by Arnold—but because they hindered them from seeing beforehand distinctly the nature of the enclosure into which they were hastening, and therefore prevented any precau­ tions from being taken^-such as that of forbidding too many troops from entering at once. 1. 29. «πΈρισταδόν, a circumstantibus, undique. § 6 . 1. 29. ξυσ-ταδον μάχαις, ' h a n d to hand, pitched battles'. For the adverb used attributively with the verbal noun, see n. to c. 34, 6 ; c. 44, 8 ; c. 863 5 ; so VI 85, 2 χρημάτων βιαιότερον φορά,. 272 NOTES ON THE vn lxxxi s 1. 31. άττονενοημ^νουβ, * desperate'. Cf. Xen. Hell, v n ν \ι Ζξεστι \iyeiv ώ$ rots απονενοημένους ουδείς αν νποσταίη. 1. 32. irpos 4K€CVO>V: c. 36, 3 ; c. 49, 2. 1. 33. φαδώ Tts- 4γίγν€τό...τω i.e. έφείδετο αυτός TIS έαντοΰ (Schol.)* kiri, 'under the circumstances of, 'considering', c. 59, 1; c. 62, 1. 1. 34. μή ττροαναλωθήναι, ' so as not to sacrifice their lives be­ fore'. For the infinitive after an expression denoting freedom or hindrance, see G. MT. 807 ed. ma., Gr.2 § 1519. καΐ o»s, 'even as it was', without a needless sacrifice of life. Cf. c. 74, 1. 1. 35. ταύτη τη Ιδέα = τούτφ τφ τρόττφ της μάχη? sc. πβρισταδον βάλλοντες. Cf. c. 29, 5· CHAPTER LXXXII § 1. 1. ι. δ' ουν, 'however', resuming the narrative broken off at the end of c. 81, 4. Cf. c. 59, 2. 8ι* ημέρας) ' all day long' from irepi αρίστου ώραν. 79 1. 3· τ€ταλαιΐΓωρημένου8: c. 28, 2. 1. 4· κήρυγμα ποιουνται.,.ώς σ-φάς άιτιέναι,, 'they make pro­ clamation that any of the islanders who wishes may come over to them on terms of personal freedom' (i.e. on the understanding that they should not be sold as prisoners of war). The subject to άττιένα^ as Sitzler points out, is el' rts βούλεται = τόν βουλόμενον. 1. 6. των νηοτιωτών: see c. 57, 4. 1. 7. κα£, 'accordingly'. Tivfcs iro\€is ου ττολλαί: ' I t must be remembered' says Freeman ' that the general feeling among the subject allies of Athens towards the ruling city was not one of active hatred. The Athenian supremacy offended the Greek instinct, which demanded full independence for every city, great or small; but it was not a rule of heavy oppression. It was in most cities preferred to the rule of the local oligarchs. But perhaps stronger still was the feeling of military honour and comradeship. Soldiers of Athens, by whatever means they had become such, they would not forsake Athens in her distress'. § 2 . 1.11. ώο-τ€, On condition that': c. 83, 2. G. MT.2§ 581,2. VII lxxxiii a HISTORY OF T H U G Y D I D E S § 3 . 1. 14. ot iraVTCS.. Ιξακιο-χίλιοι, '6ooo in a l l ' . Cf. c. 24, 1 χρήματα πολλά τά ξύμπάντα έάλω, I c 60, 6 ; C. 100 τριήρεις διέφθεφαν τ as πάσα? είς διακοσίας. 1. 17. τούτουδ μέν: sc. τους μετά Δημοσθένους. απΐκόμιξον, 'they conducted back', c. 26, 3. On the force of αϊτό, see n. to c. 27, 2. 1. 19. ταΰτη τ η ημέρα i.e. on the sixth day, c. 80, 5 ; c. 8 1 , i . 1. 20. τον ττοταμόν τόν Έ ρ ι ν € ο ν : see n. to c. 80, 5. CHAPTER § 1. 1. ι . LXXXIII καταλαβόντ€$: c. 8 1 , 1. 1. 4. K€\€VOVT€S goes with oi Συρακδσιοι. sc. παραδοΰναι εαυτόν. Cf. c. 68, 2. τό αύτο Spdv: 1. 5. a-irivferai «π-έμψαι, 'stipulates that he should send'. Cf. Ill 102, 2 σπένδονται ~Μ.αντινεΰσι... αποχωρεί ν κατά τάχος. Elsewhere the verb takes the simple accusative after it. 1. 6. <τκ€ψ^μ€νον: G. MT. § 2. οιχόμ€νο$ : see note to c. 7, 2. § 840 ed. ma. 1. 7. irapa&SwKOras, short for τους μετά Δημοσθένους δωκότας σφάς αυτούς. Cf. c. 17, 3· παραδε· 1. 9· νπίρ, * in the name o f . Cf. Xen. Cyr. v i i 47, V I I I ν 26. άνηλωσ-αν χ ρ ή μ α τ α €S: Cf. Xen. Cyr. v i ii 30, V I I I i 13, iii 44, Oecon. c. 3, 5, 6 ; above c. 48, 5 we have iv instead of is. 1. 10. άττοδονναι, ' r e p a y ' . Cf. Plut. Nic. c. 27, 2 s άλλους tuypetv π α ρ ή γ γ ε ι λ ε . Plut. the order was tardily obeyed and the number of the slain that of the prisoners, probably from Philistus. -( 1. 11. ocrovs μ.ή άΐΓ€κρΰψαντο, 'except those whom their captors had hidden away for their own purposes', either to keep or sell as captives. F o r δσοι μη —πλην δσοι, cf. 71, 6 ; c. 1, 3. οΰτοι sc. οϋς άπεκρύψαντο oi Συρακδσιοι. 1. 13. TOVS TpictKOcrCovs : c. 83, 5. τ η ν φυλάκήν 8ΐ€|ήλθον, ' m a d e their way out through the g u a r d ' : cf. Xen. Mem. i l l ix 7 τάς πύλα$ διεξιών. 1. 15. TOVS διω£ο|λ€νου8: the article with the fut. participle is equivalent to a relative with indefinite antecedent. ' Cf. 11 51, 5 οίκίαι 7τολλαί έκενώθησαν απορία του θεραπεύσοντος, IV 93» 3 "Τ00* τούτους αντικατέστησαν τους άμυνουμένους, Xen. Mem. Ill viii 2 εάν τι ενοχλτ) ημάς, δεόμεθα του παύσοντος, Plat. Laches p . 124 D του διακρινοϋντος δοκεΐ μοι δεΐν η βουλή. § 3 . 1. ι 6 . το άθροισθέν...το διακλαπέν (i.e. ' t h e number stolen and dispersed'), neuter participles used collectively, see n. to c. 43, 7. 1. 17. Is το κοινόν, ' i n t o the common stock', so as to become the property of the state. Cf. Plutarch Timol. c. 29, ι των δ' αιχμαλώτων oi μεν πολλοί διεκλάπησαν ύπο των στρατιωτών, εις δε κ ο ιν b ν απεδείχθησαν πεντακισχίλιοι. ου ττολΰ: not more than 1000, for the whole number of prisoners taken to Syracuse was not less7 than 7000 (c. 8γ9 4) and of these 6000 belonged to the division of Demosthenes (c. 82, 3). During the retreat, what with 278 NOTES ON THE vn lxxxv 3 marching, fighting, concealment and desertion, five-sixths of the army had been lost. 1. 19. ed. ma. § 4. άτ€...ληφθέντων: c. 24, 2, 7; c. 44, 4, G. MT. § 862 αϊτό (·υμ,β(ίσ·€ω$: c. 82, 2. 1. 20. μέρος τ ι ουκ ο λ ί γ ο ν : c. 74» 2 '> c · 82, ι. 1. 2 ΐ . καΐ cur<=0av€, ' w a s killed besides*, i.e. on the eighth day of the retreat at the Assinaros, as appears from the next sentence. ι τ ^ ΐ σ τ ο ε . . . φόνοδ oihros και ovSevos Ιλάσ-σ-ων 4γέν€το, 'there was a very great carnage here (c. 29, 5 ; c. 42, 4), quite as great as any in the course of this Sicilian campaign'. Thuc. is comparing the loss of the Athenians at the Assinaros with their other defeats in Sicily, at Plemmyrium (c. 22 if.), at Epipolae (c. 43), and in the repeated naval engagements; as in the next line he compares it indirectly with the loss that had been before sus­ tained {έτεθνήκεσαν) in the various partial actions during the seven days of the retreat. See Addenda* 82 1· 25. ot μέν καΐ Ίταραυτίκα: on the double και, c. 8, 1; c. 12, i; see c. 2, 4 ; T h e leader of these was Callistratus, son of Empedus, who, according to Pausanias ( v n 16, 4), performed a memorable feat; with a small body of horse he cut his way through the enemy, and cos το πολύ άπέσωσεν αύτων ές Κατάνην, άνέστρεφεν οπίσω την αύτην αύθις όδόι> ές Συρακούσας, διαρπάζοντας δέ 'έτι εύρων τό Αθηναίων στρατόπεδον καταβαλλει τε δσον πέντε £ξ αύτων και τραύματα επίκαιρα αυτός καϊ 6 Ίππος λαβόντες άφιάσι την ψνχήν. οΰτος μϊν δη άτγαθην δόξαν Άθηναίοις καΐ αύτφ κτώ­ μενος περιεποίησέ τε ων ηρχε καϊ έτελεύτησεν αυτός εκουσίως. 1. 20. δουλ€υσ-αντ€$, 'after they had been made slaves', parti­ ciple of the ingressive aorist. 8ιαδιδράσ-κοντ€$, ' m a k i n g their escape at various t i m e s ' or ' i n various directions'. T h e verb 5tδράσκειν is only used in its compounds άποδιδράσκειν (ξυναποδιδράσκειν), διαδιδράσκειν, έκδιδράσκειν. 1. 27. €S Κ α τ ά ν η ν . A reminiscence of those who escaped to C a t a n a is found in Lysias υπέρ Τίολυστράτου c. 24, where the defendant says of himself: 'έως τό στρατόπεδον σων ην έπειδη δε διεφθάρη καϊ άνεσώθην εις Κατάνην, έληϊζόμην ορμώμενος εντεύθεν καϊ τους πολεμίους κακώς έποίουν ώστε τη θεφ τε τας δεκάτας έξαιρεθηναι πλέον η τριάκοντα μνας καϊ τοις στρατιώταις είς σωτηρίαν, όσοι έν τοΐς πόλεμίοις ήσαν. vnlxxxvi 3 HISTORY OF THUCYDIDES . 279 CHAPTER LXXXVI § 1. Ϊ. 3. όσους TTXCCCTTOVS : see n. to c. 20, 2; c. 60, 2. 1. 4. άνεχώρησαν i s τ η ν ιτόλιν: Plutarch I.e. triumphant entry of the victors into Syracuse, after hung the tallest of the trees near the fatal stream and had shorn the horses of the Athenians. describes the they had first with trophies άναλαβόντ€ς, c 33» 5· § 2 . 1. 7. κ are β φ ά σ α ν €S Tas λιθοτομίαε: Cic. Act. 11 in Verr. ν 27, 68 thus describes the Latomiae four hundred years later: opus est ingens, magnificum, regum ac tyrannorum: totum est e saxo in mirandam altitudinem depresso et multorum operis penitus exciso: nihil tarn clausum ad exitum, nihil tarn saeptum undique, nihil tarn tutum ad custodiam nee fieri nee cogitari potest. In has lautomias, siqui publice custodiendi sunt etiato ex ceteris oppidis Siciliae, deduct imperantur. A description of their situation is given by H o l m , Gesch. Sic. I 127. 1. 8. < τ α ύ τ η ν > sc. τό καταβιβάσαι see n . to c. 42, 4 1. 41. αυτού* is ras \ιθοτομία$: 1. 9. άκοντος ΓυλίΐΓίΓου, * against the wish of Gylippus'. For the omission of βντος, see G. MT. § 875, 3, ed. ma. άπάτφαξαν. T h e account given by Philistus agrees with that of T h u c . : Plutarch (Nic. c. 28,4) quotes a statement from Timaeus to the effect that Hermocrates, after vainly endeavouring to awaken a feeling of generous forbearance in his countrymen, sent the two generals a private notice of the decree, and that they anticipated their execution by suicide. T h e object of the statement may have been to put the conduct of the Syracusans in the most favourable light possible. Plutarch tells us also that the day, on which the final capture of Nicias and his army was effected, came to be celebrated as an annual festival, under the name A s i n a r i a , on the 26th of the Dorian month Karneios. 1. 10. καλόν τό άγώνισ-μ,α: see n. to c. 56, 2 ; c. 59, 2. Cf. Plutarch /. c. c. 27, 5 : μέ*/α δ' ijyeiTO irpbs δ6ζαν, ei ζώντας airayayoi roi)s avTiffrpar^yovs. 1. 11. €7rl TOIS άλλοΐδ sc. άτγωνίσμασιν, ' i n addition to his other feats to be proud o f ' · § 3. 1. 14. c 18, 3. 1. 13. Δημοσθένη: see n. to c. 36, 4 1. 28. τ α iv τ η νησ<ρ: S p h a c t e r i a : cf. i v 24, 3. Πΰλω: 28o 1. 15. ν 16 if. NOTES ON THE νπ lxxxvi 3 €ΐτιτη8€ΐότατον, amicissimum: c. 73, 3 ; c. 75, 3. Cf. TOVS 4κ τήβ νη'οτου: see n. to c. 2, 1; c. 37, 2. 1. 16. ιτρουθυμήθη ω<ττ€ άφέθήναι, * was anxious that the prisoners should be liberated \ On the use of ώστε * s o ' or ' so a s ' with the infinitive, see G. MT. § 588 ed. ma. Cf. c. 62, 4 ; c. 77, 5. Prof. Jowett thinks that T h u c . can hardly have meant to say that the liberation of the prisoners was the object which Nicias had in view when negotiating the treaty of p e a c e ; accordingly he makes ποιήσασθαι governed by προύθυμήθη, placing the commas after σπονδάς and τους 'Αθηναίους, and assigning a consecutive meaning 'so t h a t ' to ώστε. §4. 1. 20. 1. ι 8 . άνθ* (ov: c. 68, 2 ; c. 77, 3. 8td τούτο iri a * n o t l e s s than 100 talents, but he did not bequeath his son more than 14. Athenaeus (VI 104) speaks of him as 6 των Ελλήνων ζάπλουτος. 1. 26. νεώτίρόν τ ι o V αύτοΰ γ^νηται, 'some new trouble should originate with h i m ' . Cf. VIII 92, 14 ούδενός yεyεvημέvoυ απ* αύτοϋ νεωτέρου, II 6, 2 μηδέν νεώτερον ποιεΐν περί των ανδρών, ι ν c 51 μηδέν περί σφας νεώτερον βουλεύσειν, c. 55> Γ φοβούμενοι μη σφίσι νεωτερόν τι ^ένηται των περί την κατάστασιν. 1. τ,η. άιτ€ΚΤ€ΐναν αυτόν, 'procured his execution'. § 5 . 1, 28. cf. c. 81, 5. 1. 29. δτι ε γ γ ύ τ α τ α is used attributively with 4τ€θνήκ€ΐ; c. 84, 5. αιτία: VII lxxxvii i HISTORY OF THUCYDIDES 281 1. 3 1 . δια την ττάσχιν €S άρ€τήν V€VO(ucrpivT]V €ττιτήδ€υ<Γΐν = δίά την επιτήδευσιν η ττασα is άρετήν &ενδμιστο, ' because of his course of life, which had been entirely and regularly ordered in the direction of what was excellent in a moral and religious point of view' i.e. in practising τα νόμιμα is θεούς, τα δίκαια και άνεπίφθονα is ανθρώπους (c. 77> 3)· This opinion of T h u c , says Grote, deserves special notice, in the face of the reversal of the judgment of his countrymen, whose blind esteem and admiration for his respectable and religious character during his lifetime was exchanged for disgrace after his death. While he says not a word about Demosthenes, beyond the fact of his execution, he adds in reference to Nicias a few words of marked sympathy and commendation. 'Nicias assuredly, among all Greeks of my time least deserved to come to so extreme a pitch of ill-fortune, considering his exact per­ formance of established duties to the divinity'. Grote, there­ fore, retains the reading of the inferior MSS δια την νεμομισμένην is τό θ €Ϊον επιτήδευσιν, which the best edd. reject, as an interpolation, in favour of that of Β given in my text. H e thinks that the former reading is more suitable to the Greek vein of thought, as well as more conformable to the truth about Nicias. T h e contrast between the remarkable p i e t y of the man and that extremity of ill-fortune which marked the close of his life was very likely to shock Grecian ideas generally and was a natural circumstance for the historian to note. Whereas if we read πασαν is άρετήν, the panegyric upon Nicias be­ comes both less special and more disproportionate, more in fact than Thuc. says in commendation even of Pericles. Grote here proceeds on the assumption—incorrect as it appears—that ττασαν is to be taken with αρετή ν rather than with επιτή­ δευσιν. CHAPTER LXXXVII § 1. 1. i . Se answers to the μέν of c. 86, 5. 1. 2. TOVS χρώτουβ χρόνουδ, i.e. for the first 70 days (1. 17), after which the removal of a part of the captives afforded some relief to the rest. 1. 3. μ€Τ€χ€ίρισ-αν, ' treated', not used elsewhere by Thuc. with p e r s o n a l object. κοίλω, ' d e e p ' : cf. c. 84, 4. L 4. ov ήλιοι, ardores solis, not, as Frost, ' t h e successive suns'. Cf. the plurals ψύχη χειμωνος καΐ θάλπη θέρους (Xen. Oec. c. 5, 4) which mark i n t e n s i t y rather than recurrence. 282 1. 5. 'stifling gether. as Frost to make NOTES ON THE vn lxxxvii t τ ο πρώτον, i.e. before the winter set in. irvfryos, heat', arising from the mass of living beings crowded to­ Cf. π ν ly η pos ll 52, 2. 'έτι, praeterea: or it may, says, imply that the autumn was not advanced so far as the sun's rays in the daytime innocuous. 1. 7. μ€Τ07τωριναΙ καΐ ψυχραί are predicative: ' t h e autumnal cold of the nights which followed'. τ η μεταβολή... Ι ν€ωτ€ρι£ον, ' o w i n g to the qhange of temperature induced extremes of sick­ ness '. Cf. Herod. II 77, 4 iv yap ττ}σι μ€ταβολτ}σι τοΐσι άνθρώποισι αϊ νουσοι μάλιστα yivovrai των τ€ άλλων πάντων και δη και των ώρέων μάλιστα. Galen ν ρ. 253 enlarges on the H i p p o cratean aphorism τα? μεταβολάς των ώρέων μάλιστα τίκτειν νούσους. F o r νεωτερίξειν es, Kriiger compares Arrian Anab. IV 8, 2 τα των πόλεων ήδη Άλεί-άνδρω is τό βαρβαρικόν νβνεωτέριστο, VII 13» 3 Α"? τ ί νεωτβρισθείη is νβριν. % 2 . 1. 8. «πύντα ττοιούντων: δια τό δύσφημον αποσιώπησαν αυτά όνομαστϊ ύπέίν {Schol.). kv τ φ αύτφ, 'in the same place', i v 35, ι . 1. ι ι . καΐ το τοιούτον, ' a n d the l i k e ' causes of sickness: cf. c. 50, 4. άΐΓ€θνησ·κον may be rendered ' h a d died'. 1. 12. καΐ όσ-μ,οΛ ή σ α ν κ τ Ι . : for the variation of construction from the participle to the finite verb, cf. c. 15, 2; c. 69, 2. 1. 14. κοτύλην vSttTOS, a little more than half an English pint, so that the allowance of food was only half of that com­ monly given to a slave. One κοτύλη of wine was the allow­ ance made to the Helots in Sphacteria (iv 16, 1); the wine being supposed to be always drunk diluted with water, and water the Spartans had in the island. But here the half pint of water was the whole amount of liquid allowed to the Athenians for a day's consumption. Cf. Plut. Nic. c. 29, ι των δ' Αθη­ ναίων ol μεν πλείστοι διβφθάρησαν ev rats λατομίας ύπό νόσου καΐ διαίτης πονηρά, els ημέραν έκάστην κοτύλα* δύο κριθών λaμβάvovτ€S καϊ μίαν ϋδaros, where I have noted the mistake made by Diodorus, who says that the prisoners received each two xoiviKes of barley-meal which would be four times as much, the κοτύλη or hemina being about half-a-pint, whereas the χο«>ι£ was = a quart. 1. 15. ά λ λ α τ€ δ σ α is either by attraction for των άλλων οσα, or the same as Οσα άλλα, cf. 11 96, 3, X e n . Hier. c. 7, 2 τοιαύτα ττοιοϋσι TOIS τυράννου καϊ άλλον 8 ν τίνα del τιμώντεί τχηχάνουσι. τ ω τοιούτα»: the article has a retrospective reference t o νπ lxxxvii 6 HISTORY OF THUCYDIDES 283 1. 3 if. Observe the use of ev after a verb of motion, with which cp. Plat. Euthyd. p. 292 Ε έπβι,δή hv ταύτχι rrj άπορίψ ερεπεπτώκη. 1. 16. ουδέν δ τι ουκ iinyivero, nihil non contigit; cf. 1. 31· § 3 . Ι.17. Tivas:c. 33. 4; c-34» 5· 8ιητη'θησ-αν, II 14, I. 1. 18. ιτλήν 'Αθηναίων: the Athenians, as we may conclude from what is said a little above, were confined for nearly six months longer, and the survivors were then probably sold as the other prisoners had been sold before them {Arnold), €Ϊ Tives, si quiy quicumque. § 4 . 1. 21. ot ξύμ/nravTcs: c. 82, 3 ; c. 30, 2. Observe that the parenthesis ακρίβεια:...e^enreip is treated as if coordinated with the main clause, and so δμω$ is referred to the μέν 'although* in it. § 6. 1. 23. τ€, ' and so \ See n. to c. 71, 4. £ργον with μ^ιστον as predicate; τούτο is the subject. Cf. c. 85, 4. 1. 24. [Έλληνικόν]: 'This appears unnecessary' says Arnold 84 'for what great events took place in the Peloponnesian war, in which Greeks were not the principal actors? or is the meaning 'this action, in which Greeks alone were concerned etc.' as if it were %Ή\\-ηνικον 6W It was probably borrowed from Έλλ??'νικών in the next clause. κατά τόν ιτόλδμον TOVSC, 'in the course of this (the Peloponnesian) war*. Cf. c. 18, 4; c. 44, 1; c, 56, 4· 1. 25. δοκ€ΐν £μοιγ€, 'in my opinion', the absolute infinitive, used to express a limitation of the sentence. Cf. c. 49, 3 ; VIII 64, 5 and see G. MT. § 878 ed. ma. § 6. 1. 28. κατά πάντα ττάντωδ, ' utterly at all points'. I.29. ούδ^ν ολίγον is ovhlv κακοτταθήσ-αντ€$: c. 59, 3. We are told by Plutarch (c. 29, 1) that the Athenians experienced milder treatment in the other parts of Sicily to which they were carried as slaves or wandered as fugitives. Some owed, their freedom or hospitable shelter to their familiarity with the works of their popular poet Euripides, which in Sicily were more celebrated than known. The p a t h e t i c strains, with which they had stored their memory to amuse the leisure of their happier day, now served as their ransom or the price of their entertainment: a melancholy anticipation of the period when Athens herself was to be indebted 284 NOTES ON THUCYDIDES vn lxxxvii 6 to the literary achievements of her sons for the indulgence and protection of her masters (Thirlwall). 1. 30. ιτανωλ€θρ£α δή το λ€γόμ€νον, ' absolutely root and branch, as the saying g o e s ' (c. 68, 1). T h e subst. πανωλεθρία is not found, except in late p r o s e ; its adjective πανώλεθρος is a favourite word with the tragedians in combination with άπόλλνσθαι. 1. 3 i . ουδέν δ τι ουκ: 1. ι 6 . cf. c. 37, 2. άπ·ώλ€το: for the number, 1. 32. α π ό : c. 30, 2. απΈνόστηοταν, a rare word, used once by Xenophon, A nab. 111 ν ι 6 . T h e number of fighting-men in the service of Athens in Sicily was according to Isocrates (de pace § 86) not more than τέτταρες μυριάδες besides τριήρεις τετταράκοντα καΐ διακόσιαι. According to other authorities, on starting they numbered 200 galleys and 60,000 men of all classes (vi c. 43, 1; c. 94, 4 ; V I I c. 20, 2 ; c. 42, 1 ; c. 57, 11), including from five to six thousand Athe­ nians; their total loss amounted to 30,000 men (cf. c. 75, 5). Only a few survivors returned h o m e ; not a single galley escaped. A n idea of the terrible loss is gained by comparing it, as A. Holm Gesch. Sic. 11 p . 67 f. does, with that of the French on their retreat under Napoleon I from Moscow, A.D. 1813. T h e latter started on their march from Moscow, Oct. 18, 100,000 strong, and in six weeks had lost four-fifths of their army; in Sicily an army of 40,000 men was completely annihilated in the course of 8 days. γ,ίν refers to δέ in the opening sentence of the Vlllth Book. Cf. the conclusion of the description of the plague II 54, 6 ταύτα μεν τα κατά την νόσον *γενόμενα\ and for a variety of form, above, c. 30, 4. ταΰτα μέν τα κτ€. sc. ψ. END OF EXPLANATORY NOTES CRITICAL APPENDIX APPENDIX ON THE T E X T A. GENERAL REMARKS Manuscripts The seven principal MSS out of the fifty or more known ones which contain the complete History of Thucydides are:— L a u r e n t i a n u s (C), at Florence in the Bibliotheca Laurentiana attached to the Church of San Lorenzo, press-mark compartment 69, MS 2,—a folio parchment MS of the xth century, probable date 900 —950 B.C., in large round-shaped characters, with Scholia mostly in a later hand. Books vi—VIII recently collated by Dr C. Hude; the nird and ivth Books were first collated for Dr Arnold. V a t i c a n u s (B), press-mark 126 in the Bibliotheca Vaticana at Rome, a small folio parchment MS of the Xith century, full of contractions and abbreviations. Scholia in the same hand as the text; first collated by Bekker, recently (Books VI—VIII) by C. Hude. C i s a l p i n u s or I t a l u s (A), a folio parchment of the xnth or xith century, suppl. gr. in the Paris National Library, press-mark 255, where after being lost for some time it was found by Rudolph Prinz (see Jahrb. fiir class. Philol. 1869 p. 759). It was originally taken from some place in North Italy by the French. Collated by Bekker. P a l a t i n u s (E), 252 in the Heidelberg Library, a folio parchment MS of the xith century, written in a large character with a few Scholia by a later hand : collated by Bekker and for Poppo. A u g u s t a n u s (F), formerly at Augsburg, now 430 in the Munich Library, a folio parchment of the xith century. First collated by Gottleber and Bauer. 288 APPENDIX ON THE TEXT M o n a c e n s i s (G), 228 in the Munich Library, of the x n i t h century, written on silk. I t s upper margin is so worn away that some 5 or 7 lines on an average are lost in each page. Collated by Goller and Bekker. B r i t a n n i c u s or L o n d i n e n s i s (M), 11,727 in the British Mu­ seum, a 410 vellum MS if. 250, of the x i t h century, written in a beautiful and clear hand. I t contains the Scholia Graecat written on the margin in a smaller character by the same hand. T h e ist and 8th leaves of the first quire and all the fourth quire are supplied by a hand of the Xivth century. Re-collated for the present Book by the Editor. T h e MS came into the hands of the well-known London Booksellers Payne and Foss from St Mary's Abbey Florence, and was purchased by the British Museum from them on May 23, 1840. Bernard de Montfaucon Bibliotheca Bibliothecarum I p . 414 and Diarium Italicum p . 365 assigns it to the 10th Century. I t was first collated, but most imperfectly, for F . Haase, by his pupil Julius Eggeling in 1867: H . van H e r werden collated only the v m t h Book. H u d e in his edition of Books v i — V I I I (Copenhagen 1890) gives the following conjectural pedigree of the above MSS for these Books, excluding Μ as partaking more or less of the characteristics of both families:— Archetype Of the two families, descended from a common archetype, it is agreed that Β and C are respectively the best representatives; but critics differ in their estimate of these MSS. T h e former presents so many textual variations not only from C but from other MSS of its own family, as to lead to the suspicion that it does not give the A. GENERAL REMARKS 289 authentic text but was tampered with by some clever διασκευα­ στή* at an early period. These discrepancies are seen in Books v i (from c. 92, 5) and VII, but especially in Book V I I I . H u d e gives a list of the passages in the v i l t h Bk. in which Β alone or nearly so has preserved the true reading:—c. 3, ι τό πρώτον (?); 3 εαυτών (?); c. 8, 2 μνήμης; c. I I , 2 r e ; c. 14, 3 (?) and c. 25, 9 διαπεπολ.; c. 17, 3 αύτοΐ* ol πρέσβεις; ib. 1. 15 & την Σικελίαν; c. 18, 2 1. 16 r e ; 3 1. 24 τέ; c. 19, 5 τό πρώτον; c. 25, 1 1. 5 re; c. 26, 2 #μα(?), 3 eO>s; c. 29, 2 re, 3 ov; c. 31, ι έπί\ c. 33, 3 1. 17 re ; c. 43, 2 αδύνατα (Μ), 1. 21 ύπεΧείπετο; c. 44, 1 7e, 4 e£ εναντίας; c. 46 αλλην; c. 48, 5 1. 40 r e ; c. 52, 2 ^πε^άγοί-τα; c. 54 1. 2 o! om.; c. 57, 9 1. 57 ώφελίας, 11 1. 71 re (?); c. 69, 2 1. 8 om. ην, 1. 2θ #pres: c. 70, 7 δή ή, re, 8 ύττοχωροΰσιν; c. 74, 2 1. 13 om. τών; c. 75, 4 1. 29 om. τι; c. 77, 2 1. I I re, 7 1. 42 ro r e ; c. 80, 5 1. 28 eVi, 6 1. 35 r e ; c. 8 1 , 4 1. 28 om. re, 5 1. 33 iyiyveTo; c. 85, 2 ξυνεκόμισαν; c. 86, 4 1. 25 δ^, 1. 27 re om., 5 1. 31 πασαν is αρετήν. C is the oldest of all the known MSS. Its value was first pointed out by A . Schone, who made it the basis of the text in his Edition of Books I, II (Berlin 1874), and after him by H u d e and also by L. Sadee [de Dionysio Halic* script, rhet, quaest. crit. Strasbourg 1878) who, after instituting a careful comparison between the readings of the two MSS Β and C and those given by Dionysius in his quotations from Thucydides, arrived at the conclusion that C is the more trust­ worthy of the two. I t has many vicious readings but these are manifestly due to the carelessness of the original scribe. T h e following are the passages in this Book where Β and C alone exhibit the true reading: c. 3, ι προσπέμπει; c. 8, 3 η δι* (εκουσίων) ; c. 25, 4 έδυνήθησαν} g ad o m . ; c. 44, 5 επισταμένων; c. 47, 3 διεκινδύνευσεν. I n the following C alone or nearly alone exhibits the correct reading:—c. 6, 3 κατηράχθη; c. 11, 3 χρήσασθαι; c. 42, 6 ^τέμ­ νον; c. 50, 3 έδύναντο; c. 52, 2 κοίλω μυχφ; c. 56, 2 κωΚύσουσι; c. 73, Ι άποχωρησασα; c. 75, 5 ύπό rots δπλοις om.; c. 77, 4 οΐσι. W i t h regard to our own MS M, whatever its critical value may be, I can fully corroborate the statement of M r E . C. Marchant in the Classical Review Vol. ν p . 22 that Eggeling's collation of it was very incomplete. I have gone through the v i l t h Book carefully in the MS, and found many mistakes as well as omissions in his collation. Thus in c. 32, 1 Stahl reads διαφρήσωσι on the sole authority of Μ which has διαφήσωσι, the reading in C; in c. 44, 5 Μ has ύποκρίνοιντο not άποκρίνοιντο; in c. 57, 5 Stahl introduces T. VII 19 APPENDIX ON THE TEXT τοις after Βοιωτοΐς on the sole authority of M, but in Μ there is no rots; and again in c. 74, 1 where Stahl reads άναλαβδντας on the sole authority of BM, the latter really has the vulgate άναλαβόντες, and, as we may infer from the silence of H u d e , its most recent collator, the former also has the same. Subjoined are most of the readings peculiar to M:—c. 1, 3 τιν' o m . ; c. 2, 2 έτι o m . ; c. 3, 5 έφορμωσα (EF); c. 5, 3 έπανήξειν for έπάί-ειν; § 4 αΰθις o m . ; c. 7, 4 άπεπειρώντο (G corr. 2, cp. c· 12, 5 ) ; c. 8, 2 φοβούμενοι (AE) || yevb^evoi, § 3 τά om. (Β): η 5t' or ηδη om. (G); c. 9 1. 7 roOro o m . ; c. 11, 2 οικοδομήσάντων; c. 12, 5 om. εξουσία || 1. 23 άΧλήλοις for aXXots; c. 15 1 and c. 22, ι πεξικην; c. 18, 3 eyavero; c. 19, ι πρώτατα; c. 2 i , 3 ο#χ ηκιστα om. roO (G) || χαλ€7τωτάτοΐ5; c. 22, 1 προσμΐξαι; § 2 τας επίλοιπους; c. 24, 3 1. 16 τό om. (B); I. 22 παρείχε; c. 28, 4 1. 29 cV b; c. 30, ι προκεχωρηκότας post θρξ,κας It 1. 12 προσεκθέοντες || 1. 19 ιππέας μάλιστα || re om. (B); c. 33, 3 £ύ»> πάσυ; c. 37, 2 1. 7 τόϊ> o m . ; c. 38, 2 1. 13 τι o m . ; c. 39, 2 1. 9 μεν; c. 40,. 2 ησσημένων; c. 44, 3 1. 20 γενομένης \\ § 6 παιωνίσειαν; § 7 άλλ^λοΐδ om.; c. 47, ι 1. 6 κατορθοϋντες; α 48, τ 1. 7 ά> om. II § 5 1. 35 Twct; c. 70, 3 1. 25 οπότε (Β), § 7 1. 56 έκαστου; § 8 1. 64 φεύyovτas έχουσιν; c. 71? 6 1. 40 opyrjs || 1. 43 ol καΐ; § 7 l. 48 αύταιs (C); c. 73, 1 1. 9 καϊ a \\ έδδκει είναι; c. 74, 1 1. 5 συσκευάσωνται; § 2 1. ι 6 άφβΐλον; c. 75, 7 1. 48 roi)s; αυτούς o m . ; c. 77, 1 1. 6 κακοτταθίαις; § 3 1. 13 δεδιήτημαι || 1. 16 φοβοϋσαι; c. 78, 4 1. 17 ττροσελθδντες (not προελθδντες); 1. 23 οίκιων; 5 1. 28 έμπροσθεν hie et c. 8 1 , 3 II § 6 1. 33 αυτών; c. 8 1 , 4 1. 28 6/3άλοι>το; c. 82, 2 1. 10 μετά του Δ. hie et c. 83, 1, c. 85, 3 ; c. 84, 4 1. 23 τους om. || 1. 27 ένθεν καϊ ένθεν; c. 85, 2 1. 10 μετ1 αύτου; c. 86, 2 1.11 τους άλλους (ascribe's error); c. 87, 2 ξυvεvψεyμέvωv (Β); § 3 1. 17 διητήθησαν (Β) || 1. ι 8 οί αθρόοι. T h e contractions and abbreviations in the MS, of which there are not many, are mostly of the final syllable; the iota (commonly called subscript) is regularly added; there are many signs of care­ less transcription, transpositions, repetitions as well as omissions; resolved forms are used as Ιίλαταιέων, Έρετριέων, also the forms μέχρις, είς, σύν, κλείειν, έτοιμος (accent); the plural ending in -ay, as Ιππείς for Ιππης; instances of itacism, as confusion of ι and η, ει and t, at and e (έωρούμεθα for αίωρούμεθα) are common. (See Publications of the Palaeographical Society Vol. 1 PL. 109.) A. GENERAL REMARKS 291 Bibliography I EDITIONS AND C O M M E N T A R I E S : — A. F i r s t p e r i o d , usefulfor critical fiwftoses only, Thucydides de bello Peloponnesiaco libri vili, graece Venetiis, in domo A l d i , mense Maio MDH in folio. The Scholia were published in MDIII. The EDITIO PRINCEPS. Thucydides cum commentariis antiquis et valde utilibus graece: edente Ant. Francino, Florentiae apud Bernhardum J u n t a m in fol. 1506 (corr. 1526) die secunda Novembris. Thuc. Historiarum lib. v n i graece; iidem ex interpretatione Laur. V a l l a e ab Henrico S t e p h a n o recognita. Excudebat Henr. Stephanus 1564, 1 torn, in 1 vol. in fol. T h e Latin translation by L. V a l l a is generally very correct, and sometimes of great value for the light it throws on disputed readings. B. Second p e r i o d : — Thuc. de bello peloponnesiaco libri vni, gr. et lat. ex interpretatione Laur. V a l l a e ab H. S t e p h a n o recognita. Excudebat Henr. Stephanus, 1588 in fol. This is an improvement on the former Edition, containing as it does ampler notes on Books I and I I . It constitutes what is called ' t h e Vulgate', and was accepted by subsequent editors until superseded by that of Bekker. T h e F r a n k f o r t E d . 1594 in fol. is based upon this. T h e Text is accompanied by notes by F r a n c i s c u s P o r t u s and by Valla's translation—revised and corrected throughout by his son Aemilius Portus—which became the common Latin version of later Editions. I t was followed, after the lapse of a century, by the edition of J o h n H u d s o n , Oxford 1696 folio. C. T h i r d period:— Thucydidis libri v i n gr. et lat. cum adnotationibus integris H. Stephani et Joh. H u d s o n i ; recensuit et notas suas addidit Ios. W a s s e : editionem curavit, suasque animadversiones adiecit Car. Andr. D u k e r u s ; cum varus dissertationibus etc. Amslelodami ap. Wetstenios, 1731 in fol. It contains the Maps of Hudson's edition republished and H. Dodwell's Annales Thticydidei. One of the noblest monuments of the enterprising House of Wetstein. I t was reprinted by Foulis (Glasgow, 1759), and less accurately at Bipontum (Deuxponts in the Palatinate) 1788—9 in 6 voll. 8vo; the text was reprinted also with additional notes b y Gottleber-Bauer-Beck, Leipzig Vol. 1, 1790, Vol. II 1804 4to. Vol. ill to contain Index and Glossary was never published. 19 — 2 APPENDIX ON THE TEXT Histoire Grecque de Thucydide, accompagnee de la version Latine, de variantes des treize (corr. dix) MSS de la bibliotheque imperiale, d'observations historiques, litteraires et critiques . . . . par J. B. G a i l , Paris 1807, 10 voll. 8vo. Thuc. de bello Pelop. libri v i n . Ad opt. codd. fidem . . . . recensuit, summariis et notis illustravit C. F . F. H a a c k e . Lips. 1820 in 2 voll. 8vo. Entirely superseded by the second edition, see below. D. F o u r t h period:— Thuc. de bello Pelop. libri v i n ex editione Immanuelis Bekk e r i : accedunt Scholia graeca et Dukeri Wassiique observationes. Oxford 4 voll. 8vo 1821. Some copies of the 3 first voll. have on the title-page Berlin 1821. Other Editions with critical apparatus 1832, 1846, 1868. Primus rationibus vere criticis constanter usus est (Stahl). P o p p o , Ernest Frederic. Thucydides, the Greek Text with two volumes of Prolegomena, the Scholia and Notes of former edd. by E. F. P. 11 volls. 8vo. Leipzig 1821—40. Ά vast thesaurus in which nearly everything illustrative of Thucydides has been accumulated' (yowett). A smaller edition was subsequently published, 4 vols. 8vo. forming a part of the Jacobs-Rost Bibliotheca Gothana 1843— 1851, Vol. 1 ed. 2, 1866. (A new Edition of some of the Books, revised by E. F. P o p p o and J. M. S t a h l 1875— 1886.) Between these came the scholarly edition of Francis G o H e r with Notes, original and compiled, Indices, Chronological Tables and Maps, 2 voll. 8vo, Leipzig 1826, 2d ed. auct. et emend. 1836; and that of S. T. B l o o m f i e l d , a new recension of the text, with copious notes etc., 3 vols. 8vo, London 1830 (ed. 2 1842); also a second ed. of C. F . F . H a a c k e , with clear and concise notes, Leipzig, 1831; and that of G e r v i n u s - H e r t l e i n , 2 vols. 8vo, Frankfurt o-M. 1830—5. A r n o l d , Thomas. Thucydides with notes chiefly historical and geographical by T. A. 3 vols. 8vo. London and Oxford 1830—5. N e w ed. 1848—1851. E n Angleterre, l'edition d'Arnold est classique: mais c'est surtout pour le commentaire g^ographique et historique qu'elle merite d'etre recommandde(^4. Croiset). Prof. Jowett justly observes that 'Arnold created an interest about geography and archaeology, and even about the interpretation of difficult passages, such as never existed before among his countrymen. H e was not a great philologer, and never gained an idiomatic acquaintance with the language of T h u c , or A. GENERAL REMARKS 293 formed a sound notion of textual criticism, but he had a true feeling for Greek History and Life, and all students of Thuc. have reason to be thankful to him'. Kriiger, K. W. θουκνδίδον £vyypct τφ τοιούτω του κ., cuius loci ad similitudinem addidisse correctorem contra putat Hu. 1. 23. €ΐττά...σταδίων del. C I . ; post βραχύ τι transposuit Schroeter. άΐΓ€Τ€τ4λ€θ-το c. Β CI S t . : επετετέλεστο TO. V K r H u ; cf. c. 4, 2, VIII 5 5 , 2 . 1. 25. παρά Β . Ι. 26. αττο addidit Woelfflin: verba τοΰ κύκλου irpos τον Τρώγιλον secluserunt CI St H u , ut interpretamentum ex v i c. 99, 1 adscriptum. 1. 29. κατ€λ£λ€ΐιττο Cob. V. L. p . 254 S t ; κατέλείπετο c. Β C I ; κατελίπετο CX. X L M CAP. I l l § 1. 1. 3. πέμπει L ΤΛ. § 3. 1. 15. τό om. C Zi US. 1. 5. 1. 29. προ· εαυτών c. Β CI St H u : εαυτού C Χ. ΓΛ. § 4 . 1. 21. ά7α7ώϊ> coni. H w . blema abicit H w . §5. ιτροσ-πέμΐΉΐ Β C ; [λέγοντα] Kr, λέγων coni. H w . έφορμωσα Ε Γ Μ . 1. 24. 1. 30. το ψρούριον ut em- 4 τφι μεyάλωι λ. Β C1. CAP. IV § 1. 1. 3. irpos τό έγκάρσ-ιον del. H w , susp. K r quod non iam staret murus obliquus primum exstructus. 1. 5. verba d μή δύναιντο κωλΰσ-αι del. H w . § 2 . 1. 7. άναβεβήκεσαν Β Χ. Xtt C1 || Μ τηι Β Μ C1. τοϊδ 'Αθηναίοι* del. H w . 1. 10. έπήιει 2ΜΕ; άπψει Β · 1. 9· APPENDIX t ON THE TEXT § 4 . 1. 17. Ήλημύριορ c. C H u . 1. 21. ρφον c. Β L Μ K r CI S t : ρ$ωρ cum C H w H u . 1. 23. τ φ των Συρακοσ-ίων del. Kr. 1. 25. ^ταγωγάϊ C L BE. 1. 27. 7^s 1}δη Β . § 5 . 1. 29. ώρμίζετο Β . § 6. 1. 37. § 7 . 1. 43. Εύβοιας φυλακή €ξ€Τ€ίχι<Γ€ Β C Β ϊ : έξετείχιζε οί ττολλοί διεφθείροντο Β . vulgo. 1. 39. 1. 32. rfj €V om. B . [es] coni. Kr. cl. II c. 26 τριάκοντα ^cu/s ρ. εξέπεμψαρ CAP. V 6 § 1 · διετείχιζε Β ( Δ Ι ex praegresso N)» aut propter verba quae sequuntur διά, των 'Β7Γί7Γ. 1.7. άντεπαρετάσσοντο Βϊ. § 2 . 1. 8. τω om. C L M . § 3. τήρ τάφρ έπανηζειν § 4. 1. 13. ό μερ Γ. Β Cl St. 1. 15. αύτοϋ C L ΒΙ. coni. Philippius (Ι ώφέλιαν Β ; ώφέλειαρ Β C Μ . Βϊ. 1. 23. έζε\άσεσθαι Β . 1. 17. 1. 19. CAP. VI 7 § 1. 1. 1. αΰθι$ om. ΒΛ. 1. 5. σφίσι είναι Β . 1. 9. προέλθοι codd. corr. Cl. 1. 1 1 . άμύνεσθαι Β , superscripto μάχ€σθαι quod ex alio cod. accessit v. 1. § 2. 1. 13. ή irpoVepov del. K r . § 3 . 1. 19. Si αυτό V S t 2 ; δια τούτο St 1 c. B . ηράχθη C ; κατερράχθη L M . § 4. 1. 21. 1. 20. κατ- καΐ.,.οίκοδομίαν om. G, del. Bk St 2 . CAP. VII § 1. 1. 5. θρασωνίδης Β . 1. 7. μέχρι del. A . H o l m C l ; [μέχρι του έΎκαρσίου τάχους] coni. St, μ.<του ΈίύρυΎ,λου>τ. έ. Marchant. § 2 . 1. 9. στρατάαν Β C 3 E M. 1. 10. πεζ-ην Β [] ξυλλ^ξων del. C o b . ; ξυλλέΎωρ Γ ΒΛ: συλλέξων C G. 1. 12. αφεστηκει ΒΛ. 8 § 3 . 1. 14. T7]p Λακεδαίμονα Β . 1. 15. [τρόπω ω αν] coni. W i d m a n n ; όττωσοΰν coni. H w . ; όπως dp B C L I Y I ; έν...6πω$ αν del. Schaefer Bk H w . 1. 16. ττλοίωι !• Βϊ. § 4 . 1. 19. άν€π€ΐρώντο C L ΒΛ qui in marg. άπεπειρωντο' έμελέτων addit. Β. § 1. C IMC. CRITICAL NOTES CAP. VIII 1. 5. ayytWovras B. 1. 8—9. 1. 10. < av > eTi>cu coni. H w . 301 ην...μεταττέμψουσιν § 2 . 1. 11. φοβούμενοι IMC. 1. 1%. κατά την c. Β CI. 1. 13. μνήμηδ c. Β K r CI St H u ; Ύνώμψ cet. V A r n . γ€νό"μ€νοι c. CJMC Hu. 1.15. aTrayyeiXojaiv c. C Ή,χι. 1.16. μάλιστα V : μόλις Β . § 3 . 1. 18. Ambigit H w deleatne omnia quae leguntur inter φχοντο et b δέ an scribat φέροντες τα ypάμμaτa^ 6 δ£ κτέ., ut ους απέστειλε sit interpretamentum vv. ol μέν, reliqua autem interpolata sint ex c. ί ο 6σα r e dirb yko^w εϊρητο. 1. 19. otfs dir&rmXe c. codd. K r C I ; ώς έπέστειλε corr. St H u ; ά έπέστειλε [τα ypάμμaτa] coni. Pluygers. 1. 20. b δε κατά τό στρατόπεδον δια φυλακής ηδη 'έχων εκουσίων κινδύνων έπεμελεΐτο 3 C \\ τά om. M Β 1MC. 1. 21. μάλλον om. codd. praeter Β || εϊχεν coni. Bdh [| τ} δι B C ; ^ L · ; om. 3VI [Bdh H w ] . 1. 7. CAP. IX τούτο c. Β C C I ; om. c. I C St H u . M n CAP. X 1. 4. Ιπηρώτα, praeterea interrogabat, c. Β K r CI St H u ; ήρώτα 3MEV || άπεκρίναντο A F G Μ . 1. 6. [τήδ TT<&€S] H W St H u ; ό της πόλεως Β C I ; in marg. I C legitur ύπηρέτψ rbv είωθότα εν τφ M κοινωι δήμωι τα yράμματα avayiyvaaKuV τούτο 5' ού κυρίως τιμή ην. Cf. Aristot. περί Αθηναίων "πολιτείας c 54 χειροτονεί δε καϊ b δήμος ypaμμaτέa τδν dvayvωσbμεvov αύτφ καϊ TTJ βουλ^' καϊ οΰτος ούδενός έστι κύριος αλλά του avayvGovai. CAP. X I § 1. 1. 2. ττολλαΐβ om. Β . 1. 3. § 2 . 1. 7. οίκοδομησάντων Μ ό Αακεδαιμόνιος Β || τ€ om. C S C M. || ήττον Μ . νυν om. C IMC. 1. 8. 1. 9. diro c. Β om. CI H w . § 3 . 1. 13. δια πλήθος H u c. C. 1. 15. χ ρ ή σ α σ θ α ι c. C I O K r CI St H u ; χρήσεσθαι Β L 3 C H απαναλωκυίας Β L 3MC; M άπαναλωκύας C. 1. 17. μη, δυνατά εΐναι Β sc. ex interpretatione. CAP. XII § 1 . 1. 5. καϊ ante ·π·€(σων om. H w . 1. 6. τιάν c. C I C K r CI H u ; καϊ στρατιαν 'έτι c. Β St. M § 2. 1. 9. τ€ om. Β . 1.11. eYt καϊ στρα* κατά θάλασσαν del. H w . APPENDIX H § 3. 1. 13. ON THE βπερ S. TEXT καϊ εκείνοι C L M . § 4 . 1. 18. διαψύζαι c. L 3 E CI. Y 1. 19. #rt (corruptum ex 'έτι) πλείονς C ΜΕ: αντίπαλου* καϊ τφ πλήθει καϊ έτι 7τλ., viribus pares et numero quidem f hires etiam H u c. C BE. § 5 . 1. 20. άποπειρώμεναι C L· BfX. Cf. c. 7, 4. καϊ το ξηραναι Β || Ιξουσ-ία om. St c. ΒΛ; item Herwerdenus Thuc. p. 93 || τα σφέτερα Eff. 1, 23. αΧληλοις ΒΪ. CAP. 1. 22. Studia XIII § 2 . 1. 9. iwi> &rt Μ || j>w] coni. K r . I. 10. των del. P p St H u Si. 1. 11. apnayrjv μακράν καϊ ύδρείαν C L M , 1. 14. κατά πόλεις H w . 1.19. err* αυτομολία^ ττρ. CI V : έπ' αύτονομία* προφάσει, causam praetendentes, quod ex liberis civitatibus et sui iuris sint, lectionem ab A. Passovio propositam rec. St H u qui notat mercede conductos non ex eis esse qui imperio Atheniensium parerent, sed a liberis civitatibus venissent: σιτολογια* coni. Pluygersius, ασχολίας Meinekius, άρΎυρολο*γίας H w , αίχμαλωτίας Madvig, αύτοστολίας Naber, άντιβολίας Widmann, άπομισθίας Gertz. 1. 20. αυτοί c. Β K r CI S t ; αύτοϋ C L BE, quod Popponi languere videtur, cum αυτοί propter sequentia υπέρ σφων aptissimum sit; Hudius contra αυτοί propter id ipsum supervacaneum esse statuit. CAP. X I V 12 § 2 . 1. 9. επιπληρωσώμεθα coni. CI. 1. 12. ret δέοντα del άπανάλισκομένων coni. H e r w . Stud. Thuc. p . 9 4 ; idem {Mnem. N . S . VIII p . 294) άπανάλισκομένων non prorsus sibi satisfacere confitetur. § 3 . 1. 17. διαΐΓ€ΐΓθλ€μησ€τ<Η cum Β C et ΒΪ ex corr. eiusdem m. CI. St H u ; διαπολεμησεται § 4. 1. 22. V. [ό πόλβμος} K r S t ; non legit S. νμας σαφώς είδότας Ο L BX. CAP. XV § 1. 1. 1. το om. L n s . 1. 7. αυτοί βουλ€υσ·ασθ€ cum Β CI S t : αύτοΐς βουλεύεσθαι (i.e. -εσθε) C ; αύτοΐς, βουλεύεσθε BE; unde προσδόκιμος αύτοΐς, βουλεύσασθε coni. H u . 1. 9. άνταρκούντων Ε Ρ : αύταρκούντων Β C 9S. 1. 11. πεζικήν ΒΛ. 1.12. 13 έμοί δ* c. C K r St H u ; έμοί τε C. B CI. § 2. 1. 16. πράττετε C L· 3X1. Β. CRITICAL CAP. NOTES XVI 1. 9. επεψηφίσαντο CI cum Β : 'praepositio haud dubie correctori tribuenda est, neque enim post &λλην requiritur et aptius esset επιπέμπειν ut docet Stahlius (cf. c. 15, 1). Accedit quod neque Thucydides neque alius quisquam scriptor hoc verbum hac significatione posuit* (Hude). 1. 10. primum καΐ om. Β || ττεζήν: πεζικών V, cf. C 7, 2. 1. 12. Δημοσθένην c. Β C L M CI. § 2. 1.16. καΐ Ικατόν St Hu c. D et Valla ' centum viginti'. CAP. XVII § 3 . 1. 10. οϊ re πρέσβεπ αύτοϊς codd. praeter B. I. 13. 14 πολλά ΊΝί. 1. 15. εν τψ Σικελίαι C Χι ΧΛ. tr4\L^ovris CI St: πέμψαντε* L WI; del. post Hw Hude, * scilicet mente repetendum άποστελουντε* e constanti Graecorum usu\ 1. 18. είκοσι "BR. CAP. XVIII § 1. 1. 3. προεδέδοκτο c. Β C I. M CI St. 1. 4. τώί/ Kop. C. 1. 5. Άθψών coni. Bk. 1. 8. άνεΐναι CI cum B. Sed in universum valere praeceptum recte monet Stahlius. § 2 . 1.11. irpos τ€ σφάς καΐ SIKCXMOTCIS insiticia esse docet Hw Mnem. N. S. VIII p. 294. 1.16. T€omCM. 1. 18. 15 θέλωσι Β L IMC: φέρωσι Ο. § 3 . 1. 22. 4γ€ν€Τ0 I C St Si; CI Hu c. reliquis ykvoiTo; eye" M yivoiTO B, quod e correctura eyeyivqTo fortasse corruptum vel ex ea et yhoiTo conflatum est, monente Hudio. 'Optativus neque obliquus esse potest neque enuntiationis generalis' (Stahl). 1. 23. Ιξ "Apvovs, quae solus addit Β ante ορμώμενοι, CI St Kr: om. c. cett. Hu. 'Verba ideo suspecta sunt quod Athenienses ex A r g o profectos esse VI c. 105, 2, ubi res gesta narratur, non commemoratum est; nee quicquam impedit, quin reus τριάκοντα ναυσίν cum partic. ορμώμενοι iungamus (cf. c. 2, ι μι$ νηϊ τελευταίο* ορμηθείς, IV 125, *) u t participium minime ineptum fiat* (Hude) || ώρμημένοι coni. Kr. 1. 25. eXxjcrrevovTO pass, recte ad Lacedaemonios rettulit Arnoldus; in Β scribitur έλήστευον, quod in textum quidem receperunt edd., sed correcturae, ne mutaretur subiectum, fortasse tribuendum esse recte adnotat Hudius. § 4 . 1. 39. &vaypa^ C L BT. 304 APPENDIX ON THE TEXT CAP. X I X 16 § 1· 1. 2. πρώτατα ΒΛ; πρωίτατα Χι Μ m g . ; πρωιαίτατα Β ; πρωαίτατα. Ο yp. 1. 5. Λακεδαιμονίων βασ-ιλεύβ seel. H w ; etiam 1. 8 το £ργον. § 2 . 1. 11. 81 καΐ ού Β ; bk ΒΛ; ου ττολλφ ιτλ&>ν del. H w H u ; π α ρ α π λ ή σ ι ο ν . . . 7τλ«> ν καΐ del. K r , ut interpretamentum vocis μάλιστα; alterum καΐ abesse vult H w || αϊτό D e t Ρ : έπί M V K r j a Boeotia Valla. 1. 13. 4s το κακούργε ίν del. K r H u , contra quos CI conferri iubet v i c. 12, 2. § 3 . 1. 18. τούδ oirXCTas V : τοσούσδε όπλίτα* H w qui in seqq. quater delet 07τλίτα$ et semel § 5 ol δπλΐται. 1. 20. βελτίον* ΒΛ; νεοδαμωδών om. art. XI ΒΛ. 1. 21. 4ξακοσ(ου$ om. is ΒΛ. § 4 . 1. 24. e ν τ οι s π ρώτοις Β C L ΒΛ; em. Reiz de tnclin. ace. 17 p . 20 et Dobr. 1. 25. του om. C. 1. 26. ά,φηκαν libri: sed Thucydides antiquiorem usum videtur secutus esse. Aoristorum autem huiusmodi (Ζθηκα, Ζδωκα, ηκα) in titulis Atticis ante 376 a Ch. singularis tantum' activi exstat; vide Meisterhans Gr. § 4 2 , 3. Sic άνεΐσαν legitur ν 32, 4, άφεΐσαν ν 8 ι , ι, VII 53, 4. Cf. Stahl Quaest. Thuc. p . 64 ed. 2. 1. 27. άπ' c. Β CI H w . l . 28. προμι,σθωσάμενοι ΒΛ. Ι. 29. καί seclusit H u d e . § 6 . 1. 36. αύτοϊς οΰτοι c. Β K r St C I : OVTOL C L JYI, quod, ut supervacaneum, cum paucis supra versibus ol οπλΐται commemorati sint, del. H u . 1. 37. Trpbrepov C L M || 717)0$ όλκάδας C L ΒΛ. CAP. X X § 1. 1. 1. άμα τήδ Β CI S t ; όίμα V H u . 1. 2. του ijpos tvQvs αρχομένου interpolata ex c. 19, 1 putat H w . 1. 3. irepi τ€ Β : περί C L ΒΛ. 1. 7. [τε] post Reiskium recte seel. CI St H u ; nihil est enim quod respondeat. § 2. 18 1. 14. ττοθέν T€u BT. 1. 16. ξυστρατεύσασθαι Β. § 3 . 1.18. ιτροσιτλεΰσαδ c. Β Ο H u : πλεύσας c. L M K r CI St. 1. 19. ύ·ϊΓ€λ€(ΐΓ€το V CI.; ύπελέλειπτο coni. St (cl c. 33, 6), H u . CAP. XXI § 1. 1. 2. verba τούτου του ήροδ ut emblema del. H w . § 2 . 1. 10. κατεργάσεσθαι St (Quaest, Thuc, p . 11 ed. 2) H u : Karepyaaaadai. c. Β C L Μ C l . Β. CRITICAL NOTES § 3 . 1. 10. £υναν6ΤΓ6ΐθ€ c. C Ο K r St CI H u ; ξυναναπείθει Β ; ξυνέπειθε L· ΒΛ. 1. 11. η κ ι σ τ ' αυτούς coni. S t ; ηκιστα του B C L : 'ηκιστα ΒΛ G·; ηκιστα τό coni. Kr. 1. 12. Ιιτιχαρήσ-αι D S (?) Dobr. pro codd. επιχειρήσει», ita ut verba irpbs τους 'Αθηναίους toti locutioni άθυμεΐν επιχειρησαι applicentur. Ceterum του quod habent B C L · ante ναυσίν ab Arnoldo et Classenio frustra ita defenditur, ut sensus sit * to the end that they might not fear', cl. II c. 4, 2, c. 22, ι ; ηκ. μη άθ. του ται* ναυσιν επιχειρήσει» coni. Goetzius : Ιπιχείρησιν etiam coni. D o b r . 1. 17. χαλεπωτάτοι* ΒΛ || αΰτοΐς del. Bdh S t ; αν αύτοΐς Β . 1. 20. σφεΐς coni. B k ; σφίσι [αν]...ύπάρχειν Linwood [ H w ] . § 4 . 1. 23. τι om. C L ΒΛ. 1. 24. c. Β K r St C l : περιεσομένου* c. C L M V H u . (in C solo omissum) pro spurio habet H u . CAP. ΤΓ€ριγ€νηατομΙνου5 1. 26. CK&CVCV XXII § 1. 1. 1. ·π·αρ€<ΓΚ€υάατατο Β C ΒΛ; παρεσκεύαστο St H u 1 9 c. D . 1. 3. πεζικήν ΒΛ. 1. 9. καΐ τό V : καινόν coni. Schubringius || καΐ del. B k ; om. B Valla. 1. 10. προσμΤξαι Β ΒΛ ; προσμίξαι C ; προμίξαι Α. § 2. 1. 15. r a s δ' επίλοιπου* ΒΛ. CAP. § 1. 1. 3. τη 'γνώμη C. 1. 19. Ζκπλουν Β . XXIII 1. 7. τα*: τους C || έλάσσωι Β . § 2 . 1. 11. es τό στρατόπεδον έί-εκομίζοντο Β L· ΒΛ: διεκομίζοντο 2 Ο coni. H w . 1. 12. rfj ναυμαχία del. K r Bdh. 1. 13. [και] coni. H w . 1. 15. 01 om. ΒΛ. § 3. 1. 20. T€ om. C. § 4. 1. 26. ρη^σιδιωι ΒΛ. CAP. XXIV § 1. 1. 4. αύτοΟ coni. Gertz. § 2 . 1. 10. ώσ-irep ex Flav. Joseph. Antiq. x v i n c. 9, 1 St Si H u Bhm-Widmann : ώστε C L· ΒΛ cuius cum participio iuneti certa exempla desunt in Atticae prosae scriptoribus: a r e Β correctura aperta, Bk H w . 1. 13. των om. C L ΒΛ ; habet B . § 3 . 1. 15. μέγισ-τόν T€ c. Β ΒΛ St C l : μ^ιστον δέ H u c. C L·. 1. 16. alterum το om. Β ΒΛ. 1. 17. ot om. B . Sed T. VII 20 3 o6 APPENDIX ON THE hae advectiones antea commemoratae sunt. γωγή$ del. P p H w . 1. 21. παρείχε Μ . TEXT . 1. 19. Ttjs ίιτα- CAP. XXV § 1. 1. 5. οϊιτ€ρ... φρά<τουσχ... Ιττοτρυνοϊσι D o b r : οπω$ c. B...et φράσωσι...έποτρύνωσι c. codd. K r St C I : οϊπερ.,.φράσωσι... έποτρύνωσι. C L Μ ; in C φράσωσιν in φράσονσιν correctum et lit. ω m έποτρύνωσί arrasa; in Ρ et G corr. φράσουσι extat. τ ά τ€ σ-ψ€Τ€ρα Β ; τά σφέτερα cet. 1. 9. ττυνθανόμ^ναι, B C L M ; πυνθανόμενοι ex D K r ; πυνθανομένων coni. H u . § 2. 1. 10. χρημάτων Ύέμοντα c. Β CI St. § 3. 1.14. αύτοϋ coni. H w . § 4 . 1. 17. faXeov Β : τταρβνέπΚεον yp. Β . θησαν G L IVI. 22 1. 13. έτοιμα ΤΛ. 1. 20. ήδυ^ι)- § 5 . 1. 22. σταυρωμάτων Β pessime; sequitur enim oifr. 1. 25. IVTOS om. ML. 1. 26. €μβα\6ντ€$ Β . § 6 . 1. 27. μυριοφόρον K r CI St H u c. c o d d . : coni. Heilmann. 1. 28. παραφάρ*γματα H u d e . μυριαμφόρον 1. 29. ακάτων V ; κεράτων coni. Madvig p . 329 qui inepte hie s c a p h a s commemorari putat. ' N a m ad evellendos vallos' inquit ' n o n scaphis ob earn rem ineptis, sed ea q u a m ' o b hanc ipsam causam T h u c . superioribus verbis descripsit nave usi sunt A t h e nienses, cum funes vallis iniectos alligassent ad navis partem ei rei a p t a m : ea erant capita antemnarum \ Sed navis oneraria monente Stahlio soli άκροβολισμφ inserviebat. άκατίων sc. Ιστών coni. A . Breusing: vide Liddell-Scott. s. v. II. 1. 30. άν€ΐλκον videtur legisse Scholiastes per άνέσπων interpretatus, quod ipsum restituendum putat C I ; άνεΐλκον coni. W i d m a n n ; άνέκλων C !• Z K k K r CI St quod varie interpretantur inflectebant et in altum tollebant (Haacke), ' b e n t or forced them out of their place or broke off' (Heilmann), sursum attollendo convellebant et educebant (Duker), ' w o u n d them up and pulled them o u t ' (BoeAme), ' d r e w them out* (Didot, Be/tant)i 'unfixed' or 'plucked them out* (Grote). 23 § 9 . 1. 5 1 . αΰ c. Β C Μ om. CI H w : seel. St qui τά TG άλλα... καί iungi vult. 1. 56. διαΐΓ€πολ€μ/ησ-όμ.€νον c. Β K r CI St Bhm H u : διαπολεμησόμενον Ο Χι Μ . Β. CRITICAL CAP. § 1. 1. 2. § 2. 1. 15. Is om, US. NOTES 307 XXVI 1. 11. κατ αντικρύ ΤΛ. άμα om. omnes praeter Β . § 3 . 1. 17. irapeirXet, praeter oram navigabat c. D K r CI H u St (qui monet a d n a v i g a n d i notionem non aptam esse, cum εκείθεν ad ea loca referatur, quae Demosthenes in itinere attigerit): έπιπαρέπλει Β conflatum, ut videtur, ex παρέπλει et superscripta v. 1. e7r^7r\ei: έπέπλει C L US. 1. 18. εκεΐ B . 1.21. fosB; w s C L I Y I . CAP. XXVII § 1. 1. 1. prius των om. Β Ο. 1. 3. του αΰτοΰ θέρους τούτου c Β K r CI St B h m : έν τφ αύτφ θέρει τούτω c. C L M H u cl. 1. 13 et v c. 39, ι . § 2 . 1. 6. ϋστεροι coni. H w . K r H u : έλάμβανον c. Β Cl St H w . 1. 10. ελά\ιβανε(ν) c. C !• ΤΛ 2 4 § 3 . 1. 14. ύπό C X. 3 » : άττό Β . 1.15. χρόνου K r Cl St H u c. libris: χρόνον Β quasi sit in tempus aliquod, ut in II c. 18, 2 ; χρόνφ coni. Bauer; < δ ι ά > χρόνου coni. H w . 1. 17. ττρώτον coni. B k ; πρώτη Dobr H w ; πρώτοις B C I Β Λ . 1.18. χρημάτων: θρεμμάτων coni. M e i n . ; κτηνών vel [όλέθρφ] K r . § 4 . 1. 2 1 . H u n c locum ita restituendum coni. H w : TOTS δέ i-υνεχώς έπικαθημένων, καϊ ποτέ μεν καΐ πλειόνων <καΙ ελασσόνων > έπώντων, ποτέ δ' έξ ανάγκης TTJS πάσης φρουράς καταθεούσης την χώραν, παρόντος ,Ayίδoςi δς κτέ. 1. 23. της άεΐ οϋσης φρουράς coni. St 1 cl. Plat, de rep. 485 Β ; οϋσης iam R s k ; τ . πάσης φρ. Sitzler. § 5 . 1. 29. τό ιτολύ c. Β K r S t ; πολύ c. C L 9 1 Cl H u . 1. 30. πάντα άπολώλει c. C X E H u S t 1 ; άπωλώλει πάντα c. Β St 2 . K 1. 31. υποζύγια C L Tfl: £ει5γΐ7 c. Β C l ; sed ^€1)70$ iugum, non iumentum significat, neque de singulis iumentis, quae hie propter opposita πρόβατα requiruntur, dici posse monet Stahlius. CAP. XXVIII § 1 . 1.3. κατά γη ν... κατά θάλασ-ο-αν del. H w . 1.4. θάο-crov 2Κ K r Cl St c O M : θάσσων c. cett. H u H w Bhm S i ; θασσον ίοΰσα Bdh. § 2 . 1.11. ιτου c. Β Cl. S t : ποιούμενοι L Μ (C habet πλοιούμενοι lit. λ erasa): πονούμενοι (propter έταλαιπωροϋντο inutile) coni. K r ; πόλούμενοι Rauchenstein; κοιμώμενοι Mueller-Struebing. 20—2 3 o8 APPENDIX ON THE TEXT § 3 . 1.16. ye ci. Bothe [ B d h ] ; καί S i ; 7 a p c o d d . ; παρ αύτοϊς St. 1. 19. πάλιν om. BS || otfSeVct ελάσσονα C L 3YE. 1. 20. yeD; r e C l i l t t || της 'Αθηναίων Β ; τών'ΑΘ. cett. unde riys rcD?' A0. coni. H u . 1. 22. όσον libri: oVot Bdh H w H u M d v ; o'lirep Si. 1. 24. ού δή coni. H w ; ούκ els Bdh. 1. 26. έβδόμφ και δεκάτφ H u auctore K r contra codd. 1. 27. τετρυμένοι coni. Cobet. § 4 . 1.28. verba του...Πελοποννήσου adscripta esse putat Η w . 2 6 1· 29. διό καΐ Χ Γ Κ 1. 30. T€ om. C L US. 1. 33. κατά Β . 1. 35. €ir€0€o-av H w Bdh ; εποίησαν libri; έπέταζαν coni. Cl. CAP. § 1. 1. 8. § 2 . 1. 8. St H u H w . XXIX δύνωνται omnes praeter B . re om. C L M || Tavaypav 1. 11. SiaTrXetfcras B . libri K r : em. Cl prob. § 3 . 1. 13. ηΰλίσατο Β (cf. IV c. 45, 1): ηύλί^το C L Dfl H u . 1. 16. ου om. libri praeter B . 1. 18. τίνα—έπάναβάΥτα C G K r H w St 2 H u : τινας—έπαναβάντας cett. Desideramus exempla pluralis τινές cum negatione coniuncti (Stakl) \\ του re coni. Gertz. 2 7 I . 20. βραχέως Β C || <των> πυλών coni. H w . § 4. 1. 27. το των Θρακών del. S t ; ro om. B. § 5 . 1. 33. πάσηι πόλα Β || ησσον c. D H u . Ιτέρας del. K r St H u d e auctore Heilmanno. CAP. 1. 34. μάλλον 1. 5. καΐ την XXX § 1 . 1. 2. προκεχωρηκότας post θράκας Μ . θάλασσαν del. Bdh Hu ; τόν Εΰριττον καί del. St. § 2 . 1. 9. τα «ν τη -yfj: την cjivy^v Β yp. S || το|€υματοδ Β yp. S ; extra ictum sagittarum V a l l a ; του ^ύματος Β : του Νύγματος C Χι 1ΜΕ. 1. 12. προσ€κθ£οντ€ϊ Χ Ε || re habet unus Β . Μ 1. 15. apnayrjs coni. H u || έyκaτaλeιφθev D Abr. S t ; έγκαταληφθέν Kr Cl H u Si c. C L ΒΛ. 1. 16. των Θρακών del. H w . 28 § 3 . 1. 19. Ιππέας μάλιστα άπαναλώθη libri K r . § 4. 1. 22. DtL || T€ om. Β US. χρησαμ€νην R s k : χρησαμένων c. libris Kr. 1. 21. Β. CRITICAL NOTES CAP. XXXI § 1. 1. 1. έκ ΟΧΜ Μ . § 2. 1. 8. 6 Δημο(τθ6/η$ del. H w . 1. 4. €υρών S t . ; om. omnes praeter B . § 3. 1. 17. ήδη εαλω/cos Β . § 4 . 1. 21. τον ιπίλβμον seel. H u auctore Madvigio; rhv πλουν coni. L . Herbst, τόν σταθμόν Naber, καταπαύουσι Mein., καταλβίπονσί τον πορθμόν Bdh. 1. 23. οϋσα$ V yp. Β ; efc>ai Β || 5e οϋσαπ τα. Cf. c. 53> 3 1· *9· 1· 24 · τα « *<*·ντων C L Μ . § 5 . 1. 26. άρίστα* L Μ . 1. 27. [αφ* <ον αυτοί €Ϊχον] Hu, cui ad dativum σφίσι explicandum addita videntur. CAP. § 1 . 1. 2. 42, 3. 1. 9. φήσουσι B L G . XXXII του om. L 3ML 1. 5. πυθόμενος Β : cf. IV 2 9 διαφρήσουσα coni. D o b r . ; διαφήσωσι C USE; 5ta1. 10. κωλύσ-ουο-ι Β Χι; κωλύσωσι C Μ . § 2 . 1. 13. [τινά τ ρ ι χ ή ] Cl S t 1 : τριχψ Β , omittit Μ ; [τριχ??] K r S t 2 : utrumque om. Thomas Magister. 1. 16. evos του coni. H w cl. Soph. O. R. 118 θνήσκουσι yap TTXTJV els T I S . CAP. § 2. 1. 9. XXXIII ττασα c L M K r St H u . § 3 . 1. 14. έπέσχον τό Ο Μ ; έπέσχοντο πάσχι ΤΛ. 1. 20. 'Ιώνων Β G Μ . 30 cett. 1. 19 ξύν § 4 . 1. 22. νήσ-ovs 'Icwrvyias del. H e r w . 1. 23. [των Ίαττΰ-γων] St 2 . 1. 25. ώσπερ L ΤΛ. 1. 26. παρέσχβτο c C H u cl. 11 c. 9, 3, 5 ; c. 12, 5 ; c. 98, 4, v i 83 e t c . ; παρέσχε c. Β L ΤΛ K r Cl St. § 5 . 1. 29. πέμπ&,ν ξυμπέμπειν Β unde is atfray coni. Bdh. TIL. 1. 30. ταντα : αύτάϊ CAP. XXXIV § 1 . 1. 1. irepi Β : καϊ ol irepi C L IVI inepte. 1. 3. 3 1 oiVe/) C L M ; afrre/> coni. Gertz coll. c. 31, 4, recepit H u : οί ττερί Β . 1. 6. ναυμαχίαν coni. H u . 1. 7. vcu>s et 1. 8 veav del. H w : seel. St 2 . 1. 9. άχαία? Β L G XK : Άχαιία? H u c. C. § 2 . 1. 10. 4φ' φ ώρμουν del. H w ; h φ ώ. habet Β . Ι. 11. προσβββοηθηκότες omnes praeter Β . 1. 12. Ίτροαν€χούσαι$ Β Cl. 3io APPENDIX § 8 . 1. 15. coni. Kr. ON THE TEXT 4κ τήδ Ν α υ π ά κ τ ο υ del. H w . 1. 20. [πολύν] § 6 . 1. 22. α7τλοί C. 1. 23. άντιπρφροι* coni. K r j| avapρηεΐσαι ΒΛ: κα£ eicit H w ratus alterum a b altero participium pendere more Thucydideo. Cf. c. 40, 5. 1. 24. αύτωι τούτωι A BHw. 32 § β . 1. 33. vel ρξ,ον?' Bk. καϊ pro ραδίως omnes praeter B . *An fuit phi § 7 . 1. 36. cos viK(SvT€S et § 8 1. 44 cos vuajcravTes interpretibus reddit H w . 1. 38. αυτοί CI St H w S i ; αυτό Β ; cV αυτό c. cett. K r H u || ήττασθαι C L 2XL 1. 40. καϊ om. omnes praeter B . § 8 . 1. 41. ότι ού Β CI S t 1 ; et μή c. cett. K r St 2 H u . 1. 45. ξνμμαχία la ΤΛ. § 1. § 2. 3 3 Portus. CAP. XXXV θοι>/)ΐδάτιδο$ Β . 1.10. κροτωνιαται nullo accentu Ο 3 Ε || προπέμψαντες Μ 1. 15. [προς] coni. P p . coni. CAP. XXXVI § 1. § 2. OHu. 1. 7. 1. 13. T€ om. B . του τείχους 1. 9. L ΤΛ. εΐδον Β . 1. 15. επεσκευασμένοι c. § 3 β 1. 17. αντί νενανπηΎημένας Μ . 1. 19. άντιπρφρους coni. Ρ ρ Ι) περίπλου <η διέκπλου> coni. Kr. 1. 22. άντίπρωφοι codd. corr. Rsk. 1. 25. προσέχοντες coni. H u ; παίοντες Β CI St Si Bhm H w ; ·π·αρ4χοντ€8 cett. § 4 . 1. 27. [rifc τέχνης] coni. K r . 1. 29. [διεκπλεΐν] et 1. 30. [ώστε μτ} περιπλεΐν] coni. Cob. St H w ; διέκπλουν praebet B . 34 § 6 . 1. 31. τό άντίίΓρωιρον exhibent {τον αν. Α Ρ ) codd. Cf. c. 67, 1 ubi pro του codd. TO "habent, VIII 87, 3 καταβοψ 'ένεκα το λέ^γεσθαι ubi contra codd. του exhibent edd.; efrcu τφ άντίπρφροι ζυ^κροΰσαι coni. K r ; είναι άντιπρφρφ &y κρούσει coni. S t ; εΐναι, τφ άντίπρφρον fryKpoO7roXXotfs 3 5 coni. S t ; πολλούς <καΙ δπλίτας> coni. K r propter c. 37, 2. 1. 20. avT€TT€^eaav IMC. 1. 23. al των C. 1. 24. pau πωλουμένων] K r St H u (| 7ταρά τήρ θάλασσαν μεταστησαι κομίσα'ντας C 1» 3MC; μεταναστήσαντας επί την θάλασσα?' κομίσαι Β 7p. S. 1. 15. apivTai Β ϊ ; άριστοποιήσονται K r CI St c. Α Γ ; άριστον ποιήσωνται Β . 1. 16. αΰθις καΐ bis ACFGUMC. CAP. § 2. 1. 7. § 3. 1. 16. XL ησσημένων 3 C M. μοΎΐς omnes praeter Β qui habet μόλις. § 4 . 1. 19. <αν>αλίσκ€σ·θαι coni. Madvig Adv. αλίσκεσθαι l i b r i ; κατίσχβσθαι coni. Kr. *η p. 330; § 5. 1. 21. καΐ del. H w . Cf. c. 33, 5 |j rats re ναυσίν H u c. B C : rats v. K r CI St c. Μ : re per anacoluthiam particulae καϊ ante ol από των κ. positae respondere putat H u . 1. 23. εμβολών l i b r i : corr. Abresch. 1. 30. [es] coni. P p . CAP. XLI § 2 . 1. 7. < α ί > υπέρ των 'έσπλων K r H w . 1. 8. locum την κατάφζυζιν usque ad από των όλκάδων om. IMC. § 4 . 1. 13. πολλούς om. Β . C I · IK II doKtfvB. Ι. 16. totum καϊ intercidit in 3 8 3i2 APPENDIX ON THE TEXT CAP. XLII § 1 . 1. 3. Άθψώρ coni. B k . 1. 5. μ ά λ ι σ τ α ideo in Β omissum esse videtur quia numero navium accurate indicato parum convenire putabatur {Hude). § 2 . 1. 12. τοΰ om. ΒΪ. 1. 15. πολλην πανταχόσε ΒΛ. § 3 . 1. 20. οΰχ οΐόν τ€ δ ι α τ ρ φ ί ΐ ν l i b r i : άνευ κινδύνου διατρίβειν temptat B d h ; ούκέτ' elvcu οΐα διατρίβειν, ratus τά πράγματα non iam esse eiusmodi, ut ullus esset morae locus, temptat H w ; idem ουδέ 3 9 <δεΐν>> παθειν: παθειν < δεΐν > coni. Classen. 1.30. *γινώσκων ΤΛ. 1. 32. £ add. Madvig Adv. p . 330 : vulg. servant K r CI. § 5. 1. 43. τρίβεσθαι C L 3 E \\ re καΐ τους Β . M § β . 1. 46. 'έτεμον B L M . 1. 48. re om. C. 1. 49. καθ' έκάτερα Β . 1. 50. άντεπεί-ήεσαν Μ ; cf. c. 37 1· 2 ° · CAP. XLIII § 1. 1. 5. τ€ om. C. καϊ om. CI St c. B . 40 1. 9. ην H u . 1. 25. τό εναντίον C L ΒΛ. 1. 26. eif rt coni. H w . § 5 . 1. 34. διέφεν/ον ούτοι coni. H w . 1. 35. επισταμένων c. Β H u d e : έπιστάντων C; €7τιστάμ€νοι c. G L Τ/Ι K r CI St Bhm. 1. 36. ύποκρίνοιντο IKE; κρίνοιντο Β ; άποκρίνοιντο K r H w . § 6 . 1. 37. καΐ om. Β |J παιωνισμός et παιωνίσειαν Β Ο ΒΧ. § 7 . 1. 44. κατάστησαν V ; καθίστησαν Β unde καθίστασαν (sc. αυτούς sive φίλους καϊ πολίτας) coni. St (Si). 1. 45. άλλήλοις om. Μ || μόγι$ Β . § 8 . 1. 47. [οι] K r B h m : cf. c. 45, 2. 1. 5 1 . κατά- 4 3 β cue ν, ot μ£ν c. Β K r CI St H u : in καταβαίνουν conflatum est in C Χι ΒΛ. ' I l l u d aptius, quia non eo temporis momento, quo descenderent, verum_ubi descendissent, in castra salvi perveniebant' {Stakl). 1. 58. διέφθειρον L Xtt. CAP. XLV § 1 . 1. 3. δύο τροπαΐα έστησαν έπϊ ταΐς Έπιπολαΐς, ν τ€ V πρόσβασις καϊ $ oi Βοιωτοί άντέστησαν corr. H w . (Mnemos. Ν . S. VIII p . 299), qui adnotat porro prius tropaeum # V πρόσβαση (c. 43> 3) Syracusanos erexisse videri, quod tota haec Atheniensium expeditio, quamvis faustis ominibus suscepta, irrita tamen fuerit: illic enim non ipsos sed hos superiores fuisse. 1. 4. πρώτον om. CI c. B . § 2 . 1. 9. [άν€υ των ασπίδων] CI St H u obsecuti Haackio, neque enim dici posse ψιλός &νευ τίνος pro ψιλός τίνος || άττώλοντο St H u ex em. Cobeti ad Hyper, p. 59, probante L . Dindorf: άπώλλυντο c. codd. K r CI Bhm Sitzler. APPENDIX ON THE CAP. TEXT XLVI § 1. 1. 2. [aft] Mein. p. 343 sed cf. c. 64, 1. 1. 6. « r a •γάγοιτο CI St H u post Pluygersium; ύπα^ά^οιτο c. codd. K r Bhm. 1. 7. άλλην om. C L M . 1. 10. οΰτω (οϋτως Β) ξυνέβη c o d d . ; οϋτως απέβη requirit H w , qui idem totum illud έπειδη—ξυνέβη spurium esse ceiiset. CAP. § 1. 1. 6. XLVII κατορθοϋντας B C L ; κατορθοΰντες Or ΤΛ. § 2 . 1. 11. ην om. Β : ov coni. D o b r || οτι avcXirwrrOTaTa ex em. Reiskii H u : 6TL ανέλπιστα c. codd. K r : [οτι] ανέλπιστα CI St H w Bhm Si. § 3 . 1. 14. 8ΐ€Κΐνδΰν€υ(Γ€(ν) c. Β C CI St H u ; διακινδυνεύεσαι c. !• ΤΛ K r , quod ferri nequit in sententia quae scriptoris, non Demosthenis est || άττιέναι K r CI St c. Β ; έξιέναι H u cum cett. 1.16. στρατ€υμ,ατθ5 V : περαιώματος coni. R s k ; πορθμού H w , idem (Anal. cr. p. ίο) των Συρακοσίων; θεραπεύματος M a d v i g ; στόματος Naber. 1. 17. έπελθοϋσι ΤΛ. § 4. 1. 18. TOVS om. C. CAP. § 1. 1. 2. πονηρά ΤΛ. [μβτά πολλών] coni. Kr. 1. 19. 7) <.προς> coni. Naber. XLVIII 1. 4. άποδεικνυναι ΤΛ. 1. 7. αν om. ΤΛ. 1. 5. § 2 . 1. 9. δ* ϊτι Β L ΤΛ. 1. 11. ελπίδας τε B S. 1. 13. άπορίαν coni., απορία in textum rec. CI. 1. 14. θαλασσοκρατοϋντες coni. H w ; εαυτών pro επί πλέον ci. Si. 1. 15. [yap] vel < ό > έπεκηρυκεύετο (1. 17) coni. Rauchenstein. § 3 . 1. 23. τους αυτούς coni. K r || [αυτών] Bk CI St, K r H u Bm non item. 1. 25. άκουοντα$ c. Β ΤΛ CI S t : άκούσαντας c. cett. K r H u . Turn επιτιμήσει* frustra coni. Bdh. 1. 26. διαβάλλ^ coni. St [ S i ] ; διαβάλλοι libri. § 4. ήδη Kr. 1. 29. τα εναντία C L· Μ . 1. 34. [Ιδία] coni. G t z ; § 5 . 1. 35. όμως: ομοίως ΤΛ. 1. 36. καΐ χ ρ ή μ α σ ι γαρ' B C L M : [καΐ] Kr. 1. 38. <ίτι del. CI. 1. 40. τ€ om. C L M || αναλωκέναι V Kr. 1. 41. ijv re οΰν ΤΛ || [της νυν παρασκευής] coni. Kr. 1. 44. χ ρ ή ν α ι om. ΤΛ. 1. 45. χρήμασ-ι del. CI H οΐς coni. Coraes; ως C L ΤΛ; ϊως St commate Β. CRITICAL NOTES 3*5 ante χρήμασιν p o s i t o ; δείμασιν < iv > φ Gertz cl. c. 80, 3 ; φ Ρ ρ ; ων Β Bhm τούτον subaudiens. Reiskius ' S i c distinguo et lego καϊ μή, χρήμασιν &ν πολύ κρείσσους είσίν, cos νικηθέντας άπιέναι, et non discedere tamquam victos rationepecuniarum (h.e. inferiores pecunia) ab its, quibus longe superiores (eadem scilicet ilia ratione pecuniarum) essent: tSv utrovis referas perinde est, ad κρείσσους an ad νικηθέντας, an ad u t r u m q u e ' . CAP. XLIX § 1. 1. 4. ιτολύ τό coni. Linwood cl. Dion. Cass. xlv. 8, 4 ; που τό Β : τι B l ; [που] K r . 1. 5. <ύτΓοχ€ίρια> γ£"γν€<τθαι coni. S t ; < επί > rots Ά . yiyve&9a,L coni. Naber. 1.7. μη& άπανίστασθαι Cr Μ . 1. 8. γ ο ΰ ν : 7 ' &v Μ || ναυσϊ θαρρών ty πρότερον Β ; μάλλον η πρότερον έθάρσησε κράτησαν coni. H w ; ναυσίν, η (ή Β C Μ ) πρότε­ ρον εθάρσησε, κρατήσειν Rauchenstein; ναυσϊν < μ ά λ λ ο ν > η πρότερον θαρσησας ει κρατηθείη coni. N a b e r ; rats 7 ° ^ ναυσϊν, rj πρότερον έθάρσει κρατήσειν coni. Gertz (κρατήσειν iam B d h ) ; κα£ α/χα (μάλλον) rats yoOv ναυσϊν ή πρότερον έθάρσησε κρατηθείς coni. de V e l s e n ; Hudius in textum recepit quod decli. IGdprci coni. G e r t z ; έθάρσησε Β ; θαρσήσει C L M || καϊ add. Cl || κρατυνθεις Bauer Bothe. § 2 . 1. 1 1 . Iira^eiv Β . Ι. 12. [ψηφίσματος] coni. Br. 1. 13. αυτούς codd. em. Kr. 1. 14. εξαναστάντας aut άπαναστάντας coni. H w . 1. 16. τρέψονται C L I C M. 1. 19. 'έστιν ωσπερ νυν Β || τας τώ? πολεμίων ΤΛ. 1. 24. Ιξανίστασθαι vulgo H u : έξίστασθαι Β ; και μη μέλλειν (μέλλοντας coni. Ρρ) έξ. libri; transposuit Haase hicubr, p . 58. Cf. ν 30, 5· § 3 . 1. 27. βένετο Β BSL CAP. L § 1. 1. 5. φ ι λ ί α : es φίλια vulgo ante Bauerum ; es φιλία Β ; es φιλίαν Ο. 1. 6. re om. Β || ιτολλήν ante άλλην Itt |j 'έχων πολλην Β . 1. 9. άποσταλέντας όπλίτας ΒΛ. § 2 . 1. 10. άπενεχθέντων C L M . 1.13. εύεσπερείταις C L Μ . 1. 16. o0ej> 7T/)os Σικελίαν vulgo ante Boehmerum || [έλάχίστ-ορ] coni. Bdh || δυο?!/ Β. 1. 17. 7r\ous C L I f f l . § 3 . 1. 19. [αύτων] coni. H w . 1. 27. έχοντα coni. H w |j μάλλον pro μ ά λ ι σ τ α Μ . 1. 29. άπαναστάντες coni. H w . 1. 30. gri om. m. || άλλο ει μη...μη ψηφίζεσθαι codd. praeter B qui 3i6 APPENDIX ON THE TEXT μη om. 1. 32. καΐ del. CI. 1. 33. παρασκενάσασθαι CI K r : παρεσκβυάσθαι coni. Abresch ,(Junghahn). c. codd. § 4 . 1. 38. θ€α<τμφ malit H w CI duce Cobeto in Mnem. N . S. V I I I p. 114 qui notat ' v e r b a quae formantur ab adiectivis in -etos exeuntibus abiciunt I ubi dipthongus El ictu est destituta. Sic ex Xetos nascitur \eaiveiv; a τέλειος formatur τέΧεος et τελεοϋν, a θειο* θεάζειν, έπιθεάξειν, sed in aoristo ubi ictus in -El recurrit 0eia 6πω$ coni. Weidner. 1. 42. βένετο coni. CI. CAP. LI § 1. 1. 1. αυτοί libri: ό Γύλιππος coni. K r . 1. 2. eyr]Ύερμένοι γρ. Β C L Til. 1. 5. σφων re μήτε Β j| ναυσϊ sine rats Ο L 3XE. 1. 6. πεζωι sine τώι Ο. 1. 7. βουλόμενος Β . § 2 . 1. 12. άν€ΐτ€ΐρώντο c. Β K r CI St H u ; άνεπαύοντο cett. codd. II oVas B . 1. 13. aurats Μ || €Ϊναι om. 4 9 C G. 1. 14. προτεραίαι B . 1. 16. alterum των om. C || verba καΐ των Ιππέων...re των όπΧιτών om. B . 1. 18. δίωκουσιν C || εφόδου C L Μ . 1. 19. Ιππέας coni. H w II άίΓολλΰουσ-ι libri [CI St Bhm S i ] : άπολλύασι Bk [ H w ] . CAP. § 1. 1. 5. τωι τείχει Β . LII Ι. 7. προσμίξαντες codd. § 2 . 1. 9. περικλείσασθαι Β IMC. 1. 10. καΐ del. H w || igayovTa C L || τώι πλοίωι Β . 11. 12—13. των Α θ η ν α ί ω ν del. S t : πρώτον post των Άθ. habet Β . 1. 13. έν τφ κ. [καϊ μυχφ] H u post Bothium : έν τφ κοίλφ μυχφ C : έν τώι κ. καϊ μυχώι reliqui codd.; [κοίλφ καϊ] H w Anal. cr. p. 10 cl. c. 4, 4. 1. 14. prius καϊ del. Bdh. 1. 15. <έπτά>' 'έπειτα coni. H w . 1. 16. vavs των 'Αθηναίων del. H w : ναΰϊ ήδη C L XVI. 1. 17. έξώθονν Β . CAP. L I I I § 1. 50 1. 2. vavs των Συρακοσίων Μ . 1. 7. § 2 . 1. 9. ταυττ) om. omnes praeter B . Χουσιν coni. H u . παρεβόήθη Tfl. 1. 11. έκβάΧ- § 3 . 1. 15. καϊ Seio-avTes om. C || καϊ del. H w . 1. 18. διέσωισάν 1». 1.19. κατά το στρατόττ€δον deleri iussit H w || δέ om. C L IVI: δέ operas ΤΛ || εϊκοσι as C L ΤΛ. Cf. c. 31, 4 1. 23. Β. CRITICAL NOTES 31η § 4 . 1. 22. Ιμιτρήσ-αι βουλόμ€νοι, ut puerile emblema, eiecit Weidner probante H w . 1. 25. τ ή ν νανν del. Bothe Bdh H w H u . 1. 26. Vulgo legitur άντεμηχανησαντό r e (re om. St cum D) σβεστηρια κωλύματα; machinamenta ad ignem restinguendum reddit Valla, sed κωλύματα impedimenta sunt, non subsidia restinguendis ignibzes. H i n c aut prorsus delendam vocem aut ττροκαλύμματα legendum censet K r ; et substantive quidem σβεστηριον legitur apud Arrian. Anab. 11 19, 8 σβεστηριο ν τ$ φλο-γϊ έττέφερον et Plut. Cam. c. 34, 5 ούδεν ακος ουδέ σβεστηφιον 'έχοντες τταρεσκευασμένον. Equidem r e transposito et καϊ (quod facile ante κωλύ­ ματα per lipographiam excidere potuit) restituto videor lucem attulisse loco i m p e d i t o : σβεστηρια sunt subsidia restinguendis ignibus, κωλύματα impedimenta ne probe accede7'et navis oner aria (τό μή ττροσεΧθεΐν ^γγι)? TVV όλκάδα). Scilicet καϊ ante κωλύματα omisso per incuriam, re quoque aut traiectum est post άντεμηχανησαντό aut plane intercidit. καϊ τταύσαντες τήν φ λ ό γ α post τήν όλκάδα transponi iussit Bdh. 1. 28. τήν φλόya omnes praeter B . CAP. LV § 1. 1. 2. λαμ,πράδ codd. S t : λαμπρώς coni. Kr. CI. || καϊ om. B. 1. 5. iv τταντϊ δη ήσαν, in summa consilii inopia, maximo timore, versabantur, quod plus est quam ήθύμουν coni. H w cl. X e n . Hell, ν iv 29 έν τταντϊ ήσαν μή λελοιδορημένος ύπό 'Αγησι­ λάου εϊη, Aristides I p . 312 έν τταντϊ elvai καϊ ά^ωνιαν, Plat. Sympos. p . 194 A eS καϊ μάλ' αν φοβοΐο καϊ έν τταντϊ ε'ίης, Euthyd. ρ. 3 ο χ Α &ν παντϊ έγενόμην ύττο απορίας, sed plenius de rep. IX p . 579 Β 'έτι αν έν τταντϊ κάκου εϊη \\ τ)δη Β . 1. 7. στρατιάς codicum corr. Portus. § 2 . 1. 9. δή coni. Gertz. 1. 10. καϊ ναυσϊ καϊ ϊττττοις ς χ καϊ μεγέθει c Μ H u . 1. 11. Ισχνούσαις post Dukerum H u ; έχονσ-αις codd. 1. 12. πολιτ. μεταβ. τι διάφορον coni. H w . 1. 13. Kpei €λ€υθ€ροΰσ-θαι coni. H w || έπενεγκεΐν X E K. 1. 18. νπο om. C. φόβωΊΏΐΜ. § 3 . 1. 2 1 . μόνον codd.: corr. St || verba ά λ λ α καΐ—αυτοί 5 2 αΰ μόνοι om. 3VI. 1. 22. μόνον codd. corr. Madvig. 1. 23. [μετά] coni. Mueller-Struebing. 1. 24. γινόμενοι C. 1. 26. [T€] coni. K r || |>fyos] coni. K r St. 1. 28. δ χ λ ο υ coni. K r H w Si CI St H u ; \oyov codd.; frWoyov coni. Heilmann. 1. 29. ξυστάντος vel simile participium post του excidisse putat St. CAP. LVII § 1. 1. 2. Σικελία K r H u . 1. 4. ξυνδιασ*ώισ*οντ€5 Β.* ξυνδιασώσαντες Β C ΒΧ. 1. 5. έπϊ Συρακούσαις Bauer K r St H u ; [επί Συρακούσας] coni. CI H w . 1. 7. ώς έκάστοις της ξυντυχίας— 'έσχεν c . C M H u , q u i j t a reddit ut quibusque aut propter utilitatem aut necessitate acciderat, ut id Us contingeret aut ut participes fierent; ws 'έκαστο*...'έσχεν K r ; 'έκαστοι—'έσχεν Β : έκαστοι 'έσχον Bhm. § 2 . 1. 10. έπιόντες coni. Kr. Weidner. 1. 13. οΐ pro oi M . coni. K r H w . § 3 . 1. 16. αυτονόμου coni. CI § 4. 1. 18. Μ. 1. 20. τελείς oVres Β , 5 3 Madvig; αυτοί St 2 . 1. 24. 1. 11. έπιχρώμενοι coni. 1. 14. [Έστίαιαν οίκουντες] || είσι δέ καί οΐ C. καί φόρου ΰιτοτ€λών seel. St. 1. 19. Στυρεΐς Τηΐοι C ; Τήιοι L Μ . 1. 21. φόρου ούχ υπο­ μεν post φόρου addit H w |( [αυτόνομοι] coni. μόνοι ξυνέσποντο coni. S t 1 ; αυτόνομοι ξυν€ίΐΓοντο 'Αθηνών coni. Bk. 1. 26. re C L Μ . § 5 . 1. 27. [αύτοϊβ] coni K r . 1. 30. < T O C S > addidi contra c o d d . ; falso enim Stahlius codici ΒΪ tribuit. 1. 31. καί άντικρυς coni. Boehmius : καταντικρύ libri quod apud Atticos nonnisi loci notionem habere docet Poppo. § β. 1. 32. κατά (κατ' C) 'έχθος libri. C. Β CI B h m ; 'έψερον c. cett. P p K r St H u . § 7. 1. 39. δέ Β . 1. 43. 1. 36. Iir^epov οι 'Αθηναίοι omnes praeter O. § 8 . 1. 49. 4κ Ν α υ π ά κ τ ο υ om. omnes praeter B : έν Ναυπάκτω om. Β . H i n c έν Ναυπάκτω έκ Ναυπάκτου coni. CI. probante H u d i o : < οι > εκ Ναυπάκτου [και] coni. K r ; ol έν Ναυπάκτφ κτέ. coni. H w . § 9. 1. 54. *yap et 1. 57 ώφελίας om. omnes praeter B . Β. CRITICAL NOTES 319 1.65. ουν pro ούΊϋΖ, 1. 59. del iroXcptovs: λειπομένους Β . 5 4 1. 60. feVat εΐωθότες omnes praeter B . 1. 65. εποίκου* Β Ι) Ικόντας c. Β K r CI S t ; άκοντας C L ΒΛ, quod neque cum μετά μισθού neque cum εκούσιος στρατεία Ι. 53 congruit. § 1 1 . 1. 70. Μεταπόντιοι καΐ θούριοι coni. St. 1. 72. κατειλημμένοι c. Reiskio CI St pro vulgato κατειλημμένων} ad quod των θουρίων καΐ Μεταποντίων cum Heilmanno subaudire molestum e s t : κατειληφότων temptat K r . 1. 73. καΐ om. Β || Σικελιωτών C L : om. Xtt. 1. 74. '^εστάϊοί re c. Β H u . CAP. LVIII § 1. 1. 1. Συρακουσσίοι Β . 1. 3. oi οίκοϋντες C. 1. 4. ήσυχαξόντων om. C || έπέκεινα C L M ; έπέκειινα Β . § 2 . 1.6. μεραίοι pro Ίμεραΐοι Τ/Ζ. 1.7. μορίου del. H w . § 3 . 1. 9. €V om. Β . 1.10. Αωριεΐς Μ || αυτόνομοι oi R e i s k e ; 5 5 οι αύτ. πάντες libri; οί del. Bk K r CI S t : oi < αυτοί > αυτόνομοι coni. Bhm. 1. 15. prius δέ om. C || verba δύναται...€Ϊναι non legit S, del. L . Dindorf CI St H w Si Bhm-Widmann. § 4 . 1. 24. ό oXKos B : άλλος cett. 1. 27. TC om. C L Μ || verba καΛ.,.ησαν om. C ; οτι yap εν Β ; [re] 7roAecos [καί...^σαι>] coni. H u . CAP. LIX § 2 . 1. 5. re ofo* codd. corr. K r || καΐ οι ξΰμμαχοι accessit e Β. 1. 6. άγώρα omnes praeter Β . 1. 8. δέ τέ C. 1. 9. τοσούτο Β . 1. 10. καθ* εκάτερα L Vfl; κακάτερα C. 1. 11. ε'κλειον Α Β G Μ . § 3 . 1. 12. τό στόμα om. C 56 CAP. LX § 1. 1. 1. άπόκλεισιν Β Μ Δ Ε Ο . § 2 . 1. 11. των ανω C. 1. 12. oorov v u l g o : ώς coni. H e r w ; οϊο'ν τ€ del. Bdh. 1. 13. άσθίνοΰσιν Β : άσθενέσι C Μ . 1. 15. πάσα$ Ο !• ΓΛ || απλήρωτοι coni. Bdh. 1. 16. ίσβιά#wres L· ΓΛ. § 3 . 1. 24. ηλικία* μ€τ4χων del. Herwerden [Philippi]: άλκης μετέχων coni. Gertz. § 4 . 1. 26. Iir*: is coni. K r . 1. 28. έπεβίβαξον coni. H w 5 7 II ώ$: Οσα Β , ώς sscr. Β . 1. 29. καπό r . διανοίας coni. Marchant. APPENDIX § 5 . 1. 30. τ € : rare C. ON THE έτοιμα Β L Xtt. 1. 3 1 . TEXT καΐ om. B . 1. 36. CAP. LXI § 1. 1. 1. στρατιώται om. C. 11. 4—5. verba Ικάστοιε... r o t s 7ro\€|Jt,iois seel. S t 2 : IKCCC-TOIS retinet H w ; έκάστωι Β . Ι. 5. της πολέμιας sc. ~γης coni. Gertz. 1. 6. 'έσται coni. H w . § 3 . 1.16. [καΐ] coni. P p . § 1. 1.18. παρεσκβυά^σθε Β corrupte. νμίν Β L KE. CAP. LXII 1. 7. § 2 . 1. 9. oxXos cS: δχλφ coni. H w . c. cod. Ven. CI. H w . § 3 . 1. 14. χ ρ ή Β ; μη C Χι ΒΛ 1. 15, δή om. C L Μ . § 4 . 1. 20. Ή Γ US || || 1. 13. πρόσφορος αντινανπη^ησαι kav Β . 1. 21. φαίνηται Β X X U. έσομένης Β , οΰσ-ης sscr. Β . Β. 1. 22. έτπίχεί CAP. LXIII § 1. 1. 5. άξιον Ο 1Μ Μ || φ> C L Μ . 1. 9. υ/ui» l i b r i : corr. Bk. 1. 6. § 3 . 1. 15. ol CI». 1. 17. ημών D ; υμών cett. [ού/c Ιλασσον] CI. 1. 2 1 . es δ4 coni. Rsk. 1. 22. 1. 23. πολύ ·π·λ€ίον del. K r [ H w St 2 Si]. πολέμου Β . 1. 20. τό μ,ή Β . § 4 . 1.24. δικαίωδ...μή καταιτροδ£δοτ€; δικαίως αν...μη καταπροδίδοτε(καταττροδίδωτ€Έ) libri; δικαιώσατβ..,μή καταττροδώόν αι coni. Bhm [ H w H u Sitzler]; δικαιουσαν coni. S t ; τι πταίουσαν W i d m a n n ; Χιπαροϋσαν, obsecrantem H u ; δικαίως < άνταιτοϋσ > ew Gertzius; δικαίως άν.,.μη καταπροδιδοΐτε soloece Mdv, δικαίως ab imperativo alienum esse cum Poppone ratus, ' qui enim iubetur δικαίως μη προδιδόναι, simul iubetur αδίκως προδιδόναι \ 1. 28. alterum καΐ om. Β . 1. 29. {>μ.€Τ€ρα om. WE. 1. 30. έτερων coni. CI {j ρύμης coni. Naber. CAP. LXIV § 1 . 1. 2. δέ coni. CI || ημών C L Μ α ; ηύμων Β . 1. 7. τ ένθένδε Β . 1. 8. έπέκεινα C. || πλευσουμένονς Α Β Ο H u . Vide Stahl ζ)//. Gr, Tkuc. p . 6 3 . 1. 9. ύμων Β . 1. 12. έπί coni. K r || ^νησθε Μ. 1. 13. οια Χ.: οία ΤΛ. Β. CRITICAL NOTES § 2 . 1. 16. τ€ om. Β . 1. 17. Trefos coni. Kr. 1. 18. 6 o [καΐ vtjes] coni. B d h ; καϊ Ιππψ coni. Gomperzius || ή om. libri. 1. 22. αύτωι C L· Μ ; έαντωι Β . CAP. LXV § 1. Gertz. 1. 1. τοσάδε Β ; τοιαύτα coni. H w . 1. 7. re πολλά C. § 2. Β 1VE. 1. 9. κατφύρσωσαν καϊ H C || dv del. H w . O 1. 11. 'έτοιμα πάντα Β . CAP. § 1. 1. 5. 1. 5. αύτοΐς coni. 1. 10. 'έχηι LXVI αύτων otfrcos Β H w CI St Bhm Si. § 2 . 1. 10. eVeira δέ d Β . 1.11. Ιίέλοποννήσου re καϊ Β . 1. 12. τ η ν [ήδη] C 1 : ήδη τήν coni. H w . 1. 16. ηδη om. 6 1 omnes praeter Β . § 3 . 1. 17. ω : ων Β . 1. 18. κόλονσθωσι C Μ Ρ || τό ye λοιπόν Β . 1. 20. τόΊΝΙ; τω coni. Heilmann || ατυχή· ματος coni. H w . CAP. LXVII § 1. 1. 1.· υμών libri. 1. 2. υπάρχων C. 1. 3. * άντβτολμήσαμζν coni. Weidner H u . 1. 4. καϊ om. M . 1. 5. τό κρατίοττουβ etvat libri C I ; το del. Rsk K r S t : του κρατ'ιστου* elvai coni. K r Sitz CI St H u : τό κράτιστονς etvai H w CI Bhm. 1. 7. τ α δέ ιτολλά—IXiris om. C L Μ . Cf. c. 51 1. 2 1 . § 2 . 1. 12. irpos ϋκαστον Β : πρό$ την έκάστην C Χι Μ : πρό$ τ^ν έκάστην <τέχνην> coni. H u . 1. 19. αϋτοϊς Β || αύτων A C F ; έαυτων Β ; αύτώι Ε G Βϊ. § 3. 1. 24. έσόμβναι C. 1. 25. ραστα C. § 4 . 1. 31. άποκινδυνεύσει codd. em. Duker. μενοι Μ . 1. 33. 7roto0?'rat C ΕΛ Β Γ . Β 62 1. 32. /3ία£ό1. 34. πράξοντ€$ c Μ ε α. CAP. LXVIII § 1. 1. 1. 7τώ$ ΒΛ corrupte || αταξία C. 1. 2. atfrV Β . 1. 9. 4κγ€νησόμ€νον c Β CI St Si B h m : έγγενησόμενον cett. 1. 10. καϊ om. D, del. Rsk K r CI St Τ. VII || pro ττου Bdh coni. πολύ. 21 APPENDIX ON THE TEXT § 2 . 1. 12. €i κατώρθωσ-ctv del. H w . 1. 17. fytws coni. Hw. 1. 18. πραξάντωρ ημών Β |j dp C. 1. 19. τού$ dk Β || τ€ om. C ; re καϊ Β ϊ || καρπού μέρη < ψ > coni. K r : καρπον 6 3 μένψ Β . 1. 23. ώφελοΰσιρ omnes praeter B . CAP. § 2. 1. 7. LXIX βσος coni. H w . 1. 8. ήδη ?jp C L Xtt. 1. 9. [κα(] H u . 1. 11. ^pya Β Ϊ || fri om. X. M . 1. 12. αΰτοϊδ del. L . Dindorf St Si 1. 14. ονομαστά del. P h i l i p p i : καΐ αύτούβ όνομαστί del. St 2 Si 1. 17. άτιμάζειρ X L K Ι. 18. αύτεπιτάκτου coni. Naber. 1. 20. OPTOS C L ΒΛ. 1. 21. δοκεΐν TIPOL Μ || [diroLep ap] καίπερ ύφ* coni. Bdh. 1. 23. προσφερόμερα Β . § 3. 1. 26. ή καΐ coni. H u ; ή Β ; και C L Xtf; $ ουκ coni. H w . 64 § 4 · 1· 32. E0'5i7Aios C L· Μ . 1. 36. [καΐ] coni. K r || ιταραλ€ΐφθ4ντα C L 3 E S Dionys; de Thuc* iud. c. 26 K r : καταM λειφθέρτα c. Β C I : παραληφθέρτα Gr: καταληφθέρτα c. D et Valla St Bhm K r 2 ; ττεριλειφθέρτα coni. Bk B d h ; καΐ TOV κ. δι^κττλουν expunxit H w . Saepissime perturbata sunt ει et η in codd. praecipue in formis έλείφθην et έλήφθηρ. * § 1 . 1. 1. προ€ί-αραΎΟμ€Ρθί Dionys. librarii vitio; irpoe^apayaΎόμεροί coni. CI. 1. 6. άμα del. K r : αύτοΚ ά^α omnes praeter B. 1. 7. ιταρ€βοήθ€ΐ ex Dionysio scripsit Arn CI S t 2 ; παραβοηθεϊ C Μ ; παραβοηθηι Β quod recepit K r St 1 . CAP. LXX § 2 . 1. 11. οι άλλοι omitt. Β Μ ; καϊ ol άλλοι Ξ Dionys.; καΐ om. Β C ; και αυτοί οΙ'ΑΘ. coni. Rauchenstein. 1. 15. κλήσεις Β C ; κλάσεις G Μ . 1. 16. τώρ £. H w . 1. 17. ην η α Β C1 S i ; ή cett. codd. K r H u Bhm. 65 § 3. 1. 22. δποι coni. Bdh. 1. 25. οτε C L Dion. § 4 . 1. 30. άπέλειπορ C. 1. 31. έκβολαι Δ Β Γ Μ 1. 32. r d s del. H w || διέκπλου Β . 1. 33. ώ* ^τυχον Β . φνγεΐρ L SX Dion. § 6 . 1. 37. άφθόροις coni. K r 1. 38. οι €ΐΓΐβάται del. Pluygers έμβαίρειρ coni. H w . § 6, 1. 48. έφθ^ορτο || || Dionys. 1. 34. &r' αύττ^ del. H w . els C L Μ 1. 39. Dion. H a l . ; φθέγγοντο Β. Β. CRITICAL NOTES 323 § 7 . 1. 48. η om. C L M ! Dion. 1. 49. η βοή Dionysius || τ€ Β D i o n . ; om. C L M . 1. 50. φιλονεικίαν libri. 1. 52. 4ιτιβοώντ€ς et 1. 53 περί temere del. Bdh. 1. 54. αντιλαμβά­ νεσθε Dion. 1.56. έκαστου ΤΛ Dion. || νικήσαντες Dion. 66 § 8 . 1. 57. [προς] $ri coni. K r . 1. 58. 6V άνά^κψ Β contra consuetudinem loquendi Thucydideam, fortasse ad sermonem variandum (in § 6 enim κατ' ανάγκην scribitur) substitutum {Hude). 1. 61. St* ολίγου ιτόνου c. Β S Dion. S t C I : 6V oXiyou c. C l i 1>I K r H u qui πόνου ex glossemate χρόνου corruptum esse posse censet. 1. 62. άποχωροϋσιν C L M . 1. 63. d excidit in Β || [ Α θ η ν α ί ο ι ] ci. Duker [CI H w St Si B h m ] . 1. 65. Ζχουσιν Μ . CAP. LXXI § 1. 1. 4. ξύντασιν coni. Duker || φιλονεικων libri. frt coni. Gertz. 1. 5. ή δ η : § 2 . 1. 7. yap ηδη Β . 1. 10. δι' αυτό coni. Bk, διότι H u . Post διά τό vv. excidisse putat άνώμαλον Br, ά^χόθεν Rauchenstein, ayX άναπαυομένους coni. Rauchenstein. 1. 18. αΰτοΐβ Ή ρ α κ λ ε ι C L 1VI; Ήράκλεία Β || ταύτη τη ημέρα coni. H u . 1. 22. σφίσι coni. H w . § 3 . 1. 25. [ούκ]4τι coni. K r . 1. 33. των 'Αθηναίων del. H w . § 4. 1. 38. o£ coni. Matthiae, ol δ' H w deleto και, CAP. LXXIV § 1. 1. 3. [καϊ eimSij] καϊ u>s coni. S t ; cos G- IMC; cos Β L . 1. 5. συσκενάσωνται IMC. 1. 7. αναλαβόντββ habet 3 C non M, άναλαβόντας ut Stahlius auctor est || ircpl το σ-ώμ,α del. H w . § 2 . 1. 10. προσεξελθόντες C Ι · IMC. 1. 12. άπεφάρΎνυσαν Hu. 1. 13. τω? ποταμών C L ΒΛ. 1. 15. vavs del. H w . 1. 16. άφεΤΚον DE. CAP. LXXV § 1. 1. 2. τ ω om. B . § 2 . 1. 6. καθ' ϊν: εκείνο ci. Si || των πεπpayμένων coni. C I ; post μόνον lacunam notat St. 1. 7. πεζοί v. πάσας πεζοί coni. Rsk. § 3 . 1. 15. [rots £ώσι] vel τοΐς δρώσι coni. CI, rots απιοΰσι H w ; rots έζωυσί Naber, TO?S σφς ν . σωσί H u ; r. ηβωσι ν . δρμωσι Widmann. § 4 . 1. 19. που TIS IMC. 1. 21. 4s oVov c. Β K r CI S t : contra praepos. es per dittographiam syllabae -es praecedentis irrepsisse putat Hudius cl. VI c. 70, 3. 1. 22. προΚείποι C L· IMC. 1. 23. [ολίγων] K r St || επορθιασμων coni. Gtz || υπολειπόμενοι c. C L I C Hu. M 1. 25. έμπλησθεν coni. H w . 1. 29. έν τώι αφανεΐ Β . Cf. I c. 42, 2, c. 138, 3 || μή τι C L IMC. § 6 . 1. 32. ηκεσαν coni. H w . 1. 35. πάντες 'έφερον C I* IMC. 1. 36. '^καστοδ χ ρ ή σ ι μ ο ν Β : [έκαστος] χρήσιμον K r ; κατά, το χρήσιμον C L M : κατά τδ <σωμα> coni. Gertz, cl. c. 74, ι ; [κατά τδ] χρ. H u , qui v e r b a /caret τδ dittographia litterarum Β. CRITICAL NOTES proxime antecedentium (κατό, κατά τό) vel alio quodam modo orta et in archetypo Vatic, in 'έκαστοι correcta esse suspicatur. 1. 37. αυτοί T€ καΐ τά σ. C, unde Hu efficit αυτοί ye καΐ τά σ.; αυτοί re τά σ. α Χ. AS; αυτοί τά <τ. Β. 1. 38. coni. Gertz |j η αλλ?; αίκία, καΐ [ή] Ισομοιρία Hu. L 42. καϊ η del. Dobr, η del. St 1 ; [/cai ij Ισομοιρία των κ,] Sitz I! post αίκία lacunam statuunt Hw St 2 || Ισομοιρία C Χι US. 1. 43. ro μετά πολλών del. Bdh Hu H as Β L [G]. 1. 45. re reX. L. 1. 46. άφίκατο coni. Bdh; άφικτο C ; άφΐκτο Β ; άφΐκτο Χι AS. § 7. 1. 47. [r^]'EXX^w/cy H u ; r # d e l . S, τω coni. Pp. 72 1. 48. του: τους AS || αυτούς om. AS. 1. 49. ζυναπιέναι C. 1. 50. παιώνων C L Μ . 1. 52. ?re£bi>s δέ C Χι AS || cti'rtβατων Β. 1. 53. προσχόντας C I* I C M. CAP. LXXVI 1. 5. < e 0 ' > eVatfrots coni. Meineke. 1. 6. ώφζλ&ν τι, ΚαίΒ. CAP. LXXVII § 1. 1. 2. ή'δη: eJ δ?} coni. Bothe. 1. 3. έσώιθησαν Ιι. 1. 4. καταμέμψασθαι Ο L AS. 1. 5. aurous A B. 1. 6. KaKoiraOCais AS H u : κακοπαθείαι* Β Kr CI St. V. Meisterh.'2 p. 42. § 2 . 1. 11. T€ om. C L AS. 1.12. έωροϋμαι IS F HU. 1. 13. δςδιητημαι Α Β AS. § 3 . 1. 15. θαρσεΐα Ε Γ Ο Μ. Ι. 16. ήδη Β δη suprascr. 73 || φοβουσαι AS; φοβοΰσαι τάχ' αν coni. Schuetz, legit St 2 . 1. 17. εύτύχηται libri. § 4 . 1. 23. 0eoO libri; em. Kr. 1. 25. οί Ο Ι. Αϊ; οΐ ol Β. 1. 27. καταπεπληχθαι Β. § 6. 1. 33. αν om. Ο L US. § β. 1. 36. ϊστω coni. Hw. 1. 38. του libri. 1. 40. όχυρωι C Χι US || ττροπέμπετς C I· AS. 1. 41. €ΐρημ€νον del. Hw. 1. 42. άμα coni. Rsk; άλλα libri: <καί> άλλα coni. Kr. § 7 . 1. 42. ^ C L M . 1. 46. σωθείητε C AS; διασωθείητε 74 Β ortum fortasse ex proximo διaφύyητe, 1. 50. πεπτωκυαν Hu. 326 APPENDIX ON THE TEXT CAP. LXXVIII § 2 . 1.6. ττλαισίφ: διπλασίωι C ΧΜ ΤΛ, ήγουμ€νον om. C Χι ΤΛ || τ ό : του C. 1. 8. 1. 9. irXeto-Tov: ψιλόν eoni. K r . 1.7. πρώτον μ^ν επόμενοι* Β . § 3 . 1. 10. [τ€] K r H u ; 7e coni. Sauppe. 1. 13. των £. Β . 1.11. έν B . § 4 . 1. 17. irpoeX06vT€S <*; πρελθόντε* ΤΛ i.e. προσελθ6ντε$; προσελθόντες Β C Χι. 1.20. πρωΐ!»ΤΛ. 1.23. οίκιών TC: οίκείων Β Ο Χι. 1. 25. e. πολλούς σταδίου* aut £ττΙ 7τολι5 requirit H w . § δ . 1. 26. J om. Β . 1. 27. τοσούτφ coni. H w . την 4ν τ φ irpoV0€V {Εμπροσθεν ΤΛ) del. H w . 1. 28. § 6 . 1. 32. προψεσαν Β C Χι ΤΛ. 1. 33. αυτών ΤΛ. έκάτεροι C L Μ || έσ-ηκόντιξόν τ€ καΐ irapCirireuov del. H w . 1. 35. CAP. LXXIX § 1 . 1.1. πρωί: Χι; πρωί ΤΛ. 1. 2. post irpos τόν λόφον έλθεΐν libri; em. K r . 1. 3. εΰρον B C Χι IKE. § 2. 1. 9. § 3 . 1. 11. coni. H w . έξικνοΰντο coni. H w . 1.10. Se : yap B . 1. 12. 1. 14. yap %τι Β . άπεχώρουν Β K r CI. οϊα Β . 1. 13. ύφ* § 4 . 1.16. καΐ 6 Τύλιππος Β . 1. 18. αδ om. C Χι Μ . 1. 20. και κάκεΐνοι Β . αποτενχιοϋντε* § δ. Ο ΤΛ. 1. 24. 1. 2 1 . ταϋτα omnes praeter B . 1. 30. τρεψόμενοι Β . Χι || προσέβαλαν CAP. LXXX § 1 . 1. 1. τφ Αημοσθένει ΤΛ. 1. 3. τ€ om. Β . 1. 4. απορία C Χι XVI. 1. 7. καύο-avTas Β Χι ΤΛ ; καύσαντες c Ο H u cl. c. 74» *· 1· 9· ή' ^ ; ?t L· ΒΛ j τ| Β ; y Ο ; τ? $ K r coni. § 2. 1. 12. § 3 . 1.15. Cl St H u Si. μέρος om. B . αυτοί C. 1.19. άιτο del. R s k D o b r ; seclusit § 4 . 1. 21. w(nr€p l i b r i : δσπερ (vel 6περ) Dobr H u . 1. 22. του δε coni. K r ; τό τε Β . 1. 24. τό πλέον K r H u c. C Χι Μ ; cf. c. 48, 4 || διεσπάσθη coni. Gertz. Β. CRITICAL NOTES 327 § 6 . 1. 27. Έ λ ω ρ ί ν η ν Β ; Έλωρίνην C ΒΧ Α Ε G. 1. 28. « r l : παρά L Μ . 1. 30. δια τψ μ. Β , sed cf. I C. ιοο, 3 . 1. 32. μετεπέμψαντο usitatius medium Β suprascr. μετέπεμψαν. § β . 1. 33. έττεί C. [ποταμόν] coni. H w . 1. 35. T€ om. C I i M . 1. 38. Έρινέον Β . 1. 37. CAP. LXXXI § 2 . 1. 9. ώδ Β ΪΚΕ; ώσπερ cett. || προσέμιξαν libri. 1. 10. [ofrrt] H w ; ίοΰσι K r ; χωροϋσι C ; τ* οΰσι ΤΛ. 1. 11. TOTC: re Β . 1. 13. Ιππείς Β G. 1. 14. ήδη Β δή suprascr. § 3 . 1. 15. έμπροσθεν Μ ut c. 78» 5 II εκατόν καϊ 7Γ. Β ; centum quinquaginta V a l l a ; τρεις (yf pro ρ') καϊ coni. St. 1.16. T€: rt coni. Dobr. 1. 18. σωτήρων Β . Ι. 19. αναγ­ κάζονται B L M O ; ανα~/κά,ζωνται C, unde # coni. K r . 1. 11. § 3 . 1. 14. αυτούς Β hie et c. 83, 4 ; c. 84, 4. 1. 15. eVβαΚΚόντες Β {sic). 1. 16. alterum άοττ/δα* del. H w : <εϊκοσι καϊ> τεσσάρας coni. K r . 1. 19. αυτόν ΧΜ TO. \\ ry αύτζ ή· coni. H w H u ; αύτή(ή τή(ι) ή. C L Μ ; ταύτψ τήι ήμ, άφικν, Β . 1. 20. [TOP τοτα/ΛΟ;>] H w . 1. 2 1 . καθεΐσε C ΧΜ (καθείς Β ) ΧΚΕ; εκαθεΐσε Β , 3 28 APPENDIX ON THE TEXT CAP. LXXXIII § 1. 1. 6. δ' < ό > coni. K r . 1. 7. π ά λ ι ν del. K r . § 2 . 1. 8—9. [eivcu έτοϊμος] coni. H w . 1. 9. ύπό ΒΛ \\ ανάλωσαν libri. 1. 12. μέχρι δ' od Β : od del. L . Dindorfius Praef. ad Diod. Sic. p . L V I I I (ed. F . Vogel 1888) cl. ι c. 137, 1 μέχρι irXoOs yivyrai. 80 § 4 . 1.19. ιτορ€ύ€σθαι Β . έπαιώνισαν libri. 1.20. TC del. K r . 1. 2 1 . CAP. LXXXIV § 1. 81 1. 5. άκοντίζοντοβ coni. H w . § 3 . 1.17. αθρόοι H u . 1.19. δορατέοις: φορτίοι* coni. N a b e r : ξίφεσιν vel simile aliquid pro σκ€υ€σ·ιν coni. H w . § 4. 1. 23. τούβ om. Μ || ασμένως Β , sed cf. IV c. 21, I . § 6. 1. 27. T€ om. C Longinus irepl ύψους c. 38. CAP. LXXXV § 1. 1. 7. χρήσ-ασθαι c. Β St C l ; χρήσθαι vulgo K r H u Bhm. § 2 . 1. 10. μετ' atfroO ΤΒΛ. 1. 12. ξυγκομίσας C X» M . 1. 13. τ ή ν φυλακήν del. K r . 82 § 4 . 1. 22. Σικ€λικ<ρ del. D o b r K r St H w H u . 1. 23. προσ-βολαΐς om. C I · M . CAP. § 1. 1. 4. LXXXVI λαβόντες L IH. § 2 . 1. 8. < τ α ΰ τ η ν > ex -τατην addidit Madvig, cf. c. 42, 4 : in 3W foeda est rasura. 1. 9. του Τνλίππου Β solus. 1.11. τους άλλους άντιστpar^yους Xtt. § 3 . 1. 14. [ττ) νήσω καΐ] H w . coni. H u ; [άνδρας των Αακεδαιμονίων] 8 3 C. 1. 15. [των Λακεδαιμονίων] Hw. § 4 . 1. 20. δια τοϋτο om. cc. omnes praeter B . 1.23: τοιούτον 1. 25. δή om. C L M . 1. 27. πείσαντές r e C I · M . § 5 . 1. 31. ττάσ-αν Is αρετή ν Β S, om. C L M . In marg. Μ Schol. δια την ττασαν is αρετών νενομισμένην έπιτήδςνσιν δια τό ττασαν άρ^την νομίμως έπιτετηδςυκέναι, Β. CRITICAL NOTES CAP. LXXXVII § 1- 1. 4. καΐ ολίγω om. omnes praeter Β : pro spuriis habet Hu. 1. 5. ro wuiyos Β C 3 E M. 1. 7. e7r' άσθβνβίαι Β. § 2. 1. 10. %vvev7iveyμένων Β Μ. 1.11. τοιούτο L Ο Μ. 1. 13. Styet libri. 1. 15. τψ om. C L M . § 3 . 1. 17. γλν om. Β οί αθρόοι Μ. j| διητήθησαν Β Βϊ. 1. 18. § 4 . 1. 21. δέ κα* Β. 1. 22. efreiv Β. § 5. 1. 24. 'Ελληνικών del. Kr CI St Hu Pluygers Si Widmann. 84 § β. 1. 30. τό δη \eyo^GV0v coni. Mein. E N D OF CRITICAL NOTES INDICES I MATTERS II GRAMMAR III GREEK INDEX I MATTERS A ACARNANIA, Demosthenes on his voyage to Sicily touches at the coast of 31 2 ACARNANIANS, their motives for serving under the Ath. before Syracuse 57 το; A. darters on board the Ath. fleet in the last great battle at Syr. 60 4. See under Leucas ACHAEANS support the Peloponnesian fleet off their coast, as allies 34 2 ACHAIA (a region on the N . coast of Peloponnesus) 34 1, 8 AEGINA, an island in the Saronic Gulf, the second Ath. arma­ ment under Demosthenes mus­ ters at 20 2; sets sail thence 26 1; inhabitants of, serve at the siege of Syracuse 57 2 AENUS (an Aeolic city on the coast of Thrace east of the r. Hebrus), the inhabitants of, as subject allies of Athens, send forces against Syr. 57 5 AEOLIANS, the Boeotians, Les­ bians, Tenedians and Aenians are Aeolians 57 5 : the Aeol. serve under the Ath. at Sy­ racuse against Aeol. 57 5 AETOLIANS in the pay of Athens at Syracuse 57 9 AGATHARCHUS, commander of a Syracusan squadron sent out to intercept the Ath. convoys 25 1; commanded one wing of the Syracusan fleet in the last engagement in the Great Harbour 70, 1 AGis, son of Archidamus, K. of the Lac., fortifies Deceleia 19 1; continues there, making the conduct of the war his main object 27 4 AKRAGAS, on S. coast of Sicily, between Gela and Selinus, Lat. AGRIGENTUM mod. Gir- genti 58 1; the Akr. allowed no aids to Syrac. to pass through their territory 32 1; neutral in the Syrac. war 33 2, 58 1; disturbed by a faction favourable to Syracuse (46) which is expelled 50 1 AKRAION LEPAS, a strong po­ sition of the Syracusans, on the Athenian line of retreat 78 5; the Ath. try in vain to force it 79 1—3 ALEXARCHUS, commander of the Corinthian division of the troops sent to the aid of Sy­ racuse 19 4 ALICYAEI, a Sicel people 32 1; allies of Athens and Syracuse 57, 58 ALYZEIA, a city on the Acarnanian coast opp. Leucadia 31 2 AMBRACIA, three ships of, sent to aid Syracuse, arrive there INDEX 7 1 ; Ambraciot envoys sent from Syr. to the Sicilian states to announce the taking of Plemmyrium and urge them to send reinforcements 25 9 ; on their way back to Syracuse slain by the Sicels 32 2 AMBRACIOTS, among the Greeks who came to aid Syracuse 58 3 ; arrival of their expected re-inforcements 7 1 A M P H I P O L I S (an Athenian co­ lony on the N . E . b a n k of the r. Strymon, formerly called 'Εννέα οδοί), blockaded by Euetion an A t h . general 9 ANACTORIUM (on the mouth of the Ambracian gulf), taken by the Acarnanians and .occupied solely by them 31 2 ANAPUS (a r. of Sicily falling into the Great Harbour of Syracuse), country on its banks ravaged by the A t h . 42 6 ; ford of the 78 3 ANDROS (an island S.E. of At­ tica), its inhabitants subject and tributary to the Athenians 574 APOLLO, temple of, on Laconian coast, opp. Cythera 26 2 ARCADIANS serve at Syracuse in the pay of the Corinthians 19 4, 58 3 ; Mantineans and some other Arcadians serve under the Ath. at Syr. 57 9 A R C H O N I D E S , a king of the Si­ cels near Gela, died just be­ fore the arrival of Gylippus in Sicily 1 4 ARGOS in the Peloponnesus, Rhodes colonised from 57 6; Argive troops embark in the squadron of Charicles the Ath. to ravage the coast of Laconia 20 1, 2; 26 1; return home 26 3 ; the Argive paean 44 6 ; the motives of the Arg. for joining the Athenians against Syracuse 57 9 I MATTERS 333 ARISTON, a Corinthian, the best man in the Syracusan fleet for working a ship 39 2 ARTAS, a chief of the Messapian Iapygians 33 4 ASSINARUS, a r. of Sicily, where the division of Nicias was overtaken and all slain or made prisoners 84 2 ATHENIAN squadron, sent by Nicias, too late to intercept Gylippus 1 2 ; death of Ar­ chonides, a Sicel king, in­ jurious to their influence with the Sicels 1 4 ; state of A t h . works when Gylippus reaches Syracuse 2 3, 4 ; A t h . draw themselves up for battle 3 1 ; hear in contemptuous silence the demand of Gylippus that they should quit Sicily 3 1, 2; not led into action 3 3 ; next day lose Labdalum and its garrison and a trireme 3 4 , 5 ; foil Gylippus' advance by night against their wall on Epipolae, raise it higher and man the whole of their lines 4 2, 3 ; remove with their ships and a part of their forces to Plemmyrium, where they construct three forts 4 4, 5 ; the station there detrimental to their naval forces, from want of water and from the attacks of the Syrac. cavalry 4 6; send a squadron to in­ tercept the enemy's reinforce­ ments 4 7 ; repulse the Syracusans in an action between the works 5 2 ; in another action beaten 6 1 , 3 ; comple­ tion of their lines precluded 6 4 ; the A t h . aided by Perdiccas fail to recover Amphi­ polis 9 ; they receive a de­ spatch from Nicias 10—14; appoint two of his officers to act as his colleagues, till Demos­ thenes and Eurymedon should 334 INDEX come out 16 ι ; send Eurymedon immediately with ships and money 16 2; demand troops from the allies; sup­ plies etc. provided at Athens by Demosthenes 17 ι ; fit out a squadron to intercept aids from the Pelop. to Syracuse 17 2 ; send Charicles on an expedition round the Pelopon­ nesus with Demosthenes, to cooperate with him on his way to Sicily 20 1; Ath. at Syrac. during a naval combat (22) lose their three forts on Plemmyrium 23 1, 2 ; but defeat the Syrac. fleet 23 3, 4 ; blockaded in the Great Harbour 24 3 ; vessels with supplies for them intercepted on the coast of Italy by Syrac. squadron 25 1, 2 ; the Ath. destroy the stockade in front of the Syrac. docks 25 5 — 7 ; decide to send back Thracian mercena­ ries who came too late for the Sicilian expedition 27 1, 2; continued occupation of Deceleia disastrous to the A t h . 27 3—5 ; Athens a garrison 28 1, 2 ; various causes of the ex­ haustion of Ath. resources 28 3; they impose a five per cent, duty on sea-borne goods 28 4 ; send back the Dian Thracians 29, 30; A t h . at Syrac. induce the Sicels to attack reinforce­ ments on their march to Syra­ cuse 3 2 ; the result deters the Syracusans from attacking Nicias for the present 33 3 ; the second armament from Athens reaches Iapygia and Metapontium 33 4 ; stays at Thuria 33 6; the A t h . squadron at Naupactus engages the Co­ rinthian with much damage 34 3 — 8 ; in Italy they obtain aid from the Thurians 35 1 ; reach Petra 35 2; the Ath. I MATTERS at Syrac. are attacked on all sides by land and by sea 37—38 1; preparations next day against a renewal of the attack 38 2, 3 ; defeat of Ath. fleet with great loss 39—41; arrival of Demosthenes at Sy­ racuse 42 1; effect on the con­ tending parties 42 2; D e m . resolves to profit by this at once 42 3 ; and to attempt to recover Epipolae and capture the Syrac. counterwork, but failing of this to raise the siege and return home 42 4, 5 ; they ravage the valley of the Anapus 42 6 ; repulsed in their attack on the Syrac. counter­ work 43 1; grand night attack on Epipolae 43 2; at first suc­ ceeds 43 3—6; but the Ath. are put to flight by the Boeo­ tians 43 7 ; consequent per­ plexity and confusion 44 1— 7; a large part of the army are driven over the cliffs and perish 44 8; consultation of the Ath. commanders 47 1, 2; opinion of Demosthenes 47 3, 4 ; of Nicias, and the real as well as avowed grounds of it 48—49 1 ; removal to Thapsus or Catana proposed by Demosthenes and Eurymedon (49 2, 3), who, how­ ever, give way to Nicias 49 4 ; the A t h . generals, on the Syrac. preparing to attack them, determine to raise the siege 50 3 ; a lunar eclipse detains the army in its posi­ tion 50 4 ; complete defeat of the united Ath. fleet and death of Eurymedon 52; the Tyrrhe­ nians and A t h . by land defeat Gylippus 53 2, 3 ; the Ath. bring most of their ships safe to the camp and keep off and extinguish a Syracusan fireship 52 3, 4 ; utter despon- INDEX dency of the Ath. 5 5 ; enu­ meration of the subject and allied states whose troops served under the Ath. at Syrac. 5 7 ; A t h . council of war 60 ι ; they resolve to abandon their upper lines, form a small garrisoned camp for their stores and sick and man their fleet for a final effort to escape to Catana, or, failing of this, to re­ treat by land 60 2 ; they man their fleet 60 3, 4 ; the soldiers dispirited, yet eager for a de­ cisive engagement 60 5 ; ex­ horted by Nicias 61—64; trierarchs especially addressed by him 69 2; land forces ar­ rayed along the shore 69 3 ; the fleet stand out to break the bar of the harbour 69 4 ; overpower the Syracusan ships stationed there; the whole Syrac. fleet bears down upon them 70 2; description of the engagement 70 3—8; effects of the sight on the land-forces 71 1—5; total defeat of the A t h . fleet 71 5, 6 ; their case a parallel to that of the Lac. at Pylos 71 7; wish to retreat at once by night 72 2 ; an­ other attempt to retreat by sea proposed by Demosthenes 72 3 ; refused by the seamen; all determine on retreat by land 72 4 ; in consequence of false information (73 3, 4) they delay their retreat till third day 74 1; the remnant of their fleet carried off by the Syrac. 74 2 ; their retreat com­ mences 75 1 ; under depressing circumstances 74 2 — 5 ; great­ ness of the reverse 74 6, 7 ; they are consoled by Nicias 76 f.; order of retreat 78 1, 2 ; rout a body of Syrac. and ford the r. Anapus; harassed in their progress by the Syrac. horse I MATTERS 335 and light troops 78 3 ; march­ es and halting places on the 1st and 2nd days of their re­ treat 78 4 ; on the 3rd day being impeded return to their position of the previous night 78 6 ; on the 4th day attempt again to force the Syrac. po­ sition at Akraion Lepas 79 1 ; repulsed 79 2 ; defeat an at­ tempt to obstruct their progress from the defile 79 4 ; return into the plain, on 5th day's march incessantly assailed by the Syrac. 79 5 ; make little pro­ gress 79 6 ; they direct their flight towards the coast 80, [, 2; a false alarm causes Nicias* division to separate from that of Demosthenes, which fell behind in great dis­ order 80 3 ; they reach the shore and make for r. Cacyparis 80 4; pass it 80 5 ; attack on and surrender of the division of Demosthenes 81, 82 1, 3 ; Nicias' division reaches the r. Erineus 82 4 ; overtaken by the Syrac. 83 1 ; their over­ tures for capitulation rejected by the Syrac. 83, 2, 3 ; 300 break through the Syrac. guards by night 83 5 ; retreat continued 84 1, 2 ; they reach the r. Assinarus; confusion and carnage consequent on their attempt to cross it 84 3, 5 ; surrender of Nicias and cap­ ture of the remainder of the A t h . army 85 1, 2 ; disposal of prisoners ; refuge at Catana for all who escape 85 4 ; the prisoners placed by the Syrac. in the Quarries 86 2; their sufferings and scanty rations 87 1 ; after 70 days all sold except the Athenian, Siceliot and Italiot prisoners 87 2 ; total amount of prisoners 87 3 INDEX 336 Β Boeotarchs, Scirphondas, one of the, slain in pursuit of the Thracians 30 3 BOEOTIANS, the, send 300 hoplites in aid of Syracuse 19 3, 58 3 ; their troops the first to withstand the A t h . night at­ tack on Epipolae 43 7, 4 5 ; Boeotians engaged against Boeotians at Syracuse 57 5 C CACYPARis, a r. of Sicily S. of Syracuse 80 5 CAMARINA, on the Syracusans' victory, sends them a reinforce­ ment 33 1; the Camarinaeans enumerated among the allies of Syracuse 58 1; direction of the A t h . flight changed to­ wards C. 80 2 CARYSTIANS, the people of Carystus (mod. Karysto) in the S.W. of Euboea, by origin Dry opes, subjects and tribu­ taries of Athens, furnish a contingent against Syracuse 57 4 CAT AN A (mod. Catania^ a Chalcidian colony from Naxus, at the foot of Mount Aetna, for a time the head quarters of the Ath. 42 3) only a weak ally of A t h . 14 2 ; opinion of Demosthenes on the effect of wintering at C. 42 3 ; he advises the Ath. to retreat im­ mediately to 49 2 ; Catanaeans among the allied forces of A t h . against Syr. 57 1 1 ; provisions brought from C. by sea for Ath. at siege of Syr. 60 2 ; the Ath. purpose forcing their way out of the Great Harbour to C. but end by retreating in the direction opposite to that of the road to C. 80 2 ; I MATTERS C. a refuge for those Ath. who escaped from captivity in Si­ cily 85 4 CAULONIATIS (teiritory of Caulonia, a flourishing Achaean city on the E . coast of Bruttium) furnishes ship-timber to the Ath. armament in Sicily 25 2 C E N T O R I P E S (people of Centoripa) 32 1 CEOS, the inhabitants of, tribu­ tary allies of the Ath. 57 4 C E P H A L L E N I A (the largest is­ land in the Ionian sea), troops shipped at by Demosthenes 31 2 CEPHALLENIANS ξύμμαχοί αυτό­ νομοι of the Athenians 57 7 C H A L C I D I A N S , the Euboean, sub­ ject and tributary to Ath., serve at Syr. 57 4 CHALCIS TT]S ΈΙύβοΙας, an impor­ tant Ionic town, the mothercity of many colonies in Italy, Sicily and the peninsula of Chalcidice 29 2 CHARICLES, an Athenian gene­ ral, son of Apollodorus, sent with a second squadron of 30 ships to act against the coast of Laconia 20 1; together with Demosthenes ravages Epidaurus Limera 26 1; re­ turns home 26 3 CHIOS : five Chian ships in second A t h . expedition against Syr. 20 1 * the Chians, Ionians not , tributary to Athens but inde­ pendent allies, furnish ships 574 CHOERADES, islands off Tarentum, inhabited by Messapian Iapygians, allies of the Athe­ nians 33 4 CONON, an Athenian commander at Naupactus 31, 4, 5 CORCYRA (an island in the Ionic sea, opp. the coast of Chaonia in Epirus, mod. Corfu) the INDEX rendezvous for the second A t h . armament against Syracuse 26 2, 31 1; furnishes ships and heavy-armed troops 31 5; the armament leaves C. 33 3 ; the Corcyraean paean alarms the A t h . 44 6; the Corcyraeans allies of Athens against Corinth their parent and Syracuse their sister state 57 7 C O R I N T H I A N S : second detachment of C . galleys sails from Leucas 2 1 ; arrives at Syracuse 7 1; envoys from Syracuse to Corinth and Lacedaemon 7 3 ; the Corinthians prepare to send merchant vessels with troops to Syr. 17 3 ; prepare a squadron to keep in check the A t h . squadron at Naupactus 17 4 ; their troops sail for Syracuse 19 4 ; their naval squadron keeps the A t h . squadron at Naupactus in check 19 5, 31 4 ; Cor. envoys sent from Syr. to the Sicel states for aid in finishing the war 25 9 ; a Cor. transport destroyed 31 1; C. squadron off the promontory of Erineus supported by land forces 34 1: attacked, fight a drawn battle 34 3 — 6 ; peculiar construction of the Cor. ships 34 5 (adopted by the Syracusans 36 2); the Corinthians' idea of victory different from that of the A t h . 34 7 ; a Cor. master or pilot the best in the Syracusan fleet—his successful stratagem 39 2 ; Corinthians, the only people who went to Syracuse with ships and land forces; hired troops from Arcadia 58 3 ; occupy the centre in the last battle in the H a r bour of Syr. 70 1 ; prevail to have Nicias put to death 86 4 CRETE (island in the Aegean): T. VII I MATTERS 337 the Cretans serve as mercenaries against their own colonists the Geloans 57 9 CROTONIATIS (the territory of CROTON mod. Crotone, an Achaean colony in Magna Graecia on E . coast of Bruttium., founded B.C. 710 ex, tending across the peninsula from sea to sea) 35 1; the Crotonians forbid the march of the Athenian armament through their territory 35 2 CYRENAEANS: the people of Cyrene (mod. Ghrennah) most important Hellenic colony in Africa, furnish two triremes and pilots to the Pelop. expedition to Sicily 50 2 CYTHERA (mod. Cerigo, an island off the S.E. extremity of Laconia) a peninsula in Laconia opposite to, is occupied by the A t h . 26 2 ; the people of Cyth. serve under the A t h . against Syr. 57 6 D DECELEIA, site of, in Attica 19 2; Alcibiades renews his advice to the L a c . to occupy and fortify it 18 1 ; they do so 19 1; 20 1; 42 2 ; consequent losses and distress of the A t h . 27 3—28, 28 4, 42 2 D E M O S T H E N E S , son of Alcisthenes, appointed colleague t o Nicias 16 1; prepares for second expedition against Syr. 17 1; sails as far as Aegina where he awaits the return of Charicles 20 2 ; leaving Aegina cooperates with the squadron acting against the Peloponnese, and makes for Corcyra 26; destroys a transport at Pheia in Elis 31 1 ; ships hoplites from Zacynthus, Cephallenia, Naupactus and slingers 22 338 INDEX I and darters from Acarnania 31 2, 5 ; re-inforces Conon at Naupactus 31 5 ; crosses from Corcyra to the Iapygian pro­ montory, takes on board dar­ ters, and arrives at Metapontium 33 3 ; arrives at Thurium 33 4, 5 ; obtains a large rein­ forcement there 35 1; reaches Petra 35 2 ; arrives at Syra­ cuse 42 1; resolves to lose no time in attacking the counter­ work of the Syr. 42 3 ; repulse of his troops in the attempt 43 1; his grand night attack on Epipolae, at first successful, followed by total rout 43—44 8; urges immediate departure from Sicily, 47 3, 4 ; or else removal to Thapsus or Catana 49, 2, 3 ; most of the Acarnanian troops joined the expedition from attachment to him 57 10; with Menander and Euthydemus commands the fleet in the last great ac­ tion, attempts to force his way through the barrier of the H a r ­ bour 69 4 ; his proposal to at­ tempt retreat by sea rejected by the seamen 72 3, 4 ; his division on the retreat in the rear 78 2 ; it falls behind and is in disorder 80 3 ; overtaken and surrounded 81 2, 3 ; at­ tacked all day at length sur­ renders 81 4—82 3 ; Demo­ sthenes and Nicias judicially murdered by the Syracusans 86 2 ; their preservation de­ sired by Gylippus and the Lac. 86 2, 3 DIAN THRACIANS 27 ι ; Diitrephes appointed to take charge of them on their way home 29 1 DIOMILUS of Andros 43 4 DiPHiLUS, an Ath., engages the Corinthian fleet off' Erineus 34 ff, MATTERS dolphins (SeX^es), heavy weights of metal suspended from the yard-arm, to be let fall into an enemy's ship 42 2 DORIANS, hostility between the D . and Ionians 5 4 ; 57 2, 4 ; o p p . to Dorians in the A t h . and Syrac. ranks 57 8, 9 ; Do­ rian states of Sic. in alliance with Syr. 58 1, 3 DRYOPES, Carystus in Euboea settled by 57 4 Ε ECCRITUS, a Spartan, commands the first important succours from Lac. to Syr. 19 3 eclipse of the moon prevents the Ath. retreat from Syracuse by sea 50 4 EGESTA, a city of the Elymi in the N . W . of Sicily, inhabitants of, reckoned among the βάρ­ βαροι allies of the A t h . 57 11 E P I D A U R U S L I M E R A (mod. Paleo Monemvasia, a town on the E . coast of Laconia) its terri­ tory wasted by the A t h . 18 3 ; 26 1 EPIPOLAE, a table land adjacent to Syracuse 1 1 ; Gylippus' ascent of 2 3 ; state of A t h . lines on 2 4 ; Syrac. counter­ work on 4 1 ; defeat of the Syrac. on 5 2, 3 ; the A t h . de­ feated in second action there 6 2, 3 ; the Syrac. counterwork carried beyond the A t h . lines on 6 4 ; Demosthenes' design on it 42 4 ; first attack with engines repulsed 43 1 ; D e ­ mosthenes' grand night attack on at first successful 43 2, 6 ; fails 43 7 E R A S I N I D E S ; a Corinthian, com­ mander of the reinforcements from the Peloponnesus 7 1 E R E T R I A in Euboea, the inhabi­ tants of, subject and tributary INDEX I to the Ath. serve against Syr. 57 4 E R I N E U S , in Achaea, in the territory of Rhypae, in the gulf of Corinth, sea fight off 34 1 ,, a river in Sicily, crossed by the Ath. on t h e sixth day of their retreat 80 5 EUBOEA, Athens provisioned from 28 1 ; later inhabitants of Hestiaea in Euboea, Athenian settlers 57 2 E U E S P E R I T A E , a Greek city in the W . of Cyrenaice, aided against the Libyans b y the Pelop. troops destined for Syrac. 50 2 E U E T I O N , an A t h . general, at- tacks Amphipolis with Perdiccas 9 E U R I P U S , the strait between Euboea a n d the mainland 29 1; 30 1 E U R Y E L U S — t h e highest and extreme inland point of Epipolae, adjoining the ascent to Epip.—Gylippus ascends by it to t h e relief of Syracuse 2 3 ; the Ath. take the Syrac. fortified post there 43 3 EURYMEDON, an Ath. officer, son of Theocles, appointed colleague of Nicias and D e mosthenes 16 1; sent with ten galleys and 120 talents to Nicias at Syrac. 16 2 ; returning, joins Demosthenes off Acarnania 31 3 ; acting as his colleague, sends a reinforcement to Naupactus a n d obtains ships and hoplites at Corcyra 31 5 ; arrives at Thurium 33 5 ; advances t o Petra 3 5 ; arrives at Syracuse 42 1 ; joins in the grand night attack on Epipolae 43 2 ; adverse to staying at Syrac. 49 3, 4 ; slain in t h e third naval engagement in the Harbour 52 1 MATTERS 339 E U T H Y D E M U S , joined in temporary command with Nicias at Syrac. 16 1 ; has a share of the command in the last action in the Great H a r b o u r 69 4 G GELA (a town on the S. coast of Sicily, named after the river on which it was situate, a colony from Rhodes a n d Crete (57 6), at first called Lindii, mod. Terranovd), aids t h e Syrac. against the A t h . 1 4, 5, 33 1, 58 I ; Sicanus at G. 50 1; borders on the Camarinaean territory 58 1 ; Athenians retreat towards G. 80 2 GONGYLUS, a Corinthian general, sent to Syracuse 2 1 grapnel, or grappling iron 62 3 ; ships covered with leather to prevent their being grappled 653 G Y L I P P U S , son of Cleandridas, a Lacedaemonian general, sails to Himera 1 2 ; marches for Syracuse with a large Siceliot and Sicel force 1 3—5 ; mounts Epipolae 2 3 ; summons the Ath. to evacuate Sicily 3 1; offers them battle 3 2, 3 ; takes Labdalum 3 4 ; defeated by t h e A t h . 5 2, 3 ; afterwards defeats them 6 2, 3 ; seeks reinforcements from Sicilian states 7 2 ; 12 1 ; returns with large reinforcements a n d urges t h e Syr. t o attack the A t h . b y sea 215 captures Plemmyrium 23 1 ; leads t h e land forces u p to the Ath. works facing the city 37 2 ; retires without a n action 38 1; gives Way before the Ath. night attack on Epipolae 43 6 ; his visitation of Sicily for reinforcements 4 6 ; returns with a large force 50 22—2 INDEX 34θ I Ι ; intercepting the Ath. crews landing is attacked and driven back by Tyrrhenians 53 τ, ι; his exhortation to the Syrac. before the last action in the H a r b o u r 66—68; prepares to impede the A t h . retreat 74 2; invites the insular allies of the Ath. to come over to the Syrac. 83 ι ; refuses the terms on which Nicias offers to ca­ pitulate 83 2, 3 ; Nicias sur­ renders to h i m ; he gives or­ ders to take prisoners 85 ι, ι; Nicias and Demosthenes put to death against his will 86 ι Η H E G E S A N D E R , a Thespian, sent with Boeotian troops to Sicily 193 H E L O R U S , road to, running S. from S y r a c , taken by the Athenians changing the di­ rection of their retreat 80 5 Helots 26 2 ; the best of t h e H . and Neodamodes selected for service by the Lac. in Sicily 19 3 ; 58 3 ; a peninsula in Laconia occupied by Demo­ sthenes to facilitate their de­ sertion 26 1 HERACLES, sacrifice to, at Syra­ cuse 73 2 Hermaeon, or temple of Hermes near Mycalessus in Boeotia, the Thracians bivouac there 293 HERMOCRATES, a Syracusan, joins Gylippus in urging the Syrac. to attack the Ath. b y sea 21 3—5 ; his stratagem to delay the A t h . retreat (73) succeeds 74 1 HESTIAEA (or Orcus, a city in the N . of Euboea), inhabited by a colony of Ath. (1 c. 114, 5) who serve against Syr. 57 2 HIMERA, the only Greek city MATTERS on the N . coast of Sic. 58 2 ; Gylippus lands there; the H i meraeans furnish men and arms against the Ath. 1 3 ; the amount of their aid 1 5 ; enumerated among the Syrac. allies 58 2 H I M E R A E U M , on the r. Strymon, near Amphipolis 9 HYCCARA (a Sicanian town on the N . coast of Sicily, slaves from (vi c. 62, 3), employed as substitutes for Ath. seamen 13 2 H Y L I A S , a r. of Italy in the ter­ ritory of Thuria 35 2 I IAPYGIA, the destination of the Ath. armament in crossing the Ionian gulf 33 3 IAPYGIANS served as mercena­ ries with the A t h . in Sicily 57 11, 33 4 I E T A E , a fort of the Sicels, taken by Gylippus 2 3 IMBROS (island S.E. of Samothrace, mod. Imbro), the in­ habitants of, were of like dia­ lect and institutions with the Ath., whose allies they were (and probably a colony) 57 2 IONIA (the country in Asia Minor west, inhabited by Ionian Greeks), Miletus, Samos and Chios included in the confederation of 57 4 IONIANS, despised by the Dori­ ans, 5 4 ; fighting against the Dorians 57 2, 4 Ionian gulf (0 'lottos w i t h - o r without κόλπος, including the S. portion of the Adriatic) 33 3 ; 57 11 I T A L I A , application of the n a m e in the age of T h u c . 14 3 ; 25 1 n . ; supplies from it to the A t h . armament 14 3 ; in­ tercepted on its coast 25 1 ; second Ath. expedition to INDEX I Syrac. on its coasts 33 4, 5 ; Italiot allies of Athens 57 n ; Italiot, like Ath. and Siceliot prisoners, detained longest by the Syracusans 87 2 L LABDALUM (a strong fortified post on Epipolae at Syracuse, occupied by t h e A t h . as a magazine) taken by Gylippus 34 LACEDAEMON : L a c . succours for Syracuse land at Himera l i , 2 ; march overland to Syr. 1 3—5 ; m e t by the Syracu­ sans 2 2; march against the Ath. 2 3 ; prepare to send troops to Syr. in merchant vessels 17 3 ; prepare to invade Attica as a diversion in favour of Syr. 18 1; grounds of their increased confidence of suc­ cess against t h e A t h . 18 2, 3 ; preparations for fortifying Deceleia 18 4 ; devastate t h e plain and fortify Deceleia 19 1 ; send off to Syr. Neodamodes a n d Helots under t h e command of a Spartiate Eccritus 19 3 ; second embassy sent from Syr. to Lac. 25 9 ; Laconian coast raided by Ath. 26 2 ; Lac. occupation of Deceleia greatly impoverishes and an­ noys t h e A t h . 27 3, 5, 2 8 ; shared command at Syr. with the Corinthians and Syr. 56 3 ; send a Spartan, as commander, to Syr. with a force of Neodamodes and Helots 58 3 ; their case at Pylos compared to that of the Ath. at Syr., when their naval armament was de­ stroyed 71 7 ; Nicias surren­ ders to their disposal 86 2; the Lac. friendly to Nicias for his good offices to them 86 3 LEMNOS (an island between A thos and the Hellespont, a MATTERS 341 colony from Athens), t h e in­ habitants of, among the allied troops at Syracuse 57 2; dia­ lect a n d institutions of, iden­ tical with those of the A t h . , ib. L E P A S : see A C R A E U M (LESBOS, an island off the coast of Aeolis: t h e L . of Aeolic race 57 5) LEUCAS (a flourishing commer cial colony of Corinth on t h e W . coast of Acarnania) con­ tributes two ships in aid of Syr. 7 1 ; the Corinthian ships sail thence for Syr. 2 1; t h e Leucadians aid Syracuse as of kindred origin 58 3 LIBYA, Pelop. aids for Syr. driven to the coast of 50 1, 2 LTMERA : see E P I D A U R U S Lithotomiae or Latomiae at Syr. used as a prison for the A t h . and their allies 86 2; 87 1 LOCRI EPIZEPHYRII (a colony on t h e S. E . coast of t h e Bruttian peninsula), Gylippus touches on the coast of 1 1, 2; an A t h . squadron on the coast of 4 7 ; a Syr. squadron there 253 ^Demosthenes' expedition for Syr. does not p u t in at their ports 35 2 L Y S I M E L E I A , marsh of, Syra­ cusans driven into it b y t h e Tyrrhenians 53 2 Μ M A N T I N E I A N S , like other Arca­ dians, serve for hire against any enemy 57 9 MEGARA (in Hellas proper), ex­ iles from, fought o n t h e A t h . side against their colonists t h e Selinuntines 57 8 MEGARA (HYBLAEA in Sicily): the A t h . look out off M. for a Syr. squadron 25 4 342 INDEX MENANDER, an A t h . chosen with Euthydemus to share the command with Nicias at Syr. 16 i ; with Demosthenes in the night attack on Epipolae 43 2 ; shares the command in t h e last naval engagement in the Harbour of Syracuse 69 4 MESSANA ( M E S S E N E ) (a city on the straits of Messina, first named Zancle, a settlement from Cuma in Italy and sub­ sequently re-colonised from Chalcis in E u b o e a ; see Intro­ duction), Gylippus touches at la MESS API AN IAPYGTANS 3 3 4 M E S S E N I A , W . p a r t of the L a c . territory: t h e Messenians pressed into the Athenian ser­ vice against Syracuse from Naupactus and Pylus 31 2, 57 8 METAPONTIUM (an Achaean colony on the gulf of Tarentum, founded from Sybaris and Croton) north of Thuria 33 4 ; the Metapontians contribute ships and m e n to the A t h . 33 5, 57 I I M E T H Y M N A , a oity on N . coast of Lesbos; the M . of Aeolian race, paid no tribute but fur­ nished ships to t h e Ath. 57 5 M I L E T U S , the people of, members of the Ionian confederation and tributary allies of Athens 57 4 MYCALESSUS (a town of Boeotia near the Euripus), surprised and its inhabitants massacred by Dian Thracians 29* 30 Ν AUPACTUS (a town just inside the Corinthian gulf, where the Messenian exiles were settled by t h e A t h . B.C. 455), the Corinthians man a squadron against the Athenian squadron I MATTERS • at, 17 4 ; stationed opposite t o them 19 5, 34 1; Messenians summoned thence on the Sic. expedition 31 2, 57 8 ; Conon at N . with 18 Ath. ships 31 4 ; the N . squadron reinforced 31 5; the A t h . sail thence against the Pelop. fleet 34 3 ; return af­ ter an indecisive engagement 34 7 NAXUS (the most ancient Greek settlement in Sicily), a weak (14 2) ally of Athens 57 11 N E A P O L I S , in Africa, a trading port of the Carthaginians o p p . Sicily 50 2 N I C I A S , s. of Niceratus, an A t h . general, contemns the small force of Gylippus and neglects to intercept it, but sends four ships to look out for it when too late 1 2 ; does not ad­ vance against the Syrac. 3 3 ; resolves to fortify Plemmyrium 4 4 ; sends 20 ships to intercept the remainder of the Cor. aids to Syrac. 4 7 ; t h e progress of the Syr. counter­ work compels h i m t o fight 6 1; is defeated and the circumvallation of Syrac. rendered impossible 6 3, 4 ; perceives his need of a considerable re­ inforcement 8 1 ; writes a de­ spatch to Athens and confines himself to precautionary mea­ sures 8 2, 3 ; his despatch read at Athens 10—15; t h e Ath. appoint Menander and Euthydemus to share his com­ mand 16 1; sends to his Sicel allies t o obstruct the march of aids to Syrac. 32 1; after an indecisive naval action, pro­ vides for its renewal and for increased protection for his fleet 38 2, 3 ; had not availed himself of the impression pro­ duced on his first arrival in Sic. 42 3 ; consents to Demosthenes' INDEX night attack on Epipolae 43 1; left behind to defend the camp 43 2 ; after defeat, op­ poses Demosthenes' proposal for an immediate retreat, ur­ ging the displeasure of the Ath., and the distressed con­ dition of the Syr. 4 8 1 , 4 9 1 , 4 ; in prospect of an immediate attack of the Syr. consents to retreat by sea 5 0 ; on the oc­ currence of a lunar eclipse defers retreat for 27 days 50 4 ; his speech to the army on their resolve to force their way out to sea 60 5 ~ 6 4 ; or­ ders their embarkation 65 1 ; after defeat, agrees to the pro­ posal of Demosthenes to renew the a t t e m p t ; on the seamen's refusal, agrees to retreat by land 72 3, 4 ; on receiving false intelligence from H e r m o crates, delays the A t h . re­ treat 73 3—741; his particular and general exhortations be­ fore the retreat begins 76, 77; keeps good order on the march 7 8 ; his division in ad­ vance of that of Dem. 78 2 ; decides on changing the di­ rection of their retreat towards Camarina 80 1, 2 ; his divi­ sion keeps together and makes progress 80 3 ; 81 3 ; fights n o more, than he is compelled to 81 3 ; crosses the r. Erineus and halts in a strong position 82 3 ; overtaken by the Syrac. learns the surrender of D e m . ; offers to capitulate 83 1, 2 ; is attacked and harassed all day, disappointed of effecting escape by night 83 3 — 5 ; con­ tinues his retreat next day to the r. Assinarus 84 1, 2 ; on the destruction of his army, surrenders to Gylippus 85, 1; with Dem. butchered by de­ crees of the Syr. in spite of I MATTERS 343 Gylippus' wish to save them 86 1, 2 ; his reasons for sur­ rendering to Gylippus 86 3 ; motives of Syrac. and Co­ rinthians for wishing his death 86 4 ; his high cha­ racter 86 5 ; his superstitious disposition 50 4 N I C O N , a T h e b a n commander of the Boeotian aids for Syr. 19 3 Ο OLYMPIEIUM (a temple of Zeus near Syracuse, close to which the Ath. army had taken up a strong position VI c. 64 f), a third of the Syrac. cavalry post­ ed there, to keep in check the A t h . foragers 4 6 ; the Syrac. troops there threaten the Ath. lines 37 2, 3 ; thence they check the devastation of the country by the Ath. 42 6 ["Ονου yvaOos 26 2] OROPUS (a town on the N . coast of Attica, opp. Eretria in Euboea), overland conveyance of provisions to Athens from 28 1 Ρ paean: the Ath. alarmed by the Doric paeans of their allies 446 PELOPONNESUS 12 I , 1 5 I , 19 3 PERDICCAS 11, king of lower or maritime Macedonia, marches with Eueti6n, an Ath. general, against Amphipolis 9 peripolia or guard-forts of the Syracusans, their outlay on them 48 5 P E T R A (or L E U C O P E T R A , a pro­ montory at the extreme S. W . point of Italy), in the territory of Rhegium, the last place - where Demosthenes touched - before he crossed to Sicily 35 2 ΡΗΕΙΑ (a city of Elis on the coast between the rr. Peneius and Alpheius), Demosthenes 344 INDEX destroys a transport there which was destined for Sicily 31 ι PLATAEA, a city of Boeotia; the Lac. consider the attempt of the Thebans, in time of peace, on P. as having injured their cause 18 2; Plataeans are allies of the A t h . , although Boeo­ tians opp. to Boeotians, at siege of Syracuse 57 5 P L E M M Y R I U M (a headland opp. Syracuse, narrowing the en­ trance to the Harbour), forti­ fied by Nicias 4 4 — 6 ; Gylippus attacks and captures his three forts 22 1, 23 1, 2 5 9 ; demolishes one, the other two garrisoned by the Syrac. 24 1; disastrous consequence of its loss to the Ath. 2 4 3 , 36 6 ; Eurymedon, meeting Demo­ sthenes on his way to Syr., reports its capture 31 3 P O L Y A N T H E S , a Corinthian, com­ mands in the sea-fight off Erineus 34 2 [POLYZELUS, the farmstead of 81 4 n.] PRASIAE, a town on E . coast of Laconia, its territory ravaged by the A t h . 18 3 Providence, Nicias* view of di­ vine 77 2—4 prows of ships and the adjacent parts strengthened 34 5, 36 2 PYLOS in Messenia, marauding expedition of the Athenians from 18 3, 26 2 ; the Lac. re­ gard their disaster at P . as de­ served for beginning the war in spite of treaties 18 2; Messenians from P . serve with the Ath. before Syracuse 57 8 ; cases of the Ath. at Syracuse and the Lac. at Pylos com­ pared 7 1 8 ; Nicias and Demo­ sthenes regarded very differ­ ently in connexion with the events at Pylos 86 3 I MATTERS P Y T H E N , a Cor., commander of the two Cor. ships, sails with Gylippus to Sicily 1 1 ;• com­ mands the central division of the fleet at final engagement in the H a r b o u r 70 1 Q quarries at S y r a c , used as a prison for the Ath. captives and their allies 86 2, 87 1 R R H E G I U M (the point of Italy nearest to Messana in S i c ) , Gylippus puts in there and passes the straits 1 2 ; the A t h . lie in wait offRh. for the Cor. fleet 4 ; Petra (Leucopetra) in the R h . territory 35 2 R H O D E S , an island S. of Caria, colonized from Argos (57 6), assists in colonizing Gela 57 6, 9 ; the Rhodians fight against their own colony ib. R H Y P A E in Achaia 34 1 roll (κατάλογο?), of persons liable to military service at Athens, 20 2 S SAMIANS, the, regarded as be­ longing to I o n i a ; served in the Ath. armament against Syr. 57 4 SARGEUS, a Sicyonian, com­ mander of the 200 Sicyonian hoplites sent to aid Syr. 19 4 seamen, armed, serve by land seditions and factions in Thuria 33 5 ; at Metapontium 57 1 1 ; at Acragas 46 SELINUS (the most western of all the Greek cities of Sicily, a colony from Hyblaean Megara near the mouth of r. Selinus, which was so named after the wild celery (σέλίνον) INDEX which grew plentifully on its banks, Pint. TimoL c 26) 58 1; the S. receive and assist Gylippus 1 5 ; Pelop. succours for Syrac. arrive from Libya at S. 50 1, 2 ; Selinuntians of Megarian extraction arrayed against Megarian exiles 57 8 ships' prows and cat-heads made more solid by the Cor. 34 5, and by the Syrac. 36 2 ; ships caught by grappling irons 62 3 ; covered with hides to prevent the grapnels holding 65 3 ; merchant-ships used in war as fire-ships 53 3, as troop-ships 17 3, 19 3 ; with heavy weights suspended at their yard-arms, used to defend the entrances to a fenced station 38 2, 3, 41 2, 3 ; ships of various kinds used to bar the mouth of the H a r b o u r 59 3 ; old ship-sheds at Syrac. fenced by piles, attack and defence of 25 5—7 SICANUS, a, Syrac. general, sent with a naval squadron to bring over Acragas to the Syrac. interest (46) fails in his mission 50 1 ; commands a division of the Syrac. fleet in the final sea-fight 70 1 SICELS, reinforcements from, promised and sent to Gylippus 1 4, 5 ; Archonides a Sicel king 1 4 ; Gylippus takes Ietae a 5. fort 2 3 ; S., instigated by Nicias, destroy Siceliot reinforcements on their way to Syr. 3 2 ; most of the Sicels become allies of the Ath. 57 11; some S. allies of Syrac. 58 3 ; the S. allies of the Ath. l o y a l ; Nicias wishes to reach their country 77 6 ; the A t h . expect aid from them at the r. Cacyparis 80 4, 5 SICELIOT states, all except Acragas, aid Syracasans 32—33 3 ; I MATTERS 345 give further aid to Gylippus after his victory at Epipolae 46, 50 1; comparative magnitude of their aid to Syr. 58 3 SICILY, list of the States in Sicily and elsewhere which took part in the contest 57—59 1 ; most of the Ath. prisoners dispersed over Sicily 85 3 SICYONIANS (the inhabitants of Sicyon, a city on S. coast of Corinthian gulf, between Corinth and Achaia) send to the aid of Sicily 200 hoplites (pressed men 58 3) 19 4 S K I R P H O N D A S , a Theban Boeotarch, slain in pursuit of the Dian Thracians 30 3 slaves, desertion of more than 20,000 of the Athenian, 27 5 ; slaves from Hyccara 13 2 State, what constitutes a 77 7 STRYMON, the r. in Thrace, Ath. galleys on, blockade Amphipolis 9 Styrii (inhabitants of Styra, a town on the W . coast of Euboea), subjects and tributaries of Athens, furnish a contingent against Syrac. 57 4 SUNIUM (mod. Cape Kol6nnes> southernmost promontory of Attica), supplies brought to Athens round 28 1 SYBARIS (mod. Coscile, a river in the territory of Thurium, on the western shore of the Tarentine gulf), the Ath. reinforcements to the Syracusan expedition reviewed there 35 1 SYRACUSANS, the, go out to meet Gylippus 2 2 ; and march with him towards the A t h . lines 2 3 ; finding the Ath. prepared to receive but not to make an attack draw off to the citadel of Temenites 3 1-3; take Labdalum 3 4 ; begin a counterwall 4 1; fail in a night attack on the A t h . lines 4 2 3 ; their 34^ INDEX horse, posted at Olympieium, cut off A t h . watering parties and woodcutters from Plemmyrium 4 6 ; defeated by the A t h . on Epipolae 6 ι — 3 ; by the aid of their cavalry drive the A t h . back upon their lines 6 1—3; carry their counterwall past the Ath. lines 6 4 ; send request for further aid to the Pelop. 7 i ff., 12 1, 15 1 ; begin to form a navy 7 4 ; their vessels outnumber the Ath. 12 4 ; their embassy in­ duces the Lac. to invade At­ tica 18 1; Gylippus joins Hermocrates in urging them to attack the Ath. by sea 21 2—4; sea * fight off the en­ trance of the Great Harbour 22 : capture the Ath. forts on Plemmyrium, but they are defeated by sea 23 1—4; sta­ tion ships at Plemmyrium to obstruct the conveyance of provisions to the Ath. 24 3 ; send a third embassy to the Pelop. and a squadron of n ships to the coast of Italy to intercept the A t h . convoys 25 1 ; disable most of them and burn the ship-timber about Caulonia25 2 ; on their return, lose one ship in a skirmish with the Ath. 25 4 ; their stockade in front of the co­ vered docks attacked by the Ath. 25 5—7 ; send (second) embassy to the other states of Sicily to report progress 25 9 ; 800 of the succours marching to Syracuse cut off by the Sicel allies of the A t h . 3 2 ; adopt the Corinthian plan of flatter and stronger prows in rebuilding their ships 36 1, 2 ; advance against the Ath. by land and sea 37 ; fight an in­ decisive engagement 3 8 ; their manoeuvre to force the Ath. I MATTERS next day into action when unrefreshed and in disorder 39 —40 1, 2 ; gain a complete victory 41 1 ; become rilled with confidence 41 4 ; their hopes of final success dashed by the arrival of Demosthenes and Eurymedon 42 2; all their advantages due to the irresolution of Nicias 42 3 ; they refrain from action by land or sea at first 42 6; burn the engines of Demosthenes and repulse his attack on their counter-work 43 1 ; their fort near Euryelus surprised 43 3 ; part of their counter-work taken and its - demolition be­ gun 43 5 ; they and their al­ lies give way 43 6 ; but after a while regain the advantage and put the Ath. to flight 44 5—8 ; set up two trophies on Epipolae 45 1 ; send a squad­ ron against Acragas 4 6 ; De­ mosthenes regards their sub­ jugation as scarcely possible 47 4 ; a party among them, willing to surrender, in secret communication with Nicias 48 2, 49 1, 73 3, 86 4 ; their con­ dition considered by Nicias to be worse than that of the A t h . 48 5 ; details of their expenses; failure of their means would involve the loss of their auxil­ iaries id.; their condition known to Nicias 49 1; they prepare to attack the Ath. by sea and by land 50 3 ; con­ firmed in their purpose by the A t h . determination to retreat 51 1 ; make a general attack by sea and land 52 1; defeat the fleet of the Ath. 52 2 ; their fire-ship how kept off 53 3, 4 ; raise a trophy 5 4 ; effect of their victory on the Ath. 5 5 ; being in complete command of the harbour, they purpose INDEX to close its mouth 66 ι ; their ambitious projects 56 2, 3 ; list of the states engaged for and against them 57, 5 8 ; perceiving the Ath. preparing for a final struggle at sea, take precautions against their iron grapnels 65 2, 3 ; pur­ port of the speeches made by their commanders 66 — 6 8 ; their embarcation and dispo­ sitions afloat and ashore 70 1 ; after an obstinate conflict to­ tally defeat the Ath. fleet 71 5 ; possess themselves of the wrecks and dead and retiring to the city erect a trophy 72 1; urged by Hermocrates to take measures for obstructing the Ath. retreat by land 73 1 ; false report of their having occupied all the roads pre­ vents the immediate retreat of the Ath. 73 3, 74 1; obstruct the roads, guard the fords and carry off the remaining ships of the Ath. 74 2 ; fear of their revenge secures the loyalty of their Sicel allies to the Ath. 77 6 ; a body of S. harass the A t h . on their retreat by land 78 3 ; fortify the pass of A craeum Lepas and hold it against the Ath. 78 5—79 4 ; send a detachment to wall up the pass in the rear of the Ath. 79 4 ; the Ath. elude them by a night-march 80 1 ; they overtake and surround the division of Demosthenes 81 1, 2 ; drive them into an enclosure and assail them with missiles 81 3 ; avoid close combat, why 81 4 ; invite the insular allies of the Ath. to join them 82 1 ; compel the surrender of the whole division and march it back to Syrac. 82 3 ; attack and harass Nicias all day, re­ I MATTERS 347 fusing the terms of surrender proposed by him 83 1 — 3 ; prevent the Ath. from de­ camping by night 83 4, 5 ; continue their attacks next day 84 1, 2 ; capture the mass of the survivors after great slaughter at the ford of the r. Assinaros 84 3 — 8 5 ; decree the execution of Nic. and Dem., and confine the rest of the prisoners in the Quarries at Syrac. (86) for seventy days and then sell all except Athe­ nian Siceliot and Italiot pri­ soners 87 1, 2 Τ TAENARUM (mod. C. Matap&n, the S.-W. promontory of Laconia and the most southerly point of Europe), Lac. and Boeot. succours sail from it for Syracuse 19 4 TANAGRA, territory of, plundered by Diitrephes 29 2 taxiarchs in the A t h . army attend a council of war 60 2 T E M E N I T I S , the height in the Temenites quarter of Syra­ cuse 3 3 T E N E D O S (an island off the coast of Troas, settled by Aeolians from Boeotia) tributary to Ath. δ7 5 Λ T E N O S , one of the Cyclades; the Tenians subject and tributary allies of Athens 57 4 THAPSUS (mod. Magmsi), a low but rocky peninsula, united to the mainland by a low sandy isthmus, which formed a fairly secure port on the S. side. I t was selected by the A t h . for their naval camp and the sta­ tion of their fleet, before they took possession of the great Harbour (Thuc. VI c. 97 1), 348 INDEX I Demosthenes urges immediate removal to from Syr. 49 2 T H E B A N S : the ill success of the first part of the Pelop. war ascribed to their infraction of treaty by attempt on Plataea 18 2 ; their succours sail with the earliest for Syrac. 19 3 ; drive the D i a n Thracians to their ships after the sack of Mycalessus 30 T H E S P I A E (a sovereign state of Boeotia, W . by S. of Thebes), sends hoplites under H e g e sander to the aid of Sicily 19 3 ; their arrival at Syracuse 25 3, 4 THRACIANS, join the Ath. ex­ pedition against Amphipolis 9 ; 1300 mercenaries of the Dian tribes of, arrive too late at Athens for the Sic. expedition 27 1 ; sent home from Athens, on their way sack Mycalessus 29, 30 thunderstorm, during a battle, effect of on the feelings of the combatants 79 3 T H U R I A or T H U R I U M (a city of Italy on the W . of the Tarentine gulf, on the r. Sybaris), its p e o p l e T h u r i i 33 6, 37 1 1 ; its district T h u r i a s 3 3 5 , 3 5 1 ; Demosthenes and Eurymedon negotiate an alliance with the Thurians 33 5 ; the T h . join the Ath. expedition 35 1; com­ pelled thereto by the state of party faction 57 r 1 timber for ship-building in the territory of Caulonia 25 2 towers, wooden, on an A t h . ship at Syrac. for destroying the enemy's stockade 25 6 tribute to A t h . from her allies, commuted for a duty of five MATTERS per cent, on sea-borne goods 284 trierarchs, exhorted severally by Nicias before battle 69 2 ; admonished in battle both on the Ath. and on the Syr. side 70 8 trophies raised for victory by the Syrac. on taking the three forts on Plemmyrium 24 1; for naval victory over the A t h . 41 4 ; for victory over the Ath. on Epipolae 45 1, by sea and by land 54, by sea 72 1 twentieth (five per cent.) on sea­ borne goods levied on the al­ lies of Athens instead of the tribute 28 4 Tyrrhene sea {Τνρσψικος voyros) 58 2 T Y R R H E N I A N S repulse the Sy­ rac. 53 2; 54 τ ; reckoned as barbarian allies of the Ath. because of their enmity to Sy­ racuse 57 11 W watchword (το ξύνθημα) of the Athenians betrayed to the enemy 44 5 X X E N O N , a T h e b a n commander at Syrac. 19 3 Ζ Zacynthus (mod. Zanfe, an island in the Sicilian sea, off the W . coast of Peloponnesus, about 8 miles from Elis), the inhab­ itants of, autonomous allies of Athens 57 7 ; they furnish De­ mosthenes with hoplites for service against Syracuse 31 2 INDEX II GRAMMATICAL a b s o l u t e infinitive 49 3 ; 6 8 4 ; 67 2 ; 81 3 ; 87 5 a b s t r a c t nouns, plural of, in concrete sense 62 3 ; 80 3 a c c u s a t i v e , anticipatory, with πννθάνεσθαι 44 ι ; with ένθυμέισθαι 63 3 „ absolute, of perfect pas­ sive participles 18 2; (s ούχ Ικανά.* οϋσα$) 31 4 ; of an impersonal verb (βίρημένον) 77 6, (αδύνατον 6ν) 44 4 ,, adverbial 55 2 ; 57 1 „ w. passive participle 34 5 ,, cognate, neut. adj. 34 6 ; 55 2; 63 2; 68 2 ; 71 3, 4 „ becoming the subject of a passive verb (Ικανά ηύτύχηταή 77 3 ,, double (of the object and predicate) 68 2 ,, of specification 71 3 ,, of inner object 77 3 a d j e c t i v e , neuter plural of, in­ stead of singular (πρόσ­ φορα) 62 2 „ predicate, used as ad­ verb 44 4 5 84 4 ; 86 5 ,, peculiar position of at­ tributive 50 1 „ put predicatively in rel. clause 60 2 ; 71 4 „ coordinated with ad­ verb 4 6; 32 2 „ proleptic 4 3 ; 43 7 a d v e r b used predicatively with etvai 4 4 ; 28 1 ,, coupled to adjective 4 6 ; 32 2 „ used attributively 7 3 ; 28 1; 34 6 ; 44 8 ; 6 2 3 ; 81 5 ; 86 5 „ after preposition (μέχρι όψέ) 83 3 anakoluthon 42 2 ; 70 7 ; 74 1 anaphora 24 2; 67 2 a n t e c e d e n t , incorporation of into relative clause, 54 a o r i s t , ingressive, i.e. denoting the commencement of a state 20 2 ; 29 4 ; 49 1 ; 57 1, 2 ; 71 3J 83 4 „ „ participle of, soused 63 4 ; 85 4 „ iterative with &v 7 1 3 „ with pluperfect force 1 1 ; 4 3 ; 18 2 ; 20 1 ; 25 5 ; 27 2 a p p o s i t i o n 36 5 ; 69 2. See under 'partitive' a r t i c l e , third attributive posi­ tion of 11 2; 66 2 „ omission of 24 2 ; 58 4 ; w* θά\ασσα 59 2 ; w. πατρίς 61 ι ; with name of people 54 1; 86 1; with name of place 18 2 ; w. φυλή 69 2 ; w. όπλα 82 2 ; with second of two subjects 7 1; 14 2 ; 36 6 ; with OVTOS when the noun is part of the 35o INDEX II predicate 42 4 ; 55 2 ; 86 2 a r t i c l e replaced by gen. case 58 4 ,, to denote* e a c h ' 27 2 ; 6 2 3 ; 65 2; 70 8 a s s i m i l a t i o n of infinitive in relative clause 47 4 „ of gender 3 4 ; 25 7 ,, of pronoun 21 5 asyndeton 57 4 ; 71 4 ; 77 1 a t t r a c t i o n of case 21 3, 4 ; 77 5 ; 87 2 ; of number 62 3 a u g m e n t , temporal, of initial eg 77 3 c h i a s t i c arrangement of antitheta 49 2; 57 2 ; 71 4 ; 75 6 c o l l e c t i v e noun (5§s) 53 4 ; de­ noting persons, with plural participle 43 7 ; 79 3 ; 85 3 c o n j u n c t i v e , deliberative 1 1 c o n s t r u c t i o n in accordance with the sense (κατά σύνεσιν) 22 ι ; 25 ι ; 41 2 ; 79 4 ,, combination of two con­ structions 68 ι ,, parallelism of dissimi­ lar constructions:—par­ ticiple and subordinate clause 4 6 ; 18 1 ; 10 „ participle and noun with or without preposition 8 2 ; 28 4 ; 70 4 ; 75 4 ; 84 2 ; participles in dif­ ferent cases 14 3 ; 28 4 ; 30 2 ; 51 1 ; 67 4 ; 73 2 ; 77 7 ; participle and finite verb 13 2 ; 15 2 ; 47 2 ; 69 2 ; 87 2 ; parti­ ciple and tin with finite verb 64 1; preposition w. noun and subordi­ nate clause 60 2 ; dat. of articular infinitive and preposition with case 40 3 ; 60 4 ; ad­ verb and adjective 32 2 GRAMMAR D d a t i v e sociative, to denote at­ tendant circumstances 75 7 ; with αυτό* 25 4 ; 41 3 „ of measure 17 5 ; with comparative adverb 17 3 ,, of possession (dub.) 26 1 „ of the agent 2 4 ; 4 6 ; 15 1 ; 62 3 ; 69 2 ,, of t h e instrument 5 3 „ of interest 19 5 ; 26 1; 30 1; 40 4 ; 69 2 ; 7 1 5 (dub.); 72 1 ,, incommodi 29 1 ,, of cause 60 4 ; 63 3 ; 75 4 ; 77 1; 84 1 ,, modal 23 3 „ of means 57 9 ,, of motive 75 5 ; 84 1 ,, of resemblance 57 2 (ry αύττ} φωνή avroh) 71 5 „ of respect 66 3 „ after verbal substantive 5 3 ; 6 3 3 ; 76 „ dynamical 48 5 ; 52 2 ; with articular infin. 60 4 ,, in loose relation 34 2 ,, with πΚησθέν 75 4 dativus militaris 1 3 ; 25 9 ; 37 1; 59 2 e l l i p s i s 38 1; 74 2 ; 79 5 ,, of χώρα 32 ι ; 68 2; 75 4 „ of κόλπο? 33 3 „ of substantive verb (elai) after us 68 2 ; after otos 69 1 ; after o 4 ,, plural of adjectives and verbals for singular with­ out subst. 43 2 ; 73 2, 3 „ adj. with art. and gen. 68 1 ; 71 3 n u m e r a l put predicatively in the relative clause 43 4 Ο o p t a t i v e in final clause 70 1 ,, iterative 18 3 ; 29 4 ; 44 5; 7 0 3 , 4 ; 71 3 ; 7 5 4 „ potential 77 4 „ in conditional relative clause 29 4 ; 48 3 „ and subjunctive in same final clause 17 4 „ with d πως 46 parataxis 4 2 ; 22 1 ; 43 5 ; 48 3 ; 53 4 ; 83 4 p a r t i c i p l e , attributive, irre­ gular position of after subst. 23 3 ; 32 1; 36 5 ; 41 2 ; 50 1 ; 52 2 ; 55 1; 58 2 ; 7 1 7 ; of aorist sub­ stantival, without time reference to the principal verb 68 1 „ (neuter), governing ad­ nominal genitive 68 1 ; 83 4 „ circumstantial, „ „ ruling the construc­ tion in sentence with finite verb 5 3 of substantive verb 99 99 t o be supplied 62 4 INDEX II participle, circumstantial, „ ,, in indirect dis­ course 21 4 ; 31 3 ; 42 4 (with dp); 47 ι ,, ,, in ace. absol. used personally with ώ$ 31 4 ,, ,, serving as protasis, 62 2 „ „ with dp 64 2; 67 4 ; after ώστβ (not in indirect discourse) 424 ,, ,, with el μη 38 I ,, ,, causal 51 1; 67 1; 72 1 ,, ,, concessive 2 1 ,, , ,, limitative 28 3 ,, ,, descriptive 251; 571 ,, ,, aorist, to denote a contemporary ac­ tion 39 2 ,, „ future, to denote purpose 7 2 ; 25 9 ; 72 4 w. cos; 83 1; with article 85 2 ; perfect pass. 25-9 „ , , present as imper­ fect 61 3 ,, supplementary ,, ,, aorist w. μεταμέλεσθαι 50 3 ; w. φθάpeiv, \αρθάρ€ΐρ 15 2 ; in the ace. with cos after a verb of thinking 5 4 ,9 „ perfect w. πνρθό,ρβσθα,ι 31 3 participles, series of—the last belonging more closely to the verb 31 1 ; 32 2; 39 2; 53 4 ; 60 4 ; 69 4 ; 71 3 ; 86 1 p a r t i t i v e apposition 2 4 ; 13 2 ; 22 1 ; 27 5 ; 28 3 ; 41 4 ; 44 I, 3 ; 45 2 ; 50 4 : 56 2 ; 64 1; 71 1; 72 6 ; 78 3 ; 85 1; 86 4 „ genitive after pronouns 2 4 ; 33 6; 36 4; after verbs 31 2 ; after parti­ T. VII GRAMMAR 353 ciples 40 5 ; w. adverbs 51 1; with places 19 4 ; 29 2 p a r t i t i v e predicate-gen. 44 8 ; 49 2 p e r s o n a l construction of ad­ jectives 14 2 ; 44 3 ; 48 1; 51 1; 63 3 ; 67 3 ; 71 4 (ην πάρτα άκοΰσαή p l e o n a s m 78 2 plural of abstract nouns 62 3 ; 80 3 p o s i t i v e after negative form of . statement (£φη after ούκ 'έφη) 5 3 p o t e n t i a l indicative 14 4 ; 44 1; 55 2, 6 „ infinitive 29 3 ; 73 2 „ optative 77 4 ; with o7rcos dp in final clause 65 2 p r e d i c a t e adjective 13 2 ; 18 2; 28 1, 4; 2 9 3 ; 34 5 ; 36 2, 3 ; 44 5 ; 45 2; 55 1; 57 9; 58 3, 4 ; 59 1; 70 6; 72 3 ; 86 2 ; to express effect 29 3 ; used ad­ verbially 44 4 ; 84 4 ; 86 5 ; proleptic 4 3 ; 43 7 preposition governing adverb 83 3 „ . and case as subject or ob­ ject of verb 8 1; 39 2 al. p r e s e n t participle as part, of the imperfect 61 3 p r o l e p s i s , examples of 2 1; 25 6 ; 26 3 ; 29 3 ; 31 1 ; 36 2 ; 63 i 5 3 ; 71 1 p r o l e p t i c use of adj. in the ac­ cusative 4 3 ; 43 7 p r o n o u n , demonstrative, epanaleptic of relative 48 3 ,, suppressed in antecedent clause 53 3 (έξ 6σου TLS ^μβΧΧβΡ άκούσεσθαι) ,, insertion of 52 2 ,, personal for reflexive 17 4 ,, r e f l e x i v e , used for re­ ciprocal 44 4; 67 2; 84 4 ; for personal 70 2 j , r e l a t i v e w. future to de­ note purpose 25 1; 49 2 ; 62 3 ; peculiar assimila­ tion of the nom. to the 2 3 354 INDEX II case of the antecedent 67 3; plural, referring to a collective singular ante­ cedent 1 1; 75 7 ; referred to implied words (νομιμώτατον etvaL ot av) 68 1 ; not repeated 29 5 p r o t a s i s , contained in οϋτω 8 2 ; 28 4; in participle 13 15 2 8 3 ; 62 2 ; 77 6 GRAMMAR s u b j u n c t i v e and optative in , same final clause 17 4 ,, deliberative 1 15 14 2 s u p e r l a t i v e adjective put predicatively in the relative clause 20 2; 21 1, 2 ; 60 2 ; 86 1 ; without article 66 2 verb, r e f l e x i v e pronoun, indirect 3 1 r e l a t i v e with indicative future to express purpose 25 1; 49 2 ; 62 3 ; peculiar assimilation of 673 ,, ,, ,, simple, to be supplied from compound 73 2 ; 81 4 finite, substituted for a participial clause 13 2 ; 15 2 ; 47 2 ; 69 2 ; 87 2 plural with neuter plural subject 57 11 of fearing w. causal on 67 3 s u b j e c t , sudden change of 4 4 ; 18 4 ; 23 3 ; 25 4 ; 4 4 5 5 59 2 ,, omission of 84 4 „ of dependent verb, made object of principal verb 44 1 ; 63 3 , , attracted into the gender of the predicate 29 5 „ grammatical, not in agree­ ment of gender 22 1 v e r b a l in rtos, impersonal neuter plural of 60 2 ; 73 2 v i c a r i o u s use of πάσχ&ν 11 4 ; 48 4 ; 75 7 ; of ποιεΐν 48 ι ; 49 2 v i v i d construction 17 4 W w h o l e co-ordinated with part 834 INDEX I I I LEXICAL The Numbers refer to Chapter and Section The Numerals suffixed to words denote respectively :— ι words that occur only once in Thuc. A αγαθός, fort is: άνδράσιν ά. yiyveadat, 77 7 άγαν δΟ 4; 63 3; 77 ι, 4 αγγί'λλειν: ξπεμπεν.. es TCLS 'Afli^as ayyaXktov 8 1; έπεμψαν πρέσβεις— ayyiXXovTas 25 9; αποπέμπουσιν ... ayyeKovvra δ η 16 2; άyyέX\εL τά re άλλα και οτι πύθοιτο 31 3> αφίκνείται ayyiXΧων δτί 31 4» τ<* ^ ΤΏ 2ίκελία βεΧτίω rjyyeXXov 17 3» άγγ^λ" λοι»σι ττ)^ Ζφοδον 43 4· Comp. άττ-, OV, ^7Γ-, /car-, παρ-, περί-, προάγγ«λμα1 = τό ayyeXdiv 74 ι aYyeXos: έπεμψαν ayyeXov 40 ι ; τ?)»' ο,ύτοϋ yv^t\v μηδέν εν τφ ά. άφανισθεΐσαν ubi Schol. 7-77 ayyeXla expl. 8 2. Comp. διααγ€ΐν: ά^ων στρατιάν 3^.; 1 2 1 ; 22 ι; 46 ι ; 84 ι ; τόν πεζόν 35 ι; 69 3 > στράτευμα 81 3 J τάΧαντα apyvptov 16 2 ; 25 ι, 3 ; 30 ι ; 31 3· Comp. aV-, ώτ-ai'-, ά?τ-, &-, iv-, Ο··, έπ-, επ-αν-, έπ-εξ-, κατ-, ξυν-, ?τ/?ο-, προ-εΐ··, προσ-, ύπ· άγκνρα 1 : επ'ay κυρών όρμίξΌνres 59 3 άγνοίΐσθαι, «0» agnosci 44 5 2 Ionic words 3 poetical words αγορά: τήρ ά. των πωΧουμένων 39 2 ; ή ά. παρεσκευάσθη 40 ι άγχώμαλοβ: ^χώμαΧα (aequo Marie) εναυμάχουν 71 4 άγων, ceitamen, praelium : 61 ι ; 771/ a£(os ό ά. 56 3 ; καλοί ό α. 68 3 > ό ά. /cofvos άπασιν ίσται περί σωτηρία* 61 ι ; υπέρ κάΧών ό ά. 'έσταί 66 ι ; 4ν ένΐ τφδε υπέρ αμφοτέρων ά. καθεστωτε$ 64 ι\ roZs irpcorois άγώσι σφαΧέντε% 61 2 ; 69 2 ; τού$ ά. ποιήσονται 49 2. —discrimen: δπερ πάσχουσι εν τοΐ$ μεyάXoι$ ά. 69 2.—anxietas: ποΧύν τον ayQva τη$ yvώμη$ είχε 71 ι άγώνκτμα: καλό^ ά. 56 2 ; 59 2 « . ; 86 2 άγωνισμόν, certatio 70 3 aSaa, securitas 29 3 ά$€ως 56 ι άδήλω$: άδηΧότατα 50 3 άδικβΰτθαι, iniuriam pati 63 3 ,*, αδόκητος, moptnatus: α. £υμ0ορά 29 5 ; 43 6 άδυνασ-ία2: του Χ^ειν ά. 8 2 άδΰνατοβ 1 4 ; 1 4 2 J ά· ^ · ΙΌ^ΤΟ rots χ/^μασί 28 4·—vv.infin. 15 ι ; 64 ι ; ά. 6ν 44 4 J άδι/ρατα for άδ^ατο^ 43 2 23 2 35^ dei aet=> εκάστοτε δ ι j 12 4 ; 57 9; 61 j ; 7 1 3 άή<το~ητο$: ά. έχωρουν 44 ^ άθλιωτ€ρο$1 75 3 άθρο£ζ€ΐν, ζ';/ unnmcongregare: την στρατιαν άθροίσαντες 33 6.— PASS, τό άθροισθέν έ$ τό κοινόν 85 3· Comp. ζννάθρόοδ: αθρόοι χωρεΐν 84 3» διητηθησαν αθρόοι 87 3 άθνμ€ϊν 21 3 Ι 60 5 ; 61 2; 76 ι ; 793 ά&υμία : άθυμίαν παρέσχε 24 3 ; ev χ α ν η §7? άθνμίαν ήσαν 55 ι αίγιαλόβ, lit us apertum neque rupibus obsessum 37 3 ; 74 2 άΐδίτΟδ: ά. έμπεφίαν 21 3 aUCa 1 (af/ceta?), foedttas 75 6 αίματονσ-θαι 1 : τό #δω/3 έπίνετο 7}ματωμ4νον 84 5 αϊρίΐν: intrans. dpas, 'starting' by land or sea: 26 1; 69 4; 79 1. —PASS, tolli: άρθέντοϊ του ση­ μείου 34 4 ; al δελφινοφόροι ήρμέναι 41 ι. Comp. άττ-, έπ-, κατ* αΙρ€Ϊν, expngnare 2 3; 3 4» 9 ι ; 11 3 ; 23 ι; 29 3 J 43 3, τηρούν ς ; βίο. 46 ι ; capere (naves, capthos), έλεϊν 59 2 . — MED. creare 16 ι.—PASS, eiigi, creari 16 1; 31 5. Comp. άν-, άφ·. 5ι-, προσ-. προσ-αν' α«τθάν€<τθαι, intellegere: c. ace. rei 8 1; 49 1; 60 1; 75 1.— c. ace. pers. et partcp. 2 2 ; 81 r; 69 1 (participium supplendum). —seq. on 65 1.—post αφ' ων 48 2. —object omitted 4 3 ; 30 1 ; 66 1 αίσ-χρόδ: επί aL αίτια 48 4 ; τηναισχΙστηνέπΊκλησιν—την δουλείαν 68 2 αΐτίίν: νεκρών αίτησαι αναιρέ­ σω 72 2 αιτία: έπ αισχρά*, αι. 48 4? τοιαύτη αϊ. έτεθνηκει 86 5 5 έν al. ίχειν w. obj. ace. and inf. 81 ι αίτςάσθαι 14 4 alTios"· αυτών αίτιοι 56 2 αΙφνιδίως 3 ι ; 23 ι aLxjwiX.o*Tos: τ ων at. 86 1 d\\rf αίωρ€ΐσθαι1, suspensum teneri: iv κινδύνφ αιωρούμαι 77 2 άκαιρο?: ουκ α. την προτέραν πεμψιν των νέων ποιήσασθαι 17 ,3 „ , ακατοδ, /inter: των α. 25 6; 59 3 dKivSvvws ctTeX^eij/ 68 3 άκμάξ€ΐν: τό ναυτικόν ήκμαζε των νε£ν τη ξηρότητι 12 3 ϊ 63 4 ακμή πληρώματος βραχεία 14 r ακοή, auditus: άποστέρησιν τψ ά. 70 §.—fama: α άκοη ϊσμεν 875 άκολουθίΐν, ducem sequi—ξυστρατεύειν 57 4> 9· Comp. ^7Γάκόλονθος, pedisequus 75 5 α κ ό ν τ ω ν es TOUS ναύτα$ 40 5· Comp. έσ-, κατάκόντιον, iacuhim: TO?S ά. 70 5 άκοντιστή$ 5 35 6 2 ; 11 2 al. άκον€ΐν c. gen. rei 16 ι.—c. ace. rei 14 4; 28 3 ; 48 3 ; ην άκοΰσαι 71 4· Comp. ύπάκρα, promiinturium 4 4 ; 33 3; ταίδ άνβχοι/σαΐ5 ά. 34 2.—/<7 ά. του ναυτικοί) 13 2; ακρίβεια, accurate 87 4 ακριβώς: αίσθόμενος ά. 49 ι άκρίτως 1 : τό ά. £uvexes τη$ άμίλλης 71 3 άκροβολισ-μάς 25 5, ακροβολισμοΐ$ έχρώντο 8 άκων 9 ι ; 57 ι ; 86 2 dA/yeivos, molestus: αΚ^εινα τη όψει 75 2 ; άνδράσιν αν τα akyiaTa προσέθεσαν 68 2 άλήθίΐα ' real state of affairs *: βουλεύσασθαι περί της ά. 8 2 άληθή$: τό ά. δηλώσαι 14 4·— SUP. τό αληθέστατον Ύνώτε 67 4 άλίσκ(ο-θαι, exptignari 23 2; έαλωκός 31 3·—capiZ 5; ^άλω 24 2 ; 34 6; 413 J 716.—' to be over­ c o m e ' : κόπφ a. 40 4· Comp αν-, άπ-αν-, προ-ανάλλίσ-θαι 1 45 2 άλλη, alia via 32 ι ; 70 4i άλλοχ ά. 71 6 αλλ* 7/ αλλ* ή 50 3 αλλήλων: 38 3'» 39 2\ 40 4 ϊ μετ ά,στάντες 57 ι ; 70 5 i ττρο<7πίπτορτας άλλήλοις 36 6 ; 34 4> έπιπίπτειρ ά. 84 3 i S5 ι ; έώρωρ αλλήλους 44 2 ; άγωνισμό? ττρόί ά. 70 3 > *^es ταραχθεΐσαι περί άλληλα* 23 3 αλλοβ 1 ι ; 12 ι ; 15 ι; 80 6. —non idem 40 ι.—ό ά. όμιλος 58 35 το α., frfmz / a r j - 2 4'» ^ τα ά. 7 45 24 3J 60 4 5 77 2.— άλλος άλλη 71 6.—ούδέρα. η 75 5· —'besides' 4 3 ; 7 3 ; 36 ι ; 43 2 άλλοσ-€, alio 3 4 ; 36 5; δΐ ι άνακζισθαι 357 64 2; 67 4.—w. potential ind. 44 άναβα£ν«ιν 2 3 ; άρεβεβήκει 44 3 ; άρεβεβήκεσαρ άνω 4 2 ; a^/fy 43 31 άραβας 2 3 ; ext ναΟί άναβάρτες 67 2 ; λαθεϊρ ανάβοντας 43 2. Comp. eVάνάβασ-is1: τωρ 'Έίπιπόλωρ της ά. 42 \ άναβιβά^σθαι, ζ>* navem imponere 33 4 ; 35 2 αναβολή, dilatio: μη ες αραβολας πράσσετε 15 2 άνάγ€<τθαι, solvere navem 69 2 άναγιγνακτκίΐν, recitare 10 άναγκάζ€ΐν 38 2; 39 2; 51 r. <ϊλλθΤ€, Λ/irtJ- 8 Ι —PASS, ήρα-γκάζορτο πολεμεΐρ 57 άλλως: α. τε και 1 2 ; 36 6 ; 6 ; τοσαυτα μαχομέρους 6V dp άρα^κάζωνται 81 3 ; 84 3 ; ες τούτο 48 2 ; 62 4 ; 75 6 ; 80 ^.—frustra, ηρα-γκάσμεθα 62 4> ήρα·γκασμένη nequiquam 42 5; 47 4 πεξομαχία 62 2 ; άναγκασί^τα? άλωσ-is: έν των τβιχώι/ τη ά. 24 2 ; μετά τηρ του Τίλημμνρίου α. νττο Μήδων 21 3· Comp. προσ32 ι άναγκαΐος: αναγκαίο*' elvat, άμα 16 2; 22 ι ; 26 3 ί 28 3 J necesseesse 6 ι ; 77 7·—'what one 37 ι ; ά. τε και 42 3 > 44 4 &1·—ά. is forced to put up, be content, τφ ηρι 15 3 ; 17 ί ; ά. ττ; ^ > 23 ι ; with': ούχ ίκαραμάλλον η ά. 69 y, ψ r 80 5 ; ά'. εω 72 3 ; ά'. rr] ή/^ρα 29 εξ άρα-γκαίου 60 4 J V* αναγκαιό­ τατης διαίτης 82 2 3.—w. partcp. 20 2 ; 78 ι άναγκα<ττό$: ά. ^σ/Savres 13 2; άμαθία, inscitia: τη ά. 36 ά. στρατεύοντες 58 3 άμαρτάναν w. gen. 50 ι.— PASS. όπερ και σ$ί<Γ6 πρότερορ ανάγκη, necesse est 14 2; e| ήμάρτητο 18 3· Comp. διαανάγκης 27 4; *ατ' ανάγκην 70 6,8. —of allies' permanent obligation άμάρτημα 5 3 to service: επικουρικά μαλλορ ή άμαχεέ: διαπεπολεμήσεται αύδι άράγκης ορτα 48 5 ; avdyK-g rots ά. 14 3 1 57 ϊ, 4 ; κατ άράγκηρ 57 5 > ^ ' αμήχανων : τα μ£> άπορεΐρ τοίαίίταίί α. κατειλημμέροι 57 11 τα < eVi άμηχαν ήσειρ 48 5 Γ άναδασ-θαι: religare 25 6; άμιλλα: τό ζνρεχϊς της ά. 71 3 remulco trahere 74 2 άμνν€<τ0αι w. ace. propulsare άναθαρσάν, fiduciam rccipere 6 3 4 ; 64 ι.—ulcisci 68 ι.—abs. 43 ι. 5 71 3 3 άμφί w. acc. 40 2 άναψ€ΐν, evertere: άνεΐλον 25 άμφι.<Γβητούμ€νο3: των ά., 6.—MED. tollere ad sepidturam. quaestionum dubiarum 18 3 ρεκρούς ύποσπόνδους ανελομένω:' άμφάτιρος: 59 ι ; κατ' αμφό­ 5 3 ; 72 ι. Comp. προστερα, terra marique 41 4 ί 50 3 ί 6; την πάλιν ά. 62 3 ; τα? ά 70 4 άναλαμβάν€ΐν, resit mere: άνα· λαμ^άνονσι τα ό>λα 85 4 5 τ * σ/αΛα άναλαβόντες 86 ι.—leeipere in navem, 'to take on board ' 25 3 ; 33 s.—sumere seeum 74 1 ; 86 1 . - d e duce 1 5; 4 2 ; 43 2 άναλίσκαν: άνηλωκέναι 48 5 ; οσα άνήλωσαν χρήματα is τον πΛεμον 83 2.— PASS. < ά ν > αλίσ"Κ€θτθαι κόπφ 40 4 (dub.). Comp. άτ-, προάνάλωμα: των άλλων ά.28 4 avapLaxccrGat1, praehum instj: urate, re par are cladem 61 3 άναν€θύσ·θαι. φιλίαν 33 4 άνα/ΐΓαύ«Γθαι: αν απ επ ανμένους 73 2 : 79 2, 4, 6 άνα-πΈΐράο-θαι, exereere se 7 4 ; 12 5; 51 2 dvapp-oo-TOS1, imparatus: ουκ ά. rpos εκαστον αυτών έσόμεθα 67 2 άναρρηγννναι 36 3 ; 40 5·— ? ^SS. avappa-yetrat (v7?es) ras παρεί-ειρεσίας 34 5 άναρρώννυσθαι 1 : άναρρωσθένres, ammo confirm at i 46 I άνασκοττ€ίν, expendere 42 3 avaarracris, profectioinvitalh 1 άναστρ€φ€<τθαι (PASS.) 44 2 άναχωρ€ΐν 23 4 ; 72 2, 4 ; 78 7 : 79 2, s , 6 ; 8 1 4 άναχώρησ-ts 30 2; 85 4 ; την ά. 48 ι ; αναχωρήσεις εζουσι 49 2 άνδράιτοΒον 13 2; 27 5 άν€ΐλ€Ϊσ-θαι1 : άνειληθεντες 81 4 av€KTOS 5 4 ; ανεκτά Ζπαθον 77 4 ; όσμαί ού/ί d. 87 2 άν€λκ€ΐν 1 3 ; "&υ$ άνελκι/σαντα? 12 4ί 23 4J 2 δ 6 where ά^ΐλκον is confused with άνέκλων. —PASS, άνειλκυσμέναι 24 2 άν€λιτισ·τον, quod sperari ne· quit 71 7.—άνελπιστότερα 4 4.— on άιΆπιστότατα 47 2 dv€p.os 34 6 ; 53 4 αντί άνιπιστήμων, imperitus 67 1 aveiriTaKTosx, nemini manci· patus: τής ά. εξουσίας 69 2 av€irt<|>0ovos: δεδιήτημαιπολλά δίκαια και ά. 77 2 ο\ντ έστησαν 45 ι ; άντιστηναι 63 4 άνθορ}Α€Ϊν 19 5 ; 31 4 ; 34 ι av9panr€ios, hominis naturae consentaneus: ανθρώπεια δράσανres 77 4 άνθρωπος: άνθρωποι )( 0eoi 77 2; )( χρήματα 27 3·—incolae regionis 29 4 5 custodes (in castello) 23 2 ; 24 2 ; qui vehuntur (in nave) 23 4; 72 1; milites 27 3; 50 3 ; 73 2: popuh univ. 5 4 ; 56 2 ; 66 2.—generatim homines 47 2; 61 2 Λ/. ; οί έπειτα ά. 56 2 avie'vat, remittere: μή ά. τον πόλεμον 18 ι ; τα των Αθηναίων ι.—w. gen. cessare ab : άνέντων σφών της εφόδου 43 η άνίστασ-θαι, castra movere: άναστάντας 49 2 ; 50 3 άντανάγ€ΐν ναυς 37 3? ναι/σί 52 ι.—MED. άντανή'/οντο 40 3 άνταρκείν 1 : μηδετο'ις παρονσιν άνταρκούντων 15 i,ubi vulgo αύτα/)^οιίν7ων άντίμβιβάξίΐν 1 13 2 άντ€ΐΓ€ξΐ€ναι 37 3 ; 42 6 dvT€iruvat 4 3 5 6 ι ά ν τ ^ α ν , resisterew. dat. 22 3; 34 4 ; 43 7; 79 β.—permanere, suppetere: έπι πολύ άντισχοΰσης της ναυμαχία? 71 5 ά ν τ η ρ ί ί ^ 1 36 2. See Add. αντί w. gen. 75 7 ; w. articular infm. 28 1 ; ά. του ..ήκζιν.. ά. δ' άντίβά\\€ΐνεύχης 75 7·—άν0' ώ? 68 3 ; 77 3 ; 863 άντιβάλλ€ΐν ι 25 6 αντιβοηθίϊν 68 ι άντιβολία 1 , obsecratio 75 4 άντικαθίστασθαι: άνπκαταστάντες Tats ναυσί 39 2 αντικρυς, aperte, plane 57 5 άντιλαβή 1 : μη ϊχοι άντιλαβην η χειρ 65 2 άντιλαμβάνεσ-θαι w. gen. as· sequi: άντιλήψεσθαι 60 2 ; 66 ι ; 77 6.—absol. capessere: περί της σωτηρία? ά. 70 7 αντιλ€γ€ΐν 49 4 άντιμ,ηχανασθαι 1 53 4 άντιμίμησιβ: τα της ά. αυτών της παρασκευή* ημών 67 2 άντιναυπη*γ€ίσθαι 62 3 ; ν°·ΰς άντινεναυπη-γημένας 36 3 avTtTraXos, aequatus 12 4 > ** αντίπαλα καθεστηκαμεν 13 2. —<ζ;*r/«/.»· 74 r άτταυτομ,ολ€ΐν1 75 5 cnrcSos1, 'flat': χωρίον a. 78 4 άττ€ΠΓ£Ϊν, interdicere: άπεϊπον μη επά-γειν 60 2 diretpia: την Συρακοσίων ά.21 4 άιτ€ΐρότατο$: οί ά. 61 2 άιτ€χ€ΐν, distare 50 2 ; 80 3'« 81 3 ; w. gen. 19 2; 29 3 ; 34 8. —MED. a bit me re se 40 4 3 6ο α7Γΐ€ναι ; ciirUvai 13 2 ; 38 ι ; 48 4» 6" αϊ. —tra?isire (ad hostem) 62 ι airuTTCtv 28 3 ; 83 ι.—χ ASS. in dubium venire 44 2 άίΓΜτηα, diffidentia 75 5 airXovs, inhabilis ad navigandum 34 5, 7; άπλοώτ6ροι (p^es) άπονοστ€ΐν οίΓοδ^χβτθαι, probare 48 3 diroSioovcu, reddere: επιστο­ λών 10; pendere 83 2.—PASS. ibid. —MED. vendere 87 3 άΐΓθδιδοάσ-KCiv: μτ? αποδρφ 86 4 άττοθνη<ΓΚ€ΐν, fttfn 87 2.—ί« σα> ααάτι 24 2; 30 2; 45 2.— <7ΛΎ<# 82 2; 85 4 dirXovs, simplex: τείχος ά. 4 ι ; ά. παρατείχισμα 11 3 airXiSs, prorsus: ουδεμία ναΰς ά 34 5· [Strabo Com. ap. Athenae. IX p. 382 Β απλώς yap ουδέ h μα τους θεούς ών λεγβι σννίημι; Hegesippus ib. v n p. 290 D υπό rip? γα/? όσ/i^s ουδέ εΐς δυνησεται απλώς διελθεΐν τον στενωπόν τουτονί; Polybius Ι 4ι 5ί 8 , 2 2 , 1 2 ; 22, 22b, 3 ; Dionys. Halic. Ant. VI 78, ι ουκ άλλο απλώς ούδ' οτιονν.] άττό: (<ι) T e m p o r a l , / < ? j / : ά' εσπέρα* 29 2; ά. πρώτου ΰπνου 43 2, α. TTJS πρώτης ζ; 73 2; 75 ι. —(£) L o c a l : 29 3 ; 58 2 ; a i d . των όλκάδων δελφινοφόροι ηρμέναι 41 2; TTJ d. των νέων πεζομαχία 62 2; ττ^ παρασκευην ά. των στρωμάτων βελτίω έχοντας 63 3 ί τα ά. του καταστρώματος 70 3? οί ά. των καταστρωμάτων 40 5 5 43 ι ; 70 *.—used proleptically by attraction to the verb : τους ά. τον πολεμίου καταστρώματος όπλί· τα? άπαράξητε 63 ι. — {ή Out o f (selection) 30 2 ; 31 5 5 87 6.—(d) ' by means of' 10 1; 21 1; 29 1; 67 3 j 70 3 : άτό μιας άρμης 71 6; 86 4.—(e) 'in consequence o f 37 1 ; 56 1; 71 3; 79 3 ; 80 3.— ( / ) ' s o u r c e from which': τα ά. τοΰ θείου 77 4ϊ ά. ξυμμαχίας αυτόνομοι. 57 3·—Ur) < t 0 JU'ige from' 48 2.—[h) interchanged with εκ 11 2; 33 3; 57 4 άττοβιβάζίΐν, exponere 29 2 άττοδ€ΐκνυναι, 'toprove' 48 1. —MED. 'to put into action': ά. ίπιστημην, εύψυχίαν 64 2.—PASS. • to be pointed out' 57 9 άποικοδομ.€ΐν, obsepire: τάς 6δού$ άποικοδομησαι 73 ι άποικος: άποικοι 57 6, 71 9 diroxivSwcvciv, 'to make a desperate venture': 67 4 ; 81 5 άιτ<>κλησι$, obstructio: τψ ά. {τοΰ λιμένος) 60 ι άποκν€ΐν: μη ά. cunctari 21 4 άιτοκομ£ζ€ΐν, abducere 82 3·— PASS, reverti 26 3 CLiroKp£v€ πανωλεθρία άπώλετο 87 6.—de reditibus : at πρόσοδοι άπώΧλυντο 28 4· Comp. ττροσάιτολώσθαι, divelli, dirimere se 44 7 5 63 ι. —φόβου ά. 56 2 άΐΓον€νοημ€νθ51, 'reduced to d e s p a i r ' : άνδρας ά. 81 5 άττόνοια, desperaho 67 4 CLTrovoo-Tctv1: eV οίκου άπενόστησαν 87 6 άπο£ηραίν€ΐν: diroiftpaivcivytodry thorough­ l y ' : άποξηράναι τάς ναυς 12 5 airoircipa 1 : ναυμαχίας ά. λαμ­ βάνειν 21 2 άιτο-πΈΐραν w. gen. 17 4', άποπειράσαι τοΰπαρατειχίσματος 43 ϊ . — : abs. with dat. of manner 36 1. — MED. 12 5 airoTT^Trciv, dimittere 3 2 ; 27 2 ; 29 1.—mittere 16 2; 19 4 ; 3 1 3 airomjJt/rrXavai1, explere: άποπλήσαι της yv^ys το θυμούμενον 68 ι diroirXetv 31 ι, 3 ; 34 7, 8 ; 50 4; άποπλεύσαντες 72 ι airopetv 48 ι ; ήπόρονν 55 2.— w. gen. indigere 49 3 άπορέα, angustiae 8 ι ; εν πολλή ά. eyiyvovTo 44 J , 6 ; is ά. καθίστασαν (αυτούς) 75 4 ; ά. τοιαύτη ib.—penuria: την ά. των χρημάτων 29 ι ; 48 2; 49 ι ; 60 2 ; 75 5 ; 80 ι j 83 4 tfiropos: το ά., quod fere ejfici non potest: έφαίνετο άπορα 73 3 ; πάντων άπορώτατον 14 2 άποσιτάσ-θαι, dist?'ahi: άπεσπάσθη το στράτευμα 80 \ άττοσ-ταυρούν, νalio claudere: άποσταυρουσαν τόν πόρον 80 6 άττοσ-τ^λλειν, mittere: άπέστελλον 19 3 ; 20 2; άποστελοΰσιν 8 ι ; άποστελοΰντες 17 3 5 ^ ω ? as απέστειλε 1 2; 2 ι ; 8 3 ; 19 4· —PASS, άποσταλέντες 58 3 J 50 ι άΐΓ0(ΓΤ€ρ6ίν, adi7nere facultatem: εκείνους άπεστερηκέναι μη αν σφάς άποτειχίσαι 6 4 χ άίΓοσ-τφηατιβ : άποστέρησιν της ακοής παρέχειν 70 6 άττοσ-ύρίΐν*: άπέσυρον 43 5 άιΐΌ<Γφά£€ΐν, obtruncare: άπέσφαξαν 86 2 άιτοτ€ΐχί£€ΐν 78 5 ; άποτειχιουντας 79 4 ; 80 6 ; άποτειχίσαι 4 ι ; 6 4·—PASS, παντελώς άποτετειχισμέναι 1 ι ; 42 3 ί 79 ι άττΌΤ€ίχισ-μ.α: του ά. 79 ι α7ΓθΤ€λ€ί<Γθαι, absolvi, perfici: άπετετέλεστο διπλούν τείχος 2 4 αρχειν $6τ οπτοτολμάν 1 , fortunae se com­ mitter e 67 1 airoTp€ir€€p€ 50 ι.—pervenire, redigi: ες οΐαν τελευτψ άφίκατο = άφιγμένοι ήσαν 75 6 ; is τούτο δυστυχία? αφικέσθαι 86 5 άφ£<ττασθαι ( M E D . ) , absistere: άφειστηκει του πολέμου 7 2.— desciscere: δσοι μη αφέστασαν Trpbs TOVS Άθηναίου5 58 3·— e x ~ cedere: άποστηναι έκ της Σικελία5 283 οίφνω 37 3 άφοράν: απιδόντες προς τι 71 3 άφορμαο-θαι (PASS.), prqftcisci 74 ι ; 75 4, 7 α φ ύ λ α κ τ η , incautus 29 3 ; 32 2 αχθεσ-θαι, gravari: dχθoμέvoυs Trj μονή 47 ι Β βά,λλβιν, petere 25 6; 33 2 ; 34 ι ; 43 3 ; 82 ι ; 83 3 ; 84 ι.— PASS. 79 2 ; 81 4· Comp. αντί-, δια', e/c-, (?μ-, επί-, εσ-, κατά-, μετά-, πάρα-, περί-, προ-παρα-, προσ-, ύπερpappapiKOs: β. χωρίον )( Έλ« ληνικόν 60 2 ; του β.} barbarorum 29 4 βάρβαρος: /3. πδλεπ )('Έλληp£5as ΤΓ. 80 2 1 βαρύΉ^ , pondus: τη β. των νέων 62 2 βοκτανίζίσ-θαι 86 4 βασ-ιλεύαν w. gen. 1 4 βααηλέΰς 19 ι ; 27 4 βέβαιος, stabilis: έλευθερίαν βεβαιοτέραν παραδοΰναι 68 3 · — ^ / z / j 67 \.—fidelis 11 6 β ί λ ο δ ; τό β. άφεΐναι 67 2 -βραχνς 3^3 βελτίω ν : β. παρασκευών 63 3· —τό /3., bonus exiius 50 3 β ί α : βία, ^ter w'/w 46 1 βιάζ€<τθαΛ, vi perrumpere 67 4 ; 69 4 ; έβιάσαντο πρbs τον λόφον 79 ι, 2 ; 83 5·—w. ace. of object, vi repellere 23 3 ; 80 6.—w ζ^ζ^?r ^ P ^ 7 e ^ 71 5 γ€γωνίοτκ€ΐν1'3, ζ/ esp.withmilitarywords,as7roXe,uos 25 ι ; άκροβολισμός 25 2 ; νυκτο/χαχία 44 τ ; ι/αυ/χαχία 70 2; 72 ι; έσβολή 18 ι; 27 4J έμβολαί 70.4; προσβολή 80 ι ; 85 4 ; Ρ ^ 55 ι ; 59 2 ; τροπή 44 3» δίωξις 34 6 ; όμoλoyίa 82 2.—eV χερσέ 7 e i , °" μ,εροι 5 2.—ύπο Συρακοσίοις b\v ylyvotatie 64 ι. Comp. €7-» έκ-, έπι-, πάρα-, περί-, προσγ ι γ ν ώ σ κ α ν , cognoscere, 'to perceive': 3 3 ; 4 3 ; 67 4 ; 77 7 ; 81 ι, yvoύς 4 ; 83 5.—existimare 42 3 ; 48 1.—statuere: yvώσeσθaL 483. Comp.άνα-, δια-,κατά-,fyyγλώσΌτα : oVo yλώσσης 10 γνώμη, animus: της y. τό θυ­ μού μεν ον 68 ι ; ξύστασιν της y. 71 ι ; Τ # 7· )( r i? παρασκευή 5 4 ; Τ Τ7 7· ) ( r?7 o^et 75 2; Τ?)Ϊ> y. έδουλουντο 71 3» τ"^ 7 · προσέχειν 15 2, w. dat. 23 ι.—consilium: οϊα 7 · 64 ι ; 72 4·—yvώμηv ποιεΐσθαι, ' t o propose' w. infin. 72 3.—sententia: τήν y. 'έχειν ώς w. participle and gen. abs. 15 i, w. nom. of fut. partcp. 72 4.—παρά yvώμηvi contra spem 13 2.—mens, sensus, ' m e a n i n g ' 8 2 ; ' j u d g m e n t ' 'wisdom,' yvoμης ελλιπείς v. L ib. γνωρίξίΐν, agnoscere: αλλω τφ yvωplσaι sc. αλλήλους 44 4 γνώσΐδ 1 , 'recognition' ){'οψις 44 2 s γοΰν, saltern, certe 47 5 ; 49 1 γ ρ ά μ μ α : τα y., litterae 8 3 γραμματίύε 1 , scriba: δ y. της πόλεως 10 γράφ€ΐν: kypa\f/ev έπιστολήν 8 2. Comp. &y-, περί1 γυμνητβία , ή = οί ψιλοί 37 2 γ υ ν ή : 7 υ , / α * , ί α 5 Kai τταΐδαϊ καΐ 0eoi»s πατρφους 69 2 Δ δάκρυον 1 , lacrima: δάκρυα 75 45 δάκρυσι πλησθέν ib. δατταν&ν, impendere: χρήματα δαπάνη πολλά δαπανώντας άλλως 47 45 sumptusfacere 29 ι δαπάνη, sumptus: αϊ δ. μείζους καθεστήκασιν 28 \ Scfs1 (collective): δαδός 53 \ δέ answering to re 1 5 ; 81 3 δ' οΰν, resumptive of narrative after an explanation, 59 2 ; 82 1 SeSiivcu, metuere: δεδιως μη 71 ι ; 73 3*, περί των εν άφανεΐ δεδιότας 75 45 δείσαντες irepl ταϊς ναυσί 53 3> Μ ποιήση 86 4 StiKVvvoiA,demonstrare: δείξατε ΌΤΙ 63 4· C o m p . oVoδειμα: φόβοι καϊ δείματα 80 3 δ€ΐν: #δει, oportebat ex aliquo pacto 8 3 ; 26 τ ; 27 ι ; ώ? δέον 15 ι.—ναυς δΐ'Οίί' δέουσας εϊκοσι 31 4 ; 53 3 δ€ΐνός, terribilis: δεινότατος τοις Ίτολεμίοις 42 3.—gravis 77 ι.— δεινόν ατι, indignum quod 12 3 5 75 2 ; 73 ι.— δεινόν ην προσπλευσαι μή 25 7 5 δ. efrai ει 73 ι.— τα δ., ' t h e difficulties' or ' t h e horrors' of war 8 1 ; 48 4 8eicr9cu, 0rar£ 32 2 ; 63 3 δ€λφινοφόρο8 1 : at κεραΐαι at δ. 41 2 6&>s: δια τό Συρακοσίων δ. (a Syracusanis) 77 6 δεο~μ.ό$ * άποθανεΐν δεσμοΐς 82 2 . δέχ€<τθαι, excipere hostes 40 5 ί τους προσφερόμενους 44 4ί έπιόντας 77 4· Comp. aVo-, δια-, έν-, προσ-, ϋποδή, f of course' 77 2; ού κατ άξίαν δη 77 35 πανωλεθρία δη 87 2 ; 7 ά Ρ δύ 6 2 4 * 70 4, 7 5 7 5 7 > 8 5 > 4·—intensive: πρφτατα δη 19 ι ; πλείστα δή 56 4 ; ηκιστα δή 86 5 ; πολλφ δή 55 2 ; oi^e/uas δή 71 6; / O 7 δι? 44 ι ; 19 ι ; 56 \ ; A V7 TTSS δή 55 ι ; τούτο δη 62 4 ί φπερ δή 62 3 ; &ά δή 26 2 ; oVcos δή 18 ι ; 7τρΙϊ/ δή 39 2 ; 71 5 ; πλην 76 δή 76 4·—in subordinate clause w. participle 18 1; 81 2 ; 86 4 δηλοΰν, declarare: 14 4 ; δη~ λώσοντας, qui nuntiarent 25 9; διακζίσθαι 3^5 38 2.—de scriptis 1 0 ; 16 1 δημοκρατ€ίσ-θαι: πόλεσι δή­ μο κρατουμέναις 55 2 δηουν 18 3 ; 19 ι ; 26 2 δ ι ά : ^ r w. Gen. of P l a c e : 35 ι ; 43 7 > 59 2 ; δ. πολέμιας 80 3·—of I n t e r v a l (place or time): δι όλί-γου 15 2; 36 5 ; 39 2; 7 1 3 ; δι ελάσσονος 4: 4·—δ. παντός, ' t h r o u g h o u t ' 6 ι ; 61 2.—of a S t a t e or Condition: δ. πολλού θορύβου 40 3 J δ. φυλακής 'έχω 8 3 ; δ. τάχοι^ 22 2; 29 2 ; δ. μάχης iyiyvovTo al εσκομιδαί 24 3 ; δι' ανάγκης 48 6; δ. ττόϊΌυ 70 8; δ. /αρδώ'ωϊ'83.—w. Ace.propter: δ. τήν του άνεμου άπωσιν αυτών 34 6 ; δ. τήν Δ. τειχιξομένην 42 2 ; δ. Λ·^/)δο5 57 9> 58 45 &' oVep 35 7; w. inf. 12 4 ; 36 3 5 44 4» 5 5 62 2 ; 68 3 «/· διάβαιναν w. ace. 80 6; 84 2, 3.—in locum 31 2; 71 7 ; 82 3 δ ι α β ά λ λ α ν , traducere 48 3 διάβαατις, transitus: την δ. 84 3·—/r. VI i 6 διαμαρτάνβιν: διαμαρτόντες των οδών 44 8 διαμαχ€σθαι, constanter pugnare 63 ι διαμέλλειν, cunctari 40 4*» &eμέλλησαν 49 4 διαναα>μα\6Ϊν 60 2 διανοεϊοτθαι 74 2 ; w. pres. inf. 12 2 ; 27 2.—w. fut. inf. 56 1.— with ως and fut. partcp. 5 4 διάνοια, consilium 60 4 ; 73 1 διαττίμιτλασ-θαι1, impleri: διεπλήσθτ) ττασα Σικελία αυτών 85 3 διαττλ€ΐν: διέπλευσε τόν Έϋριπον 29 2 διαίΓολςμβΐσΌαι: διαπεπολεμήσεται αύτοΐς άμαχεί 14 β; 25 9 Βια'ΐΓθΚ4\ίτ\σ·ι$1ξυντομωτάτη4:2 \ διαΐΓρά<Γ<Γ€<Γθαι, curare 40 2 δια<ΓκοΐΓ€Ϊν 48 3 5 διεσκόπουν περϊ σφας αυτούς /cal 07177 σωθήσονται 71-6 διασ-ττάο~θαι: διεσπασμένους 44 5; στράτευμα διεσπασμένον 78 ι δια<τα>ζ€ΐν, conservare 53 3 · — PASS, incolumem pervenire 34 6.—MED. conservare sibi: TTJV ήδονψ ένθυμεΐσθαι Cos άξια εστί διασώσασθαι 63 2. Comp. ζυνδιατάα*οτ€ΐν, disponere 4 3 διατείχισμα 60 2 διατ€λ.€ΐν: παρασκευαζόμενοι διετέλεσαν 38 3 διατρφαν, tempus terere 42 3? 43 ι . Comp. έν- SiKaiovv διαψ€υγειν, effu^ere 32 2; 44 5 5 70 7, 8 ; 71 3, 7; 77 7; 85 ι> 4· —confugere 59 2 ; διαφυγόντες προς τα στρατόπεδα 43 4 διαφθ€ΐρ€ΐν, inierimere 25 9 ; 30 3 5 44 8 al.—pessumdare navem 25 2 ; 31 τ.—PASS. perire 84 3 ; intermit 4 6 ; 30 2; 44 5.—profligari 85 1; rots διαφθαρεΐσι 87 $.—frangi (de navibus) 23 4; 25 2 ; 31 1; 41 3 ; 71 7.—corrunipi) vitiari (de flumine) : τό ύδωρ διέφθαρτο 84 5 διαψορα, dissensio 18 3.—zVzzmicitia with obj. gen. 57 11 διάφορος : τό διάφορον, discrimen 55 2 ; mutatio, * reverse' 75 7 διαφόρωβ, diverse 71 6 διαφρεΐν 1 : διαφρήσωσι 32 ι διαφιτγγάνειν 1 , diffugere 44 8 διαχ€ΐμ.ά?€ΐν, hiemare 42 3 διαψύχαν: διαψυί-αι 12 4 διδασκαλείο ν 1 παίδων 29 5 διδάσ*κ€ΐν, suadere 18 ι διδόναι, */#;'£, tribuere: μή δ. τροφήν 48 5 5 δόντων τριήρεις δύο 50 2; άνδρας Ά 0 . δώσΈΐ? ομήρους 83 2; έδίδοσαν έκάστω κοτύλην ϋδατος 87 2.—δ. δίκας, ' t o submit to arbitration' 18 2.—permittere, concedere: ούκ έδίδοσαν δια της εαυτών δδόν 32 ι ; ού δώσειν διέκπλουν 36 4· Comp. άπο-, έκ-, έν-, έπι-, κατά-, κατα-προ-,πάρα-,προδΐ€κΐΓλ€ίν 36 4 διέκπλουδ, a naval manoeuvre which consisted in breaking the enemy's line before striking: 36 4 ; 70 4.—transitus, exitus 69 4 δίβξιέναι, pervadere: ol τήν φυλακήν διεξήλθον 85 2 διύέναι, fransire: διελθεΐν 32 ι ; 43 7 ? διελθόντες τά χαλεπώτατα των χωρίων 73 3 διικν€ΐσθαι χ , pertingere,ferire, 4 to reach, h i t ' 79 2 δίκαιος: πολλά ές ανθρώπους δ, δεδιήτημαι 77 2 δικαιοΰν 2,3 , aequum censere, velle, ' t o d e t e r m i n e ' 68 1 SiK r o ^ s διωκο­ μένου* 85 2.—PASS. 44 8. Comp. έτη-, καταδίωί-is: δ. ουδεμία eyiveTo 34 6 δοκίΐν, putare 41 4 ; 73 2 ; 77 2.—videri, putari 1 4 ; H 4 ; 51 2 ; δόξαντες 56 2 ; 60 3 αι.—δο/ceiv 'έμοηε, mea sententia 87 5 · — Impers. placet 4 4 ; 40 4 ; 43 ι ; 47 3 ; 74 ι al. Comp. προδόκησ-is, opinio: της δ, προσ*γ€Ύ€νημένΎΐ$ αύτφ του...elvai 67 ι δόξα, opinio: τό ύπόλοιττον της δ. 66 3 ; 'ι™ ΤΎ} δ. 71 3 δο$·ά£€<τθαι, existimari 75 6 δοράτιον: τοις δορατίοις 84 3 δουλβυα,ν, sei-vire 85 4 δουλοΰσθαι, subicere sibi: δουλωσόμενοι 68 2 ; 75 7·—PASS, constringi^frangi: την ^νώμ-ην- έδουλοϋντο 71 3· Comp. καταδράν τούτο 68 3 J r 0 α ι '' τ 0 δ· 83 ι.—δραν)(ττάσχειν 71 7 ί 77 4· —PASS, τώ? δρωμένων 71 3 δραχμή 27 ι hvzcrQai1, urinarz 25 γ. Comp. καταδυναμις, opes: δυνάμει πρού­ χοντες 21 3 ; 28 3; 66 2 ; 66 3 αι. δΰνασθαι, posse: οϋτως Οπως δύνανται 67 4 > ού δυνήσεσθαι 36 6 ; στρατιάν Βσην πλείστην έδύνατο 21 ι ; ώς έδύναντο άδηλότατα 50 3 ; 69 3> 8® Χ> ονκ έδυνηθησαν λαμβάνειν 25 4 5 83 5 > ον δυναίμεθ' αν χρησθαι ξυμπάση τ$ στρα· τιξ, 11 3 ί €ί δύναπο 46 ι ; 56 ι; ην δύνηται άξων 13 2 ; 29 ι ; 72 el 367 3 ; όσον αν δύνησθε 63 ι ; 75 4 · — valere 58 3 δυνάοτπί^1 33 4 δυνατόβ w. inf. 56 2.—κατά τό δ. 36 4> ω$ έκ των δ. 74 i.—firmus, incolumis: νηες δ. )( άπλοώτεραι 60 2 δυο 16 ι ; 87 2; δ. καϊ πλείους 70 6 δυο-αναο-χ€Τ€Ϊν1: δι/σα^ασχετοΟϊ'τε? τα Ύ^νόμενα 71 6 δυστυ\6ΐν: είκότως δ. 18 2 δυο-τυχήβ: e'pyov δυστυχέστατον 87 5 δυστυχία: & τούτο δυστυχίας άφικέσθαι 86 5 Β lav, sinere 62 4· — ο#κ el'a, ζ/£ta&z/ 48 2 έαυτοΰ: άσθενέστερον αυτό έ. 66 3 > 73 3 ί έαυτφ 85 ι ; πιστεύσας εαυτόν 86 3 5 τό κα0' εαυτόν 44 ι ; 69 2 ; 78 ι ; eauTtu?/ 36 5 5 37 ι ; 42 ι ; 69 4 €γγί*γν€<τθαι: πασι στρατοπέδοις έ^ί^νεσθαι φίλεΐ δείματα 80 3 > μέλλησις ένε^ένετο 49 4 €γγύθ€ν: τφ ϋδατί χρώμενοι... ούκ έ. 4 6 eyyiis 2 2 ; 3 ι ; 25 8; 53 4 ; 69 2; οτί eyyύτατα τούτων 86 5 Ιγκάρσ-ios: τοΟ έ. τείχους 7 ι ; Trpos τό eyκάpσιovi i cross-wise ' 4 ι έγκαταλαμ,βαν€<τθαι, deprehendi: iy κατ ελήφθη 24 i\ iyKaταληφθέν 30 2 εδώδιμος, esculentus: τι έ. 78 4; ό'<τα τις έχει εδώδιμα 39 2 eO&etv: έθελησαιΙΖ 2.—w. neg. ?* I'aw 25 4 ; ^ a w μ· $ °"ι/ο 38 ι; μ. /cat πλείους ναΰς 70 6 ; κα#' eV έκαστον )(κ. πολλά 70 6; ού καθ' έν μόνον των πραγμάτων 75 2 eiioOcos1 57 95fl"<*paτό είωθός, contra consuetudinem 60 5 ; 75 5 4κ: (a) in a d v e r b i a l p h r a s e s : CKCLVO9 εκ του επί θάτερα 37 2 ; έ | oVou 73 3 ; έκ πλαγίου w. gen. 6 2; e"£ αναγκαίου 60 4 ; e£ εναντίας 44 4 ; tbs e c τω? δυνατών 74 ι ; V cbs εκ των υπαρχόντων 76; εκ των παρόντων 62 ι ; 77 ι ; eK του * εικότος 66 2 ; 68 3 ? έ* βραχέος και περιγραπτοϋ 49 2 ; eif ανάγκης 27 4» ^^ r o0 eU7r/)exous 57 7 Σ έκ του Οπισθεν 79 4· (^) έκ παρα­ σκευής πολλφ κρείσσονος 55 2; e/c πολλής περιουσίας νέων 13 ι.— e/c καταλόγου 16 ι ; 20 2 ; εκ περίπλου 36 3 ; έκ παρακελεύσεως 40 4 · — ' b y reason o f with artic­ ular infin. 68 4.—by attraction w. article 2 1 ; 25 6 ; 31 1; 37 2 ; 71 1; 86 3.—interchanged with από 11 2; 33 3 ; with διά 87 2 €κα<τταχόθ£ν, undique: οσοις e v 20 2; δσψ ε. 21 ι UKCUTTOS, in relative clause 4 3 ; ως έκαστοι δύνανται 13 2.—εΐς έκαστος, unusquisque 44 ι ; 69 2 ; 70 6 ; 75 4·—τις έ. 75 5·—αυτοί ε. 70 3·—καθ' εκάστους )( ξύμπαντες 64 2 ; κα#' έκαστα των yiyvoμένων 8 ι.—-w. ως, pro sequisque: τάλλα ως έκαστα 65 ι ; and par­ ticiple 74 2 €Kcu>s 25 ι eK7riirT€iv, eici, delabi 71 6 ; 74 2.—patria expelli 33 5 ; e£eπεπτώκει 50 ι έκπλεΐν 52 ι ; 56 ι ; ως έκπλευσόμενοι 60 2 ; 67 4 ; 75 7· Comp. 5 ί - , €7Γ- ^ K ^ | L S 42 3 ; 69 2 ; 70 6 ; 71 7 εκ-ϊτλήσ-σ-εσ-θαι, percelli, consternari: έκπλα'γέντων 21 4 > 43 6 ; έκπεπλήχθαι 63 3 " 69 2 > ε'κττλουδ, profectio classis: 38 3 ; το? £. ποιησόμενος 17 ι ; 50 3 5 βιάσασθαι τόν 'έ. 72 3·—(de loco) exitus 70 ι. Comp. 01έκιτ-ολιορκεΐσ-θαι, expugnariVk 3 ; πόλει έκπεπολιορκημένη 75 5 «KirpCcLV1: έξέπριον 25 6, 7 εκτειχίζει,ν 4 5 ; 26 3 εκτρυχοΰν, atterere 48 2 εκών: έκόντα άφεΐναι τούς'Α. 81 ι ; έκόντας 57 9 ϊ έκόντας είναι 81 3 ελοία, 87 4· — ξυντεμόντας τάς πρφρας ές ε'λασσον, brevius 36 2.—ούκ έλασσον 'έχειν, non superari 5 45 36 3·—ούκ 0. μετείχετε 63 3 ε λ ά χ ι σ τ ο ς 60 2 ; 6» έ. 70 4 · — ελάχιστον, brevissime 50 2.— ελάχιστα βλάπτοντες 68 3 Τ. VII εμπορ^νεσθαυ 3^9 ελευθερία 68 35 &** ελευθερία ως σφάς άπιέναι 82 ι ελεύθερος 58 3·—πατρίδος της έλευθερωτάτης 69 2 ελευθεροΰσ-θαι, liberari 56 2 ελευθέρως: κοινωνοί έ, της αρ­ χής οντες 63 4 "Ελλην as a d j . : άκοντιστάί "Έλληνας 42 ι Ε λ λ η ν ι κ ό ς : Έ . χωρίου)( βαρ­ βαρικού 60 2; Έ . στρατεύματι 75 7; Έ . 'έθνη 58 3J Έ . ( ^ 7 ^ ) 87 5 Έλληνας: πόλεις 'Ελληνίδας 80 2 ελλιιτής: μνήμης ελλιπείς 8 2 ελττίξειν, expectare w. fut. inf. 38 2 ; 77 4 ; 80 5.—existimare w. pres. inf. and av 73 2 ; w. aor. inf. and aV 61 3 ; w. fut. inf. 21 2 έλπές, spes: ελπίδος τι παρείχε 48 2 ; ή μεγίστη 4. 67 ι ; 75 2 ; 77 ι, 3 5 τ< £ ττα/?' ελπίδα του αύχήματος 66 3» ^ έλπίσιν είσί 25 ι, 9 > ^ έλπίδι ων αίρήσειν 46. * —opinio: την έ. έχυράν εΐχον 41 4 ; ο) e. του φόβου 61 2 ελώδης 1 : e. χωρίον 47 2 έμβάλλειν, impressionemfacere (de navibus) 25 5 ; 70 6.—PASS. 34 5 ; αυτούς έμβεβλήσθαι 70 6 εμβολή, impressio: τοις i. 36 3 ; αέ e. )( προσβολαί 70 4 ε'μβολον, rostrum navis: τοις ε. 36 3 J TWV <:. τη παρασκευή 40 5 έμπαλάο-σ-εσ-θαι*, implicari: έμπάλασσόμενοι κατέρρεαν 84 3 εμιταρέ'χειν,//'<3!#^£: τί)»' πόλιν έμπαρασχόντεςπροκινδυνευσαι56 3 εμπειρία: πάτριον την έ. 'έχειν 21 3> εμπειρία της χώρας 44 8 ; τά, της έ. χρήσιμα 'έσται 49 2 έμπειρος: πολέμων ε", οντες 61 3 έμτΓΐιτλάναι 1 : ένέπλησαν 82 3 έμιτιπράναι.: ενέπρησαν (τάς ναΰς) 74 2 ; έμπρησαι 53 4 ί 60 2 έμιτίπτειν, conici: εν τφ τοιούτφ χωρίφ έμπεπτωκότας 87 2.— incidere (de terrore) 34 2 ; 80 3 εμιτορεΰεσ-θαι1, mercaturam facere: εμπορευόμενοι 13 ι 24 37 ο έμπορων έμττόριον, ' m a r t ' 50 2 fynropos, mercator 24 2 Ι μ φ α ν φ : τφ έ. λόγφ, p u b l i c , official statement' 48 3 Ιμφανώβ 1 : e. ψηφιξΌμένους 48 I €μψρά<Γ(Γ€ΐν, obstruere: έμψρά£ασαι 34 2 ^μψυχοβ: άλλα & 29 4ν: L o c a l 4 6 ; ey y 51 ι ; έν πλαισίφ 78 2; eV r<£ ear' εκείνα 58 ι ; eV όλίγφ 67 3 ; ^ έλαχίστφ 70 4 J & r4> αυτφ 49 3 ; 87 2 ; eV τφπρδσθεν 78 4> 5 J 81 3 · — T e m ­ p o r a l 30 2 ; & τφ αύτίκα 42 2 ; τταραυτίκα 71 7 ; & f 7"<£δε 63 3 J & τούτφ 23 2; 42 ι ; 50 ι ; 81 ι ; eV τη ρυκπ' 80 3 J e> <Γ7ΓΟΖ/- δα& 18 2.—Of the S t a t e , C i r ­ c u m s t a n c e s 1 1 1 ; έν μβΎάλτ) με­ ταβολή δν 76 ι ; έν πολλφ θορύβφ ήσαν 81 4 J & έλπίσιν είναι 25 ι, 9 ; 4 6 ; έν με^ίστφ κινδύνφ ήσαν 58 4 5 ^ πόρφ ώρ 81 4 5 ^ δεινοΐς είναι 8 ι ; 48 4 5 ^ τοι5τ^> τύχης είσί 33 6 ; eV παντί δη άθνμίας ήσαν 55 ι ; έν χερσί γενόμενοι 5 2 ; έν πολλή ταραχή έ^ί^νοντο 44 ι; έν τφ αυτών τρόπφ 67 2.—έν αίτια τόν Γ. εΓχοι* 8 1 1 ; έν ολιγωρία έποιοϋντο (αυτά) 3 2.—& φ έσμέν 11 ι ; 14 3 5 68 2.—έν ένϊ τφδε άγων ι καθεστώτες 64 2.—έν ^έπιστολαΐς ϊστε 11 ι . — ' a s far as depends o n ' 8 2.—eV το?? πρώτοι 19 4 ; έν τοις πρώτον 24 3; 27 35 ^ r 0 ' S χαλεπώτατα 71 3 4νάγ«ιν, instigare 18 ι Ivavrios, obvius: το t£ εναν­ τίας 44 4·—contrarius 48 4 5 75 7; τουναντίον η, contra quam 80 ι ; 87 ι.—των έ., hostium 11 35 21 3 ; 3 3 ξ ; 34 7 ; 42 3 ; 68 ι αι. έναντιοΰοτθαι, adversari: ήναντωϋτο (αι. ενηντιουτο) 50 3 €v6eijs, parum sufficiens: πάν­ τα 'έργφ 'έτι ένδεά eli'at 69 2 ένδεια, inopia: άποθανεΐν έν­ δεια διαίτης 82 2 €νδ4χ€<τθα.ι, probare 49 2 6νδιατρ(β€ΐν 81 4 -^έταζαν «νδιδόναι, e» manus tradere 48 2.—PASS, -ί?*/ 7τολύ τό βουλόμενον τοις Ά . ενδίδοσθαι τα πράγ­ ματα 49 ι . — I n t r a n s . cedere 66 3 €νδόθ€ν: τώι> Α 73 3 ενέδρα, insidiae: έ. τινά ποιησάμενοι 32 2 ένεΐναι, inesse: χρήματα ένήν τοις τείχεσι 24 2 £ν£κα: των δλκάδων & της κομιδης 34 ι ; T^S ξυμμαχίας ί·. 57 9 ; ουττ<·/> £\ 19 5J ών 'έ. 43 5 &/θα, ubi 26 2 €νθάδ€, /foV: τη έ. πεξομαχία 62 2 ; τους έ. 64 ι ; τα έ. 14 4 ; τώι» Ι. 15 ι £νθ€ν καΐ 2νθ€ν, utrinque 81 4 6νθυμ€ϊσθαι, cogitare, ' to think over* w. ace. 18 2 ; w. cos 63 3 ; w. ort 64 2 ένθύμιος*. eV^i^Mw ποιούμενοι, ' t a k i n g to h e a r t ' 50 4 €Via\)TOs 28 3 ; r^s ώρα? roO e. 47 2; ένιαυτόν, totum annum 48 5 €vvea, novem: τρίς έ. 50 4 cvopdv, ' t o judge from the p a s t ' : ένεΐδον 36 2 ; 62 ι ένταΰθα, > z · 80 6.—taw<: 44 1 #V IvTOs, intus 22 1 ; 25 5 ; έ. re καέ 'έξωθεν 36 2 ; e*. ποιεΐν 5 3 ; e. είχοί' τό? θχλοϊ' 78 2 4ντυγχάν€ΐν 29 4 ; 43 5 ; 44 5 €^άγ€ΐν, educere copias 5 ι . Com p . έπ^ξαίφνηδ 32 2; 40 ι, 3 cfavurTcivai, expellere 77 4 · — MED. surgere, castra movere 49 3 €ξαρτυ€ατθαι, instruere: πρδς τάλλα έξηρτύσαντο 65 2 1 Igciirctv : άκριβεία έ. 87 4 cfeXavvciv, excurrere equo 27 5· — M E D . expellere: έζελάσασθαι έκ της χώρας 5 4 4|€ργά^€<τθαι: εζειργασμένα 2 4 έ|φχ€<τθαι 11 4 > 2 2. Comp. έπ4^€τά|€ΐν, recensere: την στρατιάν πασαν άθροίσαντες εϊ τις ύπελέλειπτο έξετάσαι 33 6 ; τόν πεξόν πάντα έξετάσαντες 35 ι €ξηγ€Ϊσθαι— €$-ηγ€ΐσ·θαι, explicare 50 4 Ιΐήβ: πάντα* e. 29 4 έξιέναι, aroire 3 ι ; έζίοιεν 4 6 ; 47 3 ; 73 1,2 al.—progredi 11 4· Comp. eV-, 7rpoέξορμάν, ' t o start working': ol έξορμώντες [ναυν) 14 ι 4£ου<Ηα, licentia 69 2; ^. (eVrt) for 'έζεστι w. infin. 12 5 ^ξω w. gen. 6 2 ; ?. το^μ,ατο* 30 2 ; 53 ι ; 57 1 1 ; 58 3·—absol. 4 3·—τλ ££ω, *?# quae in agris sunt 37 3.—το 'έξω, exterior pars 694 έξωθβΐν, * to drive b a c k 5 : έξεώ0oui/ 52 2.—PASS. 36 5 ; 63 1 ^|ωθ€ν : εντός re καΐ έ. 36 2 έοικέναι, similem esse: φόβος ούδενΐ έοικώς 71 2 ; έφκεσαν 75 5 Ι ο ρ τ η : e. oi/cr97S 7 3 2 ; e*> ττ? e. ?#. €ΐταγγ4λλ€ΐν, iubere, indicere: στρατιαν έπαγγέΧλων 17 ι eirctyciv, afferre, subvehere 60 2.—adversus hostes ducere 3 3 ; 5 3 ; 6 1.—MED. arcessere 57 1 1 ; ad suas partes perdticere 46 Ιτταγωγη, subvectio: της έ. των επιτηδείων 24 3 ciraipecrBai, excitari: ύπό με­ γάλου μισθού έπαρθέντες 13 ι.·— efferri: επαιρόμεναι τη νίκη 41 35 w. inf. επηρμένοι μη άνιέναι 51 ι €ΐτακολουθ€Ϊν 75 4 liraKTOs, advecticius 28 ι &jra\£is (collectively) 28 2 . — PL. τας e. άπέσυρον 43 5 enuvapaCvciv 1 29 3 Ιττανάγβιν, reducere 3 3 Ιτταναγωγή 34 6 ; ras έ. 4 4 Ιιτανορθοΰν 1 , ' t o restore' 77 7 enravnjs 1 , acclivis: λόφου 4. 79 2 €τταύ|€ΐν: έπαυξησαι 70 7 lireC, cum, postquam: i. Kaipbs έδόκει εΐναι 34 4 ; with aor. ind. 1 1; 26 1; e. ct7ra£ έταράχθησαν 44 7· —quonium, qtda 24 2 ; 30 2 ; 67 3 eirefyecrOai w. infin. 42 4 ; 70 3. — w . προς and a c e 84 2 4ττ€ΐδάν 66 3 ; 67 2 £πί 371 €ΐΓ6ΐδή, postqtiam 13 2 ; 18 3 ; 22 1; 26 3 ; 32 1; 35 1; 44 8; 46; 50 4 ; 51 2; 55 2 ; 60 5; 65 3 at. €ΐΓ€ΐδή'ΐΓ€ρ, quoniam 33 6 2ττ€ΐτα : (ττ/)ώτοϊ/) μεν...'έπειτα without δέ 19 ι ; 26 2 ; 34 4 5 41 2 ; 43 τ ; 58 ι ; 66 2.—after χρόνον μέν τίνα 40 4? 78 7 5 επί πολύ μέν 79 6 ; ημέρας μέν τ ίνας 87 3·—after particp. 61 2.—'έπειτα δε και 23 ι ; 52 2; 82 2.—οέ έπειτα, posteri 56 2 έττεκβοηθβΐν1 53 2 cireKirXeiv 1 : έπεξέπλεον 37 2 Ιττίξάγειν, extendere aciem 52 2 €ΐτ€§€λθ€ϊν, hostiobviam ire 51 2 Ιττβρωτάν 10 &π·€<τθαι in bellum 1 3 ; εΐποντο 57 7· Comp. έ0-, ξυν€ΐτ4χ€ΐν, aliquantum subsistere: έπισχεΐν 50 4 5 w. ace. of time 74 1.—w. art. inf., ' t o refrain from ' : έπέσχον τό έπιχειρεΐν 33 3. —έ. "γην, occupare, obtinere 62 4 4irC: w. G e n . L o c a l : ' t o ­ wards': eV' οΐκου 25 3 ; 26 3 ; 3 1 1 ; 35 1; 87 6 ; 80 2 . — ' o n ' : οι έ. των νέων 71 5 ; έ. του τείχους 28 2.— Modal: παρατετα-γμένην ούκ έπ* όλί^γων ασπίδων 79 ι ; έπ' ά'γκυρων όρμίξοντες (τα πλοία) 50 3 · — Temporal, 'in the time o f : έπ' έμοϋ 86 5·—w. D a t . Local, super: έπ άλλήλοις κειμένων 85 ι ; 87 2 ; apud,' a t ' 35 2; 78 3 ; 80 6 ; 84 3 ; e. θαλασσή 4 2; 4 6 ; εφ' δπλοις 28 2.—Final, 'for the purpose o f : e. τφ σφετέρω όλέθρω 79 3 ; ώς έ. ναυμαχία 34 ι ; ws ΐ. τιμωρία 68 ι . —'for the control of' 19 2.—ut in, pro,' considering': ως έ. με'γέθει 30 4·—'in the power o f 12 5. — ' a f t e r ' 62 3.—'in addition to,' 'over and above' 75 5 ( d u b . ) ; 86 2.—'under the circumstances in w h i c h ' : e. προφάσει 13 2 ; 46 ι ; 48 4 ; 59 2 ; 62 1; 69 2; 73 3 ; 815.— 'on condition of' 82 1. w. A c e . L o c a l : e. πολύ 11 4 ; 35 2 ; 40 5 ; 65 2 ; έ. πλέον 48 2 ; 24-—2 372 Ιπιβαίνζιν tos 4, πλείστον 69 3> 76; έπ1 αμφότερα 'έχων 48 3ί & τ(? ^ έκεΐνα 58 ι ; 64 ι ; 4κ του έ. θάτερα 37 2J es τά e. θάτερα 84 4> ^0' (tow δεΐ 66 ι ; 82 3 5 e. | £ ^foeis 36 2 ; 4. τό βέλτιον χωρουντα 50 3· Temporal: 6. πολι* 22 2 ; 38^ ι ; 39 2 ; 71 5 > 79 6 ; 4. οκτώ μψα$ 87 2.—Final: 4. φρνγανισμύν οπότε εξέλθοιεν 4 6 ; ^ . στρατιαν ψχετο 7 2; 12 ι ; 15 ι ; επ} αυτό τούτο 34 5 5 36 ι.—adversus, contra: τοις λίθοι? 4π* αύτην έχρώντο 705;2 3 ; ί ΐ 2 ; 682.—inComp. it marks sequence, addition or repetition: επιΐναι 27 3 ; 42 2 αι. επιμεταπέμπεσθαι 7 3 ; έπιπέμπειν 15 ι ; 4πισκευάζειν 1 ι ; έποικοδομείν 4 3 j εφέπεσθαι 78 2 επιβαίνων 62 2 ; w. dat. 70 5 ; w. επί and ace. 69 4 €ΊΓΐβάλλ€σ-θαι 65 2 επιβάτης 1 5 ί 62 3 ; 70 3, 5 έπιβοαν 70 7·—MED. obtestans clamitare 69 2 ; 75 4 «τιβοηθ€ίν 3 4ί 14 3ί 53 3 επιβολή, iniectio 65 ι ; 62 3 Imfio-uXeveiv^nzre, ' t o plan': τόν Ζκπλουν επιβουλεΰσαι 51 ι επιβουλή των νέων 70 6 «ri7fyv€ TVV επωϋσαν ήμέραν 74 ι.—w. obj. ace. obire: 4πηει τό στράτευμα 78 ι.—invadere abs. 11 3 ; 27 4 ; 58 4 ; οι επελθόντες 71 ι ; 77 4 5 79 5 ; w. dat. 3 ι ; 55 2 ; 64 ι ; w. ace. and πpas 4 2, and επί 49 2. Comp. άντ· επίπλους έπιθειασμό'ς 1 75 4 Ιπιθυμβΐν w. infin. 77 7 επιθυμία, cupiditas: του πιεϊν επιθυμία 84 2 έπικαθήσ-θαι*, obsidere 27 4 έπικαταβαίν€ΐν 7rpos τήρ 0άλασσα*/ 23 ι ; 35 2 ; επικαταβάντε* 84 5 ciriiceftrOatj/rmire, aggredi 4:2 3; 7 1 5 ; 7 9 5 ; 84 3·—w. d a t . 8 1 4 €πικηρυκ€ΰ€(τθαι ώ% τίνα 48 2. —7rpos τίϊ/α 49 ι.—τινί 83 2 Ιπίκλησις, appellatio: την αίσχίστην 4. την δουλείαν 68 2 €πικουρ6ΐν 57 ί ο επικουρία: έπικονρίαν 4πόριζον 18 4 ί α * £· ζυνελέγησαν 59 ι επικουρικός, auxiliaris: 4. πράτγματα 48 5 €πικρατ€ΐν (absol.), praevalere 71 3 ; 72 ι.—w. dat. instr. 42 6 ; τφ πεζψ 4. 63 2 4πικρ€μάννυσ-θαι: του 4πικρεμαμένου κινδύνου 75 7 €πιλέγ€σθαι, eligere 19 3 επίλοιπος 1 , reliquus: ταϊ$ 4. ναϋσι 22 2 €πιμέλ€ΐα: 4. αυτών %σται 16 2; Trept τον σωθηναι την 4. έποιοΰντο 56 2 4πιμΑ€σ"θαι abs. 8 3 ; 39 2 4πιμ€ταπ€μπ€σθαι 7 3 4πινο€ΐν, consilium inire: 43 ι ; 59 3J 72 2.—excogitare 37 ι Ιπιπαρι^ναι, * to advance along the l i n e ' 76 €πιπ€μπ€ΐν, denuo mittere 15 1 4πιπίπτ€ΐν, irruere: 4πεπιπτον αλλήλοίς 84 3.—w. dat. repente adoriri 29 3, 5.—ingruere (de quovis malo subito) 29 5 €πιπλ€ΐν, classe invadere: 4πιπλεύσονται 12 4 ; 25 β; 40 3 ; 70 2, 3.—w. dat. 22 1; 34 3 ^irfarXevtris1: την 4. 36 6 ^πιπληροΰσ-θαι 1 , supplere numerum nautarum 14 2 επίπλους, classis hostilis adventus 36 1.—facultas impetus faciendi: επίπλου? %ζουσι 49 2 ίπφρωνννσθαι €ΐΓΐρρώννυσ-θαι, ' t o pluck up c o u r a g e ' : έπερρώσθησαν 2 i\ έπέρρωντο 7 4, 17 3 Ιττκτκβυάζαν, reficere 1 1 ; 24 1; 38 2.—MED. aliter instruere navem, ' to alter the construction o f 36 2 Ιττίσ-τασ-θαι w. ace. 14 4 ; 44 3, 5 ; 48 3, 4.—w. inf. επιστα­ μένου* νεΐν 30 2 ; 44 3.—w. ort 14 1.—w. rel. cl. 44 3 €ΐτιστ€λλ€ΐν, mandare (per litteras) 14 4 ΙτΓίσ-τήμ,η 21 4 ; 37 ι ; 62 1; της φωνής τη i. 63 3 . — )( ρώμη 63 4·—ή' έ. ή εύψυχία προφέρει 64 2 : τ# έ. )( απειρίαν 21 4 επιστολή 8 2 ; 1 0 ; 11 ι ; 16 Ι €ΊΓΐτ€ΐχί£€ΐν 4 7 4 €ττιτ€ΐχισμ,08 18 4 J 28 3 «iriTeXeiv 4 2.—PASS. 2 4 eVeτετέλεστο v. I. pro άπετετέλεστο €ΊΓΐτήδ€ΐ09, idoneus 20 2; 60 3 * > & δίαιταν επιτήδεια 74 ι.—amicus 73 3 ; 75 3·—SUP. έπιτηδεώτατον )( πολεμιώτατον 86 3 · — τ ^ ^·> Λ?#*meatus 4 4 ; ! 3 ι ; 24 3'» 60 5 ; 77 6; 78 7J 80 ι ; 83 4 €TriTrj8€vcris, agendi ratio 86 5 €*iriTi6evai, imponere: έπέθεσαν 36 2.—statuere: την είκοστην έπέ­ θεσαν 28 4·—MED. aggredi: έπιθησόμενοι 41 4 > w. dat. 29 3 ί 50 3·—manitm admovere operi 42 4 έπιτίμ/ησ-ι^ 1 48 3 iiriTpeimv, permittere rem disceptandam 18 3 Ι τ τ ι τ υ γ χ ά ^ ι ν , nancisci, * to come upon' w. gen. 25 2 ( έπιφανήδ, conspicuus, visible' 3 4 ; 19 2.—clartis, illusiris 69 2 €iru|>€p€iv: επενε^κείν τι τό διάφορον avToh 55 2.—έ. όπλα, arma inferre 18 2.—PASS, inferri (de bello): TOP έπενεχθησόμενον πόλεμον 56 2.—MED. adoriri 37 3 ; 40 4 ; w. dat. 70 2 ΐΊτιφήμισ-μ-α1, ταπεινότητα άφίκατο 75 6; & Xetpas ίόντες 70 5 ΐ 4* 7· — c subst. et adi., respectu alicuitts rei: εξουσία is δίαιταν 6g; προθυμία is το έπιπλβΐν 70 3 ; μεγίστη ώφελία is τό θαρσεΐν 69 3 ; άρΎότεραι is τό δραν 67 3 > έπιτ'ήδειόν τι is δίαιταν 74 ι ; es τό? πδλεμον 20 2; πρόθυμοι is τον 374 ίσακοντίζζιν πόλεμον 18 3 5 ρ$σται is τό βλάπτεσθαι 67 3> ϋστερός του es τα άλλα 77 2.—c. verb, fin e m a g e n d i significat: 7τολλά eis 0eoi)s νόμιμα δεδιήτημαι 77 2; OXiyov ουδέν es ο#δε/> επενόουν 59 3 ; ουδέν oXiyov es ουδέν κακοπαθήσαντες 87 6; es άρετήν νενομισμένην έπιτήδευσιν 86 5 5 ^s τό KOLKOvpyeiv φκοδομεΐτο τό Te2%os 19 2 ; es τό μή άδικεΐσθαι 63 3 > άντιπαρεσκευάζοντο cos es μάχην 3 2 ; 2 3 5 es ύποδοχήν του στρατεύματος έτάσσοντο 74 2; πέμπει es φυλακήν αυτών είκοσι ναυς 4: J; μη is άναβολάς πράσσετε 15 2.—coram 56 2.—with numerals 19 3» 32 2, 33 ι.— άναλίσκειν χρήματα 'is τι 83 2.— es oXiyov 36 5 4σακοντ^€ΐν 78 3> 6 € 37 2.— praecedente ν . ουδέ, μηδέ pro ουδέτεροι, μηδέτεροι; ουδέ κα#' έτερα 42 6 ; ουδ' αφ1 έτερων 44 ι ; ουδέ μεθ' ετέρων 33 2 ; μηδέ καθ' έτερα 59 2 ετι, adhuc: 67 ι ; eVt w 13 2; 63 2 ; eVt κα£ εκ των παρόντων 77 ι ; 72 3·— c · n e g · Μ — ^ r i 6 4 ; 11 3 5 4 2 3·—ου—'έτι 24 3 ; 47 3 5 50 3, 4 ; 56 2 ; 60 ι ; 70 2; 72 4'» 7 8 7 5 8 4 3·— c · compar. etiam, 'έτι μείξω 40 5 5 μείζων 'έτι 55 ι ; 'έ. πλείω 45 2 ; 'έ. ήσσω 48 5 5 & χ φ ω 76 ι ; £. μάλλον 76; μάλλον 'έτι 55 2 ; 79 3.—praeterea 2 ι ,· 7 3 ; 12 ι ; 14 3 ; 34 ι ; 46; 48 5 5 57 2 , 8 ; 87 ι.—denuo, in posterum 48 5 ; 59 3 5 72 3 €τοιμά£€ΐν, par are: χρήματα καΐ ναυς ετοιμάζων 17 ι ; 18 4·—MED. τά περί της στρατιάς τον ^XXoyov ήτοιμάζοντο 31 5·—PASS, πάντα ήτοίμασται 62 ι €TOI|AOS, paratus (de hominibus) 1 4 ; 3 1; 83 2.—(de rebus) expeditus 25 2 ; 33 3 ; επειδή έτοιμα ην 50 4 ; 60 5; 65 3 &ros: 'έ. έτεΧεύτα 18 4> r ° £ & 79 3 5 τ/κώι/ e. 28 3 €υ: ευ 7roteiv 15 2 ; eu et'SeVat 21 4; 48 3 ; τριήρους ευ πλεούσης 23 2,; eS Xέyωv 48 3 €v0€a>s, statim 33 31 €v0vs, JAU^ZW 2 2 ; 13 2 ; 43 5 ; 77 4 cti>—w. participle: vixdum, simul ac 19 1 ; 20 1; 50 3 €υκαθαιρ€τώτ€ρο91, quifacilius vinci potest 18 2 εύνοια: Αθηναίων εύνοια, benevolentia erga Athenienses 57 10 ενπραγία €ΰττραγία: έπϊ άπροσδοκήτφ εύ. 46 ι ; έπ' εύ. ήδη σαφεΐ 81 5 J εν εύ. 86 4 cvirpcmjs: εκ τον ευπρεπούς, honesto vocabulo 57 7 €υρί(ΓΚ€ΐν, itwenire w. partcp. 31 1 ; 78 3 ; 79 1; 80 6.—Λ>#Ζ- perire 67 2.—PASS, inveniri: ηϋρηται ήμΐν 62 3 6υρυχωρ£α (de mari) 36 6; 49 2. —(de terra) 3 3 5 6 - 2 CVTCIKTOS: εϋ. πορείαν 77 5 €υτυχ€Ϊν: εύτυχούσης ρώμης 63 4 ; εύτυχήσαι 68 3·—PASS. Ικανά, ηύτύχηται 77 3 €υτυχία 77 2 - €v\t\: αντί ευχής καΐ παιάνων 75 7 €υψυχ£α, fortitudo: εύψυχία προφέρειν 64 2 €ΰώνυμ.ος, sinister: τφ εύ. κέρα 6 3 . , έφέπ^ατθαι, subsequi 78 2 ; TCXS μετ* αυτού vaus έπισπομένας 52 2 έφοδος, aggressio, impetus: τής e. 5 2 ; 43 7 5 "Π7 πρώτη έ. 44 3 ϊ τ ^ 2. 43 4 έφοράν, prospicere 61 3·— as ~ picere ' to live to s e e ' : έπιδεΐν 61 ι ; 77 7 €φορμ.€ΐν: ναϋς εφορμούσα τφ λιμένι 3 5 ; 4 4 ; 12 5; 24 3 £χ€ΐν« habere: την ^νώμην είχον ώ$ άναχωρήσοντες 72 4? armis obtinere, potiri 24 ι ; 31 2 ; 42 5.—PASS. 57 8.—habitare 32 ι ; 57 2.—secum habere (de duce exercitus): 'έχων * w i t h ' 11 2 ; 31 5 ; 42 1; 50 1; 53 ι.—'έχειν (collocare) εντός 78 2.—obtinere 34 2; 52 2; 70 1.—continere 25 6 ; 59 3 ; 81 4.—afferre, praebere 75 6.—habere ut: τούτο πατρ­ ίδα 'έζειν 77 $.—prohibere: σχησονσι την πάλιν άνάκρονσιν της νεώς 62 3·—c. praepos. ^χβίϊ» e? αΜα 81 ι ; 'έ. διά φυλακής 8 3 · — ' t o have the command o f 36 6 ; 49 2.—INTRANS. posse 14 2, 4.— with modal adverb 42 3 ; 80 1; η 375 εΐχο? πονηρίας 83 4 ; with ws and gen. of respect: cos εΐχον τάχους 2 ι ; t&s τής ξυντυχίας 'έσχον 57 ι ; with preposition and case 8 3 (dub.)·—'έχειν έλασσον, superari 5 4 ; 36 3 ; 'έχειν τι πλέον, meliori esse condition* 36 2; 'έ* πλείστον 36 5.—appellere, ' t o touch a t ' : σχόντες ' P ^ c o 1 2 ; (TXtWes es τα καταντικρύ Κυθή­ ρων 26 2. Comp. αν-, άντ-, απ-, έμ-παρ-, έπ-, κατ-, μετ-, ζυν-, προ-, προσ-, ύπ-, ύπερ1 'i\0o% odium: κατ £. 57 5? 7 2χθρα, inimicitia: τής έ. 57 9 Ιχθρόβ: εχθροί καί 'έχθιστοι 68 2; roi>5 ai)roi>s έ. νομίξειν 33 6 «xvpos, firmus: την ελπίδα εχυράν βΐχον 41 4 · — τ 0 έχυρόν, securitas: έν τφ έ. εΐναι 77 6 2«s, «w/w· ortus: αμα έ'φ 72 3 Γ αμα τ # £y 23 ι ; 80 5 &os, afr»fι,' u n t i l ' : 26 3 ; 35 2 ; 81 4 ; & αν άφίκωνται (G. ΛΤ7\ §6ΐ3> 3) 1 6 τ · — ^ « / » , ' w h i l e ' : 'έ. 'έτι οΐόν τε 47 3 ; 63 4 ; 71 4 βοσιτίρ 1 (rare) 19 5 Ζ £€υγμα: £. του λιμένος 69 4 5 70 2 £ήν: οέ ^"copres 25 y, oi ζώντες καταλειπόμενοι 75 3» TOUS Xot7rous ξυνεκόμισαν ζώντας 85 2 £ητ€ΐν, quaerere: έζήτουν σφας αυτούς 44 4 £ωγρ€ΐν, vzvum capere 23 4» 41 4 ; 85 2 . — P A S S . 24 a Η η , qua via: 5 3 ; 6 2 ; 45 ι ; 49 ι ; 60 2 ; 74 2 ; 78 y, 79 4 ; 80 ι ; 81 ι ; 83 5; 'έστιν ή 29 3 ; 70 6 η, ^ 2 4 ί ναυν μίαν ή δύο 38 Ι ; πέντε ή ££ 79 6 ; 86 5 5 ??— ^' 8 ι ; 15 ι ; 49 2; 57 ι ; 60 2 ; 71 3 J 75 4 #£ ή', quam: 6 2; 8 j j 13 2 ; 19 5 ; 25 9; 27 55 42 5 ; 61 ι ; 37^ ηγ€Ϊσθοα- 64 ι ; 77 5 5 τουναντίον f 80 ι αι. ήγείσ-θαι, praeire: πρώτον ήγούμενον 78 2; 80 \.—ducem esse 19 ι.—existimare 14 4 ; 18 2 ; 34 7; 42 5; 57 9 ; 70 8; 77 5. Comp. έξ-, έσή·γ€μον(α, imperium: έν ήγεμονίαις 15 2 ήγ€μών, dux v i a e : 80 6; τον 7τλο0 ηγεμόνας 50 2.—imperator: των η. 15 ι ; ηγεμόνα "Σπαρτιάτην παρεχόμενοι 58 3·—princeps: η. γενόμενοι μετά άλλων 56 3 ήδη, ζ'<2/?ζ 1 ι ; 2 2 ; 6 t ; 12 3'» 23 2; 37 ι ; 41 4 ; 48 2, 5; 66 2; 71 7 «/.—placed between noun and its attributive 52 2.—with present partcp. του 'έτους 7rpos μετόπωρον ij. δντος 79 3.—abhinc, exinde 4 3 ; 6 1; 58 3 ; 70 8; 72 4 ; 75 1; 77 6; 85 2.—iam nunc, statim 15 1; 44 3 ; 49 3 ; 73 1. —w. gnomic aor. (de eo quod usu venit) 'ere n o w ' : 61 3 ; 77 1, 4.—ενταύθα ή. 44 ι ηδονή:, η. άξίαν διασώσασθαι 63 3 ηδύς : ήδίω έπιστέλλειν 14 \.— ήδισ-τοδ : εχθρού? αμύνασθαι ήδισ­ τον εϊναι 68 ι ; τά η. άκούειν 14 4 ήκ€ΐν, advenisse 1 \\ 4 \\ 1 0 ; ηξει βοήθεια 16 2 ; 17 3ϊ 27 2 ; 44 8; 75 7·—redire 21 ι ήκκττα, minime: η. δη άξιος 86 5·—ούχ η., maxime 4 6 ; 21 3 ; 44 6 ; 86 3, 4 ηλικία, aetas: ψειδόμενοι οϋτε πρεσβυτέρας οϋτε νεωτέρας ηλικίας 29 4·—iuventus: ηλικίας μετέχων 60 3·—iuvenes: οπλιτών η. 64 ι ή λ ι ο ς : irepi τ)λίου τροπάς 16 2. —PL. ol η. solis aestus 87 ι ημέρα, spatmm diet: της η. επί πολύ 38 ι, 3 5 3 9 2 > * α * j/ιίκτα καϊ η. 77 6 ; τή^ έπιοϋσαν η. 74 ι ; τηδ η., * each d a y ' 27 2 ; δι' ημέρας, toto die 82 ι ; κα0' ημέραν, indies 8 ι ; 50 35 •ησυχία 17. έβδομήκοντά τινας 87 3·—d&J j t a ^ 3 5 ; 33 ι ; 40 2; 42 3 ; 52 ι ; 78 3? 82 3·—Ittx: 43 2 ; 44 ι, 8 ; 73 3 ; 81 ι ; 84 ι ; άμα τη η. 29 3 ημέτερος: επί την ημετέραν (sc. χώραν) ηλθον 68 2 ήμίβργος 1 : ημίεργα 2 4 ή μ ι σ υ ς : τό η. 80 4 TV, Λ : w. ind. subj. ην δύνηται 12 ι ; 29 ι ; 48 2 ; 72 3 ; ^ ^"7 τι πάρα λόγον γίγνηται 71 7 ; Vv βν προσέχητε 15 3 5 Vv έθέλωσι 18 2; ην κρατώσι 43 2 ; ην νπουργωσι 62 3> Vu β^ν νικωσιν^ ην δέ μή 60 2.—with aor. subj. ην μη 'έλη 11 3 j ην τι έκβη 14 4» ^ φθάσωσι 25 9 ; ή " έκλίπωσι 48 5 ί 7?? τ ° λ μησωσι 59 3» ^ κρατησωμεν 61 ι ; ηρ άντιλαβώμεθα 77 6, ήρ δίαφύγητε 7 ; ^V διαβώσι 84 ι, 4 ή ν ί κ α : τ), ζυνεσκόταξεν 73 3 ήπειρος 31 2 ; 33 3 ήΐΓ€ΐρώτης 21 3 ηΐΓ€ρ, .«Vz// 12 3·—ubi 4 3 ; 43 3;J0r ήττιος 3 , mitis: τα από του θεού ήπιώτερα 'έξειν 77 4 ήρ, ζ>ίτ: του η. 19 ι ; 20 ι ; 21 ι ; 50 ι ; αμα τ<£ ^. 15 3 ; 17 ι ήο-οτα, clades: καταπεπληχθαι τη η. 72 4 ήοτσάσ-θαι 34 7 ; ως τη σφετέρα ταραχή ήσσηθεΐεν 25 g; τό ησσώμενον 71 3·—w. gen. of personal agent: ησσημένους σφών 40 2 ή σ σ ο ν , minus: πολλφ ??. 48 ι ; ουδέν η., nihilo secius 42 2; 57 9 ; 78 ι ; 84 5·—ούχ η. 57 75 61 ι ; 63 2 ; praesertim 11 ι.—ούδενός η. 30 4 ήοτοτων, minor: ξυμφόρά ουδε­ μίας η. 29 5·—inferior, deterior: ησσους 42 3 ί #Γ(τω 48 5 ήοτυχά^6ΐν, ζ/ζ statione manere 34 4 ; 38 2.—Λ &?// 39 2 ; 80 ι.—without article: θαλάσσης εκράτουν 57 7> ^ιά θαλάσσης 59 2 ; άττό 0. 29 3 5 έπϊ θαλασσή, in litore maris 4 2; κατά θάλασσαν 4 ι ; 12 2, 3 ί 28 ι, 4> 5 6 2 ·—Of a special sea, 39 2; προς την θ. 2 4 ; 80 ι, 5 ; την έτέραν θ. ibid. θαλασ-<Γ€ύ€ΐν1, in mariversari: νήες θαλασσεύουσαι 12 3 θαλα<Γ<τοκρατ€Ϊν 48 2 θαρ<Γ€ΐν 29 4 5 τεθαρσηκδτες 37 ι ; 49 ι ; 69 3· Comp. ά^αθαρσ*ΰν£ΐν 76 ι. Comp. παραθά<τ<Γον: ν. ταχέως θάτ€ρα, altera pars: έκ του έπϊ θ. 37 2; & τ ά e7ri0. 84 4 θαυμάζεσ-θαι: έθαυμαζεσθε 63 3 ; 7τολύ θαυμασθήσεσθαι 56 2 0€α: όΥ όλί'γου οϋσης της θ. 71 3 Ocicurpos 1 : άγα? θειασμφ (αι. θεασμ<£) προσκείμενος 50 4· Comp. έπιOetos: τό #., numen: τα άπό του θ. 77 4 0€os: άνάκλησιν θέων 71 3 5 τ φ 0ecoi> επίφθονοι 77 3 J 0· πατ/>φου$ 69 2; 77 2 6€pau€U£Lv: έθεράπευον μή, operant dabant ne w. infin. 70 3 θςράπων, famulus: oi Θ. 13 2 0€pos, Λ ^ Λ Γ 9 ι ; 27 1; 28 2 Θνη<τκ€ΐνΐ4; 75 3 5 έτεθνήκεσαν 85 4 ; 86 5. Comp. άποθορυβ€Ϊσθαι 3 ι ; 22 ι ; 37 3 θόρυβοβ 40 3 ϊ 44 4 ; Λ 8 1 4 0paVos, audacia: τφ θ. 21 3 θραοτΰς, audax : έλπϊς θρασεΐα του μέλλοντος 77 3 θυμοΰσ-θαι1»3, irasti: άποπλησαι της *γνώμης τό θυμούμενον (iram) 68 ι θυσία, sacrificium 73 2 Ι Ιδ4α, species, genus: Ι. πάσα ολέθρου 29 5·—modus, ratio 81 5 ιστάναι 377 ιδία : άπολέσθαι Ι. 48 4 ϊδιος: τή? παραυτίκα 'έκαστοι Ι. ώφελίας (Ζνεκα) 57 ο. 5 κατά τό^ ϊ. βίον 77 2 ίδρΰ€<τθαι, considere: οϋτ αν Ιδρυθέντας έξαναστήσειε 77 4 · — perf. part. Ιδρυμένοι 58 ι Uvai, ί>* 57 9 5 'έλθωσι 1 ι ; 4 ι ; 26 ι ; 27 ι ; 35 2; 37 ι ; 57 g; 74 2 ; ίοϋσιν 80 3 ί Ιοιεν 80 5 ^ · — ες χείρας ί. 44 7 5 70 5·—*· es T V πεϊραν του ναυτικού 214. Comp. άι>-, άι>τ-, άντ-επ-, άντ-επ-εξ-, άντ-εσ-, απ-, δι-, δι-εξ-, έξ-αν-, έπ-, έπ-εξ, έπι-παρ-, κατ-, ξυν-, παρ-, προ-, προ-εξ-, προσ-, προσανΐ€ρόν, templum 26 2; 29 4 ικανός, idoneus (predicative) 42 ι ; ί. ημέρας 51 2 ; 60 2; 69 2. — )( άνα'γκαΐος 69 3J ικανά ηύτύχηται 77 3·—qui potest w. inf. 314 iKavws 75 1 ϊνα, ut, final particle occurs 52 times in the whole of Thucydides, όπως 114 times; ώς, ώς αν, όπως αν each occur once, as final particles.—ϊ. μή, with opt. 4 6 ; ϊ. μή w. subj. 43 7 ; ϊ. δη w. subj. 26 2 itnrevs: Ιππέα 83 ι ; ίππ?}? 6 3 ; 37 2; 44 8 ; 75 5 ; 78 6; 81 2 ; ιππέων 4 6; 13 2; 27 5 ; 28 2; 51 2; 73 3 ; 84 2; Ιππευσι 11 ι ; 42 6; ιππέας 1 5 ; 6 s ; 11 4 J 3 0 3 ; 37 3 tinrtKOs: τό L, equitatus 30 2 frnros, 0 27 5 ; 51 2 ; 54 1 «/. — ή , equitatus: της ΐ. 5 2, 3 ίσθμώδη$: ι- χωρίον 26 2 Ισομοιρία: ή Ι. των κακών 75 6 ioroppoiros, anceps 71 ι IVos, / Λ ? ' 42 2 ; ftrcus (ρανσΐ) ναυμαχήσει 67 3> ^"7 isolita?) φρουρά 27 4 J &"α, pariter 71 3 ίσ-τάναι, statuere: τρόπαιον στησάντων 5 3 5 23 4 5 24 ι ; 34 7, 8; 41 45 45 ι ; 54 ι ; 72 ι.— PASS, μετ αλλήλων στό,ντες 57 ι ; 61 3· Comp. αν-, άνθ-, άντι-καθ-, 378 άπ-αν-, άφ-, έξ-, έξ-αν-, καθ-, μεθ-, ξυν-, παρ-, περί-, ύφίσ-τίον 1 , velum 24 2 ϊσχ€ΐν w. adv., se habere', esse: όρώντες τά εαυτών χαλεπώτερον ϊσχοντα 50 3 · — t r a n s , appellere (navem) 35 2. Comp. κατΙσ·χυρ6ξ€<Γθαι 49 ι, 4 ισχυρός: Ύενομένης Ισχυρας της ναυμαχίας 72 ι ί σ χ υ ς : τη των πολεμίων ί. 25 g; την των πολεμίων ί. 8 ι ; πάρα ίσχνν της δυνάμεως ένδιδόασιν 66 3 Κ καθάιτ€ρ, quemadmodum 32 2 καθ€^€θ-θαι 67 2.-—de exercitu 5 1 1 ; 73 ι ; 77 4· Comp. έπι-, προσκαθίξειν: καθΐσε την στρατιάν 82 3 καθιοττάναι, constituere 38 3 · — ordinare 78 ι.—efficere 44 4 · — adducere" es φυyηv κατέστησαν {αυτούς) 43 7» 75 4 · — M E D . adduct: es αντίπαλα 13 2; es φιλονεικίαν καθέστασαν 28 3» es φόβον 44 7 j es άπόνοιαν 67 4? ^ s λύπην 75 3 5 ^ s Ι^άχην 53 3 ? ^ ^ άγώίΊ καθεστωτες 64 2.— κα0έστηκε, usu venit: παρά τό καθεστηκός 67 2. C o m p . άντικαθυττ€ρτ€ρο5, superior: καθυπέρτερα τά πράγματα είναι 56 2 καί: C o n i . atque adeo, ' o r r a t h e r ' 12 4 ; 19 2; 48 4; 68 2; 8Ο4. — ' a n d s o ' l 5 ; 29 5 al.; ' a n d in particular' 29 5 ; 81 4.—και—καΐ in bimembral clauses 2 4 ; 8 1; 12 1; 85 4.— connecting two state-; ments of time, introducing the immediate performance of a reso­ lution taken 75 1.—after ad­ jectives of likeness 70 1; 71 7 A d v . κ. παντάπασιν 6 4 ; «r. πολύς 34 7; 4 1 4 ; κ. μάλιστα 79 4· —κ. ως, ' e v e n thus* 74 1; ' i n any c a s e ' 81 5 ; κ. νυν 13 ι . — I n comparisons ώς.,.καϊ 43 ι ; 60 3· —και—δέ,' and—also' 56 3 5 f al μήν turn vero 75 6 καίειν: πυρά καύσαντες 80 ι, 3· C o m p . κατακαίπερ w. partcp. 75 4 5 77 7 καιρός, tempus: κατά τούτο καιρού 2 4J ^ άράγ/ccus στασιωτικων κ. 57 1 1 ; έν άλλω κ. 64 2 ; h τ φ τοιούτω του κ. βντες 69 2.— opportunitas, occasio: 5 2; 6 ι ; 11 ι ; 34 4 ; 51 2 καίτοι with finite verb 77 2 κακόν, calamitas: των κ. 42 2, 67 4» 72 2, 75 6 κακοπαθβΐν, mala pati: κακοπαθησαι 87 2, κακοπαθήσαντες 6 κακοπαθέα 1 : rats παρά τήι> ά£ίαν puV κ. 77 ι κακοΰν, debilitare: έκάκωσε τό στράτευμα 24 3 ; τα πράγματα 27 3 κακουργ€ΐν, infestare: £ς το κ. 19 2 ; κακόνpyfaoviες 4 6 κακώς: κ, είχε το στράτευμα 801 κάκω<τις, conditio peior, depravatio: των πληρωμάτων κ. έyέvετo 4 6.—labor: τραύμασί και τη άλλη κ. 82 ι καλεΐσθαι, vocari 3 3 ; 4 4 #/· C o m p . άζ>α-, e7rt-, ^ 7 - , προκαλός, praeclarus 56 2; 59 2 ; 86 2 ; κ. ό άγώζ> 68 3 #/·—honestus 66 ι ; 70 7 ί τ°ν πλείονος κ. 71 ι καρττουσθαι, frui: καρπουμένη και πρίν έλευθερίαν 68 3 καρτ€ρ€ΐν w. participle 48 2; καρτερήσατε 64 2 καρτεράς* natura munitus: λό­ φος κ. 78 5·—gravis: ^αυ^αχ/α κ. 70 2 κατά w. G e n . : κ. των κρημνών ρίπτοντες εαυτούς 44 8.—w. Ace. L o c a l : (α) κ. χώραν 'έμενον 49 4> 27 5 5 κ· την χώραν 44 8 ; 74 2 ; κ. την 'Ελλάδα 63 35 κ> TVV ευρυχωρίαν 6 2 ; κ. τον λιμένα 70 ι, 2 ; τό κα#' εαυτόν 44 ι ; 78 ι ; κ. πολλά του στρατοπέδου 44 7> cf. 53 3 ; 36 5 ; κ. βραχύ τι 2 4 ; κ. τό άλλο τείχισμα 4 35 τά κ. τό στρατόπεδον 8 35 τά Λ:. τήζ> Μυκάληο-σο? 30 3 5 ^· TOP 'έκπλουν καταβαίν€ΐν 70 ι ; Κ. τό χωρίον 45 ι ; κ. τον ποταμόν 85 ι ; καθ* δσον irpbs τήν πόλιν αυτού εώρα 37 2 ; εκάστοις καθ' οΰς yLyvoiTO 76 ι.— (δ) via, ' b y way o f : κ. yrjv 11 4 ; 22 ι ; 46; 67 4 ; 71 7 ί 72 4ϊ κ. θάλασσαν 4 4» 12 2, 3 5 28 ι, 4 ; κ. πλουν 31 $; κ. τον Ι&ύρύηλον 43 3 5 κ. το έτερον μέρος της Σικελίας 80 ι\ κ. τάς 'Έϊπιπολάς 1 ι ; κατ' αμφότερα (terra marique) 41 4 J 50 2, 3 ί ουδέ καθ' έτερα 42 6; cf. 43 4 ; μ??δέ κα0' grepa 59 2.—(ί) 'vis-a-vis': κατ' αυτούς 6 3 ί όρμίξονταικ. 'Έίρινεόν 34 ι.—* propter, ' owing t o ' : /cara re ταντα καϊ OTL 5Q %; κ. δίκην, κ. ξυyyέvειav 57 ι ; κ. τό ξ-υΎΥ*ν& 58 35 f· τ 0 ζυμφέρον 57 ι ; κατ' άνάγκηρ, κ. τό 'έχθος 57 5 ; 70 8 ; κ. τό νησιωτικόν 57 7 > κ· ξνμφοράν 57 8; κ. τήρ του λέyειv άδυνασίαν 8 2 ; κατ' αμφότερα, 'for two reasons ' 47 2; ου *α<9' £Ϊ> μόνον 75 2 (?).—/r κ · βΡαΧυ τρεμάμενοι τό στράτευμα 79 5 5 δώσειν ομήρους, 'ένα κ. τάλαντον- 83 2 . — T e m ­ p o r a l : κ. τούτο καιρού 2 ^; κ. τόν πόλεμον 30 3 5 87 5> κ · την πορείαν 85 4 J κ α τ ' ά/>χά$ 28 3 · — w · ab­ καταμ€μψυς 379 stract subst. as periphrasis for adverb: καθ' ήσυχίαν for ήσυχως 38 3 ; 40 2 ; 73 3 ; 74 2; κ. κράτος 41 ι ; κ. τάχος 4 3 ; 37 3 5 81 ι · — $ υπήρχε λαμπρότητας τι τό καθ' εαυτόν (' personally') 69 2 καταβα£ν€ΐν: καταβαίεν 44 8; κατέβησαν 78 4· Comp. έπι-,ύποκαταβάλλβιν, diruere 24 ι κατάβασ-is 1 : T^S πάλι? κ. 44 8 καταβιβάζαν, demittere 86 2 καταβυρατοΰν 1 : T??S pecks eV2 πολύ κατεβύρσωσαν 65 2 KaTOLYYeXTOs1 ylyveadoL 48 ι καταγιγνώοτκαν, ' to form an adverse opinion ' : κaτεyvωκότωv μηκέτι κρεισσόνων είναι σφων 51 ι κ α τ α δ α μ ά ^ σ θ α ι 1 , 3 , perdomare: καταδαμασάμενοι 81 5 καταδιώκων 30 ι ; 51 2 ; 52 ι; 715 καταδουλωσας 66 2 καταδρομή, incursio: καταδρομάς ποιούμενων 27 5 καταδυ€ΐν, deprimere navem 23 4 ; 38 ι ; 41 4·—PASS, ούδε/χία κατέδυ ναϋς 34 5> 6 καταθ€ΐν την χώραν 27 4 καταιρ€ΐν, appellere navem: ορμώμενοι τε καϊ καταίροντες 49 2 κατακαί€ΐν: κατέκαυσαν 25 ι. —PASS, κατεκαύθησαν 43 ι κατακολυμβαν 1 , urinari 25 6 κατακοντ££€ΐ.ν 84 ι κατακότττ€ΐν: κατέκοψαν 29 5 καταλαμβάν€ΐν, deprehendere 2 ι ; 33 $.—assequi 30 ι ; 81 ι ; 83 ι. PASS, obstringi: εν τοιαύταις foayxais τότε στασιωτικων καιρών κατειλημμένοι 57 11. Comp. £υγκαταλ€γ€(τθαι όπλίτας 31 5 καταλ€£ιτ6ΐν : καταλιπών 26 3· — P A S S . 2 4 ; 75 3 κατάλο-yos: εκ κ. 16 1; 20 2 κατάλυαν τό*> πόλεμον, belli exitum facere 31 4 καταμέμφβσθαι: κ. υμάς αυτούς ταΐς ξυμφοραΐς 77 ι κατάμίμψι^ σφών αυτών 75 5 380 κατάντικρυ κατάντικρυ, e regione: τα, κ. 26 2.—contra 57 5 κατα·π·ατ€Ϊν: κατεπάτουν (άλΧήλους) 84 3 καταττηγνύναι 1 , defigere: κατέπηξαν 25 5» 7 καταττλβΐν, appellere 25 3 κατάττληί-ις 24 3 ; 42 2 καταττλή<Γ(Γ€(Γθαι: καταπεπλήχθαι τη ήσση 72 4 ; 77 4 καταπροδιδόναι: ϋποχρημάτων καταπροδόντες 48 4 > 63 4 καταράσ-σεσ-θαι 1 6 3 καταρρβΐν 1 , collabi 84 3 κ α τ ά σ τ ρ ω μ α : τους από τον κ. 63 ι ; τα άπό του κ. 70 3> α7Γ δ των κ. 63 3 > ol ά7τό τώμ Λ:. 40 55 70 5 J &rl rwi> κ. 62 ι ; 67 2 κατατιθέναι: τό apyvpiov άπαν κατέθεσαν 82 3·—MED. κατέθεντο πάλιν (τα όπλα) 83 5 κατατραυματίξ€ΐν, vulnerihus conficere 79 5.:—PASS. 80 ι.—per­ forate (of ships) 41 4 καταφέρ€<τθαι, deferri 53 1; κατενεχβέντες 71 6 καταφέύγειν: κατέφυ^ον 23 2 κατάφ€υξις i κ. ασφαλής 38 3 5 κατάφευξιν έποιουντο 41 ι καταφοβ^ΐν 1 , terr itare 21 3 καταφρον€ΐν w. gen. 63 4 κατ€ίργ€ΐ ν, coercere. — PAS S . κατειρ^όμενοι· 57 7 κατ€ργά£€<τθαι: κατερ^άσεσθαί τι 'apyov άξων του κινδύνου 21 2 κάτεχαν, occupare 66 2 κ α τ ή φ α α 1 , 2 , moestitia 75 5 κατίο-χαν, applicare n a v e m : κατίσχουσιν ές τάς νήσους 33 4> #7re/> αϊ νηες κατίσχοιεν 70 ι κατορθουν: κατορθώσας 42 55 47 ι; ej κατορθώσειαν 66 2 ; 68 2 Κ€ΐο~θαι (de cadavere) 75 3 > 851.— depositum esse 4 5 · Comp. άνα-, δια-, επί-, προσΚ€λ€ύαν 65 ι ; 83 ι.—PASS. κελευσθείη 70 3· Comp. 5ta-, παραΚ€λ€υ<ττή$: ο'ί κ. 70 6, 7 Κ€νάς: νήες άνδρων κ. 77 7 KipaCa1: at /c. 41 2 κρατ€ΐν κέρας, cornu aciei 6 3 ; 52 2 ; /c. του παντός %χων 70 ι κέρδος, lucrum 68 3 5 κέρδει 57 ί ο , δια κέρδος ο, κήρυγμα: κ. ποιούνται 82 ι κήρυξ: κήρυκα ττροσπέμπει 3 Ι κινδυν€υ€ΐν, in periculo versari 75 2.—in periculum venire 48 4. Comp. άπο-, δια-, προκίνδυνος 2 4 ; 8 3 ; 21 2 al. κιν€ϊσ-θαι, movere se 67 2 ; ^ Ti ναυτικφ κινωνται 4 4» 50 4 κλήίΐν, claudere: κλήσειν 56 Ι ; 'έκληον 59 3· Comp. aVo-, 7re/)tκληματίς 3 , palmes (κληματίδες: at έκ των κλημάτων δέσμαι Hesychius): κληματίδων 53 4 κλή<τις: τάς κ., claustra 70 2 κλησ-τός: λιμένος κ. 38 2 κοίλος 36 3* 87 ι ; de Auvio ' with a deep b e d ' 84 4.—TO κοίλον (sinus) του λιμένος 52 2 κοινολογ€Ϊσ-θαι, communicare consilia: έκεκοινολό"γηντο 86 4 κοινός, communis: 6 ay ων κ, απασιν 'έσται 61 ι ; ες το κ., in publicum 85 3 κοινωνός: κοινωνοί ήμΐν της άρχης 63 4 κολάζ€ΐν, castigare.—PASS, TO τούσδε κολασθήναι 68 3 κολου^σ-θαι1, atteri: έπειδάν κολουθώσι 66 3 κόλπος, sinus 57 11 κολυμβητής, urtnator 25 7 κομιδή, transvectio: της ες Σ . κ. 34 r. C o m p . έσ-, παρακομίζ€ΐν, ducere 29 ι.—adducere 32 2 ; 77 6; 86 2.—abducere 74 2.—transportare 39 2.—PASS. #£fo', afer facere 60 2 . — M E D . redditum accipere 45 1. C o m p . άπο-, έκ-, έσ-, fry-, πάρα-, περικόττος 1 , lassitudo 40 4 κόσμος: ούδενΐ κόσμψ, sine modo 23 3 J 40 3 ; 84 3 κοτύλη: κοτύλην ϋδατος καϊ δύο κ. σίτου 87 2 κούφισ-ις 1 , levamentum 75 6 κρατ€ΐν abs., victorem esse 6 κρατιστος 4', 23 2; 43 2, 7 ; 44 4, 55 4 7 3 ί 61 ι ; 64 ι ; 72 4 ; 77 5 αϊ.—w. ace. κρατησάντων μάχαις Έυρακοσίους 11 2.—w. gen. 5 4 ; 56 i.—potiri 34 6 ; 36 5 ; 4 2 4J 7© 2 ; 78 3 · — imperium obtinere 4 6;. 57 7 · — PASS. z/zVza 34 7 ; 49 1; rats ναυσϊ κρατηθηναι 60 5 ; 55 2 ; 71 4· Comp. έπικράτιοΓτοδ, optimus: της χώρας τοΐς κ. 19 2 ; κρατίστους είναι εΐ τους κ. ένικησαμεν 67 ι κράτος: Kara κράτος 41 ι κραυγή, clamor: κ. ουκ o\iyy χρώμενοι 44 4 ; πόΧλη κ. 71 5 κρ€ίσ-<των, praestantior 55 2.—• validior 41 4 ; 44 5 5 63 4 Λ/. κρημνός: κατά, των κ. 44 8 ; 45 2 κρημνώδης: χαράδρα κ. 78 5» ^ κρημνώδες 84 4 κροΰ€<τθαι πρύμναν 40 ι ; 70 8. Comp. ara-, άττο-, £νγκ ρ υ φ ι ο ς 1 : r^s σταυρώσεως η κ. 25 7 Λ κ τ ά σ θ α ι : κεκτημένους 66 2.— perf. pass, possideri: της ου δι ολίγου κεκτημένης θαλάσσης 70 8. Comp. &yKTcCvelv 29 4· Comp. άποKrC^etv, condere: τοις κτίσασι 57 5· Comp. £ι/γκτύπος 1 , fragor: τόν κ. μέyav 70 6 κυβ€ρνη'της 36 5 ; 39 2 ; 60 ι ; 62 ι ; 73 3, 6 κύκλος, ό, murus orbicularis: του κ. 2 4·—κύκλω 70 τ ; 79 5 ; 81 4 κυκλοΰοτθαι: MED. circumvenire: έκυκλουντο αυτούς 81 2.— PASS. κυκλοϋται ύπ* αυτών 81 4 κ ώ λ υ α ν : abs. 4 ι ; 22 2 ; 24 3 ; 74 2.—w. ace. 14 2; (ώστε μη) 36 4 ί 41 2 ; 56 2 ; 78 6.—w. inf. 17 4 ; 27 4*» 32 ι . — w . ace. and inf. κωλΰσαι αυτούς διaφυyεΐv 70 7 , — P A S S . 6 4. Comp. 5taκώλυμα, ?;z λαμπρότατον 87 5·—λ. ρ£/θ7, ' a clear, decisive victory' 55 1 (where Classen reads λαμπρώς) λαμπρότης 69 2 ; 75 6 λαμπρώς, (decisively' 71 5 λανθάνίΐν, latere w. ace. 7 1; 15 2 ; 43 3 ; with implied object 43 2; 48 1 ; 83 5; w. participle 43 2 ; 48 1 ; w. ace. and part. 56 1.—λαθών ηύλίσατο 29 3 λ£γ€ΐν, dicere w. infin. in in­ direct discourse 21 3 ; w. οτι 2 ι ; τφ 6χλφ προς χάριν τι λέyovτες 8 2 ; 83 ι αϊ.—de oratione 60 5 ; 65 3 ; κήρυκα προσιτέ μπει λέyovτa έτοιμος εΐναι 3 ι.—verba facere 8 2 ; 48 3·—PASS, fama ferri: impers. 86 4. το λ€γόμ£νον, ut proverbium est 68 1 ; 87 6. C o m p . άντι·, έπι-, κατά-, £υλ\eia, praeda 30 ι λ€ίπ€οτθαι (PASS.), inferior em esse: λ. της άλλης τέχνης 70 3· Comp. άπο-, δια-, έκ-, κατά-, πάρα-, προ·, ύπολ€πας 3 , collis: Άκραΐον λ. 78 5 λβπτός, tenuis 36 3 5 40 5 ληγ€ΐν, desinere 6 2 λησ·τ€ία, latrocinium: φρουράς ληστείας ποιούμενης 27 4 λησ·τ€ΰ€ΐν, praedas agere: PASS, έληστεύοντο (dui>.) 18 3 λησ-τής, praedo 26 2 λ ή ψ ι ς 24 3 ; 25 9 λίαν 1 , nimium: εντός λ. 5 3 382 λυθολόγος λιθολόγος 43 2 λίθοδ 2 4 ; δ ι ; 70 5 λιθοτομία: τους έν reus λ. 86 2 ; is τάς λ. id. λιμην, ό, portus magnus: τφ λ. 3 5 ; 4: 4 b i s ; 25 5; 36 6 ; 52 2 ; 56 ι ; 62 ι ; 69 4 ; 70 2 ; τόϊ/ μ^αν λ. 2 4 ; 59 3 ; 4 4 J 2 2 ! J " 5 2 23 2 , 3 ; 36 3 5 του άλλου λ. 36 5 ; 70 ι ; πάντα τόν λ. 36 6; άντϊ λιμένος κληστοΰ 38 2 λίμνη, stagnum 53 2 ; 54 λιμός: λιμφ έπιέξοντο 87 2 λογίί^σθαι 73 3 ; 77 4 λόγος, dictum: Xoyy 48 ι, 3 5 69 2.—proposita, conditiones 83 3· —mentio: άξιον τι λόγου 38 ι.— παρά \6yov, praeter exspectationem 71 7·—numerus 56 4 (dub. v. not. cr.) Xoiiros: r a s λ. των νέων 72 3. —τό λ. reliqua pars 7 1 ; 71 o. —zVz posterum 60 2. Comp. eVi-, περί-, ύπολόφος, collis 78 4, λ. καρτεράς 5 ; 79 ι, του λ. eVcWous βντος 2 λυ€ΐν, solvere 70 2.—rumpere: rct-s στο^δά^ λελυκέναι 18 2. Comp. ά7το-, δία-, κατά-, πάραλύπη, moeror 75 3 λυττηρός: οέ ^c^res τώζ> τεθνεώτων λυπηρότεροι ήσαν 75 3 λωφαν 2 , requiescere: τάχα αν λωφήσειαν ai ξυμφοραί 77 3 Μ μακρόβ, longinquus 13 2 μ α λ α κ ή ο-θαι: μ,ή μαλακισθηναι πρέπει 68 3 5 μαλακισθέντες 77 7 μάλιστα, maxime 18 2 ; 28 3 ί 36 4'» *7 2 ; 50 3 ; 62 3 «£—*» primis 8 1 ; 79 5 ; 80 3 ; 8* 5 · — optime; facillime 8 2.—in ipso tempore v. / ? : ? 42 3.—w. art. <<< όμοία rots /λ. του βαρβαρικού 29 4·—with numerals ' u p to,' ' about' 1 5 ; 1 9 2 ; 29 3 ; 30 3 ; 32 2 ; 37 3 ; 42 1; 59 3 ; 60 4 ; 80 4 μάλλον, magis 3 3 ; 4 4 ; 6 2 ; μέγας 49 2 al.—potius 11 4; 13 2 ; 69 3 ; 81 5 al.—melitLS) facilius 44 8 μανθοίνειν 8 2 ; 11 ι.—w. sup­ plementary participle : 'έμαθον αν ησσους οντες 42 3 μάντις, vates: ol μ. 50 4 μαχαιροφόρος: των μ. 27 ι μαχ€<τθάι 77 5 5 81 3 5 έμάχοντο 5 2; 57 5) 8 ; 78 η; 81 2 ; ταύτόν έποίει αύτοΐς νικαν τβ μαχομένοις δια παντός καϊ μηδέ μ. 6 ι ; τοσαΰτα μαχόμενους οσα avayKaξονται 81 3 5 χρηματιεΐσθαι μάλλον ή μαχεΐσθαι 13 2 ; του μήπω μεμαχημένου των εναντίων 43 7· C o m p . άζ>α-, δίαμάχη : μάχης Άρχειν 6 ι ; δίά μάχης eyiyvovTO ai έσκομιδαί 24 3 5 eV τη' μ. 6 3 5 Α1· τ2? πρώτη 11 2; ξυνταξάμενος ως ες μ. 2 3 j 3 2; es μάχην ξυνετάσσετο 81 4 5 6 μ. κατέστησαν προς αυτούς 53 3 5 ytta%ats rats πλείοσι 11 2 ; ου £ υσταδό? μάχαις 81 5 μέγας: ό πaράλoyoς μ. ην 55 ι ; τό /Λ. όνομα των 'Αθηνών 64 2; μ. μισθού 13 2; ναυμαχίας μ. 73 2 ; μ. ελπίδος 75 2 ; έν μ. κινδύνω μ. στρατόπεδον 71 4 5 r ° £ Μ· λιμένος 4 4ί 22 ι, 2, 3 ; 23 2 ; 36 3ί το? μ. λί/Λ^α 2 4 5 τό? λιμένα τόν μ. 59 35 την μ. δύναμιν της πόλεως 77 7 ; ττόλεί ού μ. 29 3 5 ^ /*· μεταβολή ον 76 ι ; τόν κτύπον /Λ^γ^ 'έκπληζιν παρέχειν 70 6 ; άναλωμάτων μ. 28 4 5 ^ T0 * s /"·· άτ^ώσι 69 2; τά 7τλοΖα τά μ. 4 55 /*· ίτόλβί? 58 4» μ^άλα Ζβλαπτον πολύ δ' eVi μεί^ω 40 5 5 μεyάλa έβλάπτοντο 27 4·—μ€ί£ων: αέ δαπά^αι.. .μείζους καθέστασαν οσω καί μ. 6 πόλεμος ην 28 ^; μ. ό μετάμελος 55 τ ; μείξω η κατά, δάκρυα πεπονθότας 75 4·—μ€γ«τTOS : η μ. έλπίς μεyίστηv καϊ την προθυμίαν παρέχεται 67 ι ; οτι μ, ώφελία 69 35 /*· το διάφορον τούτο έyέvετo 75 7 ; ^ΡΥΟΡ μ. 87 5 5 έν μ. κινδύνω 58 4 5 άρχην την μ. 66 2 ; τό /Λ. τείχος 23 ι ; /Α. μέγεθος διδασκαλείο? 29 5» στρατοπέδοις τοΐ$ μ. 80 3 μέγεθος: ύπδ μ6*γέθους των κακών 72 2 ; του κινδύνου 75 7; πάθος ούδενδς ώς επί μεΎέθει ήσσον 30 4 5 &Α /*· ϊΓολεω* 58 4 J πόλεσι μεγέθη έχούσαις 55 2 μεθιστάναι, transportare 39 2 μέλλειν, m Λ? m ονδέ με0' ετέρων είναι ' t o be μη 3»3 n e u t r a l ' 33 2.—/χ. μισθού 57 9 · — w. Ace. de loco: οικοΰντες μετ' αυτούς 58 ι . — d e tempore, /&#.· μ, τούτο 7 ι ; 37 2 ; 46 ι ; μ. ταύτα 79 5 5 μ> την τείχισιν 31 Γ μεταβολή : πολιτείας μ. 55 2 ; έν μεγάλη μ. δν 76 Ι *, 87 ι, 2 μεταμέλεσ-θαι w. partic. 50 3 μετάμελος 1 : 7Γολύ μείζων ην της στρατείας δ μ. 55 ι μεταξύ: μ. των τειχισμάτων 5 2.—τό μ., intervallum 34 2 μεταττέμιτειν 8 ι ; 15 ι ; 42 3 5 80 5·—MED. 31 2 μεταχειρίξειν, tractare: χαλεπως μετεχείρισαν (αυτούς) 87 ι μετέ*χειν, participem esse: ηλι­ κίας μετέχων 60 3 5 τί?$ άρχ-^s 63 3 μετέωρος de loco edito 82 3 ; de navibus, μετέωροι έάλωσαν 71 6 μετοττωρινός1, autumnalis: ai νύκτες έπι^ν^νόμεναι μ. 87 ι μετόττωρον, autumnus: του ε'τους πρδς μετόπωρον βντος 79 3 μέχρι δψέ 83 3 5 ί"·· ου &ν 83 2; μ. νυκτός 38 3 5 /*· του τείχους 7 ι μή with pres. imper. (G. Gr.2 § 1346) 15 3 ; 63 4 ; with perf. im­ per. μή καταπέπληχθε 77 4.—with infin. (G. Gr2 § 1611) 6 1 ; εκεί­ νους άπεστερηκέναι μή αν 'έτι σφας άποτειχίσαι (Q. Gr.2 § 1549) 6 4ϊ 14 2 ; 18 ι, 2 ; 21 4 5 άπροσδοκήτοις μή αν ποτέ τίνα σφίσιν... έπιθέσθαι 29 3 ; 47 35 48 6 ; 49 2, 3 > επηρμένοι ήσαν μή άνιέναι 51 ι ; 57 95 άπεΐπον μή έπά'γειν 60 2 ; 63 ι> 3? Α^ μαλακισθήναί τίνα πρέπει 68 35 69 2; 70 3) 6 ; πρδς άνάκλησιν θέων μή στερήσαι σφας.,.έτρέποντο 71 3 5 73 3 ' φειδώ τις έ'^ένετο μή προαναλωerjvai 81 5·—with substantival (articular) inf. 21 3 ; 36 3 ; 44 4, 5; 53 4 ; 63 3 ; 70 4 ; 72 4.—w. participle (G. Gr2 § 1612) 13 1; 14 3 ; 50 3 ; 63 3.—ώ? μή for ώ$ ού under the influence of pre­ ceding imperative 15 1 ; 77 7.— εΐ μή w. opt. 4 1 ; 6 j ; 44 5 ; 384 μαβί 78 ι ; w. fut. 5 4 ; 8 ι ; w · participle 38 ι ; w. indie. 7 2; 34 7 . — ^ Μ 14 45 15 3 ; 60 <2; 71 7·—ό'η μή 'except' 42 6.— μή.,.τινα 68 3 ; 69 2 ; 70 8 ; μή ...τφ 81 5 5 Λ"7 κατ* ανάγκην 70 8. —in final clauses: ϊνα μή 43 7 5 oVws μή 3 4 * 16 ι ; 19 5 5 25 5 ; > 32 i ; 43 5» tf7™5 άν.,.μή 65 2.—in relat. condit. sent. (G. Gr.* § 1428) 8σοι μή εΤχον oVXa παρασχεϊν 1 3> 58 35 71 6; 85 2.—ώστε μή with inf. (G. Gr.2 § 1450) 6 4 ; 11 3 ; 48 3 ; 75 4 ; 81 2.—After verbs of fearing (G. Gr.2 § 1378) ne: φοβούμενο? μή.,.ού...άπα'γγέλλωσιν82; δεινόν ην μη ου προιδών 25 7ϊ δεδιότε? μή.,.πράξωσι 71 ι ; 73 3 5 75 7 ; 8 6 4 ; υπόνοια μή.,.ΙσχυρίζηταιΟΆ 4 μηδέ, neque: μή—μ^δέ 68 3 · — ?2£ quidem: 15 ι ; μηκέτι μηδ' el 56 ι ; 42 3» « μ^δ' φήθησαν 66 Ι ; μ^δ' ώ'ί, ne sic quidem 28 3 j μ. καθ' 'έτερα 59 2 ; νικαν τε μαχό­ μενοι? καΐ μ. μαχεσθαι 6 Ι μηδε^ς, nuttus: πέρα? μηδέν 42 2.—nemo: δεινδν μηδενϊ υμών δόξη 12 3ί μηδέν α 17 2; 82 2.— μ^δέν adverb 8 2. μηκέτι 4 ι ; 6 4 ; 51 ι ; 56 ι μην, mensis: έπϊ οκτώ μ. 87 2 μηνθ€ΐ8ής: χωρίου μ. 34 2 μηττω, nondum 43 7 μήτ€: μήτε...μήτε 62 4 J μηκέτι μήτε...τε 6 4 ; μηκέτι μήτε—μήτε 51 ι ; μηδέ... μήτε.. .μήτε 59 2 ; 77 Ι ; μή μηδένα μήτε...μήτε... μήτε 82 2 μηχανά<τθαι, consilium inire: πολλά έμηχανώντο 25 8 ; τάδε μηχαναται 73 3· Comp. ά»τιμ η χ α ν ή , machina: αϊ μ. 43 ι μ£μη<Γΐς, imitatio: των τρόπων τη μ. 63 3· Comp. άρτίμιμνη<τκ€(τθαι: ων μεμνημένους 63 ι ; μνήσθητε των..,παραλόΎων 61 3· Comp. ύ7τομισθόδ, stipendium: 13 2; μετά —ναυμαχία μισθού 57 9> μισθού, 'for pay* 25 7; μισθφ πεισθέντες 57 9 μκτθοφόροδ: ο! μ. 57 3 J 58 3 μνήμηβ ελλιπείς γενόμενοι 8 2 μόλις, vix: 13 ι ; 44 ι, j) 40 3 μονή, mansio: ή μ. έ^ε^ένντο 50 4 > άχ0ομέΊ>ου5 ττ/ μ. 47 ι * μόνον adv.: ού μ....άλλα και 4A>j; 66 2 ; 57 7; 70 2; 75 2 μόνος, solus; 16 ι; τφ πεζψ μ. 37 3 > νυκτομαχία η μόνη δή 44 ι ; μόνοι 57 5 ; 58 2, 3 5 κοινωνοί μ. 63 4 ; πόλεσι ταύταις μ. 55 2 μ,όριον, pars: του μ. 58 2 μυριάδ: μυριάδες 27 5 ; 75 5 μυριοφόρος 1 : ναυν μ. 25 6 μυχόδ: εκ μ. του λιμένος 4 4 J έ> τφ μ. τοΟ λιμένος (dub.) 52 2 Ν ναυάγιον: τά ν. 23 4 ; r ^ Ρ. 34 6 ; 72 ι, ^αναγίωρ άναίρεσιν 2 ναυβάτηε 3 , natita 75 7 ναυκρατεΐν 1 60 2 ναυλοχεΐν 1 w. ace. 4 7 ναυμαχ€ΐν 22 3 ; 23 3 5 31 45 34 4) ο ; 36 2 α/.; αντίπαλα 34 6 ; ά~γχώμαλα 71 4·—w. dat. instr. 22 2 ; 41 ι ; 67 3· Comp. δίαν α υ μ α χ ί α : ή ρ. οίίτω? έτελεύτα 34 8; ν. καρτερά 70 2 ; 'όπως ναυμαχίας άποπειράσωσι 17 4 J ναυμαχίας άπόπειραν λαμβάνειν 21 2 ; 25 95 ^ κ r ^ s προτέρας ν. 36 2 ; 37 ι ; 75 ι ; ιδώ*/ αντίπαλα τά της ν, γενόμενα 38 2; τ?7 Ύεγενημένη νίκη της ν. 59 2 ; Ισόρροπου ν. 71 ι ; τό άνώμαλον της ν. 71 ι ; άντίπαλόν τι της ν. 71 5 » ίσχυράς ρ. 72 ι ; ν. με-γάλης 73 2 ; τ $ ν. τή*> γζ/ώμ ^ προσεχόντων 23 ι ; τα?$... ραυσέ κρατούντων τη ν. 23 2 ; παρασκευασάμενοι ώς έπϊ ν. 34 ι ; κατά, τήζ> ν. 24 ι ; 36 3 ί ναυμα~ χίαν ποιούμενοι έν πελά^ει 62 2; τρόπαια αμφοτέρων των ν. 'έστησαν 41 4 > 54 ι ; έν άπάσαις ταΐς ν, 36 6; τάς μεν νενικήκατε ήδη v., την δε...νυν νικήσετε 66 2 νανπηγη άτιμος- ναυττηγηοΓίμοδ: ξύλα ν. 25 2 vavs: ουδεμία κατέδυ ν. 34 6 ; οπότε προσπέσοι ν» νηί 70 3> 45 o'(r άνάκρονσιν της προσπεσούσης ν. 62 3 J ξυμπεσούσης νηΙ ν. 63 ι ; τη$ ν. &νω επί πολύ 65 2 ; μι% ν. ορμηθείς 2 ι ; οί έξορμώντες ναυν 14 ι ; μίαν ν. λαμβάνουσι 25 4 5 38 ι ; 70 6 ; ν. μυριοφόρον 25 6 ; μη περί 'έρμα περιβάλχι την ν. 25 75 J'??6* άλλαι 2 ι ; αί ταχεΐαι ν. 4 5 5 at ν. διάβροχοι 12 3 J αί πληρωθεΐσαι ν. 19 5 ; P. at ναυμαχοΰσαι 23 3 5 Tpets ρ. διεφθάρησαν 23 4 ; ai ένδεκα ν. έπλευσαν 25 ι ; αί ρ. έπεξέπλεον 37 2 ; 07τω$ at P . eVTOs όρμψεν 25 6; ^. at σφισίν άνθορμοϋσαι 31 4 5 αϊ ζ>. τό μεταξύ εΐχον έμφράξασαι 34 2; 5ι/ο ρ. προσέμειξαν αυτών έ-γ^ύς 41 3 5 Ρ· κ ai forirot 58 4 J 60 4 ; ?j7re/o at v. κατίσχοιεν 70 ι; αί λοιπαΐ ν. 72 3 5 ?· ανδρών κεναί 77 7» κ α * 7refos κ-al ?. 87 6; ϊ>εώ// οϋπω παρουσών 1 ι; Tots ^/c τώϊ> ν. τώι> σφετέρων ναύταις 1 3 5 των ν. ΤΎ/ ξηρότητι 12 3 J ίτολλί/ϊ περιουσίας νεών 13 ι ; μετά όΥκα νέων 16 2; τήρ πέμψιν τών ν. 17 3 5 Ϊ>. παχυτέρας τάς έπωτίδας εχουσών 34 5 ; τάς πρφρας τών ν. ξυντεμδντες is έλασσον 36 2 ; σταυρώματος προ τών ν. 38 2 5 οχλον τών ν. 61 ι ; TTJ βαρύτητι τών ν. 61 2; από τώ^ *>. πεζομαχία 61 2 ; 62 4 ; ?"<£ πλήθει τών ν. 67 3 ; έκράτουν τών ν. 70 2; ξυμπεσουσών πολλών ν. 70 45 ττολλώρ *>. ξυμπιπτουσών 70 6; ot eVi τω? Ϊ/. 71 5 5 διαφθαρεισών τών ν. 71 7 ; πολλών ν. άπολομένων 72 ι ; Tuts λοιπά* τών ν. 72 3 5 TC " S a'XXats v. 2 ι ; Ta?s Ρ. ορμώμενοι 18 3 5 τ α & ?· έπιχειρησαι 21 3 5 ραυσέ κρατούντων 23 2 ; Tats ί'. έκρατήθησαν 55 2; 61 ι ; ϊ'αΐΛΓίν έφορμοΰντες 24 3 5 φνλάξαντες αυτούς εϊκοσι ναυσί 25 45 r a & ν. ξυμμίσΎει 26 ι ; άπεκομίζετο Τ. VII 3δ5 •νανς rats τριάκοντα ν. 26 3 5 τριάκοντα ν. απέπλευσαν αύτοΐς 34 5 5 ταΐ? ;>. άποπειρασαι 36 ι ; ναυμάχίαν ούκ εν πολλφ πολλαΐς ν. οΰσαν 36 3ί έπεχείρουν ταΐς ν. 37 ι ; άντικαταστάντες ταϊς ν. 39 2; Tats ν. άντιπρφροις χρώμενοι 40 5 5 Tats ν. κρείσσους είναι 40 4 5 τ4> στρατεύματι έπεκράτουν, τφ τε πεζφ καϊ ταΐς ν. 42 6; 5 1 1 ; 58 3 ; έπιθησόμενοι καϊ ναυσϊ καϊ πεζφ 50 3 5 πεντεκαίδεκα ναυσϊν Σικανόν απέστειλαν 46 ι ; του στρατεύ­ ματος ταΐς έπελθούσαις ν. κρατεί ν 47 3 J TC " S ν· θαλαττοκρατούντων 48 2 ; Tats ν. εθάρσει 49 ι ; Tats ν. εν πελά*γει τους ^ώνας ποιήσονται 49 2 ; Tats ν. έκπλέουσι 51 ι ; ναυσϊ καϊ ού φόρφ υπήκοοι 57 5 5 ot εν Ta?s ν. έσόμενοι καϊ πεζοί είσι καϊ νηες 64 2; 69 3 5 irpbs αύταΐ5 Tats ν. 60 2; Tats αλλήλων ν. έπιβαίνειν 70 5 5 ταΐς ν. προσπλεύσαντες τάς ν. άφεΐλκον 74 2 ; επί ναϋςάναβάντες 67 2 ; 694J σ"0αλοΟσι τά$ *>. 67 2 ; τάς ν. έπεσκεύασαν 1 ι ; 38 2 ; διακομίσας τας ν. 4 5 5 r a s λοίττάί *\ 4 7 5 εϊκοσι ν. αΐς εϊρητο 4 7 J fas ν. διαψϋξαι 12 4 J o^e^ έπιπληρωσόμεθα τάς v. 14 2; i>aus έτοιμάζειν 17 ι ; j/. έπλήρουν 17 45 21 2, 55 31 5 ; 37 35 40 3 5 δ ΐ 2 ; άντιπληρώσαντες ναυς 22 2 ; προσπληρώσαντες έτι ν. 34 ι ; βιασάμενοι τάς ν. 23 3 5 38 3 5 'ένδεκα ν. κατέδυσαν 23 4 5 40 4 5 ά^αλαβόντες αυτούς έπϊ τάς ν. 25 4» παραλαβόντες όπλίτας έπϊ τάς ν. 26 ι ; αναβιβάζονται {αυτούς) έπϊ τάς ν. 33 4 5 ν> r«-s άριστα πλεού­ σας 31 5 J τάς ν. άπλους εποίησαν 34 75 τάς ν. παραπλεΐν έκέλευον 35 ι ; ν. ούχ ομοίως νεναυπη*γημένας 36 55 δρώντες τάς ν. έπιφερομένας 37 3 5 έπειδη πλήρεις ήσαν, avTavrjyov πέντε ν. 37 35 όπως παρά τάς ν. άριστοποιήσωνται 39 2 ; άνερρψ/νυσαν τάς ν. έπϊ πολύ της παρεξειρεσίας 40 5 J 25 386 ναυτικό s—-—-— ζνγκαταλαμβάν€ περικλήσασθαι r a s ν. 5 2 2 ; rots ν. έξεώθουν ες την yfjv 52 2 ; r a s v. άφέλκειν 53 ι ; πόλεσι ν. και 'ίππους έχούσαις 55 2*, z>aus οσαί ήσαν άπλοώτεραι 60 2J έχοντες ras z>. TrXe^ous 63 3 ; ^ r &s Ρ. έπέβησαν 60 45 πάντων άνακειμένων ες r a s P. 71 2 ; r a s v. άπολώλεκότες 75 2 va/uTiKOs, nauticus 21 $.~na~ valis 7 2 ; 15 1; 16 τ ; 71 6.—ro ναντικόν, navales copiae, classis 4 4 ; 7 4 ; 12 3 ; 22 1; ναυτικού πάρασκευήν 12 ι ; r ^ άκρίβειαν του ν% 13 2 ; 33 ι ; 34 2 ; 36 2; 48 5 ί 55 ι ; 63 4 ; 66 2 ; 70 ι; 75 7· — r a · navalis; 21 4 ; 56 3 vetv 1 , natare 30 2 V€Kpos· raw z\ άταφων όντων 75 3 ; νεκρών άναίρεσιν 72 2 ; 85 ι ; 87 2 ; νεκρούς άνελομένων 5 35 rous ζ>. έκομίσαντο 45 ι ; όπλα πλείω η κατά τους ν. 45 2 ν4μ€<τθαι, ^?/piTisι: διά νόσον ν. 15 ι ν€ωριον, navale 22 ι, rot? ν. ι ν€ωσοικοι (PL.) 25 5> 6; 64 ι ν€ωσ·τί, nuper 1 4 \ 33 5 ν€ωτ€ρί£€ΐν, w » w movere: ες άσθένειαν ένεωτέριξον 87 ι νησίδιον 23 4 νησαώτηΞ 6 4 ; 20 2*, 57 7; 82 ι νησ-ιωτικόδ: /cara ro ί'., in· sulanorum statum 57 7 vtjiros: τους έκ της ν. άνδρας 86 35 ol έν τη ν. 71 7 5 τα έν τη ν. καϊ ΙΙύλω 86 3 5 άπό νήσων 57 4 5 ras Xoipadas ν. 'IaTriryias 33 4 νικάν, vincere: 6 ι ; ά£ωϋϊ> ρ. 34 6; τροπαΐον έστησαν ώςνικώντες 34 7ί 71 45 ένόμιζΌν ήσσασ^αι ort οι; ττολύ ενικών 34 7 5 60 2 ; ένίκησαν 41 Γ, νικήσαντες τους Αίβυς 50 2 ; 53 3 ; οΰς νενικήκατε 63 4ί τ ά$ Α1^ νενικήκατε ζ*αυμα%ias, rrw δέ ΖΌΡ νικήσετε 66 2.— ιν PASS, vinci: νικάται ύφ? ήμων 112; ύ' ώζ/ ένικώντο 23 3 5 44 3» ζακώμεζΌί 23 2; 53 ι ; νικηθέν 6 3ί νικηθέντων 5 3» χρήμασι νικηθέντας 48 6 ; 87 β ν ί κ η : ^ε^ενημένης της νίκης λαμπρας (λαμπρώς?) 55 ι ; ύπό του περίχαρους της ν. 73 2 ; δύο νήες έπαιρόμεναι τη νίκη 41 3 > z/t/c]7 r^s z/ai^a%^as 59 2 ; παρέδοσαν την ν. τοις Άθ. 23 3 νομί£€ΐν 8 2.—PASS, haberi )( eTvat 63 3·—in more esse: is άρετήν νενομισμένην έπιτήδευσιν 86 5 νόμιμος: πολλά ες θεούς ν. δεδιητημαι 77 2 ; τά v., instituta 57 2.—νομιμώτατον 68 ι νόσοδ 15 ι ; 47 2 ; 77 2 vows: £χαζ> τον νουν προς τι 19 5· I n T h u c . the word occurs only in this phrase (cf. Ill 22 5, VIII 8 3), in προσέχειν τον νουν (νΐ 93 2), m εν νφ 'έχειν (IV 8 5 5 22 2; 85 5), and in κατά νουν (ΐν 120 3). ν υ κ τ ο μ α χ ί α 1 : έν ν. 44 ι νυν 4 4 ; 5 3 ; 11 2, 3 ; 13 ι «/.; 'έτι ν. 13 2 ; 63 2.—και ν, 13 ι νΰί-: νυκτός, noctu 4 2 ; μ^Χ/3* νυκτός 38 3 5 νυκτός πλουν 50 2 ; r ^ s ζ>. 72 2 ; 73 ι^ 3 ί 80 ι ; 81 2; 83 5> 6 ; 85 2; τη έπιούση ζ>. 6 4 ; εν ν. 43 6; 44 4» 80 3 5 & τ ^ ν. 73 3 5 80 2; r ^ ζ\ 28 2 ; 29 3 5 74 ι ; καέ ζ>. καϊ ήμέραν 77 6.— PL. at v. 87 ι |€VIKOS : rats £. (ζ^αυσί) 42 ι fevos, peregrinus: οι £. 13 2 ; 60 4 ξενοτροφεϊν 1 48 5 Ι η ρ ό τ η β 1 : raw νέων τη £. 12 3 §υγγ€ν€ΐα: κατά ξυγγένειαν 57 ι j-vyyevijs: ^-γενείς 57 7> τό %,9 cognatio 58 3 |υγγι·γνώ<τκ€ΐν, assentiri 73 2 ξυγγνώμης τυ^χάνειν 15 2 |υγγράφ€ΐν 18 4 |υγκαλ€ΐν 6 3 ; 21 2; 60 5 ξυγκαταλαμβάνδίν 1 26 3 £νγκλν<5 ξ ύ γ κ λ . ^ 1 : ζνγ\ύδων ανθρώπων 4 ξυγκομ^€ΐν: ξυνεκδμισαν ζώντας 85 2 ξυγκρου€ΐν : τφ άντίπρωρον £vy· κρουσαι 36 5 ξυγκτάσθαι: τοΐς μ£ν ξνγκτησόμενοι την χώραν 57 ι ξυγκτ££€ΐν λ: την Υέλαν' Ροδ/ots ξνγκτίσαντα$ 57 g |υγχωρ€ΐν, assentiri 72 ι ξύλινος : iropyovs £. 25 6 |υλλαμβάν€ΐν 85 2 |υλλ£γ€ΐν στρατίάν 7 2 ; παρασκευήν 36 ι.—PASS. 26 ι ; ξυνελέyη 58 4 5 59 τ ξύλλογοδ 1 (στρατιάς) 31 5 f ύλον: £. νανκΊγγησιμα 25 2 fυμβα,ίναν, convenire ' to agree to t e r m s ' 83 2.—evenire: ζυνέβη 30 4,· 46 ι ; ξυμβήσεται 64 ι ; 75 2 . — i m p e r s . w. infin. contingit: 11 4 ; 57 9 ; 75 7 ; 86 3 ; 87 5 ξΰμβασας, pactio 85 3 £υμβοηθ€ΐν 25 9 ; 30 3 ; 56 3 ξυμμαχ€ΐν 50 2 ; 58 3 |υμμαχ<α 57 3, 9 ξυμμαχικός: κατά το £. 20 ι ; 33 5 ξύμμαχος, socius: PL. subst. 4 ι, 3 ; 16 ι ; 72 ι «/.—adj. πόλεις £. 14 2 ξυμμέν€ΐν: ξυνέμενε 80 4 |υμμ£<τγ€ΐν, manus corner ere: ξυνέμ^εν αύτοϊς 6 2.—coniungi (de exercitibus) 26 ι ξύματαβ, 2ftf^J )( pars 11 3 ; 33 3 ; 42 5; 56 4 ; 75 5 ; 80 2.—PL. 28 2; 64 2 ; 72 4.—τα £. 24 2 ; ot £ . 3 0 2 ; 87 4.—τό |> yvQsTG 77 7; τό £. etoecv, ut omnia paucis absolvam 49 3 |υμττ4μ7Γ€ΐν 33 5 ; w. dat. 31 5 |υμΐΓίΐΓΤ€ΐν, congredi 70 4, 6.— w. dat. 44 7; ξνμπεσούσης νηϊ νεως 63 ι ξυμπληροΰατθαι 60 4 |υμΐΓθλ€μ€ί;ν Ι 3? 12 ι |υμττορίζ€ΐν, contrahere 20 2 5 -ivvvcLV 387 £νμφέρ€ΐν,/^Μ&.Κ£ 51 ι ; κατά τό ξυμφέρον 57 Ι.—MED. concurrere, congredi 36 6.—accidere: ξννηνέχθη 44 ι ξυμψορά, calamitas, clades: £. ουδεμίας ήσσων, αδόκητος και δεινή 29 5 5 r V we/>l ΙΙύλον ξ. 18 2 ; έβουλεύοντο προς την yeyevημέvηv £.47 Ι ; κατά ξυμφοραν έμάχοντο 57 8 ; at | . ού κατ' ά££αι> φοβοΰσι 77 3 5 /ACT' ασθενείας καΐ ξνμφορών 63 4 i T V ελπίδα του φόβου δμοίαν ταΐς ξ. 'έχουσι 61 2 ; έκπεπληχθαι rats £. 63 3 5 77 ι | ύ ν , 'including' 42 ι.—of a connexion formed willingly 57 9 (elsewhere in T h u c . only n 58 2, III 90 1; common in Xen.) fjwctyeiv, colligere 53 3.—con­ trahere 78 1 j &V7jyov (αυτούς) ές ταύτό 81 2 ξυναγ€£ρ€ΐν 31 5 ; στρατόν 32 ι |υναγορ€υ€ΐν τ£ rtft 49 3 |υναθρο^€ΐν, congregare.— PASS, ζυναθροισθέντες 86 ι ξυναμψότ€ροι 1 5 ; 19 3 ί 70 4 |υναναΐΓ€£θαν 21 3 iwairovevictv 1 71 3 ξυναρτάσ-θαι 1 , cohaerere: ζυνηρτησθαι 70 6 ξ υ ν ά ρ χ α ν : ξυνάρχοντες 16 ι ; 43 ι (•υνδιασ-φ^ιν 57 Γ |υν£ϊΓ€<τθ<Η : ξννείποντο 57 4, 7 §υν£χ€ΐν: οί ξυνέχοντες την είρεσίαν 14 ι ξυνεχης: έν πδνω ζυνεχεστέρω ων 81 4> τ^ ξυνεχές, continuitas 71 3 > - l-W€Xios, continue 27 4» 5 ξυνήθης: (τάδε) τ φ ημετέρω τρδπφ ξυνήθη έστι 67 2 ξύνθημα 44 5» τόι* έρωτήμασι του £. 44 4 ; &πδ £. 22 ι ξυ vie ναι, convenire 56 4 ; 60 * fwCcrTa. infin. 1 ι ; 20 2; 42 3 ; 44 45 47 3 ί 60 2, 4 ; 78 7·—'W. dat. and infin. 14 2 olos: όρων οΐο$ δ κίνδυνος 69 2 ; από οϊ. λαμπρότητος is οϊ. τελευτηρ άφίκατο 75 6; οϊα Ύνώμη 64 ι ; οΐοι καϊ δσοι 77 4 ϊ άνδρας τολμηρούς οϊους καϊ 'Αθηναίους (attraction) 21 3 > οία (not for ως) φιλεϊ "γί-γνεσθαι 79 3? 0&>P et/cos 25 9 ; οίον φϊλεΐ πασι στρατοπέδοις 80 3 ; = oVt roiouros 75 6 ; μάχ?7 οί'α ούχ έτερα τών προτέρων 70 2 [Cf. Ι 23 ι ; VIII 1 2 ηλικίας οϊαν ούχ έτέραν έώρων υπάρχου σαν].—οΐός r e , qui potest 4 ι olo-TOs, tolerabilis 75 7 οϊχεσθαι, ' t o be off': 7 2 ; 8 3; 12 1; 25 1; 46.—οίχόμενος, profectus 32 1; 83 2 OKVOS, segnitia: 6. TIS eWyeVero 49 4 oXeGpos: £δέα πάσα ολέθρου 29 5 ; έ7τι τ<£ σφετέρω ό. 79 3 · — χρημάτων ο. 27 3 όλί-yos: δ0ολί^ου,ηιοάύοεραΗο 36 5 5 71 $.—modico temporis intervallo 15 2 ; 39 2 ; 70 8.— έν όλ^φ, in exiguo spatio 67 3 ί 70 4·—ές δλί^ορ 36 5> 6.—7ταρ' δλί-yov, propemodum 71 3 ; ολίγον ολιγωρία— (paulum) προ Υυλίππου 2 ι.— oXiyoi, pauci 8 ι ; ούκ ό. 85 4» ούκ έπ ό. ασπίδων 79 ι ; ό. από πολλών 87 6.—w. gen. 1 5 ; 14 ι ; 15 ι ; 45 2 ολιγωρία: έν ό. έποιοϋντο, contemptui habebant 3 2 όλκάς 7 35 17 3» 4 ί ! 8 45 1 9 3, 5ί 23 2\ 25 3, 6 5 31 ι ; 34 ι ; 38 2, 3 ; 41 ι» ^ ; 50 ι ; 53 4 όλος: δλην τήν ήμέραν 38 3 όλοφΰρ€σ-θαι 2 : 7ra0et όλοφύρασθαι άί-ίφ 30 4 όλοφυρμός 2 71 3» 4 5 7 δ 4 ομαλός: τό ό., planities 44 8 ό μ η ρ ο ς , 0#Λ?ί 8 3 2 όμιλος, turba: άλλος δ. άφθονος 584 όμοιος, simitis 14 4 ; consentaneus 61 2.—όμοία (adv.), / Λ ^ / /**· 29 4 ομοιότροπος : πόλεσιν ό. 55 2 ομοίως 36 3 ί 42 3 5 44 5> 6 ; 50 3 ; 61 ι ; 68 3? 77 6 ; ό. 7τάΐ'τες 28 ι ; ούχ ό. καΐ πριν 28 4 > ούκέτι ό. 78 7 j ο#δ£ &** δ. 42 3 5 503 ομολογία, pactio: προς τους Άλ­ λους ό. yiyverat ώστβ 82 2 όμορος, finitimus 58 1 όμοΰ w. dat., simul cum 19 4 ; 84 5 όμως, tamen: σχολαίτερον μέν 8. δε 15 2\ σαφέστερα μεν δ. δέ 44 ι αι. oveveiv1, trahere sucula 25 6 δ ν ο μ α : τό μ,^γα δ· 64 2 ονομαστί 69 2; 70 8 οττη, quanam via: δ. σωθήσονται διεσκδπουν 71 6 oirio-Gev1: έκτου δ. 79 4 δττλα, scuta 45 2; 75 55 οπΛα φέρειν άμα τω 57 6; δττλα ^7αφέρειν 18 2 ; ο. πλείω ή κατά τους νεκρούς ελήφθη 45 2; όπλα πάραδούναι 82 2 ; rots PcttfTcus όπλα παρασχεΐν 1 3 5 Ζφερον τά σιτία ύπό τοΐς δ. 75 5 5 τά δ', άναλαμβάνειν 83 45 δπλατίθεσθαιΖ ι.— ' g u a r d - p o s t s ' : e^' δπλοις 28 2 οσο9 389 οπλίξ€θ-θαι: roi)s ώπλισμένους 1 5 χ , όπλιτικος: τό δ., gravis artnaturae milites 11 3 ; ό. )( ναντικφ 75 7 οΊΐΌΐ, #7/0 77 4» 7 όποιος : ούδ&/ δηλούντες όποιον τι τό μέλλον ποιήσουσι 38 2 o i r w o i , ^ οράτε ως 77 2 ; έώρων 30 2 ; 44 2 ; 82 r ; όρφη 78 ι ; ό/^εϊ' 70 8 ; ϊδοι 75 3, 4 ; oVa 'έμψυχα ϊδοιεν 29 4 ; 75 3 5 ί'δώί' 38 2', 42 3· Comp. άφ-9 έν-, εφ-, περί-, προ-, ύπερόργη : όργί? iracunde 68 ι όρίζ€σ-θαι, terminari 57 Γ ι op\kOLV,impetumfacere: ώρμησαν 34 4·—proficisci: όρμήσας 19 4 ; 74 ι.—MED. τελευταίος ορμηθείς 2 ι ; 9 ι ; 18 3 Λ/.—ρ erf. concitatum acpropensum esse: ώρμηντο is 21 5. Comp. ά0-, e£όρμειν, ί « statione manere 4 5 ; 25 3, όρμοΐεν 5; 30 ι ; 31 1; 34 2, 8. Comp. άνθ-, αφ-, έφόρμη, impetus: 0. τη παρούση τοϋ περαίνεσθαι 43 5 ; άπό μια$ ο. 71 6. Comp. ά0όρμί£€ΐν, in statione collocare: όρμισάντων τά πλοία 30 2 ; e7r' ^κυρων όρμίξοντες (τάς τριήρεις) 59 3·—MED. 34 ι. Comp. προδρμος, statio (navium) 41 ι δς yε, quippe qui 68 2 όο-άκις 1 w. opt. 18 3 όο~ημέραι, cottidie 27 5 όοτμη1: ό. ούκ ανεκτοί 87 2 δ<τος; δσον οΐόν τε ελάχιστον ικανον 7 e ^ ^ ^ a t 60 2 ; πλην δσον (των ανθρώπων ήν) 23 4» πλην 390 ore ο. άν έπέχν 62 4 ; στρατιάν οσην πλείστην έδύνατο 21 ι.—PL. quot: 1 3 ί 3 45 8 35 10 ι ; 12 ι ; 23 2 ; 29 4 ; 39 2; 43 2 ; 71 4» 6 ; όσους μή 85 2 ; #λλα 6'<τα 87 2 ; oVots ο?όν τ' ^ πλείστοις χρή~ σασθαι 20 2 ; Οσον, quantum 63 ι ; fere 38 31 quatenus 28 3 ; e£ ο. 73 3 ; £0' 6 W 66 ι ; es δ. 75 \; καθ' όσον 37 2.—oVoi» ού, tantum non, iamiam 6 ι ; 69 2.—δσφ μάλλον, quanto magis 28 4 ί 63 2.—οσα, quatenus 81 3? oVa γβ, dumtaxat 11 4 οτ€: ό'τ ερρώμην 15 2 ότ€ μέν—6τ€ 8g 27 4 δτι μή, nisi 43 ι.—δτι with superlatives: oVi χρησιμώτατα 74 ι ; o n εγγύτατα 86 5·—ort τάχος (not elsewhere in Thuc.) 42 3 ου, transposition of; ουκ έπ ολίγων for eV' ουκ όλ. 79 ι ; ούκ iv πολλφ for eV οι) π . 36 3 J ού δι' ολίγου for δι1 ούκ όλ. 70 8.—ού ζυσταδον μάχαις 81 5 ούδί: ουδέ μεθ' έτερων for μετά ουδετέρων 33 2 ; ουδέ ά<£' έτερων 44 ι ; 42 6.—#£ quidemf ' not e v e n ' : 63 4» 7 δ 5 5 o y o ° cos, ne sic quidem 75 6.—'also n o t ' 34 7 ; 56 3.—ουδέ γάρ, neque enim 11 4 ; 42 4 ; 66 1 ουδείς, nemo 27 2 ; 63 4 ; ουδέν a 42 4 ; ούδενός ύμων 77 2. —nullus: δίωξις ουδεμία 34 6; ού. σωτηρία 8 ι ; r^s ΐ7Γ7τον ού. χρησις ην 5 2 ; άλλτ? ούδ. 7roXiS 77 4J ούδεν αυτών 28 2; ούδ€?> ο π ούκ απώλετο 87 6; ού. δ τι ούκ επε^ένετο 2 ; ξυμφορά ουδεμίας ησσων 29 5 > ουδεμίας των ξυμφορών 71 7» ouSej/os ^σσ'Οϊ' όλοφύρασθαι άξίω (χαθεί) 30 4 \ ούδενος έλάσσων των (φόνων) 85 4 5 ούδε^έ /cocr/Acp 23 3 5 40 3 ; 84 3 ; ούδενΐ τρόπω 49 35 ό 0o/3os ην ούδενϊ έοικώς 71 2; ούδεμίαν σωτηρίαν 8 ι ; ουδέν άποκρινάμενοι 3 2; oXtyov ουδέν is ουδέν επενόουν 59 3 5 ούδέ> ολίγον is ουδέν κακοπαθήσαν- οντος res 87 6.—Adv. ουδέν δηλούντες 38 2 ; ουδέν άλλο (perinde) η omisso verbo 75 5 5 ουδέν ησσον% nihilominus 42 2 ; 57 9 > 7 8 1 5 84 5; πόλεμον ουδέν έλάσσω 28 3 ουδέτερος, neuter: ουδέτεροι 34 6 ; 38 ι ; 59 ι ούκέτι: την ούκέτι έπαναγωγήν 34 6 ; 40 2 αι. οΰκουν, non igitur 48 4 οΰν resumptive after a paren­ thesis 6 1 ; 29 τ ; 42 3 ; 59 2 ; 80 3 ; 82 ι οΰττω, nondum 1 2; 69 2 ου ρ LOS : άνεμος οϋ. 53 4 οΰτ€—re, where ού affects the first clause only; 30 2 ; 31 4 ; 64 1 οΰτοδ without art. 29 5 ; 42 4 ; 55 2; 85 4 ; 87 5. —emphatic 32 2; αϋτη 29 5 ; τούτο 2 4 ; 60 2 ; 65 2 ; 75 7; δια τούτο 18 2; 50 4 5 86 3 > Ρ€τα τ°ύτο 3 2; 7 ι ; 25 ι ; 31 2 ; 37 2 ; 46 ι ; 54 ι ; 67 4 ; 70 2; 75 ι ; 85 2; αίσ^όyuejOS τούτο 8 ι ; τούτο πυθόμενοι 51 ι ; eV αυτό τούτο 34 5 5 36 ι ; is τούτο ήναγκάσμεθα ώστε 62 4·—Touro ποιεΐν in reference to a previous statement 46 2 ; 48 1; 49 2 ; τούτο δράσουσι 68 3. —iv τούτω, interea 20 1; 23 2; 30 2; 47 1; 50 1; 78 5 ; 81 1. —ούτοι 19 4 ; 33 2; 57 4 ; 58 2; 68 3 ; 69 4 ; 77 6 ; 83 4, 5 ; 85 2; aSrcu 70 4 ; τούτων rots ivavHois 75 7» ^rt εγγύτατα τούτων 86 5; rotfrois 85 4.—ra eVl rotfrois 62 4 ; 73 3.—τούτων πάντων άπορώτατον 14 2J ytterct τούτους 19 4 ; ratfras (rots ναύς) έτρεψαν 23 3 ; μετά ταύτα 4 ι ; 6 ι ; 25 3 5 οντι περί ταύτα 31 3· —with art. ή £ifywrao-a οδό* auV?7 80 2 ; το παρατείχισμα τούτο 11 3 ί r ^ φυλακην τ. 1 2 ; r. ro /uepos 43 4; τ· τ"°£ ^pos 21 ι ; r-^s ημέρας τ. 40 2; 47 2; iv τφ χειμώνι r . 18 4 ; ^ τ φ 0fyet τ . 27 3 ; 41 ι ; 49 4J 85 4ί ^πό τ . rcV χρόνον 28 4» 3 * ι·-- * α * όντως τταροΧαμ,βάν O6TOS, isque: πόλει έφκεσαν υπ οφενγούσχι καΐ ταύτη ού σμικρφ 75 5 · — ^ ων—εκ τούτων 48 3 (G. Gr.2 § 1030); οϋς...τούτους 70 8; ασα.,.ταϋτα 83 2.—re­ sumptive 42 3 · — w · Sen· κατά τούτο καιρού 2 4 J τούτο δυστυ­ χίας 86 5; €> τοι5τφ τ ό χ ^ 33 6 οΰτως.,.ώ? 5 4 > 15 ι ; 44 2.— ourws O'TTWS 67 4·—ο#τω$ (an eu­ phemism for κακώς) έπεπράτ^εσαν 24 ι.—as protasis 8 2 ; 28 4 όχλος 8 2 ; 56 4 (dub.); 62 1, 2 ; 75 5 όψε, sero: μέχρι 6. 83 3 οψις, visus 71 3.—species, adspectus 44 2.—Οψει )( ^νώμτ\ 75 2 Π πάθος, dades: τό εν τοις Σικελοΐς 7Γ. iyivero 33 3 ; πάθει χρησαμένην δλοφύρασθαι άξίψ 30 4 π α ι ά ν 1 75 7 παιανίξειν 44 6 ; 83 4 παιανισ-μός 1 : ό π. 44 6 ["n-aieiVjjZtera^r^: παίοντες (B) Tots έμβόΚοις 36 3 · S e e n . ΛΑΓ/.] παις: PL. liberi: καΐ π. καϊ Ύυναΐκα* 29 4, 5 5 6 8 2 5 69 2 πάλαι, iampridem )( πάραχρήμα 7 5 ^ παλαιός 25 5 5 33 4 ί όλκάδα ττ. 53 4 πάλιν, retrorsum 4 3 ί 27 2; 40 ι ; 44 4» ή τ · κατάβασις 8; τήρ 7Γ. άνάκρουσιν 62 3 ; 75 7 #/·— πάλιν αϋ, rursus 46 ι ; 64 ι.—vicissim 38 3 πανο-εληνος 1 : ττ. σελήνη 50 4 πανστρατιφ: άπανταν π. 1 3 ; 2 2 ; 7Γ. 6£?}λ£οζ' 2 2 παντάπασιν 6 4 * τ · άφειστήκει > του πολέμου 7 2 πανταχί), quoquo verstis: προσέβαλλον 7Γ. κύκλω 79 5 πανταχόθεν, «£ omni parte 70 ι, 2, 6 ; 82 ι ; 83 3 ; 84 ι, 2 πανταχόσ-ε 1 : δύναμιν π, πολ\ήν φαινομένην 42 2 eiv 3 91 παντελώς, omnino 1 ι παντοίος, omnigenus: πείραις π. 25 8 πάντως: κατά πάντα π. 87 6 πανωλεθρία 1 , 3 87 6. C p . the form πανοικησία II ι 6 , ι ; III 57> 2 παρά w. Gen. (always with personal objects): oi π. του Νικίου (sc. ηκοντες) 10.—w. Ace. ad, *to', with personal objects only; άφικνεΐται Κόνων τταρ7 αυτούς 31 \.—juxta,l near,' * along b y ' : την ayopav π. (dub.) την θάλασσαν μεταστησαι 39 2 ; π. τήν εκείνων πόλιν (τα επιτήδεια) έσκομιζδμενοι 13 Ι ; όπως π. τον ποταμόν ϊοιεν 80 5·—contra, 'contrary t o ' : 7τ. ^νωμην 13 ι\ π.,το είωθός 60 5; 75 5 5 π . τό καθεστηκός 67 2 ; τψ 7ταρ' ελπίδα 66 3 J Ή\ τήρ ά^ίαν 77 ι : 7Γ. λόyov 71 7·—ττ· τοσούτον ήλθον κινδύνου 2 45 ταρ' oXiyov 71 3 παραβάλλεο-θαι: λι'0οι παραβεβλημένοι τφ πλέονι ήσαν 2 4· Comp. 7rpoπαραβοηθεΐν 37 3 ; 53 ι ; 70 ι ; 716 παραγγε*λλειν, edicere 43 2 παραγίγνεσθαι, advenire 42 ι ; 58 3·—interesse: oiπaρayεvόμεvoι 44 ι παραδιδόναι, tradere 68 ι ; 82 2, 35 παραδεδώκοιεν 83 ι, 2; 85 ι ; 86 4·—transmittere (ab alio acceptum) 68 ^.—pei-mittere 233 παραθαρστύνειν 2 ι παραινεΐν: Tots ναύταις παραινώ 63 2.—PASS, παρψήσθαι 69 3 παρακαλεΐν, advocare 20 ι παρακελεύεσθαι, cohortari 44 4; 60 5; 63 2; 65 ι, 3 ; 69 ι ; 78 ι παρακελευσ-ις 70 *j\ έπιφερόμενοι εκ π. έναυμάχουν 40 \ παρακομιδή, transportatio: ή των επιτηδείων π. 28 Ι παραλαμβάνει ν, potiri, ' to win ' : άξιον τι λόγου παραλαβειν 392 7τα/)αλ€ΐ7Γ€σ0αι Trapanreveiv παραφράγμα: ναυν 'έχουσαν παραφράγματα 25 6 παραχρήμα 75 5 παρ€ΐναι: όσοι πάρεστε 61 3 5 παραΛ«£π€σθαι (PASS.) 69 4 εν τφ παρόντι 42 3 > 73 2 ; 75 6 ; παράλογος, ' s u r p r i s e ' : ό ττ. τη παρούση εκπλήξει 42 3 ; 69 2 ; αύτοΐς μέγας ην 55 ι ; τό^ 7Γ. τό παρόν στράτευμα 25 9ϊ τ ^ μ τοσούτον ποιήσαι τοις "Βλλ^σι T?}S παροϋσαν άπορίαν 29 ι ; 47 ι ; τα δυνάμεως 28 3» ^ώ? & rots πολέπαρόντα, praesens rerum status μοις π. 61 3 15 ι ; ά7τό των π. 56 ι\ 67 4» παραλυ€ΐν, demovere: τόν Nt69 2 ; 71 ι ; 72 2 ; έκ των π. κίαν ού παρέλυσαν της αρχής 16 ι 62 ι ; 77 i.—licere: παρήν (αύτφ) παράμεναν 15 ι αίσθάνεσθαι 65 ι παραμ,υθεΐσ-θαι 76 τ παρ€λθ€ΐν, excedere 6 ι , 4 · — παρανόμησα, delictum 18 2, 3 παραπλ€ΐν, adnavigare, prae- prodire (in concionem) 10 tervehi 1 1 ; 23 2 ; 25 4 ; 26 3 ; παρ€ξ€ψ€σ£α 3 4 5 ; 40 5· Ass33 5 ; 35 1, 2 ; 40 5 ; 50 2 ; TOP man (Baumeister's Denkmdler λιμένα παρέπλεον 56 ι Band i n p . 1609) considers t h a t π α ρ α π λ ή σ ι α 19 2 ; 44 6 ; 69 it means the part of t h e vessel by the side of or along (παρέξ) 2 ; 78 ι ; παραπλησίαις καί 70 ι ; the banks of oarsmen and, in 71 7 J w. dat. στρατόν Ίσον καϊ π. confirmation of his opinion, re­ τφ προτέρω 42 2*, 71 5 fers to Thuc. i v c. 12, 1 where π α ρ ά π λ ο ^ : εν τφ π. 29 ι ; 50 2 it is said of Brasidas that h e ιταρασ-κέυάζέσ-θαι: MED. w. fu­ was standing upon the ship's ture participle (without cJs) 17 3 ; gangway, ready to disembark, (with ώς) 41 4 ; 50 3 ; 61 $.—pawhen he received his fatal wound, rare se 3 4 1 ; 50 3.—w. infin. 35 1 ; 73 3.—w. obj. ace. 17 1; 18 1; and, as h e fell on t h e παρεξειρεσία, his shield slipped from off 22 1; 36 2 ; 38 3 ; 59 3.—PASS. his arm into the water praeparari: άφ* ών ήμΐν παρεσirapepvos: ούκ έκ π. τόν πόλεκεύασται ( = άπ' εκείνων α) 67 3 5 μον έποιειτο 27 4 παρεσκεύαστο τό ναυτικόν 22 ι ; παρ€\€ΐν, suppeditare: 1 3» παρεσκευάσθαι 75 ι . Comp. 33 4 ; 57 4·—afferre: αεί προσδοάί>τίκίαν π. ώ$ έπιπλεύσονται 12 4» παρασ-κβυή, * force' 36 ι ; 62 ι ; κατάπληξιν παρέσχε καϊ άθυμίαν π. ναυτικού 12 ι ; τοξευμάτων 43 τφ στρατεύματι 24 3» (Τφίσιν 2 ; του πεζοϋ 36 τ ; έκ π. κρείσσονος 55 2 ; 42 ι ; 48 5 ; τ% π. ούκ έλασ­ αύτοΐς θόρυβον παρεΐχον 44 45 άπορίαν, φόβον παρείχε 44 6 ; σον 'έξοντας 5 4 j τομάτα?...καϊ την ελπίδος τι παρείχε 48 2 ; 'έκπληζιν άλλην π. 42 τ ; 48 5·—των εμβό­ καϊ άποστέρησιν της ακοής παρλων τη π. 40 5 > 65 ι ; 67 2 ; έχειν 70 6.—MED. praebere pro παρασκευής πίστει )( τύχης 67 4 παρατάσ-οτίΐν, aciem instruere, parte sua: 58 3, \.—praestare, efficerei ή μεγίστη έλπίς μεγίστην 3 4 ; 5 ι ; 69 3·—MED. παρετάξκαϊ τήν προθυμίαν παρέχεται 67 αντο 3 ι.—PASS. 34 2 ; 37 3 ; ι . I n c. 36 3J "U-bi vulgo παρέ­ 78 3» 79 ι . Comp. άντι4 2 χοντες, legitur a plerisque παίπαρατ€£χισ-μα 11 3ί 45 οντες 43 ι, 5 παριιΠΓ€ύ€ΐν2, adequitare 78 3 , παραυτ(κα 85 4 ϊ e> τ<£ ττ. 71 * 7 ; T^S 7Γ. ώφελίας 57 9 38 ι.—assumere, sumere secum 20 3 ; 26 1, 3 ; 31 2—PASS, ες τόν πόλεμον παρελήφθησαν 57 8 παρίστασθαι irapCo-τασθαι, adstare 84 4 irdpoSos: έν r J π., i^z&r 2 3 τταροικο8ομ€ΐν, άκζ/β αιΐ/ζficare 6 4 ; 11 3.—PASS. 6 1 w a s : /δ^α 7ra w. particp. 85 τ . Comp. άναπ α χ υ ς : τάς έπωτίδας έπέθεσαν παχείας 36 ι\ στερίφοις καΐ π, έμβόλοις 36 3 π α χ ΰ τ η ς 1 : τάς π. 62 3 ιτ€θ?ον 79 5> 6.—το 7Γ. pars Atticae a b Oenoe ad Cropias 19 1, 2 iretTJ )( ναυσίν 60 2 π€ξικός, pedestris: στρατιάν π. 7 2; 16 ι ΐΓ€£ομαχ€ίν άπό των νέων 62 4 TTC/CH 393 ΊΓ€£ομαχία 62 2 π€£ός, ό, jtf. στρατός, pedestres copiae 12 2 ; 25 9 ί 34 2, 8 ; 35 ι ; 36 ι ; 37 ι, 35 3 8 * 5 4 0 5 5 59 2 ; 62 4 5 70 ι ; 71 ι ; 87 3 · — τήρ 7Γ. στρατιάν 79 ι.—πεζοί, pedites 54 ι ; 64 2 ; 75 7 · — r ^ 7Γ. peditatus: του π. καϊ του ναυτικού 39 ι ατ€ίθ€ΐν, suadere 1 ι , ι\ 12 ι ; 21 5 J 32 ι ; 33 5 5 73 3 5 «^ίσαί 431.—adducere, corrumpere 13 2; 864.—PASS^d & τήρ 7Γ. του ναυτικού Ιέναι, periculum facere 21 4·—PL· 'strata­ gems ' : π. παντοίαις έχρωντο 25 8 π α ρ ά ν w. gen., temptare: π. των τειχών 12 2 ; πειράσαντες αλλήλων 38 ι . — τ ψ πεξψ μόνω πειράσειν 37 3·—MED. πειρώμενοι αλλήλων 39 2.—conari: πειράσειν 32 ι.—MED. επειρώντο λύειν 70 2, 5· Comp. ά^α-, άποπέλαγος, #z#r£ apertum: with­ out article eV 7τ. καϊ ούκ 4ν στενο­ χώρια 49 2; 62 2.—w. art. 19 4 ; 34 6; 36 6 ; 4 7 3 πέλας, ol, alii 21 3 π€λταο-τής, cetratus 27 ι ireji/imv: πέμψαντες εκέλευον 1 3 5 έπεμπε άγγ^λλω^ 8 1 ; πεπόμφασι πρέσβεις 12 ι.—PASS, οί πεμπόμενοι 8 2. Comp. a^rt-, άπο-, έκ-, έπι-, έπι-μετα-, μετά-, ξυμ-, προ-, προσπέμψις 1 , missio: πέμψιν νέων ποιήσασθαι 17 3 iT€pcuv€(r0cu, ad finem perduci 43 5. (Betant takes it as middle) irepcuovcrOcu w. ace. 33 3 ; 47 3. —abs. 1 2; 7 3 ; 17 2; 31 1; 50 2 πέρας, terminus: εί π. μηδέν 'έσται σφίσι του άπαΚλα^ηναι του κινδύνου 42 2. Comp. άντιττ€ρι w. Gen. de: π. άπαλλα^γης 394 π€ριαγγ4λλ.€ΐν του πολέμου έκκλησιάσειν 2 2 (cf. Arist. Thesm. 83); βουλεύσασΒαι π. της akydeias 8 2 ; ψηφιεΐσθαι π. των αυτών 48 3 5 π. του προσκαθησθαι ούδ} όπωσουν ένεδέχετο 49 2 ; π. του αύτοϊ σωθηναι την έττιμέλειαν έποιουντο 56 2 ; 64 2 ; π. της σωτηρίας άντιλαβέσθαι 70 7 5 φιλονεικών π. του πλείονος κάλου 71 ι ; ά77^λλοντας της ναυμαχίας ττέρι 25 9 J νεκρών ττέρι...ούδ'έπενόουν αΐτησαι άναίρεσιν 72 2 ; 7Γ. τώ? eV άφανεΐ δεδιότας 75 45 **· τωι» σταυρών άκροβολισμός 25 5·—w. Dat. ττ. τοις δορατίοις καϊ σκεύεσιν διεφθείροντο 84 3 · — P o s t verba timendi δείσαντες ττερΙ ταΐς ναυσίν 53 3» 4 ( a poetical construc­ tion, the gen. or ace. being used in prose: cf. Arist. Eccl. 27). — w . Ace. L o c a l ττ. Σούνιον 28 ι ; 31 5 ; 42 6 ; 57 7; 17 2 ; τα ττ. τό ττεδίον 19 ι ; 20 ι.—circa: ττ. 'έρμα ττεριβάλη την ναυν 25 7 > ναΰς ταραχθεΐσαι ττ. άλλήλας 23 3 5 δι5ο π. μίαν ναΰς ξυνηρτησθαι 70 6 (cf. Arist. ^<:Λ. 118ο, ττ. λίθον ττεσών).—2. Of the object about which one is concerned, ' i n respect t o ' · : 'όντι αύτψ ττ. ταύτα 31 15; τα ττ. της στρατιάς τόν ξύλλο-γον 31 5 5 τ · σφας αυτούς διεσκόπουν 71 6 ; τα ττ. Σικελίαν ^γενόμενα 87 6.—'in connexion w i t h ' (whence its use in later Greek for the simple gen., cp. Plat. Phaedr. 279 Α τους ττ. Αυσίαν λό-γους, see Plut. Demosth. c. 30, 2 with m y n . ad I.); την ττ. Πύλον ξυμφοράν 18 2 ; τα ττ. το σώμα ες δίαιταν επιτήδεια 74 ι . — T e m p o r a l : circa, π. ηλίου τροπάς 16 2 ; π. τόν αυτόν χρόνον 19 3 5 34 ι ; π. τας auras ημέρας 33 ι ; π. αρίστου ώραν 81 ι . — w i t h numerals:' όπλίτας π. τετρακισχιλίους 42 ι ττ€ριαγγ€λλ€ΐν: σίδηρον περιήγ^εΚΚον κατά τους ξυμμάχους, ——πήχυς missis nuntiis parari iubebant 18 4 ΊΓ€ριβάλλ€ΐν: μη την ναυν περί έρμα περιβάλτ) 25 7 ·π·€ριγίγν€σθαι: περί'γενησομέ· νους (Β) 21 4·—w. gen. 56 3 1 ircpi/ypcwrros : εκ βραχέος καϊ π. ορμώμενοι 49 2 irepiSecos 7 1 3 ir€pi€ivai, circumdare 81 4 · — superiorem esse: περιεσομένους (codd. praeter B) 21 4 irgpieXcnSveiv1 44 8 ·ΐΓ€ρι£σ·τασ"θαι, ciraimstare 83 3.—contingere 70 6.—redire, ' t o shift r o u n d ' : au#is £s τούς 'Αθη­ ναίους περιεστάναι 18 3 7Γ€ρικλη€ΐν: MED. περικλησασθαι τας ναϋς 5 2 ΊΓ€ρικομ.££€ΐν: es τόζ> Στρυμόνα περικομίσας τριήρεις 9 ircpiXonros 72 3 irepijJwixTjTOS1 84 5 ΐΓ€ρψ.€ν€ΐν, exspectare, ' t o w a i t for' 20 3 ; περιμείνας εως 26 3'» 33 6 ; 74 ι TrepLopdv w. participle, sinere, aequo animo ferre 6 1; w. inf. 73 1.—MED. exspectare eventum, ' to wait for events ' 33 2 περιουσ-ία: έκ πολλής π, νεών 13 ι irepwrXctv 20 2; 22 ι, 2; 36 4»6; 405 TrepCirXovs: έκ π. 36 3> 4 «πΈριττόλιον, castellum 48 5 TrepurraSov 1 : ττ. έβάλλοντο 81 4 ΐΓ€ριτ€ΐχ£ζ€ΐν 11 3 5 42 4 ·ΤΓ€ριτ€ΐχισ-|Α08: του π. 11 3 ττεριφέρβιν1, susiinere, ' t o hold out in w a r ' : περιοίσειν 28 3 ir€pi\ap€S, ro, summa laetitia: ύπό του π. της νίκης 73 2 ιττ|: el' 7r?7 78 ι ττηγνυσ-θαι, defigi: 6 έπεπή^ει 38 2. Comp. /caraιτηλόδ, lutum 84 5 ιτήχυδ 1 , cubitus (de mensura): ws eVt ££ 7Γ. 36 2 TTikt^iv ΐΓΐ€^€ΐν, premere 28 3·—PASS. νδσω έτηέζοντο 47 2 ; ττ} ασθένεια των ανθρώπων πιεζόμενα 50 3 5 Χιμφ καϊ δίψη έπιέζοντο 87 2 «ϊΓίμ,ττλασθαι1: δάκρυσι πΧησθέν 75 4· Comp. άπο-, δια-, έμirlveiv 84 2, 4 · — P A S S . 84 5 irlirreiv, concidere, corruere 29 3.—Fig. δύναμιν πεπτωκυΐαν έπανορθώσοντες 77 7· Comp. &c-, e/Λ-, 67Γί-, έσ-, ξυμ-, προσ-, ύπο«rrio"T€'U€tv, confidere 36 45 ^"10"τεύσας 85 ι ; w. ace. 86 3 ττίσ-Tis w. obj. gen. 67 4 irXo/yios 59 3.—e/c 7r. των Άθ., a latere 6 2.—τά n \ , /atfmz 40 5 irXaCtriov: iv π. (quadrato agmine) τεταΎμένον 78 2 ιτλανάσθαι: έπλανήθησαν 44 8 irXiQpov1: όσον δύο π. 38 3 irXciv: έπε της Ιμέρας π. 1 2; 'έπλεον 26 ι ; 31 ι; 69 4 ; τριήρους εΰ πλεούσης 23 2 ; ναυ? r a s άριστα πλεούσας 31 55 ^ εκείνα πλευσομένους 64 ι ; προς την Ίτάλίαν έπλευσαν 25 ι ; 40 ι ; πλεύσας 20 3 5 26 τ ; 31 55 & Ίμέραρ πλεύσαντες 1 ι. Comp. άπο-, δια-, δι-εκ-, έκ-, έπι-, έπ-εκ-, έσ-, κατά-, ξυμ-, πάρα-, περί-, προσirXciorTOs: v. s. πολύς ττλήθοδ, multitudo 11 3 5 άζίως τοϋδε του π. 61 3 5 τφ π. των νέων 67 ^—numerus: ναυς αντι­ πάλους τφ π. 12 4 J τ · πλέον 58 4 ιτλήν, praeter w. gen. 28 2; 32 2 ; 35 2 ; 56 4 5 83 5 5 87 3· —praeterquam 2 4 ; 23 4 ; 44 τ; 62 4 Ίτλήρη5: επειδή πλήρεις ήσαν (de navibus) 37 3 ιτληροΰν, instruere naves: ναυτικον έπλήρουν 7 45 17 45 21 2, 5 ; 31 5 5 37 3 5 40 3 ; 51 2 ; 60 2, 3 5 65 ι ; 72 3, 4·—PASS. έπληρώθησαν.. ,πληρωθείσαι 19 5· C o m p . άρτί-, ^7ri-, £υμ-, προσττλήρωμα, remiges,i crew', col­ lective : βραχεία άκμη πληρώματος 14 ι.—PL. 4 6 ; 12 3 ; 13 2 πολέμιος 395 ιτλοίον: PL. 4 5; 7 3 ; 23 2 ; τ · χρημάτων ^έμοντα 25 15 ο δ rot, 7Γ. ωρμει 31 ι ; τω? «> τοΐς π. ibid.; ά» τοις λεπτοΐς π. 40 55 593 TT\OT)S: δπωςτδν ες την Σικελίαν π. ποιήται 26 3 5 κατά πλουν ών 31 3 5 τον π. ηγεμόνας 50 2; e7re£ayovTa τφ π. πρδς την yrjv 52 2. —as measure of distance 50 2 ττλούσ-ios 86 4 ατνΐγοδ 1 , aestus: τδ π. 87 ι ιτοθ€ν, alicunde: εΐ π. 20 2 ατοί 74 2 ; w. gen. 51 ι ; 73 ι iroi€iv 38 2; 87 2.—π. ταύτόν, idem valere, ταύτον έποίει νικάν τε καϊ μηδέ μάχεσθαι 'it made no difference' 6 ι.—vicarious use of (τούτο, ποιειν) 48 ι ; 49 2.— πολλά υμάς ευ έποίησα 15 2 . — MED. w. prep, iv όλ^ωρία 7Γ. 3 2; w. subst. as periphrasis for a v e r b : ποιεισθαι τους άyωvaς 49 2; την άποχώρησιν 67 4 5 άριστον 40 ι ; άρπayήv 26 2, 29 2 ; 7*^μ.?^ 72 3 5 7"^ Ζκπλουν 17 ι ; 'ένεδραν 32 2; ένθύμιον, in prodigium trahere 50 4 ; έξέτασιν 56 2; ras ^rcwiryaryas 4 4 ; τήρ έπιμέλειαν 56 2; τήρ έπιχείρησιν 43 ι ; καταδρομάς 27 5 J ?"V κατάφευξιν 41 ι ; κήpυyμa 82 ι ; ληστείας 27 4 5 μάχην 49 2 ; ναυμαχίαν 62 2 ; πέμψιν 17 3 5 τον πλουν 26 3 5 ιτ. τ"^ πόλεμον 47 4 5 73 ι ; σπονδά? ποιήσασθαι 86 3 5 τροπήν 54 ι ; την φυλακήν 17 4 5 30 2 irotiyreos: έδόκει ποιητέα ταύτα 73 2 ιπ>λ€μ€ΐν 57 ι, 6. Comp. δια-, κατά-, ξυμ-, προσττολεμία sc. yi), hostilis ager: έκ π. 75 4 5 80 3 iroXefAtos, hostis: την των π, Ισχύν 8 ι ; 25 9 5 12 4 5 13 2; 14 2; 44 4 5 8 0 3 5 τ<^ των π. 49 2; 77 7·—hostilis: τήν π. yrjv 70 8 ; 62 4 5 των π. νέων 40 5 ; πάν\.. πολέμων ένόμιζον 4Α 4 5 36 5» του π. καταστρώματος 63 ι.—· 396 πόλ€μος—— SUP. πο\εμιώτατον αύτοΐς 86 35 ανδρών πολεμιωτάτων 68 ι iroXe^os 2 ι ; διαπεπολεμησεται δ π. (dub.) 14 3 ; άφειστήκει του Τ π . 7 2 ; 28 4 > Φ «ατά θάλασσαν π. 4 4> τ<£ 7Γ· τετρυχωμένοι 28 3 ; iv τφδε τφ π. 44 ι ; 56 45 Ιζ> τ $ ττ. τούτφ 85 45 & τό? 7Γ. 83 2; πρόθυμοι ές τόν π. 18 35 μτ) άνιέναι τόν π. 18 ι ; δίτι-λοΟρ τό*> ττ. έχοντας 18 2 ; TOP e/cet 7Γ. 25 ι ; τόν έκ της ^εκελείας 7Γ. 27 2; 28 3> 4? κατ^ τον 7 Γ · 3 0 4 ; κατά τόϊ> 7Γ. T £ρ Tots -π-. Trapa\6ycav 51 35 δι/ο 7Γ. ά/χα εΓχορ 28 3 πολιορκεί ν 9 ι,; 11 4·—PASS. πολιορκουμένους έπιτειχισμφ υπό ΐίελοποννησίων 28 3 5 ^0 2. Comp. άντι-, έκπό\ις : άντι του π. είναι φρούριον κατέστη 28 ι ; άνδρες π. καϊ ού τείχη 77 7 5 ' η 5 ϊ ' β^άλην δύναμιν της ττ. 77 7 5 T*7S T WP Αθηναίων π. 19 2 ; δίά μέ*γεθος πόλεως 58 4 5 τ?7 7Γ. προσέκειτο 29 35 ^ α ^ ' oVo? 7rpos τήϊ> 7Γ. έώρα 37 2; £0ΪΊ7 πλείστα έπϊ μίαν π. ταύτην ξυνήλθε 56 4 5 TVV (τφετέραν π. 56 35 T7]V ύπάρχουσαν οίκείαν πδλιν 61 ι ; 72 ι ; 82 3 5 κατά πόλεις διελόμενοι το gpyov 19 ι ; τάς ταύτη π. 80 2.—civitas: τη π. ώφελιμώτερον 47 4 ιτολιτ€ία, forma reipublicae: πολιτείας μεταβολής 55 2 iroXCrqs 44 7 ιτολίχνα: τη εν τφ Όλυμπιείω π. 4 6 iroXXctKLS 63 4 5 τ · κat ά'λλοτε 8 ι ιτολλαχη χ 43 ι ιτολλαχόθ€ν 14 2 Ίτολλαχοΰ 1 70 6 ττολυειδήδ1, varius: πολυειδη φθέ^εσθαι 71 4 7Γορθ€Ϊν iroXvs: το π. μέρος 27 5 · — πολύ, multum 7 4 ^ · 5 w. gen. 44 3 ; w. comp. multo 1 4 ; 40 5 ; 41 4.—7τολλφ w. compar. multo 17 3 ; 19 2, 4 ; 28 4 ; 48 1; 51 1; π, δη 55 2 , 7ΐγ)0Ρ* λαβε πολλφ 80 4·—de t e m p o r e : χρόνον 7τ. 34 4 5 πλείω χρόνον 28 3 ; &rl 7τολι> άντέχειν 22 2; 34 4 ; 71 55 78 75 79 6; w. gen. 38 ι ; 39 2.—de l o c o : ούκ έν 7τ. οΰσαν 36 3 5 της χώρας έπϊ πολύ έξερχόμεθα 11 4 ; forming one word as subject or object; 40 55 της νεώς έπϊ πολύ κατεβύρσωσαν 65 2.—PL. πολλά, mul­ tum 15 2 ; 27 3 al. 5 οίπ., plerique 25 6 ; 41 4 5 4* 8 al.; τά πολλά, pleraque 25 2 ; 60 55 plerumque 67 ι.—ττλείων: χλΙοζ> $ δι5ο μυ­ ριάδα 27 5 5 w. gen. 27 55 57 1 1 ; πλείονος του στρατεύματος παρόν­ τος 53 3 5 έπϊ πλέον 48 2 ; πολύ πλειον 63 3 5 ο* πλείους, plerique: μάχαις ταΐς π. 11 2 ; 40 3 5 43 4 5 48 4 ; in partitive appos. 50 4 Λ/. ; τά πλείω, pleraque 55 2; 63 2 ; adv. plerumque 81 4·—7TX^OJ> τι £χευ>, meliore esse conditione 36 2.—irXeurros in relative clause 20 2 ; 21 τ.—τήϊ> π. της στρατιάς 3 4·—πλείστον έν αύτψ σχησειν 36 5·— ω $ 67τ£ πλείστον, quam longissime 69 3 5 76 ι.—το πλείσ­ τον, maxima pars 57 4·—πλείστα, plurimum )(ελάχιστα 68 3 iroXvTeXTJs 27 2; 28 ι iroveiv (de navibus) 38 2 ·π*όνηρο5, infirmus: π. πpάyματα 48 ι . — C o m p . deterior 48 2 1 irovTJpcos : e2%oi> 7Γ. 83 4 irovos: T^S οι) δι* ολίγου 7Γ. κεκτημένης θαλάσσης 70 8 ; e? 7Γ. ξυνεχεστέρω ων 81 4 irovTos: τό? Τυρσηνικόν π. 58 2 Tropeia, iter: π. άσφάΚη 77 55 κατά την π. 85 4 irop€V€ 3* 55 2; 75 2. προϊΐναι, progredi 6 ι (dub.); —sumrna reru?n: τα π. ένδοϋναι 43 7» 78 4> 5> ηροησαν 6; 7τρο48 2; 49 ι εληλύθεσαν 79 4» 6 πράοτσ-€ΐν, agere: μη ές άναβοπροκαλ€Ϊσ*θαι: & δ£κα$ ττρο\ας πράσσετε 15 3 J 25 g.—forκάλουμένων (αυτούς) 18 2, 3 tuna uti: π. χείρον 67 4 ; μη &n προκινδυνβύαν, propugnare 56 χείρω πράξωσι 71 ι ; πραξάντων α βουλόμεθα 68 3 ; ούτως έπεπρά3 'γεσαν 24 ι . Comp. διαπροκόπτ€ΐν, promovere 56 3 πρέττειν 68 3 προλαμβάν€ΐν, praecedere: τδ πράτβ€ΐς, legati 7 3 ; 12 ι ; Ήικίου στράτευμα προϋλαβεπολλφ 17 3 J 25 9 5 32 2 Λ/. 80 4 πρ€σ-βΰτ€ρο$: 7Γ. ηλικίας 29 4 προλ€(π€ΐν, deesse: εϊτω πρόλίπρ£ν, ααώα 28 4 ; 66 2 ; 68-3· ποι ή ρώμη 75 4 —antequam w. inf. 28 3 * 36 ι ; > προοραν, «^/ 52 ι ; 56 4 > 7Γ· άταξίαν τοιαύτην opyv προσμείξωμεν 68 ι.-—'with reference t o ' : πολλή ή παρακέλευσις π. την αύτίκα φίλονικίαν έ^νετο 70 7 · — ' m v i e w o f : έβουλεύοντο 7Γ. τ ^ ί-υμφοράν 47 ι ; π . τήν παροϋσαν άπορίαν έβουλεύσαντο 60 2; π . τό α^ελμα επέσχον την νύκτα 74 ι . — / r a , 'according to the standard o f : τοιαύτα π. την εαυτών έπιστήμην έπινοήσαντες37 ι . — ' i n compari­ son with ' : π. τόύς έπελθόντας αύτοϊ πλήθος πλέον παρέσχοντο 58 4 · — T e m p o r a l : sub, paulo ante: του Ζτους προς μετόπωρον ήδη οντος 79 2. [Cp. Arist. Eccl. 10 προς 6ρθρον εστί, 312 προς &ο νυν εστίν, Lys. 412 προς έσπέραν] «ττροσ·άγ€ΐν, admovere copias 37 1; ναυν 25 6 ; τάς μηχανάς 43 ι . —MED. sibi conciliare 7 2 ; 55 2 ιτρο(Γαιρ€ίσθαι: δύο (ξυνάρχοντας) προσείλοντο 16 ι ιτροσ-ανα/γκάζει,ν 18 4 irpocravaipeio-Gat 1 , insuper suscipere: πολεμον ουδέν ελάσσω του υπάρχοντος προσανείλοντο 28 3 1 irpocravilvai : προσανψι 44 3 •7Γρθσ7Γ67ΓΤ€ίν •π-ροσ-αττόλλυσθαι 71 7 προ<τβα£ναν: προσβάντες 43 3 ττροσ-βάλλαν, adoriri w . dat. 6 3 ; 22 ι ; 43 ι, 6, >j; 79 5 ί προσέβαλλον προς τα τείχη 51 2 πρόσ-βασ-is, adiius 45 ι ττροσ-βοηθβΐν 34 2 ιτροσ-βολή, impetus 70 4 ; 80 ι ; 81 5? 84 2 ; 85 4·—appulsus: την π. της Σικελίας 4 7 ΊΓρο<Γγ£γν€σθαι with dat. accedere 14 3 ; 50 3 ; 67 ι Trpocr8ex€ ^νώμην 15 35 w. dat. 23 ι.—absol. w. dat. 4 4; 75 7 ατροσ-θδν 'in front': τα π. 44 3 ; e > τ φ 7Γ. 78 4, 5 ; 81 3 ; έχώρουν * έςτόπ. 43 5 5 78 3 , 5 προσαέναι, appropinquare 3 3 5 53 4 5 προσψι τφ τείχει 37 2 ; TO?S προσιουσιν 37 3ϊ λαθεΐν προσελ~ θ όντας 43 2 #/.—provenire 28 4 ιτροσ-καθήσ-θαι 47 \\ 48 2, 6 ; 49 2 ττρο<ΓΚ€Ϊσ·θαι, instare, ' t o in­ s i s t ' : προσκείμενος ('urgently') έδίδασκε 18 ι ; 78 3·—θειασμφ προσκείμενος 50 4.—-aggredi 29 3 ; 30 2 ; 42 3 5 78 3 ; 84 ι ΊΓρο<τλαμ.βάν€ΐν: στρατιαν άλλην προσλαβόντες 1 ι ·π·ροσ-μ£σγ€ΐν, accedere 41 3 5 70 2 ; 81 2.—congredihl 1; επειδή προσμείζειαν 70 5 ; with dat. 39 ι ; w. ace. and προς 68 ι.—conitmgere se: προς τας εντός ναϋς προσμεΐξαι 22 ι ατροσ-μιατθοΰσθαι 19 4 trpooroSos, reditus: αχ π. 28 4 ΊΓροσ·οφ€ίλ€ΐν 'έτι πολλά 48 5 ΊΓροαΓΊΓ€μ/ΐΓ€ΐν 3 Ι ; 3 5 2 irpcxririirrav, incidere 36 6 ; 62 3 ; 70 3J 4·—evenire 28 4 · — adoriri 23 ι ; 53 2 ; έπϊ τιμωρία προσπλέιν του προσπεσοντος 68 ι ; 70 ι ; 79 5", 81 2 ; 83 3 •π-ροσττλείν 2 ι ; 4 7$ 25 ι, 7» 38 ι ; 74 2 ιτροσιτληροΰν ναΰς 34 ι ΐΓροσιτολ€μ€ϊν 51 ι ττροστασσ€ΐν, praeficere: προστάξαντες άρχοντα 19 4 · — imperare 29 ι . — P A S S , praefici: έν φ προσετέτακτο 70 3 irpocTTiOevat, imponere:άνδράσι τα αλόγιστα προσέθεσαν 68 2 Trpo(r€p€cr0cH, congredi 44 4 \ ατάκτως προσφερόμενους 53 ι\ 705 ττροατφιΛής, amicus 86 4 *irpoopos, commodus 62 2 «ιτροσ-χωρβϊν, se adiungere 1 4 ιτροτείχισμα: των π, 43 6 ; ev 7τ. 43 4 irpoT€patos: τη π., pridie 51 2 irpoT€pov 11 1 ; 2 5 9 ; 28 1, 3 ; 33 2 ; 37 2 ; 43 1; 50 3 ; 55 1; 62 1; 67 1; 70 1 ; 7Γ. ^, priusquam w. subj. without &v 63 1 irp<$T€pos, prior: η 7r. στρατιά 43 3 ; τ?}? 7Γ. ναυμαχίας 36 2 ; 37 ι ; τ φ 7Γ. στρατεύματι 42 2 ; τ?7 7Γ. ΛΓ. ημέρα 51 2 ; των 7Γ. στρατιωτωνΪΑ 8 5 er^pa (ϊ>αυ/λαχ£α) των 7Γ. 70 2 ιτρουδ^δοκτο: ν. προδοκεΐν 18 ι ιτρούχ€ΐν, praestare 21 3 ; 66 3· —prominere: άκρα προϋχουσα 4 4 ττρόφασιε, occasio: έπ' αύτο* ^oXias προφάσει, ut servos suos fugitivos quaerant (Betant) 13 2 ιτροφ4ρ€ΐν2 intrans. antecellere, w. gen., 64 2; 77 2.—PASS, proferri, memorari: δσα εϊποιεν av es τταΐδας κτέ. προφερόμενα 69 2 ττροφθάνειν, antevertere 73 ι, 3 ιτροχωρεΐν, progredi 30 τ ; 79 5 ; 81 4·—commodum esse: άλλως δπως αν προχωρά 7 3 ιτρύμνα: πρύμναν κρούεσθαι, navem retro inhibere 40 ι ; 70 8 ιτρφ, #ζ#/2£ 78 4·—mature: COMP. της ώρας πρφτερον 39 ι.— SUP. πρφτατα δ-ή 19 χ ρω/χτ/ 399 πρώρα 36 2. Comp. άϊ/τιιτρφρα&ν, ex prora 36 2.— τά, 7rp., prorae, ' b o w s ' 36 3 ιτρώτονμ&'... έπειτα 19 ι ; 26 2; 42 6 ; 66 ι.—π. μεν 'έπειτα δε 82 ι.—7Γ. 'έπειτα δέ 23 ι ; 42 6.—τό 7Γ. 37^3; 42 6; 43 3J 66 3ί 87 ι ττρώτοδ, primus: 43 45 78 2 ; 81 4 ; 84 3 ; του π. άλόντος 23 2; Μχ?? τι? 7Γ. 11 2; 44 3 5 T ^ τ1"· έσβολήν 28 35 52 2; 53 2 ; & τοις > πρώτοι 19 4 > 24 3 > 27 3 5 T 0 ^ s π. χρόνους 87 ι.—princeps: 70 3· —euro TTJS 7r.i statim ab initio 43 5 TTOKVOS, creber: τοις έρωτή/λασι 7τ. χρώμενοι 44 4 ττύλη: PL. 29 3 ; 43 4» 7 ί 5 1 2 ΐΓυνθοίν€σθαι, comperire with ace. and inf. 1 2 ; 25 1.—w. partcp. 4 7; 31 3.—abs. ως 4y& πυνθάνομαι 12 2; 7re7n5s, quodammodo: εϊπ. 79 5 Ρ ρόδιος: ραδία 75 6 ; p$fo ρ^ό^ τι σφίσιν ^σεσ-^αι 84 2 ; ρξ,σται (αϊ νηες) ες το βλάπτεσθαι 67 3·—adv. for adj. pq.ov αύτφ έφαίνετο η έσκομιδή... £σ€σ·#α6 4 4 ; 84 2 ραδίωβ 22 ι ; 42 4J 75 4 5 77 4·—ρςίοϊ/ 23 2 ; 81 2 peiOpov1, rivus: των ρ. 74 2 ρίτττ€ΐν: ρίπτοντες εαυτούς 44 8 ρύμη, impetus: τη πρώτη ρ. 70 2 • ρώμη, robur,' physical strength' )( επιστήμη 63 4 5 el' r y προλίποι η ρ. 75 4·—confidential ' s p i r i t ' : 4oo ρωννυσθαι έγε'γένητό τις p. (αύτοΐς) 18 2 ; 42 2 ; ρώμχι προφέρων 77 2 ρωννυσθαι, valere: οτ έρρώμην 15 2. Comp. άρα-, έπιΣ σαφής, manifestus: σαφές τό ί-ύνθημα κατέστησαν 44 4 ; εύπραyia σαφεϊ 81 5·—certus: σαφέσ­ τερα 44 ι σαφώς, manifeste 57 7 5 σ · είδότας 14 4 ; 441.—COMP.certius: πυνθανόμενοι σαφέστερον 1 ι o-pccTTTJptos1: σ· κωλύματα (dub.) 53 4 σελήνη : σ. λαμπρά 44 ι; & σ. > 44 2 ; ο", πανσέληνος 50 4 σημαίνειν, significare: σημά­ νουμε 66 ι. — signum dare: &λλω τω σημηναι 44 4 5 50 3 σημ.€Ϊον, signum militare: άρθέντος του σ. 34 4 σίδηρος, ' iron tools ' 18 4 σιδηροΰβ, ferreus: χειρών σ. 62 3 ; 65 ι σιτία, τά, cibaria: πάραγγείλας πέντε ήμερων σ. 43 2 ; 75 5 5 77 6 ; TOJ)S σ. 78 2 σκ€ψασθαι,, speculatum esse; σκεψόμενον 83 ι.—PASS, consulturn esse: εσκεμμένα 62 ι <ΓΚθττ€ΐν, spectare: ες τό αυτό σκοπούντων 71 3· Comp. άνα-, διασκΰλα, τά, spolia 86 ι σμικρός: πόλει ού σ. 75 5 σπάνιος, rarus: τφ ϋδατι σ. χρώμενοι 4 6.—SUP. κινδύνων οΰτοι σπανιώτατοι 68 3 σιτάνις: την των επιτηδείων σ. 605 στρατζναν σιτ&δίσθαι, pacisci 3 ι ; σπένδεται Ιππέα πέμψαι σκεψόμενον 83 ι . Comp. ύποάπονΰαΐ, foedus, induciae: τ ας σ. προτέρους λελυκέναι 18 2 ; έν σ. ib.; κατά τάς σ, 18 35 σπονδάς ποιήσασθαι 86 3 οτίΓουδή, festinatio: <τ. 'ίσται της όδοϋ 77 6 στάδιον 1 , stadium: έπϊ πολλά σ. 79 6 ; 81 3 στάδιος, stadium: 2 4 ; 19 2 ; 29 3 ; 34 8; 7 8 4 ; 79 6 στασιά£€ΐν 46 ι σ τ ά σ ι ς , seditio: στάσει έκπεπτωκότας 33 5·—-factio : η τοις Σ . σ. φιλία έξεπεπτώκει 50 ι στασιωτικός ι σ. καιρών 57 11 σταυρός, valltis: των σ. 25 5> 6, 7 σταυρού ν, ζ>#/#.τ munire 25 7· Comp. ά-ττοσταΰρωμ,α, vallum 38 2.—PL. ££ω των σ. 53 ι > σταΰρωσις 1 , vallum: της σ. η κρύφιος 25 7 στ€λλ€ΐν, mittere: έστειλαν 20 ι. Comp. ά7το-, έπιστ€νό,ϊΓθρα1, τά, angustiae 73 ι στ€νός 4 4 ; 44 8 ; στ€Ρ?}5 εσ­ όδου 51 2 ; 79 ι στένότης, angustia: τη του λιμένος σ. 62 ι )pla,angustiae locorum: έν σ. 36 45 *& 2 ; 49 2 ; 70 6 ; 87 2 στ€ρίσκ€ΐν 71 3·—PASS, της χώρας έστέρηντο 27 5· Comp. ά7ΓΟ- στέριφος, solidus: σ. έμβόλοις 36 3-—COMP. τάς πρφρας στεριφωτέρας εποίησαν 36 2 στόμα, ostium: τό σ. του λι~ μένος 4 4 ; 22 2 ; 23 3 ί 36 6 ; 56 ι ; 59 3 στόνος 1 , gemitus 71 6 στρατβία, expeditio: της σ. δ μετάμελος 55 ι.—militia: ή σ. έ'γί'γνετο 57 9 στρατ€υ€ΐν, expediiionem fa- στράτευμα cere 9 ι ; 77 3·—militare 57 11; 68 3·—MED. 57 6. C o m p . έπι-, οττράτίυμ,α 5 3 5 6 35 20 3 ; 24 35 79 6; άνάστασις του σ. 75 ι ; διεφθαρμένου του σ. 85 ι ; τ φ (Γ. έπεκράτουν 42 6; ανάγει? τό σ. 73 3 5 έπηει τό σ. 78 ι στρατηγό^ 9 ι ; 14 2 ; 50 4 5 69 3 ; 73 4 > <# r e σ. καί οι ταξίαρ­ χοι 60 2. Comp. άρτίσ-τρατιά, copiae 7 3? 62 ι ; 73 ι ; άλλη σ. 15 ι ; η πρότερα σ. 43 3 5 την πλείστην της σ. 3 45 πάσης της <τ. 27 3 5 τά 7repi rijs cr. τόϊ> ξύλλογον ητοιμάζοντο 31 5 5 ςτοίμης τψ σ. ούσης 33 3» μέρος τι της σ. 53 ι ; 79 4 5 ξυμπάση τη σ' χρησθαι 11 3 ί 33 3 5 πολλή σ. έπελθών 11 35 προσδόκιμων όντων άλλη σ. 25 95 τ?7 0"· ά^ 6 πέμφθη 31 35 Ζφθασεν αύτον στρατιξ, άφικόμενος 42 35 τ ί? αλλ# σ. 43 ι ; πάση τη σ. 79 5 J σ. α,λλην προσλαβόντες 1 ι ; σ. ού πολλήν 1 45 ά7Γ^7 α 7 ε Τ ^ Ι / °Γ· 3 35 42 55 48 35 49 2 ; 80 ι ; α^αλαβων την σ. 4 2 ; 43 2 ; διακομίσας στρατιάν 4 55 τή^ πεζην σ. 79 ι ; σ. καέ ναυτικην καί πεζικην ξυλλέξων 7 2 ; 15 ι ; 16 ι ; ήλθε στρατιάν 'έχων 11 2*; πεπόμφασι πρέσβεις επ' άλλην σ. 12 ι ; 50 ι, 3 5 σ · irefV α£ωρ 12 ϊ ; 21 ι ; 22 ι ; ά^ωρ «τ. eVi 4% ι ; 84 ι ; σ. έπαγγέλλων ές τους Συμ­ μάχους 17 ι ; την σ. πασαν άθροίσαντες 33 6 ; καθΐσε την σ. 82 3 5 την μετ1 αύτοϋ σ. άφεΐναι 83 2 οττρατιώτηδ, miles: oi σ. 48 4 ; 74 ι; άνδρες σ. 61 ι ; ώ άνδρες σ. 77 75 *&? (Γ. καί των ηγεμόνων νμίν μη μεμπτων γεγενημένων 15 ι ; 48 4» τοΐς σφετέροις σ. 69 ι ; τους σ. 47 ι ; 60 5» τους άλλους σ. 85 ι σ·τρατοΐΓ£8€ύ€σθαι 47 ι ; 78 4 στρατόΐΓ€δον, castra: 'έκπλουν 4κ του σ. 50 3? άραντες άπδ του βαι/τώ? σ, 69 45 %%ω τ°ν Τ. VII* 4°Γ σ φεΐς εαυτών σ. 53 ι ; e> τ?? απολείψει του σ. 75 2 ; €is as indirect reflexive; σφών 35 2 ; 36 4, 6; 40 2 ; 47 4 ; 48 3 ; 51 ι ; 56 2 ; σφίσιν 3 ι ; 43 6; 86 45 σ<£α$6 45 18 2 ; 7135 42 4 · — a s primary or direct re­ flexive, referring to the subject of its own clause, where there is no emphasis or antithesis (only in T h u c ) : σφας 21 3 ; σφών 13 2 ; 43 7; 48 ι ; 49 2 ; 26 4θ2 σφενδονήτης σφων αύτων κατάμεμψις 75 5 5 78 4 > 79 4 ? σφίσιν as direct re­ flexive for σ. αϋτοϊς 6 ι ; 35 2 ; 43 6 ; 56 2; 69 2; 72 3 ; σ. avrois 44 4 ; 67 2 ; 84 45 f 0 a s αύτού$ ( = αλλήλους) 44 45 71 6; 82 3ί 83 ι <τφ€ν8ονήτη8 31 5 ; 42 ι cr&r€pos, suus: των νέων των σ. 1 3? 5! τ ^ σ · αύτώζ' 3 ι ; 75 5 5 4 3 ; 8 ι ; 12 5ϊ 17 4 ; 18 2 ; 23 3J τ ά σ . 25 ι, g; 38 2 ; 39 2; 48 2, 5; 69 ι ; 71 3 ; 79 3 σχεδόν rt, propemodum 33 2 <τχολαίτ€ρον (compar.of σχολaiws or σ%ολ5) 15 2; 81 2 <τωξ€ΐν, servare: PASS, οί σφ£όμενοι, qui saluti suae consulebant 44 8; ot μεν άπώλοντο oi δ' εσώθησαν 45 2 ; 77 ι f δπη σωθήσονται διεσκδπουν 71 6; τό κατά, γ^ρ σωθήσεσθαι 71 7; #π*οι &Ϊ> σωθείτε 77 7ί ^ ρ έ του αΟτοΙ σωθηναι 56 2. Comp. &α-, ζυν-διασ*ώμα: eif τ # προλίποι ή ρώμη καΐ τό σ. 75 4 ; τ ή " otyw του σ\ προοραν 44 2 ; ο σα 7Γ€/)έ τό σ. υπηρχεν επιτήδεια 74 ι ; TOTS σ. αύτοΐς ΐσα rfj δόξη ξυναπονεύοντςς 713 σωτηρία, salus: irepl της ες την πατρίδα σ. 70 7 5 ° άγώί' &τται 7repi α", 61 ι ; μή στερήσαι σφας τψσ. 71 3J ούδεμίαν είναι σ. 8 ι ; νομίζων ού το ύπομένειν σωτηρίαν 81 3 · — ' s o u n d n e s s ' : τω? πληρω­ μάτων τη σ. 12 3 σωτηριοβ, sahitaris: rots ξύμ* πασι ο*. 64 2 Τ ταλαιττωρβΐν, labor are: όπως μή ταλαιπωροίη 16 ι ; «> 7?? άποκρότω καϊ ξννεχως ταλαιπωροΰντες 27 5·—PASS. έταλαιπωροϋντο 28 2 ; τεταλαιπωρημένους 82 ι ταλαιπωρία, labor: ύπό της τ . καϊ του πιεϊν επιθυμία 84 2 —Τ€ίχίζαν τάλαντον: el'/cocr* r . apyvpiov 16 2 ; δισχίλια τ. 48 5 τ α μ π ό ν , receptaculum 24 2 ταί-ίαρχοβ: ot r . 60 2 Ta|(.s, ordo: εν επιχωρίω τ. 30 2; μη εν τ. χωρούν 78 ι ; 5 3· Comp. άντιταικινότηβ 1 ]: iso'lavT. άφίκατο 75 6 ταράσσων, turbare. — PASS. 3 3 ; vyjes ταραχθεΐσαι περί άλλήλας 23 3> έτετάρακτο 44 3 ; 84 4> ταράζεσθαι 36 6 ; ταράξονται 67 2 ; έταράχθησαν 44 7· Comp. £UJ/ταραχη, perturbatio: τη σφετέρα τ . ήσσηθεϊεν 25 g; εν πολλή τ. iyiyvovTO 44 ι ; αύτοΐς εμπίπτει τ. 80 3 5 Μ ταραχην σφίσι ποιήση 86 4·—tumultus 29 5 ταρσ-oC, remorum ordines 40 5 τάσ-creiv, collocare 6 2.—PASS. έτετάχατο 4 6.—instrui: ηέδόκει ετάσσοντο 74 2. Comp. azm-, άντι-παρα-, δια-, ξυν-, πάρα-, προσ?· ταύτη, hac parte 1 4 ; 4 3 ; 53.2 τάχα, fortasse: τάχα δ' aV λωφήσειαν 77 3 ταχΙωΞ: COMP. θασσον 28 ι (for adj.), 81 3·—SUP. τάχιστα 8 ι ; 26 3 ; 60 2 ; ό'τι τ. 39 2 ; 40 4 ; 49 β; ώί τ . 8 i j 43 7 J 61 ι ; 60 5 ; 81 3 τάχοβ: δ\ά τάχον? 22 2 ; cos εΖχοζ/ τάχους 2 ι ; 29 2; κατά τάχο$ 4 3 5 37 3 J 8 1 15 °Vi τάχος, quam prifnum 42 3 Tax^s: α! ταχεΐαι νηες 4 5 τ€ connects sentences 4 4 ; 24 3 ; —in summing u p , to corroborate and enlarge upon preceding subject 7 4 ; 11 4 ; 25 3 ; 28 1; 70 3, 6; 71 4 ; 87 5.—re..„ Te joins two concurrent acts 34 7. —τε.,.δέ 1 5; 81 3.—τε...καί 3 sive—sive 6 1 ; parataxis 83 4. —transposed 36 6 TtiyJXfeiv, muros aedificare 19 3 ; 43 2 ; έτείχιζον τείχος απλούν τευχίον τοσούτος 4 ι.—communire: τό Πλημμύρων τειχίσαι 4 4 J τ"*?*' Δεκέλειαν τ. 18 ι ; 19 ι ; 26 2 . — P A S S . 4 4 ; 27 3 ; 42 2. Comp. άϊτο-, etc-, έπι-, ξυν-, περί-, προτ€ΐχίον, dim. of τείχος 81 4 τ€ΐχι<π$, munitio 6 ι ; 31 ι τ«ίχισμα, munimentum 2 3? 4 3 ; 5 ι, 2 ; 43 3· Comp.άπο-, δια-, παρα-) 7Γ/)οτίίχισμόβ, w^mV/ν? (de tempore) 9 ι ; 18 4·—exitum habere: η ναυμαχία ούτως έτελεύτα 34 8 τ€λ€υτή: την του τείχους τ. 6 ι ; ές οϊαν τ . άφΐκτο 75 6 TCXOS adv., tandem, denique: 25 6 ; 41 ι ; 44 7; 85 ι.—ο* eV τAei, magistrates 73 ι Τ€μν€ΐν, vastare: την yrjv eVeμοϊ> 42 6. Comp. £1^Τ6τρυχ<ομ€νο5, attritus: ήδη τ<£ πολέμφ τετρυχωμένοι 28 3* T h e present act. τρυχ6ω==τρύχω is not found in classical Greek. Comp. 4κτέχνη: φπερ της τ. έπίστευον 36 4J λείπεσθαι της τ. 70 35 κατά την τ . 70 7 T€o>s, antea 63 3 τηρείν, custodire: έτήρουν 80 ι τήρησαδ, custodia 13 ι ; άσφαλεστάτην τ. 86 2 TtOevai: θέμενος τα ό'ττλα 3 ι. C o m p . έπι*, κατά-, προστιμωρ€ΐσ-θαι, poenas dare: άποχρώντως τετιμωρημεθα 77 3 4° 3 τιμωρία,poena: ως έπϊ τιμωρία του προσπεσόντος 68 ι τ ι w. gen. 48 2 ; , 6 9 2.—adv. σχεδόν τι 33 2 ; rt μάλλον 57 ι ; τ* άγα? 63 3 j τό όβ* ri κα£ 48 2 TIS, ' e a c h ' 61 ι ; 68 2.—μέ/αο* Ti 30 2 ; 75 5.—with numerals 33 4; 34 5; 87 3.—with όλίyoς (ού πολύς) Ι 4 ; 74 2; 82 ι ; 85 4 τιτρώσ-Κ€<τθαι, vulnerari 27 5 τ ο ι : κάγώ τοι 77 2 (only found three times in Thuc.) τοιόσ-Se, referring to what fol­ lows 10 1; 60 5 ; 65 2 ; to what precedes (irregularly) 78 1 TOIOVTOS, in ref. to what pre­ cedes 30 4 ; 37 1; 60 4 ; 68 1*— to what follows (irregularly) 28 3.—with art. τό τοιούτον 21 4 ; 50 4 ; 86 4 ; 87 2; έν τφ τ . 81 3 ί εν τφ τ. χωρίω 87 2; τοιαύτη ή οτι έyyύτaτa τούτων αιτία 86 5 5 & Τ(β τοιούτω του καιρού, in tali momenta 69 2 ; θειασμφ καΐ τφ τ . 50 4 τοιχοδ : τους τ. 36 2 τόλμα: της δυνάμεως καΐ τόλμης 28 3 τολμάν: τφ τολμησαι άντιστηναι 21 4 '9 W ναυμαχείν τολμήσωσι 59 3· Comp. αντί-, άποτόλμημα: αδόκητου τ. 43 6 τολμηρόβ, audax 21 3 τ<5|δυμα: ££ω τοξεύματος 30 2 ; παρασκευην τοξευμάτων 43 2 ; rots άκοντίοις καϊ τ. 70 5 τοξότηβ: PL. 33 ι ; 42 ι ; 60 4 5 62 2 TOOWSC, referring to what fol­ lows 57 1 ; 58 3.—of what pre­ cedes (irregularly) 57 1 1 ; 59 1 τοοΓοΰτοδ, tantus: τοσαύτη στρατιά 73 ι ; τ . χρονον 12 3 > τον πapάλoyov τοσούτον ποιησαι 28 3 I r o στρατόπεδον τ . 6ζ> 59 2. —τοσαΰτα, haec, ' t h u s m u c h ' o f what precedes 16 τ; 49 ι ; 65 1.—'only so m u c h ' : τοσαΰτα μαχόμενους oV αν avayKafavTai 81 3.—τοσούτον, tanium: άπο 404 rore θαλάσσης τ. άραβάντα 29 3 · — πάρα τοσοϋτορ ήλθορ κιρδύρον 2 4 τότ€ 8 1 ; in reference to events before mentioned 31 3 ; 32 1; 57 1 r ; 81 2.—τ. δή 18 3 τουναντίον, crasis of τό έναρτίον 80 ι ; 87 t τραύμα, vulnus: PL. 82 1; 87 2 (not elsewhere in Thuc.) τραυματίας, vulneratus: r. re κα£ άσθερείς 75 3 τρ£ττ€ΐν 6 3 ; άμυρομέρους προ^ θύμως έτρεψαρ 43 5» 7> 23 35 71 5 · — M E D . trans, in fugam vertere 51 2 ; τρεψάμεροι αυτούς 78 3 ί κατά βραχύ τρεψάμεροι 79 5·—intrans. convertere se: προς άράκλησιρ θεώρ έτράπορτο 71 3» irpA.s αρτιβολίαρ καΐ όλοφυρμόρ τραπόμεροι 75 4 j τρδί πόσιρ τετράφθαι 73 i.-^-terga dare 41 ι.—PASS. r?}s 2i/ceAias τό 7rpos Αιβύηρ μέρος τετραμμένορ 58 2. Comp. άπο-, έπιτρεφ€ΐν, alere: τα τρέφορτα ήμας χωρία 14 3"—PASS, τήρ Κατάνηρ οθερ θρέψορται 49 2 τρφ€ΐν } morari 48 6 ; 49 2.—PASS, atteri: ού τρίψεσθαι άλλως 42 5· Comp. δια-, έρ-διατριήραρχοδ: TOP τρ. 70 8; τωρ τ. χρήματα 24 2; 69 2; roi)s r. 13 2; 38 2 τριήρης 3 5'» 23 1\ 24 ι\ τ . 7rXa7^ct6s 59 3 > περικομίσας τριή­ ρεις 9 ι ; 33 5; 50 2 ; τ . )( όλκάδας 19 5 τρίτος: τρίττ7 ήμερα 75 ι ; τ . /i^joos 4 6 τριχή 1 , trifariam 32 2 τροτταίον: τροπαΐορ στησάρτωρ 5 3? 2 3 4*» 7 2 ι ; τρ. έστησαρ της τροπής 54 ι ; τρ. έστησαν αύτώρ τρία 24 ι ; τρόπαια τωρ ναυμαχιών 'έστησαν ΟΧ 4 τροπή, fuga: της τ. 44 3 ; τροπ-ήϊ/ έποιήσαντο 54 ι.—PL. solsti* Hum: ηλίου τ. τάς χειμερινάς 16 2 τρόττοδ, modus: τρόπψ φ dp 7 3 J $ττερ τ. 36 2 ; ό'τω τ . 44 ι ; v-n-ip 28 35 τούτω τψ τ. 41 4? 49 4> ούδερί τ . 49 3 ϊ τταντί τ . 70 8 ; τοιούτψ τ . 79 6 ; τ $ αύτφ τρόπω 17 3 ί 28 3 5 τον αυτόν τρόπον 39 2 ; 84 ι.—PL. mores: τωρ τ . τη μιμήσει 63 3 τροφή, stipendium: μή διδόραι τροφήρ 48 5 τυγχάν€ΐν w. gen., cons eg id: ξυγγρώμης τ. 15 2 ; τευζόμενοι ων επιθυμείτε Ιδεϊρ 77 7· W. particip., forte aliquid agere: %τυχερ έλθώρ 2 4 5 'έτυχορ αύλιζόμεροι (imp. particip.) 4 3? έτύ~γχαρε ερ πίρω ων 81 4 > έτύ^χαρε πανσέληνος οΰσα 50 4 ; έτύ^χανον ρικώμεροι 23 2 ; 'έτυχε θυσία οΰσα 73 2 ; άρτι 'έτυχορ έσεληλυθότες 29 5 ί 'έτυχορ βρορταΐ ^ερόμεραι 79 3 5 ώ* τύχοι ραΰς ρη'Ι' προσπεσουσα 70 4· Comp. ερ-, έπι-, ξνρ-< τ ΰ χ η : ερ τούτω τύχης 33 6 ; τό T7/s τ . 61 3 > πίστεί τύχης 67 4 ί 68 ι ϊ vSpeCa1, aqttatio: δια ύ. μακράρ 13 2 •ύδωρ: τό ϋ. διέφθαρτο 84 5» κοτύληρ ϋδατος 87 .2 ; τ<£ ύ. σπαρίω χρώμεροι 4 6 ; ϋ. μετά σφώρ αύτώρ φέρεσθαι 78 4·—pluvia: 'έτυχορ βρορταϊ καί ϋδωρ "γερόμεραι 79 3 ύμ€Τ€ρος: αί ύ. φύσεις 14 2 ΰιτακού^ιν: ούχ ύπήκουορ 18 2 ; έθελήσαι ύπακουσαι 73 2 ΰπάρχαν 13 ι ; 14 2 ; 28 3 5 rats ύπαρχούσαις ραυσί 48 2 ; 67 ι ; (^ υπήρχε λαμπρότητας τι 69 2; 74 τ ; cos e/c τωρ ύπαρχόρτωρ έθάρσννε 76 ι.—υπάρχει (impers.), suppetit: υπ. ήμιρ έπικρατεΐν 63 ?, υπέρ, ' i n place o f 13 2.—'in the name o f 83 2 . — ' a b o u t ' 7 1 2. — ' a b o v e ' 79 1.—'on behalf o f 66 1.—ύ* άπάρτωΡ) 'for all oc­ casions ' 69 2 νπ€ρβάλλ€ΐν ΰ7Γ€ρβάλλ€ΐν, ' t o exceed all bounds' 67 4 vnepeyjew: οΰχ υπερέχοντας της θαλάσσης 25 7 ύττ6ρώφθη (ύπερορασθαι) — κατεφρονήθη 42 3 νπέχζΐν, praebere: καϊ σφας αν τό αυτό τοΐς έναντίοις ύποσχεΐν 21 3 vmJKOOs: ί-υμμάχων των ύ. 20 2 ; 28 45 57 3» 4 J ναυσΐ καϊ ού φόρω υπήκοοι 57 5 5 63 3 ύίΓΜτχνεΐσ-θαι: ύπέσχοντο 1 4 'ύπνος: από πρώτον ϋ 43 2 υπό : α Gen. auctorem agendi designat: ύ. Αθηναίων άπολέσθαι 48 4 > 13 2 ; ύ. των άΧΚων θαυμασθήσβσθαι 56 2 ; 3 5» 4 6 ; 6 3;112;213.;233;27 3;313;40 45 43 ι ; 50 2; 58 35 79 2 ; 85 Γ. —rarius inanimis adiungitur v. abstractis: ύ. των παρόντων έκπ€π\η*γμένος 69 2 ; 67 4? ν· μισθού έπαρθέντας 13 2 ; ύ. τριή­ ρους μιας έπεδιώκοντο 23 2 ; 34 5 5 84 2 ; ύ. της ΑεκεΧείας πόΧΚά βλαπτούσης αδύνατοι έ*γένοντο τοΐς χρήμασιν 28 4·—causam proximam significat, prae: χα­ λεπά ην ύ. της βοής diayvQvai 44 3 ; ύ. του περίχαρους της νίκης προς πόσιν τετράφθαι 73 2 ; ν. μεγέθους του κινδύνου πάντα τανταοίστά έφαίνετο 75 75 76; 72 2 ; ού yap 'έτι άποχωρεΐν οΐόν τ ην υπό τών'Ιππέων 78 75 ύ. χρημά­ των καταπροδόντες 48 4? opare ώ$ διάκειμαι ύ. της νόσου 77 2 ; 84 2.—w. Dat. ύ7τό Έυρακοσίοις αν γίγνοισθε 64 ι ; 'έφερον τα σιτία ύ. τοΐς οπλοις (dub.) 75 5·—w. Ace. ύ. τους αυτούς χρόνους 21 ι ; 28 4 5 ύ· νύκτα 22 ι •υποδοχή,^ hostile reception': ές ύ. του στρατεύματος έτάσσοντο 74 2 νιτοξΰγια, iumenta 27 5 5 29 4 ΰ τ τ ο κ α τ α β α ^ ι ν 1 : εκ των άνω τειχών ύποκατέβησαν 60 3 ύΐΓθκρίν€σθαι1,2, respondere 44 5 φαίν^σθαι 4°5 ύπο\ζ(πειν 64 ι.—PASS. 20 3 ; εϊ τις ύπεΧέλειπτο 33 6) 43 2 ; 75 4 (dub.) vrroXoiiros 7 ι; τ} ύ. πόλις 64 2 ; την ύ. δύναμιν 56 2 ; j ^ e s al ν. 7 ι; τους εκεί πολεμίους ύ. 64 ι.—τό ύ.) reliqua pars 66 3 virop.ev€iv, sustinere i?npetum 42 4·—subsistere )( φεύγειν 23 ι*, 43 5 J 81 3 · — r e m a n e r e l l I νΐΓθμ,ιμνη<ΓΚ€ΐν: ύμα$ ra<5e ύπομιμνήσκω 64 ι ; TT)S πατρί­ δος (αυτούς) ύπομιμνησκων 69 2 ΰιτονο€Ϊν, suspicari: νπονοήσας αύτ&ν την διάνοιαν 73 1 υπόνοια, suspicio: ύ. μή 49 4 Oiroirfarrav 1 , subire 40 5 woonrovSos: νεκρούς ύποσπόνδους άνεΚομένων 5 35 45 ι ·υποτ€ίν€ΐν, subtendere 36 2 iiroTeXiis: ύ. 'όντες φόρου 57 4 iirovpYeiv, obsequi 62 3 ΰ'ΐΓθφ€ύγ€ΐν: TroXet ύποφενγούση 75 5 < v n O \ € i p i o s > 49 6 d u b . ύττοχωρεΐν, se subducere 43 6 ; 70 8 ; 73 ι ; 79 5; 81 3 virrios 1 , supinus: έσβαλόντες ές ασπίδας ύ. 82 3 vorraTos, postremus: τοΐς ύ. txrrgpaios, posterior: μάχη τ% ύ. 11 2.—τ?? ύ., postridie 3 4 ; 35 2 ; 38 2 ; 39 ι ; 45 ι ; 52 ι ; 78 4 ; 83 ι v κών περί του πλείονος καλοΰ 71 ι άλλα άνέλπιστότατα αύτοΐς έφαί­ φ ι λ ο ν ι κ ί α : ές φ. καθέστασαν νετο 48 2 ; τό 2χ«ϊ> πολυτελές 28 3 ; προς την αντίκα φ. 70 7 έφαίνετο 27 2; τοΐς άρχουσι ταύτα 0 έφαίνετο άπορα 73 3> Ρζ* *' αύτφ φίλος 1 4 ; 33 6; 44 7 έφαίνετο η έσκομιδη ί-σεσθαι, 4 4 ; §\6%,flamma: την φ. 53 4 T,? y χάλεπωτάτους αν φ. 21 3 > 7 φοβεΐν, terr ere 30 ι ; 77 3» τω? Ά 0 . δύναμιν πολλην φαινο7rcw> το στράτευμα φοβήσειαν 79 μένην 42 2 ; καλόν το αγώνισμα 5 · — M E D . e t PASS, φοβούμενος μή φανείσθαι 56 2 8 2 ; έφοβοϋντο τάς ναϋς 55 ι ; εϊ τις πεφόβηται ότι w . indie. φάναι: &£?7 21 2, 4 αΐ.—ού φάναι, negare: ουκ'έφη5 3 J 48 3 67 3. Comp. καταφανερός: 0 . efrac w. partcp. φοβερός, terribilis 42 3 5 τό <& ;. 12 TOIS ύπηκόοις 63 3 θ „ φόβος 71 2; <£ό/3ου άπόλύεσθαι φανερως: φ. ψηφίζεσθαι 50 3 56 2 ; τήρ ελπίδα του φ. 61 2 ; fs φαύλος: τοις φαυλότατοι? 77 2 0 . κατέστησαν 44 7> ^ λύπην φείδεσθαι, parcere: φειδόμενοι μετά φόβου καθίστατο 75 3 ? ούτε πρεσβυτέρας οϋτε νεωτέρας φόβον παρείχε, timorem incutiebat ηλικίας 29 4 44 6 ; φόβοι και δείματα 80 3 φειδώ 1 , parsimonia: φ. τις φόνευαν 2 ' 3 29 45 85 ι έγίγνετο.,.μη προαναλωθηναί τω φονικώτατος 1 29 4 81 5 φόνος, caedes 85 4 φέρειν, ./fcyr* 8 3 ; 39 2 ; 57 6 ; φόρος, tributum 28 4 ; 57 4, 5 75 $.—foierare 56 2 ; πάντα αύτοΐς φράζειν, dicere 43 4 ; 73 3·—οίστά έφαίνετο 75 7·—MED. ferre nuntiare 25 ι sibi: ϋδωρ φ. 78 4· Comp. α7το-, φρουρά, praesidium : φ. έπιούe7T4-, £υμ-, περί-, προ-, προσφεύγειν 23 2 ; 44 4> 70 4> σαις 27 3 ', rfs fays φ- καταθεούσης την χώραν 27 4 φεύγοντας φεύγουσι 8. Comp. φρουρείν 4 3 ; 24 τ ; 60 2 άπο-, δία-, κατά-, ύποφροΰριον, castellum: τό φ. τό φθάνειν, praevertere: φθάσανΑάβδαλον 3 4> 28 ι ; τρία φ. τες την φυλακήν 1 2 ; φθήσονται ύμας 15 2.—w. partcp. φθάνει προσπεσών 23 ι ; 25 ο.» 4 2 3j 'έφθασαν παρελθόντες 6 4·—φθάσαι φρυγανιοτμος: επί φρυγανισμόν πρίν έλθειν 36 ι. Comp. 7Γ/>οοπότε έξέλθοιεν 4 6 ; 13 2 2 φθ€γγ€σ*θαι , ederevocem: a ol φυγάς, exsul 57 8 κελευσταϊ φθέγγοιντο 70 6 ; 71 4 $vyf\,fuga 43 7 φθβίρεσθαι )( αύξάνεσθαι: τά φυλακή, custodia 4 7', τά κατά τ< πληρώματα 'έφθαρται 12 3 5 * το στρατόπεδον διά φυλακής 'έχων 7τλ. έφθάρη τε καϊ φθείρεται 13 2 ; 8 35 11 3 ί 30 2; 70 6 ; 71 6.— φθερεΐσθαι τα πράγματα 48 5· praesidium 1 2 ; 7 ι ; 17 \\ 26 Comp. δια3 ; 80 6 ; 85 2 φθόνος: φθόνου άξιοι 77 4 φ ύ λ α ! 23 ι ; άνδρας των φ, φθορά, iactura: ανθρώπων 43 3, 4. 5 ί 83 5 φθορξ. 27 3 φυλάσ-σ·€ΐν, custodire 4 3 5 φιλ€ΐν, Λ?/*?* w. inf. 79 3 5 80 3 πάσαις (ταΐς ναυσϊ) φ. 13 ι ; 27 φιλία 33 4 ; 57 ί ο 5; 28 2; 53 2; 70 ι ; 73 3 ; 74 2 . — φίλιος 44 4 5 50 ι ; 53 ι ; του φ. observare, ' t o wait f o r ' 25 4 ; 83 χωρίου 77 6 ; 60 2 4.—cavere 17 2 ; 0 . ώστε w. inf. 77 5.—MED. j # s cavere 40 4 ; Η φνλη προς τό δοκεΐν apxaLoKoyeiv φυλαξάμενοι 69 2 φ υ λ ή , tribus: αυτούς καϊ φ. 69 2 φύσ-is, ingenium, mores: χάλεπα\ αί ύμέτεραι φ. &ρξαι 14 2, 4> 48 4 φωνή, ' d i a l e c t ' : αύτοΐς τη αύτη φ. χρώμενοι 57 2 ; της φ. τη επιστήμη 63 3 Χ XaAciros, difficilis: 84 3.—inpersonal construction: χ. αί ύμέ­ τεραι φύσεις άρξαι 14 2; πάντα χαλεπά ην dcayvcuvaL 44 3 ? XctXeπωτέρους προσπολεμεΐν 51 χ.— χαλεπον (εστί) έζειπείν 87 4 · — pestilens: το χωρίον έλώδες καϊ χ. ην 47 2.—gravis: χαλεπωτάτη ην της σταυρώσεως η κρύφιος 25 7 · — asper: τά χαλεπώτατα των χωρίων 73 3·—metuendus, ' d a n g e r o u s ' : τους άντιτολμώντας χαλεπωτά· τους αν φαίνεσθαι 21 3 χαλεττώ^, aegre 13 ι ; 23 2 ; 81 ι . — χ . μετβχείρισαν αυτούς 87 ι. —COMP. χαλεπώτερον (difficilius) ϊσχοντα 50 3·—SUP. ev rots χαλεπώτατα (asperrime) dirjyov 71 3 χαράδρα, ySwa: 78 5 χάριδ, gratia: τφ οχλω προς χάριν τι λέyovτες 8 2 χαμβρινόδ, hibernus 16 2 χ€ΐμών, hiemps 10 ι ; 18 4 5 ™0 χ. 19 5 \ καϊ θέρους καϊ χ. 28 ι; 31 3J & τ<£ Χ· τούτω 18 4 \ € ί ρ : εν χερσί yεv6μεvoL 5 2 ; ες χείρας ίόντες 70 5 > ές χ. άλλήλοις έλθόντες 44 7·—Χ' σιδηρά, harpago 62 3 5 65 1, 2 χ€ΐροτ€χνη8, operarius 27 5 χαροΰσθαι, subigere: χειρώσεσ^αι 41 4 5 χειρώσασθαι 47 4 χ€ΐρων, deterior: μη των παρ­ όντων χείρω πράξωσι 71 ι.—των παρόντων ούκ αν πράξαντες χεΐρον 67 4 Xepcratos 1 , terrestris 67 2 ΧωΡα 4° 7 χ η λ ή , crepido: την χ. 53 ι χ(λιοι 1 5 χ ρ ή μ α : PL. 15 ι ; 17 ι ; 24 ι ; 25 ι ; χρημάτων όλέθρφ 27 35 a5tf>arot iyavovTO τοις χ. 28 45 άπορίαν των χ . 29 ι ; 49 ι ; &λλως χ. δαπανώντας 48 2, 4> 6» χρήμασιν άπορεΐν 48 5 5 χρήμασι νικηθέντας 48 6; χρήμασι πείσας τινας 86 4· Comp. 7ra/)aχρηματίί^σ-θαι 1 , quaestum facere: οίόμενοι χρηματιεΐσθαι 13 2 χ ρ ή ν α ι , oportere 21 2 ; 44 3 > 4 7 3 ; 4 9 2 ; 7 7 ι ; 6 1 2 ; 6 2 3 ; 63 ι ; 67 2.—partcp. ού χρεών 73 ι χρήσ-θαι, uti: όχλος φ ούκ αν έχρώμεθα 62 2 ; rots λίθοις άφθόνως έπ' αυτήν έχρωντο 70 5 J τοιαύταις πείραις παντοίαις έχρων­ το 25 8 ; προσβολαΐς έχρωντο 81 5 ; άντιπρφροις ταΐς έμβόλαΐς χ. 36 3 ; ™& λίθοις χρώμενος 5 ι ; τ<£ £/§art σπαν'ιω χρώμενοι 44 6; ταΐς ναυσίν άντιπρφροις χρώμενοι 40 5 J o u o ^ 7^P ζνμπάση τη' στρατιά, δυναίμεθ' αν χρήσασθαι 11 3 5 oVots otoi' τ ' ^ πλείστοις χρήσασθαι ('to get for service') 20 2 ; r y άντ'ιπρωρον ξυyκρoυσaι χρήσασθαι 36 5·—κpaυyη ούκ όλί727 χρώμενοι 44 4·—experiri: πάθει χρησαμένην ολοφύρασθαι άζίω 30 4·—tractare: έαυτφ χρήσθαι {χρήσασθαι Β) έκέλευεν 6 τι βούλονται 85 ι . Comp. άποχρήσ-ιμ,οβ, utilis 49 2 ; 75 5 · — COMP. 14 4·—SUP. όπως ξυσκευάσαιντο ως εκ των δυνατών 6τι χρησιμώτατα 74 ι χρήσ-is, usus 5 2 Xpovos i /caret διαδοχην χρόνου 27 3 ; τοσούτον χ. θαλασσεύουσαι 12 3 5 τερέ roz> αι/τ-όρ χ . 19 35 υπό τούτον τον χ . 28 4 j τόζ' άλλον χ. 27 45 Χ· πολώ/ 34 45 78 7ί πλείω χ. 28 3 5 Χ· Τ 4 ϊ ; α *0 45 οσο? χ. 70 5 j ύπό τους αυτούς χ. 21 ι ; rous πρώτους χ. 87 ι χώρα, ?Τ£*ζ'0 5 4 ; 11 4 Σ 19 ι> 2 ; 27 3 5 εμπειρία της χ . 44 8; 4θ8 χωρειν————ωφέλιμος 47 4 5 enl πολλά της χ, 49 2 ; TOIS μεν ξνγκτησόμενοί την χ. 57 ι ; 66 2 ; 74 2.—statio: κατά, χώραν (έμενον = ησύχαζον 49 \ χωρβΐν, ire, progredi: αθρόοι χ. 84 3 5 ό'σοι εντεταγμένοι χω­ ρείτε 77 45 στράτευμα μη εν τάζει χωρούν 78 ι ; άτακτοτερον έχώρει 80 45 8 1 2 5 έχώρει προ* τάς Σ. 1 5; 43 2 ; 52 ι ; 80 6; έχώρει επί τό τείχισμα 2 3» 78 2; έχώρονν ές τό προσθεν 43 55 ^4 35 78 35 80 2 ; έχώρονν η έδύναντο 83 5 5 τοι>5 από του 'Ο. Ατατά τάχος χωροΰντας 37 3 5 η.,.ησθάνοντο κεχωρηκότας 81 ι,—accedere: προς έκείνονς χωρησαι 14 3· —procedere: τά έαντών ονκ έπϊ το βέλτιον χωροΰντα 50 3· C o m p . άϊ>α-, άπο-, %vy-, προ-, προσ-, νποχωρίον, locus: τό χ. 3 45 το χ. έλώδες ην 47 2 ; στενον ην το χ. 79 ι ; TOU χ . μηνοειδοϋς οντος έφ' ψ ώρμονν 34 2 ; eV φ aV ά^αγκασθη χ. μάχεσθαι 77 5 5 έν κοιλφ χ. οντάς καΐ oXiyu πολλούς 87 ι ; έν τφ τοιούτψ χ . 87 2 ; άπανταν Is η χ. 1 3 ; έτείχισαν Ισθμώδές τι χ. 26 2 ; επειδή %vyκατέλαβε τό χ. 26 3? r o %· έζετείχισε ib.; κατά τό χ. η άντέστησαν 45 ι ; χ. άπεδόν τι 78 4 5 άνειληθέντες,'ές τι χ. 81 45 των περί τήνΆκαρνανίαν χ. 31 55 τά στενόπορα των χ. φνλάσσειν 73 ι ; τά χαλεπώτατα των χ. 73 3·—oppidum: τίνος (τον) χ. φίλιου 60 2 ; 77 6 ; μη 'όντος χ. οποί αν σωθείτε 77 7» τ ^ τρέφοντα ημάς Χ· I f 3 χώροβ, Λ?«^.* φκεΐτο δ χ. 78 4 ψηφ£ξ€<τθαι 16 ι ; 5 0 ^ 5 έξιέναι έψηφίζετο 47 35 48 ι ; ού τους αυτούς ψηφιείσθαι 48 35 αυτών ψηφισαμένων ibid. ψήφιατμα: άνευ 'Αθηναίων ψη­ φίσματος 49 2 ψιλός, leviter armatus 1 5 ; 78 3.-—inermis 45 2 ψυχρός, frigidus; al νύκτες έπ^ενόμεναι ψνχραί 87 ι β ώρα, anni te?npus: της ω. τον ένιαντον 47 i.—^tempus: της ώ, πρφτερον 39 ι ; περί άριστον ώραν 81 ι ως, as an Adverb of Compari­ s o n : ώς.,.καί43 ι ; 60 3.—before Numerals, ' a b o u t ' 36 2; 72 3. —prefixed to adjectives and ad­ verbs, ώς 'έκαστοι 65 ι ; 74 2 ; to superlatives, ως επί πλείστον 69 35 ώς πλείστα 80 ι.—Temporal Conj. ' w h e n ' : 16 35 23 ι ; 50 35 81 ι.—Causal 'for,' ' s i n c e ' 15 1.—as a final particle : ώς είπεΐν 49 3 ; 58 4 ; 67 2.—as a consecu­ tive particle for ώστε 34 6.—with circumstantial participles 40 2. —ώς έκ κακών 42 2 ; ώς εκ των δυνατών 74 ι ; ώς έκ των υπαρ­ χόντων 76; ώς εΐχον τάχονς 2 ι. —as a Preposition, w. ace. of persons only, equivalent to προς ' to ' 48 2 ; 77 6 ; 82 1 Demosthenes Euripides > > j> » > j ) »J • Herodotus J> » » Homer > » η n Lucian Plato η » » » * „ V I I I 1—90, ix 1—89 Odyssey i x , x XXI „ XI Iliad v i , x x n , x x m , x x i v THad i x , χ Somnium, Charon, etc. Menippus and Timon Apologia Socratis Crito Euthyphro Protagoras I 50000 Editor Rackham Green Graves Work Prometheus Vinctus Aves—Plutus—Ranae Vespae Nubes Olynthiacs Heracleidae Hercules Fuirens Hippolytus Iphigeneia in Aulis Medea Hecuba Helena Alcestis Orestes Book i v >, ν „ VI, VIII, IX Price φ a/6 each 3/6 . }? 3/6 Glover 2/6 Beck & Headlam 3/6 Gray & Hutchinson 2/Hadley «Headlam 2I6 2/6 > > Hadley 2/6 Pearson 3/6 2/6 Hadley Wedd 4/6 Shuckburgh Tn the Press 3/> > 4/- each ,, 2/6 each „ Edwards 2/6 each ,, Nairn · Edwards Lawson Heitland Mackie Adam „ „ J. & Α.. Μ. 2/- «/ ll- each 2/6 3/6 3/6 3/6 2/6 2/6 4/6 .Adam THE PITT PRESS SERIES, ETC. GREEK continued. At* that Plutarch „ ,, ., > > Sophocles Thucydides > > 5> Xenophon > > ,, „ ,, „ ,, ,, > > ,, „ η t i> >J Work Editor Price Holden Demosthenes 4 '/6 Gracchi 6/Nicias »l 5Sulla 6/Timoleon 6/Oedipus Tyrannus J e bn b 4Book i n Spratt 5/Book v i ,, In the Press Book v n Holden 5/Agesilaus Hailstone 2/6 Anabasis Vol. I . Text , Pretor Φ „ Vol. I I . Notes 4/6 » ,, Ι, Π 4/» » „ I, III, IV, V 2/- each 1f „ 11, VI, VII 2/6 each f» ,, I, II, III, IV, V, VI Edwards 1/6 each (With complete Vocabularies) Hellenics I, n 3/6 „ Cyropaedeia I Shuckburgh 2/6 J> π Φ ,, III, IV, V Holden sl· „ VI, VII, VIII „ siMemoiabilia I Edwards 2/6 2/6 II i» J LATIN. Bede Caesar ,, ,, ,, t „ η Cicero J} » < f „ t „ I» Eccl. History i l l , iv D e Bello Gallico Com. i, i n , vi, v i i i „ ii—in, and v n ,, 1-ΙΙΙ ,, iv-v Lumby 7/6 Te.sk ett 1/6 each 2/- each 3/1/6 1/6 each ,, ,, „ Shuckburgh „ 1, II, III, IV, V, VI, VII ; {With complete Vocabularies") D e Bello Civili. Com. ι Peskett „ ,, Com. i n !». Actio Prima in C. Verrem Cowie D e Amicitia Reid De Senectute J» D e Officiis. Bk III Holden P r o Lege Manilia Nicol Div. in Q . Caec. et Actio Heitland & Cowie Prima in C. Verrem E p . ad Atticum. L i b . II Pretor Orations against Catiline Nicol I n Catilinam ι Flather (With Vocabulary) Philippica Secunda Peskett Φ 2/6 1/6 3/6 3/6 Φ Φ 3/- Φ 2/6 ι/6 3/6 THE PITT PRESS SERIES, ETC, LATIN continued. Work Price Editor Author Reid Pro Archia Poeta Cicero Φ 1/6 „ Balbo 11 > > „ Milone 2/6 11 » » ,, Murena Heitland Φ ,, Plancio Holden 4/6 Reid „ Sulla Μ Φ Somnium Scipionis Pear man J» Φ Shuckburgh φ each Cornelius Nepos Four parts Horace Epistles. Bk ι 2/6 11 Odes and Epodes Gow 5/11 Odes. Books I, III if- each ? „ Books ii, i v ; Epodes ,, 1/6 each > > Satires. Book I )i Φ Duff Satiies Juvenal 5/Book ι Η J . Edwards In the Press Livy Conway 2/6 IS „ π „ IV, IX, XXVII Stephenson 2/6 each „ „ VI Marshall 2/6 > > 2/6 Whibley » ν ,, XXI, XXII Dimsdale 2/6 each ,, (adapted from) Story of the Kings of Rome G. M. Edwards ' i/6 Lucau Pharsalia. Bk I Heitland & Haskins il6 De Bello Civili. Bk v n Postgate φ}J Lucretius Book i n Duff 2/ J Ovid >> > > u t., 2/- Fasti. Book v i Metamorphoses, Bk I „ Bk V I I I Selections from the Tristia {With Vocabulary·) fPhaedrus Fables. Bks I and n ( W i t h Vocabulary) Plautus Epidicus Stichus ,, Trinummus ) > Quintus Curtius Alexander in India Sallust Catiline Jugurtha Agricola and Germania Tacitus Hist. Bk I „ ,, Bk π ι J> Hautontimorumenos Terence Vergil Aeneid ι to x n t„ > » >Ϊ a ?> ,, Φ Φ Φ Φ Φ Sidgwick Dowdall Summers Simpson Flather Gray Fennell Gray Heitland & Raven Summers »l Stephenson D a vies Summers Gray Sidgwick I, I I , V, V I , IX, X, X I , XII 3/2/6 3/6 3/6 2/- 2/6 3/" 2/6 2/6 3/- ΐ / 6 ΛΖ<Γν& „ ι/6 ^«/τΛ ( W i t h complete Vocabularies) Bucolics 11 Georgics I, n , and i n , iv ii Complete Works, Vol. I, Text „ „ » Vol. I I , Notes „ 2/- each Ι/6 Φ 4/6 THE PITT PRESS SERIES, ETC. FRENCH. The Vohimes marked Author About *Biart Boileau Corneille * contain Vocabulary. Work Le Roi des Montagnes Quand j'etais petit, Pts I, II L ' A r t Po£tique L a Suite du Menteur Polyeucte ,, De Bonnechose Lazare Hoche Bertrand du Guesclin ,, Part II * Delavigne Louis X I Les Enfants d'Edouard ,, De Lamartine Jeanne d'Arc De Vigny L a Canne de J one *Dumas La Fortune de D'Artagnan *Enault L e Chien du Capitaine E r c k m a n n - C h a t r i a n La Guerre Waterloo a L e Blocus ,, Madame Th£rese > > Histoire d'un Conscrit Gautier Voyage en Italie (Selections^ Guizot Discours sur I'Histoire de la Revolution d'Angleterre Hugo Les Burgraves *Malot Remi et ses Amis Remi en Angleterre * Merimoe Colomba {Abridged) Michelet Louis X I & Charles the Bold Moliere Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme L ' £ c o l e des Femmes ,, Les Precieuses ridicules > > „ ( A bridged Edition) L e Misanthrope " L'Avare *Perrault Fairy Tales Piron L a Metromanie Fonsard Charlotte Corday Racine Les Plaideurs ,, {Abridged Edition) >> Athalie » » Saintine Picciola Sandeau Mdlle de la Seigliere Scribe & Legouvo Bataille de Dames Scribe Le Verre d'Eau Le Philosophe sans le savoir Sodaine Souvestre U n Philosophe sous les Toits Editor Ropes Boielle Nichol Smith Masson Braunholtz Colbeck Leathes it Eve Jf Clapin & Rop Eve Ropes Verrall Clapin Ropes „ > > Payen Payne Eve ,, Verrall 31 Ropes Clapin Saintsbury Braunholtz » > Rippmann Masson Ropes Braunholtz >> Eve Ropes , Bull Colbeck Bull Eve Le Serf & Le Chevrier de Lorraine 4 Ropes THE PITT Author *Souvestre Spencer Stael, Mme de Thierry Villemain Voltaire PRESS FRENCH Work SERIES, ETC. continued. Editor Price Le Serf Ropes x/6 A Primer'of French Verse 3/Le Directoire Masson & Prothero 2/Dix Annees d'Exil (Book 11 chapters 1—8) »* 2/Lettres sur l'histoire de France ( x n i — x x i v ) „ 2/6 Recits des Temps Merovingiens, I — i n Masson & Ropes 3/Lascaris ou les Grecs du x v e Siecle Masson 2/Histoire du Siecle de Louis X I V , in three parts Masson & Prothero 2/6reach Xavier de Maistre GERMAN. The Volumes marked * Andersen Benedix Freytag * contain Vocabulary. Eight Fairy Tales D r Wespe Der Staat Friedrichs des Grossen Die Journalisten Knabenjahre (1749—1761) Hermann und Dorothea Iphigenie Selected Tales Zopf und Schwert Der geheime Agent Das Bild des Kaisers Das Wirthshaus im Spessart Rippmann Breul φ 3/- 2/Wagner Eve 2/6 „ Goethe Wagner & Cartmell 2 / 3/6 »> »» „ Breul 3/6 ,, * Grimm Rippmann 3Gutzkow Wolstenholme 3/6 Hacklander E . L . Milner Barry 3 " Hauff Breul 3/Schlottmann » » & Cartmell 3/Die Karavane Schlottmann 3/» » Der Scheik von Alessandria Rippmann 2/6 * Immermann Der Oberhof Wagner 3/*Klee Die deutschen Heldensagen Wolstenholme 3/2/Kohlrausch Das Jahr 1813 Cartmell Lessing Minna von Barnhelm Wolstenholme 3/Lessing· & Gellert Selected Fables Breul 3/Mendelssohn Selected Letters Sime 3/Raumer Der erste Kreuzzug Wagner Φ Biehl Culturgeschichtliche Novellen Wolstenholme 3/Die Ganerben & Die Ge* rechtigkeit Gottes 3/„ Schiller Wilhelm Tell Breul 2/6 ,, (Abridged Edition) i/6 }) > » 5 THE PITT Author Schiller „ ,, ,, Syoel Unland PRESS SERIES, ETC. G E R M A N contimied. Work Editor Geschichte des dreissigjahrigen Kriegs. Book i i i . ' Breul Maria Stuart „ Wallenstein I. (Lager and Piccolomini) „ Wallenstein I I . (Tod) ,, Prinz Eugen von Savoyen Quiggin Ernst, Herzog von Sch waben Wolstenholme Ballads on German History Wagner German Dactylic Poetry „ Price 3/$[6 3/6 3/6 2/6 3/6 2/3/- SPANISH. Le Sage & Isla Los Ladrones de Asturias Kirkpatrick 3/- Bacon History of the Reign of King Henry V I I Lumby 3/Essays West 3/6 & 5 / N e w Atlantis G. C. M. Smith 1/6 Essays Lumby 4/Robinson Crusoe, Part I Masterman Φ Microcosmography West 3/- & 4 /Poems Tovey 4 / - & 5/Ode on the Spring and T h e Bard ,, 8<ί. Ode on the Spring and T h e Elegy „ 8d. T h e Heroes E . A. Gardner Φ Tales from Shakespeare Flather 1/6 Lord Clive Innes 1/6 1/6 Warren Hastings > > 2/6 William Pitt and Earl of Chatham „ J o h n Bunyan 1/j > J o h n Milton 1/6 Flather Lays and other Poems 1/6 »> A Sketch of Ancient Philosophy from Thales to Cicero 3/6 Handbook of English Metre History of King Richard I I I Lumby 3/6 Utopia 3/6 Arcades and Comus Verity 3/" Ode on the Nativity, L'Alle-j 2/6 gro, 11 Penseroso & Lycidas) » > Comus & Lycidas 2Ia 2/6 Samson Agonistes 9* Sonnets » » Φ Paradise Lost, six parts > > «/'- each Essay on Criticism West */- ENGLISH. ,, ,, Cowley Defoe Earle Gray t„ t„ Kingsley Lamb Macaulay > > t " t„ Mayor More Milton >> t „ > » ?> Pope 6 THE PITT PRESS SERIES, ETC. ENGLISH continued. Auihor Scott Editor #^*& Marmion Masterman Lady of the L a k e n » > Lay of the last Minstrel Flather » » Legend of Montrose Simpson Lord of the Isles Flather tl Old Mortality Nicklin " )i Kenilworth. Flather > » Shakespeare A Midsummer-Night's Dream Verily Twelfth Night ,, Julius Caesar ,, T h e Tempest ,, King Lear ,, Merchant of Venice K i n g Richard 11 j» As You Like I t > » King Henry V a Macbeth 5) Shakespeare & Fletcher T w o Noble Kinsmen Skeat Sidney A n Apologie for Poetrie Shuckburgh Wallace Outlines of the Philosophy of Aristotle West ,, >5 Carlos Mill Bartholomew Robinson Jackson » » Elements of English Grammar English Grammar for Beginners Key to English Grammars Short History of British India Elementary Commercial Geography Atlas of Commercial Geography Church Catechism Explained T h e Prayer Book Explained. Part I ,, Part I I In Price 2/6 2/6 2/- 2/6 2/- 2/6 2/6 1/6 1/6 1/6 1/6 i/6 1/6 1/6 1/6 1/6 1/6 36 3Λ 4/6 2/6 1/- 3/6 net i/- 1/6 3/· 2/- 2/6 preparation MATHEMATICS. Ball fBlythe Euclid ,, η » » j> > » J» Elementary Algebra 4/6 Geometrical Drawing Part I 2/a Part π 2/Books ι—vi, x i , X I I Taylor 5/· Books ι—vi 4/> ) Books ι — i v » > 3/Also separately Books i, & n ; i n , & i v ; v, & v i ; x i , & x n ι /6 > Solutions to Books ντ. χτ 6/>? THE PITT PRESS SERIES, EIC. M A T H E M A T I C S continued. Author Work Editor Hobson& Jessop Elementary Plane Trigonometry Elements of Statics and Dynamics Loney Part i. Elements of Statics „ II. Elements of Dynamics Elements of Hydrostatics Solutions to Examples, Hydrostatics Solutions of Examples, Statics and Dynamics Mechanics and. Hydrostatics tSanderson Geometry for Young Beginners Arithmetic for Schools, with or without answers Smith, C. Part I. Chapters I—VI11. Elementary, with or without answers Part II. Chapters IX—XX, with or without answers Key to Smith's Arithmetic Hale, G. EDUCATIONAL 7/6 He I l/4 3/6 */*/7/6 SCIENCE. fBidder & Baddeley Domestic Economy Λ.-ΒΛ«« « Λ „ Λ+ i T h e Education of trie Young) fBosanquet | from the Λ ^ / * of Plato } fBurnet Aristotle on Education S. S. Laurie Comenius Life and Educational Works Three Lectures on the Practice of Education: Eve I . O n Marking \ Sidgwick I I . O n Stimulus ( Abbott I I I . On the Teaching of Latin Γ Verse Composition J Farrar General Aims of the T e a c h e r ) 1 vol. Foole Form Management ( ΐΗορβ & Browne A Manual of School Hygiene R. H . Quick Locke Thoughts on Education tMacCunn The Making of Character O. Browning Milton Tractate on Education Sidgwick On Stimulus Thxing· Theory and Practice of Teaching +Shuckburgh fWoodward A Short History of the Greeks A Short History of the Expansion of the British Empire (1500—1902) A n Outline History of the British Empire (1500—1902) G L A S G O W : 50, WELLINGTON 3/6 */ι/6 t 4/6 4/i/6 net WAREHOUSE, STREET. φ φ Φ LONDON: C. J. CLAY AND SONS, CAMBRIDGE UNIVERSITY PRESS AVE MARIA LANE. 4/6